O

© 1985, 1986 XyQuest, Inc.

Second Edition (October 1986)
Document Control No. 002396-01
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

XyQuest, Inc.
o
P.O. Box 372
Bedford, MA 01730
^ 647^ 7^-4439 : . .

&og)6?i
Manual written and produced by
Douglas Kramer and
DFM, CAV, JKH, NJT, CTS, SR, KL, SGL, PMT, WL,
WK, RG, HP, GLM, AE, SER, CYC, RWF, DNH, AFP,
RG, SJR, RLN, ABD and DLN.

And many thanks to JR and those XyWriters whose

comments have helped to make a better manual.
r \
 H ow to In sert Tabs in to th e R eference Guide. The Reference Guide
has six sets of changes/enhancem ents and eight thumb-tab dividers.
If you need assistance, use the illustration below to insert these
changes and dividers into the manual in their correct order.

3-77 4-134A 5-101 6-17A 6-68A

to and to to and
3-110 4-134B 5-120 6-17C 6-68B

Index
Appendixes
pages i-iv 1-1 2-1 3-1 4-1 5-1 6-1

/
 © 1987 by XYQUEST, Inc.
Spelling/Thesaurus by Microlytics, Inc.
2nd Edition (Rev), May 1987
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

" \

XYQUEST, INC.
P.O. Box 372
Bedford, MA 01730
(617) 275-4439

y
Welcome to XyWrite III.

XyWrite (pronounced zi’-write) is a word processing

program which integrates text preparation and output
formatting. XyWrite operates on IBM personal
computers and many compatibles. All files created by
XyWrite are pure ASCII.

This manual describes the complete set of XyWrite

commands and procedures. It is intended as a reference
guide for all users, at virtually any level of experience.

This manual was written using XyWrite on an IBM PC/AT

with two floppy drives (no hard disk) and 256K of
memory.

This book is a reference guide and is organized by topics.

As such, the easiest way for a novice to find information
is by using the Index, which is complete and well cross-
referenced. Also refer to the tutorials for step-by-step
instruction. As you become more familiar with the
program, it will become clearer what information is in
each chapter. Chapter 1 contains general helpful
information. Chapters 2, 3, and 4 cover the basic
elements of XyWrite. Chapter 5 has procedures for more
involved and highly useful applications. Chapter 6 is for
more intermediate users — it contains information of
benefit to someone who wants to customize XyWrite.
G etting Started
1-1 Features
1-2 The Manual Set
1-3 About This Manual
1-6 What You Need
1-7 Help

Filing
2-2 Overview
2-5 Setting the Default Drive A:
2-7 Clearing the Display ABORT
2-9 Appending One Document to Another APPEND
2-10 Calling a Document to the Display CALL
2-14 Changing the Current Directory CHDIR
2-16 Displaying the Drive, Path, Window CM
2-17 Copying a File COPY
2-19 Displaying the Directory DIR
2-22 Displaying the Directory with Text DIRL
2-24 Sorting the Directory DSORT
2-26 Running Programs Under XyWrite DO
2-28 Running DOS Under XyWrite DOS
2-32 Running XyWrite EDITOR
2-34 Erasing a File from Disk ERASE
2-36 Erasing a File from Disk, No Verify ERNV
2-37 Returning to XyWrite from DOS EXIT
2-38 Finding a File FIND
2-39 Stopping the Printer KILTYP
2-40 Merging One Document into Another MERGE
2-41 Creating a New Document NEW
2-44 Renaming a File RENAME
2-45 Saving a Document to Disk SAVE
2-45 Saving a Defined Block to Disk SAVEDEF
2-48 Storing a Document to Disk STORE
2-50 Displaying Subdirectories TREE
2-51 Printing a Document TYPE
2-57 Printing to a File TYPEF
2-64 Printing to the Screen TYPES
2-68 Chain Printing TYPE @
2-72 Waiting for Printer WAIT
2-73 Quitting XyWrite QUIT
Editing
3-2 Overview
3-5 Basics of the Screen & Keyboard
3-21 Editing Text
3-33 Math
3-37 Save/Get Keys
3-51 Search and Replace Text
3-67 Windows
3-77 Spelling Checker
3-103 Thesaurus
3-107 Word Count
3-109 Sort a List

Form atting
4-4 Overview
4-11 Alignment
4-23 Character Modes
4-35 Date & Time
4-41 Footnotes
4-63 Headers & Footers
4-73 Numbering
4-93 Page Length
4-115 Page Width
4-131 Printer Controls
4-135 Styles
4-141 Vertical Spacing

Special Features
5-2 Overview
5-5 Columns
5-17 Fill-In Forms
5-25 Mail Merge
5-43 Table of Contents & Index
5-67 User Programming
5-83 Advanced User Programming
5-101 Redlining
5-113 Memory Usage
C ustom izing
6-2 Overview
6-3 Default Settings
6-23 Help Files
6-37 Automatic Hyphenation
6-45 Keyboard File
6-69 Printer File
6-131 Sort File
6-135 Startup File

A ppendixes
A-l ASCII Characters *
B-l Memory
C-l Messages
D-l Programming Examples
E-l Super Keyboard
F-l Memory-Resident Programs
G-l Processing Files for Electronic Mail

Index
Features. XyWrite allows you to:
• Work on many documents at once (up to nine).
• Review the formatted page before you print it out.
• Print in the background while you return to work on
the same or other documents.
• Run any DOS command from XyWrite.
• Store text to a Save/Get key, for ready retrieval and
insertion into your document. (Known as the Glossary
function in other word processors.)
• Create forms by setting up a file so that you can type
into only the blank fields.
• Generate a Table of Contents and an Index with
automatic sorting and page numbering based on
phrases you mark in your document.
• Paginate a document automatically with widow/
orphan control and unbreakable blocks.
• Use Mail Merge to produce form letters.
• Record keystroke sequences and create custom
procedures with user programming features.
• Perform arithmetic.
• Print mathematic symbols and foreign language
characters using character substitution tables.
• Insert footnotes and endnotes in your document.
• Treat multiple files as if they were a single, large
document. The files can be printed together with
continuous page numbering, and an all-encompassing
Table of Contents and Index.
• Reassign keys on the keyboard with different
characters, functions, and combined functions.
• Enter text into multiple columns with word wrapping
within columns.
• Print proportionally spaced text with automatic
hyphenation.
• Read and write ASCII files — Xywrite files are pure
ASCII.
And best of all XyWrite is FAST!!

1-1
The Manual Set. XyWrite provides the following
manuals:

• Installation Guide
• Quick Start Tutorial
• Basic Word Processing Tutorial
• Applications Tutorial
• This Reference Guide

The Installation Guide provides directions for installing

XyWrite on your personal computer.

The Quick Start Tutorial teaches the minimum set of skills

necessary to start using XyWrite within twenty minutes of
installation.

The Basic Word Processing Tutorial describes commonly

used XyWrite commands.

The Applications Tutorial assists you in mastering

particular tasks, such as building a Table of Contents and
Index, writing form letters and programming XyWrite.
About This M anual This manual is written to help users
at virtually every level of experience. You can use this
reference guide even while you’re learning from the
tutorials. Each section is self-contained, so that you can
read sections in any order. For example, you will find
the description on footnotes all in one place, including
both the footnote procedures and commands.

The description of each command follows this structure:

Purpose: Why would I want to use this command?

Action: What steps do I take to use this command?
Notes: What else should I know about this command?
Format: What is the precise syntax of the command?

Format can appear either at the beginning or end of a

section.

Entering Commands. You enter commands on the

Command Line, which is the top line of the display. The
following rules apply:

• Always start at the leftmost position of the Command

Line. Press |?5] to do this.
• Use either upper or lowercase letters (or any mix).
• Insert a single space immediately after the command
name (if it is to be followed with arguments).
• Separate multiple arguments with a comma. (Some
commands, such as TYPE, COPY, RENAME, allow use
of a blank space.)

Once you have typed the command on the Command

Line, you execute it by pressing either g§] or 0 .

For example, any of these will work:

ffltype chapter.doc ,1-3

Eütype chapter.doc 1-3
E3TYPE CHAPTER.DOC, 1-3
Getting Started (con t’d)

Notation. Throughout this manual we have used the

following conventions.

• filename — Anywhere you see the term filename, you

may substitute the more general term filename.ext. For
example, to call up an existing document:
CALL filename
can be replaced by:
CALL filename.ext
• d: — Drive specification A:, B:, C:, D: or any other
drive. The examples in this book generally assume
you are using a system with only two drives. Hence
we often refer to the DOS prompt as "A> "or " B>." If
your system has other drives, you can of course use
C>, D>, or any other drive.

• path — The path is a series of directory names

separated by backslashes. You use paths only if you
use subdirectories. Subdirectories are most commonly
used only on hard disk systems. For more
information on paths, refer to the Overview section at
the start of Chapter 2, Filing.

• italic — The use of italic with commands is reserved

for words (or characters) which are themselves to be
replaced, such as filename. When a statement can be
typed literally, letter for letter, we use the following
font instead:
call chapter.doc
• # — The pound sign means one single character —
any letter (A-Z) or number (0-9).

• n — represents any number. (The number can

contain more than one digit.)

• — Refers to the Command Line, located at the top of

the screen.
• blue text — Indicates which keys you press to
perform an action, in sections titled "Action":

Type: [fgcall c h a p te r .d o c 0

1-4
The symbols in the left column are used throughout this manual to
represent keys on the keyboard. For a description of these keys, refer
to the Keyboard section in Chapter 3, Editing.

A to Z Character Keys on the center portion of the

keyboard
0 to 9 Number Keys in either the top row or on the
numeric keypad
ÎFÏ1 to [FÏÔ1 Function Keys FI through F10 to the left of
the keyboard
Tab Tab Key (Located just above the Control Key)
Control Key
[Shift] Shift Key
Ait Alternate Key
Soace Bar Space Bar Key
Backspace Key (Located above the Enter key)
a Enter Key (also known as the Return key)
Escape Key
Break Break Key (the same as the Scroll Lock key)
CaosLockl Caps Lock Key (toggle key)
Scroll Lock Scroll Lock (toggle key)
iNumLockl Numeric Lock (toggle key)
Cursor Keys
IMel, E® Page Up and Page Down Keys
PrtSc Print Screen Key
M Delete Key
fins] Insert Key
0, EL □, EL 0 Math Symbol Keys
(Homel Home Key
End End Key

1-5
Getting Started (c o n t’d )

W hat Y ou N eed. To use Xywrite, this is w hat you need:

• The XyWrite diskette.

• An IBM Personal C om puter or equivalent.
• 256K bytes or m ore of main memory.
• IBM PC-DOS 2.0 or higher.
• A m onochrom e or graphics adaptor with an 80-
colum n display.
• O ne disk drive.
• A printer.

If your system has m ore than the minimum num ber of

bytes required, Xywrite m akes the m ost of the extra
memory. It uses up to 640K of memory. More m em ory
results in faster perform ance, especially w hen editing
large files.

EDITOR.EXE is the only file that is essential to running

XyWrite. Your Printer File is needed to print any of your
files. If you copy XyWrite to another disk, you must
include these files. The other files are n eeded only if you
w ant them. For exam ple, the Startup File w ould start
XyWrite w ith your ow n com m ands, the Help files w ould
give you access to the Help Screens, the Keyboard File
w ould give you your ow n set of keys, and so on:
E ssen tial F iles
XyWrite Program: EDITOR.EXE
Printer File: filename.PRN
A ccesso ry F iles
.Startup File: STARTUP.INT
Help Files: LONG.HLP, SHORT.HLP
H yphenation Dictionary: DICTION
Keyboard File: filename.KBD
Save/Get File: filename. SGT
Character Subst. File: filename. SUB

XyW rite F iles Are Pure ASCII. XyWritc files contain

nothing b u t the 256 ASCII characters show n in A ppendix
A — XyWrite does not insert control characters into your
docum ent. Therefore, you can transport files to and from
other ASCII systems.
1-6
Help. You have three sources of help available to you:
On-Screen Help, the set of manuals, and XyQuest
telephone assistance. Each is described briefly here.

On-Screen Help. Help is only a keystroke away. There

are help files on-disk you can load to help you at any
time. You can choose either a long version (LONG.HLP)
or a short version (SHORT.HLP). To view a Help file
once loaded:
Press: [A0 HU

Manual Set. Unless you’ve become familiar with how

the chapters are divided, the best place to look for
information is in the index.

Telephone Assistance. If the first two sources cannot

help you, then by all means call or write us at the
following location. You can get information on-screen
with the HELP command:
Type: [FslhelpCT

The address and telephone number are:

XyQuest, Inc.
P.O. Box 372
Bedford, Mass. 01730
(617) 275-4439
It will help us if you do the following:
1. When you call, please be sitting at your computer
with the problem at hand.
2. Have the following information available when you
call us. Type HELP as shown above for this
information:
• XyWrite I, XyWrite II or 11+, or XyWrite III
• Version Number of program
• Serial Number of program

1-7
CONTENTS The content o f this chapter is arranged alphabetically by
command, as follows:

Page C om m and P urpose

2-2 O verview
2-5 As Setting the Default Drive
2-7 ABORT Clearing the Display
2-9 APPEND Appending One File to Another
2-10 CALL Calling a Document to the Display
2-14 CHDIR Changing the Current Directory
2-16 CM Displaying the Drive, Path, Window
2-17 COPY Copying a File
2-19 DIR Displaying the Directory
2-22 DIRL Displaying the Directory with Text
2-24 DSORT Sorting the Directory
2-26 DO Running Programs Under XyWrite
2-28 DOS Running DOS Under XyWrite
2-32 EDITOR Running XyWrite
2-34 ERASE Erasing a File from Disk
2-36 ERNV Erasing a File from Disk, No Verify
2-37 EXIT Returning to XyWrite from DOS
2-38 FIND Finding a File
2-39 KILTYP Stopping the Printer
2-40 MERGE Merging One Document into Another
2-41 NEW Creating a New Document
2-44 RENAME Renaming a File
2-45 SAVE Saving a Document To Disk
2-45 SAVEDEF Saving a Defined Block
2-48 STORE Storing a Document To Disk
2-50 TREE Displaying Subdirectories
2-51 TYPE Printing a Document
2-57 TYPEF Printing to a File
2-64 TYPES Printing to the Screen
2-68 TYPE® Chain Printing
2-72 WAIT Waiting for Printer
2-73 QUIT Quitting XyWrite

2-1
OVERVIEW The chart on the facing page shows how the commands
in this section relate to each other. They are categorized
as follows:
• F ilin g C om m ands — which handle only entire
documents, or files, rather than individual pages,
words, or paragraphs. For example, NEW creates a
new document, and STORE saves the entire document
onto disk.
• System C om m ands — which enable you to enter
XyWrite and run DOS under XyWrite. In addition, the
DO command allows you to run other programs
(besides DOS) under XyWrite.

The Filing commands are further broken down into three

categories:
• D isp lay C om m ands — which load files to the
display, and clear files from the display, without
altering the files on disk. For example, CALL
CHAPTER.DOC loads a copy of the file
CHAPTER.DOC from the disk to the display; the
original file CHAPTER.DOC remains on the disk.
• D isk C om m ands — which save files to the disk, and
erase files from the disk. (The disk is, of course, the
place where files are stored.)
• P rinter C om m ands — which send files to the
printer.

Several other specialized Filing commands appear in later

chapters — commands such as LDPRN, LDSGT, LDKBD,
LDSORT, LDDICT, NEF and NEP.

Im m ediate v s. Em bedded C om m ands. All of the

commands in this chapter are immediate commands.
This means that when you type a command, it executes
immediately on pressing S 3 (Enter). In contrast, the
commands in Chapter 4 are Embedded Commands — on
pressing S 3 they are em bedded in the text as characters,
ready to execute w hen output to the printer. For a
description of Embedded Commands, refer to the
Overview section at the start of Chapter 4, Formatting.

2-2
[© » * « ■

. rs æ r

FILING COMMANDS

Disk Commands D isplay Commands Printer Commands

APPEND COPY RENAME

SAVE STORE TYPEF ERASE ERNV

DIR DIRL DSORT NEW CALL MERGE

FIND TREE TYPES ABORT

2-3
 U se o f Path. The following description of paths is
applicable to you only if you use subdirectories. /"*
(Subdirectories are used mainly on hard disk systems.)
A path is a series of directory nam es separated by
backslashes (\). If a path begins with a backslash,
XyWrite starts its search from the root directory;
otherwise, the search begins at the current directory.
Thus, you can specify a path in either of two ways:
\d i r 1\d i r2\d Ir3 Relative to root directory
or
d i r 1\d i r2\d i r3 Relative to current directory
C alling a F ile U sin g a Path. Any of the XyWrite
commands which use a filename allow you to specify a
path along with the filename. For example, you can CALL
a file as follows:
Gflcall d.pathfilename Format
HElcall a :\m e m o s \v a c a tio n Example
Result: The file VACATION is called from subdirectory
MEMOS. The path and filename both appear in the 03
field at the top of the display, w hether or not you include
them in the CALL command.

S torin g a F ile U sin g a Path. The path appearing in the

ESI field also indicates w here the file will be stored.
Therefore, w hen you store a file, you return it to the
subdirectory from which it was called. Use the
command:
EUstore
Result: The file is stored back in the subdirectory given
by the path shown in the 0 3 field. According to the previous
example, VACATION in subdirectory MEMOS is updated.
To STORE a file in some other directory, you must specify
the path to that directory w hen you issue the STORE
command.
For more information on paths, refer to "Specifying a Path
to a File" in your IBM DOS Manual.

2-4
P urpose Any drive can be designated the default drive — a
diskette drive, hard drive, or a RAM (virtual) drive. Setting
the default drive is done by entering the drive letter on
the command line. For example:
Glib:
When you set the default drive, you are telling XyWrite
which drive to use w hen a filename is given without a
drive letter prefix. For example, if drive B were made the
default drive, then the following statement would call
CHAPTER.DOC from drive B:
EUcall c h a p te r.d o c
There are two options for setting the default drive:
• Setting the Default Drive (Option 1)
EDd:
• Setting the Default and Save-Drives (Option 2)
EHd:,dl:

Option 2 allows you to specify an additional save-drive

(here denoted d l ). If you use Option 2, then every time
you SAVE or STORE a file, a copy is made not only to the
normal default drive, but also to save-drive d l. Thus,
Option 2 allows you to keep up-to-date copies on other
drives. (You can specify several save-drives, if you wish.)

A ction S e ttin g th e D e fa u lt D riv e.

(Option I) To set the default drive to drive A, for example:
Type: [F 5 ]a:S

A ction S e ttin g th e D e fa u lt a n d S a v e-D riv es.

(Option 2) First you specify the normal default drive (drive C in the
following example); you then specify the save-drives
immediately afterwards, separated by commas (in this
case, only one save-drive, drive B). Do not include a
space after the comma.
Type: [? 5 lc :,b :S
 Result: Now every time you SAVE or STORE a document,
XyWrite will save identical copies on drives C and B.
Drive C is the default drive for all other commands (e.g.,
DIR, CALL, TYPE, MERGE). When you specify one or
more save-drives, you cannot SAVE or STORE to just a
single drive.

E xam ple o f Two Save-D rives. In Option 2 (above), to

specify both drives B and A as save-drives in addition to
default drive C:
Type: g |c :.b :.a : CT
T ypical U ses fo r Save-D rives.
• RAM Drive Backup.
If you work on a RAM Drive, you can make sure your
files are also stored on your floppy drive by setting it
to be a save-drive.
• Two-Drive System.
If you want to back up files onto another disk as often
as possible, then you can specify your second drive as
the save-drive. The only drawback is the additional
time it takes to save to the second drive.

D efault D rives at Startup. By adding the default drive

as a line in your STARTUP file, you can have XyWrite
automatically switch default drives at startup.

ffld : (Option 1)
M d :4 1 : (Option 2)
• d: is the drive letter (A:, B:, C:) desired for the normal
default drive. Always include the c o l o n J i l l
• d l: is the save-drive you specify. You may specify
any number of save-drives, separated by commas. Do
not include spaces before or after the commas.
• This is an immediate command (it is not embedded).
B3a:
aac:.b: „ (Opaonii
I"-'"., s ■ ■ • - • '¿ i!-': . V f . i ’J:-. . . ■ .V I. ''.1. . . _ • • '* : ! ! . . > r ' . ’. • . ... ! ’
 jk v n a w m

PURPOSE ABORT clears the document from the display window

and memory. Any changes made to the file since it was
last saved are lost and cannot be recovered. ABORT
never affects any files on disk. The form for ABORT is:
M ABORT
ABORT has two main uses. (The procedure is the same
for both.)
• Clearing the Display.
If you have called up a document merely to view, and
you have no changes to save, use ABORT (rather than
STORE) w hen done — ABORT is quicker.

• Undoing a Big Mistake.

If you have m ade a disastrous mistake in editing a file,
the ABORT command lets you throw away the
working docum ent which contains those errors. (See
the tip on the next page.)

ACTION C lea r in g th e D isp la y

To clear a document from the display:
Type: g ] a b o rts^ ]

Result: The display is cleared. Note that if there is more

than one document open w hen ABORT is executed, the
document which is currently active is the one which is
aborted. (See "Active Window" in the section "Window.")

S3 ABORT '' I.

ABORT is an immediate command (it is not

WXm embedded).

JBREV —i. -IB 3ab

2-7
Tip How to U ndo a Big M istake. (See the illustrations.)
Whenever you CALL a document (1), a copy is sent to the /"
display; the original remains on the disk. As you make
changes to the document, the changes are made only on
the copy in memory, not on the original file on disk (until
you SAVE it). Thus, if you make a gross blunder with a
search-and-replace (2), then you can ABORT the goofed-
up document (3), and still retrieve the original document
(4).

1. 2 . OOPS! MISTAKE
WORKING COPY ORIGINAL
------------------'CALL z'

4.
CALL

z"

2-8
 iiM iiliT rro] ¡7 ? « .¿ I SiB *WLI

PURPOSE The APPEND command adds text to the end of a file on

disk. The text you append can be copied from the file
on screen or from another file on disk.
If you type the APPEND command with only one
filename (Option 1), XyWrite looks for defined text
within the file on your screen. If it finds defined text,
that text is appended to the file you named; otherwise,
XyWrite adds the entire current file to the end of the
named file.

If you list two files after the APPEND comm and (Option
2), XyWrite copies the first onto the end of the second.
The first file remains unchanged.

ACTION A p p e n d in g th e C u rren t F ile to a S to red F ile .

(Option 1) To append the docum ent you have on screen (or defined
text within that document) to another file, say CHAPTER
on drive A, for example:

Type: [re] append a :c h a p te r S

Result: The current file (or defined text) is now copied to
the end of CHAPTER.

ACTION A p p e n d in g a S to re d D o c u m e n t to A n o th e r .
(Option 2) To append TIMECARD to the end of REPORT:
Type: [re] append tim e c a r d ,r e p o r ts
Result: TIMECARD is added to the end of REPORT.
TIMECARD is unchanged.
NOTE R elease D efin ed T ext. When adding the current file to
another, it’s smart to strike the [raj key (Release Define)
before using APPEND; otherwise, you may be adding
some off-screen defined text instead of the entire file as
you intend.

03 APPEND d:filename,d.targetfile
• d: (optional) is lh e drive where the file is stored
• filename (optional) is the file to be added to another
• targetfile is the file to which text is added "%
¡EXAMPLE 03append birep ort,cxustom er.ltr • J

2-9
P urpose The CALL command loads a copy of the named
document from the disk into memory and the display for
viewing and editing. The general form for CALL is:
EUCALL d filenam e
CALL works by copying the file to the display. The
original docum ent remains safely on the disk. Thus, you
may edit or even ABORT the displayed document without
disturbing the original file. (Only when you SAVE the
document back to the disk does the file on the disk
change.) There are two ways to call a file:

• Calling a Document by Typing Its Name.

(Option 1) This is the way you would normally expect
to execute the CALL command.
• Calling a Document by Pointing at Its Name.
(Option 2) This is a clever way to call a document —
by pointing at its filename in the directory.

A ction C a llin g a D o c u m e n t b y T y p in g Its N am e. r

(Option 1) If you already know the name of the file you want
displayed, use this procedure. Refer to the illustration
below:
1. Start with the display cleared of any document. To
clear the display, use STORE, ABORT, or open a new
window (to find out how, see "Windows," Chapter 3).
(You can eliminate this step with a setting that
automatically opens a new window for a CALL or DIR
command. See Note #4 below.)
2. Let’s say the name of the file you want to call is
CHAPTER. DOC on drive B:
Type: [re] call b:chapter.doc@
Result: This example calls the file named
CHAPTER.DOC to the display from disk drive B. (If the _
"b:" were omitted, XyWrite would look on the default
drive for the file.)

2-10
K fsaiitß jx ü M i l ML

N o te # i R ecallin g th e P revious F ile. If you omit the filename,

CALL brings up the most recently opened file.

n o t e #2 Saving th e D ocum ent. CALL loads the docum ent into

memory. The document remains in memory while you
w ork on it. Any changes you make to the document are
not saved on disk until you SAVE or STORE it. Because
memory is lost if the power fails, it is a good idea to save
the document occasionally, say every 15 minutes,
especially after significant changes.

W hen you STORE or SAVE a document (without

specifying a drive, directory or filename), it is always
returned to the directory from which it was called, even if
you changed directories while the docum ent was
displayed.

N o te #3 C alling w ith G lobal F ilenam es. You can substitute the

wild cards * and ? for characters in a filename with CALL,
in the same way you use them with the DIR
command—for example: CALL *.DOC. W hen you use a
global filename with CALL, the first file is displayed on
the screen. After you have finished reviewing or editing
the displayed file, press {ctH] N to display the next file that
matches the global filename you specified in the CALL
command. You will see the message "Save edits (Y/N),
or ignore (I)." Press "Y" to store the current file and
display the next one; press "N" to abort the current file
and display the next one; press "I" to keep the current file
on the screen. Repeat this procedure until you see the
message "File not found."

CALL

^ o
I
Original CHAPTER . DOC
remains on disk

i
[« W in .

ACTION C a llin g a D o cu m en t b y P o in tin g a t Its N am e.

(Option 2) If you don’t quite remember the name of the file you
want displayed, then use this method.
1. Start with the display cleared of any document. If you
need to clear the display, use STORE or ABORT.
(Alternatively, you can use CALL to open the
document in a second window, by following the
procedure given in Note #4.)
2. Call the directory for the drive you want (drive B, for
example):
Type: (f!]dir b : @
3. Using the cursor up and down keys, move the cursor
onto the desired filename.
4. Type: gs] call [^¡1
Result: This executes the CALL command and displays
the document.

COMMAND -COM
EDITOR EXE
IcgAPTERl DOC
CH A PTER2 DOC
LETTER
 O H I «L

NOTE #4 A utom atic N ew W indow . You can set XyWrite to open

a new window automatically (if the current window has a
file in it) whenever you enter DIR or CALL. You do this
by putting an NW (New Window) setting in the Printer
File:
nw=0 CALL and DIR do not open a new window.
nw=1 CALL, DIR or NEW opens a new window (if a
file is already open in the current window).
This setting also resets the window w henever you issue
an Abort command to clear the screen. The default is
nw=0.

NOTE #5 O ther ASCII F iles. You can call files from other word
processors to the display if they are strictly ASCII text.
Wordstar requires a conversion; phone XyQuest for the
conversion procedure.

ALSO See R elated C om m ands. Two other related commands call

special kinds of files: CAP (Call Program File), which
calls a program file, and CAF (Call Form Document),
which calls a form document.

dfilename f c . M
filename (optional) is the name of the file you want to
display. If it is omitted, the previously called file
jje a p p e ^ r-ll^ .
d: (optional) is the drive Tetter (A:, B:, or CO you
specify for the drive you want.' If you omit the drive -
letter, the default drive is used. ; |
CALL is an immediate command (it is not embedded). 1
EDIT is identical to CALL — you may use either term. 1
(EDIT is abbreviated ED). jjf L —

2-13
P ur po se Three commands are covered here: CHDIR, MKDIR,
and RMDIR. These commands are useful to you only if
you use subdirectories. (Subdirectories are used mainly
on hard disk systems.) The general forms are:
• Changing the C urrent Directory
HUCHDIR d .path
• Making a New Directory
M MKDIR d.path
• Removing a Directory
HQRMDIR d .path
Type these commands on the Command Line just as you
would any other XyWrite commands. These three commands
are described farther in your DOS manual. The p a th is
described in the Overview section earlier in this chapter.

ACTION C h a n g in g th e C u rren t D ir e c to r y .
To change the current directory on drive A to MEMOS, for
example:
Type-. |s]chclir a:memosg
Result: The subdirectory MEMOS is now the current di­
rectory on drive A. Each drive has its own current direc­
tory, as illustrated below.

DRIVE A

MEMOS

2-14
 M t m m

Another way to change to a subdirectory is to point at its

name in a tree:
1. Type: [fH tree b : 0
Result: A complete display of all the subdirectories on
Drive B appears. CD (Change Directory) appears on
the Command Line.
2. Move the cursor to the line containing the
subdirectory you want to switch to.
3. Press: [EH
Result: The subdirectory you selected is now the current
directory on Drive B.

M ak in g a N ew D ir e c to r y .
To make a new directory called, say, MEMOS:
Type: [EHmkdir m e m o s 0
Result: The new directory is created off the current
directory of the default drive.

R em o v in g a D ir e c to r y .
To remove a directory called MEMOS, first delete all of
the files from that directory. Then, if necessary, use
CHDIR to select a directory other than MEMOS as the
current directory. Finally:
Type: [?5]rm dir m e m o s 0
aBiivUiiit&ii

2-15
(M S S :

PURPOSE cm (Command) lets you display the default drive, current

path, current window number and defined-text indicator at
the top of the screen by replacing the CM, PRMPT and
NM fields as follows:
• The default d rive (C.) in place of EH
• The cu rren t path (\ REPORTS) in place of PRMPT
• The cu rren t w in d ow num ber and d efin ed -text
in d icator in place of Cd
The defined-text indicator is a mark that lets you know if
a block of text is defined.

ACTION D isp la y in g D e fa u lt D riv e, W in d o w N u m b er a n d P atl

To display the current drive, window number and
path in the header:
Type: [H em d , w , p 0
To return all three fields to normal, type: [F5] cm @
NOTE #1 Setting O ne or Two F ield s. Alternatively, you can /■
display any one (or two) of these settings by setting i
only the fields you want, for example, type:
(Hem d ,p 0
NOTE #2 D efined-T ext Indicator. If you use the W option,
you will be able to track the status of defining te x t:
1. Normally the window number is displayed as
a number and a blank space: H
2. When you start defining a block of text
using [fT] , a hyphen appears: Q
3. When you complete the definition by
pressing [FT] again or w hen you press one of the
define-unit keys (e.g. [F4] ), an equal sign appears: Q
4. And w hen you release the defined block by
pressing [F3] , the blank space appears again: Qj

djW.p
g d G anges the CM to the default drive letter. r
~- • W changes the NM to the current window number.
• p changes the PRMPT to the current path.
~ • „CM with no letters resets to the normal header.
#"r:CM is an immediate command • _
G0 cm d,w,p

2-16
 tfl G k : iS B B W m

P urpose The COPY command is similar to the COPY command

in DOS. You can copy a file and give the copy a new
name (Option 1), or you can copy a file to a different
drive or directory but keep the same name (Option 2).
Unlike DOS, COPY does not recognize wild cards (?
or *). You must copy files one at a time. But XyWrite
lets you easily select and copy files from a directory
(Option 3).
Below we explain these three ways to copy files:
• C opying a F ile to a D ifferen t Nam e. (Option 1)
• C opying a F ile to a D ifferen t L ocation (Option 2)
• C opying F iles from a D irectory. (Option 3)

A ction C o p y in g a F ile to a D iffe r e n t N am e.

(Option 1) Let’s say we want to copy the file MEMO to REPORT:
Type: [F5]copy m em o,report £ 3
Result: Two identical files now exist with different
names (in the same directory). Note the comma is
optional—you can use a space instead.

A ction C o p y in g a F ile to a D iffe r e n t L o ca tio n .

(Option 2) To copy the file REPORT from the current drive to a
different directory on Drive B:
Type: [F5]copy report,b:\business £ 3
Result: A copy of REPORT is now on Drive B in directory
BUSINESS (with the same name).
By leaving off the second drive and filename, you can
copy a file from another location to your current
directory. For example, to copy REPORT from Drive B:
Type: [?5]copy b :rep o rt£3
Result: REPORT is copied into your current directory.
(Since a target file isn’t named, XyWrite uses the original
name.)
N o te #1 C opying th e C urrent F ile. To COPY a file that is
currently displayed, you must first save it to disk. COPY
looks for and copies only files saved on disk (rather than
the version on your screen). (Use the SAVE and STORE
commands to copy the screen version of a file.)

2-17
u n o a w [GSiViPI]

A ctio n C o p y in g F ile s fr o m a D ir e c to r y .
/"■
(Option 3) This procedure makes it easy to copy many files from
one disk or directory to another. To copy files from drive
A to drive B:
1. Type: [F5lb:CT (destination drive)
2. Type: [F5]dir a: 0 (source drive)
Type: [FSlcOPV (without pressing @ )
Type: [00] (puts cursor in the directory)
Now move the cursor dow n the list and stop on the
first filename you wish to copy.
Press: [re] (to execute the COPY command)
Result: The file is copied to Drive B. Note the cursor has
moved to the next name. Repeat Step 5 until you have
copied all the files you want from Drive A to B. If your
disk fills up, you get the message ERROR WRITING TO
DISK and the cursor does not move to the next name.

NOTE #2 D u p licate F ilenam e. If the filename you specify for the

copy already exists, Xywrite displays the message "File
Already Exists, Overwrite It?" Press "Y" if you want the
copy you are making to supersede the docum ent that
already exists with that filename. Press "N" to abort the
COPY command so you can reissue it with a new
filename.
If you have been running utilities under DOS that allow
you to access files from other directories without
specifying the path, you may erroneously receive the "File
Already Exists, Overwrite It?" message. If the filename in
question does not appear in the current directory, ignore
the message and proceed with COPY by pressing Y.
%sm
¿F o r m a t EHCOPY d:filename,d:targetfile
d: (optional) is the drive letter IpisL"
f filename is the name of the file to be cop« /"■
• targetfile (optional) is the nam e of the new file. If
i omitted, the file is copied under the original name.
• COPY is ^ im m e d ia te command
copy b:chapter.doc,e
n \ ; : „¿a***** -r •

2-18
I CTShöT^'P- 10 1 * .

P urpose DIR (Directory) displays the names of files on the drive

you specify. (If you use subdirectories, DIR lists only the
files in the subdirectory and drive you specify. TREE
shows you all subdirectories on a disk.)
You’ve got two options: you can display all the files, or
just the files you want. The second option is very handy
if your directory has more than a screenful of files.
• Displaying a Complete Directory. (Option 1)
EDDER d:
• Displaying a Partial Directory. (Option 2)
E3DIR d.globalname

A ction D isp la y in g a C o m p lete D ir e c to r y .

(Option 1) To display the names of all files in the current directory
on the default drive:
1. Start with the display cleared of any document. (Either
press m H to open a second window or STORE the
current file).
2. Type: (H] dir S3
Result: The list of filenames resembles that in the
illustration on the following page.
You can eliminate Step 1 with a setting that automatically
opens a new window for DIR or CALL. See the note
"Automatic New W indow " earlier under the CALL
command.
To display the names of files on another drive, say drive
B (when the default is drive A), you would type the
following:
Type: [H] dir b : @

A ction D isp la y in g a P a rtia l D ir e c to r y .

(Option 2) To display a partial list of files in the directory, use DIR
with a global filename. (Global filenames are
described in detail right after the Notes section.) For
example, to list all files which begin with the letter f, you
would:
Type: [F5]dir f*.« fr]
Result: All files on the default drive beginning with the
letter f are listed. The global filename here is f*.* .

2-19
I f f lA iG & ïX 'X m

n o t e #1 K eep in g th e D irectory Up-To-Date. Whenever you

execute DIR, you get a list current to that moment. That
list is not automatically updated w hen you delete files, for
instance, from the command line. You must execute the
DIR command again to update the list.

N o te #2 Saving th e D irectory. You can save the directory to a

file on disk. After you type DIR to display the directory,
then type SAVE or STORE. The directory is saved to a
file named DIRECTRY.TMP (unless you specify a different
name). (Notice there is no "O" in the filename - this
keeps it to eight letters.)

n o t e #3 P rin tin g th e D irectory. You can easily print out the

directory. Type DIR to display the directory, then enter
TYPE.

NOTE #4 Sortin g th e D irectory. The directory defaults to listing

files alphabetically by filename. Use the DSORT
command to sort by extension, date, or to sort in reverse
order.

NOTE #5 V iew ing Subdirectories. If you use subdirectories, refer

to the TREE command, later in this chapter, to see how to
display all the subdirectories on a drive. DIR shows only
the current directory.

Filename..
Number of characters in file,
including spaces, tabs and
em bedded commands.
Date and time file was last saved
or stored to disk.
Total number of files and
characters (bytes).
 D55ÜK.CH IO i l « .

DETAIL G lobal F ilenam es.

\ A global filename includes either (or both) of the
characters ? (question mark) and * (asterisk). You use a
global filename w hen you want to list a partial directory.
The A sterisk (*)•
• When used with DIR, an asterisk (*) means that any
characters) can occupy the remaining positions in the
filename or extension.
• If the asterisk appears alone in the filename or
extension, read the asterisk as the phrase "all files".
• If any characters precede the asterisk, read it as the
phrase "all files that begin with . . . " those characters.
• The asterisk represents any number of characters,
from one to eight.
The Q uestion Mark (?).
While an asterisk represents any number of characters,
the question mark (?) represents only one. Use it in a
filename or extension when executing the DIR command
\ to indicate any character can occupy that position.
Question marks can appear in any combination in a
global filename. For example: G3chap7.doc would find
CHAP1.DOC and CHAP2.DOC but not CHAP10.DOC
because 10 is two characters, not one.
You can mix the question mark and asterisk in a single
filename. For example: dir ch?book.*

¡FORMAT' ¡ ¡ ¡ a B r a R * (Option 1)
(Option 2)
nal) is the global filename which
generates the partial list you want.
• d: (optional) is the drive letter (A:, B:, or C:), to specify
the disk drive you want listed. If you omit the drive
letter, the default drive is used.
• DIR is an immediate command.

2-21
IUEDaUL 1 C lS i m il ¡1 GT<■

P urpose The DIRL (Long Directory) command lists the names of

files in a directory along with the first few lines of text in
each file. DIRL enables you to browse through your files.
Also covered here is the DI setting, which lets you modify
how the long directory is displayed.

ACTION D isp la y in g a D ir e c to r y A lo n g w ith L in es o f T ex t.

To display a directory along with the first lines of text
from each file (for filenames ending in .DOC for
example):

Type: [EDdirl *.doc£j]

Result: A list appears, showing all filenames in the
current directory ending in .DOC, and including lines of
text under each filename. It might look like this:

CHAPTER DOC 122 1-22-86 2:31 p

in the beginning there were a few furry little creatures. They were
a gregarious type of animal that loved human company.

STAFF DOC 3291 1-22-86 2:29p

Memo: Vacation Time
To: Employees
From: Tom
Date: Jan. ’87

2 Files 3413 Char. 3805184 Free

NOTE #1 The exact num ber of text lines displayed will vary
somewhat from file to file, due to program rules that
attempt to cut off displayed text at a sensible point (such
as a period).
n

2-22
 1011! IE.

ACTION M o d ify in g th e L on g D ir e c to r y .
A XyWrite lets you control three facets of the DIRL display:
1) show the file size in kilobytes (rather than bytes), 2)
change num ber of text lines displayed, and 3) pack the
lines of text (by removing carriage returns). The purpose
of packed text is to let you view more of the file in a few
lines (especially if the file starts out with blank lines).
To change these settings, put the DI setting in the Printer
File. Its format is:
d\=k,l,p
k is a number the file size is to be divided by (typically
set k to equal 1024). The default for k is 1.
/ is the approximate num ber of lines of text displayed.
The default for I is 3.
p packs the text. Set p to 1 to remove carriage returns;
0 to keep carriage returns. The default is 0.
To display the file size in kilobytes (KB) and to display
about 4 lines of packed text, add this setting to your
Printer File:
di=1024,4,1
(See "Printer File" in Chapter 6 for information on how to
change Printer File settings.)
In the previous example, 3291 is divided by 1024 and
rounded up to 4 kilobytes. The entry would look like
this — the text appears disordered since it is packed:

STAFF DOC 4 1-22-86 2:29p Memo:

Vacation Time To: Employees From:
Tom Date: Jan. '87 We are proposing that each employee be
eligible for 18 paid days each calendar year. In addition to the
major national holidays, each

Form at tmPIRL d:o;lobalname -; '

5 globalname (optional) is the global filename (used
with DIR)
*_.• d: (optional) is the drive l e t t e r . ~ -
• ¿DIRL k a n immediate command. .7— -

2-23
im s m r n f .'5 T i? n T ^ !T 5 H T ii« ir i7 * a r

PURPOSE DSORT (Directory Sort) sets the order that filenames are
displayed in directories. Once you set DSORT, it affects
the listing of all directories (on all drives) and stays in
effect until you change it.

You can sort by filename, extension, size or date. You

can sort in forward or reverse order. You can add a one-
line header to the directory, which shows the name of the
directory.

ACTION S o rtin g th e D ir e c to r ie s
To set the order in which filenames are sorted:

Enter DSORT along with one or two of the sort

parameters F, D, E, S. (When you include two
parameters, the first takes precedence over the
second). To reverse the order, add an R. To add a
header, add an H. Separate all parameters with
commas. For example:

Type: [re]dsort f , e , r , h 0

Result: This DSORT setting means that whenever you

type DIR, the filenames are listed by filename (F) in
reverse order (R), from Z to A. Two files having the same
filename are in turn sorted by extension (E). A header
(H) is included at the top of the list.

EXAMPLES E xam ples o f Sorting D irectories. These examples

illustrate the different ways you can sort directories.

[re] dsort f @ Sorts by filename, from A-Z.

[re] dsort f ,r @ Sorts by filename, from Z-A.
[re] dsort e @ Sorts by extension, A-Z.
[re] dsort f,h £ 3 Sorts by filename, A-Z, with a
header.
[re] dsort f,e (r @ Sorts by filename in reverse
order (Z-A) and then by
extension, also in reverse
order.

2-24
■3C33rt®J3 U R D O Xf

UDdsort f , e , r , h 0 Same as the previous

example, but with a header
added.

[HI dsort e , f 0 Sorts by extension, then

filename.

NOTE #1 Setting The Sort O rder. By adding the DSORT

command as a line in your STARTUP file, you can
automatically set up the order when you load XyWrite.
See the Startup File in Chapter 6.

NOTE #2 XyW rite D efa u lt If you give no DSORT command in the

STARTUP.INT file, the default is DSORT F (alphabetically
by filename with no header).

NOTE #3 C learing th e Sort Key. If you give the DSORT command

alone, as follows, then the directory is displayed as it
would be in DOS. (This is the order that files are
recorded on sectors on the disk.)

Type: [F5] dso rt 5 3

NOTE #4 H ow DSORT W orks. DSORT sorts the filenames as they

are read off the disk — it does not rearrange the
filenames as recorded on the disk.

¡FORMAT $¡3DSORT order jnodifier Directory Sort

• order is any one or two (separated by commas) of:
f sort by filename
^
O c n r' t th /i ; 'pP v tf ia> nn c -
ii A n

2-25
i n t » im u it iv iifrn f r # . ^ '/ î ï ï a t

P urpose DO lets you run a program under XyWrite

— programs such as Lotus 1-2-3, DBase III,
WordProof, BASICA, and others (memory permitting).
When you quit the program, control returns to XyWrite,
exactly as you left it. The DO command works only with
programs w hose filenames have the .COM or .EXE
extensions. The simplified form of this command is:
EDDO d:pro gram filename

A ction R u n n in g P ro g ra m s U n d er X yW rite.
This example would first load BASIC, then would
automatically run the BASIC program called TRAINER.
Type: [£5]do basic trainer 0
Result: W hen you are done with BASIC (that is, when
you type the word SYSTEM), control returns to XyWrite,
exactly as you left it.

Note #i DOS R equirem ents. The DO command requires DOS

2.0 or higher. This command also has a memory
requirement: there must be enough memory to load the
desired application in addition to XyWrite and any open
XyWrite files.

NOTE #2 Path is A llow ed. If you use subdirectories, you can

include a path in the DO command:
EDDO d.pathSprogram filename
This means that you can access programs in other
directories without switching directories. A special case
of this is Note #3.

n o t e #3 R unning DOS C om m ands. You can run DOS internal

commands, external commands and batch files with the
DO command. This command is equivalent to the
XyWrite DOS command (described next) with one
exception — if you use subdirectories, you’ll find DO
more powerful than the DOS command because DO
allows you to specify a path. Its form is:
E0DO d.paiMCOMMAND /C command
r c rrm Y ii» i n »

The term COMMAND refers to COMMAND.COM. The

term command refers to any DOS com and you want to
use. In fact, at this point you can enter any command
(along with its arguments) that is allowed at the DOS
prompt. For example, if you are currently working on
drive B, you can use COMMAND.COM in the root
directory o f drive A (A.A) as follows. Here are two
typical uses.

© d o a:\com m and /c chkdsk a:

© d o a:\com m and

The last exam ple switches to DOS; to return, type EXIT at

the DOS prom pt (A>).

If you have a floppy drive system with extra memory, it’s

a good idea to create a RAM (virtual) drive and copy
COMMAND.COM into it. If the RAM drive is drive D, you
w ould then specify do d:\COmm and. This gives you
immediate access to DOS. However, in order for DOS to
recognize this COMMAND.COM, you must include in
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file the com m and (for this
example):
set co m spec=d:\command.com

Vvst;
.-.r-l’ ’
*"4.,_ -’
j1
JORMAT " © D O d:path\program filename

n :» program is the program you w ant to run. The

program must have a .EXE or .COM extension. Omit
the extension w hen entering the name.
• filename (optional) is the file you w ant to run once the
2 program is u p and running.
m e * It î ï ï . i i i f r ^ f e T i / ( T î r ? Â ^ ^

P urpose The DOS (Disk Operating System) command suspends

XyWrite, then loads and runs DOS. With Option 1, the
familiar DOS prompt (A> or B>) appears, allowing you to
run any DOS commands or programs you wish. When
done, you type EXIT to return to XyWrite, exactly as you
left it. XyWrite is frozen in place while in DOS.

You have two options. Option 1 is as described above.

Option 2 runs just a single DOS command or batch file,
and immediately returns control to XyWrite w hen done.
(In Option 2, DOS /C stands for "DOS Command".) Use
Option 2 w hen you want to run a DOS command from a
program file (User Programming).

• Running DOS Under XyWrite. (Option 1)

andos
• Running a DOS Command or Batch File. (Option 2)
S3 DOS /C command

A ction R u n n in g DO S U n d er X yW rite.
(Option 1) To suspend XyWrite and run DOS:

1. Select the drive that contains COMMAND.COM to be

the default drive (if not already set). For example, if
COMMAND.COM is on drive A:

Type: [F5]a: @

2. Type: [F 5 ]d o S 0

Result: The display clears and the DOS prompt (A> or

B>) appears. (If you use subdirectories,
COMMAND.COM must be in the current directory for
this to work.)

2-28
«EMtPJE m e *

3. Now that you have entered DOS, you are fully in DOS
and can use any of its commands (except MODE,
PRINT, and GRAPHICS — you should not run any
program that remains resident after execution). For
instance, you can copy disks, check disks (CHKDSK) or
change the system date (DATE). In addition, with DOS
2.0 or higher, you can run most any program, such as
Lotus 1-2-3, DBase III, or BASIC.
4. To return to XyWrite, at the A> prompt:
Type: e x i t ®

NOTE #1 XyW rite Is Susp en d ed . To demonstrate how XyWrite

truly is suspended while control is with DOS: If you are
in the middle of printing a docum ent w hen you enter
DOS, the printing stops; then, w hen you return to
XyWrite, printing continues exactly w here it left off.

ACTION R u n n in g a DO S C o m m a n d o r B a tch F ile .

(Option 2) To run only a single DOS command or batch file (for
example, DATE)
1. Make sure the default drive has COMMAND.COM on it
(here again w e’ll assume it’s on drive A):
Type: [F5l a : S 3
2. Type: HI]dos /c d ate 8-13-87 S 3

XYWRITE DOS running

(SUSPENDED)
under XYW RITE

2-29
I l l & v

Result: The display switches to DOS, the command

(DATE) is executed, and then control is immediately /”
returned to XyWrite. All DOS commands can be run
using this method (except those that remain resident,
such as MODE, PRINT, and GRAPHICS).

NOTE #2 DOS R equirem ent. COMMAND.COM must be present

in the current directory of the default drive in order to
use the DOS command.

NOTE #3 Stop pin g in DOS. To stop in DOS in order to review

the results of a command, create a batch file and include
PAUSE in it. For instance:
chkdsk %1
pause

NOTE #4 Subdirectories. If you use subdirectories, refer to the

note "Running DOS Commands" under the DO command.
It allows you to specify a path with DOS commands.

N o t e #5 DOS v s. DO. The following shows the XyWrite DOS

command and the corresponding DO command. You
can see how the DO command allows you to specify a
drive and path, while the DOS command does not.

• Running DOS Under XyWrite.

BflDOS
HJlDO d:path\COMMAND

• Running a DOS Command or Batch File.

HJl DOS /C command
H3DO d.ptff/ACOMMAND /C command

2-30
iG s J .ttP » I I I « »

ALSO See R elated C om m ands. The following DOS commands are

found elsewhere in this section, and can be executed
from the command line on their own: A:, APPEND,
COPY, DEL, DIR, ERASE, CHDIR, MKDIR, RENAME and
RMDIR.

The QUIT command also switches control to DOS, but

quits XyWrite altogether. Unlike the DOS command, any
changes to a document which have not been saved are
lost.

yajrw'j
, \ r:::

(Option 1)
r r>. VftViT
-r:-i
command (Option 2)

• command (optional) is any DOS command or batch

2-31
w m m m l a n M B y s ia B n s fc

P urpose e d i t o r loads and runs XyWrite from DOS. You use

EDITOR w hen you first start up XyWrite, as the
illustration shows.

If you want, you can type in a filename after the word

EDITOR — that file will be loaded into the display once
XyWrite is running. The two choices are:

• Running XyWrite. (Option 1)

a >e d it o r

• Running XyWrite and Calling a File (Option 2)

A>EDITOR d:filename

ACTION R u n n in g X yW rite
(Option 1) Start in DOS at the A> prompt. To run XyWrite:

Type: editor 0

Result: XyWrite is loaded and displayed, the file

STARTUP.INT is run, and finally the serial num ber screen
appears. Press any key to clear the message from the
display.

2-32
 ia o n c e «

ACTION R u n n in g X yW rite a n d C a llin g a F ile

(Option 2) Start in DOS at the A> prompt. To run XyWrite and call a
file, type EDITOR followed by the filename:

Type: editor chapter.doc 0

Result: XyWrite is displayed, and the file CHAPTER.DOC

is loaded into the display (from the default drive).

T ip R enam ing E ditor. You can use the RENAME command

to change the EDITOR.EXE file to some other name, such
as XY.EXE. Then, to start XyWrite, at the A> prompt,
type XY.

ALSO SHE R elated C om m ands. The QUIT command switches

control back to DOS w hen you are finished using
XyWrite.

The STARTUP.INT file automatically initiates XyWrite

w hen EDITOR is used. You can edit this file to create
your ow n default configuration.

:~?T-——z 3l' • . " J - . •i.unf,,'

mm
iij * \ - r p..-- :aJissa^nsasa* m (Option 1)
lijgjaa .. : ••. '.SIS.™ •¡'¡,’ f - —
• ?u" psiS-iaips :;^5;
•

A U D IT O R dW em nm ^ |Option 2)
11 n ' t

^ ' ---
unlike most
warn

fjHTT ^

• filename is the name of the file you want called to the

im

display pnce XyWrite is running. .

mmin

■t-m • d: (optional) is the drive letter (A:, B:, o f G ) where

* r " -a » » n r. _ . ---------- ..« w t» —

filename is located. If you omit the drive letter,

the default drive is used.
EDITOR is an immediafe" command, _ ■■■WE
n mum

S S jfe:

!E xamples ¿ i^ ld ito r (Option 1).

• •• .,a

A>e
A>editor b:chapter.doc (Option 2)1
Ui ri:-;i::i:::ir.::i t<t*.tu!!

2-33
 ISEErifu ^ jl tf)I M ii IC S !fe

PURPOSE ERASE deletes the named file from the specified drive. It
does not affect the display or memory. (The terms erase
and delete are used interchangeably.) The general form is:
S3ERASE d:filename
You have a choice of two different ways to delete a file
(the result is the same either way):
• Erasing a File by Typing Its Name (Option 1)
• Erasing a File by Pointing at Its Name (Option 2)

ACTION E ra sin g a F ile b y T y p in g Its N am e.

(Option 1) To erase a file:
Type: [fU erase chapter.doc S3
Result: This command erases the File CHAPTER.DOC
from the default drive (no drive letter is given).

ACTION E ra sin g a F ile b y P o in tin g a t Its N am e.

(Option 2) There are three steps: (1) Call the directory for the drive /"
you want (drive B, for example), (2) point the cursor to
its filename and (3) erase it.
1. Type: HI]dir b:S3
2. Type: erase (without pressing S 3 )
3. Type:

2-34
 Now move the cursor down the list and stop on the
filename you wish to delete.
Press:
Result: The file is erased from the disk. You can continue
dow n the list and delete other files.
D o n o t h o ld d ow n th e F9 key! The autorepeat would
issue several delete commands before you could see their
effect on the screen. In such a case, to stop more files
from being deleted, press [ari] IBreak .

NOTE #1 Erase Prom pt. You can reduce the risk of inadvertently
erasing files with ERASE (or DEL) by instructing XyWrite
to prom pt you with "Do you wish to erase? (Y/N)".
Pressing "Y" will then erase the file. To enable this
prom pt to display, add the following setting to the Printer
File:
ep=1
To disable this prompt, change the setting to ep=0. See
Chapter 6 for information on how to change Printer File
settings.
If you set up XyWrite with ep=1 , you can bypass the
prom pt by using ERNV (Erase, No Verify) instead of
ERASE or DEL.

N o t e #2 R ecovery o f a F ile. Once a file is deleted, it cannot be

recovered easily. The best bet is to make backup copies
often. (See Option 2 of "Setting the Default Drive.") To
recover a file, you must use a utility program designed
specifically to un-erase DOS files.
-•SiîmdKr

>RMAf ©ERASE d.filename

filename is the name of the file you w ant to erase.
d: (optional) is the drive letter (A^ B;, or C.) you
specify for the drive you want. If you omit the drive
letter, the default drive is used.
ERASE is an immediate command.
DEL is identical to ERASE — use either term.

© e ra s e b:chapter.doc
© d e l b:chapter.doc;

2-35
IH lK k W

PlJRPOSE We have described how you can set up XyWrite to

reduce the risk of inadvertently erasing files — so that
whenever you use ERASE (or DEL) to erase a file, you
will get the message "Do you wish to erase?" (see Note
#1 under ERASE). If this message gets in your way, use
ERNV instead of ERASE.
The ERNV (Erase, No Verify) command allows you to
delete files from your disk without getting any prompt.
You might want to use ERNV to delete a long list of
temporary files, for example. There are two ways to use
ENRV:
• Erasing a File By Typing Its Name (Option 1)
• Erasing a File By Pointing at Its Name (Option 2)

A ction E ra sin g a F ile b y T y p in g Its N am e.

(Option 1) To erase a file without receiving the verifying prompt, type
ERNV just as you would ERASE. For example:
Type: [F5]ernv b:chapter.tmpS3 ^
No verifying prompt is displayed, even if the Erase Prompt
is set in the Printer File (EP=1).

A ction E ra sin g a F ile b y P o in tin g a t Its N am e.

(Option 2) To erase a list of files, you need to erase them one at a
time. For example, to delete files with extension .TMP
from drive A:
1. List a group of files to delete: [F5]dir a:».tmpCT
2. Type: [F5]ernv (without pressing CT)
3. Move the cursor to the filename and press: [F9]
Result: The file is erased from the disk. Repeat Step 3 until
you have deleted each of the temporary files.

_ « =37' 'W- 4 /"

Si SJERNV dfilenanié
filename is lie name of the file u want to erase,
d: (optiona ■ v
u specify for the drive.
ä *

rnv chapter.tmp

2-36
 rts m i.T f T i£ 5 * x ^ r ? S i7 r j..i > !•> * -

PURPOSE EXIT returns you to XyWrite from DOS as shown in the

illustration below. You type EXIT at the DOS prompt
(EXIT is not a command you can type at the XyWrite
command line). EXIT works only if DOS is running
under XyWrite — that is, if DOS was entered using the
DOS command (described earlier in this section). The
form is:

a >extt

ACTION R etu r n in g to X yW rite fr o m D O S.

Start in DOS at the A> prompt. To return to XyWrite:
Type: e x i t ®
Result: XyWrite is displayed and control is resumed
where you left off; see the illustration.

NOTE EXIT v s . EDITOR. Notice that you use EXIT rather than
EDITOR to re-enter XyWrite. EDITOR would
unnecessarily load and run a second copy of XyWrite.

ALSO See The DOS C om m and. EXIT is used in conjunction with

the XyWrite DOS command.

I FORMAT A>Exrr
* ...
>£(V5ri
. '.v- ....... is JHj
entered at the DOS prompt,
. . . . . . . unlike .most
.
I'-”: '* kcr - commands in this manual. : ~—
• • EXIT is an immediate command.

w * 1' m m tm m i

1--------- l\i
A>
I EDITOR > L .dqs3 exit

z QUIT
z l
EXIT
DOS XYWRITE DOS running
under XYWRITE
- : I

2-37
: 9 ic i m

P urpose The FIND command searches through all files on a disk

for a file you specify. FIND is especially useful if you use /
subdirectories (such as on a hard disk) — FIND searches
through all subdirectories and lists all occurrences of that
filename.
This command fills several n^eds. The most obvious is to
locate a file anywhere on your disk. Since FIND displays
all files with the same name, it will reveal if you’ve saved
the same file in more than one subdirectory.
FIND also uses wild card symbols to find sets of files.
For example, FIND *.* displays a list of every file on a
disk.

A ction F in d in g a F ile.
To find a file on a given disk, say CHAPTER1 on drive C,
start at an empty window, then:
Type: [£5]find c:chapter1 0
Result: All files named CHAPTER1 will be listed: /
\N0VEL\CHAPTER1 14840 9-29-86 1:49a
\TEXTBOOK\CHAPTER1 23216 7-17-86 11:22p

Note that FIND does not sort the files. The CALL
command appears on the command line — to call up a
file, simply move the cursor to that filename and press [F9l

A ction F in d in g G rou p s o f F ile s U sin g G lo b a l F ilen a m es.

To find files with similar names, use the same wild card
symbols you use with the DIR command: question mark
(?) and asterisk (*). For example:
Type: [F5]find a :c h a p te r * .* 0
Result: All files on drive A starting with CHAPTER will be
displayed.

03 FIND d filename rv
• d: (optional) is the drive letter
• filename is the file or group o f files you want to list,
gnd can include wildcards ? and V
fflfin d L>:chapter.doc .7

2-38
SÎWïJtmTqiljTÏ WITTS’« 1 ICII H i l

P urpose KILTYP (Kill Type) stops the outputting of a document to

a printer (TYPE). It also stops the printing of a document
to a file (TYPEF).

A ction S to p p in g th e P r in to u t o f th e C u rren t D o c u m e n t.
(Option 1) To kill the printing of a file:
Type: [F U k ilty p S
Results: This causes XyWrite to immediately stop sending
text to the printer. However, the printer will continue
printing until its text buffer (or the print spooler) is
empty. (Some printers have no buffer and will stop
immediately.) If you wish, you can stop the printer by
turning it off and back on; however, if you use
continuous feed paper, you must then adjust the paper so
its top edge is in line with the print head.

A ction C lea r in g th e P r in te r Q u eu e.
(Option 2) If you have m ore than one file queued to the printer (by
issuing more than one TYPE command), to kill the
printing of the current file and to clear the printer queue
of all other files waiting to be printed:
Type: [?5]kiltyp q @

Tip K ill and Re-Start. If you have a printer problem and

must use KILTYP to stop a file, you can re-issue the TYPE
command starting from the page at which the printing
stopped. For example, to start CHAPTER.DOC at page 5,
type:
[F5] ty p e c h a p te r .d o c ,5 - 0

fORÏttT 03KILTYP i ' (Option J)

■m EJk il t y p Q (Option 2)
-• Yr . .• =•--«.««pi............................. ....
Q (optional) kills dll files waiting in the printer queue.
KT is the abbreviation for KILTYP.
KILTYP is an immediate command.
*•'*•' JZ
I (Option I)
BHkiltyp q (Option 2)
«*= :
saw q

2-39
PURPOSE MERGE copies the entire text of the file you specify into
the document you are working on. The text is inserted at
the cursor location. Its general form is:

033MERGE d:filename

The obvious application for MERGE is to copy one entire

document into the one you’re working on. However, this
command is also great for inserting so-called boilerplate
text into a file — that is, text which is used repeatedly
over and over. Keep each boilerplate section in a
separate file. (In this respect, MERGE is like a Save/Get,
except here you have the advantage of being able to go
direcdy into the file to edit the text.)

ACTION M ergin g O n e D o c u m e n t in to A n o th er.

To copy a file named BOILER. PLT from drive B into the
docum ent you are working on:

1. Move the cursor to the position where you want the

text to be inserted.

2. Type: [U m e rg e b : b* o i l e r .p l t 0

Result: This command copies the contents of

BOILER. PLT from drive B into the document currently
open. The text is inserted at the cursor location in the
text field. The cursor finishes up at the end of the
inserted text.
«.m i » .

'0R3^fC'iS ? j- SZJmFRGF d:filename

• filename is the file to be copied into your document
4 : (optional) is the drive letter (A:, B:, or C:) you
speciiFy for the drive you want. If you omit the drive
. - letter, the default drive is used.
MERGE is an immediate command (it is not
r ' “ . "embedded),
Tm " : r -• ... •
- 7- ~
p BDmerge b :c h a p te r.d o c .

B bbrev ? S am e b x b a p te r.d o c ^ .

2-40
 C S ï i f j j IM i l ■ ic i æ m

P urpose NEW creates a new docum ent with the name you specify.
(This new docum ent is created in memory — see Note
#1.) As an option, w hen you create a new document,
you can choose to copy an existing file into it at the same
time. The formats for these two choices are:

Creating a New Document

03 NEW newfile (Option 1)

Creating a New Document and Copying Into It

B3NEW new file,existingfile (Option 2)

A ction C rea tin g a N ew D o c u m e n t.

(Option 1) To create a new (empty) document:

1. Start with the display cleared of any document. To

clear the display, use STORE or ABORT to make room
for the new document. (Alternatively, you can use
NEW to open the document in a second window by
following the procedure given below in Note #2.)

2. Decide on a name for your new document. For

example, CHAPTER.DOC. (For rules on allowable
filenames, see "Naming a File" which follows.)

3. Type: Us] new ch a p te r.d o c S3

Result: This example allows you to begin typing a new

(empty) docum ent called CHAPTER.DOC into memory.
XyWrite will not create the docum ent if one with the
same name already exists on the disk. (The new File is
not actually created on disk until you SAVE or STORE it.)

2-41
C iX V M

A c t io n C re a tin g a N ew D o c u m e n t
(Option 2) a n d C o p y in g In to It
To create a new docum ent and copy an existing file into
it:
1. Start w ith the display cleared of any docum ent. If
you need to clear the display, use STORE or ABORT.
(Alternatively, you can use NEW to open the
docum ent in a second window, by following the
procedure referred to in Note # 2.)
2. Decide on a name for your new document. For
example, CHAPTER.DOC. Also decide which existing
file you would like to copy into the new one, say
LESSON.ONE.

3. Type: [rejnew c h a p te r.d o c ,le s s o n .o n e 0

Result: This example creates a new document named

CHAPTER.DOC, and copies the existing file named
LESSON.ONE into it. (Notice there is no space after the
comma.)

83 NEW" d:newfile : (0>ffo/? i )

833 NEW d:newfile,d:existingjile TZ 2 {Dption 2)
• newfile is the nanie of the new docum ent being
•• a ;: - ' ' l 7 .L;

existingfile (optional) is the name of the

existingfile to be copied (m erged) into the new
d o c u m e n t. :
r^tjd : (optional) is the drive letter (A:, B:, or C:) you
¡g g sp ecify for the drive you want. If you om it the drive
H | letter, the default drive is used,
• NEW isjffi im mediate command (it is not
- e m b e d d e d ).,
03 new b: chapter, doc ■

8 3ne b:chapter.doc • . . . • • - . . : . ¿ ai- ^

2-42
EŒ ïiiffj; ic iÄ V j r

N ote #i Saving th e N ew D ocum ent. NEW creates the new

document in memory, not on the disk. The document is
not saved on disk until you SAVE or STORE it.
(Therefore, if you ABORT a new document without first
storing or saving it, the docum ent is lost.)

N o te #2 C reating a Second D ocum ent. You can also use NEW

to display a second docum ent alongside the first. The
procedure is only slightly different — see "Windows" in
Chapter 3.

n o t e #3 N am ing a File. The rules for naming a file in XyWrite

are the same as they are in DOS. The general format is:
filename.ext
• filename is from one to eight characters in length
• .ext (optional) is an extension, which can be one to
three characters in length. There are no reserved
extensions in XyWrite.
• Valid characters include:
Letters A-Z, numbers 0-9
! @ # $ % A & ( ) _ - { } ‘ ’

• Invalid characters are:

and ASCII characters less than 32.

Any place in this manual where a filename appears, you
can preface the name with a drive letter (A:, B:, or C.).
(If the drive letter is left off, the default drive is used.)
For example, drive B is specified:

Format d:filename, ext

Example b x h a p te r.d o c

R eserved N am es. Certain names are reserved for special

uses and cannot be used as filenames: STARTUP.INT,
AUX, CON, COM1, COM2, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3 and PRN.

2-43
m a c e i s is E

PURPOSE The RENAME command lets you change the name of a

stored file. It is identical to the RENAME command in
DOS.

ACTION R en a m in g a D o c u m e n t.
To change the name of a file on disk, use RENAME. For
example, RENAME from MEMO to REPORT (on drive A):
Type: [ ^ r e n a m e a :m e m o ,a :re p o rt[* jl
Result: The file is changed from MEMO to REPORT.
(You will no longer find the name MEMO in the
directory.)

If you do not specify a drive, XyWrite assumes the file

you are renaming is located in the current drive and
directory. The drive and directory must be identical for
both old and new filenames; RENAME cannot be used to
transfer a docum ent to a different directory or drive.

NOTE O p tional Com m a. You can enter RENAME without the

comma, like you do in DOS:
re n a m e a :m e m o a : r e p o r t 0

‘ ' —< ^

i; FORMAT [¡¡¡RENAME d:oldnarne4:newname !.•; *«•..-.¿ rf..... ^..... _ W :•V

*- • ^StesgasfSS-!? ... -An:
• d: (optional) is the drive where the docum ent is stored
• oidname is the filename to be changed ~
'newname is The new filename ¿.-JT ~ äi§söi
■k b H R w R I ■ lii

- ® fe n s a m p le .d o c ,c h a p te r.d o c ■ ■ „ ™ ’” " —-w—- - - n:*-

•MiÄ .B .iw rs . ■••• ■ ..- . . . -• -i. -: — <■ a r -- ' —
■■■,r .a* —
-
■

2-44
 K fc V J *

P urpose The SAVE command saves the displayed document to a

file on disk. Unlike STORE, it does not clear the file
from the display. There are two ways to save a
document, the first being the one you typically use:
• Saving a Document Under Its Own Name (Option 1)
S3 SAVE

• Saving a Document Under a Different Name

03 SAVE d filename (Option 2)
You can save part of your docum ent with SAVEDEF (Save
Defined Block). You define a block of text, and then use
SAVEDEF instead of SAVE:
Saving a Block of Text
S3 SAVEDEF d:filename (Option 3)

A ction S a v in g a D o c u m e n t U n d er Its O w n N a m e.
(Option 1) To save the displayed docum ent under its own name to
where it came from:
Type: |F5lsave H
Result: The docqm ent is saved to w here it came from.
Because you have not specified a drive, directory or
filename, the docum ent is saved to the name at the top
center of the display.

N o te #1 Saving to A nother D rive. If you want to save the

displayed docum ent to another drive but keep the
same name, you can save with just the drive letter:
Type: [F5]save b : @

'Sis::. ..............

2-45
K f iV i S E

A ction S a v in g a D o c u m e n t U n d er a D iffe r e n t N a m e.
(Option 2) W hen you want to save a document under another name,
include that filename in the command. For example:

Type: [F5]save b :exercise.doc 0

This example saves the displayed docum ent to drive B

under the name EXERCISE.DOC. If this is a new
filename, XyWrite goes ahead and creates a new file with
that name. However, if this filename already exists,
XyWrite will ask if you want to write over the existing
file.

A ction S a v in g a B lo ck o f T ex t.
(Option 3) You can save a block of text you have defined:

1. Define the block of text you want saved on the disk.

2. Decide on a name for the file, say, ITEM.
3. Type: [Fgsavedef b :ite m .d o c @

Result: The block of text is now copied to disk in the file

ITEM.DOC. The original block remains highlighted in the
document. This new file can be called to the display
w henever you desire for editing.

Tip #1 Save F requently. As a precaution, it's a good idea to

SAVE your document frequently, say every ten minutes.
Then if a pow er failure were to occur, you would lose
only the changes you made since you last saved.

Tip #2 Q uick Save. To simplify frequent saves, type the word

SAVE on the command line (as shown above), and leave
it there while you write or edit. Then, whenever you
want to save the document, simply press [F9] to execute the
SAVE. Another fast way to save is to assign the SAVE
command to a Save/Get key. See Saving a File, under
"User Programming."

2-46
NOTE #2 W indow s. If there is more than one document open
w hen SAVE is executed, the document where the cursor
is located is the one which is saved. (See the section on
Windows.)

NOTE #3 DOS D evices. You can SAVE directly to DOS Devices —

for example SAVE LPT1. The text is sent directly, without
the benefit of the Printer File or Character Substitution
File. For more information, see TYPEF.

NOTE #4 SAVE %. You can save the contents of a Save/Get key to

a file on disk with SAVE %. For example, SAVE %A
saves the contents of Save/Get A to a file it names
A.SAV.

fiQSAVE E (Option 1)
ffiJSAVE d.filename (Option 2)
SJISAVEDEF (¡filename . ~ - (Option3)

• l filename is the name under which you want to save

the displayed document. (IT the filename is omitted,
the document is saved under its own name.)
• d: (optional) is the drive letter (A:, B:, or C:) you
specify for the drive you want. If you omit the drive
letter, the default drive is used.
• SAVE is an immediate command (it is not em bedded)

BJsave b rchapter.doc (Option 2)

HUsavedef
■■
b:item .doc
, ■_ -
(Option 3)
*5»
-'e^aiXy—.
ffilsa bxhapter.doc (Option 2)
fflsad b:item .doc ii. (Option 3)

2-47
-ä o c ü iu a Cîîmiîi iwii 151 Ä

P urpose STORE saves the displayed document to a disk drive and

clears the display. You are then free to call another
document to the display, or quit XyWrite. You have two
ways to store a file, the first being the more frequently
used:
• Storing a Document Under Its Own Name
3JJSTORE d: (Option 1)
• Storing a Document Under a Different Name
QQSTORE d:filename (Option 2)

A ction S to rin g a D o cu m e n t U n d er Its O w n N am e.

(Option 1) To store the displayed document to where it came from:

Type: m store S3
Result: The file is stored to the filename shown at the top
center of the display.

To store a file to a different directory, for example TEST:

Type: in s to re \ t e s t 0

(Note: If there were no directory named TEST,the file

would be stored to the filename TEST)

To store it to another drive, such as drive B:

Type: IF5] store b : 0

A ction S to rin g a D o c u m e n t U n d er a D iffe r e n t N am e.

(Option 2) To store the displayed document under another name,
include that filename with the command. For example:
Type: [F5] store b :\b o o k \c h a p te r0
Result: This example stores the displayed document to a
file named CHAPTER in the \BOOK directory on drive B.
If this is a new filename, this command creates a new file
with that name. If this filename already exists, XyWrite
will ask if you want to write over the contents of that file.

2-48
 s r a n i m

TIP W indows* If there is more than one document open

when STORE is executed, the document where the cursor
is located is the one which is stored. (See the section on
Windows.)

ALSO SEE Storing to Two o r M ore D rives at O nce. You can tell
XyWrite to store to two different drives each time you
execute STORE (or SAVE). This is great for keeping
backup files. Refer to the procedure "Setting the Default
Drive and Save-Drives" in section "A:" earlier in this
chapter.

.:ss?55vt t ?::"VL_j ‘ r e s : P- ' - n~t t - ' t.y r r—--

<°p,ion
E3STORE d filename (Option
§ 6 ? # filename is the name of the file where you want to
¡E y y store the displayed document. If you omit the
filename, the document is stored under its own narm
d: (optional) is the drive letter (A:, B:, or C:) you
^ specify for the drive you want. If you omit the drive
- - letter, the default drive is used.
• STORE is an immediate command.

'
© s to r e— -b:chapter.doc
•
|i
© s t b:chapter.doc

2-49
m ra a 9 E i

PURPOSE The TREE command displays all the subdirectories on a

given drive, shown as a tree. Filenames are not shown.
CD (Change Directory) appears on the command line
whenever a TREE is called up. So after you position the
cursor at the desired subdirectory, pressing [F9| switches to
that subdirectory without leaving the tree. You can also
execute the DIR and RMDIR commands this way.

ACTION D isp la y in g a T ree o f S u b d ir e c to r ie s o n a D isk .

To display the tree of subdirectories for drive C:
1. Type: [fs] tree c: Sj]
All subdirectories are displayed. The First line (which
has no name) is used to switch to the root directory.
Those located immediately off the root directory are
displayed along the left margin. (See illustration below.)
2. The CD (Change Directory) command appears on the
Command Line w henever a tree is generated. To
change subdirectories, move the cursor anywhere on
the line containing the subdirectory name. (For
names which are spaced away from the left margin,
you needn’t move the cursor onto the name—just
onto the same line.)
3- Press: [g]
Result: The subdirectory you selected is now the current
directory.

1-CLIENTS
-BUSINESS-
LETTERS
INVOICES
-PERSONAL-
■FRIENDS
^RELATIVE

03 TREE d:
• d: (optional) is the drive you want listed
• TREE is an •
03tree c: vA'jrv**'•. sr-.v
^-1- '

2-50
I ’J j r iT in T if j C J S u i a w i i * ‘i r d U s E

PURPOSE TYPE sends text to your printer for printout. The text
can originate from a document stored on disk (Option 1)
or from the displayed document (Options 2 and 3).

Option 1: To print a stored document, include its file­

name. Option 2: In its simplest form, TYPE by itself
prints the document currently displayed. In either case
you can print any range of pages you wish, print odd and
even pages to produce two-sided copies, and also request
the printer to pause after each page, for sheet feeding.
The general, simplified forms are:
• Printing a Stored Document (Option 1)
03 TYPE d:filename
• Printing the Displayed Document (Option 2)
03 TYPE
Option 3: If you define a block of text on the screen
before you enter the TYPE command, then only that
block is printed. This is a special case of Option 2:
• Printing a Defined Block of Text (Option 3)
03 TYPE

You can print several files by executing the TYPE

command once for each file. The files will automatically
be queued by XyWrite to print.

2-51
T ifty c E

A ction P r in tin g a S to red D o c u m e n t.

(Option 1) To print a file directly from a disk: /"
1. Make sure the printer is turned on and the On-Line
(Ready) light is on.
2. Type: H] type chapter.doc,3-12/23-26,P £ 3
Results: This prints pages 3 thru 12 and 23 thru 26 from
file CHAPTER.DOC, pausing after each page (press 0 to
resume). Once printing begins, you are free to continue
editing while printing continues in the background. You
are free to change default drives or change the current
directory. (However, do not remove the floppy disk
while the document is printing — printing will stop.)

EXAMPLES E xam ples o f P rin tin g a Stored D ocum ent. The

document being printed is named CHAPTER.DOC.

S3 type chapter.doc Prints all pages, without

pausing.
S3type chapter.doc,3 Prints page 3 only.
S3type chapter.doc,3- Prints from page 3 to the
end of file.
S3type chapter.doc,-12 Prints from the start of file
to page 12.
S3type chapter.doc,3-12 Prints pages 3 thru 12
without pausing.
BBtype chapter.doc,3-12/18/23-26
Prints pages 3 thru 12, 18,
and 23 thru 26.
B3type chapter.doc,3-12,p Prints pages 3 thru 12,
pausing after each page.
S3type chapter, doc,, p Prints all pages, pausing
after each page. Notice
the two commas when no
pages are specified.
S3type chapter.doc, 3-12,ep Prints only even pages 3-
12. (See Note #14)

2-52
m b m m ' u a u m .

ACTION P r in tin g th e D isp la y e d D o c u m e n t.

(Option 2) To print the version of the file currently being displayed:
Type: ,13ty p e ,3-12,p 0
Results: This prints pages 3 through 12 of the document
currently being displayed, pausing after each page. Once
printing begins, you are free to continue editing while
printing continues in the background.
W hen you issue TYPE, XyWrite first copies the displayed
docum ent to a file called PRINT.TMP. The printer prints
from this file, freeing you to return to the original file (or
any other file) to continue editing and saving the
document. (The previous contents of PRINT.TMP is
overwritten each time you print from the display.)

EXAMPLES E xam ples o f P rin tin g th e D isp layed D ocum ent.

These examples are similar to those on the previous page
except the filename CHAPTER.DOC is omitted. The
commas must be included as shown.

GSltype Prints all pages from the

display (without pausing).
EUtype ,-12 Prints from the start of file to
page 12.
GUtype ,3-12,p Prints pages 3 thru 12 of the
displayed file, pausing after
each page.
GUtype ,3-12/18/23-26 Prints pages 3 thru 12, 18, and
23 thru 26.
GUtype ■>P Prints all pages, pausing after
each page.
EJItype ,3 -1 2 ,e Prints only even pages from 3
to 12. (See Note #14)

NOTE #1 Load P rinter F ile. W hen printing, you should have the
correct Printer File loaded. Look in your STARTUP.INT
file where you should be able to find the name of your
Printer File. See "Startup File" in Chapter 6 for more
information.

2-53
 V i u »

A ction P r in tin g a D e fin e d B lo ck o f T ex t.

(Option 3) To print a block of text currently being displayed:
1. Use [FD (or any other define key) to define the block
of text you want to print. Include any embedded
commands (such as TS, IP, LM, RM, PG) you want to
affect the printout.
2. Type: [F g ty p e S
Results: This prints the defined block of text. However,
beware that all em bedded commands outside the defined
block are ignored. Therefore you might not get the
format you expected (Option 2 does not ignore
em bedded commands, and so is often preferable to
Option 3.)
N o te #2 Set Page N um ber. When you use the SP (Set Page No.)
command to change page numbers, those new numbers
are used by TYPE and displayed in the Page-Line
indicator (P-L). If you prefer to have TYPE refer to the
sequential page num ber (e.g., the tenth page out of the
printer, regardless of printed page number) then use the
DEFAULT command to change the SQ setting to 1 (the
default is 0). You can also enter SQ=1 in the Printer File
(see Printer File in Chapter 6).
N o te #3 K ill Printer. To stop the current file being printed, type
KILTYP (or KT) on the command line, for Kill Type. The
printer will not stop printing until the text stored in its
internal buffer empties. Use KT Q to kill all documents
in the queue (see the next note).
N o te #4 P rinting M ultiple C opies. To print several copies of the
same file, execute the TYPE command once for each
copy. (Once you have TYPE on the Command Line,
press [Ml once for each copy you want.) To print several
different files, again execute the TYPE command with the
filename once for each printout. The files are
automatically queued to the printer by XyWrite.
N o te #5 C hain P rinting. To print several related files, use the I
TYPE @ command. You can specify the files be treated
either separately or "as one" for page numbering, Table of
Contents, and Index. See the TYPE @ command later in
this chapter.

2-54
NOTE #6 W indow s. In Options 2 and 3, if several documents are
displayed, the current docum ent is printed — that is, the
file in which the cursor is located.

NOTE #7 P rint Screen. You can print all 25 lines of the screen
(command line and all) by typing [F5j func pr £ 3 . (This is is
equivalent to the DOS print screen feature.)

N o t e #8 Form atting. W hen you issue the TYPE command,

XyWrite automatically formats the file before printing it.
Format means to carry out the em bedded commands
(represented by triangles in the text)—that is, inserting
any running header, running footer, footnotes, margin
offset, page numbers, and w idow /orphan page break
decisions. TYPE also prepares the file for the printer, by
inserting printer codes defined in the Printer File for bold,
underline, reverse, superscript, subscript, and whatever
else is specified (microjustification).

note #9 P rinter F on ts. You can print with different styles (pica,
elite, proportional) by inserting PT1, PT2 or PT3
em bedded command in your document. See "Printer
Types" in Chapter 4.

N o te #io C haracter Sub stitu tion . You can remap the set of char­
acters sent to the printer, if you wish. Refer to the Sub­
stitution tables in the "Printer File" section of Chapter 6.

n o t e #11 R elated C om m ands. TYPE has a family of commands.

Each is fully described elsewhere in this manual.
TYPE formats a file and outputs it to a printer.
TYPES formats a file and outputs it to the display.
TYPEF formats a file and outputs it to a disk file.
TYPE @ is for chain printing.
TYPE + is used for Mail Merge.
TYPE % is used for printing Save/Gets.
N o t e #12 Pause and Prom pt W hile P rin tin g. You can insert the
PR (Prompt) and PA (Pause) commands anywhere in the
text. These enable you to stop printing at that point and
display a message such as "Change to Bold Printwheel."
Refer to "Printer Pause" in Chapter 4.

2-55
NOTE #13 D ouble-Spacing. It’s very easy to print your document
double or triple-spaced. Use the LS (Line Spacing) /
command described in the formatting section.

NOTE #14 D ouble-Sided P rinting. If you want to print on both

sides of the page, use the "o" and "e" options:
1. First print the odd-side of the pages:
[g]ty rep ort, , 0 0
2. Remove the pages and re-orient them as required for
printing on the other side.
3. Print the even pages: (R]ty re p o r t,,e @

NOTE #15 O ptional C om m as. You can enter TYPE without the
commas. Just insert a blank space for each comma
shown in the examples.

ALSO See R elated C om m ands: KILTYP, WAIT, TYPEF, TYPES,

TYPE /*

BSITYPE ¿filename,a-b/n W r .f ' . (Option 1)

mv%rm3 ■. • - - r ^ . ■- -- ■■■;■
E3TYPE ,a-b,m . :V: • ^ (Options2 & 3)
• filename is the name of the filelo be printed. If
g :, omitted, the displayed file or defined block is printed,
•'W 4 : (optional) is the drive (A:, B:, or C:) you specify for
the drive you want. If you omit the drive letter, ¿ e
^ 7 ; defaultjdrive is used.
• a-b (optional) is the range of pages to be printed. If
omitted, all pages are printed. You can specify up to
^ ^ fly flfiin g e s 'w ith a-blc-dle-fJg-h/i-j.
in is a modifer: - -
(print odd pages only)
(print even pages only)
is ? P (stop printing after each page)
"1m- P can be used with O or E in any order
J r TYPE is an immediate com m and.;
fflty p e chapter.doc,3-12,ep (Option 1)
•V ' :!"••••- ,\'rf— _. '.C-' .. -

E t y chapter.doc,3-12,ep~

2-56
 r i r t a i ) *

PURPOSE TYPEF (Type to File) prints a document to a file. We use

the term "print to a file" because XyWrite processes the
document exactly as it would for the printer, but sends it
to a file instead. We call this file the target file.

The target file is printer-ready, complete with printer

codes. It also fully incorporates any running headers,
footers, footnotes, page breaks, page numbers, and other
em bedded format commands called out in the text.

You will find TYPEF useful for diagnosing and for

making other internal checks. Specific uses include:

• Diagnosing the Printer File. Printing a file with TYPEF

allows you to see exactly which printer codes XyWrite
inserts into the file.

Checking the Character Substitution File. You can

view the text in the target file to see if XyWrite is
substituting characters as you expect.

Viewing On-Screen Justification. If you are doing

whole-space justification, the target file you produce
with TYPEF will show justification on-screen.

• Producing a File with CR/LF at End of Every Line.

(TYPES also does this.)

• Stripping a File of All Embedded Commands. This

allows you to eliminate all format commands unique
to XyWrite — for example «MDBO» and «MDUL».
You might find this helpful when sending a file to
someone using a different word processor. You
would load the printer file STRIP.PRN before using
TYPEF. (See the chapter on Customizing.)

• For sending files to other devices, such as a port

(COM1 or COM2) or line printer (LPT1 or LPT2).
Simply use the device name as the targetfile.

2-57
'n f t U g t F
im ro T jn m fa »

Just as the TYPE command has three options, so does

TYPEF: ,

Option 1 is the most general way to print to disk. You

can specify any filename on disk and print to a target file.
You can either specify the target file by name, or omit the
name, and Xywrite will name it FO.TMP.

• Printing a Stored Document to Disk (Option 1)

EJTYPEF d ¡filename 4 : targetfile

Option 2 allows you to print the displayed file to disk.

The general form is the same as Option 1, except
you omit the first filename. (You can omit the target file
name as well — XyWrite will name it FO.TMP.) Note the
presence of a comma.

• Printing the Displayed Document to Disk (Option 2)

ESITYPEF 4-targetfile
/
If you define a block of text on the screen before you
enter the TYPEF command, then only that block is
printed to disk. This is a special case of Option 2:

• Printing a Block of Text to Disk (Option 3)

GUTYPEF 4 : targe(file

With any of these three options you can print just a single
page or specific ranges of pages, if you wish. (For
simplicity, page numbers are left off of the three options
shown above.)

2-58
A ction P r in tin g a S to red D o cu m e n t to D isk .
(Option 1) To print a file to disk:
1. Have in mind the name of the file you want to print to
disk. W e’ll use CHAPTER.DOC.
2. Decide on a name for the target file. We’ll use
RESULT.DOC. (If you omit this name, XyWrite will
use FO.TMP.)
3. Type: H] typef ch ap te r.d o c ,re su lt.d o c,2-50
Results: This prints pages 2 through 5 of the file
CHAPTER.DOC to a file named RESULT.DOC.

A ction P r in tin g th e D isp la y e d D o c u m e n t to D isk .

(Option 2) The following is the simplest use of the TYPEF command.
1. Display the document that you want printed to disk.
2. Type: [re] typef 0
Result: The document is printed to the target file named
FO.TMP.

EXAMPLES You also have the option in step 2 of naming the target
file and printing only certain pages.

EHtypef .result.doc Prints the displayed

document to RESULT.DOC
m ty p e f .result.doc.2-5 Prints only pages 2 thru 5
of the displayed document
to the file RESULT.DOC
S3 typef ,,2-5 Prints only pages 2 thru 3
of the displayed document
to the file FO.TMP.

NOTE #1 R ange o f P ages. The same rules that apply to the TYPE
command apply to TYPEF for printing a specified range
of pages. See the examples under the TYPE command.

2-59
■ n r a a a *
a g y iap i

NOTE #2 W hat S p ecifically D oes TYPEF Do? The following

changes are made to a file when it is processed by
TYPEF.

1. All em bedded triangles are removed and replaced

with hard text and spaces, exactly as with TYPES.
These changes are listed under the TYPES command.

2. TYPEF also processes the File through the Printer File.

As a result, the target file has printer codes em bedded
in it, as exemplified by the following statements.

• All character modes are converted to printer codes.

For instance, in the Diablo Printer File «MDSU» is
removed and replaced with the escape sequence
► D.
• Justification codes are inserted into the target file.
(If using whole-space justification, you can view
the text justified on-screen by calling the target file
to the display.)
• Line Ending (LE), Paragraph Ending (PE), File
Begin (FB), File End (FE) and Page End (PG)
printer codes are inserted into the target file.
• Any DEFAULT settings specified in the Printer File
take effect (unless they are explicitly overwritten
by settings in the text). Common examples are
Form Depth (FD), Top Margin (TP) and Right
Margin (RM).

3. TYPEF processes the file through the Character

Substitution File. This enables you to modify the way
characters are printed. You could for example cause
the number zero to be printed as the combination 0,
backspace (D), /, making the result 0.

You can create other Printer Files to suit your particular

needs: (1) For preserving the character modes, or (2) For
converting the codes to typesetting commands for the
front end of a typesetter.

2-60
-m n * n 'i f s u a a F
¡ify a ja iir? »

NOTE #3 P rin tin g a Target F ile. Once you use TYPEF to create a
target file on disk, you can print it using TYPE — it will
come out the same with any Printer File. The conversion
to printer codes has already taken place with the original
TYPEF.

NOTE #4 DOS D evice N am es. You can ''print'* directly to or from

DOS devices by using the device name in place of the
filename — for example, TYPEF Chapter, LPT 1. Valid
devices are: CON (Console keyboard or screen), COM1,
COM2, LPT1 and LPT2. Text is sent directly from the file
or display without conversion.

— jj iiwi'fLiiiir iii ' 7

7ORMAT S3TYPEF dfilename,d.targetfiIe,a-b (Option 1)
■ ;; -
!•*"1;.f,‘ Jiisr* . '• a1=C. • a - : • •- -¿T
S3 TYPEF ,d:targetfile,a-b (Options 2 & 3)
IS ia .J-PfctrPR-S;« . • • ; r -i:-rl.r .,..:,.
• filename (optional) is the name of the file to b e ^ ;T
— ; 7.. •>. - —f....Vl

— processed. ; ~
¿1 • targefile (optional) is the file to which the output is to
be sent. If this filename is omitted, the document is
printed to FO.TMP.
• d: (optional) is the drive (A:, B:, or C:) you specify for
3 ; ^-11 • the drive you want. If you omit the drive letter, the
■ " r / -default drive is used.
:::rid %,. a-b (optional) is the range of pages to be printed to
1 ,...
. •- file. If omitted, all pages are printed. You can specify
up to five ranges: a-btc-dlefg-hli-j.
• TYPE is an immediate command (it is not embedded).
This command was formerly called FORMAT,
~ -¿ fe i abbreviated FO. ’ .
r-
EXAMPLE SDtypef chapter.doc,target.doc,3-12 (Option i)
-=•7 -,,
IAbtkrev BEJtyf chapter.doc,target.doc,3-12

2-61
"ü H \J iA m -m * m

C om parison o f TYPES, TYPEF and TYPE. The

differences between TYPES (Print to Screen), TYPEF
(Print to File), and TYPE (Print to Printer) are clarified in
the following illustration.

C h a p te r 1 — — Page 2
, T h is f i l e c o n t a in s a fe w
Sg_—
e x a m p le s o f e m b e d d e d
com m ands. - — -■
* . . _ T h is i s a n e x a m p le o f —
bo ld t e x t .
* T h is p a g e a ls o
d e m o n s tr a te s a r u n n in g
h e a d e r a t th e to p

er ! .. Page 2

T h is f i l e c o n t a in s a fe w ~
e x a m p le s o f e m b e d d e d ~
com m and s .
* T h i s i s a n e x a m p le o f
► Q b o ld b ’R N S lO t e x t .
T h is p a g e a ls o
d e m o n s tr a te s a r u n n in g
h e a d e r a t th e to p .

C h a p te r 1 Page 2 IS
|o
T h is f i l e c o n t a in s a fe w
e x a m p le s o f e m b e d d e d I2o
com m ands. |o
1°
Is
* T h is is
bold t e x t .
a n e x a m p le of
Is
* T h is p a g e a ls o Is
!§

d e m o n s tr a te s a r u n n in g IS
h e a d e r a t th e to p . IS
2-62
 rn H a a *

CHAPTER.DOC — O riginal File

• It contains 3 em bedded commands displaying as
triangles. In Expanded Display, the triangles expand
to:
«RM70»
«RHAChapter 1 Page «PN»»
«IPO,4»
• Character modes are highlighted:
BOLD

TYPES CHAPTER.DOC — P review F ile

• No em bedded triangles — they are incorporated as
hard text. For example, the RH command is removed
and Running Headers are inserted on every page.
• Character modes are still present. In Expanded
Display they would appear as:
«MDBO»
«MDNM»

TYPEF CHAPTER.DOC — P rinter-C oded F ile

• This document is formatted very much like the one
directly above. In addition to the triangles being
incorporated as hard text, the character modes are
converted to the codes required by your printer:

►Qbold ►R ►E10
• In addition, the character substitution tables in the
Printer File take effect, substituting any specified
characters.

TYPE CHAPTER.DOC — P rintout

• A file equivalent to that shown above under TYPEF is
sent to the printer. The printer separates the text from
the printer codes — it prints the text and carries out
the printer codes as instructions.
PURPOSE TYPES (Type to Screen) displays a file on the screen as it
w ould be printed. It shows you all running headers, /-
footers, footnotes, page breaks and page numbers. This
is a great way to preview a file to make sure it’s correctly
formatted before printing it. It’s much faster than
printing, and you can preview just a specific range of
pages.

TYPES is often referred to as REVIEW (its former name).

The file it produces is called REVIEW.TMP.

Option 1 allows you to preview a file stored on a disk

drive. Option 2 lets you preview the file that is currently
being displayed. The general, simplified forms are:

Previewing a Stored Document (Option 1)

03TYPES d¡filename

• Previewing the Displayed Document (Option 2)

S3t y p e s

ACTION P r e v ie w in g a S to red D o c u m e n t.
(Option 1) To preview a file which is stored on a disk:

1. Start with the display cleared of any document. You

can open a new window—if you need to clear the
display, use STORE or ABORT.

2. Let’s say the name of the file you want to print to the
screen is CHAPTER.DOC.

Type: [F5]types chapter.doc,2-5 @

Results: This prints to the screen pages 2 through 5 of

the file CHAPTER.DOC. You can examine this file to see
how CHAPTER.DOC would print out on paper.

2-64
A ction P r e v ie w in g th e D isp la y e d D o cu m e n t.
(Option 2) To preview a document which is currently displayed:

1. Start with the document in the display.

2. Type: ¡F5] types 0

Result: The displayed document is printed to another

window. (If there is a long delay, refer to the note
"Stopping TYPES" below.) You can examine this
document to see how it would print out on paper.

Tip Speeding up TYPES. When printing to the screen, a

long document (over 20K) may take over a minute. To
speed this up, specify only the range of pages you need,
rather than the entire document. If you must print the
entire document, perform Option 1 with only one
window open, to free up memory. (See "Memory.")

NOTE #1 Stopping TYPES. The longer the document is, the

longer it takes TYPES to complete its operation. If you
find it taking too long, use (Ctrl] [BreakI. This stops the
process and displays what has been computed up to
that point.

2-65
NOTE #2 W hat sp e c ific a lly D oes TYPES Do? The following
changes are made to a file w hen it is processed by f
TYPES. All em bedded commands are carried out by
XyWrite as hard text and their triangles are removed. For
example, the RH command is removed and Running
Headers are inserted at the top of every page. Besides
inserting the horizontal line betw een pages, the most
noticeable changes m ade by TYPES are:

RH Running headers are incorporated into the text

RF Running footers are incorporated into the text
FN Footnotes are incorporated, with numbering
FD Soft page breaks are converted to hard breaks
PN Page num bers are inserted
DA Current date is inserted
TM Current time is inserted
RM Soft returns are converted to hard returns
TS Tabs are converted to series of spaces
TP Top margins are inserted as blank lines
BT Bottom margins are inserted as blank lines /*
OF Offset is incorporated as a shift in margins
LS Line spacing is incorporated as blank lines
WD Widow paragraph breaks take effect
OP Orphan paragraph breaks take effect
IX Index is extracted
TC Table of contents is extracted
Soft hyphens are converted to hard hyphens or are
removed

TYPES does not process the file through the Printer File.
As a result, the following statements hold true. (In
contrast, the TYPEF command does process the file
through the Printer File.)

• All character modes remain unchanged. For instance,

a w ord which was originally underlined remains
underlined.
• Justification is not apparent on the display.
(Determined by value of MU in Printer File.)
• Printer codes are not em bedded in the displayed file.

2-66
 T S V W «
-MtTiTmmkTytgtiii— -

Range o f Pages. The same rules that apply to the TYPE

command apply to TYPES for printing a specified range
of pages. See the examples under the TYPE command.

Saving a P review F ile. You can save a file created with

TYPES simply by using SAVE. It is saved under the
filename REVIEW.TMP unless another name is specified.

Page Breaks and Page N um bers. TYPES inserts

horizontal lines across the width of the document to
indicate page breaks. If you want to use the Page-Line
indicator to correctly count lines and pages, you must
insert a PL command at the top of the preview document.
For a document with 66 lines per page, insert PL 67.
(The extra num ber is needed in order to include the
horizontal page-break line.)

-***?■ ..! •ff*:........ ; * • * * ~ ;:r**••"x.u. \ :w—

©TYPES d:filename,a-b (Option1)
©TYPES fa-b j. - - (Option 2)'
• filename Ls the name of the file to be printed to the
screen. _
• ¿.- (optional) is the drive (A:, B:, or C:) you specify for
the drive you want. If you omit the drive letter, the
default drive is used.
• a-b (optional) is the range of pages to be printed. If
omitted, all pages are printed. You can specify up to
five ranges with a-blc-d/e-ffg-h/i-j.
• TYPES is an immediate command.
• This command was formerly called REVIEW,
abbreviated RV.

(Option 1)
I
© ty s chapter.doc,3-12 (Option 1)
 [ftjT tR i tf în ïïR T ig

PURPOSE The TYPE @ command prints a sequence of files to the

printer, one after another, automatically. One benefit is
that you may group files into sets. A set of files is treated
as a single document — with a single run of page
numbers, footnote numbers, chapter numbers, a single
Table of Contents and a single Index accumulated from
across all named files.
Similarly, TYPES @ and TYPEF @ print a sequence of files
to the display and to a file, respectively.
• Chain Printing to the Printer
S3TYPE ®parentfile,,m
• Chain Printing to the Display
S3TYPES Qparentfile
• Chain Printing to a File
B2TYPEF <3parentfile,targetfile

ACTION C h ain P rin tin g to th e P rin ter.

The following example illustrates how to print a
sequence of files.

1. Create th e Parent F ile. The parent file contains the

names of the files to be printed, as the following
example shows.

a. O pen a new file to be the parent file, giving it any

name you wish (for example, EPIC):
Type: [F5]new epic [^¡1

PARENT FILE
O U T LIN E PROPOSAL
CHAPTER1 CHA PTER2 CHA PTER3
f ir s t s e t (filename: EPIC)
SECOND SET

2-68
[G5j(iP4BE-

b. List the names of all of the files you want printed

as a set. Separate the names by spaces. At the
end of the set press 0 . (You are not constrained as
to the num ber of files in a set. The files may word
wrap to subsequent lines and still be considered a
set.)
Type: outline p r o p o s a l^
c. List as many sets as you want. Make sure you end
the last set with a carriage return.
Type: chapter 1 chapter2 c h a p te r 3 0
d. Store the file:
Type: lEHstore e p i c 0

2. In sert Page B reaks. XyWrite automatically inserts

page breaks between sets — that is, the first
document of each set will start at the top of a new
page. However, if you want a document within a set
to also start at the top of a new page, make sure it
begins with a Page Break command (PG).

3. P review th e F iles. (Optional) If you wish, preview

the files on the display before you print them: (see
the TYPES command for more details)
Type: [r] types @ e p i c 0

4. P rint th e file s. Finally, print the files:

Type: [H type @ e p ic S
Results: This single command prints all five files as
shown in the following illustration. In our example,
notice that the two lines in EPIC produce two sets of
page numbers, as follows:

• OUTLINE and PROPOSAL are printed as one docu­

ment, with pages numbered from 1 to 15 in this
example.

• CHAPTER1 thru CHAPTER3 are printed as one

large document, starting at page 1 (and footnote 1)
with one continuous set of page numbers, foot­
notes, Table of Contents and Index.

2-69
ï r i u m m -

NOTE #1 M issing F ile. When printing, if a filename in the parent

file is not found on the disk, the file is ignored, and
output continues uninterrupted with the next file.

NOTE #2 Page Form at. The overall page format commands (such
as Offset, Top Margin, Running Header) can be placed at
the beginning of the first file. Their effects carry over into
the following files of that set only, but not to following
sets. (The DEFAULT conditions take over again at the
start of each new set.)

CHAIN
PRINTING Pag© 1

FIRST
SET

SECOND
SET
Page 35
si------------- is r
C H A PT ER 3 I? Page 36

Page 48

2-70
 The same is true for num bering systems, including page,
chapter and footnote numbering. You can put DC
(Define Counter), FN (Footnote) and related commands
in the first file of a set — the formats and sequences are
maintained throughout that set only. This is a very
powerful capability for printing a com plete book, from
several files. See.Chapter 4, "Footnotes," "Page
Numbering" and "Numbering" for details.
NOTE #3 B ackground P rin tin g. O n c e p rin tin g b e g in s , y o u m a y
c o n tin u e e d itin g . B u t w a it u n til a p a rtic u la r file is
c o m p le te ly p rin te d b e fo re s a v in g to it.
NOTE #4 K ill P rin tin g. One Kill Type (KT) command is all that’s
necessary to stop all the files from printing.
NOTE #5 R elated C om m ands. The Set Page Number (SP) can be
used to reset the page numbers anyw here in the text.
NOTE #6 C hapter N um bers. W hen you use TYPE @, you can
automatically num ber your chapters by using the CO
counter. See "Numbering" in Chapter 4.

i i S p d r e n f f i e ^ f f i 777 . Prints to the printer j

Q parerilfitef~ys.^ Prints to the screen

fflTYPEF Qparentfile,targetfile Prints to a file
• parentfile is the parent file, containing just the nam es

• targetfile (optional) is the file to which the sequence

of files is to be sent. If this filename is omitted, the
“7 # ^ g d o c u m e n ts are printed to FO.TMP. ^
^ # , # 7 m is a modifier: r% .
(p n n tjoad pages only) ...._• ¡¡g
E (print even pages bnly) 7 r- 7
f e 7 ^ ^ . ^ 5 i (stop printing after each p a g e ) ' . . . . - . . . . -
'~ ^ r |f e 7 p can be used with O or E in any com bination M-
; . 7 ; : ^ Be sure to include the two commas. - 3g§
T hese are immediate commands.' 7: 7 ^« f ^

AMPLE Batype <§>epic„ep

1BREV EDty <§>epic„ep

2-71
PURPOSE The WATT command causes printing to occur in the
foreground instead of the background. Its effect is to
make XyWrite wait until printing jobs are finished before
the next keystroke is executed. You might use WAIT in a
user program where you want to use the result of a
TYPEF (Type to File) for further action. For example, if
you were to use TYPEF REPORT, RESULT and wanted to
next call up RESULT, it would be prudent to include a
WAIT:
BC typef report,result
BC wait
BC call result
If you did not include WAIT, TYPEF would occur in the
background and the CALL statement would attempt to call
up RESULT before TYPEF was finished.
When you execute the WAIT command, the display
freezes. XyWrite does not act on any further keyboard or
keystroke input until the TYPE command is completed.
Any keystrokes are saved and will be acted on when the
current TYPE or TYPEF job is finished.

ACTION T y p e to a F ile a n d C a ll th e R esu lt.

To demonstrate the WAIT command, we will type to a
file with TYPEF and then call that file to the screen:
1. Type: [fU typef long,fo.tmp 5 3
2. While the file LONG is being processed:
Type: EH wait 5 3
3. Now immediately type:
Type: EH ca f o .tm p S
Result: Notice that your keystrokes in Step 3 are not
immediately displayed — they are, however accepted by
XyWrite. WAIT prevents the display from changing until
TYPEF is finished. Then FO.TMP is called to the screen.

© w a it

WAIT is an immediate
Ä . . . ...
command. .. i
S ' onsite!
¿Example © w a it -----
.;ä , .. .ä S— f e a f e i
.li:-: rit:l l l l i l l l l

2-72
 ■ > 2 îiiïrîT £ S ^ /ïiE fc -
m * *

P urpose QUIT terminates the current editing session by clearing

any open files from the display and returning control to
y DOS. Its general form is:

• S D Q U rr (Option 1)

Ctril IAlt! IDelI (Option 2)

A ction Q u ittin g X yW rite.

(Option 1) To quit XyWrite:

1. Clear documents from the display using STORE or

ABORT. (Be sure to also clear any file from the
second window, if present.)

2. Type: [F5]quit@

Result: If any files are open, XyWrite warns you and asks
if you want to quit anyway. (You answer Y to quit or N
to continue in XyWrite.) XyWrite then returns control to
DOS. All memory used by XyWrite is freed. All
temporary (,TMP) files are automatically deleted except
INDEX.TMP and PRINT.TMP.

If you wish to re-enter XyWrite after quitting, you must

enter the following at the DOS prompt (A>, B> or C>):

Type: editor 0

DOS XYWRITE

2-73
<gO U K

A ction Q u ittin g X yW rite.

(Option 2) If your system becomes locked up for some reason and
Option 1 doesn’t work, use the following method:

Press: Ctri Alt Del

XyWrite first asks if you want to quit. If you do:

Press: y

If you have files open, XyWrite asks if you want these

files saved. If you do, press Y again. XyWrite then auto­
matically saves all open files to your disk. In this way,
XyWrite allows you to save files even if your system is
locked up. However, it does not save these files using
their original names. It saves the file in window #1 as
QUIT1.TMP, the file in window #2 as QUIT2.TMP, and so
on up to QUIT9.TMP.

A lso S ee T he DOS C om m and. The DOS command also switches

control to DOS, but without disturbing XyWrite. XyWrite
is suspended as-is; you can return to any files left open
with the EXIT command. In contrast, QUIT requires
open files to be stored or aborted. (The DOS command
can be found earlier in this section.)

H q io t
-vriiy; ' is*-'-
• QUIT is an immediate

SJquit _ _

2-74
 îf îm r ïy *

I n tro This chapter covers basic editing. It begins w ith the

screen and keyboard and progresses into methods you
can use to m odify text. These tools are the same w hether
you are w riting a new docum ent or m odifying an existing
one.

C O N T EN T S Pag e D esc rip tio n C om m and

3-2 O verview
3-2 Blo ck Diagram
3-5 Basics o f th e S creen a n d K ey b o ard
3-6 Screen
3-9 Keyboard
3-21 E diting T ext
3-22 Copying Text [F7
3-27 M oving Text [F8
3-28 Defining a Blo ck o f Text
3-29 Deleting Text
3-33 M ath
3-34 Header Calculations
3-34 Cursor Arithm etic
3-37 Save/G et Keys
3-38 Save/Get Procedure
3-42 Save Text F2
3-43 Get Text Ait
3-44 D isplay Save/Get D irectory Ml F2
3-45 D isplay Save/Get K ey Ctrl F2
3-46 Append to Save/Get K ey [ShiftI fF2l
3-47 Store Save/Get Keys to D isk STSGT
3-48 Load Save/Get Keys from D isk LDSGT
3-49 Clear Save/Get Keys CLRSGT, REMOVE
3-50 Insert Save/Get Text IS
3-51 S earch a n d R eplace T ext
3-52 Searching For Text SEARCH
3-60 Changing Text CHANGE
3-64 G o to Page and Line No. GO
3-65 Com paring Tw o Files [C riin . fctrflfcl
3-67 W indow s
3-70 W indow Menu [CM] fptö
3-73 Sw itching W indow s [ÄitlfFiÖl, iShiftl[fTÖI
3-74 Opening a N ew W ind ow WINDOW
3-75 Rem oving a W in d ow RS

3-1
 l a S B i T O E f a if t n n

EDITING
o

Editing Text Math

Header Cursor
Calculations Arithmetic
1,
□ 0 0 0 S B

»asuc.“?-'— =%!•»t —” "“ ®

= ^ -.. J

By By By By Any Size By Release

Word Sentence Line Paragraph Block Column
(□ D C S L c t r i jl f l l CS 1Shift || F4 I HD ® Œ D c s

- * -ÉM U ms:-

| Character Previous Word Previous To End Entire Defined Undelete 1

Character Word of Line Line Block
[ Del ] | Backspace | I Alt || Del )

J!!rÿ!ÏAB«
niaM^jtssssIS
„. „w;s__
[ Alt |f Bkspc |

W îl ! ? 8 5 S S t o f « - . . . . :
I Ctrl || Del | ® d L )

: _ t Z j n r r - r < « “ i i S f ê œ t . ï E S S .: ! : 'r ? : ; m f c ' „ T • —Sirân;.

LMJLMJ CMJlÆ
J

3-2
 Save/Get Search & Replace Windows

' =2ß»tr—... JfT-r

^.—

Open Close
Save Get Window Window
Œ D* ® x
WINDOW RMVSCR

';':S::::-3SsS|;i5

Window Next Switch Two

Load Store Clear Menu Window Windows
LDSGT STSGT CLRSGT 1Ctrl 11F10 I I Alt II F10 I
Shift K F10 I

f c ^ = 3 f ^ îâ «

Display Display Append Find Find

Directory Key to Key Difference Match
(~Äit~l(~F2~| 1Ctrl II F2 |X Shift K F2 |X I
1 i ctn i: - 1 ® G D
1
I

Change & Change Change

Verify No Verily Invisible

c v CH Cl

“ ,Ä-“ ' .--I biSi •-»:

1
(suffix)

Absolute Absolute
Case Match Case Match

A A

I. ■
•
:7
. '.. •=.' • :>
Í;Í5MÜ8*T- .•■“-”•^3

3-3
NOTES

•v .

3-4
I ntro The keyboard and screen are useful topics for
beginning a description o f X yW rite . The Screen section
is fa irly elem entary — you can cover it in one reading.

BASICS
You may find yo u rself referring to the Keyboard section
several tim es u n til yo u ’ve becom e fam iliar w ith it.

C o ntents P age D e sc rip tio n

3-6 S creen
3-6 The Cursor
3-7 Command Line
3-7 Text Area
3-7 Prom pt Line
3-8 R u ler

3-9 K e y b o a rd
3-10 Command Line Keys
3-12 Cursor Keys
3-15 Function Keys
3-18 Toggle Keys

3-5
S S jK î

P urpose The display is divided into tw o separate areas: the

header, w hich is the top three lines, and the Text Area,
w hich is the rest o f the display. The features o f XyW rite
that are visible on the screen are described here.

T h e C u rso r. The cursor is the blinking square or

underline on the screen. The position o f the cursor
marks the "point o f action" w here text or commands are
entered or deleted.

The shape of the cursor is a square in Insert Mode and an

underline in O verstrike Mode. (Y o u sw itch modes w ith
the Ore] key.)

C o m m a n d lin e . The Command Line is the entire top

line o f the screen. The CM (Com m and) indicates w here
you enter commands such as N EW , CALL, SEARCH,
T Y P E and Q U IT. W hen you see the fam iliar mark B3
you know you’re in XyW rite. The Gfl is w here you "talk"
to XyW rite.

THE DISPLAY
XYW RITE SCREEN PAGE a n d LINE #
INSERT
O VERSTRIKE
INDICATOR

COMM AND
* LINE

! PROMPT L IN E '
?
R U LE R '
!
TEXT A R E A -

CUR SO R
(B lin kin g s q u a re
o r u n d e rlin e ) r

Br

3-6
 iJ B S it» » S J R iiil

You can use the CM command to show the default drive

in place of B 3 , such as Q . (See Chapter 2 for inform ation
on the CM com m and.)

fifHRvn
M any commands you type require as few as two letters,
but some commands might use the entire line — for
instance, PR (Prom pt) w ith a message.

P ro m p t Line. This is the second line on the display — it

has four parts:

PRMPT(Prom pt) - This is w here X yW rite displays

messages for you.

(N am e) - The filenam e o f the currently open file

appears here in w hatever character mode is currently
in effect. W hen you use SA VE or STO RE (w ith no
filenam e), X yW rite saves the docum ent under this
name. W hen you have several files open, the CEQ field
tells you w hich docum ent is currently active.
You can enter the CM command to change dO to show
the w indow number and define indicator, such as B
and change QM33 to instead show the name o f the
current directory.

• 01 (Page-Line) - The page and line number of the

cursor position appears here. There are three ways to
turn on the Page-Line number (the second and third
options also m ove the text):
Press (Option 1)
Press [Artl fPoDnl o r |Ahl [PqUpl (Option 2)
Press [F 5]g0 1 0 (Option 3)

To turn off the Page-Line number, sw itch to Expanded

D isplay and back. Press the follow ing key
/ ’’"'X - com bination twice:
Press: [Ctrl] [re]
If you w ant Page-Line to be displayed autom atically
w hen any file is called, change the D isplay Type (D T )
setting in the Printer File. See "Norm al/Expanded
D isplay Type" in the Printer File section o f Chapter 6.

3-7
 • Toggle key indicators (described under Toggle Keys
later in this section) include:
Q (Caps Lock)
S (Scro ll Lock)
|Q (N um eric Lock)
H (Autom atic Uppercase)
Q (Insert/O verstrike)

R uler. This is the third line on the display. The ruler

has m arkings for margin, tab and indent settings. The
Ruler is described in detail in the Form atting chapter.

T h e T ex t Area. This is the area w here you view and

revise documents. This view ing area is 22 lines long and
80 characters w ide. You can scroll a docum ent up and
dow n in this area. You can also m ove it left and right —
a docum ent can be as w id e as 256 characters.
Y ou can also split this w ind ow for w orking on tw o or
m ore files at the same time. You can view them side-by-
side, one above the other, or on alternate full screens.
As you w rite and form at your docum ent, you might
notice form atting m arkers — arrows and triangles — in
the text area. If they’re distracting, you can hide them
w ith the NM (N o M arker) function call. See Function
Calls in the Keyboard File section o f Chapter 6.

NOTE #1 H e a d e r F ield N am es. Y ou can change the header field

names to get inform ation about w here you are currently
w orking in X yW rite. Refer to the CM command in
Chapter 2 for inform ation.

NOTE #2 N on-B U nking C u rso r. If you prefer a non-blinking

cursor, enter the CR com m and as a D EFA U LT. The form
o f the com m and is D EFA U LT CR-e,h w here e is the
character m ode for the character under the cursor w hen
editing and h is the character m ode for the character
under the cursor in help frames. For exam ple, enter the
com m and d e fa u lt cr=112,7. Use num bers betw een 1-
127 for non-blinking and betw een 128-255 for blinking.
To return to the standard blinking cursor, enter the
com m and d e fa u lt cr=0,0.

3-8
P u r po se The keyboard, o f course, is w here you type text into
your com puter. The keyboard has b asically three
sections to it, as shown below . W e w ill describe on the se
>•
<2>
fo llo w in g pages those parts o f the keyboard that are rt»
CA »

unique to X yW rite .
T y p e w rite r K eys. The center section o f the keyboard
contains the typ ew riter keys — letters, num bers,
standard punctuation and sym bols. You use the
keys [CM] and [Art] in com bination w ith character keys to
access other functions (Save/G ets and A SC II
ch aracters).

KEYBOARD

1 F1
F2 Esc 1 2

1I I I
3 4 7 9 = «í- NumLock Jscrofl Lock

I F3
"I
Tab Q W

I" E

1 I1 T Y U , 0

1
Home

’
i P9UP

r I' 1*1“r I' l‘ 1 1 1|IIh

F6 Ctrl D F 4

I"
F7 F8 Shift \

I 1!'l “II I I '

■
C N Shift * End

II PgDn -j-

“1
£

F10 Alt Space Bar Caps Lock Del

L JL
F u n ctio n T y p e w rite r C u rs o r
K eys Keys K eys

3-9
 C o m m a n d L ine K eys. The Com m and Line is an
essential part o f X y W rite . It ’s im portant that you learn
to use and becom e com fortable w ith the three keys
associated w ith the Com m and Lin e: dl> d l and [f!o1.

F5 C le a r T h e C o m m a n d L ine. Pressing this key clears

the Com m and Lin e and positions the cursor next to the
S3 fo r you to enter a new com m and. You ty p ic a lly use
[r] p rio r to typing in any com m and (su ch as N EW ,
CALL, SAVE, P R IN T or S E A R C H ).

F9 E x ecu te. This is the Execute key. Its sole purpose is

to execute w hatever com m and is cu rren tly on the
Com m and Line. It w orks the same w hether the cursor is
on the Com m and Line or in the Text Area. You ty p ic a lly
use d l a fter typing in any com m and. For exam ple:
[F5]save[F9]
W hen you type a com m and on the Com m and Line, 0
is an alternate w ay to execute the com m and — the
fo llo w in g tw o lines are equ ivalent:

d] saved]
d ]sa v e 0

The difference between dl and 0 is as follows:

• d l executes w hatever functio n is cu rren tly on the
Com m and Line, w h ether the cursor is on the
Com m and Lin e or in the Text Area.
• 0 executes a com m and o n ly w hen the cursor is on
the Com m and Line. (It enters a carriage return
w hen in the Text A rea.)
[C D "* » ■ t fÏÏlH IlH Ilu O T T ÏÏU Jt t ^ V Ç p -

There are tim es w hen you w ould want to execute a

com m and from the text area. In these cases, 0 w ould
not w ork — for instance, w hen repeating the SEARCH

B asics
com m and. To find “ h e llo ” in your text, for exam ple,
yo u ’d type SEARCH /h ello / on the Com m and Line and
execute it the first tim e w ith eith er 0 or [re]. O nce the
first instance is found in text, striking [F9] continues the
search right from w here the cursor stands in the text.
( 0 w ould enter a carriage retu rn .)
F10 M oving th e C u rso r B etw een C o m m a n d L ine a n d
Text A rea. In effect, [no] is a cursor key — pressing this
key m oves the cursor betw een the Com m and Line and
the Text Area (w hen a docum ent is op en ). U n lik e [F5], it
does n o t clear the Com m and Line.
There are tw o m ain uses for [no]:
• To m ove the cursor from the Text Area to the
Com m and Line in order to m odify an existing
com m and. For exam ple, adding the letter “ b ” to
the search com m and se /tom orrow / to make it a
backwards search:
03seb /tomorrow/
This is q uicker than pressing [re] and re-typing the
entire command.
• To sim ply move the cursor from the Com m and Line
to the Text Area. No commands are executed.
Rem em ber that [no] is just a cursor key — no more,
no less.

The cursor m aintains one location in the text and

another on the Command Line, [no] sw itches between
these points.
H ow are [re] and [no] different? [re] clears the Com m and
Line and moves the cursor o n ly one w ay — to the
Com m and Line. [Fib] moves the cursor either w ay
w ith o u t clearing the Com mand Line.

3-11
P u r po se Cursor keys a llo w you to m ove the cursor or scro ll the
text. W e have listed a ll cursor keys in the fo llo w in g
tables. N ote that w ith a ll o f these functions, holding
down the key w ill repeat the function.
S c ro llin g T ex t. These keys a llo w you to m ove up or
down in a docum ent, m oving new text into view .
N o tice that as you m ove the cursor d ow n in the
docum ent, new lin es o f text appear at the bottom o f the
screen and the text m oves up the screen.

NOTE # \ M ove b y C h a ra c te r. There are tw o different ways to

m ove the cursor by character:
Character U p, D ow n, Left, Right. The cursor moves to
the next typed character o r space, but w ill not m ove
into the area to the right o f a carriage return on any lin e.
W hen the cursor hits the end o f a lin e, it w raps to the
next lin e.
Linear U p, D ow n, Left, R ight. The cursor m oves in
a straight lin e (thus the w ord lin e a r), regardless o f the
text or carriage returns present. Linear Left and Right
stop at the ends o f the lin es; they do not w rap to the
next lin e. Thus, lin ear cursor m ovem ents are w ell-
suited for use w ith a m ouse.

SCROLLING UP OR DOWN

Keys Function Scroll

s m One line up Line
S É One line down

PgUp One screen up Screen

PgDn One screen down

lÄÜllPBÜ One printed page up Printed Page

[Äitj [PgDn One printed page down
Ctrl Home To top of document Document
Ctrl Endl To bottom of document
 [K f iïa u f lif ô S ^ i

U¿W.WSf.-1'

MOVING THE CURSOR ¡sr¡MÍ«;■

Keys Function Move M

->
MS2
tili

0 Cursor
Cursor
right
left
Character
(Notes # 1 ,2 )
iliiiM ir;-.

0 S ir
0 Cursor up
0 Cursor down
* Cursor linear right
* Cursor linear left
* Cursor linear up
* Cursor linear down

@ 0 To next word Word

0 0 To previous word

ÍCtril fübl To next tab Tab

Shift Tab To previous tab

ç try 0 To end of line (express right) Line

Ctrl 0 To start of line (express left)
* To start of previous line
* To start of next line

* To start of previous sentence Sentence

* To start of next sentence
* To start of previous paragraph Paragraph
* To start of next paragraph

Horne To top of screen (Home) Screen

End To bottom of screen (Note #3)

Shift F10 Switch through all windows Window

Alt F10 Switch between two windows (Note #4)

F1Û Switch between Command Line

Command Line and text area
F5 Move to and erase
Command Line
* These functions are not pre-assigned to any keys. Refer to the section in
Chapter 6 on Keyboard File for instructions on how to assign these options
to the keys of your choice.
Note n Move b y Line. It is interesting to notice the difference
/
between the follow ing two items:
Character Up, Character Down. These move the cursor
up or down a line w ithout shifting the text currently
visib le on the screen.
Move by Line. This moves the text and cursor up
or down a line on the screen, m oving a new lin e into
view . The cursor stays on the same character in the text.

N ote #3 Move b y Screen. The screen is another w ord for the

display. W hen you move text by screen, you move the
next screenful of text into view , w ithout skipping over
any text. In fact, there is one lin e of overlap.
For exam ple, when m oving down in a docum ent, the
bottom line moves to the top o f the screen. W hen you
move by screen, you can scroll q u ick ly through a
docum ent, scanning all text.

No te #4 Move to W indow. You can have up to nine different

windows open at the same time. W ith 1Crtl 1 IF101
(w indow m enu) you can move to any specific w indow by
pressing the number of that window. W ith 1Shift | F10 you
can move to the next active w indow in
sequence. W ith [AJtJ F10 you can return to the previously
displayed w indow — use this to toggle between two
windows. See the section on W indow s for more
information.

N ote #5 Move b y P rin te d Page. W hen you want to see where

page breaks w ill occur, before you print a docum ent,
move the text by Printed Page (rather than by screen).
The Page-Line indicator on the right end of line 2 turns
on, and the start o f the next page is displayed. The page
breaks adjust for running headers, running footers,
footnotes, top margin and bottom margin.
/

No te #6 Moving W ithin C olum n Tables. You can set up columns

of text w ith word wrap w ithin the columns. For
inform ation on moving the cursor w ithin the text
columns, see the section on Columns in Chapter 5.

3-14
 IK T T io if T u iB f t S v w

P u r po se The function keys are the ten keys [fT] through [no] on
the left side o f the keyboard. (R e fe r to the illu stra tio n .)

BASICS
These keys provide frequently-used editing functions
and commands. O nce you know these functions you
have a pow erful set o f tools for editing your text.

FUNCTION KEYS
f ------ ------ >

F1 F2
V________ / . ..■>
... ^

F3 F4
^________ > v J
/■ -------- *\

F5 F6
V------------- ^ V----- V
/ “ ---- ' ----------- N

F7 F8
V-------- . - j V, ✓
f— -s r -v

F9 F10

3-15
 [© » « * » •

FUNCTION KEY SUMMARY

El Begin/End Block Define. Begin or end defining a block of

text of any size.

M EH Begin Column Define. Begin defining a column of text.

|F2 Save Defined Text. Save the defined block of text to the
Save/Get given by the next key struck.
Ctrl F2 Save/Get Directory. Show the contents of the single Save/
Get given by the next letter or number struck.
Shift F2 Append to Save/Get Key. Add the defined text to the end
of the text in the Save/Get given by the next key.

®|F2] Show Save/Get Directory. Display the entire directory of

36 Save/Get keys.

F3 Release Defined Text. Release the block of text currently

defined.

Undelete. Restores the last text deleted (except text

deleted using Backspace or foeil).

EH Define by Line. Define the line the cursor is on.

M S Define by Sentence. Define the sentence the cursor is on.
|Shift||F4j Define by Paragraph. Define the paragraph the cursor is
on.

i i Define by Word. Define the word the cursor is on.

F5 Clear Command Line. Clear the Command Line and move

the cursor there.
H ire] Delete Line. Erases the line the cursor is on.

3-16
[(& • < « « »

FUNCTION KEY SUMMARY (C o n tinu e d)

■
-T>*
V>

@ Clear Command Line. Same as F5.

M (EH Delete Defined Block. Erase the block of text currently

defined.

F7 Copy Defined Block. Copy the currently defined block of

text to the cursor position.

F8 Move Defined Block. Move the currently defined block of

text to the cursor position.

F9 Execute. Execute the command currently on the Command

Line.
Ctrl F9 Toggle Between Expanded and Normal Display.
Switches the display between Normal and Expanded
modes.
Shift F9 Turn on Page Numbers. Turns on the P-L indicator at
the top of the screen.
Help Screen. Displays Help information.

F10 Toggle Between Command Line and Text. Move the

cursor between the Command Line and text without
clearing the Command Line.
lew F10 Select Window. Display the menu for selecting windows.
Shift F10 Switch Through All Windows. Switch the cursor through
all open windows in sequence.
Alt F10 Switch Between IWo Windows. Switch the cursor
between the current and previous windows.

3-17
in g g p N n f e p

P u rpo se Toggle keys affect the w ay that you enter text. Each key
has two states — on and off. Standard X yW rite provides
five toggle keys:

Insert/O verstrike Ins

N um eric Lock Num Lock
Scro ll Lock Scroll Lock
Caps Lock [Caps Lock
Autom atic Uppercase 03 au

You can add more toggle keys or m odify the existing

ones (see “ Keyboard F ile ” in the Custom izing
ch ap ter).
Autom atic Uppercase is entered at the Command Line;
a ll others are executed by pressing the key shown
above. The [Shift] key is also described here.

A ction S w itc h in g a T o g g le K ey
A ll five toggle keys operate sim ilarly. For exam ple, to
sw itch between Insert and O verstrike modes:
Press: [ins]
Result: Insert mode is indicated by the letter “ I ” (fo r
In sert) visib le at the top right corner o f the screen.
O verstrike is indicated by the “ I ” turned off.
C u rso r S hape. Another indicator o f the Insert typing
mode is the shape o f the cursor. The cursor is a square
in Insert mode and an underline in O verstrike mode.

3-18
[© » * »

TOGGLE KEYS

*»
Ins Insert Key. The Insert key switches between Insert and
Overstrike. XyWrite is always in one mode or the other.
• Insert Mode. As you type on the keyboard, the characters
are inserted into the text without destroying any of the text
already present. The new text pushes the existing text out
of its way. XyWrite starts up in Insert mode.
• Overstrike Mode. The characters you type replace the
characters (or tabs) already in the text. This is useful when
you want to modify text from one thing to another.

Num Lock Numeric Lock Key. Press once to turn on, and again to turn
off. (When on, the letter “N” is present at the top right of the
screen.)
• Numeric Lock On. The numeric keypad shifts to numbers
keys 0 through 9, for use as a calculator keypad.
• Off. The numeric keypad operates as cursor keys.

Scroll Lock Scroll Lock Key. Press once to turn on, and again to turn
off. This key is used in editing User Programs; refer to that
section for details. When Scroll Lock is on, the letter “S ”
is present at the top right of the screen.
¡Caps Lock | Caps Lock Key. Press once to turn on, and again to turn
off. When on, the letter “C ” is present at the top right of the
screen.
• Caps Lock On. All letters are locked in upper-case. No
other keys are affected. This contrasts with the Shift key
which shifts not only letter keys, but all keys, including
number, punctuation and cursor keys.
• Off. All keys are un-shifted - letters are lower-case.

03 au Automatic Uppercase. This mode causes the first character

of each sentence to automatically be entered uppercase. Un­
like the other typing modes, this mode is entered (and exited)
by executing the AU command from the Command Line. For
more details, see the Automatic Uppercase command in the
Formatting chapter.

3-19
 ¡s & n w n n

Shift Shift Key. (momentary) Press and hold down to keep on.
Release to turn off.

• Pressed In. All keys are shifted to uppercase, including

letter, number, punctuation and cursor keys. If the Caps
Lock key is on, depressing the shift key shifts the keyboard
to lowercase.

• Released. All keys are un-shifted.

3-20
 I9G

I ntro O nce you have w ritten a docum ent w ith X yW rite, you
w ill be ready to revise it — that is, unless you are one
o f those w ho w rites only final drafts. The fo llo w ing
functions cover the essentials for making revisions.

C ontents Page S ection

3-22 Defining a Blo ck o f Text
3-27 Copying a Blo ck o f Text
3-28 M oving a Blo ck of Text
3-29 D eleting Text

3-21
P u r po se W hen you define text, you are selecting it to be moved,
copied, deleted, saved or printed (ju st to m ention a few
thing s). The o verall list o f p o ssib ilities is shown in the
diagram below .
P ra c tic a l Uses. Here are some instances w hen the
b lock editing features w ould be useful:
• Define a paragraph in order to move it
to another part o f yo ur docum ent, or to another
docum ent altogether.
• Define a w ord in order to underline it (M D U L ).
• Define a heading in order to cap italize it (U C ).
• Define a lin e o f text in order to p rint out just that
lin e (T Y P E ).
• Define a sentence in order to save it to a Save/ G et
K ey ( | 2 ] # ) . Y o u can later recall it at the push o f
a button.

3-22
■ Q Q iiW U IIS in t o g g ,e a B M S d E K x i*

Define Keys

® (E5 Define by Word. This selects the word the cursor is on. It
also selects the character (space or punctuation)
immediately following the word. You can select successive
words by holding down [Ajt] and repeatedly striking [F4].

E diting T ex t
[CM] 15 Define by Sentence. This selects the sentence that the
cursor is on. It selects all characters from the previous
period or hard return, up to and including the next period or
hard return. You can select successive sentences by
repeating the keys. ( 0 is the hard return.)
F4 Define by Line. This selects the entire line the cursor rests
on, from left to right margin. You select successive lines by
repeating [m ].

M l £5 Define by Paragraph. This selects the entire paragraph the

cursor is in. It selects all characters from the previous hard
return up to and including the next hard return. ( 0 is the
hard return.) You can select successive paragraphs by
repeating the keys.

0 - 0 Define Any Size Block of Text. Follow the procedure

“ Defining a Block of Text.” This procedure allows you to
select any size block of text, from one character to the
entire document.

IM1 ED -- Ell Define a Column of Text. Follow the procedure “ Defining a

Column of Text.” This procedure allows you to select a
column of text of any size.

E3J Release Defined Text. This releases any selected text, so

that it can no longer be acted on as a block. Text is returned
from bright to dim to indicate it is no longer selected. You
are then free to select a new block of text. It is a good habit
to release any defined text when you are through using it,
as there are a number of functions that do not work while a
block of text is defined.

3-23
I O T Ïf f iî iï i « J H BT>i W » H IB S k ■ IB S « * »

A ctio n D e f in in g T e x t b y F ix e d S ize
To define text by w ord, sentence, lin e or paragraph:
1. Press: [F3] ( O ptional )
Result: This ensures that no other text is s till defined.
2. M ove the cursor anywhere w ith in the text you want
defined.
3- Sim p ly press the k e y(s) corresponding to the
am ount o f text you w ant defined. For exam ple, to
define a sentence:
Press: [ctiil |F4
Result: The defined text appears brighter than norm al.
You can now move it, copy it, delete it or save it as you
w ish.

A ctio n D e f in in g A B lo c k o f T e x t
To select a block o f characters o f virtu a lly any size:

1. R elease a n y c u r r e n tly d e fin e d block. ( O ptional )

Press: [F3j
Result: This ensures that no other text is still
defined (so that Step 2 sets the fir s t o f the tw o end­
points) .
2. B egin th e b lo c k d efin e. M ove the cursor to the
first character o f the text you w ant to define.
Press: F1

3. D efine th e size o f th e b lo ck . N ow m ove the

cursor to the other end o f the text you w ant to
define. N otice that as you m ove, the area o f text
between the cursor and w here you started is
highlighted.
4. E nd th e b lo ck d efin e. To set the end o f the
defined block:
Press: [fT]
Result: The block o f text is now defined. N ow you can
m ove it, copy it, delete it or save it as you w ish.

3-24
 i iM f ii i a R T sin u a w «

ACTION D e f in in g b y C o lu m n
To define any rectangular colum n o f text:
1. R elease a n y c u r r e n tly d e fin e d te x t. ( O p tio n a l )
Press:
Result: This ensures that any cu rren tly defined
text is released.
gaw mm

2. P o s itio n th e c u rso r. M ove the cursor to the upper I g

le ft (o r lo w er rig h t) corner o f the colum n you w ant Is
to define.

3. B egin th e c o lu m n d e fin e . To establish the first

corner p o in t :
Press: Alt F1

4. D efine th e size. N ow m ove to the opposite com er

o f the colum n. N otice that as you m ove, the area of
text betw een the cursor and w here you started is
highlighted.
5 . E n d th e c o lu m n d e fin e . W hen you reach the
second corner, end the defined colum n:
Press: E]

Result: The colum n o f text is now defined. N ow you

can m ove it, cop y it, delete it. save it or p rin t it as you
w ish.

NOTE #1 R eleasin g D efin ed T ext. It is a good habit to release

any defined text w ith E w hen you are through using it.

NOTE #2 C o m b in in g D efined T ext. [m ] [Ml, HMD [Ml >and [cm] E

append text to any text w h ich is already defined. Ju st
press the key to add text to the block. For instance, you
can define a w ord plus the next paragraph plus the next
sentence. N otice that you can append text o n ly
a d ja cen t to the defined text.

3-25
Note #3 D efine Status In d ica to r. If you use the CM command
to display the current w indow num ber (rather than N M ),
you w ill be able to track the status o f the define process
by referring to your header.

Norm ally the w indow field consists o f the w indow

number follow ed by a blank space. W hen you start
defining a block of text by pressing [FT], a hyphen
appears after the number. W hen you com plete the
definition by pressing [FT] again or when you press one of
the define unit keys (e.g., [FT]), the hyphen becomes an
equals sign. And w hen you release the defined block by
pressing [f3], the equals sign disappears and there is again
a space after the w indow number.

Note #4 Size L im itation. There is a practical lim it to the amount

o f text you can define (determ ined by the amount o f
available m em ory). W hen you reach this lim it, the
message "Can’t Scroll D efine or D isplay" appears. For
more details, refer to the section on Memory.

NOTE #5 R eq u irem en ts fo r C o lu m n D efine. The column-

defined text requires hard returns as follows: (A hard
return is sym bolized by a left-pointing arrow at the end of
the lin e.)

• The colum n you define must have hard returns at the

end o f every line (w ordw rapped lines are not
allow ed).
• The lines to which you are moving the column of text
must end in hard returns.

You can define colum ns only for copying, m oving or

changing case. You cannot print just a defined colum n or
change its character mode.

NOTE #6 S to rin g o r A borting. W henever you STO RE or A BO R T

a document, any defined block o f text in that document
is autom atically released.

Note #7 D efin in g Blocks in T ext Tables. To define a block of

text w ithin a Text (Colum n) Table, refer to the section on
Columns in Chapter 5.
 •• ; ■■-

Copying a block o f text

:y:k?F -.-V^
m This is an im m ediate commm and.
'S:

P u r po se [¡F7] copies a defined block o f text to another part o f the

docum ent, or to another docum ent altogether. It leaves
the original text unchanged.
t;
5

A ctio n C o p y in g T e x t
To copy a block o f text takes b asically three steps:
1. D efine a Block. Define the block o f text you w ant
to m ove. For details, see the section “ D efining a
Blo ck o f Text” earlier.
2. L ocate th e In s e r tio n P o in t. M ove the cursor to
the point in the text w here you w ant to insert the
defined text. (T he text w ill be inserted to the left o f
the curso r.)
3. C opy th e T ext. To copy the defined block o f text:
Press:
Result: A copy is made o f the text defined in Step
1, and that copy is inserted at the cursor location.
4. R ep eat C opy. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert more
copies, if you w ish.
5. R elease D efined Text:
Press: [ra]
Result: This releases the defined text, com pleting
the operation.

NOTE N otes. The notes at the end o f “ M oving a Blo ck o f

T ex t,” w h ich follow s, also app ly for copying text w ith
F7l.
' ORMAT ID M oving a B lo ck o f Text •
~"nn~ ' ..... ...... “ h — ••— — - - - i
This is an im m ediate com m and
,jB«aw®ii».-afccwr«h««»Kur:

P u r po se H ] moves a defined b lo ck o f text to another part o f the

docum ent, or to another docum ent altogether.

A ctio n M o v in g T e x t
To m ove a block o f text takes b asically three steps:
1. D efine th e T ext. Define (se le ct) the b lo ck o f text
you w ant to m ove. For details, see the section
“ D efining a Blo ck o f T ex t.”

2. L ocate th e I n s e r tio n P o in t. M ove the cursor to

the point in the docum ent w here you w ant to insert
the text. (T he text w ill be inserted to the left o f the
cu rso r.)
3. M ove th e T ext. To m ove the block o f text:
Press: (F8|

Result: The text defined in Step 1 is deleted from its

original location and inserted at the cursor location.
This com pletes the operation. |3] is not necessary after
Step 3 since the text is autom atically undefined w hen
you m ove it (b u t not w hen you copy it ) .

N o te #1 M oving o r C o p y in g T ex t B etw een W in d o w s. W hen

you press [F8] (o r [F7] w hen co p yin g ), X yW rite first looks
w ith in the current docum ent for the defined block o f
text to m ove. If it can’t find any defined b lock there, it
w ill look in the other w in d o w for a defined b lock to
m ove.

N ote #2 Size L im itatio n . W hen defining, m oving or copying a

long block, X yW rite m ight beep and give you the
message “ Can’t Scro ll Define or D isp lay.” This usually
occurs w hen you are w orking on a large docum ent. The
solution is to save the defined b lo ck to a Save/Get key
(say, [F2]A) and release the b lock w ith [F i. Then move to
the point o f insertion and press @ A .

3-28
PlJRPOSE X y W rite offers m any different ways to delete text, as
listed on the next page. There is also an undelete feature
(in clu d e d at the end o f the lis t ).

A c tio n D e le tin g T e x t
To delete text b y character, w ord , sentence or
paragraph:

£DIT1NU I EXT
1. M ove the cursor onto (o r next to, as ap p rop riate)
the text to be deleted.

2. Press the appropriate delete k e y (s ) — fo r exam ple,

[Deil. If you w ish , hold dow n the k e y (s ) to repeat the §
delete.
Im portant: If you hold a key dow n too long, characters
m ay continue to be deleted after you release the key. If
that happens, use [Ctrl] [BreakI to stop it.

A c tio n D e l e t i n g a D e f in e d B lo c k o f T e x t
Use this procedure to delete any am ount o f text — a
single character, paragraph or a colum n or the entire
docum ent. T his action takes tw o steps:
1. D efine the b lo ck o f text you w ant deleted. (F o r
m ore details refer to the section “ D efining A B lo ck
o f T ex t” in this ch ap ter.)

2. Press: [Ait] [F6]

Result: The text defined in Step 1 is deleted.
There is a p ractical lim it to the am ount o f text you can
define and delete at once. R efer to the explanation in
the e a rlie r section “ D efining a B lo ck o f T ex t.”
 n m u s im « 2 5 .1 * 0

Delete Keys

Dell Delete Character. This key deletes the character at the cursor
location. When held down, the cursor remains in one place and
gobbles up the characters to the right. (When held: Delete
Characters to Right.)
Backspace 1 Delete Character to Left. (Backspace) Deletes characters to
the left of the cursor.
[Ajj] [50 Delete Word. This deletes the word the cursor is on. If the
cursor is not on a word, it deletes the word which follows. (When
held: Delete Words to Right). (See Notes #1 & #2)
Ml IBackspace! Delete Word to Left. This deletes the word to the left of the
word that the cursor is on. (See Notes #1 & #2)
fCWl [Dell Delete to End of Line. This deletes from the cursor position to
the right end of the line. (See Note #1)
[Äiti dH Delete Entire Line. This deletes the line the cursor rests on.
(See Note #1)
M dH Deleting a Defined Block. This deletes whatever block of text is
currently defined. Follow the procedure “ Deleting a Defined
Block of Text.” This procedure allows you to delete any size
block of text, from one character to the entire document.
[m 3d ll Undelete. Recovers the most recently deleted word, line or block
of characters back into the text. It cannot recover characters
which were deleted with [Dei] or iBackspacel. Note that Undelete
works only for the last thing deleted. (See Note #3)

Note: The following Delete functions are not pre-assigned to any keys.
To assign them to keys of your choice, refer to the section on Function
Calls in the Keyboard File section of Chapter 6. The functions are:
Delete by Sentence (RS)
Delete by Paragraph (RP)
Delete Spaces to the left of the cursor (UP)

3-30
[© « * * ■ iw jn r n i*

NOTE #1 E rr o r B eep. The functions noted e arlie r w ill beep if

any text is already defined. To avoid the beep, press [F3]
(to release any defined tex t) p rio r to executing the
function. For exam ple, press [ra] before [m][^]- (These
functions do not w ork if any text is already defined,
because they them selves must use the feature o f
defined tex t.)

NOTE #2 W o rd S e p a ra to rs. The two noted functions delete all

text up to and including any word separator. The most
common word separator is the single space. The other
separators are:

= ( ) [ ] { } < > / \ : ; £\ . ! ? C
The fo llo w in g four characters are treated as text, not as
w ord separators: $ __

NOTE #3 U n d ele te Size L im ita tio n . Note that there is a

p ractical lim it to the am ount o f text that you can delete
and s till recover w ith U ndelete. (Y o u w ill get the
message “ O ut o f M em ory” w hen you reach this lim it.)
This lim it depends on the num ber and size o f files open
w ith in X yW rite . You w ill have m ore m em ory available
to you if you operate w ith o n ly one w in d o w open.
If you have accid en tally deleted a large block o f text
that cannot be undeleted, you can A BO RT and restore
the file to its orig inal contents. (T h is m ay be p ractical
on ly if you have recently saved your docum ent.)

3-31
n o t es
 u S f ü iilü

I ntro If you need to make calculations, you don’t need to leave

X yW rite for some other program — you can perform
calculations right on the Command Line. And in the text
area, you can add/subtract numbers one-by-one, total a
defined block o f numbers in your document, or evaluate
a math expression w ith just a few keystrokes.

Contents Page S ection

3-34 H eader Calculations

3-34 Cursor Arithm etic

M ath

3-33
iW l» - » -e-
f ­

o rm at Addition
• Subtraction
'.«.I«'.'. sv. • ”... •
~ M u ltip licatio n
D ivision
Equals " 3 !
. .jr.. - ------

sc are im m ediate coi

P urpose The math functions enable you to perform math

calculations in tw o ways:

• H ead er C alculations. You can perform addition,

subtraction, m ultiplication and division on the
Command Line.
• C u rso r A rithm etic. You can add or subtract
numbers one at a time or in blocks. You can also
evaluate any type o f math expression by using block
define.
The result o f any calculation is two decim al positions
greater than the number o f decim al positions used by the
most precise input number. For exam ple, 2/3=.66 but
2 .000/ 3-. 66666.

A ction H e a d e r C a lc u la tio n s .
T o perform calculations on the Command Line, you can
use addition (+), subtraction (-), m ultiplication (*), and
division (/). End the calculation w ith the equal sign O )
and 5 3 (Enter). For example:
Type: [r O3 *4-1/2=@
Result: The answer is 11.5. You may use parentheses to
group parts of a calculation, such as (l+ 2)*3-.

A ction C u r s o r A rith m e tic .

There are several methods for summing numbers w hich
are already present in the text.

A d d in g/S ubtracting N um bers One-By-One. (Method I )

1. To add or subtract numbers one at a time, move the
cursor onto a number and press [Ait] [Tj (to add) or
iAitl Q (to subtract).
Result: The interm ediate answer appears on the
prompt line.
3-34
 i J ETin

2. Then m ove the cursor to w here you w ant the final

answer placed, and press [Ait] 0 to place the result in
the text. (This also clears the internal sum — sets it to
zero.)

You must use the num eric keypad 0 and Q rather

than the 0 and Q along the top row of the keyboard.

T otaling a B lock o f N um bers in th e T e x t (Method 2)

1. D efine a block o f existing numbers (such as a row or
colum n). To define the block use [FiJ or 0 [Fl] as you
w ould define any text.

2. Press [M] 0 to add or [AitlPl to subtract. This sums the

defined numbers and adds (o r subtracts) the total to
the internal sum.

3- Then m ove the cursor to w here you w ant the final

answer placed, and press [Alt] 0 to place the result in
the text. This also clears the internal sum — sets it to
zero. Be sure to release the defined numbers w ith

E valuating a n E x p re ssio n in th e Text. (Method 3)

1. In the text area, define a block around any math
expression (such as 3*4-1/2). There must be no
spaces in the expression. You are allow ed to use
parentheses. (A n equal sign is not required.)

2. Use [Art] 0 to calculate the result and add it to the

internal sum, or use [Ait] P to subtract it.

3. Then move the cursor to w here you w ant the final

answer placed, and press [m ] 0 to place the result in
the text. This also clears the internal sum — sets it to
zero. Be sure to release the defined numbers by
pressing [F3].
itS H in k H D n iB I

TIP C learin g D efin ed Text. Prio r to using any math

functions, it is a good idea to do tw o things:

1. Press [F3] (to release any defined numbers or text)

2. Clear the internal sum w ith CLRSUM

This w ill ensure you are summing only the numbers you
have explicitly defined. (See the follow ing N ote.)

NOTE C learin g th e Sum . To set the internal sum equal to

zero:

Type: [fU c lrs u m S

Result: This clears the calculator to zero. The

abbreviation for CLRSUM is CS.

3-36
"\ I ntro This section describes the capability to store and recall
frequently-used text. The first section, Save/Get
Procedure, covers the overall process; individual
commands are described in the second part.

C ontents page section C om m and

3-38 Save/G et P ro ce d u re
3-39 Tem porary Use of Save/Get Keys
3-40 D isk Use o f Save/Get Keys

C om m ands
3-42 Save Text w*
3-43 G et Text S I#
3-44 D isplay Save/Get D irectory EMKED
3-45 D isplay Save/Get K ey m m #
3-46 Append to Save/Get K ey Shiftl IF2l#
3-47 Store Save/Get Keys to D isk STSGT

lag/lAVs
3-48 Load Save/Get Keys from D isk LDSGT
3-49 Clear Save/Get Keys CLRSGT, REMOVE
3-50 Insert Save/Get Text IS

3-37
K E f e a B S l i/ T T liiiin V «

P urpose Save/Get keys allow you to save inform ation for later
recall. You do this by defining a block o f text and saving
it to any one o f thirty-six [Art] keys. W e call these
Save/Get keys because you can save text on them and
later get that text back. You can recall the saved
inform ation as m any times as you want, w henever you
want.

Save/Get keys have m any uses, including:

1. B o ilerp late Text. Keep often-used blocks of text at

hand to insert into a docum ent w henever you wish.

2. Cut a n d P aste. Save blocks of text to insert at other

locations in any w indow .

3. E m b ed d ed C o m m ands. You can save embedded

commands (such as LM, RM, TS, IP , M D B O ) to a
Save/Get key exactly the same w ay you save text.
Then you can switch formats w ith a sim ple [Ait]
keystroke.

The process is quite simple. For example, to save a

sentence to the [m IA key, position the cursor w ithin the
sentence and define it using the [Ctf] 03 (D efine Sentence)
function. Then strike [fi]A (Save D efined Blo ck).

To recall the block you just saved, press ® A . You can

recall the block as m any times as you desire (until the
key is cleared or redefined).

The follow ing procedure runs through the entire

sequence o f (1 ) saving text tem porarily to Save/Get keys,
and (2 ) saving a set o f Save/Get keys to disk.

(Aside: There are 36 other Save/Gets reserved strictly for

running programs. These correspond to Function Calls
& A to & Z and &0 to &9 w hich are described at the LD PM
command in User Program m ing in Chapter 5.)
 ¡TOira! RTVt

SAVE/GET KEYS
• i : : ; ’>
! ' ~ Lu-
:L i...- ...■'
'
' 1- ■•- ’
l:- ’.t
t:
T .J.i.ê

jjm m m Lsim n i u iil p

S ave/G et Keys lo w it [R ifjiry mrrifo in
(in M em ory)

STSGT ALTKEYS.SGT LDSGT ALTKEYS.SGT

ALTKEYS.SGT
(File on Disk) 0
1

—.«/S4“ .xmm: *:

3-39
R E ÏK 8 E 5 1 I/E m ï î iïïT i«

A ction T e m p o r a r y U se o f S a v e /G e t K e y s.
This procedure saves text to m em ory and not disk. Refer
to the illustration on the previous page for an overview o f
the follow ing commands. W ith a docum ent open, do the
follow ing:
1. Save th e Text. D efine the text you w ant to save. For
exam ple, to define a line o f text, m ove the cursor to
the line and press [£4|.
To save the text to one o f the 36 possible Save/Get
keys, press [R j follow ed by any letter or num ber key.
To save to letter X , for exam ple:
Press: [F2|X
Press: [F3] (to release the defined block)
If you w ant to save new text to key X , repeat this
procedure. The new text replaces the previous text.
2. G et th e Text. T o insert the text from one o f the keys
(say, Save/Get X ) into the file:
Press: [Ajflx
You can repeat Step 2 to insert the text in this or other
documents as m any times as you wish.

A ction D is k U se o f S a v e /G e t K ey s.
This procedure shows you (1 ) how to store the current
set o f Save/Get keys to disk, and (2 ) how to recall the set
for use at a future editing session. (Refer to the previous
illustration.)
1. Store Save/G et K eys to Disk. First view the current
set o f Save/Get keys (this is the set you w ill store):
Press: [Aft] [?2|
To return to the docum ent, after view ing, press
ISoace BarI. To save the current set o f Save/Get keys:
Type: IS s ts g t a lt k e y s .s a v 0 /—*
You can save to any filenam e you wish. You can
even store different sets o f ® keys under different
filenam es, and later recall w hichever set you need.

3-40
 2. L oading S ave/G et K eys fro m D isk. O nce the
Save/Get keys ([M l keys) have been saved to disk,
they can be loaded back into use at other editing
sessions as follow s.

Enter LD SG T along w ith the name o f the Save/Get set

you stored in Step 1.

Type: [Fsjldsgt a ltk e y s .s a v £ j]

W hen this new set o f keys is loaded, it overlays the

previous set. Unassigned keys in the new set do not
disturb previously assigned keys. (If you w ould prefer
to clear the old [Ml keys before loading a new set,
enter CLRSG T at the command lin e.)

You m ay include a LD SG T command in the

STA RTU P.IN T file to autom atically load a particular
o f [Ml keys every time X yW rite is started.

S a ve /G et K eys
(O p tion al) To check that the [Ml keys w ere indeed
loaded, view them by pressing [Aitl lF2l. W hen done
view ing the [Ml keys, press l$paceBari.

NOTE #1 R em oving a Save/G et. The process o f storing new text

to a Save/Get key clears the previous text from that key.
You can also use the REM O V E command (described later
in this section) to clear text from a key.

NOTE #2 A ttention! Be aware that a Save/Get file is not an

ordinary file. Ju st as you don’t store it w ith the usual
STO RE command, you cannot call it for editing w ith
CALL. If called up w ith CALL it is not readable; and if it
is stored w ith STO RE, the file w ill be ruined. This file
cannot be edited directly. Instead, get the text to be edited
into a regular file, (e.g., using [Mix), edit it and SA VE the
new version to the same key (using [F2]x). Then store the
set o f Save/Gets back to disk w ith STSGT.

NOTE #3 TYPE % a n d SAVE % . You can print the contents o f a

single Save/Get using the T Y P E % command — for
exam ple, use T Y P E % A to print the Contents o f Save/Get
A. Sim ilarly, use SA VE % A to save the Contents of
Save/Get A to disk (it is saved as A .SAV).

3-41
rn o m rn m W E & r

Save Text /*
7ORMAT F2

* is a letter (A-Z) or num ber (0 9 ) key.

This is an im m ediate command.
VAr- • ' —~

P u rpo se iF2|# copies the defined block o f text to the Save/Get

key you specify. (T h is is a short-term Save — that is, the
text is saved u n til you Q U IT X y W rite .) You can recall
the text at any tim e by pressing ¡A| and that same letter
or num ber key. You can save as m uch text as m em ory
allow s — typ ica lly up to 10K or 20K. For an overview
of the Save/Get key procedure and w hat it ’s used for,
see the previous section “ Save/Get Procedure.”
If tex t is already present in th e Save/G et key, this
command erases that text before saving the new text. If
you w ish to keep the text w h ich is there and sim ply add
text to the end o f it, use the “ Append to a Save/Get
key” command.

ACTION T e m p o r a r y S a v e to a S a v e /G e t K ey
To save text un til you quit X yW rite:
1. D efine th e Text. Define the text you want to save.
2. Save th e Text. Choose w h ich key you w ant to
assign to the defined block: A-Z, or 0-9. To save to
the X key, for exam ple:
Press: [F2]x

Result: Any text previously saved to the (a| X key

(if any) is erased, and the text defined in Step 1
is saved to that key. The prom pt lin e then says
“ D O N E.”
3. View th e [Aft] Key. (O p tio n a l) To vie w the text
saved to that one key:
Press:
Press: X
A fter view in g the text, press [Space Bari (o r any key) to
return to the docum ent.

3-42
 Alt

;ORMAT Aft ” G et Text te fî:

* is a letter (A-Z) or num ber (0-9) key. :
This com m and is an im m ediate com m and.

P u r po se * copies text from the Save/Get key to the cursor

location. You can re call the text at any tim e (as many
tim es as you w ish ). This is the “ G e t” operation o f the
Save/Get keys.
You norm ally “ get” text in order to copy it to another
location. For an o verview o f the Save/Get key
procedure, see the earlier section “ Save/Get
Proced ure.”
M * inserts text into the text area on ly — not on the
Command Line (unless the Save/Get contains a
program ).

SSHU Xao/lAVS
A ctio n G e t t i n g T e x t f r o m a S a v e /G e t k e y
Use this procedure to insert text w h ich has been
previously saved to a Save/Get key.
1. M ove the cursor to the spot in the docum ent w here
you w ant to insert the Save/Get text.
2. Press [A0 along w ith the key you w ant. For exam ple,
to get the text from Save/Get key A:
Press: Alt A
Result: This gets the text from the |Att|A key and inserts
it into the docum ent at the cursor location.

3-43
I II ïïû m H ir e r Alt >2

¡F o rm a t D isp lay Save/Get D irectory

This is anIm m ediate com rnand al

P u r po se |U displays the entire set o f Save/Get keys. This

fAit]
enables you to check w h ich Save/Get keys are cu rren tly
availab le — to rem ind you w hat text is saved to each
key.

A ctio n D i s p la y in g t h e S a v e /G e t D i r e c t o r y
To display the cu rren tly loaded set o f Save/Get keys:

1. Press:
Result: The Save/Get keys are listed on the
display. Each entry begins w ith its identifying
letter or num ber.
There is one lin e per Save/Get — o n ly the first 35
characters o f each Save/Get are displayed. To vie w
up to one screenful o f text, use the “ D isp lay Save/
G et K ey” Com mand w h ich fo llo w s. V
2. W hen done view ing:

Press: ij (o r any other key)

Result: This returns you to your docum ent.

3*44
 0

§30* D isp lay Save/Get Keys *mr «

* i
s M i r - • • • • ruifSV«-'- •’ .¿r: rr - r —- - - ¿m ■
1___
* is a letter (A-2) or num ber (0-9).
This is an im m ediate com m and/ ? ;
fe ra 'j " if.

P u r po se |* displays the text in the Save/Get key you

specify. This enables you to read the text before
inserting it into a docum ent. If the text is more than one
screenful, on ly the first screen is shown.
This com m and is sim ilar to the previous command
“ D isp lay the Save/Get D irecto ry.”

A ctio n D is p la y in g a S a v e /G e t K e y
To display the contents o f a Save/Get key:
1. Press M ISO together, then the letter or num ber you
w ant to view . For exam ple, to vie w key A:
> Vi

Press: [Ctrl] [fU >

Press: a Ig?
!H
Result: The contents o f Save/Get A is displayed.
U p to a screenful o f text is displayed, although the
Save/Get key can hold more than that.
W hen done view in g :
Press: [Space Bar| (o r any other key)
Result: This returns you to your docum ent.

3-45
 ...................................... ■ ......................................... id.

¡F o rm at Append to Save/Get Keys

m
* is a letter (A-Z) or num ber (0-9). •S3
•••.
This is an im m ediate command.

P u rpo se [Shift] |2] * appends the currently defined text to the end
o f the Save/Get key you specify.
One use might be for re-arranging blocks o f text; you
could add blocks o f text to a Save/Get key in the order
you w ish, and then recall the entire series o f blocks.

ACTION A p p e n d in g t o a S a v e /G e t K ey
To append text to a Save/Get key:
1. D efine th e Text. Define the text you want
to append.
2. A p p en d th e Text. Choose w hich key you want
to append to: A-Z, or 0-9. To append to the X key,
for exam ple:
Press: H H [F2]
Press: X
Result: Any text previously saved to the |A0X key
( if any) is kept, and the text defined in Step 1 is
added to the end. The prom pt line then says
“ D O N E.”
3- View th e @ Key. (O p tio n a l) To view the text
saved to that one key:
Press: Ctrl

Press:
After view ing the text, press iSpace Bari to return to
the docum ent.

/■

3-46
S K lE D S U H r

;ORMAT S3 STSGT fife n a m e Store Save/Get Keys

file n a m e identifies the file on disk to w h ich the Save/
G et keys w il 1be stored. —

iïMi?
T his is an im m ediate com m and.

P u r po se STSGT (Store Save/Get keys) stores a ll o f the cu rren tly

active Save/Get keys to the specified file on disk. This
enables you to reload the keys for use at a later editing
session.

A ctio n S t o r i n g S a v e /G e t K e y s t o D is k
T his procedure saves Save/G et keys to disk. R efer to the
illu stratio n in the section “ Save/G et Procedure” .
1. V iew th e S a v e /G e t K eys. (O p tio n a l) To vie w the
text w h ich w ill be saved to disk:
Press: Alt

A fter view in g the text, return to the docum ent by

pressing @ .

2. D isk Save (L ong-T erm Save). To save to disk a ll

o f the keys view ed in Step 1:
Type: [rejstsgt a ltk e y s .s a v @

In this case, A LTKEYS.SA V is the filenam e to w h ich

the keys are stored; you can use any filenam e you
w ish. You can even store different sets o f |m ] keys
under different filenam es and later re call
w h ich ever set you need.
If you are using subdirectories, and plan to load the
file w ith ST A RT U P.IN T , be sure to save the keys to
the same d irecto ry that has ED IT O R .E X E .
IRïk iî B S T v g j^ B H K t u g a lR i iia IJf3 ! 3 t :H K K S 3 lV

ISp B tSSSiP
;ORMAT 02 LDSGT file n a m e ............ .. Load Save/G et Keys
Ijp^jpr . ‘rr■
,■ ■'"^T 1 Ti'i 1 - '£
file n a m e is the file from w h ich the Save/G et keys w ill f
be re ca lle d . ~ V " - ^ I
T his is an im m ediate com m an

P u r po se LDSGT (Load Save/G et K eys) loads a ll o f the Save/Get

keys from the specified file on disk. This enables you to
use the keys saved in a previous ed itin g session. To see
how this com plem ents the STSG T com m and, refer to
the illu stra tio n in the e a rlie r section “ Save/G et
Pro ced u re.”

A c tio n L o a d i n g S a v e / G e t K e y s f r o m D is k
To load a set o f the Save/G et keys from the disk and
restore them to use, enter the LD SG T com m and along
w ith the name o f the Save/G et file you w ant to load. For
exam ple:
/■
Type: [F5]ldsgt a ltk e y s .s a v g ]

(O p tio n a l) To check that the keys w ere indeed loaded:

Press: [M] [F2

W hen done view in g the [m ] keys, press [Space Bar i . You

m ay n ow insert the text from any o f these keys into any
file you c a ll up.

N o te #1 O v e rla y in g Sets o f S a v e /G e t K eys. Loading a set o f

Save/G et keys replaces o n ly those keys contained in the
set you are loading. The contents o f a ll other keys
rem ains unchanged. For exam ple, if keys A ,B,C and D
are o rig in a lly defined, and you load a n ew set w ith keys
C ,D ,E and F, you w ill end up w ith the old A, old B, new
C, n ew D, new E and new F.

N o te # 2 C le a rin g S a v e /G e ts. If you w o u ld prefer to cle a r the

keys before loading a new set, use C LRSG T.

Tip S ta rtin g X y W rite w ith S a v e /G e ts L oaded. You can

in clu d e LD SG T in the ST A R T U P.IN T file to autom at­
ic a lly load the [Alt] keys every tim e X y W rite is started.

3-48
m I LMKBM m i M » P i » KN gkP

ÖRMAT ‘ EE CLRSGT A il Save/Gets

03 REMOVE# Clear Single Save/Get
# is the Save/Get key — any single letter (A-Z), single
S i .number (0-9), I or &0-&9,
.^ C I ^ g T andJ^MOVE are immediat^epmmands.

P urpose CLRSGT (C lear Save/Get K eys) clears all o f the current

Save/Get keys from memory. You might do this before
loading in a new set o f Save/Get keys.

REMOVE (Rem ove Save/Get K ey) clears any single

Save/Get key (o r user program ) from memory.

CLRSGT and REM O VE have no effect on any Save/Get

files stored on disk.

A ction C le a r in g A ll S a v e /G e t K e y s.

S a v e /G et K eys
To elim inate all current Save/Get keys from memory:

Type: [F5]clrsgt[±j]

Result: A ll Save/Get keys are now cleared from memory.

This operation does not affect any Save/Get files on disk.

A ction C le a r in g a S in g le S a v e /G e t K ey .
To clear a single Save/Get key from memory, enter
REM O VE follow ed by the name o f the Save/Get (A-Z, 0-9,
&A-&Z, or &0-&9). For exam ple, to clear Save/Get X:

Type: F5]remove x 0

Result: Save/Get X is now cleared from memory.

NOTE Save/G ets R eserved fo r P ro g ram m in g . Save/Gets

labeled & A to & Z and &0 to &9 are reserved strictly for
user programming. These are described in the LD PM
section o f User Program m ing in Chapter 5.

3-49
IS E p r t i g g f e a B B i

B Q IS #•J .Insert Save/Get Text

# is
— •;
any• letter or number. -*2& • ••^
IS is an em bedded command. M fe

P urpose The IS (Insert Save/Get) command allow s you to insert

any Save/Get block into the text at printout. IS performs
the same function as [Aft)A except A IS:A is displayed
on-screen instead o f the actual text.

The IS command gives you the ability, for exam ple, to

make up a form letter using the text from various
Save/Get keys. To do this, save each block you w ant
inserted in the letter to a Save/Get, insert an IS command
at each point in the letter w here you want Save/Get text
inserted, and then print the letter.

A ction E n te r in g a n I n s e r t S a v e /G e t C o m m a n d .
To enter an Insert Save/Get command into your text:

1. Position the cursor w here you want to insert the

Save/Get text.

2. Enter the IS command along w ith the Save/Get letter

or num ber key. For exam ple, to insert Save/Get X:

Type: [£5]is X 0

Result: The IS command appears in the text as

A IS:X

3-50
I ntro Rather than scrolling screen-by-screen through the text
hunting for a word, you can learn to m ake the computer
w ork for you. The Search and Change commands can
help you im prove the speed at w hich you revise text.
Some time spent learning these commands can pay off
w ell.

Contents Pa«e Section C om m and

3-52 Searching For Text SEARCH

3-57 Searching Through Files SEARCH
3-58 Changing Text CHANGE
3-62 G o to Page and Line No. GO
3-65 Com paring Tw o Files Ctrl 9 , [Cjr00
 — ^ ~ ■ ■-i -i— r —. ■ . • t I.",!'1; ; . " -mi*;-..;- ;.. - , :y - ®

03 SEARCH /s tr in g / : - Search forw ard . fs*

03 SEARCHA / string / Search forw ard, absolute m atch
03 SEARCH B / string / Search backward
03SEARCHBA /s tr in g / Search backward, absolute m atch
IP
m
jp S E /s tr in g / 7
03 SEA / strin g /
03SEB /s tr in g /1 '_y. YiW E t
i
: 03SEBA / string/

In place o f the slash (/ ), you can use any character that

does not appear in the string (See Note * 4 ).
A ll o f these are im m ediate commands.
• ' Y/

P urpose The SEARCH command and its variations allow you to

search through a docum ent to find the text you specify
(string). You have the four search choices listed above.
You can search in either direction — the search continues r-
until it finds the string or reaches the end of the
docum ent. To search through more than one file, refer to
the next section “Searching Through Files.”
A b so lu te Case M atch. The A (ab solu te) at the end o f
SEARCHA and SEARCHBA means absolute case m atch:
The search stops only for text that has exactly the same
uppercase and low ercase letters that you sp ecify — they
must m atch letter-for-letter. See the exam ples that
fo llo w .
S trin g . The string shown above in the form at
statements includes a ll characters that appear between
the tw o slashes, includ in g spaces, punctuation and
symbols.
S earch a n d R eplace. If you w ant to search a n d
replace the text, refer to the CH A N G E commands in a
later section.

W ild card S earch C h a ra c te rs. At the end o f this

section is a list o f w ild card search characters w h ich are
very useful in searches.

3-52
X& nH O I

ACTION S earch fo r T ext

To search for text in a docum ent:
1. M ove the cursor to the point w here you w ant the
search to begin.

2. Enter the SEARCH com m and or variation , along

w ith the text yo u ’re looking for. For exam ple, to
search forw ard for the w ord “ orange” :
Type: [F5]search /o ra n g e /0
Result: The search begins at the cursor location
and searches forw ard, stopping at the first
occurrence o f “ orange” .
3. To search for the next occurrence o f “ orange” :
Press: |f|]
Note: C ontinuing the search w ith (re] w orks o n ly if
the search com m and is s till on the Com m and Line.

EXAMPLES 03 search /orange/ Begins at the cursor location

in text and searches fo r w a rd ,
stopping at the first

S earch
occurrence o f “ orange” (o r
“ O range” , or “ O R A N G E” ,
accepting letters o f eith er
& R epla c e
case).
Hflsearcha /orange/ Search stops o n ly for
“ orange” (it w ou ld skip over
“ O range” and “ O R A N G E” ).
Hflsearchb /orange/ Begins at the cursor location
and searches b a ckw a rd ,
accepting eith er case.
BJlseba /orange/ Searches backward o n ly for
“ orange” (skipp ing over
“ O range” and “ O R A N G E” ).

3-53
îf3 5 i d ¡ ï ï î ï i g j p ï ï f l i tS * W L L S D < *» O fr

NOTE #1 S h o rtc u t. To search for just one word, you can use:
gQse orange
Note there are tw o spaces between “ se” and “ orange” .
This does not w ork w hen searching for more than one
w ord. (See Note #4 .)

N ote #2 Spaces a re C h a ra c te rs, Too. Spaces are counted in

the search the same as any printable character. For
exam ple:
search /b a b y s it/
w ould n o t stop at “ baby sit” . Because of the space, the
tw o words do not match.

n o te #3 Special C h ara cters. A ll characters w h ich appear

between the slashes (/ ) are searched for, includ ing the
fo llo w in g special characters:

C h a ra c te r Key
Tab [Tab]
Space ISpaceBar
Carriage return [cm] 0
Left double-angle bracket ( « ) ICtrilRI
Right double-angle bracket ( » ) [ctril F I

No te #4 T he Slash ( / ) S e p a ra to r. You are not required to use

the slash (/ ) to begin and end the string. You can use
any character w h ich does not appear in the string. In
fact, you must n o t use a slash if it appears in the string
(see the next N o te ). You can even use the single space
as the separator as long as the space is not included in
the string — this is w hy the shortcut in Note * 1 works.
(T h e Command Line is in itia lly a row o f spaces, so you
get a space at the end o f the w ord autom atically).

3-54
K B B u e j; K E & rri r f R r ^ jja

Note #5 S earch in g fo r a S lash (/ ). If you are searching for text

w hich contains a slash character (/), such as miles/hour,
you must use a character other than the slash to enclose
the text — choose any character w hich does not appear
in the text. For exam ple, you might choose the double
quotation m ark ("):
GSlsearch "m ile s /h o u rH

N ote #6 S earch in g f o r E m bedded Text. To search for

em bedded text, you must sw itch to Expanded D isplay.
Em bedded text is visible in Expanded D isplay w ithin
double-angle brackets, such as left margin « L M » , right
margin « R M » , indent paragraph « IP O ,10», page break
« P G » , and tab set «TS5,10,15».

This capability can be very useful. To search backw ard

for the previous tab setting, you w ould type:

[relseb / « t s /5 3

Enter the left double-angle bracket by pressing [cw][<|. (If

you did not include the double-angle bracket, the search
w ould stop at any w ord containing tS, such as itself

Search
Note #7 D isplay M odes. A search w ill not match text w hich is
partially bold, underline, or reverse. For instance,
& Replace
SEARCH /fulltim e/ w ill stop on "fulltim e", but w ill not
stop on "fu lltim e". This is because the latter has
« M D U L » em bedded in it, w hich is seen as characters in
the search. In Expanded D isplay you w ould see:

f u l l « MDUL »tim e

3-55
S l M B ^ y i l S a [G G n tttl]

NOTE #8 W ild C ard C h a ra c te rs. The fo llo w in g w ild card

characters can be used in searches. W e c a ll these
w ildcard characters because (lik e joker cards in poker)
they can represent other values. They provide you w ith
p ow erful search cap ab ilities.
A n y S ingle L e tte r (A-Z): H Press: (a| [Shift]I.
You can read this w ild ca rd as any letter. It allo w s any o f
the 26 letters o f the alphabet to take its position in the
text.

A n y S ingle N u m b e r (0-9): (3 Press: [Äiti [Shift] N

You can read this w ild card as any num ber. It allo w s any
o f the 10 num bers to take its position in the text.
A ny S ingle N u m b e r o r L e tte r: Q
Press: |m] [ShiftlA
You can read this w ild card as any num ber or letter. It
represents any o f the 26 letters or 10 num bers w hen the
search is executed.
A ny S ingle C h a ra c te r: Q Press: [Äiti [Shift] X
You can read this w ild card as any character. It
represents any character, letter, num ber, punctuation,
space, sym bol, or other graphic m ark o f the 255
characters o f the A SC II set w hen the search is executed.
A n y S ingle S e p a ra to r: (3 Press: @ [ShiftlS
You can read this w ild card as any separator character.
The most com m on w ord separator is the single space.
The other separators are:

A ny S trin g o f C h a ra c te rs: Q Press: [Art] [ShiftlW

You can read this w ild card as any string up to 80
characters in length. It can in clu d e any characters from
the 255 characters o f the A S C II set. T his w ild card must
be used w ith at least one other character.

3-56
• m m m

Exa m ples 0 3 search /computes/ Finds “ com puter” and

“ com puted”
S3 search /chapter 0/ Finds “ Chapter 1” and
“ Chapter 2”
S3 search / Q 06-8964/ Finds “ 386-8964”
and“ EU6-8964”
B3search /8Q23086 Finds “ 8-23-86” and
“ 8/ 23/ 86 ”
S3 search /0rose@ / Finds “ rose” w hen it
stands alone — it
w ould not stop at
“ prim rose” or
“ rosem ary” .

S3 search /A lex flB ell/ Finds “ Alex B e ll” ,

“ Alexander B e ll” and
“ Alexander Graham
B e ll” .

No te #9 S e a rc h in g f o r J u s t a W ord. The single separator w ild

card [m] iShiftl $ deserves special m ention. It allow s you to
search for just a w ord, as shown in the exam ple above.
It skips over occurrences of the string as part o f a larger
w ord.

N o te #10 R elated C o m m an d s. If you w ant to search for text,

and replace it w ith other text, refer to the CH AN G E
commands w h ich fo llo w .

note #11 S topping a Long Search. Use the 1Ctrl I [Break]key to stop
a lengthy search that is in process.

3-57
 ORMAT S3 SEARCH rangelstrihgl Search files
M SEARCHA range/string/ Search files, absolute m atch

03 SE range/string/ sSr
S3 SEA range/string/
range is globalnam el,globalnai
glo b a ln a m e is described below.
’'S I-
These are im m ediate commands.

JS S s e ¿>/o ran g e/ l i %

P urpose W hen you specify a range along w ith the SEARCH

command, you can search across m ultiple files to find the
string o f text you w ant. You w ould use this procedure
w hen you are looking for text but are not sure w hat file it
m ay be in. The other forms o f the command (SEA R C H B,
SEA RC H BA , C H A N G E) do not w ork across m ultiple files.

U nlike the search procedure o f the previous section,

w hen you search through more than one file, you must
start with an empty window. X yW rite w ill allo w you to
brow se quickly through the files, one at a time.

R ange. The range is the series o f filenam es you w ant to

search through, separated by commas (but no spaces
follow ing the com m as).

G lo b aln am e. The globalnam e can be any filename, such

as B:C H A PTER.D O C . It can also be any global filename
using * or ?, such as A:*.* or CHAPTERP.D O C or B:*.TXT.
You can include a d rive letter and path. Globalnam es are
described further under the D IR command in Chapter 2.

String. The string is the same as defined earlier for the

SEARCH command. It can include any w ildcard characters,
as described in the previous pages.
S H K I K M 'S K a ^ fflfg ju in h u g jip M ffih

Action S e a rc h f o r T e x t
To search across m ultiple files for text:
1. M ove to an empty screen (w here no file is open). For
example, press Ctrl F10 3.

2. Enter the SEARCH or SEARCHA command follow ed by

the filenames. Follow this w ith the string you want to
search for. For example:
Type: [?5]search a:*.*,b:*.doc/orange/ R

Result: The search looks for the first occurrence of

“orange”, first searching through the files on drive A
and then through the files w ith the extension DOC on
drive B.
3. Select your response. Type C, O, S or N-.
C Continue searching for the next occurrence.

O Open the file that is shown on the screen.

S Stop the search and clear the screen.

N Next file — skip to the next file and continue the

search.

Result: If you type C or N, the search continues until

“orange” next occurs. If you type O or S, the search stops.

Note # \ Stopping a Long Search. Use the Ctrlkey if you || r2 I

Break
want to stop a lengthy search that is in process. jjj| § |

Note n S earching fo r a Slash. If a slash (/ ) appears in the string

you are searching for, then use another character, such as
the quote ( ” ), to set off the string.
 ;"-^*Sj6£riu
m y strin g l/slrlrt and ve ri
/s tr in g ! /s tr in g 2 / e and v e rify ;
A b- ■
sr"'+o lu te
. SStBmsfrfX
,sr- "«-«VI. ■. . ... . . 7.-T .XTST ••• V V .—i f“ -,-

C H /s tr in g 1 /sirin g 2 / Change (n o v e rify )

__ ~/string 1 /strin g 2 / Change (n o v e rify ),
^ ^ - ^ a b s o lu t e

^ ® T Q L / strin g ! / s t r i n g 2 / ^ m
/s tr in g 1 /strin g 2 / Change In v isib le ;
.¿r~ abiToIute
M eans absolute case m atch (d escrib e
ii ¡‘Tr* r.t4nr«^r--ir1 str in g ! is the text being searched for.
trin g 2 is the text w h ich is inserted into the text,
r e p la c in g s ^ / .
A ll o f these are im m ediate com m ands. •¿mr1^SSSSSS-' ' .

P u r po se Each o f the C H A N G E commands searches forw ard

through the docum ent to find the text you sp ecify, in
order to replace it. The search ends at the bottom o f the
docum ent. To search w ith o u t replacing, see the
SEARCH com m ands.

V erify means that w hen X yW rite finds the string, it asks

you w h eth er or not to make the change. You must
respond before it w ill look for the next occu rrence.
A b so lu te C ase M atch. The “ A ” (ab so lu te) at the end
o f CVA, CHA, and C IA means absolute case m atch: The
search looks o n ly for text that has ex actly the same
uppercase and low ercase letters that you specified in
strin g !. They must m atch letter-for-letter.
R e p la c e m e n t T ex t. strin g 2 is alw ays inserted into the
text “ as is” , w ith its letters uppercase or low ercase
exa ctly as y o u typed them
"S
C h a n g e In v isib le . C l and C IA do not refresh the
d isp lay w h ile m aking changes, and so execute q u ick er
than the other com m ands.

3-60
[ Q E iu K iW »MiE h |g ||g g p E B t e

EXAMPLES 051cv /orange/grape/ Changes every instance o f

“ orange” , “ O range” and
“ O R A N G E” to “ grape” ,
stopping each tim e to a llo w
you to ve rify each change.

S3 cva /orange/grape/ The same as CV, but skips

over “ O range” and
“ O R A N G E” .

HUch /orange/grape/ Changes every instance o f

“ orange” , “ O range” and
“ O R A N G E” to “ grape” .
Runs non stop, w ith o u t
verifying. Each change is
visib le on the display.

Hflcha /orange/grape/ The same as CH , but skips

over “ O range” and
“ O R A N G E” .

Haci /orange/grape/ Changes every instance of

“ orange” , “ O range” and
“ O R A N G E” to “ grape” . The « S
changes are n o t displayed
u n til they are a ll done. This
com m and is m uch faster
than C H .

ffijc ia /orange/grape/ The same as C l, but skips

over “ O range” and
“ O R A N G E” . This command
is m uch faster than CHA.

3-61
ACTION C h a n g in g T e x t w i t h V e rify in g .
CV a n d CVA: To search for text and have X yW rite stop
to ask you to verify each change:

1. M ove the cursor to the point in text w here you w ant

to begin the search.

2. Enter CV or CVA. For exam ple, to search for the

w ord "orange" and replace w ith "grape":

Type: [F5]cv /orange/grape/ 0

Result: The search begins at the cursor location and

continues forward, stops at the first occurrence of
"orange" and asks you to verify the change. Since w e
specified CV (and not CVA, the search stops for
"O range" or "O RA N G E" or any other com bination o f
upper and low ercase letters.

3. V erify the Change. Type A, Q , N, S, or Y :

A Abandon the search (w ithout replacing the text)

and return cursor to initial starting point.
Q Abandon the search (w ithout replacing the text)
and leave the cursor at the current point.
N No, do not replace the text; continue the search.
S Stop after replacing the text.
Y Yes, change the text and continue the search.

Result: If you type Y or N, the search continues for the

next occurrence o f "orange". If you type A , Q or S, the
search stops.

ACTION C h a n g in g T e x t W ith o u t V e rify in g .

CH, CHA, Cl a n d CIA: To search for text and change it
without it stopping for verification:

1. Save th e D ocu m ent. As a precaution, before m aking

changes, it is a good idea to SA V E your docum ent,
(esp ecially w hen using C l or C IA ). This provides a
copy o f the docum ent on disk, allow ing you to
recover the original should you m istakenly change
text you did not intend to change.

3-62
iGBititijB Hiïïm m iugifiEii

Enter CH , CHA, C l or CIA. For exam ple, le t’s use

C H to search for the w ord “ orange” and replace
w ith “ grape” :
Type: [F5]ch /orange/grape/0
Result: The search begins at the cursor location
and continues forw ard; at each occurrence o f
“ orange” it rem oves the w ord and replaces it w ith
“ grape” . Since w e specified CH (and not C H A ), the
search stops for “ O range” or “ O R A N G E” or any
other com bination o f low ercase and uppercase
letters. The changes continue non-stop u n til the
end o f the docum ent is reached, at w h ich point the
prom pt lin e says DO NE.
Em ergency Stop. If you need to stop a search before
it reaches the end, press:
Ctril [Break]

NOTE D eletin g Text. You can use the CH A N G E commands to

delete text. You sim ply om it string2 from the command
(b u t keep the three slashes). For example, to delete the
w ord “orange” from your document, use:
ch /orange//

a ls o Se e R elated C o m m ands. Refer to the SEARCH commands,

to search w ith o u t replacing text. The notes in that
section also apply for these CH A N G E commands w ith
tw o exceptions:
• A ll CH AN G E commands search in a fo rw a rd
d irection — you cannot search and replace
backwards.
• U n like SEARCH commands, the CH A N G E
commands do not allo w the use o f w ild card
characters.

3-63
 M 5 lB a lB ^ p n tiB llB w M B » U 5 w t iK K »

' . :• .
V
F o rm a t BO g o w -w G o to Page and Line Num ber
«gsis—•;
ssg
1.,/ "

dsCi523-SïSîîî^ '
( If m is om itted, G O uses the current paj
jSjk'tfST- '-'„ittrirttfi • T
sj-UflPrijtK S s b b S W'isTtfie
:
■ ■■ ( If n is om itted, G O uses lin e 1).
]t-'''i- - ■'
.
G O is an im m ediate com m and.
s
P u r po se The G O com m and allow s you to go d ire ctly to the page
and lin e num ber you specify. This page and lin e
num ber corresponds to the PG-LN appearing in the
upper right corner o f the screen.

A c tio n M o v in g t o a P a g e a n d L in e N u m b e r
To m ove to certain page and lin e num ber in your
docum ent:
Enter the G O com m and w ith the page and lin e
num ber. For exam ple, to go to page 4, lin e 28,
Type: [ft] go 4-28[Enter]
Result: The page-line num ber turns on ( if not already
o n ) and the cursor moves to the first character position
o f lin e 28 on page 4.

N ote #1 O p tio n s. You can m ove to a sp ecific lin e on the

cu rren t page by om itting the page num ber. You must
precede the lin e num ber w ith a hyphen. For exam ple,
G O -3 moves the cursor to lin e 3 o f the current page.
To m ove to the first lin e o f any page, as a shortcut,
sp ecify o n ly the page num ber. For exam ple, G O 11
m oves the cursor to lin e 1 o f page 11.

NOTE #2 JUMP C o m m an d . The JM P (Ju m p ) com m and allow s

you to jum p to a sp ecific character w ith in the current
file. Use the form : JM P n w here n is the num ber o f
characters from the start o f the file. For exam ple,
JM P 9885 positions the cursor on the 9885th character
o f the file. Each @ (E n te r) counts as tw o characters:
Carriage Return / Line Feed. The characters w ith in
em bedded commands (th at appear in the Expanded
D isp lay) also count — thus, «RM70» counts as 6
characters.

3-64
m e m

&~Find
^rüï*6ià£~D ifference¿:^7
aäiäBKfi.
H Ö H I £®E|§5 at
n Find Match
.. ,V-C
SSBHbBc 5&WËSSË:

P urpose The C o m p are function allow s you to exam ine tw o

sim ilar files character-by-character to find likenesses and
differences. You might use this function to com pare an
edited version o f a file against the original.

Com pare uses tw o commands: Find D ifference [Ctrl] Q

and Find Match [CM] 0 . You m ay start the com parison
w ith either com m and, but you must use them alternately
to find matches and differences between the tw o files.

X yW rite defines a m atch as 80 consecutive m atching

characters. This means that Com pare does not stop at
insignificant matches such as the w ord “ the.” A single
character defines a file difference.

A ction C o m p a r in g T w o F ile s.
To com pare tw o files, say, your draft version o f a
docum ent w ith an edited version:

1. Call the first file to the screen.

Type: (U c a ll d r a f t ®

2. O pen a second w in dow and call the second file to the

screen.
Press: [Ait] [FIOl
Windows

Type: H U call c h a p t e r ®

3. Search for the first difference between the files:

Press: [CtrTI P I
Result: Com pare searches through both files until it
finds a difference. The cursor stops at that point in
both files. Use \M\ [fio] to toggle betw een the tw o files
to see exactly w hat the difference is. You can m ake an
edit in either file or proceed to the next step.

3-65
 4. Search for the next match between the files.
Press:
Result: Com pare searches through both files until it
finds a match. The cursor stops at that point in both
files.

5. Continue alternating the Find D ifference (Step 3) and

Find M atch (Step 4) commands until you have finished
the com parison.

NOTE #1 C o m p a rin g E m b ed d ed C o m m an d s. The Com pare

function w orks better at com paring em bedded commands
(such as RM, TS and M D B O ) if you sw itch to Expanded
D isplay in both files before starting the com parison. (U se
i.)
NOTE #2 C u rso r L ocation. The Com pare function starts its search
at the current cursor locations in both files. B e sure that
the cursor starts at the same point in both files or
Com pare w ill not find w here the files match.

3-66
 f S V / ic *

I ntro X yW rite gives you access to more than one document at

a time. In fact you can view as m any as nine documents
at once. X yW rite does this by displaying each document
in a separate w indow . These rectangular w indow s can
be any size you w ant and can overlap. You control how
the w indow s are displayed.

C ontents ess? S ection C o m m an d

3-68 W indow s
3-70 W ind ow Menu CtrlF10
3-73 Sw itching W indow s Shift |F10
3-74 O pening a N ew W indow WINDOW
3-75 Rem oving a W indow RS

3-67
kV /n ü f î T v i »

P urpose Q uite often it’s handy to be w orking on tw o files at the

same time, or m aybe even three or more. The w indow s
feature allow s you to do just that. W ith w indow s you can
sw itch between documents w ith one or tw o keystrokes.
You can access as m any as nine documents this w ay.
You can arrange these files inside w indow s that overlap
or are side by side. For exam ple, you can refer to several
different note files quickly and easily as you are w orking
on a chapter o f your novel.

A w in d o w is a rectangular area on the screen through

w hich you can view a docum ent, as in the illustration
below . Each docum ent requires its ow n w indow .
X yW rite starts w ith a single full-screen w indow . You can
open more w indow s in order to view other documents
without storing the documents that are already open.
You can move or copy text directly from one w indow to
another.

O p en W indow . W hen you are using more than one

w indow , then the w indow s that you are using are called
open windows. These w indow s can have documents in
them or not. A w indow w hich is not open is labeled
N O T IN U SE in the w indow menu. O nce you open a
w indow , it remains open until you close it (although it
m ay be hidden behind another w indow ).

Active W indow . W hen you have more than one w indow

open, only one is active at a time; the others are
suspended. The filenam e at the top o f the screen tells you
w hich file is active. You can type into the active
document, m odify it, scroll it and SA VE it.
The keys ÎShïftl [FÏÔ1 and [aR] [FÏÔ] control the m ovem ent of
the cursor from w indow to w indow . The cursor
remembers its position in each docum ent, so that it can
return to where you last left it.

W indow N um bers. Each w indow is num bered 1-9- You

can display the w indow num ber and filenam e for each
w indow by m oving the top border dow n one or more
lines. (This is apart from displaying the w indow num ber
and filenam e in the header at the top o f the screen.) Use
the procedure "Changing the Size o f a W indow ."

3-68
■ G S iiiF in B

Q uick W indow s. Y ou can call up w indow s quickly —

for exam ple, strike [Alt] 9 to get w indow 9. You w ould do
this by assigning function call #9 to the Alt-9 key in the
Keyboard File. See #1 to #9 Function Calls in Chapter 6.
Also see Super Keyboard, Appendix E.

P ro ce d u res. Refer to the sections that follow :

W ind ow M enu [Ctrl] [Fio]
• D isplaying the W indow
• O pening a W indow
• Changing the Size o f a W indow
• Changing a W in d ow to Fu ll Screen Size
• M oving to Another W in d ow by W in d ow Num ber
• Rem oving the Borders from A ll W indow s
Sw itching W indow s [m ] [fTo] , IShiftI ITiol
• Sw itching Betw een Tw o W indow s
• M oving to the Next W indow
W IN D O W Command
• O pening a W in d ow w ith the W in d ow Command
RM VSCR Command
• Closing a W indow

m/s jagg
lag ■^WINDOWS B
...» •8
-Q-APTER;— - -------- ---- -

I t a l l beqan w ith iwu a ip ii it*) enqineers wauling to design a b e lte r word

processor. Th eir experience w ith la rg e r computers gave the"« The v is io n —
they now wanted to b riny those feature to T j E H L ----------------------
wanted speeds, v e r s a t i l i t y and power. Dav 1LTKEYS SGT .1210
XyUrite I. Hp made i t lean and mean ( i n a ANDREA 8 IS
CHAPTER 21780
In the next law years the pmdurt evolved J1AP2 20800
to XyW rite I I . then to XyW rite I I P in s,
a re iesponsive and open to idras fro * cost KDlTilR EXE 112S <S
b- rPSTINEXCRN 't — 4088
ERICK SON 1060!
• .atiJ:
Ul^-MACRn 12
Rpfei'enLL* Manual 1P-LASER PRN 8011
IBM KBD 23048
A. pwpUr 1 INDEX 81916
‘r.. ¡0HNH1LD 13093
7 .. E d itin g Cnmmands jr. 7 _ ■»’ja LINE 308
H. Chapter y ^
?. Turma11J ncj (!nowanrfs
■'Ä ‘:p r .■+ ;.iTv-
"*-• * JftTS •3: ■•".'Tv >ijr’i “ 1

WINDOWS
. ■.■■X

3-69
V W f iü M 'd t S G & u mCtrl mF10m

Ctril 1F101 Display the W indow Menu

This is an imm ediate command. |

■1

Purpose Ctril IF1QI provides a selection menu to handle all of the

options that are available for controlling window s w ith in
X yW rite. You can:
• Open and close windows.
• Change the size o f windows.
• V iew the contents of the nine windows.
• Conceal or display the w indow borders.

Action D is p la y in g t h e W in d o w M e n u
W hen you want to open another w indow , move to another
w indow or re-size the current w indow :

1. Press: [cw ] [ fhD

Result: This gives you a full screen menu that explains / N
the options that are available.
2. If you have no selection to make, press A to abandon
the menu.

Action O p e n in g a N e w W in d o w
W hen you open a new w indow , the next available w indow
number is used (unless you specify a number 1-9 to open
it). To open a new w indow :

1. Press: Ctrl F10

2. Select how you w ant the new w indow to appear. Type
H, V, N or a w indow number, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9.
H Splits the active w indow in half horizontally and
opens a new w indow in the lower half o f the screen.

V Splits the active w indow in half vertically and opens

a new w indow in the right half of the screen.

N Opens the next available w indow as a full screen.

3-70
 r7 aijH

If you w ant to open a particular w indow , such as

w indow 3, sim ply type that num ber, as follow s.
(H ow ever, it is usually m ore convenient to use N
above, since it autom atically chooses the next
available w ind ow for yo u .) Select a w indow num ber
(1-9) from any o f those not in use. For exam ple:
3 Opens w ind ow 3 as a full screen.

A utom atic N ew W indow . As a convenience, you can

set X yW rite to open a new w indow automatically — if
you enter CALL, D IR or N EW but already have a file open
on screen. To set this up, use D EFA U LT NW=1. (See the
D efault commands in Chapter 6 for m ore inform ation.)

C h a n g in g t h e S ize o f a W in d o w
To change the size o f a w indow :
1. M ove the cursor to the w ind ow w hose size you w ant
to change.
2. Press: [Ctrl] [ M |
3. Select T, B , L, or R:
T to m ove the top border.
B to m ove the bottom border.
L to m ove the left border.
R to m ove the right border.
4. Use the cursor keys to m ove the selected border.
M ove the Top and Bottom borders w ith the cursor up
or cursor dow n keys. M ove the Left and Right borders f j
w ith the cursor left or right keys. You can m ove a
border beyond the edge o f the screen, to m ake more p |
room for the text (just as you might expect).
5. Continue selecting the borders and m oving them
w ith the cursor keys until you are satisfied. Notice
that you can set all four borders without returning to the
Window Menu , by selecting T, B , L and R one after
another.
6. Press 0 to com plete the selection.
Y ou can accom plish the same thing w ith the W IN D O W
command. See the description later in this section.
'M f i ß M v j I t S n n i n -G unini]

ACTION C h a n g in g a W in d o w t o F u ll S c r e e n S ize
To restore a w in d o w to a fu ll screen:
1. M ove the cursor to the w ind ow you w ant to be fu ll
screen.
2. Press: _Ctrj j [ f io
3. Press:

Action M o v in g t o A n o t h e r W in d o w b y W in d o w N u m b e r
W hen you w ant to m ove to another w indow :

1. Press: Ctrl FIO

2. In the list at the bottom of the menu, find the file (o r

the unused w in d o w ) you w ant to m ove to, then type
the num ber o f that w indow . To m ove to w indow 3:

Press: 3
Result: The cursor m oves to the selected w indow .

Action R e m o v in g t h e B o r d e r s f r o m A ll W in d o w s
The borders are the double lines that define the w indow
boundaries. You can hide the borders at any tim e:

1. Press: Ctrl FIO

2. Press: C

Result: The borders are concealed. B y repeating the

procedure you can display them again.

N o t e #2 V iew ing O n e File in Two W indow s. In X yW rite , each

w indow displays a separate file. Thus, if you call the sam e
file into tw o (o r m o re) w indow s, you are view ing m ore
than one copy of the same file. Changes you make in one
copy are not autom atically made on the other. Therefore:

C A U TIO N : W hen view ing the same file in tw o windows,

make changes to only one copy. STO RE that copy back on
the disk; A BO R T the other.

3-72
¡ a aF10
a f l p sF10n ¡T f i^ W n ^ n T v K a b

m J2ifin
„c;
u'
•>— ' •:•
-"''•>
&ÿiü
ORMAT Alt F10 Sw itch Betw een Last Tw o Window^
S h iftl Î F Ï o l Sw itch to Next Open W indow .. -•i.-**-* :
£»*': \1

These are im m ediate commands. m

_ 4ito e sre
mm
-i.*£a¿jrv¡Sü x. •**:.. S il
S 3 * te S îr« ?

Purpose The main use for I Alt I [ F1Q is to move back and forth
between tw o w indow s — that is, between the currently
displayed w indow and the one displayed previously. ( If a
second w indow is not open, [ aF] 1F101 autom atically opens
the next w indow that is N O T IN U SE.)

You use I Shift 1 1F101to cycle through all o f the open windows
(u p to nine).

Action S w itc h in g B e tw e e n T w o W in d o w s
To m ove the cursor back to the w indow it was in prior
current w indow :
Press: Alt F10

To return to the w indow you just now left, press the same
keys again:

Press: Alt F10

Result: By successively pressing [AttJ F10 , you can switch

back and forth between the same tw o windows. To select
a new pair of windows, select them one at a tim e from the
W indow Menu.
W indo w s

Action M o v in g to t h e N e x t W in d o w
To move the cursor to the next open w indow (o f the nine
w indow s):
Press: Shift F10
m
Result: The cursor moves to the next window. By
successively pressing 1Shift I IF101, you can cycle through
all the open windows.

3-73
[ I liJ ä 111 iîtS M V /iïïï M u rn m m w

S3 W IN D O W #, left, top, w id t
# is the w in d o w num ber you
left is the colum n num ber
top is the lin e num ber o f
w idth is the num ber o f colum n:
length is the num ber o f lines
■

Tins is an im m ediate com m,,nH

03window 3 , 4 -.a
0 , 1 , 35,10
: : '¿IS®- ■*s
ts'yjjr*'•
};'~ •«.'! I;:

Purpose The WINDOW com m and lets you define a w in d o w from

the Com m and Line w ithou t going through the w indow
menu. It defines the size o f w ind o w and makes that
w in d o w active.

Action O p e n i n g a W in d o w w i t h t h e W in d o w C o m m a n d
To open another w indow , enter W IN D O W w ith the
param eters as defined above in Form at. For exam ple:

Type: [re]window 3 .4 0 ,1 ,3 5 ,1 0 0

Result: This opens w indow 3 ( if it was not already open)

in the top right section o f the screen — starting at colum n
40, lin e 1, w ith a w idth o f 35 colum ns and length of 10
rows.

N o te #1 S ettin g th e W indow s a t S tartup. By adding a W IN D O W

com m and as a lin e in your ST A RTU P.IN T file, you can have
X y W rite autom atically set up your w indow s w hen it loads.

N o te # 2 W indow Size. It is interesting to note that the param eters

corresponding to a f u l l display are: W IN D O W 2,0,0,80,22
 FORMAT ^ E 3RMVSCR
I
ABBREV E 3RS
This is an imm ediate command

P urpose RS (Rem ove Screen) closes the w indow that the cursor is
located in and returns the display to the previously
displayed w indow . (This command w as form erly called
Reset Screen.) In general, w e use the terms window and
screen interchangeably.

Action Closing a W indow.

To close a w indow :

1. M ove the cursor to the w indow you w ant to close (see

Note #1 below ). To do this:
Press: fShift] [Fldl

2. Clear the w indow you w ant to close o f any document:

Type: [£5]sto re S or [£5]abort0

3. Reset the w indow :
Type: [F5]rmvscr@

Result: The w indow closes and the display returns to the

previously displayed w indow s (if any).

Note #1 Id en tify in g th e Active D o cu m en t. In the case o f a split

screen, there are tw o w ays to tell w hich w indow is
currently active:
• The filenam e o f the active docum ent appears at the top
o f the screen.
• The cursor is located in the active w indow . (If
necessary, press [RO] to m ove cursor off Command
Line and into the w ind o w .)

NOTE #2 A utom atic W indow C losing. If you set the N ew

W in d ow setting to 1 (D EFA U LT NW=1), then the active
w indow is autom atically closed w henever the displayed
file is aborted.
 NOTES

3-76
 L IJS riT ^ liT ïtfS * ^ S I îTk-fiiiunM

INTRO X yW rite’s Spelling Checker program “ proofreads” your

documents for you, saving you from the embarrassment
of distributing m aterial w ith typographical errors. You can
check the spelling of a word, a defined block, a file, or a
series of files. You can even have the Spelling Checker
correct your errors autom atically, and you can extend the
Auto-Correct feature to give you a very pow erful
“shorthand” phrase expansion. This section describes the
procedures for running and m odifying the Spelling
Checker program.

Tw o additional utilities are provided for w ord counting

and for sorting lines of text. You can count either forw ard
or backw ard from your position in the file. You can sort
lines o f text alphabetically w ithin a block or w ithin a
w hole file.

A thesaurus is also available. For help in finding just the

right word, you can quickly reference words that have a
sim ilar meaning. XyW rite gives you w ord pow er as w ell
as powerful w ord processing!

C ontents Pase S ection C o m m an d

3-78 U sing th e S pelling C hecker

3-89 W ord Check Ctrl S
3-90 File Check SPELL
3-93 File Correct CORRECT
3-97 Auto-Check/Correct fctiïlA, [ÇÏÏ0F
3-100 Auto-Replace Ctrl R
3-102 Storing the Tem porary D ictionary STSPELL

3-103 U sing th e T h esa u ru s [CtrllT

3-107 C o u n tin g th e W ords

in a D o cu m e n t wc
3-109 S o rtin g a List o f W ords SORT

3-77
 ■CSJiiSEUEl

PURPOSE The Spelling Checker com pares the words in your docu­
m ent w ith a standard dictionary and any personal
dictionaries you have loaded into memory. If it does not
find a match, the Spelling Checker notifies you that it has
found a questionable word. Since all X yW rite dictionaries
are m em ory resident, checking is done quickly.

There are three w ays to check words w ith the Spelling

Checker:

• A uto-C heck. Check each w ord autom atically as you

type it in. A beep notifies you that a w ord is
questionable.

• W o rd C heck. Select a w ord w ith the cursor and

check it w ith a single keystroke.

• File C heck. Check a block of defined text, a file, or a

list of files w ith the SPELL command.

There are three ways to correct words w ith the Spelling

Checker:

• A u to -C o rre ct Correct your m isspellings as you type

w ith the autom atic replacem ent option. (Y o u can also
use this feature to expand an abbreviation into the
w ord or phrase it represents.)

• W o rd C o rre c t Correct by selecting from a list o f

alternates chosen from the dictionary and given in the
spelling menu.

• File C o rre c t Correct by supplying the alternates to

the list of questionable words found b y the SPELL
command. You update the file (s) autom atically in one
pass b y giving the CO RRECT command.

3-78
■ iS .U G f lB

Before using these features, you need to understand

something about the different dictionaries and the menus
that the X yW rite Spelling Checker uses.

T he D ictio n aries. The three types of dictionaries associ­

ated w ith the Spelling Checker program are: the main
dictionary (D IC T .SPL), the personal dictionaries, and the
temporary dictionary. D IC T .SPL is a large (approxim ately
100,000 w ords), built-in dictionary included on
Supplem ental D isk 1. It is in binary format and cannot be
directly edited.

The optional personal dictionaries contain specialized

words that you use often. They include such things as
proper names, product names, technical terms relating to
your line of work, etc. You can have several different
personal dictionaries. Y our program disk contains some
examples: LEG A L.SPL, w hich contains common Latin and
other legal terms; BU SIN ESS.SPL, w hich contains standard
business and political terms; and PERS.SPL, w hich
contains general supplem ental w ords as w ell as some
very common m isspellings and their corrections to
support autom atic correction o f your w ork.

The tem porary dictionary, w hich is created as you use the

Spelling Checker, contains words that you do not w ish to
save. Because they are stored only tem porarily, these
words are ones you expect to use at your current editing
session only. You enter words into this dictionary by
using the main spelling menu, w hich is described below .

T he M enus. The m ain spelling menu appears w henever

the program encounters a questionable w ord - one it
cannot find in any o f the current dictionaries. The menu
m ay appear on the top or bottom half o f the the screen,
depending on w here the questionable w ord appears in
the file. Because the menu uses only h alf o f the screen,
you can see the questionable w ord in context on the
other half o f the screen.

3-79
‘ H J 5 f iT £ Î î T î . 'p
JiË j K S Ë O C IB

The menu looks like this:

Esc E x it the s p e llin g checker <—1 ReplacB the word

FI Ignore F2 Suspend CORRECTing
F3 Add word to Temporary F4 Add Change to Temporary
FS Add word to Personal F6 Add Change to Personal
S elect an a ltern a te, or type areplacement a fte r the "7"

The menu shows you three pieces of inform ation:

• The actions you can take in response to w hat the

Spelling Checker has found. This is the first part o f the
menu you see.

• The questionable word, w hich is preceded b y a ques­

tion mark.

• A list of alternate words - suggested replacem ents for

the w ord in question. The message “ Searching”
appears until the first alternate is found. W hen the list
is complete, the first alternate is highlighted.

Sometimes the Spelling Checker encounters a w ord

for w hich it has no alternate spelling. W hen this
happens, the message “ No alternates” appears in the
menu.

The Spelling Checker also uses a second menu, w hich

appears w henever you add a word that contains one or
more capitalized letters to the dictionary. It asks you to
verify that the capitalization you are using is the standard.

You w ill learn how to use each o f these menus in the

follow ing procedure.
U s in g t h e S p e llin g C h e c k e r.
To check spelling in an existing document:

1. Call an existing file to the screen.

2. Enter the SPELL command.

Type: fF slsp e llC T

Result: X yW rite checks to see if the main spelling

dictionary, D IC T.SPL, is loaded into memory. If it is
not, X yW rite autom atically loads it. The cursor moves
to the first questionable w ord in your file and displays
the spelling menu. You now select the option you
want from the menu.

• E xit fro m th e S pelling C h eck er, Turn off the

Spelling Checker program by pressing [Esc]. Select
this option if you are using the SPELL command to
check the spelling in a long file and decide to stop
and store your corrections to disk before finishing.

• R eplace W ord. W hen you press 0 , the selected

w ord in the menu replaces the w ord under the text
cursor. The w ord in the menu could be one of the
alternate words listed by the Spelling Checker or it
could be a replacem ent w ord that you typed into
the menu. W hen you press 0 , neither the
tem porary nor personal dictionary is affected.

• Skip Q u estio n ab le W ord. Press [FT] to tell the

Spelling Checker program to ignore the
questionable w ord. Select this option if the w ord is
correctly spelled but is not a w ord that you expect
to use again - perhaps the name o f an obscure
author you are citing.
Ll£ H 7 f^ iT 5 iJîJ^ [ffijï^ îT 3 4 !7 3 i*" c b s o e »

• E dit W hile C o rrectin g . Press 0 to return to the ' X

text file to make an edit. This is sim ilar to [fsc], but
X yW rite leaves the SPELL com m and in the header
so you can restart the checking process b y pressing
[F 9 l . This option is useful if you notice a gram­
m atical error w hen the Spelling Checker stops in
your file. (Fo r more inform ation on this option, see
“ File Correct.”)

• A dd W o rd to T e m p o ra ry D ictio n ary . Press [£3] to

add the questionable w ord to the tem porary
dictionary. M ake this selection if the w ord in ques­
tion is spelled correctly in your file but is not a
w ord that you use regularly.

• A dd W ord to P e rs o n a l D ictio n ary . Press [F5] to

add the questionable w ord to your personal
dictionary. M ake this selection if the w ord in ques- /-— n.
tion is spelled correctly in your file and is a w ord
that your use regularly (lik e your com pany’s name
or products).

If none of the alternates presented is appropriate, you

can type in your own replacem ent w ord after the
question m ark in the menu. To enter that replacem ent
w ord into your file as an alternate spelling for the
questionable w ord and into one of the dictionaries,
use one o f the tw o rem aining options.

• A dd C h an g e to T e m p o ra ry D ictio n ary . Press 0

to replace the questionable w ord w ith the replace­
m ent w ord you typed into the menu and add the
replacem ent w ord to the tem porary dictionary as
an alternate spelling.

• A dd C hange to P e rso n a l D ictio n ary . Press [F6] to

replace the questionable w ord w ith the replace­
ment w ord you typed into the menu and add the
replacem ent w ord to the personal dictionary as an
alternate spelling.

3-82
3. Let’s assume the Spelling Checker stopped on the
w ord “ Pronut,” a product name you are using
frequently today but do not expect to refer to again.
Add the w ord to the tem porary dictionary.

Press: F4

Result: A new menu appears on the screen, asking

you to verify the capitalization o f the word. This menu
appears w henever you tell X yW rite to add a w ord that
contains uppercase letters to one of the dictionaries.

4. “ Pronut” is a proper name, so enter it in the dictionary

w ith the first letter capitalized.

Press: [F2]

Result: The Spelling Checker moves to the next

questionable w ord in the file. It w ill no longer stop on
the w ord “ Pronut” unless it appears in all lowercase.

5. Select the appropriate option from the spelling menu.

6. Repeat step 5 until the Spelling Checker reaches the

end o f the file.

M em ory R eq u irem en ts. D IC T .SPL and its associated

program SPELL.O V R require a m inim um of 135K of
memory. This is in addition to the m em ory required to
run X yW rite w ith DOS.

M ultiple D ictio n aries. If you have more than one

personal dictionary loaded into memory, [F5] and \M add
words only to the first personal dictionary you loaded.

U pper- a n d L ow ercase. W hen you use the spelling

menu to add a w ord containing one or more uppercase
letters to the dictionary, the Spelling Checker displays a
second menu that asks you to verify the capitalization of
the word. For inform ation on how the Spelling Checker
handles upper- and lowercase entries in the dictionary,
see “ Editing a Personal D ictionary.”
 P m « * )m

Note #4 D u p licate A ltern ates. Sometimes, the Spelling Checker

lists the same alternate w ord tw ice. That’s because the
Spelling Checker searches the dictionaries tw ice: once for x
words that sound like the questionable w ord and once for
w ords that are spelled like the questionable w ord. If an
alternate w ord satisfies both conditions, it appears tw ice.

Note #5 N u m b ers a n d P u n c tu a tio n . The Spelling Checker

program ignores punctuation marks, em bedded
commands, and sym bols. It also ignores num bers w hen
they are the only characters in a w ord (e.g., 1987). If you
w ant the Spelling Checker to ignore num bers w hen they
start a w ord (e.g., 12th, 1920s), enter the com m and
D EFA U LT CK=1 in the printer file, startup file, or on the
com m and line. (The initial setting is CK=0.)

NOTE #6 R eassig n in g K eys. If you w ant to assign the eight

actions associated w ith the Spelling Checker m enu to
keys other than [fT] through |F6], Hie], and 0 , you can use the
function calls Q1 through Q8, respectively. Changing the
keyboard table definitions does not change the menu
display, nor does it affect the operation o f the keys w hen
in norm al text operation.

To reassign the Spelling Checker functions, call your

keyboard file and insert the function calls Q1 through Q8,
follow ed b y a comma, at the beginning of the key code
definitions you w ant to change.

For exam ple, suppose you w ant to m ove the Spelling

Checker function “ Edit in context” from [F2] to the 2 key
on the num ber keys along the top o f the keyboard. The
standard IB M PC keyboard definition for 2 is 3=2. To
add the Spelling Checker function to that key, change the
definition to 3=Q2,2.

Rem em ber that every time you change the keyboard file,
you must use the LD K BD com m and to load the changes
into memory.

Note #7 S p ell C h eck in g F o o tn o tes. The SPELL com m and does

N O T check the spelling o f words in footnotes w hen text
is displayed in the Norm al m ode. Either go to Expanded
display or give the SPELL com m and and the filenam e
(F ile Check).
3-84
ACTION E d itin g a P e r s o n a l D ic tio n a r y .
You can use the personal dictionaries just as they are
provided on the program disks, you can add w ords to
them using the spelling menu, or, since they are just text
files, you can edit them directly. Y o u can also create your
ow n personal dictionary to handle the spelling o f names,
cities, and other w ords that you use every day.

1. Select a name for your dictionary. Let’s call it

M IN E.SPL.

2. Enter the N E W command, just as you w ould for any

text file.

Type:. [re] new m in e .s p lH

Result: The new (em pty) file called M IN E.SPL appears

on the screen.

3. O n the first line, enter the label that tells X yW rite that
this file is a personal spelling dictionary file.

Type: ;SP;<-

Be sure to type the label in uppercase letters.

4. Enter the inform ation you w ant into the dictionary.

a. A d d in g W o rd s . Enter the first w ord you w ant to

store in the dictionary. If the w ord is a proper
name, use the correct com bination o f upper- and
low ercase letters (see Note #7). A t the end o f the
w ord, press 0 . For exam ple, enter a name:

Type: Babar<-

Result: O nce you load the dictionary, you can type J | | i

the name Babar w ithout having the Spelling
Checker program flag it as an error. Repeat this
step for every w ord that you w ant to enter
m anually into your personal dictionary.

3-85
 m a m

b. S e ttin g U p A utom atic R eplacem ent. If there are

words that you frequently m isspell in a certain
w ay, you can enter those m isspellings along w ith
their corrections into a personal dictionary. Then,
w henever you are using Auto-Check/Correct or
Auto-Replace, the Spelling Checker corrects the
w ord for you. W hen you use the File Check or
W ord Check functions, the Spelling Checker lists
the correction you enter in the dictionary as the
first alternate spelling.
For exam ple, let’s say that you have trouble w ith
the w ord “ receive,” and often type it as “ recieve.”
To have Auto-Check/Correct or Auto-Replace auto­
m atically correct it for you:
Type: recieve receive<-
Result: W hen you run Auto-Check/Correct or Auto-
Replace, it autom atically replaces the m isspelled
version of the w ord w ith the alternate spelling you
specify. W hen you run File Check or W ord Check,
“ receive” is the first alternate spelling o f “ recieve”
in the spelling menu.
Y ou can also use the Spelling Checker’s autom atic
replacem ent feature to create your ow n shorthand
typing. Type the follow ing line into your personal
dictionary.

Type: xyw XyWrite«-

Result: W hen you have either Auto-Check/Correct
or Auto-Replace on and type “x yw ” into your text
file, the Spelling Checker autom atically changes it
to “ X yW rite.” You can use the same method to
change one w ord into a phrase. For exam ple, type
the follow ing line into your personal dictionary:

Type: p1 party of the first part<-

Every time you type the w ord “ p i,” Auto-
Check/Correct or Auto-Replace substitutes the
phrase “ party o f the first part.”

If you w ant to use a multi-line phrase as the

replacem ent, end each line w ith an A SC II 13 (<f).

3-86
 c. Ig n o rin g E n trie s In D IC T .S P L . O ccasionally, you
may w ant to have the Spelling Checker ignore a
w ord that is in D IC T.SPL. For exam ple, you may
frequently w rite about a com pany that use a non­
standard spelling o f a com m on w ord, such as
W IT T E. It is easy to m isspell this w ord by typing
W IT T Y . If you w ant the Spelling Checker to let you
know that W IT T Y m ay be a m isspelling of the
com pany name, you can tell the program to ignore
the entry in D IC T.SPL. Enter the standard spelling
follow ed by a space, a question mark, and a
carriage return. For exam ple:

Type: witty ?<-

Result: W hen you type the w ord “ w itty,” the

Spelling Checker program w ill flag it as a
m isspelled word.

The personal dictionary M IN E.SPL now looks like this:

;SP;<-
Babar<-
recieve receive<-
p1 party of the first part«-
witty ?<-

5. Load the dictionary into m em ory (see “ Loading the

D ictionary” in this section).

U pper- a n d Lo w ercase. In addition to verifying the

spelling o f a word, X yW rite’s Spelling Checker also
checks that you have used the right com bination of
upper- and lowercase letters, according to the w ay you
enter words into the dictionaries. The follow ing rules •*>»"*>.A. "i
y'h-4p/ofiW/'*
apply:

• If the w ord in the dictionary is all lowercase, the

Spelling Checker w ill accept any o f the follow ing
com binations o f the w ord as proper spellings: all
*
lowercase, all uppercase, or w ith the first letter capital . yv-:y
ized. A ny other com binations w ill be flagged as
questionable. For exam ple, startup, STARTUP, and
Startup are all acceptable, but if you type Startup, the
Spelling Checker w ill beep.
3-87
 • If the w ord in the dictionary is all uppercase, you
must alw ays type it in all uppercase to avoid getting
beeped.

• If the w ord in the dictionary is a com bination of

upper- and lowercase, you must type that w ord
exactly as it appears in the dictionary or in all upper­
case. A ny other com bination is beeped.

ACTION L o a d in g t h e D ic tio n a r y .
The Spelling Checker program uses dictionaries loaded in
m em ory to verify the spelling o f your docum ent. W h en
you use the File Check, W o rd Check, or Auto-
Check/Correct functions, X yW rite autom atically loads
D IC T .SPL if it is not already in memory. If you w ant the
Spelling Checker to also be aware of the specialized
w ords you use, use the LO A D command to load one or
more personal dictionaries.

Let’s load PER S.SPL and LEG A L.SPL.

Type: E S lo a d p e r s .s p l+ le g a l.s p lC T

Result: Both the personal dictionaries are loaded into

m em ory from this single command. Y ou can now use any
o f the Spelling Checker options. For more inform ation
about the LO A D command, refer to “ Loading Custom iza­
tion Files” in Chapter 5.

NOTE #8 Lo ca tio n . To load D IC T .SPL, the Spelling Checker

program requires access to the program SPELL.O V R and
to D IC T.SPL. To find them, the program looks first in the
current subdirectory; if the required files are not there, it
searches the subdirectories defined in the D O S path state­
ment.
 W Æ TfR !T 5 *) Ä

ingle W ord

Purpose h s gives you a quick w ay to check the spelling o f a

single word. W hen you see a w ord that doesn’t look
quite right, [Ctrj] S lets you spot check and, if necessary,
correct it. A fter you check the word, the cursor m oves to
the start o f the next w ord, so you can quickly continue
checking additional words if you w ant.

MJ S checks to see if D IC T .SPL is loaded into m em ory. If

it is not, it autom atically loads it for you.

ACTION C h e c k in g t h e S p e llin g o f a S in g le W o r d .
To check the spelling o f a single word:

1. M ove the cursor to the w ord in question.

2. Press: [Ctril S

Result: If the w ord is correctly spelled, the message O K

appears in the PRM PT field and the cursor m oves to the
next w ord in the file. Repeat step 2 if you w ish. If W ord
Check does not find the w ord in one o f the spelling
dictionaries in m em ory, it displays the spelling m enu. For
an explanation of the menu, see “ Using the Spelling
Checker” at the beginning of this section.

NOTE R e a ssig n in g W o rd C h eck . You can reassign this func­

tion to another key in your keyboard file. (See “ Keyboard
F ile ” in Chapter 6.) The function call for W ord Check is
SO (Sp ell O ne W o rd ).

Æ, •:
,< ... <;
&
t

3-89
 F o rm at EU s p e l l (o p tio n i>
B SlSP E L L filename,targetfile (O ption 2) wr
E l S P E L L <&parenfile,targetfile (O ption 3)
,J . <v ■. =•„;■.• : ‘ <v '-' ’
, > , / , • ‘ : ; ■ ; / ' / t

filename is the name of the file being searched.

targetfile (optional) is the name of the file w here you
want questionable words stored. If you omit this name,
' •’SimpW
vm
XyW rite assigns the name SPELL.TM P.
par enfile contains the names of the files to be s e a r c ...

' ' • H W . H .

PURPOSE The S P E L L command lets you search existing text for

words w ith questionable spelling (i.e., words that do not
appear in one o f the dictionaries that you loaded into
m em ory). SPELL also autom atically loads D IC T.SPL into
memory if it is not already there.

There are four ways you can use the SPELL command:
• On a defined block
• On a displayed file
• On a single stored file
• On a list o f stored files

If you use SPELL on a defined block or a displayed file, it

displays the spelling menu when it finds a questionable
word. If this w ord is in the tem porary or a personal
dictionary w ith a replacem ent spelling, the replacem ent is
listed as the first alternate. For example, if you have the
entry “untill until” in your personal dictionary, “until”
becomes the first alternate in the list that the Spelling
Checker displays.

Additionally, this use o f the SPELL command gives a

count of the total number o f words in the file and the
total number of “bad” (questionable) words found.

The SPELL command can also search one or more stored

files and make a list o f questionable words in a separate
file. You might use this option if you have a long docu­
ment to search and want to make some phone calls w hile
the search is taking place. W hen SPELL finishes, you can
review the list at your convenience and make corrections.
The CO RRECT command can then be used to update
your file(s). (See “ File Correct.”)
3-90
rg if.A P H

ACTION U s in g t h e SPELL C o m m a n d w i t h a D is p la y e d F ile .

(Option 1) To check a displayed file (o r a defined b lo ck) for
questionably spelled words:

1. M ove the cursor to the point in the file w here you

w ant the check to begin (o r define the block o f text
you w ant to check).

2. If you w ant the check to include the text in running

headers, footers, footnotes, and index entries, sw itch
to expanded mode.

Press: [Ctrf|[F9l

3. Enter the SPELL command.

Type: [U s p e llS

Result: If there are no questionable words, the cursor

m oves to the end o f the file or defined block, and the
message “n words, 0 bad” appears on the PR M PT line (n
is the total num ber of w ords in the file or defined block).
If there is a questionable w ord, the cursor m oves to that
w ord and the spelling menu appears on the screen.
W hen the Spelling Checker finds a replacem ent spelling
for the questionable w ord in the personal or tem porary
dictionary, the program displays the replacem ent spelling
as the first alternate w ord in the menu. (Y o u can add
replacem ent w ords “ on the fly” by typing them into the
spelling m enu.)

This process continues until the SPELL program reaches

the end o f the file or defined block. At that point, the
message “ n words, p bad” appears on the PR M PT line (n
is the total num ber o f words found during the search,
and p is the num ber o f questionable w ords found).

3-91
I tfIÜ M !T5«3

A ction U s in g t h e SPELL C o m m a n d w i t h a S to re d F ile.

(Option 2) To check a file that is stored on disk and list the
questionable words in a separate file:

Type: [EUspell chapter.doc,spell.err®

Result: The file CH APTER.D O C is checked for spelling

accuracy, and any questionable words are listed in the file
SPELL.ERR. Of no target file is named, XyW rite assigns the
name SPELL.TM P.) W hen the search is complete, the
message “ Done” appears on the PRM PT line. You can
call the target file right away or w ait until later to review
SPELL’s findings. (See “ File Correct” later in this section.)

A ction U s in g t h e SPELL C o m m a n d w i t h M u ltip le F ile s.

(Option 3) To check a group of files for spelling accuracy:

1. Create the parent file.

Type: [fUne chapters.allfijj]

2. List the names of all the files that you want XyW rite to
search for words with questionable spellings. Type
each filenam e on a line by itself.

chapter1<-
chapter2<-
chapter3^

3. Store the parent file and enter the SPELL command.

Type: [H s tS 3

Type: [FUspell @chapters.a! 1 0

Result: XyW rite checks the words in each file listed in

CHAPTERS.ALL and compiles a list of those words that
it does not find in one of the spelling dictionaries.
Because w e did not specify a target file, the
questionable words are stored in the file SPELL.TM P.

3-92
 Format leñame,string

filename (op tion al) is the nam e of the file created by the
SPELL com m and O f the name is om itted, SPELL.T M P I $ 'l
assum ed.)
string (o p tio n al) is text to be appended. (See Note #1.)

This i îediate command. ■ ■

‘ •J-
>1>7i ■ ' ' ■ /' /■/.*'<''. * -« “ v i' •
”.» ■
'' Æ m■
w
' .* ■

PURPOSE The C O R R EC T com m and is a com panion com m and to

the SPELL command. W hen you use the SPELL command
to check the spelling in a stored file or files, the program
creates a separate file that contains a list o f questionable
words. You can then use the CO RRECT com m and and
this list to fix the m isspellings in your original docum ent.

Before running the CO RREC T command, you can edit the

list of questionable words created b y the SPELL
command. If you provide replacem ent w ords for all of
the questionable words, the CO RRECT com m and w ill
update your docum ent by inserting the corrections in one
pass.

If you are not sure about the spelling o f a w ord w hen

you are editing the list, you can leave it alone. W hen you
run the C O RRECT command, it w ill stop at that w ord and
display the spelling menu. This lets you see the w ord in
context and gives you a list o f alternates at the same time.

If you know a w ord in the list is correct as is, then sim ply
delete it from the list and it w ill be ignored by CO RRECT.

C O RRECT can also be used to append an optional string

of text to all occurrences o f the words listed in the correc­
tion file. You can use this option to help you create a
concordance (an alphabetical index of keyw ords (see Note
# 1).

3-93
 riTTTutfîl

A ction E d itin g t h e C o r r e c tio n F ile .

If you w ant to, you can edit the correction file created by
the SPELL command before you run CO RRECT.

1. Call the file created by the SPELL command. For

exam ple:
Type: [EUca spell.tmpEj]

Result: The file appears on the screen. The first line in

this file shows, in reverse mode, the name of the file
SPELL review ed for typographical errors. The
follow ing lines show, in norm al mode, w ords in the
nam ed file that do not appear in one o f the spelling
dictionaries. If you asked SPELL to review more than
one file, each filenam e is listed in reverse mode,
follow ed b y a list o f questionable words. For exam ple:

m m
mispell

committment
CHAPTER?
recieve

2. M ove the cursor to the first questionable word.

3. If the w ord is correctly spelled and you do not w ant

to add it to a dictionary, delete it from the list. If it is
incorrectly spelled and you know how to fix it, type a
space and the correct spelling o f the word. For
exam ple:
mispell misspell

If you are not sure o f the spelling of a word, leave it

alone.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each w ord on the list.

5. Store the file.

Type: [F5lStCT

Result: The correction list is ready to use w ith the

CO RRECT command.

3-94
R u n n i n g t h e CORRECT C o m m a n d .
To run the CO RREC T command, perform these steps.
1. Type: [F5]correct53

Result: The CO RREC T command uses the inform ation

in SPELL.TM P to revise your docum ent. (If your file
has any other name, be sure to specify it w hen you
type the CO RRECT com m and.) If you deleted a w ord
from SPELL.TM P, the CO RREC T command skips over
that w ord in your document. If you typed a replace­
ment w ord for the questionable word, it inserts the
replacem ent for you. For all other w ords in the list,
CO RRECT displays the spelling menu on one half of
the screen and the part of the docum ent that contains
the questionable w ord on the other h alf of the screen.

2. Select the option you w ant from the spelling menu.

For exam ple, to add the w ord you originally typed to
the tem porary dictionary:

Type: HU

Result: That w ord is added to the tem porary

dictionary, so all other occurrences o f it are ignored. If
SPELL.TM P contains another w ord w ithout a replace­
ment, a new menu and a new part o f your docum ent
appear on the screen. Repeat this step for each such
w ord in the list.

3. W hen C O RREC T reaches the end o f your document, it

displays the message "File corrected, save it? (Y /N ).”

To save the changes and store the docum ent to disk:

Press: Y

To discard the changes:

Press: N
tiB g E B T iu H S M

NOTE #1 A u to m atic In d e x C re a tio n . A special option o f the

CO RRECT command allow s you to com pile a list of
words and append a string to each occurrence o f those
words in your document. For exam ple, you could
com pile a list of words you w ant to index and have the
CO RRECT command append an index m arker every time
it finds a w ord from your list in the document.

To use this function to create an index, you must create a

new File Get’s say its name is IN D E X ), enter (on the first
lin e) the filenam e o f the docum ent in reverse mode
follow ed by a carriage return in norm al mode, and then
enter the single-word index entries in norm al mode,
ending each entry w ith a carriage return. Store the file
and then issue the command:

[fI]correct index.«x1»CT

Result: The CO RRECT command goes into your docum ent

and appends an index m arker to the words that you
listed in the file “IN D E X .” W hen you extract the index
w ith the IX command, all occurrences of these words w ill
be included in the index. (Fo r more inform ation on
indexes, see “Table of Contents and Index” in Chapter 5.)

NOTE #2 T ra n s la tio n s . You can use the C O RREC T command as

part of the process o f translating a docum ent from one
language to another. Sim ply create a correction file and
enter the name o f the docum ent you w ant to translate in
reverse mode on the first line, follow ed b y a carriage
return in norm al mode. Then, still in norm al mode, type
in the w ord you w ant to translate, a space, and the
w ord’s equivalent in the other language. Repeat this step
for each w ord you w ant to translate. For exam ple:

CHAPTER.DOC
here ic i
you vous

O n ly single-word w ord entries can be translated in this

w ay, although you can replace the single w ords w ith a
phrase.
3-96
 C

PURPOSE Auto-Check/Correct verifies your spelling as you type. If a

replacem ent w ord has been given in one of the active
personal dictionaries, it w ill autom atically correct as w ell.

W ith Auto-Check/Correct ON, w henever you type a tab,

space, or carriage return, X yW rite checks the spelling of
the w ord im m ediately preceding the cursor. It looks in
D ICT.SPL, w hich it autom atically loads into m em ory if it
is not already there, and in any personal dictionaries that
you loaded. If the w ord does not appear in one o f these
dictionaries, you w ill hear an error beep.

If the w ord appears in the personal or tem porary

dictionary w ith a replacem ent spelling, you w ill hear a
correction beep, w hich is easily distinguishable from the
error beep. The correction beep indicates that Auto-
Check/Correct has autom atically corrected the error.

W hen you hear the error beep, you have several choices:

• You can keep on typing to com plete your train of

thought, and then return to the w ord in question.

• You can stop im m ediately to correct the w ord by

using either X yW rite’s normal editing functions or the
spelling menu.

• You can ignore the beep entirely. (You might choose

this option if you have correctly typed a name or
specialized term that does not appear in one of the
dictionaries and if you don’t w ish to add it to your
personal dictionary.)
ACTION U s in g A u to - C h e c k / C o rre c t.
To use Auto-Check/Correct to check your w ork as you
type:

1. Turn on Auto-Check/Correct.

Press: [CM] A

Result: The letter “ c” appears in reverse mode at the

top right corner o f the screen. Auto-Check/Correct is
now active.

2. Call your file to the screen or create a new one.

3. Type in the text o f your docum ent until you hear an

error beep. Let’s say you just typed the w ord micro­
justification w hich does not appear in any o f the
dictionaries you loaded into memory, but w hich you
use frequently. To avoid hearing a beep every time
you type microjustification'.

Press: [§r0 F

Result: The cursor moves to the questionable w ord

and the spelling menu is displayed.

4. From the menu, choose the option you want. In this

case, the w ord microjustification is correctly spelled,
and you w ant to add it to your personal dictionary.

Press: [F5]

Result: The menu disappears and the cursor returns to

your document, follow ing the w ord microjustification.
The w ord is now in your personal dictionary so you
w ill no longer hear a beep w hen you type it.

5. Continue creating or editing your document. Each

time Auto-Check/Correct corrects an error for you,
you w ill hear the correction beep, and each time you
type a w ord that does not appear in one o f X yW rite ’s
dictionaries, you w ill hear an error beep. Repeat step
3 w henever you w ant to see a list o f alternate spell­
ings or add a w ord to the dictionary.
 « s a c ia n r i T O B I É ¡T 5 «i ® ¡ R T » í í * i *

6. W hen you are finished, you can store your

' call another one. Auto-Check/Correct rem ains on until
you turn it off. To turn it off:

Press: [Ctrl] A

NOTE #1 U sing M ultiple W indow s. W hen you turn Auto-

Check/Correct on, it is on in all nine w indow s and
remains on until you cancel it.

NOTE #2 P re v io u s E rro r. Pressing [Ctrl] F returns the cursor to the

last w ord that Auto-Check/Correct detected as
questionable. If you correct that error and then press
[ctrQF again, the cursor w ill not m ove to another word.
Auto-Check/Correct remembers only the one position.

NOTE #3 R eassig n in g Keys. Y ou can reassign these functions to

other keys in your keyboard file. (See “Keyboard F ile ” in
Chapter 6.) The function call for Auto-Check/Correct is
/ X AC, and the function call to move the cursor to the
previous error is FS (Fix Spelling).

NOTE #4 A utom atic C o rrectio n . For inform ation on how to set

up your personal dictionary to autom atically correct your
m isspelled words or to expand abbreviations that you
type into your file, refer to the section “ Editing a Personal
D ictionary.”

NOTE #5 C h an g in g th e Beeps. Y ou can change the tone o f or

even com pletely turn off the error and correction beeps
by using the D EFA U LT command to change the E B and
C B settings, respectively. (See“ Default Settings” in
Chapter 6 for more inform ation.)

NOTE #6 R ep lacem en t w ith o u t C o rre ctio n . You can use Auto- pggp
Replace to insert replacem ent words or phrases w ithout g§B
invoking the Spelling Checker. (See the follow ing descrip-
tion.)

3-99
¿Y d 5 3

PURPOSE Auto-Replace lets you use the autom atic correction

feature o f the Spelling Checker w ithout having to load the
m ain spelling dictionary.

W henever you type a tab, space, or carriage return,

X yW rite checks the personal dictionaries in m em ory to
see if the w ord you typed appears w ith a replacem ent
w ord or phrase. If it is, X yW rite makes the replacem ent
and beeps to indicate that a change has been made.

ACTION U s in g A u to -R e p la c e .
To use the Auto-Replace command:

1. Load the personal dictionaries that contain the

replacem ent w ords and phrases you w ant inserted
into your text. For exam ple:

Type: [F5]load pers.splGjj]

2. Turn on Auto-Replace.

Press: [CtrQR

Result: A low ercase “ r” appears in reverse m ode at the

top right corner o f the screen. Auto-Replace is now
active.

3. Call your file to the screen or create a new one.

4. Type in the text o f your docum ent.

Result: Every tim e you hear a correction beep, it

means X yW rite has deleted the w ord you just typed
and inserted the replacem ent w ord or phrase associ­
ated w ith it in your personal dictionary.
 5. W hen you are finished, you can store your file and call
another one. Auto-Replace rem ains on until you turn it
off. To turn it off:

Press: [cirri R

Note #i U sing M ultiple W indow s. W hen you turn Auto-Replace

on, it is on in all nine w indow s and remains on until you
cancel it.

Note #2 R eassig n in g th e Key. Y ou can reassign this function to

another key in your keyboard file. (See “ Keyboard F ile ”
in Chapter 6.) The function call for Auto-Replace is AR.

Note #3 B u ilding a R ep lacem en t D ictio n ary . To help you build

your replacem ent list, there is an IR (Insert Replacem ent)
function call that can be assigned to a key on your
keyboard. This function lets you add replacem ent words
to the personal or tem porary dictionary more easily as
you type. IR displays the spelling menu w ith one
keystroke so you can type in your replacem ent spelling
and add it to the tem porary or personal dictionary. (See
“ Using the Spelling Checker.” See also “ Keyboard F ile ” in
Chapter 6.)

Note #4 A utom atic C o rrectio n . For inform ation on how to set

up your personal dictionary to autom atically correct your
m isspelled words or to expand abbreviations that you
type into your file, refer to the section “Editing a Personal
D ictionary.”

Note #5 A udible Signals. You can change the tone o f or even

com pletely turn off the correction beep by using the
D EFA U LT command to change the C B setting. Refer to
“ D efault Settings” in Chapter 6 for more inform ation.

3-101
,.3;«V■ gr>'c- fS»*ivI .«»!]!

P urpose The S T S P E L L command lets you save the words in the

tem porary dictionary in a file so you can reload it later.
The tem porary dictionary contains all o f the words from
the personal dictionaries that you loaded into memory,
plus any words you added through the spelling menu.
Unless you use STSPELL, the tem porary dictionary is lost
w henever you quit X yW rite or unload the Spelling
Checker feature from memory.

A ction S to r in g t h e T e m p o r a r y D ic tio n a r y .
Suppose you are w orking on a docum ent w hich contains
m any specialized words that you don’t expect to use
again. You added those words to the tem porary
dictionary as you developed the document, but now you
have to quit XyW rite before finishing it. Rather than lose
all those dictionary entries, you can store them in a file
and reload them w hen you return to XyW rite.

1. D ecide on a name for the tem porary dictionary. Let’s

call it TEM P.SPL.

2. Enter the STSPELL command.

Type: [fUstspell temp.splS

Result: The contents of the tem porary dictionary are
copied from m em ory into the file nam ed TEM P.SPL.
The tem porary dictionary remains in m em ory as w ell
until you quit X yW rite or unload the Spelling Checker.

3. W hen you are ready to reload the tem porary

dictionary:

Type: [FIDload temp.spl£j]

Result: You can return to w ork on your docum ent and
use the Spelling Checker w ithout having to reload the
personal dictionary and w ithout having to reenter die
specialized words that you put in the tem porary,
dictionary.

3-102
 il t & M f T i n s

'*
\- V'-' ■■7 . >' . ';
D isplay a List o f Synonym s
~vr.öÄ5rS '¿¿jgtfänr#

This is an im m ediate command.

i ' t it j 1/ 1,1' < • ***_f w A n» *' v »'.i i •» ‘ft * ii j ■

P urpose X yW rite’s thesaums displays a list of synonym s. To use it,

you just put the cursor on the w ord for w hich you w ant a
synonym and press [Ctrj] T. X yW rite looks in its thesaurus
for words w ith a sim ilar meaning. W hen it finds them, it
displays a list organized by parts o f speech and by
meaning. You can review the list and take one o f three
actions.

• Select one o f the synonym s listed and insert it in your

docum ent ( 0 ) w ith the same punctuation and capi­
talization and in the same display mode as the original
w ord
• Leave your original w ord intact ([Esel)
• Bu ild a new list o f synonym s based on one o f the
words in the original list ([Ctrf] fPgDnl)

To use the thesaurus, you must have the files

W O R D .O V R and W FB G .SY N either in the current
subdirectory or in one o f the subdirectories defined in
your PA TH statement. W O R D .O V R is a program file that
X yW rite needs to execute the thesaurus function and
W FB G .SY N is the dictionary of synonyms. These files are
not loaded into memory, so X yW rite goes to disk each
time you use the thesaurus.

A ction U s in g t h e T h e s a u r u s to S e le c t a S y n o n y m .
To use X yW rite’s Thesaurus:

1. M ake sure the files W O R D .O V R and W FB G .SY N are in

the current directory or in one of the subdirectories
defined in your PA TH statement.

2. Call your file to the screen.

3-103
 if H

3. Put the cursor on the w ord for w hich you w ant a

synonym . As an exam ple, let’s find a synonym for the
w ord “ tool.”

4. Press: [CM] T

Result: A menu appears, indicating X yW rite is looking

for synonym s o f the w ord you indicated. A fter a few
seconds, that menu is replaced by:

to o l: _________
noun ■ IJiTBJ'M V. front, instrument, pawn, peon, puppet, stooge;
• apparatus, ap p lia n ce, co ntraption , co n triva n c e , d e v ic e , doodad,
doohickey, gadget, gimmick, gizmo, implement, instrument, invention,
machine, mechanism, thingum ajig, u t e n s il, widget,
verb ■ auger, bore, d r i l l , p ie rc e , ream.

point RTN:replace E S C iB x it CTL-PGDN:look up

The first thing in the menu is the w ord you are

looking up (in this case, “ tool.”) Next are all the
synonym s for the w ord “to o l” if you are using it as a
noun. Notice that there are tw o sets o f noun
synonym s, w hich means there are tw o different defini­
tions for the w ord “ tool.” After the nouns, there are
several verb synonym s. (D epending on the w ord you
are looking up, you m ay see a list of adverbs and
adjectives in addition to - or instead o f - the nouns
and verbs.)

3-104
 IM T ) E l2 j7 3 N i i^ . i u > i w

5. Let’s replace the w ord “ tool” w ith the w ord “utensil.”

Use the cursor arrow keys to select the w ord “ utensil.”

Result: The w ord “utensil” is highlighted.

6. Press: £3

Result: The w ord "utensil” appears in your file,

replacing the w ord “tool,” and the menu clears from
the screen.

ACTION B u ild in g A n o t h e r L e v e l o f S y n o n y m s .
Suppose you are review ing a list o f synonym s and see a
w ord that is close to being w hat you want. You can select
that w ord and, instead o f inserting it in yo ur docum ent
file, have X yW rite build a new list o f synonym s. Let’s try
it.

1. Repeat steps 1-4 o f the above procedure.

2. M ove the cursor to the w ord “ peon.”

3. Press: ¡Ctrl] IPgDn!

Result: A new m enu appears on the screen. This menu

displays a list o f synonym s for the w ord “peon.” It
also gives you a new option: if you press [CtrO [PqUp I,
X yW rite redisplays the previous menu.

4. Select the option you w ant from this menu. Let's exit
from the thesaurus.

Press: Esc

Result: The menu disappears from the screen and your

file is unchanged.
U B E g lig S t i { ^ m B M

Note #1 W h e n T h ere A re No S ynonym s. O ccasionally, you may

ask XyW rite to give you a synonym for a w ord that
doesn’t have one. W hen that happens, X yW rite tells you
that the w ord was not found in the thesaurus, and gives
you a list of words that im m ediately precede and follow it
in the thesaurus dictionary. The cursor is on the w ord
that is the closest in spelling to the w ord you requested a
synonym for. You can request a list o f synonym s for one
o f the words in the list or you can exit from the
thesaurus.

Note #2 L ong Lists. If the list of synonym s does not fit in one
menu, you w ill see a message telling you to press iPgDnl to
display the next part of the list.

note #3 S u p p ly in g a W ord. If you have the thesaurus menu on

the screen and w ant to look up a w ord that does not
appear in the displayed list, just type in the w ord you
w ant to look up. As soon as you press the first character
o f the word, a w indow opens w ithin the menu. Finish
typing the w ord and press [M l IPgDnI to display a new list of
synonym s or (Esc] to close the w indow .

note #4 R eassig n in g th e Key. You can assign this function to

another key in your keyboard file. (See “ Keyboard F ile ”
in Chapter 6.) The function call for the thesaurus is SY.

note #5 W o rd F orm s. The thesaurus contains only the root form

o f m any words. For exam ple, w hen you look up the
w ord “ dictionaries,” X yW rite displays a list of synonym s
for the w ord “ dictionary.” If you press S 3 to replace the
w ord “ dictionaries” w ith a synom ym from the list, you
have to edit the replacem ent to make it plural. You have
to make sim ilar adjustments for different tenses and parts
o f speech.

3-106
 «I5T>tiï^ tT ^ îTî4V/tTifVE K fe M BBWn r ir g if :

, XV, „ „ A Count
w ord n f

W ord Count Backw ard

ISP'S Mm
These are imme<
■ -Mm
P urpose The W C and W C B commands count the num ber of
words in your file or the number o f words in a defined
block. They then display the exact number o f words in
the PRM PT field of the header.

A w ord is a string of characters follow ed by a w ord sepa­

rator (space, comma, colon, sem icolon, period, question
mark, exclam ation point, tab, or carriage return).

A ction C o u n tin g W o rd s f r o m t h e C u r r e n t C u r s o r
P o s itio n to E n d .
To count the number o f words in a displayed file (or a
defined block):

1. M ove the cursor to the point in the file w here you

want the count to begin (o r define the block of text
you want to search).

2. If you w ant the W ord Count to include the text in

running headers and footers, footnotes, and index
markers, switch to expanded mode.

Press: Ctrl F9

3. Enter the W ord Count command.

Type: fF5lwc[^l

Result: XyW rite counts the number o f words from the

current cursor position to the end of the file (o r in the
displayed block) and displays the total number in the
PRM PT field.

3-107
 ■ X SiiM U SH

ACTION C o u n tin g W o r d s f r o m t h e C u r r e n t C u r s o r
P o s it i o n t o S ta rt o f F ile.
You can determ ine exactly how m any w ords you have
w ritten up to a certain point in your file b y counting the
num ber of words from the current cursor position to the
beginning of the file:

1. Be sure the cursor is at the point w here you w ant the

count to begin.

2. If you w ant the W ord Count to include the text in

running headers and footers, footnotes, and index
markers, sw itch to expanded mode.

Press: fctri] fF9l

3. Enter the W ord Count Backw ard command.

Type: [FSlwcbCT

Result: X yW rite counts the num ber o f w ords from the

current cursor position to the beginning of the file (o r in
the displayed block) and displays the total num ber in the
PRM PT field.

NOTE #1 V A Settin g s. You can obtain the current value of the total
num ber o f words counted by using the V A command
w ith $WC. If you place a V A $W C form at com m and in
your file, it w ill read and print out the last value calcu­
lated b y the W C or SPELL commands. Y o u can use this
value in keystroke programs as w ell. (See “User Program ­
m ing” in Chapter 5.)

3-108
 i m t n r z ß jc ü h

*pi _
(SORT filename,targe file (O ption 1)
làà
V$'. K [SORT (O p tion 2)
W
V; Êm'S^;S■>.;.:fei 'VT
'.. ?"■■•:•■
^ ife' l *“?.«
', v.■ 'Ä -i"1'"' "Vv y ' i|. V 'iiv. •;'•
■
a r -w - f
filename is the file you w ant to sort.
mm targetfile is the file w here sorted text is stored.
pm p
■

t * nW * 6 * / ' > } * * * , » ' V *

This is an im m ediate command.
%&■%'$ <•«> V , , ify y W ww. w * <r£ rf * * lv * rt * * y J , i \ yS \ l 1 >- 1 1 ' t r u J> 4 A u si’ 1(1 s^ f

c
e2
PURPOSE The SORT command allow s you to rearrange the entries
in a file or in a defined block into alphabetical order.
(A n entry can be a single character or a group of words.
Each entry ends w ith a carriage return.)

ACTION S o r tin g a F ile .

(Option 1) To sort the entries in a file, say PERS.SPL, into
alphabetical order:

1. Call the file to the screen and check that each entry
ends w ith a carriage return.

2. Store the file and enter the SO RT command.

Type: [EDsort pers.spl.pers.srtS

Result: A new file called PERS.SRT contains entries from
PER S.SPL rearranged into alphabetical order. The file
PER S.SPL remains unchanged.

ACTION S o r tin g a D e f in e d B lo c k .
(Option 2) To sort the entries in a defined block:

1. Call the file to the screen and define the section you
w ant to sort into alphabetical order.

2. Enter the SO RT command.

Type: [£5]sortS]
Result: The defined block disappears from the screen for
an instant. W hen it reappears, the entries in the defined
block are in alphabetical order.

3-109
No te D e fa u lt S o rt T ab le. X yW rite has a built-in set o f sorting
rules for arranging entries. For exam ple, X yW rite treats
the upper- and lowercase versions o f letters as equal.
Perhaps you w ant uppercase entries to be sorted before
low ercase entries. You can do that b y creating your ow n
sort table. (See “ Sort F ile ” in Chapter 6 for m ore inform a­
tion.)
 ld « T im iir n g E

Intro Form atting is the m anner in w h ich text is arranged on a

page. Com m on exam ples include m argins, indents,
justification, use o f running headers, footers, footnotes,
and character modes. The power o f X yW rite is that all o f
these controls are em bedded as hidden characters in the
text (and abbreviated on the d isplay), so that you can go
back and change them at w ill.

W ith X yW rite ’s system o f em bedded com m ands, you

have trem endous versatility at revising text. Fo r exam ple,
you can change a single indent com m and to alter the w ay
all paragraphs are indented. This versatility extends to
every form atting com m and represented b y a triangle (A )
on the display — for m argins, tabs, indents, page length,
and so on.

The form atting com m ands are listed in the table o f

contents on the fo llo w in g pages. The chart w hich then
follow s shows graphically h ow the com m ands in this
section relate to each other.

CONTENTS This Chapter is divided into eleven m ajor sections

arranged alphabetically. Each section stands on its ow n,
m aking it easy for you to read o n ly the sections o f
interest. Thus, if you are interested in how to control the
m argins and tabs, you w ould do w e ll to read the Page
W id th section from start to finish.

The Table o f Contents appears on the next tw o pages.

 L S C B irtP iiifira E

INTRO Formatting is the manner in which text is arranged on a

page. Common examples include margins, indents,
justification, use of running headers, footers, footnotes,
and character modes. The power of XyWrite is that all of
these controls are em bedded as hidden characters in the
text (and abbreviated on the display), so that you can go
back and change them at will.

With XyWrite’s system of em bedded commands, you

have tremendous versatility at revising text. For example,
you can change a single indent command to alter the way
all paragraphs are indented. This versatility extends to
every formatting command represented by a triangle (A)
on the display — for margins, tabs, indents, page length,
and so on.

The formatting commands are listed in the table of

contents on the following pages. The chart which then
follows shows graphically how the commands in this
section relate to each other.

C ontents chapter is divided into eleven major sections

arranged alphabetically. Each section stands on its own,
making it easy for you to read only the sections of
interest. Thus, if you are interested in how to control the
margins and tabs, you would do well to read the Page
Width section from start to finish.

The Table of Contents appears on the next two pages.

4-1
C ontents Page D escription Com m and
r
4-4 O verview
4-6 Embedded Commands
4-8 Normal / Expanded Display

4-11 A lignm ent

4-12 Flush Left / Center / Right FL, FC, FR
4-13 Justification JU,NJ
4-16 Non-Breaking Space Ctiil ISoace Bari
4-17 Automatic Hyphenation HY
4-19 Manual Hyphenation

4-23 Character M odes and Print Type

4-24 Mode Commands
Reset [CtrflO
Normal MD NM
Bold MD BO
Underline UL, MD UL
Reverse MD RV ^
Bold Underline MD BU
Bold Reverse MD BR
Superscript MD SU
Subscript MD SD
4-28 Case Commands UC, LC, CC
4-30 Automatic Uppercase AU
4-31 Print Type PT

4-35 Date & Tim e

4-36 Date DA, TODAY
4-40 Time TM, NOW

4-41 Footnotes
4-42 Basic Footnote Procedures
4-48 Footnote Command FN
4-50 Footnote Separator FS
4-51 Footnote Wrap Separator FW
4-53 Bottom Footnote BF ^
4-55 Dump Footnotes DF
4-56 No Footnotes NF
4-57 Set Footnote Number SF
4-61 Footnote Format FM

4-2
4-63 Headers & Footers
4-64 Running Header & Footer RH, RF
4-67 Page Numbering Final Page PN, FP
4-69 Set Page Number SP

4-73 Num bering

4-74 Automatic Numbering Procedures
4-83 Define Counter DC
4-85 Counter Command CO to C9
4-87 Reference Commands REF, REP, REC

4-93 Page Length

4-94 Page Length Procedures
4-102 Page Length PL
4-104 Form Depth FD
4-105 Top & Bottom Margins TP, BT
4-106 Page Break PG
4-108 Non-Breakable Block NB, BB
4-110 Widow & Orphan WD, OP

4-115 Page W idth

4-116 Ruler
4-118 Changing The Ruler Settings (M Tab
4-120 Left & Right Margins LM, RM
4-121 Offset OF
4-123 Indent Paragraph IP
4-126 Tab Settings TS, TR, RT

4-131 Printer C ontrols

4-132 Pause, Prompt PA, PR
4-133 AutoPause, No Pause AP, NP
4-134 Printer Control PC

4-135 Styles
4-136 Save Style SS
4-138 Use Style US, NS, PS

4-141 Vertical Spacing

4-142 Vertical Spacing Procedures
4-145 Automatic Leading AL
4-147 Extra Leading EL
4-148 Line Leading LL
4-149 Line Spacing LS
-IlIS ä K iiä v « iS B N S O ^ p ii

Character Date& Headers &

Alignment Modes Time Footnotes Footers
-------
_ 1

Flush Flush Flush Justify Running Running

Date Time
Left Center Flight Header Footer
FL FC FR NJ JU DA TM RH RF

.J rL -s - ............ -L... i

Non-Breaking Hyphenation Fixed Fixed Even Odd All

»
Space Date Time Pages Pages Pages
I Ctrl [I Space Bar | HY 0 TODAY NOW E D A

~" .......... «** .... j

...
V
Footnotes Endnotes Page Set Page
Number Number
FN NF DF PN SP
~"TÀÄ
* 1
... .....

Upper Lower Change A uto Footnote Set Footnote Bottom Footnote Footnote
] Case Case Case Uppercase Format Number Footnote Separator Wrap
uc LC cc AU FM SF BF FS FW
--- “=-
___ _S 5S —
::: i

Normal Bold Underline Reverse

MD NM MD BO MD UL MD RV
_ s
.T .. •:—*."T‘ ~¿4fí¡rn‘~

Bold Bold Super­ Sub-

Underline Reverse script Script
MD BU MD BR MD SU MD SD /"■
V

4-4
IH B itia D B g iy iie •X E fc iira c a v !

Page Printer Vertical

Numbering W idth Control Styles Spacing

iHHñASEteSSnc --*BR~ .. *«ST

Pause Prompt Auto No

Pause Pause
PA PR AP NP
.. ■-----

Tab Menu Printer

8 Control
( A lt H Tab 1 I PC
ï\. ...
s

Left Right Offset Indent Tab Tab Relative

Margin Margin Paragraph Set Reset labs
LM RM OF IP TS TR RT

Page Form Top Bottom

Length Depth Margin Margin
PL FO TP BT

Í!ÍS * J

Line Page Non-Breakable Wiaow Orphan

Spacing Break Block
LS PG# NB BB WD OP
^.iirrK:: ■ .
=L: ÿpÉÉ1••• 1
J=zÉé¡¡¡ ••

Define Counter Use Nexl Previous

Counter Command Style Style Style
DC C# US NS PS
su r—::: ■
'"•••■wí.ríiibr: - s i “ .
" « 'i« S g r g j K f t ” 1 .... ; t/¿ .
. s

Refer to Refer to Reler to Label Aulomalic Extra Line Line

Rage No. Chapter No Counter No Leading Leading Leading Spacing
REP REC REF LB AL EL LL LS

f !«ir- „

4-5
Em bedded C om m ands. An em bedded command is a
command which is inserted into the text. It is normally
hidden so as not to interfere with the text. Examples are:

Mode Bold «MDBO»

Right Margin «RM70»
Tab Set « T S 5,10,15»

Generally, em bedded commands affect the format of a

document and not its content. Although hidden, an
em bedded command is actually present in the file — for
example, you could search for «MDBO». In Expanded
Display you can edit em bedded commands.

C haracteristics. Let’s cover some of the characteristics

common to all em bedded commands.

1. H ow Em bedded C om m ands Are N orm ally

D isplayed. Embedded commands appear in the
Normal Display either as a triangle, as a character
mode (bold, underline, reverse or a combination), or
as a bold footnote number.

Moreover, if the cursor is placed on the triangle, the

command itself appears on the PRMPT (Prompt) line
of the header.

2. W here Em bedded C om m ands Take E ffect

Embedded commands take effect starting at the point
they are placed in the text and continuing until the end
of the document or until they are overridden
(whichever occurs first). An em bedded command
never affects any text located on any lines preceding
the command.

For example, FC centers text from its triangle to the

end of the document — or until a flush left, flush
right, or justify command is encountered.
■\

The following commands have a repeated effect only

if placed in a running header or footer: TM (Time),
DA (Date) and PN (Page Number).
 t l R s i B i S v ’j r

3. H ow Embedded Com m ands Can Be Expanded for

V iew ing. Embedded commands can be viewed by
pressing [Ctf] [F9] to switch to the Expanded Display.
They can be edited in this mode just like any other
text.

4. H ow Embedded Com m ands Can Be Edited. You

can switch to Expanded Display to edit commands, or
in Normal Display simply delete and re-enter them.
You can also define and copy or move them as you
would any text.

5. H ow Embedded Com m ands A ffect Printing. While

an embedded triangle occupies a space on the screen,
it occupies no such space on the printout. Instead, it
is stripped out, and its effect is printed (FC would
center the text).

For example, the first of the following two lines shows

how an embedded triangle appears on the screen,
while the second line shows how that line is printed
— the triangle is removed and the sentence is shifted
to the left.

▲Embedded triangles are displayed but not printed.

Embedded triangles are displayed but not printed.

6. H iding Embedded Com m ands from View. If you

prefer not to have the embedded commands visible
on the screen, you can hide them with the NM (No
Markers) command. Go to the command line and
type:

[Rjfunc nmCT

The markers re-appear upon striking [Ctri] [?9] twice (to

switch to Expanded Display and back). You can
customize XyWrite to display files without markers by
including the DT=3 setting in your Printer File. See
Printer File in Chapter 6, Customizing.

4-7
Æ Z f c i ü ’i S v m ICCô V i i k î

P urpose Normal Display and Expanded Display are two different

ways to view a document, as show n in the illustration on
the following page.

• N orm al D isp lay shows the em bedded commands as

triangles, keeping the display uncluttered. Text is
shown as it will be printed. As the name suggests,
this is the mode you normally use.
• E xpanded D isp lay reveals all em bedded commands
within double-angle brackets — that is, they are
expanded for viewing. You can then move the cursor
into the em bedded commands and change them.
Because the em bedded commands may be lengthy,
line endings are not shown as they will be printed.

A ction Toggling Betw een Norm al and Expanded D isplay.

To switch from Normal to Expanded Display:

P re ss: Ctr F9

To switch back to Normal Display, perform the same

action again. This action toggles betw een the two
modes.

NOTE #1 P-L Indicator. The Page-Line indicator (P-L) at the top

of your screen turns off w hen you are in the Expanded
Display. P-L operates only in the Normal Display.
(Consequently, if you wish to turn off the P-L indicator,
press [CtrOdi] twice.)

NOTE #2 D efault Ruler Settings. In Expanded Display the default

tabs are used in place of the docum ent’s own tab stops.
In order to make the Expanded Display appear more like
the Normal Display, use the DEFAULT command to set
the tab stops. For example, if your document uses tab
settings TS 3,6,9 then type:

EH d e f a u lt ts= 3 ,6 ,9

Now whenever you switch to Expanded Display, these

tab settings will be in effect.
 -:C X Ï9 ira c ^ v «

JJWERVIEN.PIC
. » . . . . 3 . • •♦ - •»>5 6' • R - ••
»»
This is a comparison o f the same te x t in both the Normal Display arid
the Expanded D isplay. You can sw itch modes a t any time by pressing
9
lC tr |J [ F l . B rie fly , you vie» the two modes as follow s:»

?! * * ♦ .—
Normal D isplay: Embedded commands appear as tria i les
while c h a ra c te r nodes appear as u ra ie rline or
In Normal Display, th is paragraph begins with tic
tr ia n g le fo r the command IP 6,6
aid RH . 60
Expanded Display: All embedded commands appear
expanded w ithin double angle brackets.. Some oT tbe$b 'S*
commands normally appear as tr ia n g le s , while others
■r
appear as c h a ra c te r modes. Notice th a t the indent
does not appear in Expanded D isplay. N either do the ~~
tah s o r margins — a l l screen form atting a p p e a r s in
the d e fa u lt s e ttin g s . ' - .‘sS

N O R M A L D IS P L A Y

E X P A N D E D D IS P L A Y

w ..........»1------« • > ..? ..

®vERviEw.pic::Si;r
.3 . .> •{ "■ ■4»-. . .< •. -ms-
og
This is a comparison o f the same tex t in both the NtrmalDisplay and the
Expanded Display. You can sw itch nodes a t any time by pressing ( C t r l ] |F |, 9
P.riefly, you view the two modes as follow s:»

jj «IP6.6>x(WfcO»+ ¿1“*
«MDMI-xNormal Oisplay*MWK»: Embedded commands appear as tr ia n g le s while
ch aracter wodes appear as «MDUL»underline«MDt*<» o r «MDRV^everse'dtDt**». In__
Normal D isplay, th is paragraph begins w ith t h e t r i a n g l e fo r the command IP
6,6and RM .» ■— 60 __ .-«IiA'- ^ --“11
I
4
«MDUL»Expanded Display<d Dt*t»: All embedded cnmmands appear expanded w ithin
double angle b rackets. Some of these cuamiands normally appear as tr ia n g le s ,
-while o th ers appear as c h a ra c te r modes..;ri Notice that the indent does not
appear in Expanded Display, tfeith er do (fie labs o r m argins“- - a l l screen
form atting appears in the d e fa u lt s e ttin g s . -

■^rmnLT*
~ U*r.. -r.~
..................... !3

L I PP "Z.;T. î
r»ci ... s-n*.™ 2
..-w->jr ramv

4-9
no tes

4-10
 iu s i m

I n tr o You may want to modify the appearance of text by

changing its alignment. The four alignments available are

A lignment
shown in the figure below. This section covers these
alignments plus two related topics — Non-Breaking
Space and Hyphenation. Microjustification is described in
Chapter 6.

CONTENTS Page Section Command

4-12 Flush Left / Center / Right
Flush Left FL
Flush Center FC
Flush Right FR

4-13 Justification
Justify JU
No Justify NJ

4-16 Non-Breaking Space [Ctrl] ISpace Bar

4-17 H yphenation
4-17 Automatic Hyphenation HY
4-19 Manual Hyphenation Q, 0

4-11
iimsnnsf^psïiis^pgB^ laüMsoa»

Fo r m a t Flush Left
Flush Center
Til?~c* . .1
Flush Right

P u rpo se These three commands control the horizontal

alignment of text. Each command is entered at a point
in text and takes effect from that line forward. You can
freely switch from one alignment to another simply by
entering the command for the new alignment.
• Flush Left (FL) pushes the lines of text against the
left margin (LM). This is the most common
alignment.
• Flush Center (FC) centers the text between the left
and right margins. Both the left and right edges are
ragged.
• Flush Right (FR) pushes the lines of text against the
right margin (RM).

A c t io n S e ttin g th e T ex t A lig n m e n t
To set the text to one of the three alignments:
1. Move the cursor to the start of the line whose align­
ment you want to change (or to a preceding lin e).
2. Enter FL, FC, or FR. To center the text, for instance:
Type: [F5]fC0
Result: The text following the embedded triangle is
centered. All lines are centered up to the point where a
counter-acting command (either FL, FR, orJU) is
encountered. Being an embedded command, FC would
appear in Expanded Display as «FC».

A lso se e Flush Tabs. If you want to have both flush left text and
flush right text on the same line, use flush tabs. Refer to
“Tab Settings” elsewhere in this chapter.

4-12
 s~x: ;jEsiiSrT
**$585
Fo r m a t i^fe^rfrr- .«i• ::!MJustify On

A
¡•¡■.SLVrJ?!- ••....••.
\k :-i ÎÏ<-‘-
r. •; ..;-w»ir»
ù .
rv /.
'•r
'•
_i*
B3n j :- ?C“7ÜE-:î£ No Justify

lignment
V-'1 .' . ‘¡¿¿à;

P u rpo se The JU (Justify on) command causes the text to be

printed fully justified — that is, the text is even along
both its left and right edges. JU and NJ are com ple­
mentary — you use JU to turn justification on and NJ to
turn it off.
XyWrite offers two kinds of justified text:
• Whole-Space Justification (described below)
• Microjustification (described in Chapter 6)
You choose one or the other by the settings in your
Printer File (DF W S= 1 at the beginning of your Printer
File designates Whole-Space Justification). XyWrite
printer files are initially set up for the highest quality
printing — Microjustification. While Microjustification
has a better appearance than Whole-Space Justification,
it is very slow on some printers.

A c t io n S e le c tin g T ex t to b e J u stifie d
To turn on justification:
1. Move the cursor to the start of the line you want
justified, or to a preceding line.
2. Type: [F5]jU0
Result: The text following the JU em bedded triangle
will be justified when it is printed. The text does not
automatically appear justified on-screen. Justification
stays in effect throughout the rem ainder of the docu­
m ent unless NJ is encountered to turn it off. To turn off
justification:
1. Move the cursor to the line whose alignment you
want to change.
2. Type: |F5]nj0
Result: The text following the NJ is flush left (or flush
center or flush right if it was last in effect.)

4-13
C B rfffw lifiT ie iG O iiri)]

NOTE #1 Hard R eturns/Soft Returns. Justification operates only

on lines ending with a soft return (word wrap) — it does
not operate on lines that end with a carriage return.

NOTE #2 C om parison o f Justification T ypes. In short, the two

types of justification work as follows:

• Whole-space justification — XyWrite calculates the

num ber of spaces by which a line would be short of
the right margin, and then distributes those spaces
equally between words (but not between characters of
a word).

• Microjustification — This method is based on inserting

partial spaces not only between words but also
betw een characters. The effect is smoother spacing
than with Whole-Space Justification.

Microjustification is described further in Chapter 6,

"Customizing."

M IC R O J U S T IF IC A T IO N
C o m p a r e m i c r o j u s t i f i c a t i o n and whole-
space justification. The top sample has
partial spaces between words and letters.
W H O L E -S P A C E J U S T IF IC A T IO N
Compare microjustification and whole-
space justification. The top sample has
partial spaces between words and letters.

4 14
NOTE #3 O verriding C om m ands. JU and NJ override the flush
commands FL, FC and FR. To return to FL from JU, for

iN3WN9ny
instance, you type NJ (not FL).

NOTE #4 C om binations o f A lignm ents. If you follow FL or FR

with JU, the body of text is justified; however, short lines
— lines which are not justified — are pushed flush left or
right according to w hether FL or FR preceded JU.

NOTE #5 Em bedded C om m ands. JU and NJ are em bedded

commands — they are em bedded in text, visible as
triangles in Normal Display. In Expanded Display they
are shown expanded — for example: « J U » .

NOTE #6 D isp lay o f Ju stification . XyWrite does not try to show

the text justified on-screen; the text is justified when
printed.

4-15
IS S iB fflto S fitg jg fg p a s -

Bar 3 3 « » ' - ¿Kffp&Sl^âgjg _“

i
ili'iïï-ï j
SB»«-»* :;;*;™=
— TB 5
^w
nr1^•: w^r:s;|d
.._...<unn>

P urpo se The Non-Breaking Space inserts a space that w ill not

break at the end of a line. This is useful w hen you want
to prevent two words from ever being separated.

A c t io n I n s e r tin g a N o n -B r e a k in g S p a c e
To insert a Non-Breaking Space betw een the words
R oute and 66:
Press: Route Ictrij ISpace Bari 66
Result: Now “ Route 6 6 “ w ill always appear on one
line.

NOTE ASCII 32. The Non-Breaking Space is really the charac­

ter ASCII 32. You can search for it w ith the SEARCH
com m and by typing [cm] ISpace Bari on the comm and line
as you w ould any other character (it appears on the
com m and line as the three digits: space, 2 , 0 ) .

T IP M aking th e N on-B reaking Space V isib le. If you want

to distinguish the non breaking space in the display
from the normal space:
1. Select a character (perhaps the center dot, ASCII
250).
2. Assign it to m ISpace Bari in the Keyboard File:
TABLE=CTRL
57= ■
3. Assign the space character for printout in a
Character Substitution File:
=

4-16
 f t Ï Ï ô T i l M i ï ü ! C JjJT S tM tfiF t

P urpose Hyphenation can be automatic or manual. In automatic

Mil?
hyphenation, XyWrite breaks the words as you enter

A l ig n m e n t
them. It uses an internal set of hyphenation rules-,
exceptions to the rules are handled in an exception
dictionary. You can turn automatic hyphenation on and
off in different areas of text with the em bedded command
HY.

A ction Turning on Autom atic H yphenation.

To turn automatic hyphenation on, load a hyphen
exception dictionary. DICTION is the file that is supplied
with XyWrite:

Type: [Fglddict d i c t i o n 0

Result: This loads the hyphen dictionary and turns

hyphenation on for all documents.

NOTE #1 A ltering th e A utom atic H yphens. If you want to make

changes to the way XyWrite hyphenates specific words,
change the hyphen exception dictionary. For information
on how to do this, see the LDDICT command in Chapter 6.

N o te #2 Creating O ther H yp henation D iction aries. You can

create and use other hyphenation exception dictionaries
for special purposes. You do not need to use the file
DICTION that we provide.

NOTE #3 U sing LDDICT to Turn O ff H yphenation. You can

disable hyphenation by giving the LDDICT command
with no filename. This clears the current dictionary from
memory and turns off the automatic hyphenation. Or use
the HY command described in the next section.

NOTE #4 M anual H yphenation. You can override the automatic

hyphenation of a word by inserting a soft hyphen within
the word in your document. If you place the soft hyphen
in front of the first letter of the word, the word will not
be broken.

4-17
 IU W

S3 HYON Turns hyphenation on : ,

¡33 HY OFF Turns hyphenation off 5
HY is an embedded command.

P urpo se The HY command lets you turn automatic hyphenation on

and off within a document.
For automatic hyphenation to work, it is necessary that (1 )
you load a hyphenation dictionary with LDDICT, and (2 )
that HY be on. By default, HY is on at startup (see Note
# 2 ).

ACTION Switching H yphenation On and Off

Load the hyphenation dictionary (or make sure it has
already been loaded):
Type: [Fglddict d ic tio n ®
Result: Automatic hyphenation is now turned on.
To turn off automatic hyphenation:
1. Position the cursor where you want to disable
hyphenation.
2. Type: |f5]hy O ff®
Result: The embedded command tells XyWrite not to
automatically hyphenate any text that follows.
To again turn on automatic hyphenation:
1. Position the cursor where you want to enable
automatic hyphenation.
2. Type: djhy o n ®

Note #i Loading LDDICT. If you have not loaded an exception

dictionary with LDDICT, HY has no effect on the file.

Note #2 D efault H yphenation Setting. The default at startup is

HY ON unless you use the DEFAULT command to
change it.

No t e # 3 H yphenation Param eters. You can control the

minimum size of hyphenated words and the number of
letters before and after a hyphen. See the LDDICT
command, Chapter 6.

4-18
P u rpo se XyWrite has three different hyphens: a non breaking
hard hyphen, a breaking hard hyphen and a soft hy­
phen. Examples of each are shown in the illustration
below.

H y p h e n a tio n s
A hard hyphen is always
visible, no matter where the
word falls on the line. Hard Hyphen
Use a non-breaking hard
hyphen for a minus sign, A lw ays visib le
such as -2. ___ ___________ — • N on-B reaking
You would use a breaking ' • B reaking
hard hyphen for wor
as pre-empt «rnT^self
evident. These are words
which require a hyphen. Soft Hyphen
A soft hyphen is used to
. • V isible only when
break long words at the end the w ord breaks
of a line, such as inalien­ at the end of a
able. A soft hyphen dis-*
appears if the entire word line; not visib le
fits on the line. otherw ise.

4-19
ACTION Inserting H yphens
To insert the three different hyphens, refer to the
following chart.
Type o f H yphen A ction
Non-Breaking Hard Hyphen
M lShiftl45 Press and hold @ (ML
type the num ber 45,
then release [Âltl [Shift
Breaking Hard Hyphen
E Use either the hyphen
located in the top row
next to the “ 0 ” , or use
the minus sign on the
num eric keypad.
Soft Hyphen
S 0 The tilde key is located
immediately left of the
Enter key (on a
standard IBM
keyboard).

4-20
ig g iiin « w fm n n iiifîiP iK iîriT i

A c t io n D e le tin g a S o ft H y p h e n
If a soft hyphen is visible at the end of a line, you can

itftwuniTii
delete it as you w ould any other character. However, if
that word is moved to the m iddle of the line, the soft
hyphen w ill not be visible. To delete a soft hyphen (in
either case), do the following:
1. Switch to Expanded Display w ith lew] [F9]. The soft
hyphen w ill show as a tilde ( ~ ) .
2. Type: msearch / ~ - / 0
3. Type: [Backspace]
Result: Step 3 deletes the tilde that was found in Step 2.

A c t io n D e le tin g a H ard H y p h e n
Because a hard hyphen is always visible, it’s easier to
find than a soft hyphen. You search for a Non-Breaking
Hard Hyphen differently than you do for a Breaking
Hard Hyphen.
• To search for a Non-Breaking Hard Hyphen:
Type: [F5]search /
Type: [Ait] IShift]45
Type: /0
Result: This appears on the Command Line as:
03 search / 2D/
• To search for a Breaking Hard Hyphen:
Type: [^search / - / 0
Use either hyphen on the keyboard.

4-21
NOTE # 1 Hard H yphen. A Hard Hyphen is alw ays visible,
w hether the word appears in the middle or at the end of
a line. XyWrite has two kinds of Hard Hyphens.
• Breaking Hard H yphen. Use this hyphen in words
where the hyphen is a normal part of the word
(words such as self-evident, pre-em pt), and where
you want to allow the word to break at the hyphen
at the end of a line.
• N on-Breaking Hard H yphen. Use this hyphen for
the minus sign (-2 ) , and for hyphenated words
which you don’t want to break at line endings —
company or product names, like Lotus 1-2-3
NOTE #1 Soft H yphen. Use a soft hyphen to break a long word
between syllables when the word falls at the end of a
line. Use the soft hyphen only for words w hich would
otherwise not be hyphenated. Then the soft hyphen is
visible only when the word breaks at the end of a line,
and is not visible otherwise (except in Expanded
Display).
TIP P o sitio n in g th e Cursor to Insert a Soft H yphen. If
you hadn’t realized, throughout XyWrite it is the left
edge of the cursor rectangle that indicates where
characters are inserted (in Insert m ode). Thus you
place the cursor on the character to the right of where
you want to insert the soft hyphen.

4-22
INTRO In order to add emphasis to text, you can use the MD
commands to modify it with underlining, bold, reverse,
superscript, subscript, and various combinations. (You
can also make u p your own modes, such as strikethrough
or double-underlining — see the "Printer File" section in
Chapter 6.) How these modes are actually displayed and
printed depends on the capabilities of your hardware.

C haracter
You can also change the typeface with the PT
command—for Pica, Elita or Proportional type.

M
C ontents Pa«e S ection Com m and

ooes
4-24 M ode C om m ands
Reset M o
Normal Mode MD NM
Bold Mode MD BO
Underline Mode UL, MD UL
Reverse Mode MD RV
Bold Underline Mode MD BU
Bold Reverse Mode MD BR
Superscript Mode MD SU
Subscript Mode MD SD

4-28 Case C om m ands

Uppercase UC
Lowercase LC
Change Case CC

4-30 A utom atic U ppercase AU

4-31 Print T ype PT

o 1°
°1 1°
°1 1°
° Words w h i c h are underlined 1o
o1 or made bold stand out Irom Io
0[ the rest of the text. 1°
°1 S u p e r s c r i P ted text is 1°
useful for footnotes and
°1 math. 1°
o 1‘ 0
°1 Io
. 1 1
h •rrr ' - - — — ■■
-- ^ '-nr'

4-23
h lß T iJ liG T iiT ü M iiiJ c fc M l »

7 » M S !
nñiHW““' ' .,-'" ¡¿ kÄSÜ'
:ORMAT E3MD nn or Ctrl #
___ •¡'■TT-••
* f_~ . i
Ip S » :
<Mode Command) (Control Key) _- - ■--••, .
ä p * 8K*77::'
_____

nn is a two-letter mode command or a num ber

# is a num ber from 0 to 8 at the top row of the keyboard
-¿ fä are: em bedded commands *-£zr-_'~-~ZZ - :^ fe~ !T
1 IS

P urpose Character modes allow you to highlight text as listed

below. In the Normal Display these m odes are displayed
as they would be printed. Using the [Ori] key with a
num ber is a convenient method for allowing you to enter
text in a new mode without affecting existing text. When
you press [Ctri]2, anything you type will be in bold.

The value nn in the format statement above can be any of

the 13 two-letter commands shown below, or any
num ber 0 to 255 from the Color Table. See Note #5 for
further information on the Color Table.

M ode C ontrol Character

C om m and K ey M ode

---- [CtrflO Reset (Default)

MD NM EDI Normal
MD BO \tijj\2 Bold
MD UL [CtrÖ3 Underline
MD RV [CtríH Reverse
MD BU [Ctrl 15 Bold Underline
MD BR fCil6 Bold Reverse
MD SU [CtrT| 7 Superscript
MD SD fctri|8 Subscript

MD FN __ Footnote
MD FL — Flashing
MD FU — Flashing Underline
MD FR — Flashing Reverse
MD SO — Standout (Flashing Bold)
MD nn — Color modes (nn = 1-255)

W hen using MD UL, you can control how tabs and spaces
are underlined with the UL command. See Note *4.

4-24
[G®»«» M U ß fn n n n iiiB k

The procedure for new text is different than that for

existing text. These two procedures follow.
• Changing the Mode of Existing Text. ( Option 1)
• Selecting a Mode for New Text. ( Option 2)

A c t io n C h a n g in g th e M od e o f E x is tin g T ex t

tvuyhi
{Option 1) There are two ways to change the character m ode of
existing text. We w ill use bold as an example.

SIflAU! hu
U sing th e [Ctri] K ey. You define the block of text (steps
1-4) and then change the character mode of the entire
block.
1. Move the cursor w here you w ant the bold to start.
2. Press: 0
3. Move the cursor w here you want the bold to end.
4. Press: 0
5 . Press: [Ctrl]2 to select bold
6. Press: 0 to release the defined text
Result: The defined text switches to bold. You can use
any of the several m ethods available to define the text
— define by w ord, by sentence or by paragraph.
U sing th e MD C om m and. You change the character
mode at the start (Step 2) and then again at the end
(Step 4 ).
1. Move the cursor w here you want the bold to start.
2. Type: 0m d bo@
Result: The text from this point to the end o f the
docum ent (or to the next mode com mand) changes
to bold.
3- Move the cursor w here you want the bold to end.
4. Type: 0m d n m 0
Result: Only the text betw een the start (MD BO)
and end (MD NM) is now bold. Being an em bedded
command, MD BO appears in the Expanded Display
as«MDB0».

4-25
 iG S itiP i

A ction Entering Text in a New Mode.

(Option 2) To enter text in new mode, use the [Ctrl] key. Let’s use
bold as an example.
1. Move the cursor to where you want to type in bold
text.
2. Press: [CWj2 (to select bold)
3. Begin typing the bold text.
4. When done typing, reset the mode with [Ctrfj-zero:
Press: [CtrilO

N o te *\ H ow M odes Affect H yphens. Hyphens inserted by

Automatic Hyphenation or as soft hyphens print out in
Normal Mode rather than in the current mode. To print
the hyphens in the current mode, enter the setting FO=4
in the Font Table of the Printer File (see Chapter 6).

NOTE #2 Use M O fo r R eset. When you first start up XyWrite, it

is in the [Ctr[]0 (Control-zero) mode. This is an adaptive
mode; in it you can move the cursor about and enter text
in whatever mode exists at the new cursor location. If
you move the cursor to bold text, the new text is
automatically entered in bold. After changing modes, you
can return to the adaptive mode with [CtflO.

NOTE #3 U nderline o n C olor M onitors. If you have a color

monitor, the underline does not appear on your screen;
it appears instead as blue text.

N o t e #4 C ontrolling U nderlining. The UL setting lets you

specify how tabs and spaces in the underline mode (MD
UL) print out. The choices are as follows:
111 0 Underline everything
ul 1 Underline everything but tabs
Ul 2 Underline everything but tabs and spaces
ul 3 Underline only letters and numbers
UL 1 is the default. To enter the UL command:
1. Move the cursor to the top line of the file (or ahead of
the text whose underlining you want to control).

4-26
í C S I 'it f W

2. Enter the UL command on the Command Line. For

example, to underline everything in the MD UL mode
except tabs:
Type: fF5lul 1S3

NOTE #5 C olors. You can use color modes even if you don’t have
a color monitor. Although the colors will not be visible
on a monochrome (black & white) monitor, they will pro­
duce the same printing styles that a color monitor would.

You use MD 1 to MD 255 to specify colors modes. (You

can view these on-screen with the Help File by selecting
BYJCEYWORD and typing in COLOR TABLE.) For
example:

MD 31 Bright white characters on blue background

MD 4 Red characters on black background
MD 116 Red characters on white background
MD 208 Black characters on magenta background

You select the colors as follows (using the example of

bright white characters on blue background):
1. Pick a color for the characters from the Color Table.
Bright white characters is number 15.
2. Pick a color for the background. Blue background is
number 16.
3. Add the two numbers together: 15+16=31
4. At the command line, type MD 31:
Type: [F5]md 31 S3

NOTE #6 Printing o f Character M odes. XyWrite provides a great

deal of flexibility in how cha&cter modes are printed.
You can specify in the Printer Table exactly how a mode
is to be printed, depending on your printer’s capabilities.
For example, you can specify the bold mode, MD BO, to
be printed as either doublestrike (exact overstrike) or as
shadowprint (slight offset to overstrike). (In fact, you are
free to use MD BO to represent italic or whatever printing
mode you want.) Refer to "Printer File" in Chapter 6.

4-27
 ■ a ic c m e «m e

•ORMAT E IU C U p p e rc a s e
«P
^ _........ . ......
1 HflLC _ r ^ Lowercase ?
SDCC Change Case _ -
These are im m ediate com m ands (not em b ed d e d ).

P u rp ose The case com m ands allow you to change letters to

uppercase or lowercase. You can change the character
at the cursor location or change an entire block of
defined text. Three different com m ands are at your
disposal:
• UC (U pper Case) — Changes text to uppercase
(capital letters)
• LC (Lower Case) — Changes text to lowercase
• CC (Change Case) — Changes uppercase to low er
and lowercase to upper.
The follow ing procedures provide tw o different ways to
change the case o f text:
• Changing the Case of Individual Letters. ( Option 1)
• Changing the Case of Defined Text. (Option 2)

ACTION C hanging th e Case o f In divid u al Letters

(■Option 1) To change the case of individual letters:
1. Move the cursor to the character w hose case you
want to change.
2. Enter UC, LC or CC — for exam ple, to change the
character to uppercase:
Press: ^UCjre]
3. Press [re] once for each character you w ant to make
u p p er case.
Result: The lowercase characters are changed to
uppercase. Uppercase letters remain uppercase.

4-28
■C
GOH iik lW

A c t io n C hanging th e Case o f D efined Text

(Option 2) To change the case of a block of defined text:
1. Move the cursor to the sta rt of the block of text you
want to change.
2. Press: (fTJ

Character M
I
3. Move the cursor to the e n d of the block you want to *
change.
4. Press: [nj

ooes
5. Enter UC, LC or CC. For exam ple, to change the
case:
Type: [F5]CC

6. Press: [ra] to release the defined block of text

Result: The defined text changes case in Step 5.
Notice that by repeating [§}), you can toggle the case
back and forth, from up p er to lower to upper case. (If
this procedure doesn’t work, press |ra) and try again.)

4-29
riTÏÏBTti n \ m

Automatic Ui

AU is an imme :e command

P urpose The AU (Automatic Uppercase) command automatically

capitalizes the first letter of each sentence, reducing your
need to use the Shift key.

A ction Typing w ith Autom atic U ppercase. Automatic

Uppercase command is a toggle — you issue it once to
turn it on and again to turn it off. To use the Automatic
Uppercase feature:

1. Move the cursor where you want to start using

Automatic Uppercase.

2. Press: [F5]au0 (to turn on AU)

Result: The letter A appears at the top right com er of

the screen, to indicate Automatic Uppercase is turned
on.

3. Press: [FTo] (to move cursor to text area)

4. Begin typing. The first letter following a period ( . ),

question mark ( ? ), exclamation mark ( ! ) or 0
(Enter) is automatically typed uppercase without your
having to use the Shift key.

5. When finished typing:

Press: [FslauCT (to turn off AU)

N ote H ow AU W orks. The AU command capitalizes the first

letter following a period, regardless of what the period is
used for — including abbreviations and numbers (as a
decimal point). If you have a lot of abbreviations or
numbers, this mode may not be for you. However, if you
are typing straight text, this mode can save you time.

4-30
PURPOSE The PT (Print Type) command specifies the typeface
(font) in which your text is printed. For most printers,
XyWrite is set up as follows:
• PT 1 — 10-pitch (Pica or Courier)
All characters are the same width, at 10 characters per
inch.
• PT 2 — 12-pitch (Elite)
All characters are the same width, at 12 characters per
inch.
• PT 3 — Proportional type
Characters have different widths — for instance, an "i"
is narrower than a "w." (For some printers, PT 3 is 15-
pitch instead.)

Since the PT 2 characters are narrower than the PT 1

characters, you can fit more text on a page if you use PT
2. PT 1 characters are wider, and therefore easier to read.

Proportional type has a classier appearance, and is often

preferred. However, proportional type is not available on
all printers, and is less useful in tables or columnar data.

For a few printers, including laser printers, PT 2 and PT 3

are not as described above. The best way to see what
fonts your printer has is to print out the test sheet shown
in the illustration "Testing Your Printer’s Fonts."

Typically, you choose a default value for PT you like for

your body copy (such as PT2). Then you might change
the font (to PT 1) for titles to make them stand out. You
are free to change fonts back and forth as many times as
you wish. You can use PT to change entire documents
or to change a single word or character.
ACTION Setting a Type Font.
To set text to be printed in a particular type font:

1. Move the cursor to the start of the text where you

want the new font to begin.
2. Enter the PT command you want. For example, if you
want Elite:
Type: (F5]pt 2 0
Result: The PT is embedded in the text as a triangle.
From this point forward, the text will be printed in Elite
(12 characters per inch).

NOTE #1 More Fonts. With a little work, you can add fonts
beyond the standard PT 1, PT 2, and PT 3, if your printer
is capable. For instance, an Epson FX printer is capable
of:
PICA/EXPANDED
COMPRESSED
ELITE/EXPANDED
COMPRESSED/EXPANDED
PROPORTIONAL/ITALIC
PROPORTIONAL/EXPANDED
PROPORTIONAL/ITALIC/EXPANDED.

Thus, you could assign ELITE/EXPANDED font to PT 4.

Call up your Printer File (CALL 3EPSONFX.PRN) to see
what capabilities are listed at the top of the file. Read the
Printer File section in Chapter 6 for information on how
to assign those fonts to PT values.

NOTE #2 D efault Setting. The default value is PT 1. This causes

your printer to print 10 characters per inch. This is a
convenient setting — it means the ruler at the top of the
screen measures inches (and each dot on the ruler
corresponds to 1/10", or one character).

If you consistently use a font other than PT 1 then make

that the default instead. To make PT 2 the default, add
DEFAULT PT 2 to your STARTUP.INT file (see Chapter 6).
You can also set the default in your Printer File with
DF PT 2.

4-32
 J

T E S T IN G Y O U R P R IN T E R ’S F O N T S

Simply create a file with the following text and PT commands,

and then print it. The resulting printout is shown below.

SCREEN
«PT1»+ ▲
This paragraph is PT 1. For an Epson FX, this
produces PIC A type (10 characters per inch).

« PT2»+ A
This paragraph is P T 2. For an Epson FX, this
produces ELITE type (12 characters per inch).

<<PT3»-^ A
This paragraph is P T 3. For an Epson FX, this
produces P R O P O R T IO N A L type (about 11 characters
per inch on the average).

T h i s p a r a g r a p h i s P T 1. F o r an E p s o n
FX, t h i s p r o d u c e s P I C A t y p e ( a b o u t 10
c 11 a r a c t e r s p e?r i n c:h ) .

T h i s p a r a g r a p h is PT 2. For an Ep son
FX, t h i s p r o d u c e s E L I T E t y p e (about 12
c h a r a c t e r s per inch ).

This paragraph is PT 3. For an Epson

FX, this produces PROPORTIONAL type (about
11 characters per inch on the average).

4-33
 K s& m nm

NOTE #3 Embedded Comm and. P T is an embedded command,

visible as a triangle in the Normal Display. In the
Expanded Display, it would appear expanded, as « PT2».

4-34
I ntro XyWrite will enter the correct date and time into your
document for you in either of two ways: with the current
date and time (with DA and TM) that continually updates
or as a time stamp (with TODAY and NOW) which does
not update.

C ontents pa«e section Com m and

4-36 Date DA, TODAY

4-40 Tim e TM, NOW

awix S arva

“ 7 Î

4-35
iC T fic I I K lK iB a V f f

(K'&scg*
¡QDA/orm ¡¿ ^ p i^ ^ ^ g C u rre n t'D a te ' •iSsiS^' iBffl
ESITODAY . Date ^sS
fiiSjSlpfift
—rr-”' 11^". " ^ ^^i"-';"l,u '"’'~;~Ij^-:-—• -~ • '.‘M •--■ •.;:... " ~«n*/ ,
..•¡rJi • •
Mform (optional) is any combination of m (month), d (day)
and y (year) listed later in options, such as mm/dd/yy.
DA is• an^ em bedded command. _ ^
.• -•■TfiT*."T _ •«A*ri I- —
i
TODAY is an immediate command. ;
Sfe£?38i£fe^f£ft£.:- iiiS*

PURPOSE The D A (Date) and T O D A Y commands both insert the

current date into your text. DA inserts a soft date — it is
continually updated, always displaying the current day,
month and year. TODAY inserts a hard date, as
permanent text, never updated. The clock internal to
your computer automatically provides the current month,
day and year.
You have great flexibility in how you display the date.
See the examples later in this section. If you don’t
specify a forni, the date format defaults to "letterhead"
style (full month, date, full year), such as:
A p ril 1, 1986
However, you can change that default by placing a DA
setting in the Printer File; see the note "Changing the
Default Date Format." The TODAY command does not
take a modified form on the Command Line, and can be
changed only by changing the default.
ACTION In s e rtin g th e Soft D ate.
To insert a date which is continually updated:
1. Move the cursor to where you want the first character
of the date to be located.
2. Type DA followed by any of the options described on
the next page. To give one example:
Type: [F5]da MMMM ’yyES
/

436
 v a m m

Result: The date appears in the text after an embedded

-\ triangle. The triangle is removed upon printing:

AAPRIL ’86 as displayed

APRIL ’86 as printed

This command would appear in Expanded Display as:

« D A M M M M ’y y »

A ction Inserting the Hard Date.

To insert a date as permanent text:

Type: [F5]today0

Result: The date will be placed at the cursor location in

your text. The default format will be used. The date is
fixed text — it will not be updated when the file is used
later.

The TODAY command will not accept date formats on

the command line as DA does. You can change the
TODAY date form only by putting a DA setting in your
printer file, which sets the default form for both DA and
TODAY. See the note below.

Note Changing th e D efault D ate Form at. When you use the
TODAY command, or DA without a form, the date
appears in "letterhead" form. But you can change that
default form with a DA setting in your printer file.

For a European-style format (day, month, year), for

example, call up your Printer File and insert the following
line, using the "less than" symbol (<) after DA:

DA<d Mmm yy

Once the printer file is saved and loaded, any DA

command without a form (or the TODAY command) will
yield a date with the form:

1 Apr 86

See the "Printer File" section in Chapter 6 for more on

how to put settings in the printer file.

4-37
 [CSutilPX

Options M onth. Note below that you use uppercase M’s where
you want uppercase letters to appear in the month.

Form at E xam ples

• Complete name of month: MMMM APRIL

Use four M’s. Mmmm April

• Three-letter abbreviation: MMM APR

Use three M’s. Mmm Apr

• Two-digit months 01-12: mm 04

Use two M’s.

• Months 1-12 (No leading zero): m 4

Use one M.

Day. The day of the month can be expressed any of

three ways:

• Leading space for days 1-9: ddd 1

Use three D’s.

• Leading zero for days 1-9: dd 01

Use two D’s.

• No leading zero or space: d 1

Use one D.

Year. The year can be expressed in either of two ways:

• Complete four-digit year: yyyy 1986

Use four Y’s.

• Two-digit year: yy 86
Use two Y’s.

4-38
 le iïfü e -

EXAMPLES C om binations o f M onth, D ate and Year. You can

combine the month, day and year in any order. You can
also insert any punctuation you want printed. If the
current date were April 1, 1986, the following
combinations would yield the dates shown:

M m m m d , yyyy April 1 ,1 9 8 6
d Mmm yy 1 Apr 86
m/d/yy 4 /1 /8 6
m/ddd/yy 4 / 1 /8 6
mm/dd/yy 0 4 /0 1 /8 6
M M M M ’yy APRIL ’86

D ate & T i m e

4-39
ftfR T p Ä

Soft Time
Fixed Time

TM is an em bedded co m m an d ^ ^
NOW is an immediate command. £

P urpose The TM (Time) and NOW commands insert the current

time into your text, as provided by the clock internal to
your computer. TM enters the soft time — it’s continually
updated (like a clock). It shows the new, current time
whenever it appears on the screen or is printed. NOW
inserts the current time as non-changing text.

A ction Inserting the Soft Time.

To insert the soft time into your text:
1. Move the cursor where you want the first character of
the time to be located.
2. Type: [RjltmCT

Result: The time appears in the text along with an

em bedded triangle. Being an em bedded command, TM
would appear in the Expanded Display as «TM».

A ction In se r tin g th e F ix e d T im e.
To insert the current time so it will not change:

1. Move the cursor w here you want the first character of

the time to be located.
2. Type: (fSjnow Q
Result: The current time is inserted, fixed as ordinary
text.

N ote Updating. The time inserted by the TM command does

not automatically update on the screen. You must press
[F3l. change a character on that line, or move the TM
command off and back on for it to update.

4-40
INTRO If you use footnotes, you'll find XyWrite gives you a great
deal of control over how they appear. You can easily
place all footnotes at the bottom of the page, as basic
footnotes, or at the end of your document, as endnotes.
In either case, as you add or delete footnotes, XyWrite
handles the numbering and placement of footnotes for
you.

CONTENTS This section begins with an overview and then describes

each command individually:

Page Section Com m and

4-42 Basic F ootnote Procedures

4-44 Creating a Basic Footnote
4-46 Creating Endnotes
4-47 Variations on a Footnote

Com m ands

Fo o t n o t
4-48 Footnote Command FN
4-50 Footnote Separator FS
4-51 Footnote Wrap Separator FW
4-53 Bottom Footnote BF
4-55 Dump Footnotes DF
4-56 No Footnotes NF
4-57 Set Footnote Number SF
4-61 Footnote Format FM

o
? o
o
%\ o
o
ol o
g| 2 F o o t n o t e s are u s e f u l o
gi for a d d i n g r e f e r e n c e s to o
o
o text. o
* o
o1 o
o| o
5| o

4-41
 A footn ote is text which appears at the bottom of a
page, referenced by num ber to a point above in the text.
You can create footnotes at any time — either at the
initial writing, or later when you return to edit the
document. There is no limit to the size of a footnote — it
can run more than a paragraph.
XyWrite keeps track of all footnotes, numbering them
automatically for you. When you print the document,
XyWrite puts each footnote at the bottom of its page.

Footnote Sets. XyWrite allows you to create up to three

sets of footnotes in one document. You can make
decisions about the style and format of each set
independently — you can even elect to print one set at
the bottom of the page and another set at the end of the
document.

Creating a Basic F ootnote is the first procedure

described. All that’s required for the simplest footnotes
are the two commands:

• FN - Footnote command
• FS - Footnote Separator

Creating E ndnotes is the second procedure described.

Endnotes are footnotes placed at the end of a chapter or
document. Once you write your footnotes, endnotes are
easy to produce, needing only two commands:

• NF - No Footnotes
• DF - Dump Footnotes

Variations o n a F ootnote describes other commands

you can use to modify the appearance of footnotes:

• FW - Footnote Wrap Separator

• SF - Set Footnote Number
• BF - Bottom Footnote
• FM - Footnote Format

4-42
[Ggifr tw IHHShé ïïîiiO liira OTiiœtfRira

D IS P L A Y O F « F S » Footnote Separator
FO O TNO TES « FW » Footnote W rap Separator
<< SF» Set Footnote Num ber
« B F » Bottom Footnote

A A A A
When you create foot­
notes, XyWrite handles
« FN This is a very long the n u m b e r i n g a u t o m a t ­
footnote— in fact, so long that it ically. You can freely
w raps to the next page, to add or delete footnotes
dem onstrate Footnote W rap ¿without t h i nking about
Separator.» “ h o w the

— ... iw«w~ :
*-■ ■ . - J-

P R IN T O U T O F

Fo o t n o t e s
FOOTNOTES
IS
When you create foot­
IS
notes, XyWrite handles
1°0
the numbering automat­ °
ically. You can freely I°o
add or delete footnotes
without thinking about
how they are numbered. II0oI
If you care to, you
can take charge of the
Footnote S eparator'
!§o
1O
2 This is a very long IS
Footnote ■
1|S
footnote — in fact, so
long that it wraps to the o
IS
7T

Footnote W rap Separator (cont'd)

next page, to demonstrate

Footnote Wrap Separator.
•t

- £ ------------------------------------- - f

4-43
 LG&>ncj;

ACTION Creating a Basic Footnote

This procedure requires only the two basic footnote
commands FN (Footnote) and FS (Footnote Separator).
To enter a footnote:

Creating the Footnote (FN).

1. Move the cursor to the point in the body of text you

want marked for a footnote (that is, where you want
the superscripted number).

2. Type: [F5]fn0
Result: The footnote window opens in the middle of
the screen. If you had used a footnote set number,
say FN2, other footnote commands ending in 2 (such
as FM2, FS2 and so forth) would control it.

3. Type the footnote text, for example:

This i s the footnote; it i s numbered
automatically. When this page is
printed, this footnote w il l automatically
be printed at the bottom of the page.
Be aware that you can use defined text or Save/Gets
to help you enter text.

4. Press: [F3] (to end the footnote)

Result: The footnote window closes. The footnote
number 1 appears at the cursor position. This
footnote number actually represents an embedded
command; you can return to edit this footnote text at
any time by switching to the Expanded Display with
ICtrilfF9l.

Creating the Footnote Format and Separator.

5. Move the cursor to anywhere ahead of the first

footnote (usually the top of your document), in
preparation for entering the footnote format.
6. Enter the format for your footnotes using the FM
(Footnote Format) command. While this step is not
always necessary, we strongly recommend using FM.
For example:
Type: [re]fm l m = 8 , r m = 6 5 0

7. Next enter the FS (Footnote Separator) command:

Type: [R ]fS 0
Result: This opens the Footnote Separator window.
Type in the footnote separator — the line which
separates the body text from the footnotes. For
example, w e’ll choose a series of underlines:
T y p e : ______________ @ 0
The second 0 inserts a blank line between the
Footnote Separator and the footnote.

8. Press: [F3]
Result: This closes the Footnote Separator window
and completes the procedure.

First Footnote Separator. To ensure a uniform

appearance, the separator associated with footnote set 1
(FS1) is always printed first at the bottom of any page that
contains footnotes. This is true even if there is no
footnote associated with set 1 on that page.

Editing Footnotes. There are two ways you can edit the
text in a footnote: (1) by switching to Expanded Display
with [M l® or (2) by switching to Edit Footnote. To use
Edit Footnote, place the cursor on the footnote number
and press [M lED• The footnote window opens up and
displays the stored text so you can make edits. Close the
footnote window by pressing [F3].

Previewing the Footnotes. As noted in the previous

procedure, the footnote text is visible only in Expanded
Display. However, you can view the footnotes on-screen,
positioned properly at the bottom of each page with
TYPES.
NOTE #4 Printing th e Footnotes. After following the procedure
"Creating a Basic Footnote," you can use TYPE to print
your document with footnotes. The footnotes will
automatically be printed just below the text on each page,
separated from the text by the footnote separator.

ACTION Creating Endnotes.

Endnotes are footnotes which are collected and printed
all together at the end of the document, rather than
sprinkled throughout the document. At the start of the
document you tell XyWrite to hold all footnotes (NF —
No Footnotes); at the end you tell XyWrite to print them
(DF — Dump Footnotes).

To enter endnotes, you first create footnotes throughout

the document exactly as in the procedure "Creating a
Basic Footnote." Then:

1. Move the cursor to the start of the document.

Type: [F5]nf 1 0 (1 is optional)

2. Move the cursor to the end of the document, where

you want to print all of the footnotes (in other words,
where you want to dump the footnotes).

Type: [£5]df1 0 (1 is optional)

Result: The NF1 command (No Footnotes) in Step 1

suppresses the printing of footnotes from that point
forward (up to DF1). However, the footnotes are still
accumulated internally by XyWrite. The DF1 command
dumps, or unloads, all of the footnotes at its location in
the text.

If you use more than one set of endnotes (FN1, FN2,

FN3), they’re all dumped at the DF (or DF1) location. If
you want them at separate locations, use NF1, DF1; NF2,
DF2; and NF3, DF3).

NOTE #5 Exact Location o f the Endnotes. The endnotes are not

necessarily inserted at the exact location of the DF
embedded triangle, but rather at the bottom of that page.
The endnotes are positioned higher or lower on the page,
according to the setting of BF (Bottom Footnote).
4-46
Using DF w ith Footnote Sets. FS1, FS2 and FS3 create
separators for their own sets of footnotes. Without the
set number, FS generally creates a separator only for the
initial set of footnotes (FS1).

An exception occurs when you use DF (Dump Footnotes)

to put all the footnotes in one place. Then the FS or FS1
command is used as the separator for all footnotes.

Printing O nly the Endnotes. If you want to print out

only the endnotes, use the previous procedure, placing
the DF command on its own page at the end of the
document. Then print from that page forward (for
example: TYPE ,12-). To view the endnotes, use Type-to-
Screen (TYPES ,12-). This would print all endnotes to the
screen rather than to the printer.

Variations on a Footnote.
Beyond the basic footnote are the following variations.
For more information, refer to the separate explanations
given later on each of these commands.

Selecting a Footnote Wrap Separator. You can specify

a different footnote separator to appear in footnotes that
continue to a second page. Refer to FW—Footnote Wrap
Separator.

Setting the Footnote Number. Set the footnote number

with SF — all subsequent footnotes renumber
automatically. Refer to SF—Set Footnote Number.

Positioning the Footnotes Up or Down. Set BF, the

Bottom Footnote setting, to 1 or 0. This affects the
placement of footnotes on a page. Refer to BF—Bottom
Footnote.

Setting the Format for Footnotes. Set margins, tabs,

line spacing and any other format settings with FM.
Refer to FM—Footnote Format.
 r a e r

■PfMI - , - f “Tir ‘T 4
w-JTT^ ^r^!r -•• 1
-~~l>;iy. i ,.
ORMAT BSIFNi Footnote —
35 s (optional) is the number of the footnote set (1, 2 or 3)
■n-L .,
FN1 is the same as FN gg
_JFN is an embedded command. .
' , .v ;

P urpo se The FN (Footnote) command allows you to enter

footnotes in text. You type in the text of the footnote as
part of the FN command, then end it by pressing

XyWrite lets you create as many as three independent

sets of footnotes in the same document. If you need just
a single set, use FN, which is the same as FN1. The other
sets are FN2 and FN3.

When you’re done entering the FN command, the

footnote text is not normally visible until you print the
document. At that time, XyWrite automatically inserts the
footnotes at the bottom of their respective pages.

You can view the text in a footnote in three ways: (1) In

Normal Display, when you move the cursor onto the
footnote number, you can view the first part of the
footnote on the Prompt Line. (2) At this point, if you
press |Ctri][£3], a screen will open to show you the text. (3)
You can also switch to Expanded Display to view the
text.

ACTION C reatin g a B asic F o o tn o te.

To enter a footnote, follow the procedure given a few
pages back, "Creating a Basic Footnote."

NOTE #1 Embedded Command. FN is automatically entered into

the text as FN1. Each FN command is embedded in text,
visible as a number in Normal Display. In Expanded
Display it is shown expanded — for example:
« FN1 "This is a footnote».

448
NOTE *1 Footnote Margins. To create footnote margins (or tabs
or line spacing) different from those used in the text, use
the FM (Footnote Format) command. FM1 (or FM) affects
all footnotes in its set uniformly, as do FM2 and FM3.

NOTE #3 Shortcut. If the footnote text is only one line in length,

you can type it all on the Command Line as follows:

Type: [Rjfn This i s a one-line fo o tn o te .0

4-49
 ® FSi Footnote Sepai

s (optional) is the number of the footnote

i r ., FS1 is the. same as ‘FS jg
* :FS is an embedded com m and
iiilfejisieaigSiS!^^

P urpo se The FS (Footnote Separator) command allows you to

specify lines which separate the footnotes from the body
text. The lines (which can contain text or can be blank)
are located immediately above the footnote. An example
of a Footnote Separator is illustrated at the start of the
Footnote section. Very often people choose the footnote
separator to be three lines:

• A blank line
• A row of hyphens, underlines or asterisks
• Another blank line

A Footnote Separator can be specified for each of three

independent sets of footnotes as: FS1, FS2 and FS3. FS1
is the same as FS alone (with no number).

ACTION Creating a Footnote Separator.

To create a Footnote Separator, follow the procedure
given a few pages back, "Creating a Basic Footnote." Be
aware of the following notes.

NOTE #1 Location o f FS. Any Footnote Separator commands you

use (FS1, FS2 and FS3) must be placed ahead of any
footnotes. It is a good practice to place the commands at
the top of the document, where they are easy to find.

NOTE #2 Embedded Command. FS is automatically entered into

the text as FS1 (not simply as FS). Each FS command
(FS1, FS2 and FS3) is embedded in text, visible as a
triangle in Normal Display. In Expanded Display it is
shown expanded, as: « FS2_________»

4-50
 I ï5 T u T ilu m V /? i|

WraP Separator

s (optional) is the footnote set number (1 to 3). ’

FW1 is the same as FW ¡ § f | - 1 | ä 1 - ^ - 1 -
FW is an embedded command.

P urpose XyWrite tries to put the entire footnote on the page it

belongs. If it won’t fit, the footnote will automatically
continue (wrap) on the next page. This next page is
where the Footnote Wrap Separator is used.

The FW (Footnote Wrap Separator) command is very

similar to the regular Footnote Separator command FS,
but with one difference: FW defines footnote separators
only for footnotes that wrap, or continue, from the
previous page. Very often people choose the Footnote
Wrap Separator to be four lines:

Fo o t n o t e s
• A blank line
• A row of hyphens, underlines or asterisks
• A line containing the text: (continued)
• Another blank line

The line (continued) refers to the fact that the footnote is

continued from the previous page.

A Footnote Wrap Separator can be specified for each of

three sets of footnote separators. The footnote wrap
separators correspond directly to the three commands FS1
(or FS), FS2 and FS3-

A ctio n C reatin g a F o o tn o te W rap S ep arator.

To create a footnote wrap separator:

1. Move the cursor to anywhere before the first footnote

in the set. (It’s a good practice to use the top line.)

4-51
2. Enter any FW command in addition to any FS
command.

Type: [F5)fw1 0 (the 1 is optional)

Result: The Footnote Wrap Separator window for

footnote set 1 opens on the screen.

3. Now type the lines you want to define as the wrap

separator. Important: Make th e Footnote Wrap
Separator th e sam e num ber o f lin es as the
Footnote Separator you are already using. For
example, let’s enter a row of underlines and the word
"continued" in parentheses:

Type: 0 0 ( c o n t in u e d ) 0

4. Press: F3

Result: This closes the Footnote Wrap Separator

window and completes the procedure.

Em bedded Com m ands. FW is inserted into the text as

FW1 (not simply as FW). Each FW command is visible as
a triangle in Normal Display. In Expanded Display it is
shown expanded — for example: <<FW3(continued)»

If FW is Left U nspecified. If you don’t specify a

Footnote Wrap Separator, XyWrite will use the regular
Footnote Separator for footnotes that continue to another
page.

What Causes a Footnote to Wrap. Two conditions

cause a footnote to wrap to the next page: (1) The
footnote reference in the body of text is located near the
end of the page, and (2) the footnote is lengthy.

Before causing a footnote to wrap, XyWrite will first

attempt to move the text containing the footnote (along
with the footnote itself) to the next page. However, it
will not allow the text and footnote to fall short of the
minimum page length (set by PLmin).
: a w I IfiïïQ T ilB S f iiillu n k '

p Ö B tö g S3 B F Bottom Footnote n
»II
n is“0 or 1 tS fe ' - "“iV'-irwi»»»?T" •*''
SF-7,7"
I» BF is an embedded command. 0 $ .7i_ '.-

P u r p o se The BF (Bottom Footnote) command allows you to

specify whether footnotes (and footnote separators) are
placed in either of the two positions shown in the
illustration below. BF actually makes a difference only
on pages which are not filled with text, such as the last
page of a chapter. (Otherwise, the two positions appear
exactly the same.)
• BF 0 means footnotes are pushed up against the last
line of text.
• BF 1 means footnotes are pushed dow n against the
last line of PL (which is PLmax).
One way to remember which is which is by remember­

Fo o t n o t e s
ing that BF 1 means that the Bottom Footnote is in
effect— the footnote is against the bottom.

U S IN G B F T O P O S IT IO N T H E F O O T N O T E S

BF=0 BF=1
0
0
O0 0
0
O
O
0 0 0
0 0 0 O
0 T h i s | s t h e body o f
O 0 T h i s i s t h e body o f O
0 text. The p o s i t i o n o f O 0 text. The p o s i t i o n o f O
g t h e f o o t n o t e on t h e page ? PL g t h e f o o t n o t e on t h e page O
g d ep e nd s on t h e v a l u e o f
BF.
g MAX
g d ep e nd s on t h e v a l u e o f §
0 0 0 BF, O
0 c 0 O
0 0 O
0
0
*
1 This i s the fo o tn o te .
§0 0
0
O
O
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 O
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 • O
0 0 0 O
0 0 0 O
0 0 0 O
0 0 O
0
0
0
0
§0 1 T h is is the f o o t n o t e .
O
£
0 0 0
0 0 0 . O
0
0 O
....................................................................

'::y iff»
Mlë! OJMsiir: 'ii.-ji-.fJm-1!:

4-53
I ¡ S T iB T n i C 5 i ! T f « a c

ACTION Positioning the Footnotes Up or Down.

To enter the BF command:

1. Move the cursor anywhere before the footnotes you

want to affect. (We recommend the top line of your
document.)

2. To set the BF command to 1:

Type: [F5]bf 1 ivl

Result: When you print the document, the footnotes will

be positioned according to BF 1, described earlier.

NOTE #1 Em bedded Comm and. BF is an embedded command

— it is embedded in text, visible as a triangle in Normal
Display. In Expanded Display it is shown expanded —
for example: «BF1»

NOTE #2 D efault. The default value of BF is 0.

NOTE #3 Footnote Form at. You can include the BF command in

the FM (Footnote Format) command.

4-54
 fl v :

"ORMAT . BSIDF5 Dump Footnotes

r5?,:|’u"^r*“
. ..
. •■
-.««
IW -;., ••-„ ------
=*
•
; ••

s (optional) is the footnote set number (1 to 3).

DF1 is the same as DF
DF is an embedded command. n,-!*T"
s,v-

P urpose The DF (Dump Footnotes) command is used with the NF

(No Footnotes) command to place all footnotes together
at the end of the document, as endnotes, rather than on
the pages to which they refer.
To dump means to output the footnotes as text to the
screen, file or printer. DF and NF are complementary
commands — DF instructs XyWrite to output the
footnotes, while NF instructs XyWrite to hold off
outputting them. To produce endnotes, you do the
following:
• NF Com m and. Place the NF command at the top of I
your document. NF suppresses the printing of
footnotes until a later DF command is encountered in !
the text.
• DF Comm and. Place the DF command at the end of j
your document. DF causes the printing of footnotes i
that have accumulated since the NF command. The
footnotes start printing at the bottom of the page
containing the DF embedded triangle.
You can have up to three independent sets of footnotes.
Whenever you use a DF command (DF1, DF2, or DF3),
you must use the corresponding NF command (NF1, NF2,
or NF3).
XyWrite tries to position all the footnotes on the page that
contains the DF embedded triangle. If they won’t all fit,
they continue onto the next page.

A ctio n Entering the DF Command.

To enter the DF command, follow the procedure given
earlier, "Creating Endnotes."
NOTE Em bedded Comm and. DF is automatically entered into
the text as DF1 (not simply as DF). Each DF command is
embedded in text, visible as a triangle in Normal Display.
In Expanded Display it is shown expanded as «DF1».
A lso See Related Comm and. Also see NF (No Footnotes).
 ICI *

g*?*’..'-~ •'r •■«■«swgw M ç rr^r.. .v.rr- • ..r-.- ' * —-r

-. i
ËflNFi
R r h
-- ö
_ s®f No Footnotes
■: . - ......... M
h7?5
•j£
U f«v< : ' “ «•‘•sir :
‘■ ü -y^W «•*• •— a*-.;* ;,4***w“

:;:'-s (optional) is the number of the footnote set (1, 2 or |) .

- NF1 is the same as NF :
NF is an embedded command

P urpose The N F (No Footnotes) command turns off the printing of

footnotes. (The footnote numbers still appear in the text,
though.)

Using NF in conjunction with the DF (Dump Footnote)

command, you can place all the footnotes at the end of a
chapter or document.

NF and DF are complementary commands. NF turns off

the printing of footnotes, while DF turns on the printing
of footnotes.

You can have up to three independent sets of footnotes.

Whenever you use an NF command (NF1, NF2, or NF3)
you must use the corresponding DF command (DF1, DF2,
or DF3).

Like all embedded commands, NF takes effect at the

point it is placed in the document, and affects the
remainder of the document — that is, until a DF
command is encountered. Thus, you would place NF at
the top of a document in order to inhibit the printing of
all footnotes.

A ctio n Entering the NF Command.

To enter the NF command, follow the procedure given
earlier, "Creating Endnotes."

Note Em bedded Com m and. NF is automatically entered into

the text as NF1 (not simply as NF). Each NF command is
embedded in text, visible as a triangle in Normal Display.
In Expanded Display it is shown expanded as «NF1».

A lso See Related Comm and. See the DF (Dump Footnotes)

command.

4-56
S3BF .SSldOfiTtiaCOTnlS«

.¡AJfeJSp
B3SF.S n 1
7ormat ’ Set Footnote N um ber
V " " /, / . . ..i, ■' ;;;
is'- r
i (optional) is the number of the footnote set (1, 2 or 3).
n (optional) is the footnote style and starting value.
SF1 is the same as SF. i 'V”‘*‘jr ! pm-r
y .'.rviJTs.-L.
SF is an embedded
iv-:• . » ' :: . -ji* l i ■; :•—
command. r~ r rrpa^lZit^:'

PURPOSE The S F (Set Footnote Number) command sets the style

(that is, numbers, letters, symbols) and the starting value
of footnotes. You place the SF command ahead of the
First embedded footnote command (FN) that you want to
affect.

Since XyWrite supports up to three separate sets of

footnotes, you can designate a footnote style and starting
value independently for each set with SF1, SF2 and SF3.
(SF is the same as SF1.)

SIIO N IO O j!
There are six different styles from which you can choose:

Decimal numbers (SF 1)

Uppercase roman numerals (SF I)
Lowercase roman numerals (SF i )
Uppercase letters (SF A)
Lowercase letters (SF a)
Defined string (SF *n)

If you want to start the sequence with a different value,

use that value in the command. For example, the
command SF iii tells XyWrite to number the footnotes in
lowercase roman numerals and to start the sequence at
iii. If you do not specify an SF command, XyWrite uses
decimal numbers starting at 1.

This section includes the following procedures:

• Selecting the Style and Starting Value.
• Restarting the Sequence.
• Setting Unnumbered Footnotes
• Defining Footnote Symbols

4-57
fS lïü !jD T i:î3 C n T n l!!5 jc riTOiflnt

A ction S electin g th e Style and Starting V alue.

To define the style and starting value for footnotes:

1. Move the cursor to anywhere ahead of the footnotes

you want to affect.

2. Decide what style and what starting point you want to

use. For illustration purposes, let’s use lowercase
letters starting with "e" for footnote set 2:
Type: [F5]sf2 6 0
Result: Footnote set 2 is assigned lowercase letters e, f, g,
and so on.

A ction R estarting th e Sequence.

To restart the selected sequence at the beginning of each
page:
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.
2. Select the footnote set number, style and starting
value. Insert a hyphen (-) before the starting value to
make the sequence restart at each new page:

Type: [f|]sf2 -1 [0]

Result: Footnote set 2 is assigned decimal numbers
starting at number 1 on each page. When you choose
this option, the on-screen representation of each footnote
is a superscript 2. The correct symbols are inserted when
the document is printed. (See Note #3.)

A ction S ettin g U nnum bered F ootn otes.

To print a footnote that is unnumbered (has no
identification symbol):

1. Move the cursor to the top of the page you want to

affect.
2. Select the footnote set that you want to be
unnumbered (for example, set 3). Enter the SF
command without a style:
Type: [F 5 lsf3 [0 1
 K H I K S f iT .iæ if ïïiJ Ï iS « -

Result: Footnotes in set 3 are printed without numbers or

symbols of any kind. The footnote numbers are
represented on-screen by a superscript n which does not
print.
Unnumbered footnotes are useful in several places. For
example, for an author’s credit on the front page of an
article, when you have only one footnote per page or
when you are making reference to a registered trademark.

A ctio n D e fin in g F o o tn o te S y m b o ls.

You can create your own sequence of footnote symbols.
You do this by entering into your Printer File a Counter
String table (CS:) that lists strings in sequence. (See Note
#1.) To use these strings:
1. Move the cursor to the top of the page you want to
affect.
2. Select the footnote set that you want to use, and select
which string from the Counter String table you want to

Fo o t n o t e s
start with. For example:
Type: [F5]sf3 * 2 0
Result: For footnote set 3, use the characters that are
defined in the Counter String table of the Printer File,
starting with the second string in that list, and proceeding
to the third, fourth, and so on. If there is no Counter
String table defined, XyWrite uses: *, *\ ***, etc.

N o te #1 Entering the Counter String Table. The Counter String

table in the Printer File defines the strings that can be
used as footnote symbols. The format of the Counter
String table is:
cs:#
string 1
string2

/O
string#
where # is the number of strings. This table can also be
used for page numbers and counters.

4-59
iifS M jR T iirrttin S C O T iiliS iB "

NOTE #2 R ecycling Sym bols. If you choose a footnote style with

a limited number of symbols (e.g., lowercase letters or
the Counter String table), you may run out of symbols
before you run out of footnotes. When that happens,
XyWrite returns to the beginning of the list of possible
symbols and inserts the first one twice, then the second
one twice, etc. The list is repeated as many times as
necessary.

NOTE #3 U n e Breaks W hen R estarting th e Sequence. If y o u

are restarting the sequence of footnote symbols on each
page, your on-screen line breaks may not match the
printed line breaks exactly. This is because the width of
the symbol (represented on-screen by a superscript 2) is
calculated as three times the width of the character 0
(zero). If the width of a footnote symbol is wider than
that, change the FU setting in the Printer File. This
setting is FU=n where n is the number of 0’s to count
when calculating the width of the footnote symbol. (A
second value in the FU setting affects Counters and
References.)

For example, suppose you are using asterisks as footnote

symbols. You might have four footnotes on one page
and therefore four asterisks as a footnote symbol. Unless
you change the FU setting, the lines containing four
asterisks may extend beyond the right margin.

NOTE #4 Footnote Num bers in C hained F iles. You can have the
Set Footnote Number command affect only the screen
display of a document and not the printed output. To do
this, insert a question mark (?) in the command,
immediately before the footnote style. For example;
Type; [F5]sf1 ? a 0
This command will display footnote symbols starting at
"a" for footnote set 1. However, it will have no effect on
printed output. That is, when printed, the footnotes will
be numbered according to the sequence defined in
another file. This command is useful if you are chaining
files to the printer (with TYPE @) and want the footnote
numbering to proceed sequentially from one file to the
next.

4-60
IW E : A R U iM OCTViiRli

1-'---^ S*-?.;: - jgag-•»<—•r.- ^ ~' 1 , 1 •"- * —-~.•: • ■■—^]<mVK

FORMAT 0 f $ U 0 i * n inm=n)M - n >. . . Footnote Format

ÜiM«
ijo p tio n al) is the number of the footnote set (1, 2 or 3)
nm is a format command (LM, RM, TS, IP, LS, OF, FL, FC,
FR, JU, NJ, BF, FT, or SC).. -
* (equals sign) separates the name from the value.
n is the value of the format command.
" , (comma) separates the commands. «...

: FM is an embedded command
1 . ~ . , --4 H W illi I
P urpose The FM command defines the format for footnotes — that
is, the margins, tabs, indent paragraph, line spacing and
offset. You use FM when you want the footnote format
to be different from the format of the text. If you don’t
use the FM command, all footnotes use the default format
for text.

XyWrite supports up to 3 independent footnote sets. You

Fo o t n o t e s
can create a separate format for each set by putting the
set number into the FM command — i.e., FM1, FM2 or
FM3- Any set of footnotes that does not have an FM
command takes the default text format.

ACTION S ettin g th e F orm at fo r F o o tn o te s.

To set up the format for footnotes in a document:

1. Place the cursor before the first footnote you want to

affect. Typically, you would move to the top of the
file:

Press: [Çtrj] [Home]

2. Decide which footnote set you want to use. Let’s use

set 3:

Type: [?5]fm3 lm =8,rm =650

Result: Footnotes in set 3 have a left margin of 8 and a

right margin of 65.

4-61
IË ü t l i i t t i T S S f l % u R i K 3Œ Jrtïî|

NOTE #1 Footnote T ransition. The FT (Footnote Transition)

command defines the amount of extra space between
footnotes. As with all vertical spacing commands, the
amount of space is expressed in number of lines (1/6
inch) and can be a whole number or a fraction as small
as hundredths (.01). The FT command must be issued as
part of the FM command. For example:

[F5]fm3 ft = .5 0

inserts 1/2 line of extra space between footnotes.

NOTE #2 Superscript Footnote Num bers. The SC (Superscript)

command allows you to change the mode for printing
footnote numbers from footnote mode to superscript
mode. This command has two forms:

• SC=1 Prints footnote numbers in superscript

mode
• sc=0 Prints footnote numbers in footnote mode

The SC command must be issued as part of the FM

command. For example:

[F5]fm3 s c = 1 0

If you omit the SC command, footnote numbers print in

footnote mode.

NOTE #3 Bottom Footnote. You can include the BF (Bottom

Footnote) command as part of the FM command. See
"Bottom Footnote" earlier for more information.

N o t e #4 Effect o f FM on Footnote Separators. The FM

command sets the format for the footnote (FN) text only
without affecting the format of the footnote separators
(FS).

4-62
 1* J fC ÎH S * *

INTRO The term running header refers to text that appears at the
top of a page and repeats on successive pages. Similarly,
running footer refers to text that repeats at the bottom of
pages. You can create headers and footers that:

• Number your pages for you

• Title your pages repeatedly on each page

CONTENTS Page Section Command

4-64 R unning H eader & Footer

Running Header, All Pages RH
Running Header, Even Pages RHE
Running Header, Odd Pages RHO
Running Footer, All Pages RF
Running Footer, Even Pages RFE
Running Footer, Odd Pages RFO

4-67 Page Num bering

Page Number PN
Final Page FP
Set Page Number SP

Headers & Footers

—

4-63
 Format p&Éj Running H eader, All Rages
çjgîiiïl

Running Header, Even Pages

B rho î=ti; ' Running Header, Odd Pages
f i Running Footer, All Pages
B3r f e Running Footer, Even Pages
EUrfo hiw
Æ7-. Running Footer, Odd Pages
These are embedded commands.
SÜM
iiBs!

P urpose The R H (Running Header) command inserts at the top of

every page a block of text that you specify. Similarly, the
R F (Running Footer) command inserts text at the bottom
of every page. As text you can include chapter title, page
number, date, and even the time. (XyWrite automatically
updates the date and time.)
You specify the running text once and it automatically
repeats page after page. You can start the text on any
page and change or remove it on any successive page.
To have the same text on every page you would use the
commands RH or RF. In order to alternate text on odd
and even pages, you use pairs of commands: both RHE
and RHO or RFE and RFO.

ACTION In sertin g a R unning H eader o r F ooter.

Running Headers and Running Footers are both inserted
the same way. As an example, we will enter the same
Running Header for all pages — the text includes a
chapter title and page number:
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the page where
you want the Running Header to start, ahead of all
text and spaces. (See Note #3.)
2. Type: [F5]rh0 (to open a window)
3. Enter any formatting commands that you want for the
Running Header. These formatting commands will
not affect the body of the document. For example, to
center the running header on every page:
Type: [FSlfcCT
4. Now enter the Running Header text — for example,
the chapter title and page number:
Type: Chapter 1 without pressing 0
4-64
 x s s .i Y i j » l t f n ’i w n i ' 4 i R 5 i

r —-N Tab or space over to near the right margin and then
type in the page number command (PN):

Type: fF5lpn[^1
5. Enter a carriage return for each blank line you want
between the text of the Running Header and the text
of the document. Let’s say you want two blank lines:
Type: 0 0
6. Close the screen:
Press: fF3l
Result: "Chapter 1" and the page number are centered on
the same line, followed by two blank lines, at the top of
this page and all succeeding pages.

NOTE #1 O ther Page Num ber Form ats. The PN command alone
puts in normal page numbers, starting at 1, 2, etc. But
f —\ XyWrite can start at any number and create many formats.
See "Page Numbering" and "Numbering" sections later.

NOTE #2 Em bedded Com m ands. The RH and RF commands are

embedded commands — they are embedded in text,

H
eaders
visible only as triangles in Normal Display. In Expanded
Display they are shown expanded — for example:
« RHAThis is a running h e a d e r» .
& Fo o t e r s
If you are using the RH (or RF) command to specify the
same running text on all pages, the expanded display
appears as RHA (or RFA). If you edit while in the
Expanded Display, never omit the third letter of the
command — XyWrite understands « RHA» and « R F A » ,
but not « R H » and «RF».

NOTE #3 W here R unning Text Takes Effect. The Running

Footer (RF) command takes effect at the bottom of the
page on which it is entered. The Running Header (RH)
' 7^ command takes effect on the current page only if it is on
the first line of that page, ahead of any text or spaces. (It
can be preceded by other embedded commands.)
Anywhere else on the page will cause it to take effect at
the top of the next page.

4-65
NOTE #4 Preventing an Extra Blank Page W ith a Running
H eader From Being Printed. Symptom-. At the end of
your document your printer prints an extra page with '
only a running header or footer (and no other text) on it.
Cause: You are probably ending your document with
extra carriage returns which are forcing a new page, or
with a PG (Page Break) command followed by more than
one carriage return. Remedy: Remove the last PG
command and any unnecessary carriage returns from the
end of the file. You can also turn on the P-L indicator
(with IShift I[F9l) to preview the page numbers.

NOTE #5 V iew ing th e Running H eader and R unning Footer.

In order to preview the running header and footer on­
screen as they will be printed, you can use TYPES (Type
to Screen).

NOTE #6 Counters in the H eader or Footer. XyWrite has an

automatic numbering capability (called a counter), which
is described later in this chapter. You can insert the
number currently stored in a counter into the text of a
Running Header or Footer without increasing the value of
the counter. See "Counter Command."

NOTE #7 Entering a One-Line H eader or Footer. You can type

in a one-line header by typing the text on the Command
Line after the command. This is a shortcut for the
method shown under Action. For example:
Type: [re]rh T h is i s a ru n n in g header[F9]

NOTE #8 Editing H eaders and Footers. You can edit the text of
headers and footers by switching to Expanded Mode
( ICtri1|F9|) or by moving the cursor to the embedded
command triangle and pressing [Ctri] [F3].

ALSO See Page Form at. To s e e how the Running Header and
Footer interact with other page format commands such as
PL (Page Length) and FN (Footnotes), refer to the section
"Page Length Procedures." >

4-66
 s E g ^ n rn ti& i

r-- ■ ,

: Format E3pn Page N um ber^

g . . - Q 3fp . , Final Page > 1 ^ i..v,::r7r~-T •••? • 7W7..-|

1L 7- - — „
ggajg i ii 1, j-p-j .! ~_
p n ancj fp are e
_~JL I j t a lly » X ■§._ lllty v V lU V M V, v i 1 JJ 1 l e t * 1 U O .

PURPOSE The PN (Page Number) command inserts the page

number in the text. The page number starts at 1 with the
first page of a document and automatically increments for
successive pages. You can use SP (Set Page Number) to
change the starting page number and the numbering style
(i.e., i, ii, iii... or a, b, c...).

FP (Final Page) inserts the number of the last page —

useful for a "Page 5 of 7" format.

To automatically number the pages, insert the PN

command in a running header or footer. The procedure
"Inserting a Running Header or Footer" earlier in this
section shows how. When you place PN (or FP) directly
in the text (rather than in a running header or footer), it
displays the current (or final) page number just once, at
that point.

ACTION N u m b erin g th e P ages.

The procedure to insert page numbering in a document is
given in "Inserting a Running Header or Footer."
smiooj *
ACTION N u m b erin g P ages in th e "Page ... o f ..." F orm at.
To insert "Page ... of ..." style in a header, you must insert
a Running Header (RH) command:

Move the cursor to the top of the page where you

want the Running Header to start.
2. Type: HHrhSd]
3. Type: Page [H ]p n [v ]
Type: of (include a space after "of')
Type: [D tp 0
4. Type: (to close the header)
Result: Printed page numbers look like "Page 1 of 8,"
"Page 2 of 8" and so on.

4-67
I£ 5 i ^ f l 7 i ï ) ü 3 « - rggîTniPi1

NOTE #1 Changing th e Starting Num ber. If you want pages in

your document to start at a number other than 1, use the
SP command described next.

N o te #2 D eterm ining th e Page Num ber. To tell what the

current page number is:
Press: [Shift] [r ]
Result: The current Page-Line numbers show at the top
of the screen. This number adjusts for any change of
page numbers due to an SP command in the text.

NOTE #3 Em bedded Comm and. PN and FP are embedded

commands — they are embedded in text, visible as
triangles in Normal Display. In Expanded Display they
are shown expanded as «PN» and «FP».

4-68
 K H I ÎJS d C O T t i H H « -

BQSP n _ Set Page Number

« is the starting page number

SP is an embedded command.

P urpose The S P (Set Page Number) command sets the starting

page number and defines the series as numerals, letters
or symbols. You place the SP command on the first line
of the page you want to affect, ahead of the embedded
Page Number command (PN).
There are six different styles from which you can choose:
Decimal numbers SP1
Uppercase roman numerals SPI
Lowercase roman numerals SPi
Uppercase letters SPA
Lowercase letters SPa
Defined string SP *«
If you do not specify an SP command, XyWrite uses
decimal numbers starting at 1. If you want to start the
sequence with another number, or in another of the
styles shown above, use that value in the command. For

H eaders
example, the command "SP iii" tells XyWrite to number
the pages in lowercase roman numerals and to start the
sequence at "iii."
& Fo o ters

A ction S ettin g th e S tartin g P age N u m ber.

To define the kind of page number and/or the starting
page number:
1. Move the cursor to the first line of the page you want
to affect, ahead of any text or spaces. (SP is ignored if
not on the first line.) Be sure the cursor is before the
PN command.
2. Decide what style and what starting point you want to
use. Let’s use decimal numbers starting with number
5:
3. Type: [F5]sp 5 0
Result: When printed, this page will be numbered page
5, the next page will be page 6, and so on. The PN
command reflects this change of page numbering.

4-69
: î f ? l W ïï^ iin T iil ie jih p j;

A ctio n U sin g Y ou r O w n N u m b erin g S trin g s.

You can enter a table in the Printer File that lists strings
you want to use as page numbers. (See Note # \ to enter
a string into the Printer File.) To use these strings in your
document:
1. Move the cursor to the top of the page you want to
affect.
2. Enter the SP command with an asterisk:
Type: [fUsp * 0
Result: Page numbers will be printed out as the strings
defined in the Printer File, starting with the first string on
the first page, the second string on the second page, and
so on. If there is no Counter String Table, XyWrite uses
an asterisk, and repeats it as many times as necessary:
* ** «**
y y ••• •

n o te #1 Entering th e Counter String Table. The Counter String

Table you put in the Printer File defines the strings that
can be used as page numbers. (You can have only one
Counter String Table.) A string can be a single character
or many. The format of the Counter String Table is:

cs:#
string 1
string 2

string #

where # is the number of strings in the table. This table

can also be used for footnote numbers and counters. For
example:

cs:4 (4 lines of strings)

!
@
#%
$
Counter Strings are discussed further in "Define Counter,"
Note #3, later in this chapter.

4-70
R ecycling Num ber Strings. If you choose uppercase or
lowercase letters (or the Counter String Table) as a
numbering style, you could have fewer characters (or
strings) available than pages in your document. Once
XyWrite has gone through all the characters, it returns to
the first character and inserts it twice, then the second
one twice, and so on (aa, bb, cc...). The list is repeated as
many times as necessary.

By putting just one character in the Counter String table

(for example, +), you can get pages numbered with
multiples of that character (such as +, ++, +++, ...).

Page Num bers in C hained F iles. You can have the Set
Page Number command affect only the screen display of
a document (that is, the P-L field of the header) and not
the printed output. This is very useful if you are using
chain printing — that is, if you are using TYPE @ to
continue a sequence of page numbers across more than
one file.

You would use this feature in all the files after the first.
Then, if you added or subtracted pages from the first file,
the page numbers in the subsequent files would still print
out correctly.

To do this, insert a question mark (?) immediately before

the page number style in all files following the first in a
set to be chain printed. For example:
Type: [F5]sp ? 1 0
This command will display numerical page numbers,
starting at 1, in the P-L field. However, it will have no
effect on printed output, which will number continuously
from the first file through the last — in the style set by
the first file’s SP command.
NOTES

4-72
 J C O b ilj& ifrig g .

I ntro XyWrite’s automatic numbering system, described in this

section, lets you number your document in virtually any
format found in print.

You can number chapters, paragraphs, sections, lists and

outlines — all at the same time, if need be. All numbers
stay in order, even when material is added, deleted or
switched around.

Automatic numbering can use numbers (1, 2, 3), upper-

or lowercase roman numerals (I, II, III, i, ii, iii) or letters
(A, B, C, a, b, c), or even special numbering sequences
that you create in advance.

You also can create references within your text, such as

"Refer to Graph 6, Chapter 3, p. 112". While not precisely
numbering, this function is intimately involved with
automatic numbering; that is, you can link it to a counter
or footnote. And it works the same way — as you move
the referenced passage around during editing, XyWrite
always keeps the reference accurate regarding counter or
footnote number, page and chapter.

Even if you do only one kind of numbering, you might

read this section just to discover how powerful the system
is.

Like other sections, this one takes you through

procedures in the first part, and then covers commands
individually.
N umbering

CONTENTS Page Section Command

4-74 Automatic Numbering Procedures

4-83 Define Counter DC
4-85 Counter Command C
4-87 Reference Commands REF, REP, REC, LB

4-73
PURPOSE DC (Define Counter) and C (Counter) allow you to
automatically number blocks of text — outlines, lists, ^
chapters, sections, and paragraphs.

Numbering is a two-step process. First you use the DC

command at the start of your document to establish the
style of the numbers that you want to use. Then you use
the C counter where you want to place the automatic
numbers. Several examples of how you use these
commands are shown in this section.

A special C counter, CO (C-zero), is designated for

numbering chapters, and two commands — SR CH (Set
Record Chapter) and REC (Reference Chapter) — give
the chapter numbers of text marked with CO counters.
Two other commands, REF (Reference) and REP
(Reference Page), also track the location of reference
("Refer to...") text, which you mark within a C counter or
with LB (Label).

ACTION M aking a S im p le N u m b ered L ist.

Let’s start with the assumption that you have typed out a
list and are ready to number it. To number the items
shown in Example #2:

1. Move the cursor ahead of the list.

2. Type: [Rfldc 1 -(A )0

Result: This embeds a format triangle in the
document and defines counter 1 to start with the value
A enclosed in parentheses.

3. Now insert the Cl counter in the text at each place

you want the automatic numbers to occur.

Type: [R]c10
Result: Cl takes (A) as its first value and increments with
each use, as shown in Example #2. Each of the letters A
through F is generated automatically by XyWrite.

4-74
A ctio n Automatic Numbering o f Paragraphs.
As an example, we will choose a style found in many
legal and government reports — numbers separated by
periods. We’ll use Example #4 which follows to illustrate
the point.

1. Move the cursor ahead of the list.

2. Define the numbering scheme that you want to use:

Type: [F5]dC 1 = 1 .1 .1 0

Result: This defines three-level numbering; each level

starts at 1. The 1 on the left side of the equal sign
means you begin with Cl.

A ctio n Making an Outline.

By giving a DC (Define Counter) command for each
counter, you can create an automatically numbered
outline with many levels (I, A, 1, a, . . . ). For example,
to create a three-level outline:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the document.

2. Type: [F5]dc 1=1 A 1 0

Result: This defines the top level.

3. Now enter each of these DC commands to ensure that

each level of the outline resets all lower levels.
N umbering

Type: [F5]dc 2=A 1(5]

Type: [F5]dc 3=1 0

4. Now enter the Cl, C2 and C3 counters in the list,

indented as shown in Example #5.

4-75
 HS&nlGfli

ACTION A u tom atic N u m b erin g o f C h ap ters.

Only one C counter, CO, is used for automatic numbering
of chapters, although it also can be used for other
numbering. Commands to display the current chapter
number look specifically for CO. To initiate automatic
roman numeral chapter numbers, for example:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the document.

2. Type: [fgdc 0=1 CT

3. Move the cursor to start of the chapter title.

Type: [FSlcOCT

4. Repeat Step 3 for each chapter title.

Result: The first chapter will be numbered I, the second

II, and so on.

Note #1 Page Num bering in Chapter-Page Form at. The CO

counter enables you to do automatic page numbering in
the popular chapter-page format, as is done in this
manual. If you wanted to combine roman numeral
chapter numbers (shown above) with page numbers, you
would create a running header or footer (see "Inserting a
Running Header or Footer" earlier in this chapter). In
place of the PN (Page Number) command in a header or
footer, do the following:

1. Type: H5]CO0

2. Type: Alt Ctrjj45 (hard hyphen)

3- Type: [£5]pn®

Result: Your finished document will contain page

numbers that look something like this: 11-43 (A counter
in a header or footer will not throw off the count. It
merely reads the current value of the counter in text.)
K « n riTn ttTumttSCOTii IB S # If l5 * l

NOTE #2 Chapter Num bering in More than One File. Chapter

numbering works even if your chapters are in several
files. When you link files for chain printing with TYPE @
(or for display with TYPES @), chapters are numbered
consecutively — as if they all were in one file. (See
Chapter 2 for more on TYPE @ and TYPES @.)
Using the example from Note #1, to number chapters
consecutively in a set of files:
1. Put DC 0-1 only in the first chapter file displayed or
chain printed.
2. When you create the parent file containing filenames
to be displayed or printed, be sure to list them as a
set; that is, without a 0 between the filenames. In
this form, they are treated as one document.

NOTE #3 Counter Form at for Chain F iles. All counters continue

through a chained set of files, unless they are reset with a
DC command in one of the files. But if you work with an
individual file without DC commands in it, all its counters
take on the 1, 2, 3 format.
To solve this, you can put a modified DC command in
each file for each counter — one that will show the
desired format, yet increment properly in a chain file.
Simply place a question mark (?) before the DC format in
all but the first file. (The "?" means the final value is
currently unknown.)
For example, w e’ve already put the DC 0=1 in the first of
N u m b e r in g

our chain files to count chapters in roman numerals (see

Note #1). Now, at subsequent chapter titles,
Type: [F5]dc O = ? I 0

Result: Subsequent files, displayed separately, will

increment starting at roman numeral one (I); when chain
printed or displayed, they will be consecutively
numbered: I, II, III, IV, and so on.

NOTE #4 Chapter-Page Num bering in the Index. XyWrite

provides a command, SR CH, that captures in your index
the chapter-page number format of your document. It is
covered in "Table of Contents & Index," Chapter 5.

4-77
 N U M B E R IN G

PRINTOUT EXPANDED DISPLAY

EXAMPLE #1 (No DC statement)

1 Illinois <CC1> Illinois

2 Massachusetts <C1> Massachusetts
3 Washington <C1> Washington
4 California <C1> California
5 Michigan <C1> Michigan
6 Florida <C1> Florida

EXAMPLE #2 <DC1=(A)>

(A) Illinois <C1> Illinois

(B) Massachusetts <C1> Massachusetts
(C) Washington <C1> Washington
(D) California <C1> California
(E) Michigan <C1> Michigan
(F) Florida <C1> Florida

EXAMPLE #3 <DC1-A-1>

A Illinois < C 1 > Illinois

A-l Chicago < C 2 > Chicago
A-2 Springfield < C 2 > Springfield
B Massachusetts < C 1 > Massachusetts
B-l Boston < C 2 > Boston
B-2 Cambridge < C 2 > Cambridge

EXAMPLE #4 <DCl=l.l.t>

Animals <C1> Animals

1.1 Birds < C 2 > Birds
1.1.1 Albatross < C 3 > Albatross
1.1.2 Penguin < C 3 > Penguin
1.2 Mammals < C 2 > Mammals
TWHPTUT-.—T77T-

1.2.1 Monkey < C 3 > Monkey

1.2.2 Lion < C 3 > Lion
Plants <C1> Plants
2.1 Trees < C 2 > Trees
2.1.1 Oak < C 3 > Oak
2.1.2 Magnolia < C 3 > Magnolia
2.2 Flowers < C 2 > Flowers
2.2.1 Daisy < C 3 > Daisy
2.2.2 Rose < C 3 > Rose

r:.:
u
4-78
NUMBERING

P R IN T O U T E X P A N D E D D IS P L A Y

E X A M P LE #1 (No DC statement)
1 Illinois CCI» Illinois
2 Massachusetts CCI» Massachusetts
3 Washington «Cl» Washington
A California «Cl» California
3 Michigan «Cl» Michigan
6 Florida «Cl» Florida

EXAM PLE # 2 <DC1=(A)>

(A) Illinois <C1> Illinois

(B) Massachusetts <C1> Massachusetts
(C) Washington <C1> Washington
(D) California <C1> California
(E) Michigan CCI» Michigan
(F) Florida <C1> Florida

EXAM PLE # 3 «DC1-A-1»

A Illinois < C 1 > Illinois

A-l Chicago < C 2 > Chicago
A-2 Springfield < C 2 > Springfield
B Massachusetts < C 1 > Massachusetts
B-l Boston < C 2 > Boston
B-2 Cambridge < C 2 > Cambridge

EXAM PLE # 4 «D C l=l.l.l»

1 Animals <C1> Animals

1.1 Birds < C 2 > Birds
1.1.1 Albatross < C 3 > Albatross
1.1.2 Penguin < C 3 > Penguin
1.2 Mammals < C 2 > Mammals
1.2.1 Monkey < C 3 > Monkey
1.2.2 Lion < C 3 > Lion
2 Plants <C1> Plants
2.1 Trees < C 2 > Trees
2.1.1 Oak < C 3 > Oak
2.1.2 Magnolia < C 3 > Magnolia
2.2 Flowers < C 2 > Flowers
2.2.1 Daisy < C 3 > Daisy
2.2.2 Rose < C 3 > Rose
-c s M in « A in u t 11K t t t ü c n r i T iü 5 • rn i w m

N U M B E R IN G

PRINTOUT EXPANDED DISPLAY

EXAMPLE #5 < DC 1-1 A 1>

(Properly < D C 2 = A 1>
co n s tru c te d <DC3=1>
DC com m an d )
I Animals <C1> Animals
A Birds < C 2 > Birds
1 Albatross < C 3 > Albatross
2 Penguin < C 3 > Penguin
B Mammals < C 2 > Mammals
1 Monkey < C 3 > Monkey
2 Lion < C 3 > Lion
II Plants <C1> Plants
A Trees < C 2 > Trees
1 Oak < C 3 > Oak
2 Magnolia < C 3 > Magnolia
B Flowers < C 2 > Flowers
1 Daisy < C 3 > Daisy
2 Rose < C 3 > Rose

EXAMPLE # 6 <DC1-I>
(Im properly <DC2=A>
c o n s tru c te d <DC3=1>
DC com m an d )
I Animals <C1> Animals
A Birds < C 2 > Birds
1 Albatross < C 3 > Albatross
2 Penguin < C 3 > Penguin
B Mammals < C 2 > Mammals
3 Monkey < C 3 > Monkey
A Lion < C 3 > Lion
II Plants <Cl> Plants
C Trees < C 2 > Trees
5 O ak < C 3 > Oak
6 Magnolia < C 3 > Magnolia
D Flowers < C 2 > Flowers
7 Daisy < C 3 > Daisy
8 Rose <C3> Rose

EXAMPLE #7 «DC0=I»
(Chapter-Page No.)
1 1 -1 3 «RFA«C0»-«PN»»

“ ;;¡«sE

4-79
NUMBERING

P R IN T O U T E X P A N D E D D IS P L A Y

EXAM PLE # 5 < DC 1=1 A 1»

(Properly <DC2=A 1>
constructed «DC 3 - 1 »
D C com m and)
I Animals <C1> Animals
A Birds < C 2 > Birds
1 Albatross < C 3 > Albatross
2 Penguin < C 3 > Penguin
B Mammals < C 2 > Mammals
1 Monkey < C 3 > Monkey
2 Lion < C 3 > Lion
II Plants «Cl» Plants
A Trees « C 2 » Trees
1 Oak « 0 3 » Oak
2 Magnolia < C 3 » Magnolia
B Flowers « 0 2 » Flowers
1 Daisy « C 3 > Daisy
2 Rose < C 3 » Rose

EXAM PLE # 6 «DC 1 = I »

(Im properly «DC 2 = A »
constructed «DC 3 = 1 »
D C com m and)
I Animals <C1» Animals
A Birds < C 2 » Birds
1 Albatross « C 3 » Albatross
2 Penguin < C 3 » Penguin
B Mammals « C 2 » Mammals
3 Monkey « 0 3 » Monkey
A Lion < C 3 » Lion
IX P l a n t s <C1» Plants
C Trees « C 2 > Trees
5 Oak « C 3 » Oak
6 Magnolia < C 3 > Magnolia
D Flowers « 0 2 » Flowers
7 Daisy « 0 3 » Daisy
8 Rose < C 3 > Rose

EXAM PLE #7 «DC0=I»

(Chapter-Page No.)
11-13 «RFA«C0 »-«PN»»
r;TH im i i f 8 COTit 1i ! t n fiTi

Refer to the previous two pages of examples. These

should give you a good idea of how to use the DC
commands and C counters.

Exam ple #1. This is the simplest numbering scheme. If

you give no DC command, all counters assume the
simple numbers 1, 2, 3, . . .

Exam ple #2. With DC 1=A, the Cl counter numbers the

items alphabetically.

Exam ple #3. With DC 1-A-l, the Cl counters increment

with A, B, C, and the C2 (second-level counters) take on
two-part numbers (such as A-l). Notice the hyphen
specified in the DC command appears in the numbering.

Exam ple #4. With DC 1-1.1.1, the Cl counters are one-

part, the C2 counters are two-part and the C3 counters
are three-part. Notice how the DC command specifies
the form for the lowest-level number — three numbers
separated by periods. Also notice that a period appears
only when the number to its right appears.

Exam ple #5. The three DC commands are necessary

here to produce the result shown. The first DC command
ensures that Cl resets the C2 and C3 levels. The second
DC command ensures that C2 resets the C3 level.
(Compare with Example #6.)

Exam ple #6. These DC commands are improperly

constructed. Notice how the numbering is A, B, C, D —
the second Cl did not cause C2 to reset to A. This
demonstrates why it is necessary to follow the DC
command in Example #5.

Exam ple #7. Use of the CO counter to create a chapter-

page number (described in Note #1, earlier) is shown in
this footer. This example assumes a DC 0=1 command
has been put at the top of the document, as described in
previous section, and that a CO counter precedes each
chapter title.
 i^^iFJÎf3CDTril!5ïri]^jîîïLï«itîlTi«Â

N o te #5 D efault Counter D efin ition s. If you leave a counter

undefined, it defaults to a starting number of 1.

N o te #6 Count Sequence for Letters. Letters increment from A

through Z. After Z comes AA, BB, and CC through ZZ.
The sequence continues with AAA, BBB, CCC, etc. The
same pattern holds for lowercase letters.

N o te #7 Range o f Roman Num erals. The sequence of roman

numerals starts with I (the value 1) and goes through
64,000.

N o te #8 In itial Values for Letters. The initial value of any letter

definition is the letter you specify. However, if that letter
can also mean a roman numeral then it is taken as a
roman numeral. Letters used as roman numerals are I, V,
X, L, C, D and M.

If you want to start a list with the letter L (rather than the
roman numeral fifty, which is also L), then you precede
the letter with a double quote mark:

IDdc 1="L

NOTE #9 Punctuation. Punctuation you specify in the DC

command does not appear at the end of the numbers
(except as noted below) — it appears only between
numbers. In Example #4, if you wanted a period to
follow the numbers on both of the Cl lines (such as 1.
and 2.), you would insert them manually after the Cl
oNiuaawiiM

triangles.

Every rule has an exception. Four characters are

permitted to be printed immediately after a number: The
closing parenthesis square bracket curly brace T
and angle bracket ’>’. This lets you make definitions that "*
include numbers or letters in parentheses.

Any punctuation can appear ahead of the first number

ini'). Example *2 demonstrates an open parenthesis
being used in the DC command ahead of the A. Also
note that you are not limited to only one character of
punctuation between nl and n2, for instance — there is
no limit.

4-81
.iTn5TriKii®cortii!S»rijâ^i««îîrri«*. igs»«»

NOTE #10 Setting u p a Six-Level O utline. To set up a six-level

outline, enter the following DC commands. The DC 2
through DC 6 commands ensure that each level of the
outline resets all lower levels.

[F5]dc 1=1 A 1 a(1)(a)0

dUdc 2=A 1 a(1)(a)0
[F5]dc 3=1 a(1)(a)0
[EUdc 4=a(1)(a)0
HHdc 5=(1)(a)0
[F5]dc 6 = (a )S
Notice there is at least one punctuation mark between
numbers — either a space or parenthesis. The resulting
outline would have the six levels:

I A 1 a (1) (a)

NOTE #11 Num bering W ithin Num bered Sections. You may
want to run an independent numbered list within a
section that is numbered — say, a numbered outline
within a section which is already numbered. There are
10 counters, starting with 0 and ending with 9- If you use
the lower counters, say 0 through 5, for your automatic
chapter and section numbering, you can use counters 6
through 9 for numbering within a section.

NOTE #12 A ssigning th e C ounter Comm ands to the K eyboard

File. You can assign the commands CO, Cl, C2, and so
on, along with tabs (or spaces), to individual keys. Of
course you still need to set the proper TS settings for the
tabs to work. Refer to the note in the Counter Command
section which follows for details.

N o te #13 Creating R eferences. The "Reference Commands"

section which follows describes how to set up references.
!H I C IC S Ï f i ü ü B îï i i lf ? «

'GODC simple Numbering)'

BBDC ê mnJ.n2 n3M4 n5.n6.n7.n8.n9.nI0 (for nested

# is the level you are defining (Ô - 9

n determines the style and starting value for the counter
nl determines the style and starting value for the first
level 0 5 of a nested numbering system
n2 determines the style and starting value for the second
level (# + 1) of alhested numbering system
.„and so on up to the last counter used (10 levels max).
. (period) represents any punctuation (one or more
characters) you want to appear between the numbers.
DC is an embedded command, p | § ife - ¡¡8
IEXAMPLE ■Bade 1= i ;

P urpose DC (Define Counter) and C (Counter) allow you to

automatically number blocks of text — chapters,
paragraphs, sections, lists, and outlines. Using counters is
a two-step process. First you use the DC command at the
start of your document to establish the style of the
numbers that you want to use. Then you use the C
counter where you want to place the automatic numbers.

A ction U sin g th e DC C om m and .

Refer to the earlier section "Automatic Numbering" for the
procedures on how to use the DC command.

NOTE #1 D efining the Styles for Num bers. You can use DC to
N umbering

define up to ten levels; you define a style for each level.

The five basic styles (with their typical starting values
shown) are:
Numeric 1
Uppercase roman numerals I
Lowercase roman numerals i
Uppercase letters A
Lowercase letters a
A sixth style, which lets you create your own sequence,
also is available. (See Note #3).

4-83
: c s i n t * 6 r > j u s '« -

NOTE #2 A. C loser Look. When you’re setting up a nested num­

bering scheme, such as an outline or sub-paragraphs (i.e.,
1.2.2), the values you give with the DC command (# and
n l, n2, n3, . . .) correspond to the counters as follows:
DC 0=nl Defines CO
DC 0-nl.n2 Defines CO and Cl
DC 0=nl.n2.n3 Defines CO, Cl, and C2
and so on.
DC l=nl Defines Cl
DC 1-nl.n2 Defines Cl and C2
DC I=nl.n2.n3 Defines Cl, C2, and C3
and so on.
DC Defines C8
DC 8=nl.n2 Defines C8 and C9
No other levels can be specified with DC 8.
If any level is left unspecified, it takes on the default
value of 1, as the earlier Example #1 demonstrates.

NOTE #3 Creating Your Own Set o f C ounters. You can create a

totally original numbering set with XyWrite. Say, for a
special project, you want to number footnotes, pages or
sections with the series a, (3, T, n, £. You’d place a
Counter String table CS.n (n is the number of strings in
the table), in the Printer File as follows (for more on the
Printer File, see Chapter 6):
cs:5
a
P
r
7t
I
Be sure to store and load the Printer File. Then, when
you set the number in the document, use the appropriate
number-setting command with an asterisk. For example
dc 1=* (to define a counter)
If you don't want numbers to start with the first symbol in
the string, add a number for how far down to start. To
start page numbering at the second symbol, for instance,
use dc 1=*2. The second time through a series, each
character is doubled; the third time, tripled; and so on:
aa, pp, IT,...;aaa, PPP, ITT,....
U H R jQ O g V M STu H S i ö B B i J i i m u ift

^FORMAT BS1c # - Counter -

'■ ... .;:"V..............
;~ -r- ' r - t , ,i-r ^ _
*Vr # is the counter number (0-9)
j j |; CO is used for chapter numbering _ , '
_ - (optional) lets you use the current counter value
without incrementing the counter.
¿■x=:
■ CO - C9 are embedded commands. -_)>*- ,S'-r’ ::„45.^
=-.,: ,i . ,
*r ; .„.
\r 'rJ,,". „.i#®’
Example B3ci
’ g.

PURPOSE The CO through C9 (Counter) commands insert the

current value of the counter into the text.
The DC (Define Counter) command defines a set of
counters CO through C9. Through proper selection, you
can do paragraph, section, chapter and outline
numbering as well as the simple numbering of lists.
In its simplest use, numbering a list of things, you can use
CO through C9 without giving a DC command. Refer to
Example #1 in the previous section "Automatic
Numbering Procedures."

ACTION U sin g th e C ou n ter C om m and.

Refer to the earlier section "Automatic Numbering
Procedures" for procedures on how to use the CO - C9
commands.

NOTE #\ U sing the Current Count Tw ice. Sometimes you need

to make use of the same automatic number in more than
N u m b e r in g

one place. For instance, you might want to refer to the

section number in the text itself:
Section 3- In Section 3 we discuss . . .
Let’s say you’re numbering sections with counter Cl. To
repeat the section number in the text, use the hyphen (-)
option of the C counter (note the space between the
counter number and the hyphen):
Press: [R]c1

In Expanded Display the line appears:

Section « C t » . In Section « C 1 - » we discuss . . .

4-85
Â ÏÏ!ll(f? iÎ< fÜ îiïu R W « M -

N o te #2 U sing the Current Count in H eaders and Footers.

You can refer to the current count in headers and footers
using the normal C0-C9 commands. They will be printed
without incrementing the automatic numbering in the
text.
NOTE #3 Putting th e Counter Function Calls in th e Keyboard
File. You can set up your keyboard to simplify the
insertion of automatic numbers. The following example
assigns tabs Q and commands CO - C9, one level of
counter to each individual key: [ctrtllShiftH for Cl,
CtrillShiftl2 for C2, and so on. (GT means "Go To Text
Area" in case the cursor starts out on the Command Line.)
Entries into the keyboard table would look like this:
TABLE=CTRL+SHIFT
2=GT. •
3=GT.0.c2,.-<-
4=GT.C,C.c3,
5=GT,0.C.CU4.-*-
etc.
Result: After you load the Keyboard File with the LDKBD
command, press [Ctrl] and [ShiftI together with the numbers
along the top of the keyboard to enter the desired level
of counter Cl, C2, and so forth.
NOTE #4 Chapter Counter. Always use counter CO to do
automatic chapter numbering. CO is the counter
referenced by the REC (Reference Chapter) command,
described later in this chapter, and tracked for indexing
by the SR CH (Set Record Chapter) command, described
in 'Table of Contents & Index," Chapter 5. If you are not
doing chapter numbering, you can use CO for any other
purpose—numbering paragraphs, lists, etc.
NOTE #5 Line Breaks. Because the number stored in the counter
is not displayed on the screen, XyWrite must estimate its
width in order to calculate line breaks. XyWrite allows a
width equal to 5 times the width of the character 0 (zero).
If the width of the counter value exceeds that width, the
line containing the counter may extend beyond the right
margin when you print the document. To increase the
space reserved for counter values, change the FU setting
in the Printer File. Refer to Chapter 6 for more details.

4-86
 :_.?:S ift^' r 'iaf- ' .-j
FORMAT EDr e p label g ^ ip R e fe re n c e to Page Numbef
t e l ^ ^ g s g M R E C iflfc/lSjjjjjyf /•••'T h ^ Reference to Chapter Number
¿»be/.:^ ^ a i ^ ^ a g g R eference to Counter Number

label is the name given to identify the reference text

and LB are embedded commands - $ § ■
Example EDrep bargraph ;

P urpose Suppose you want to write "See Chapter 7, Section 4,

‘The War Years,’ p. 361"; but you aren’t sure The War
Years will stay on page 361 — or will even stay in
Chapter 7. With XyWrite you label the part called The
War Years, then use the REP, REC and REF commands
to refer to the label. You can use these commands to
automatically update all references to page numbers,
chapter numbers, paragraph numbers, footnotes numbers,
heading numbers, or any other counters CO - C9.
Each procedure for creating references has two parts:
• Part I. Label th e Text — The label is a unique name
which tags the passage so you can track its page,
chapter, footnote and counter number.
• Part II. Use th e R eference Com m ands — The REF,
REP and REC commands are placed in your referral
statement. They indicate where the reference text is.
We use the term referral statement to mean any statement
such as "See page 6" which refers to labeled text.
We illustrate referencing with the following options, each
N umbering

of which requires Parts I and II listed above.

• R eferring to th e Page Num ber o f Any Text.
(Option la) You mark the text with an LB (Label)
command and use REP (page) to refer to that text.
• R eferring to Chapter & Page Num bers o f Any Text.
(Option lb) You mark the text with LB, and use REC
(chapter) and REP (page) in the referral statement.
• R eferring to a Counter.
(Option 2) You can attach a label to a counter, such as
an illustration number or section number. REF in the
referral statement will yield the current counter
number, REP the page number and REC the chapter
number (if chapter counter CO is used).

4-87
t® ^ iW * fc O M T M P J iT iS s

• R eferring to a Footnote Number.

(Option 3) You can put the LB command in a footnote.
You then put REF in the referral statement to produce
the footnote number, REP its page number and REC
the chapter number (if a chapter counter CO is used).
Each option is discussed below as an action, divided into
Parts I and II.

ACTION R eferrin g to th e P age N u m b er o f A n y T ext.

(Option la) The simplest reference is to a page; to track it, you put an
LB (Label) command in the text you are referring to and a
REP command at the referral statement ("See page ..."):

PART I Label the Text — Use the LB command.

1. Go to the page which contains the text you’re
referring to, say page 6.
2. Put the cursor at the beginning of the reference text.
3. Let’s say this paragraph you want to refer to pertains
to travel, so let’s use that as a label:
' Type: [fs]Xb t r a v e l ^
Result: The text is now labeled; a triangle is embedded
in the text. In Expanded Display it looks like:
«L B travel»

PART II U se th e R eference Com m and — Elsewhere in your

text, create the referral statement "See page ...":
1. Move to the page where you want to refer to the text.
2. Type: See page (add a space after "page")

3. Type: [f5]rep t r a v e l@
Result: The referral statement includes an embedded
triangle where the page number goes.
See page «R E P trav el» (Expanded Display)
See page A (Normal Display)
See page 6 (as printed out with TYPES or TYPE)

4-88
k|3 3 ii9G£

A ction R eferrin g to th e C h ap ter & P age N u m b ers

(Option lb) o f a n y T ext.
If you are numbering pages with a chapter-page format
(as this manual does), you need referral statements that
track the chapter number as well as page number.

To begin with, you must have a chapter counter (CO)

inserted at each chapter title (Automatic Numbering
Procedures earlier tells how to use the Chapter Counter).

Part i Label the Text — Use the LB command exactly like

Option la.

Part II U se th e R eference Com m ands — Use the REC

(chapter) and REP (page) commands:

1. Move to the page where you want to refer to the text.

2. Type: See page (add a space after "page")

3- Type: HUrec travel[«J] (chapter no.)

4. Type: [a| IShift 145 (hard hyphen)

5. Type: HUrep travel 0 (page no.)

Result: The referral statement includes an embedded

triangle where the page number goes:

See page « R E C tra v e l» -« R E P tra v e l» (Expanded Display)

N umbering

See page (Normal Display)

See page 4-16 (printed out with TYPES or TYPE)

4-89
Ii f f f f ig t r t f g ffiTi iii ibtîtSEfc -

A ction Referring to a Counter.

(O p t i o n 2 ) Let’s say you want to refer the reader to a title
"Section D, Five-Year Plan." You ve used counter C2 for
the section letter (which may not stay section "D").

PART I Label the Counter — Add a name to the existing

counter command, in this case C2 (rather than using the
LB command).

1. Move the cursor to the triangle representing the

counter command C2.
2. You’ll replace the counter command, so delet.e it:
Press:
3. Let’s label this text "plan".
Type: [F5]c2 p l a n S
Result: The referral statement would look like:

Section « C 2 p la n » . F ive-Y ear Plan (Expanded Display)

Section A . F ive-Y ear Plan (Normal Display)
Section D. F ive-Y ear Plan (Printed out)

Part II Use th e R eference Com m ands — To write a phrase

like "See Section D, Five-Year Plan" elsewhere, with the
current section letter, you use REF to track the labeled
counter "C2plan."

1. Move to the page where you want to refer to the text.

2. Type: See Section (add space after line)
3. Type: HI]ref p la n ®
4. Finish the statement:
Type: , Five-Year Plan (note the comma)

Result: The referral statement includes an embedded

triangle where the page number goes:

S e e Section « R E F p la n » , F ive-Y ear Plan (Expanded Display)

S e e Section A , F ive-Y ear Plan (Normal Display)
S e e Section D, F ive-Y ear Plan (Printed out)

4-90
 1 i i n u n i* C f c

A o io n R eferrin g to a F o o tn o te N um ber.
( O p tio n 3 ) To refer to a footnote number, such as "Refer to footnote
4," do the following:

PART I Label the Footnote — Use an LB command to label the

footnote, and REF to track the labeled footnotes.

1. Place the cursor where you want the footnote number

to appear in your text.
2. Create the footnote with the FN command:
Type: (F5lfnCT
3. The first thing in your footnote must be a label — for
example, "authors":
Type: [re] l b a u th o rs £ 3
4. Now write your footnote and close the screen:
Type: The great Am erican authors include Thoreau,
Twain and Hem ingw ay.
Type:
Result: A footnote number appears in your text. In
Expanded Display, it appear like:

«FN 1 <<LBauthors»The great American authors...»

PART II Use the R eference Comm ands — Use any of the REP,
REF, and REC commands you want. In this case, we will
refer to only the footnote number.
N x^m b e r i n g

1. Move to the page where you want to refer to the text.

2. Type: Refer to footnote (add space at end)
3. Type: OHref authors0 . (include the period) jj|gjii

4-91
 Result: The referral statement has an embedded triangle
where the footnote number goes. In Expanded Display it \
looks like this: ’
V

Refer to footnote « REFauthors» (Expanded Display)

Refer to footnote ▲ (Normal Display)
Refer to footnote 4 (Printed out)

NOTE #1 C om bining Com m ands. We started this section with

the example, "See Chapter 7, Section 4, ‘The War Years,’
p. 361." See if you can create this reference by
combining all three commands as described above. (The
answer is given in the next paragraph.) In addition to the
referral statement, 1) you need a CO counter at chapter
titles; and 2) the label itself goes with the section title,
"The War Years" — either with an LB command or inside
a C counter if you’re using counters on section titles.

If your label is "war," the referral statement in Expanded

Display should look like this:

See Chapter « R E C w a r» , Section « R E F w a r» , T h e W ar

Years,’ p. « R E P w a r» .

NOTE #2 Labeling E xisting Counters or F ootnotes. The

previous examples inserted labels as you created the
counter or footnote commands. You could simply insert
a label within an existing counter or footnote command
by moving the cursor to the embedded command (A)
and pressing [Ctri] [F3]. This lets you edit the command
quickly, without switching to Expanded Display with

NOTE #3 lin e Breaks. Because the number stored in the

Reference commands is not displayed on the screen,
XyWrite must estimate its width in order to calculate line
endings. XyWrite allows a width equal to five times the
width of the character 0 for the value stored in the
Reference command. If the width of the reference value
exceeds that width, the line containing the reference may
extend beyond the right margin when you print the
document. To increase the space reserved for reference
values, change the FU setting in the Printer File. Refer to
Chapter 6 for more information.

4-92
INTRO In this section we have grouped together commands
which affect the length of the printed page. Because
these commands interact, we begin with a set of basic
procedures which includes all of the essential settings.

CONTENTS Page Section Command

Page Length Procedures

4-95 Using the Default Page Length Settings
4-99 Changing the Page Length Settings

Page Length Com m ands

4-102 Page Length PL
4-104 Form Depth FD
4-105 Top & Bottom Margins TP, BT
4-106 Page Break PG
4-108 Non-Breakable Block NB, BB
4-110 Widow & Orphan WD, OP
 D E FA U LT PA G E L E N G T H S E T T IN G S

o
o
o
TOP o
MARGIN o

L»
"Curiouser and curiouser!"* cried Alice (she o
was so much surprised, that for the moment o
she quite forgot how to speak good English),
"Now I'm opening out like the largest
o
telescope that ever was! Good-bye feet!" o
(for when she looked down at her feet, they Ü
TEXT seemecl to be almost out of sight, they were o
getting so far off). "Oh, my poor little
feet, I wonder who will put on your shoes and o
stockings for you now, dear? I'm sure I o
shan't be able! I shall be a great deal too o
54 far off to trouble myself about you: you
lines must manage the best way you can — but X o
must be kind to them," thought Alice, or o
perhaps they won't walk the way I want to go!
66 o
Let me see. I'll give them a new pair of
boots every Christmas." o
lines
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Û

4-94
P u rpo se XyWrite is preset for the simple format shown in the
illustration on the facing page. The default settings
allow you to set up a page quickly and simply for
printing. The default settings include:
• 11 "-long sheet of paper
• 6 lines per inch
• Single-spaced text
• 54 lines of text per page (which runs 9" in length)
• When one line of a paragraph ends a page (orphan)
or starts a page (widow), it will automatically be
moved to join the rest of the paragraph

A c t io n U sin g th e D efa u lt P age L en g th S e ttin g s

The only adjustment you need to make is the top margin:
1. Align the top edge of the paper with the printhead.
(This is a good practice to follow — otherwise, any
running footer you later add will likely fall at the
top of the next page.)
2. To set a top margin an all pages of a document,
enter the TP (Top Margin) command at the top of
your document. Place it on the top line ahead of
any text or spaces. This example creates a one-inch
top margin:
Type: [F5]tp 6[F9l

This method insures that the document will be

printed with a one-inch margin at the top of every page, i
Refer to the Top Margin (TP) description later in this
section for a few other ways to set the top margin.
Result: Your document is now set up for a one-inch top
margin (which with these defaults leaves a one-inch
margin at the bottom ). When you give the TYPE
command, the document is printed out with 54 lines to
a page (give or take a line to eliminate widows and
orphans). The next procedure shows you how to
modify these page length settings.

Note Illu stratio n s. The figures and list on the next three
pages illustrate the page length settings at your control.
The two figures compare how a document displays and
prints out.
4-95
 IC Q » « «

D IS P L A Y S H O W IN G P A G E L E N G T H C O M M A N D S

TP Top Margin
RH Running H eader
FS Footnote Separator
RF Running Footer
BT Bottom M argin

FN Footnote

"Curiouser and c u r i o u s e r !" P c r i e d Alice (she

was so much surprised, that for the moment
she quite forgot h o w to speak good English).
" N o w I'm opening out like the largest
telescope that ever was! Good-bye feet!"
(for when she looked down at her feet, they
seemed to be almost out of sight, they were
getting so far off). "Oh, my poor little
feet, I wonder who will put on your shoes and
stockings for you now, dear? I'm sure I
shan't be able! I shall be a great deal too
far off to trouble myself about you: you
must manage the best way you can — but I
must be kind to them," thought Alice, or
I perhaps they won't w a l k the way I want to go!
I Let me see. I'll give them a new pair of
boots every Christmas."

4-96
miiKim U^jÿR3iigüVBBïcd(RVtKS

P R IN T O U T S H O W IN G P A G E L E N G T H C O M M A N D S

o
TP o
o
C h a p te r 2 Alice in Wonderland O

RH o
o
"Curiouser and curiouser!"* cried Alice (she o
was so much surprised, that for the moment o
she quite forgot how to speak good English). o
"Now I'm opening out like the largest
telescope that ever was! Good-bye feet!" o
(for when she looked down at her feet, they o
seemed to be almost out of sight, they were
getting so far off). "Oh, my poor little
PL TEXT feet, 1 wonder who will put on your shoes and o
stockings for you now, dear? I'm sure I o
shan't be able! I shall be a great deal too o
far off to trouble myself about you: you
FD must manage the best way you can — but I o
must be kind to them," thought Alice, or o
perhaps they won't walk the way I want to go! o
Let me see. I'll give them a new pair of
boots every Christmas." o
o
FS
o
1 Taken from Alice's Adventures in o
Wonderland , by Lewis Carroll, 1865. o
o
o
o
(slack) o
o
RF
Page 10 o
o
BT o
fAOfc LENGTH

4-97
 -LGSJiiiPi}

PAGE LEN G TH S U M M A R Y

FD - Form Depth. The number of lines in the overall length of the sheet
of paper. The default is set to 66 lines, which corresponds to 11" x 6
lines/inch.

PL ■Page Length. The number of lines from the top of a page all the
way down to the last line of a footnote (if any). It includes the top
margin, running header, body text, and footnotes, but not running footer
or bottom margin.

TP - Top M argin. The number of lines left blank as a top margin on the
page.

RH - Running Header. Text repeated page after page — can include

page number, date, title, even the time of day. You can make the
header the same on all pages, or different on even (left-hand) and odd
(right-hand) pages.

Body Text. The main text of the document.

FS - Footnote Separator. Indicates the characters and blank lines that

you want to appear between the body text and the footnotes. In this
case, a row of underlines is used.

FN - Footnote. Footnotes for the page are inserted here. XyWrite will
put the entire footnote on the page, if possible.

Slack. If the text is less than a full page in length, the blank lines
appear between the footnote and running footer. (This is the default
setting, for BF=0.)

RF - Running Footer. Text repeated at the bottom of each page.

Running footers have all the features of running headers listed above.
(Odd or even is optional).

BT - Bottom M argin. Blank lines left as the bottom margin on the

page.

4-98
PAGE LENGTH SU M M A R Y

FD - Form Depth. The number of lines in the overall length of the sheet
of paper. The default is set to 66 lines, which corresponds to 11" x 6
lines/inch.

PL - Page Length. The number of lines from the top of a page all the
way down to the last line of a footnote (if any). It includes the top
margin, running header, body text, and footnotes, but not running footer
or bottom margin.

TP - Top Margin. The number of lines left blank as a top margin on the
page.

RH - Running Header. Text repeated page after page — can include

page number, date, title, even the time of day. You can make the
header the same on all pages, or different on even (left-hand) and odd
(right-hand) pages.

Body Text. The main text of the document.

FS - Footnote Separator. Indicates the characters and blank lines that

you want to appear between the body text and the footnotes. In this
case, a row of underlines is used.

FN - Footnote. Footnotes for the page are inserted here. XyWrite will
put the entire footnote on the page, if possible.

Slack. If the text is less than a full page in length, the blank lines
appear between the footnote and running footer. (This is the default
setting, for BF=0.)

RF - Running Footer. Text repeated at the bottom of each page.

Running footers have all the features of running headers listed above.
(Odd or even is optional).

BT - Bottom Margin. Blank lines left as the bottom margin on the

page.
The PL (Page Length) command is the primary command
used in the following procedure. This command
determines the number of lines from the top edge of the
paper down to the last line of text. Refer to PL shown in
the previous illustrations.
For more detail on any command, refer to its description
elsewhere in this chapter.

C h an g in g th e P age L en gth S ettin g s

Use the following procedure to change any of the page
length parameters from their default settings:
1. P osition th e Cursor. Move the cursor to the top line
of the page you want to affect. Insert all of the
following commands (Steps 2-10) at this point.
2. Form D epth. Figure out the total number of lines on
a complete sheet of paper. For example, at 6 lines
per inch, an 11-inch sheet holds 66 lines (6 x 11).
Type: [F5|fd 66[VI
(Since FD 66 is the default setting, you are not
required to type this in; however, doing so allows the
form depth to be carried along with the document in
case you later change the default.)
3. D eterm ine Page Layout. Decide how many lines
you want to reserve for each of the following. We
have chosen the following values for our example.
Top Margin (TP) 6 lines
Running Header (RH) 3 lines
Running Footer (RF) 2 lines
Bottom Margin (BT) 5 lines

4. Page Length. The PL command has three parts to it:

PLnom, PLmax, and PLmin. Determine these values,
then enter them into your document in Step d.
a. PLmax. Determine PLmax equal to FD-TP-RH.
3f>VJ

(Get TP and RH from Step 3). In our example,

66-5-2 = 59 :
PLmax is 59.
 -XSrtlGj

b. PLnom. Decide on a value for the nominal page

length. PLnom is typically PLmax minus 2 (for
single-spaced documents).
PLnom is 57.
You have freedom in choosing a value for PLnom
(depending on what you want for widow/orphan
controls and non-breakable blocks). See the Page
Length command later in this section for more
details.
c. PLmin. Decide on a value for the minimum page
length. A typical value for PLmin is PLnom minus 4
PLmin is 53.
d. PL. Type the PL command into your document,
collecting the values from steps a, b and c:
Type: [re]pi 5 7 ,5 9 ,5 3 0
5. Top Margin. Set the Top Margin to the value you
decided in Step 3:
Type: [£5]tp 6CT
Note: For TP to take effect on the first page, you must
insert it on the first line of the document, before any
text or spaces.

6. Running Header. Create the Running Header with

the number of lines you decided in Step 3- For
example, to say "Proposal" followed by two blank
lines:
Type: [R ]rh 0
Type: P r o p o s a l^ C T C T frel
7. Body Text. You don’t need to do anything else to set
the number of lines of body text — you already set
this number when you specified PL in Step 4. In our
example, the body text has at most 50 lines
(PLmax-TP-RH = 59-6-3 = 50).
iG ü.nfij; IÎ|Sif5i]ÿJÎP’tf7îï«iiitiïïCii»

8. Footnote and Footnote Separator. You don’t need

to do anything special to set the number of lines for
footnotes — XyWrite treats them as body text. In our
example, they would be included in the 50 lines
mentioned in the previous step.
9. Running Footer. Set the Running Footer to the value
you decided in Step 3 — a line for the page number
followed by one blank line (to move the footer up off
the bottom of the page):
Type: [FslrfCT
Type: [F5]pn00[F3]
Note: If there is a conflict, PL takes precedence over
RF (and BT). That is, if you specify a PL that is too
large, the footer will get pushed down off the page.
10. Bottom Margin. Set the Bottom Margin to the value
you decided in Step 3:
Type: [F5|bt 5 0
The only thing BT can ever do is move the running
footer up from the bottom of the page. It cannot
affect the length of body text — that is determined by
PL.

NOTE #1 Positioning the Paper in th e Printer. It is important

when using running footers you start with the top edge of
the paper lined up with the printhead. Then set the top
margin using TP. If you were to manually advance the
top edge of the paper past the printhead, you might find
each running footer neatly (but mistakenly) printed at the
top of the next page.

NOTE #2 Vertical M easurement Unit. The descriptions of the

Page Length commands all use lines as the vertical
measurement unit. In this context, 1 line is 1/6 inch, not
one line of text. If you have chosen another vertical
measurement unit, you must use that unit in all Page
Length commands. (Refer to "Vertical Spacing" later in
this chapter.)

4-101
 FORMAT ,m ax,m iyi Rage Length
WÉâsSS^n^^s> nom is the nominal num ber of lines allowed for PL, and
includes the top margin, running head, body of text and “

Ife ^ T --1 m a x (optional) is the maximum value for PL.

y*
m in (optional) is the minimum value for PL.
B
w PL is an embedded command. ~ •
B

P urpo se The PL (Page Length) command sets the number of

lines from the top edge of the paper down to the last
line of the footnotes (if any). As shown in an earlier
figure, PL includes the top margin, running header,
body text, and footnotes, but does not include running
footer or bottom margin.
The maximum and minimum values allow the body of
text to vary in length, to accommodate non-breakable
blocks, widows and orphans. The default value
originally set up in the STARTUP.INT file is:
PL 54,60,50
This setting allows for anywhere between 50 and 60
lines for PL, with 54 as the nominal length. (This PL
setting is in the STARTUP.INT file on the original
XyWrite disk you purchased — you are free to change
this default setting.) The PL values have the following
meanings:
• PLnom *This number of lines of text will appear on
a page barring any forced breaks due to widows,
orphans, non-breakable blocks or footnotes.
• PLmax - Body text will never, ever run past PLmax
— this is an absolute maximum. Only running
footers can appear below PLmax. A value for PLmax
is necessary for widow control and can be important
for placement of footnotes.
• PLmin - This allows text to be shorter when using
orphan control or when placing footnotes.

4-102
A c t io n S e ttin g th e P age L en g th
To set the Page Length within a document:
1. Move the cursor anywhere on the page whose
length you want to set.
2. To set a range of 56 to 60 lines for PL with a
nominal length of 58 lines:
Type: [reijpl 58,60,56[VI
Result: This document can have anywhere from 56 to
60 lines including top margin, running header and
footnotes. The variation can be due to non-breakable
blocks (BB, NB), widows (WD), and orphans (OP). (A
non-breakable block can cause the minimum to be less
than 56.)

N ote # i Embedded Command. PL is an embedded command,

visible as a triangle in the Normal Display. In the
Expanded Display it would appear expanded — for
example: «8158,60,56».

Note #2 Default Setting. The default value for PL is originally

located in your STARTUP.INT file as the statement
DEFAULT PL= 54,60,50. You can alter this setting as
you wish. You can also move this statement to your
Printer File as DF PL= 54,60,50 if you wish.

Note #3 Line Spacing. If you print a document double-spaced

(LS 2), the number of lines on the page is still between
50 and 60. PL specifies the number of lines output by
the printer, regardless of whether they are printed on or
are blank.
 I S IN ­

FORMAT SflFD n
n is the total number of 1
FD is an embedded comr

P u rpo se Form Depth is our term for the length of the sheet of
paper you print on. You set the Form Depth (FD) to
equal the total number of lines on a sheet of paper. In
other words, FD measures the number of lines from the
top of one page to the top of the next.

A c t io n S ettin g th e Form D epth

To set the form depth within a document:
1. Move the cursor to the top of the document whose
sheet length you want to set.
2. For example, if you are printing 6 lines per inch on
paper which is 14" long, you would set the form
depth at 84 lines as follows:
Type: [^Jfd 84@
Result: The document is now set for a sheet of paper
that is 84 lines in length.
Tip A Matter o f Convenience. You may find that the most
convenient way to set the form depth is to set it once for
all documents, rather than setting it separately within
each document as shown above. Use the DEFAULT
command to set a global FD, for all documents. See
Note *2.

Note #1 Embedded Command. FD is an embedded command

— it is embedded in text, visible as a triangle in Normal
Display. In Expanded Display it is shown expanded —
for example: «FD66».

Note #2 Default Setting. The default value for FD is 66 unless

you use the DEFAULT command to change it. You can
insert the DEFAULT command into the STARTUP.INT
file or the Printer File (as DF).
 _ ■• . . . -r’wr » i;r " * r7 - . Wtttcswai-. i —
7orm at T o p M argin ;
¡~pi..fajvill??’
' Bottom Margin ...
n is the number of blank lines of margin.
TP and BT are embedded commands.

PURPOSE The TP (Top Margin) command defines the number of

blank lines that XyWrite automatically inserts between the
top of a page and the first line of text (either running
header or body text). (See Note #3.)
The BT (Bottom Margin) command moves the running
footer up on the page. This is the only thing BT does. It
has absolutely no effect on the length of body text or the
placement of footnotes — those are detennined strictly by
PL.

ACTION S ettin g th e T op a n d B o tto m M argins.

To set the Top and Bottom Margins:
1. Move the cursor to the top line of the document,
ahead of any text or spaces. (Only embedded
triangles can precede it on the top line.)
2. Type: [F5]tp 3 0
Result: The top margin is set to 3 blank lines. You set
BT in a similar manner.
NOTE #1 Ignoring the Top Margin Command. If you prefer to
set the top margin manually (that is, by changing the
position of the paper in the printer), you can use the
DEFAULT command to change the TF setting. If TF-1,
then any TP commands you issue are ignored. If TF-0
(the default), then TP commands are honored.
NOTE #2 Embedded Command. TP and BT are embedded in
text, visible as triangles in Normal Display. In Expanded
Display they are shown expanded: « T P 3 » and « B T 3 » .
NOTE #3 Default Margin Settings. The defaults are TP 0 and BT
0 unless you use the DEFAULT command to change
them. You can set up the DEFAULT command in the
STARTUP.INT file or the Printer File.
ALSO See Page Format. To see how the Top and Bottom Margins
interact with the other page format commands, refer to
the earlier section, "Page Length Procedures."

4-105
 I S if i t

FORMAT Mij PG /? -■^Page Break A”

m
■1: n is the number of lines needed on a page before it breaks
to a newjpage (optional).'r .-
• , " - - ,i* w ^ ~

MSI PG is an embedded com

SSM
P u r p o se When you are printing a document, a PG (Page) command
embedded in your document advances the paper to the
top of the next page. This command is similar to giving a
form feed to the printer. It can serve several purposes:
• Starting a New Page,
Unconditional Page Break (Option la )
When you insert PG in text with no value, it always
causes the next line to be the first line of a new page.
Conditional Page Break (Option lb )
If you use the value PG 20, the page will break only if
the current page has 20 or more lines on it. In other
words, PG 20 prevents the current page from printing
with fewer than 20 lines.
• Ejecting the Last Page. (Option 2)
You can use PG to automatically eject the last page of
a document. When inserted at the very end of a
document, PG ejects the last page from the printer.
(More simply, you can eject using the DEFAULT EJ = 1
command — see Chapter 6.)
In all cases, the PG command has no effect on the line
in which it is embedded. It causes the n ext line to be
the start of a new page.
If you d o n 't use the PG command to break a page,
XyWrite creates a page break for you, after the number
of text lines given by the PL (Page Length) command.

A c t io n S ta rtin g a N ew P age
( O ption la ) — Unconditional Page Break
To create a hard page break in text:
1. Move the cursor to one line above where you want
the new page to begin.
2. Enter the PG command:
Type: [F5]pg0

4-106
[G D 'iaR fM

A c tio n Starting a N ew Page

(Option lb ) — Conditional Page Break
To conditionally break a page:
1. Move the cursor to one line above where you want
the new page to begin.
2. Enter PG along with the fewest number of lines you
want to appear on the page before the page breaks.
For example:
Type: [re]pg 40@
Result: If the current page reaches 40 or more lines, a new
page starts at the line following the PG command. If the
current page does not reach 40 lines, the page does not
break at the PG command.

A c t io n E jectin g th e L ast P age

( O ption 2 ) To cause the printer to automatically eject the last page
of a document:
1. Move the cursor to the very end of the document.
2. Type: [F5]pg0
Result: When the document is printed, the PG
command causes the last page to be ejected from the
printer.

NOTE #1 P-L Number. Press |Shift| [F9| to turn on the Page-Line

(P-L) number at the top of the screen.
r Page L engt

NOTE # 2 Extra Page w ith Running Header. In Option 2

above, be sure you place the PG embedded triangle on |
the very last line of the document. If your document
contains a running header and you follow the PG
command with more than one carriage return, that
running header will be printed on the next page.

N ote #3 P osition in g th e PG Command. We recommend you

place the PG command at the end of a line of text,
rather than on a line of its own. In the latter case if the
PG command fell immediately after a soft page break,
XyWrite would produce a blank page. In the first case,
XyWrite would instead produce a page with one line of
text on it (which is easier to identify as being associated
with a page break).
4-107
 w im m

03NB > Non-Breakable Block

f.as^s; . r -1 . 2" ? » - ’ ’* '~ 'ii« -* # -* V£ ¿ S ^ ia r f " " ' -_ u ^ ” • • --'. V -

WtMS=S&^^^Ê^Ê Breakable Block

<■.*' .raniir^**^ -.wHA5^uiau -*s'J?£r .-~^ ¿rrtr • -yrufti:._=

NB and BB are embedded commands.

P u rpo se The commands N B (Non-Breakable Block) and B B

(Breakable Block) allow you to keep a block of text on
one page. You might define a paragraph, table, column
of figures, or any other text as a non-breakable block.
NB and BB always appear in pairs:
• NB begins the non-breakable block.
• BB ends the non-breakable block.

A c t io n S e ttin g a n U n b rea k a b le B lo ck o f T ex t
To make a block of text unbreakable:
1. Move the cursor to the start of the text you want
kept unbroken.
Type: [F5lnb@
2. Move the cursor to the end of the text you want
kept unbroken.
Type: [F5]bb0
Result: All of the text between NB and BB is now an
unbreakable block; that text cannot be split between
two pages.

NOTE #1 Embedded Command. NB and BB are embedded

commands — they are embedded in text, visible as
triangles in Normal Display. In Expanded Display they
are shown expanded as «NB» and «BB».

4-108
NOTE #2 Checking NB and BB Pairs. The commands NB and BB
must be paired and they must alternate. You must not
have more of one than the other. To check, use the
search command:
S3 SE / « |B » /
To type the four characters between the slashes, press;

LShift L
B
“T>l
ALSO S ee Related Comm ands. Page Length command, PL,
which has an effect on determining which page the
non-breakable block is assigned to. With the command
PL 54,60 an unbreakable block would stay on the page
if it fits anywhere within the range of lines 54 to 60.
Experiment to find which values for PL yield the best
results for your application.
The conditional page break command (PG ri) can serve a
function similar to NB and BB. Refer to PG on the previous
pages.

P ace Le n g t h

4-109
 k.VJ U K W 5

.FORMAT : ; ? 3 3 O P m ^ O rp h an ■„;
W ld Q W ".” — .
r-
^_____

is the minimum nuiriber of lines of a paragraph

1- •• im$*■■■■- - SoftT'r^j^
allowed at the bottom of a page. -
n is the minimum number of lines of a paragraph
allowed at the top of a page.
OP and WD are both embedded commands.
P urpo se A widow is the last few lines of a paragraph which are
carried over to the top of the next page. Likewise, an
orphan is the first few lines of a paragraph which
appear at the bottom of a page. Widows and orphans of
one or two lines are generally frowned upon because
the lines appear estranged from their paragraphs.
The default values are WD 2 and OP 2. These settings
allow only two or more lines of a paragraph to break
away to a separate page. XyWrite is preset for this
condition. WD and OP count only lines of text. (If you
are double-spacing a document, it does not count the
blank lines.)

Requirem ents. WD and OP require proper values for

PLmax and PLmin, the second and third values in the PL
(Page Length) command. The built-in default of
PL 54,60,50 allows you to specify an orphan value of 1 to
5, and a widow value of 1 to 7.

ORPHAN AND WIDOW W IDOW

ORPHAN
---------
.,-s~ ■ ... I

4-110
[fgTmYiil H IM ll

ACTION S etting Up O rp h a n C o n tro l.

XyWrite has the default value of OP 2. To set OP to
another value:

1. Move the cursor to the top line of the document.

2. Enter the OP command. For example, to allow the
first 3 lines of a paragraph to fall at the bottom of a
page, set OP to 3 as follows. (This prevents the
paragraph from breaking at the first 1 or 2 lines.)
Type: [re] op 3 0
Result: This embeds the orphan command in the text,
visible as a triangle. (Orphan control will not work
unless you specify a value for PLmin less than or
equal to PLnom. See Note #1.)

NOTE *1 Calculating the Orphan Value. To calculate the largest

acceptable orphan value, find the PL settings you are
using — subtract PLmin from PLnom and then add 1. For
example:
54 - 50 + 1 - 5
In this example, 5 is the largest value you can specify in
the OP command. (Note that you must specify a value
for PLmin for orphan control to work.)

ACTION S etting Up W idow C o n tro l.

XyWrite has the default value of WD 2. To set WD to
another value:

1. Move the cursor to the top line of the document.

2. To allow the last 3 lines of a paragraph to fall at the
top of a page, set WD to 3 as follows. (This prevents
the paragraph from breaking at the last 1 or 2 lines.)
Type: [F5]wd 3 0
Result: This embeds the widow command in the text,
visible as a triangle. (Widow control will not work
unless you specify a value for PLmax greater than or
equal to PLnom.)

4-111
NOTE #2 Calculating W idow Values. To figure the largest
acceptable widow value, calculate PLmax minus PLnom
and then add 1. For example
6 0 - 54 + 1 - 7
In this example, 7 is the largest value you can specify in
the WD command.

NOTE #3 Embedded Command. OP and WD are embedded

commands — they are embedded in text, visible as
triangles in Normal Display. In Expanded Display they
are shown expanded — for example: «O P3».

N o t e #4 Default Orphan and W idow Settings. The default

values are OP 2 and WD 2 unless you use the DEFAULT
commmand to change them. You can change these with
the DEFAULT command in the STARTUP.INT file or the
DF command in your Printer File.

NOTE #5 Troubleshooting. If you can’t get the orphan or widow

control to work:
• You may have mistakenly set a PL command with
only one number, such as PL 58. For OP to work,
you must specify a value for PLmin; for WD to work,
you must specify a value for PLmax. See "Page Length
Procedures" earlier in this chapter.
• If your document does not contain a Page Length
command (PL), you should go ahead and set one.
This will override any improper Page Length
command that might be located in a DEFAULT PL
statement in the STARTUP.INT file or in a DF PL
statement in your Printer File.

N o te #6 How Orphan and W idow Control Works. Let’s

illustrate how orphans and widows work using OP 3,
WD 3, and the built-in default of PL 54,60,50. First of all,
XyWrite makes sure that PL minimum (50) and maximum
(60) values are never violated by orphan and widow
control. That means that the printed text on a page
cannot be made less than 50 lines by moving an orphan
to the next page, nor can it be made more than 60 lines
by keeping a widow on the same page.

4-112
When XyWrite prepares a document for printing, it scans
the page endings. When it has finished scanning line 52,
XyWrite looks ahead to see if a new paragraph would
begin on line 53 or 54. If so, it starts that paragraph on a
new page, preventing an orphan of one or two lines. If
the paragraph is still continuing at line 54, XyWrite looks
ahead to see if that paragraph would end on line 55 or
56. If so, it allows that paragraph to finish on that page,
preventing a widow of one or two lines, and starts the
next paragraph on the new page.
NOTES

4-114
r
I ntro In this section we cover the commands which affect the
width of your document. Except for Offset, all of these
commands make themselves apparent as symbols on the
Ruler. You can make changes either directly on the ruler
or by specific command.

We start with a description of the ruler and how you can

make format changes directly on the ruler. Individual
discussion of each page width command follows.

CONTENTS Page Section Command

4-116 Ruler
4-118 Ruler Settings [AitlfTab
4-120 Left & Right Margin RM, LM
4-121 Offset OF
4-123 Indent Paragraph IP
4-126 Tab Settings TS, TR, RT
The Ruler is the third line from the top of the screen. It
has 80 marks, one for each column. The marks in the
ruler are as follows. (You can change these markers in
the Printer File if you wish, with the RL setting.)

Marker Exam ple o f Command

II Left Margin LM 5
II Right Margin RM 70
► Normal Tab TS 10
< Flush Right Tab TS10R
▼ Flush Center Tab TS10C
A Decimal Tab TS10D
L 1st Indent IP 5,10 (first number)
“1 2nd Indent IP 5,10 (second number)

The cursor marker is the mark on the ruler that moves as

the cursor moves through text. (The ruler symbols show
through it.)

The display is 80 characters in width. Your document,

however, can be as wide as 256 characters. The display
automatically scrolls horizontally, if need be, as you move
the cursor.

The numbers 1 through 8 in the ruler represent columns

10 through 80. If you print at 10 characters/inch, this
ruler corresponds to inches.

Each TS, TR, LM, RM and IP command alters the markers

displayed on the ruler line. You change these commands
throughout your document for different purposes —
perhaps one for paragraphs, another for tables, still
another for headings.
•GD'HGOi IK 0 GS W

You can write as many different formats in a document

as you want; each one takes effect where the embedded
format triangle is located, and stays in effect until
another triangle is encountered, or to the end of the
document.
The ruler indicates the tabs, indents and margins which
are in effect a t the location o f the cursor. As you move
the cursor down the screen, each time you pass a format
change (visible as an embedded triangle), the ruler
changes to indicate the new settings.
[fflm a B P B fa p 11*031

.. .. .....

FORMAT --(M3® Ruler Menu ' " I

This is an immediate command. |

PURPOSE S3 1m3 lets you change the ruler settings in a simple and
direct manner. By moving the cursor along the ruler, you
can modify the left margin, right margin, tabs and indents
without having to enter their respective commands LM,
RM, TS and IP.

ACTION C h a n g in g th e R uler S ettin gs.

To change the tab settings, left margin, right margin or
indents:

1. P ress: Alt Tab

Result: Notice the choices that are listed.

2. Let’s select [m ](m ] to "remove prompt menu."

Press: [AitlfTabl (again)

Result: This removes the prompt menu so you can

see your document while you set the tabs.

3. Move the cursor marker left or right along the ruler to

the position you want to change.

4. Select the action you want:

L Left margin
R Right margin
I Indent of first line in paragraph
H Hanging indent (remaining lines in paragraph)
T Tab stop for a normal tab (flush left)
G Flush right tab
C Centered tab
D Decimal tab
X Clears an individual marker
Z Clears all tab and indent markers
A Abandons the menu without making any
changes to the ruler, and returns to your
document
4-118
 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4. To finalize your selections:
Press: 0
Result: The necessary LM, RM, TS and IP commands are
inserted in the document at the cursor location in the
text, visible as embedded triangles (A).
Example Changing the Tab Settings. Let’s change the tab stops
to 5 and 10 with a decimal tab at 25;
1. Press: [A|tJ|Tab|
2. Press: Alt Tab (again)
3. Press: Z (clears the tab markers)
4. Move the cursor to position 5.
5. Press: T (sets a tab stop)
6. Move the cursor to position 10.
7. Press: T (sets another tab stop)
8. Move the cursor to position 25.
9. Press: D (sets a decimal tab stop)
10. Press: 0
Result: The embedded command <<TS5,10,25D» is
entered into the document at the cursor location.

NOTE Setting Defaults w ith the Ruler. When you enter

selections with the [M3[M3 menu and there is no
document open on the screen, the selections you make
become defaults — they become the initial formats for all
files — both new and existing — until you QUIT
XyWrite. (These settings are overridden by TS commands
embedded in your document.) This feature is useful for
making temporary ruler settings for new files.

See a lso Related C om m ands. The style commands (SS, US, NS,
PS) are another way to easily change the ruler settings.
You can create your own standardized rulers and switch
between them at will.

4-119
IM R !

Left Margin 3 7 3 3 ;
3
n is the column number (0 to 255) for the margin
LM and RM are embedded commands.
■>««¡.safe" -•*•siSsst?

P urpose The LM (Left Margin) and RM (Right Margin) commands

adjust the margins in a document. When you move the
left margin, the tabs do not move along with it (unless
you use Relative Tabs by specifying RT ON, explained in
"Tab Settings" later).

ACTION S ettin g th e Left o r R igh t M argin.

To set a margin:
1. Move the cursor to start of the line whose margin you
want to change, or to a previous line. (See Note #2.)
2. Enter LM or RM. For example, to set the left margin to
position 10:
Type: [F5]lm 10 ED
Result: The LM command is embedded in the text as a
triangle. The left margin remains in effect until another
LM command is encountered.

NOTE #1 Embedded Command. LM and RM are embedded com­

mands — they are embedded in text, visible as triangles
in Normal Display. In Expanded Display they are shown
expanded — for example: «LM10» and «RM80».
NOTE #2 Immediate Effect. To make the LM or RM command
take effect on the same line on which it rests, make sure
there is no text or spaces ahead of it on that line. (You
may place other embedded triangles ahead of it.)
NOTE #3 Default M argins. You can also set up LM and RM using
the DEFAULT command (in the STARTUP.INT file or the
Printer File, or on the Command Line). The defaults are
LM 0, RM 78 (unless you use the DEFAULT command to
change them).
ALSO See Related Commands. IP (Indent Paragraph) is similar to
LM. IP allows you to indent the left margin. RT (Relative
Tab) lets you set tabs relative to the left margin.

4-120
 ■ :e m u

'.r’p- '
E 3 o f r j :: Offset
.-"fT;~«j- _ •• . . — .__ _
and / are amount of offset for right and left pages,
respectively (0 to 255).
Z lf I is omitted, all pages take on the /* offset.
•ici." OF is an embedded command. "'

The OF (Offset) command shifts the horizontal position

of the text on the page for printing. OF shifts the entire
document — the left and right margins, all text, tabs and
indents. While the offset appears on the printout, it is
not visible on the display. (This enables you to view 80
columns of text on-screen.)

The r and / in OF r,l are actually the number of margin

units you want the page shifted. If only one (r) is used,
all pages are shifted by that number; if two numbers are
inserted, r is the number the odd (right-handed) pages
are offset, I the number for even (left-handed) pages.

Allowing different offsets for left- and right-handed pages

is invaluable to allow space along the binding edge.
Space for staples, punched holes or other binding is
thereby created to the right of text on left-handed pages,
and to the left of text on right-handed pages.

In 10-pitch type, there are 10 margin units to the inch.

To shift the page one inch to the right, for example, use:

GUof 10

This means that you can display a full-screen document

with no left margin, and then print it with a 1-inch left
margin. This is especially useful when printing with 12-
pitch type — it allows you to use the entire 80-character
display and still have 1" for left and right margins. (80
characters divided by 12 characters/inch equals just over
6-1/2.")

Without using the OF command, if you were to insert a 1"

left margin on the display, you would have to use
P age W id t h

horizontal scrolling to display 80 characters of text.

4-121
[e m m

A ction S ettin g th e Sam e O ffset fo r A ll P ages.

For example, to create a 1" left margin on a printer set to
a pitch of 12 characters/inch, you would set the offset to
12:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the document. (The

offset takes effect starting with the line where the OF
command is embedded.)

2. Type: [F5]0f 1 2 0

Result: The document is printed with a blank left margin

of 12 spaces (I"). The entire document is shifted this
amount.

A ctio n S ettin g Left an d R ight O ffsets.

For the same 12-character pitch setting, to create a 1 1/2"
left margin for odd pages and a 1" left margin on even
pages, you would set the offset to 18 and 12, respectively:

1. Move the cursor to the top of the document.

2. Type: [re] of 1 8 ,1 2 0

Result: When the document is printed, even pages will

have a 12-space left margin; odd pages, 18 spaces.

NOTE #1 Embedded Command. OF is an embedded command

— it is embedded in text, visible as a triangle in Normal
Display. In Expanded Display it is shown expanded —
for example: « 0 F 1 8,1 2 » .

NOTE #2 Previewing the Offset. You may view the offset on the
display, if you wish, by using the TYPES (Type to Screen)
command.

N o te #3 Default Offset Settings. You can also set OF in the

STARTUP.INT file or the Printer File using the DEFAULT
command. The default is OF 0,0 (unless you use the
DEFAULT command to change it).

4-122
I l »

I FORMAT E in* m,n ._ Indent Paragraph

m and n are described below.

IP is ari embedded command. „4aH G i£i:
- " \ r- ~ . „ ■

P urpose The ip (Indent Paragraph) command gives you an easy

way to indent paragraphs. You can use IP rather than LM
to indent whole paragraphs. Tab stops do not change
position when you insert an IP command.

The indent is measured from the current Left Margin

(LM). The m is the number of spaces the first line of the
paragraph is indented; n is the number of spaces
subsequent word-wrapped lines are indented.

The IP command offers you several ways to style a

paragraph, as shown in the illustration on the next page.

ACTION S ettin g a P aragraph In d en t.

To set a paragraph indent:

1. Move the cursor to start of the line you wantindented,

or to a previous line. (See Note #2 below.)

2. For example, to indent the first line 10 spacesand the

rest of the entire paragraph 5 spaces:

Type: [ED ip 1 0 , 5 0

Result: The IP command is embedded in the text as a

triangle. All paragraphs which follow are indented,
until another IP command is encountered.

3. To discontinue paragraph indenting:

Type: (E U ipS

Result: All subsequent lines are not indented. The

command « IP0.0» is inserted into the text.
P age W i d t h
n rria n « tfe B tfu ii* «m u « !]

C O M P A R IS O N O F P A R A G R A P H IN D E N T S

Example of IP 5,0. This is a paragraph with a normal

indent; the first line is indented five spaces while the
remaining lines are not indented. This IP command is
embedded in the above triangle.

Example of IP 10,10. You can also indent entire

paragraphs from the left margin like this using
the IP command.

Example of IP 5,10. Similarly, you can do a hanging

indent, where each paragraph hangs down from the
first line. Some people call this a negative
indent.
▲A
Be Inventive] Example of IP 0,20 with TS 20. You can
use hanging indents in novel ways such
as this, where the title sits out in the
left margin. After typing the title,
you tab over to the start of the
paragraph. Each line in this paragraph
word-wraps back to column 20. When
writing the manuscript for this XyWrite
Reference Guide, we used these two
commands to achieve the hanging indents
that you see.

Example of IP 0,0. This paragraph is an example of text

without indents. Notice the paragraph is up against the
left margin of text.

¿ft:.?". V.S.S
Tes
- - «

4-124
CO M PARISO N O F PARAGRAPH IN D E N TS

▲
Example of IP 5,0* This is a paragraph with a normal
Indent; the first line is indented five spaces while the
remaining lines are not indented. This IP command is
embedded in the above triangle.

▲
Example of IP 10,10* You can also Indent entire
paragraphs from the left margin like this using
the IP command.

A
Example of IP 5,10* Similarly, you can do a hanging
indent, where each paragraph hangs down from the
first line. Some people call this a negative
indent.
▲▲
Be Inventive! Example of IP 0,20 w i th TS 20* You can
use hanging indents in novel ways such
as this, where the title sits out in the
left margin. After typing the title,
you tab over to the start of the
paragraph. Each line in this paragraph
word-wraps back to column 20. When
writing the manuscript for this XyWrite
Reference Guide, we used these two
commands to achieve the hanging indents
that you see.

▲
Example of IP 0,0* This paragraph is an example of text
without indents. Notice the paragraph is up against the
left margin of text.
m * m m

NOTE #1 Technical D escription. The way IP m ,n works is:

• m determines the amount of indent for a line which
is preceded by a hard return.
• n determines the amount of indent for a line which
is not preceded by a hard return (a line which is
word-wrapped).

NOTE #2 Im m ediate Effect. To make the IP command take

effect on the same line on which it rests, make sure
there is no text or spaces ahead of it on that line. (Only
other embedded triangles can be placed ahead of it.)

N o te #3 O m itting a Value. If you do not specify one or the

other value in the IP command, the missing value is
interpreted as a zero. Thus, IP 5 is equivalent to IP 5,0;
and IP , 10 is equivalent to IP 0,10.

N o te #4 Embedded Command. IP is an embedded command

— it is embedded in text, visible as a triangle in Normal
Display. In the Expanded Display, IP would appear
embedded in the text — for example: « IP5,10»

NOTE #5 Default Indented Paragraph Settings. You can also

set up IP using the DEFAULT command (in the
STARTUP.INT file or the Printer File). The default is
IP 0,0 (unless you use the DEFAULT command to
change it).
u g jK s & % p

B3T$ nl,ii2,n3,.. Set

. - -'’¿.^rT ab Reset
B3RT x ' - . J " - - ' V - '• Relative Tab
nl ,n2,n3 are column numbers for tab stops (0-2:
x Is ON or OFF
r
—
Maximum of 21 tab stops are allowed in the TS
command. . • •:/ '"
••
TS, “ TRi and RT
'
are embedded
Tifau"’ ' ~
commands.
.r,.^ - '■ ' ’
.. '

.
P urpose The TS (Tab Set) command sets tab stops in your text. A
tab sto p is a pre-set column position to which the cursor
moves when you press the tab key.
Four kinds of tabs are available: Left Flush, Right Flush,
Center Flush and Decimal. They are described
extensively later in this section under "Flush Tabs."
The TR (Tab Reset) command resets tab stops to the
default settings — that is, 8, 16, 24, and so on (unless you
have used the DEFAULT command to change them).
The RT (Relative Tabs) command lets you specify
whether the tabs are relative to the left margin (RT ON)
or not (RT OFF). The default is RT OFF. To set relative
tabs for all files, use DEFAULf RT-1 in STARTUP.INT
(see Default in Chapter 6).
We’ll cover the following three procedures:
• Creating Tab Stops (TS)
• Changing the Tab Stops
• Resetting the Tab Stops (TR)

ACTION C reating Tab S top s (TS).

To create a new set of tabs:

1. Move the cursor to the point in the text where you

want the tab settings to begin.
2. Enter the TS command. For example, to set normal
tabs at 3, 6 and 9 spaces in from the left margin:
Type: [F5]ts 3 , 6 , 9 0
Important — don’t insert spaces after the commas.

4-126
 Result: The TS command is embedded in the text,
displayed as a triangle. The tabs take effect from that
point forward, until another TS triangle is encountered
or until the end of the document.

3. (Optional) If you want to be able to change the left

margin and have the tabs move right along with it,
specify relative tabs:
Type: |?5]rt OnCT
Result: If you view this command in expanded mode,
you’ll notice it appears as « R T 1 » (not « R T O N » ) .
Similarly, RT OFF appears as « R T O » .

The Ruler. The ruler indicates the tabs (and margins)

which are in effect at the location of the cursor. As you
move the cursor down the screen, each time you pass a
Tab Setting, the ruler changes to indicate the new tab
settings.

Using Several TS C om m ands. You can put as many

varied TS commands as you like throughout your
document. Typically you would use them for different
formats — perhaps one for paragraphs, another for tables
where you have data in columns.

C h an g in g th e Tab S top s.
To add, delete or move tab stops in an existing TS
triangle:
1. Move the cursor to the TS embedded triangle which
contains the tabs you want to change.
2. Press: [Ctrl] [F9
Result: This switches to the Expanded Display,
revealing the tab settings — for example:
«TS3,6,9»
Add, delete or change the tab numbers to the new tab
settings you want.
Press:
Result: This returns you to Normal Display. The new tab
settings are now in effect following the command.

4-127
 L(3&uß!9l

A ction R esetting th e Tab Stops (TR).

To reset the tab stops to their default settings:

1. Move the cursor to the point in the text where you

want the default tab settings to begin.

2. Type: [FSltrfcjl

Result: The TR command is embedded in the text. The

default tab settings take effect at this point. The original
default settings are 8, 16, 24 and so on. You can use the
DEFAULT command to change these settings.

NOTE #3 Embedded Commands. TS, TR, and RT are embedded

commands. They are embedded in text, visible as
triangles in Normal Display. In Expanded Display they
are shown expanded — for example: <<TS3,6,9>>

NOTE #4 Default Tab Settings. You can also set up TS using the
DEFAULT command (in the STARTUP.INT file or the
Printer File). The default is TS 8,16,24, . . . and so on, to
168 (unless you use the DEFAULT command to change
it).

Note #5 Flush Tabs. XyWrite provides you with the following

four kinds of tab stops (illustrated on the following page).
The first three all follow the same rule:

►Normal Tab — Aligns text flush left against the

specified tab stop. (Also known as a flush left tab.)
Example: TS 10

< Flush Right Tab — Aligns text flush right against the
specified tab stop.
Example: TS 30R

T Flush Center Tab — Centers text on the specified tab

stop.
Example: TS 20C

0 Decimal Tab — Lines up acolumn of numbers on

their decimal points. Example: TS 20D

4-128
EGBufflJ]

F L U S H TAB
S E T T IN G S

10
TS 10

California
Michigan
Ohio
Colorado
Washington

20C
TS 20C
1 .
California
Michigan
Ohio
Colorado
Pennsylvania

30R
T S30R
L*i ■••2 «■
a California
Michigan
Ohio
Colorado
Washington

TS 20D

4-129
 [ggfoiílP -U -

NOTE #6 The Tab Key. The tab key on the keyboard gives you
control over movement of the cursor and text:

Tab If you press the tab key in the middle of

text, the text (and cursor) moves one tab
to the right. (A tab character is entered
invisibly into the text.) In Overstrike
mode, a character is deleted.

Ctrl Tab Moves the cursor to the next tab without

moving the text along with it. (A tab
character is not entered into the text.)

Shift Tab Moves the cursor to the previous tab

without moving text.

To move text back one tab space, use the I Backspace! key to
delete the tab character.

Once you have tabbed the cursor over to the last tab,
pressing the tab key moves the cursor only one space at
a time.

NOTE #1 The Tab Character. When you press the tab key, the
character ASCII 9 is entered invisibly into the text. Even
though you can’t see the character, you can treat it like
any ordinary character — for instance, you can delete it
and search for it. To execute the search, press [F5], type
se /, press the [Tab] key, type another /, and press £3.

NOTE #8 Related Commands. XyWrite also provides the flush

commands FL (Flush Left), FR (Flush Right) and FC (Flush
Center); they position all the text between the margins on
all lines following the command. They should not be
confused with the flush tabs.

4-130
 i w iF n s * > r* jiiS 7 » j ■

I ntro When you print documents, you often want special

control over your printer. With XyWrite you can cause
your printer to stop on a given line or at the end of
specified pages and have it prompt you when it’s
completed its job. You can also request special features
from your printer (using the PC command), such as
feeding sheets from either of two paper bins.

CONTENTS Page Section Command

4-132 Pause & Prompt PA, PR

4-133 AutoPause AP, NP
4-134 Printer Control PC

4-131
 v |n a n ¡f.i'jySfHr
: FORMAT EDPA message Pause
message J i i ^ ^ ^ P r o m p t
:i|M _ ^ .-.T-T.-----J!-.,, -~"-T ~_
___
___ST"'^ v't
IT'

S ^ ^ ^ f T h e s e are embedded commands.

PURPOSE PA (Pause) stops the printing of a file .at the point the PA
command is embedded in the text, and displays its message
on the prompt line. You press \±\ to continue printing.

PR (Prompt) displays a message on the prompt line

during the printing of a file without stopping the printer.
When XyWrite encounters PR during printing, it displays
the message and continues to output to the printer. The
message is removed when you strike the next key (or
when the next PR or PA message is encountered).

You can insert PR in your document to monitor the

progress of a remote printer. Include a message such as
"Printing is complete" at the very end of your document.

You may want to use these commands to provide a

reminder of what should be done when the printer stops
— to change a printwheel, insert a different kind of paper
(such as letterhead), or change a ribbon.

ACTION C ausing th e P rin ter to P au se.

To cause your printer to stop and display a message:
1. Move the cursor to the point in text where you want
the printer to stop.
2. Type: dUpa In sta ll Ita lic Printwheel0
Result: When you print this document, it automatically
stops at the point where the PA command is embedded
in the text — the message "Install Italic Printwheel"
appears on the prompt line. Press the plus key (T) to
restart the printer.

You enter PR in the same way you entered PA in Step 2

above. The only difference is that the printer will not
stop printing when it displays its message.

ALSO See Related Commands. The P option in TYPE filename,P

stops the printer after each page.

4-132
 r ;T Ï Ï Œ I £ I Ï K i® :

JA P _ ; -- AutoPause

TOUM03 aajLNraj
bsinp ; Wo Pause •cTT’
r’
l' ~i-üsufe&tërl

These are embedded commands.

P urpose AP (AutoPause) causes a document to pause at the end

of each page. You resume printing with [+]• You can
embed the AP command wherever you want the pause to
begin.

NP (No Pause) defeats AutoPause. You use it after an AP

command to allow the document to once again print
continuously without pausing.

A ction In sertin g P age P au sin g.

To cause a document to pause at the end of certain
pages:
/" \ 1. Move the cursor to the page you want pausing to
begin.
2. Type: [H ]a p 0
3. Move the cursor to the page you want continuous
printing to resume.
4. Type: [F5]np0

Result: When you print yourdocument, it prints without

stopping until it reaches thepage containing the AP
command. When the printer stops, press [+] to resume
printing. Printing stops after every page until it reaches
the NP command — it then continues printing without
stopping.

N o te #1 Embedded Commands. AP and NP are embedded

commands — they are embedded in text, visible as
triangles in Normal Display. In Expanded Display they
are shown expanded — for example: «A P».

NOTE #2 Related Commands. The AP command causes the

printer to pause exactly the same as the P option with the
TYPE command. The difference is that AP is embedded in
the document, while the P option is not. With AP you
can cause some pages to pause and others not to pause.

4-133
ig g f iT n r a iR y iir e f lB lir tE

EftPC ^ J Printer Control

# is the row number in the Printer Control table
"Corresponding to the control string you want to send
PC is an embedded command. " -1 -• -W-m,:i
Jriitag*r^rL: w'oHfWSJjafc
1- ' ’ ’’ ■ Jd : -•;.T l' S

P urpose PC (Printer Control) allows you to send control strings to

the printer. These strings are defined in a Printer Control
table you specify in the Printer File. (See Note #1.) The
PC command allows you to control features of your
printer from within the text file being printed. For
example, a multiple-bin sheet feeder on a printer needs
control codes to switch bins. With PC commands in your
mail-merge letter file, the printer automatically switches to
letterhead or envelope bins as needed.
K

A ctio n In sertin g a P rin ter C o n tro l String.

This procedure assumes that you have already created a
Printer Control table in your Printer File and that this
table contains, in row 3, the code to activate Bin B.
Let’s assume your printer is normally set up to print on
letterhead paper from Bin A (for page 1). You want to
switch to Bin B, which has plain paper, for pages 2 and up.
1. Move the cursor to the point in your document where
you want to activate Bin B — that is, to the start of
page 2. (Place the cursor ahead of any text or spaces
on that page, although other embedded commands
can be ahead of the cursor.)
2. Enter the PC command along with the row number of
the string that you want to send.
Type: [Fs]pc 3 0
Result: When you print your document, the code to
switch to Bin B is sent to the printer at the top of page 2.
You could include a PR (Prompt) command to flash a
message on the prompt line, to remind you what the PC
command is for.
N o te #1 P rin te r C ontrol Table. The PC command requires that
a Printer Control table be set up in your Printer File. This
table contains the codes that control the printer, such as
switching paper bins, changing ribbon color, or ejecting a
page. Each control string is a separate line. See the
Printer File section of Chapter 6 for more details.
4-134
 l i f t f i T f r a n 'E r g i M

P urpose PI allows you to send control strings directly to the

printer. Unlike the PC (Printer Control) command, which
references strings that are defined in the PC table of the
printer file, the PI command contains the actual control
codes. XyWrite does not respond to these control codes;
it simply passes the codes to the printer when you use
the TYPE command.

ACTION In sertin g a P rin ter C on tro l String.

Let’s assume you are using a Corona laser printer. Like
many laser printers, the Corona has its own commands
for drawing rules and boxes. To insert a rule, say
between two tables:

1. Move the cursor to the point in your document where

you want to insert the rule.

2. Enter the PI command along with the printer-specific

control code for drawing a rule. For a Corona laser
printer:

Type: [ft] p i @rule 100,100 2 0 0 0 ,1 1 0 :0

Result: When you TYPE your document, the code to

draw a rule is sent to the printer.

4-134A
 |in.filename,dep\
r“^.-* •*!%«

A is the vertical

;;;• vrtTnj«r:T*j
iOwtefi
M<>y%.>

PURPOSE The IN (Include) command allows you to have the

contents of another file (one created on XyWrite or on
another software system) merged into your document
when you send it to the printer. The separate file can be
a graphics file, a spreadsheet, or even another text file,
but it must be output ready. That is, it must be formatted
for output to the specific printer that you’re using. For
example, it you want to “include” another XyWrite file,
first create a formatted version of the file (using TYPEIO,
and specify the name of the formatted version with the IN
command.
For XyWrite to maintain the proper page-line count, you
must specify the depth or amount of vertical space
required by the foreign file, including white space above
and below it. Specify this depth using the vertical
measurement unit in effect for your document. Typically,
this unit is a line, or 1/6 inch. To insert a 3-inch graphic
into your document, you must specify a depth of 18.

ACTION In c lu d in g A n o th er F ile.
To merge another file into a XyWrite file for printing:
1. Display the XyWrite file on the screen.
2. Move the cursor to the point where you want the
graphics file to be inserted.
3. Type: HU in orgchart,12[5]
Result: An embedded triangle appears in your file,
indicating the point where ORGCHART will be
inserted when you print your document. The P-L
indicator reflects the 12 lines reserved for ORGCHART.
NOTE P rin te r Settings. If the foreign file contains codes that
change a printer setting, you have to use the PI (Printer
Insert) command in your document to reset the printer to
its original state after the foreign file has been output.

4-134B
 8 I5 2 J S »

I ntro A style is a set of embedded format commands (such as

left margin, right margin, tabs and offset) defined together
under one name. This allows you to standardize your
own formats, and facilitates switching between them.

You might define one style for letters (and name it

LETTER), another for memos (MEMO), still another for
reports (REPORT), and so forth. Once you define styles
by name (using SS), you can recall them (using US) by
name. You can also define a set of ordered styles and
use them by simply saying next style (NS) or previous
style (PS).

C ontents Page Section Command

4-136 Save Style SS

4-138 Use Style US, NS, PS
 S »

FORMAT 03SS name,nm=n,nm=n,nm=n,.. Save Style

|8öjj§p8£-'--- -'W* is the two4efter.hame of the'command (see below).

■%i:K ” (equal sign) separates the name from the value. =-*=■• „
n is the value of the commaiSgJ||g g a
Eg»-- . , (comma) separates the commands.
¡ j j ^ ^ j j SS is an embedded command.

PURPOSE ss (Save Style) saves the current default settings under a

name you specify. Once you define a style with SS, you
use the US (Use Style) command at any point in text
where you want the style to take effect.
The SS command in fact does more than save the settings
you specify in the command. It also saves all of the other
current settings implicit at that point in the document,
including all of those listed below.
When you later invoke US LETTER, you will be recalling
all of the format settings saved by the SS command.

Normally, you embed the SS command at the beginning

of a document and refer to it with the US command
throughout the document. Thus, you can standardize on
styles you use regularly — one style for letters, another
for reports, and still another for outlines.

You can specify for nm any DEFAULT setting. For

example:
AL Automatic leading MD Any character mode
AP Autopause NJ No justification
FD Form depth NP No pause
FC Flush center OF Offset
FL Flush left PL Page length
FR Flush right PT Print type
HY Hyphenation RM Right margin
IP Indent paragraph SP Set page number
JU Justification TP Top margin
LL Line leading TS Tab settings
LM Left margin
LS Line spacing

4-136
A ctio n S avin g a Style.
To set up a style definition:

1. Go to the top of your document:

Press: [CtrO|Home}

2. Type: [F5]ss letter>lm=8,rm=65,md=nm,ip=5,0[7i1

Result: This defines a style named LETTER with a left

margin of 8, a right margin of 65, normal character mode,
and an indent of 5 at the first line of each paragraph. To
make use of this style, it is necessary for you to invoke it
with the Use Style command.

NOTE #1 Style W ithin Same Docum ent. The Save Style

command must be in the document that uses it. While it
is an embedded format command, it cannot be set up as
a default.

NOTE #2 Placing the SS Command. The SS command does not

need to be at the very beginning of the file, so long as it
is placed before the first Use Style (US) command that
invokes it.

A lso See Related Commands. The set of format commands given

on the previous page (LM, RM, TS, etc.) is the same set
used by the DEFAULT command. For more information,
see the DEFAULT command in Chapter 6, Customizing.

4-137
ffeRMAT S3 US nam e Use Style ''- N
S3 n s Next Style
ffl ps Previous Style
nam e is the name of the style you. want to use — it must
■ have been defined previously with the SS command,
jp.IrilB'lj
rr - - . . :• ■■ .T'T*’’“; '

These are embedded commands.

i«*». ujr^ic - _ J r ’
-VT- 7 "¿Zl'"--

P u r po se The US (Use Style) command invokes the style called for

by the name. The name must be previously defined
(somewhere in the same document) with the Save Style
(SS) command.
Once you have defined several styles, you can change
styles without calling them by name. Knowing their
sequence in the document, you can invoke either the Next
Style (NS) or the Previous Style (PS). This is especially
useful for outlines with many levels.

A c tio n U sin g a S tyle b y N am e

To call a style by name:
1. Move the cursor to the point in text you want to start
a new style.
2. Enter the US command along with the name of the
style you want. For example:
Type: |5]us l e t t e r ®
Result: The style named LETTER takes effect at that point
in the document. For US to work, LETTER must be defined
earlier in the document with the SS command.

4-138
 ACTION U sin g N ext S tyle a n d P rev io u s Style.
/" "\ Before starting, assume we have set up a series of styles
called HEAD, SUBHEAD, and TEXT (in that order) with
three SS commands.

Next assume that we have given a US HEAD command to

format our first heading. To use the next style, which is
SUBHEAD:

Type: [F5lnsCT

Result: At the place we embed this command, the

SUBHEAD style becomes the new format of the
document. To use the TEXT style:

Type: & S 0

Result: Now the style is changed to the TEXT style. After

typing text, when you come to a point where you want
, to use the SUBHEAD style again:

Type: [F5]ps0

NOTE Inserting Other Format Commands. When you give

new format commands that you want to affect large parts
of the document (such as LM, RM or IP), be aware that
they are superceded by the next US, NS or PS command
that follows. We recommend you include these in the SS
command — in fact, the more format commands you can
include, the more predictable your results will be.

4-139
N otes

4-140
INTRO To ensure readability of your printed page when you are
mixing fonts of different sizes, you must take into account
the vertical spacing you are using. Vertical spacing of
type is measured from the baseline of one line to the
baseline of the next. This measurement is commonly
referred to as lead or leading. Printers allow leading to be
adjusted in very small increments, as illustrated below.

C ontents Page D escription Command

4-142 Vertical Spacing

4-145 Automatic Leading AL

V e r t ic a l
4-147 Extra Leading EL
4-148 Line Leading LL
4-149 Line Spacing LS

S p a c in g
s

The amount of space between lines is known as leading.

There is no set rule to follow. Too much leading can
sometimes be as bad as not enough. Type faces with

The amount of space between lines is known as leading.

There is no set rule to follow. Too much leading can
sometimes be as bad as not enough. Type faces with

The amount of space between lines is known as leading.

There is no set rule to follow. Too much leading can
sometimes be as bad as not enough. Type faces with

a s s ........... m s
4-141
Vertical Spacing

Purpose XyWrite gives you a variety of options for defining and

changing the leading values. Some of these options
involve settings in the Printer File w hile others involve
em bedded com m ands. Because of the close link betw een
the Printer File settings and the em bedded com m ands, w e
discuss both here.

There are three settings in the Printer File that affect

vertical spacing:

• Minimum vertical spacing unit (VS)

• Vertical m easurem ent unit (VU)
• Automatic vertical leading (VL)

The first tw o settings w ork with the em b ed d ed vertical

spacing com m ands to tell the printer exactly how much
vertical m ovem ent is required. The third setting,
autom atic vertical leading, provides the correct leading
value for w hatever font you are using — a valuable tool if
you are using different type sizes within a docum ent.

A brief description of each of these settings follows. For

m ore in-depth descriptions o f Printer File settings, refer to
C hapter 6.

M inim um V ertical S pacing U nit (VS). Each printer has

a minimum vertical spacing unit that it can move. For
exam ple, the m inimum vertical m ovem ent of many daisy­
w heel printers is 1/48 inch, while for m ost laser printers it
is 1/300 inch. The VS (Vertical Spacing) table in the
Printer File contains the printer codes to create
increm ents of this m inimum vertical m ovem ent.

V ertical M easurem ent U nit (VU). The next value you

need to consider is the unit you are going to use for your
vertical m easurem ents. A typical vertical m easurem ent
unit is a line, w hich is equal to 1/6 of an inch. Some
people prefer to w ork in points, w hich is equal to 1/72 of
an inch. O nce you decide on this unit (by specifying VU),
you must use it for all com m ands that involve vertical
m easurem ents (including PL, FD, TP, BT, PG), not just for
leading com m ands.

4-142
LGEd

The VU (Vertical Unit) setting in the Printer File defines

the number of minimum vertical movements the printer
must make to equal one of the vertical measurement units
you are using. For example, assume you are using an
Epson printer that has a minimum vertical movement of
1/216 inch and you want to make your vertical
measurements in lines (1/6 inch). The Epson printer must
make 36 minimum vertical movements in order to move
the desired 1/6 inch (1/216 x 36 = 1/6). If you choose to
work in points (1/72 inch) rather than lines, the VU
setting would be 3 (1/216 x 3 = 1/72).

Whenever you issue a vertical leading command,

XyWrite takes the value you specify in the command and
multiplies it by the VU value. The product of this
calculation is the number of incremental steps (defined in

Sp a c in g
the VS table) that are required to output the correct
leading.

(The VU setting in the Printer File also contains values for

screen display and precision. These values are discussed
in Chapter 6.)

Automatic Vertical Leading (VL). The third vertical

spacing setting in the Printer File is VL. This setting,
which is part of the Font Table, defines two values: the
total leading associated with each font and the amount of
leading that is output before a line. VL is used in
documents that contain text in a variety of point sizes.

Remember that when you install XyWrite, your Printer

File is already set up with standard values for your printer
— you don’t have to worry about it. And calculations for
the printer instructions are transparent to you — they
happen in the background when you use the TYPE
command. The descriptions presented above are
designed to help you understand the kind of information
that is stored in the Printer File so that you can use the
’ Vertical Spacing commands effectively.

4-143
 There are four Vertical Spacing commands described on
the following pages:

• Automatic Leading (AL)

• Extra Leading (EL)
• Line Leading (LL)
• Line Spacing (LS)

Each of these descriptions uses lines as the vertical unit of

measurement. Remember that a line is 1/6 of an inch.
When we use the term to refer to this specific
measurement, we italicize it to avoid confusion with
number of lines of text.

We have chosen to use lines in our examples because

they are the most commonly used vertical measurement
unit on printers, but don’t forget that you can modify
your Printer File so that you can use other units of
vertical measurement.

4-144
A \M .

iloRMAT EJAL n Automatic Leading . f l J W&S&

L -.
n is 0 (off) or 1 (on| ^ f e r-
AL is an embedded command.
_ „ _ _ __________

PURPOSE The AL command turns automatic leading off and on.

When you turn automatic leading on, the vertical spacing
values are supplied by the Font Table in the Printer File.
When you turn automatic leading off, the vertical spacing
values are supplied by the LS (Line Spacing) command.
The AL setting also affects the baseline calculations.

V e r t ic a l
The baseline is an imaginary line on which the characters
rest. When you are mixing point sizes within a
document, the location of the baseline becomes critical; if

Sp a c in g
you don’t allow enough space between lines, the
characters on one line touch the characters on the
previous line. XyWrite automatically performs the
baseline calculations for you based on the maximum
leading value of each line. The formulas for the
calculations differ slightly, depending on whether
automatic leading is on or off.

When automatic leading is on (AL 1), XyWrite looks at the

VL setting for every font in a line to determine the
maximum leading for that line. The VL setting in the Font
Table of the Printer File contains two arguments. The first
argument defines the total leading associated with a font;
the second argument defines the amount of leading that
should be output before the line of text is printed.

Once XyWrite has determined the maximum leading

associated with a line, it looks at the second argument in
the VL setting. If the second argument is 0 or is omitted,
XyWrite outputs 2/3 of the maximum leading value be­
fore the line of text and the remaining 1/3 after the line.

3
1/3
Composition M
SEL,* SH O U LD ER

4-145
r f ln o T iiE i f l a g ü ü

If the second argument in VL does have a non-zero value,

that value defines the amount of leading that takes place l
before every line of text on a page. The value of this
argument is then subtracted from the maximum leading
value (which is defined by the first argument) to
determine the amount of leading after each line of text.

When automatic leading is off (AL 0), XyWrite uses the

value supplied by the LS command and multiplies it by
the Vertical Unit (VU) defined in the Printer File to
determine the amount of space output between lines.
(See the Overview of this section for a description of VU).
The VL setting is ignored.

To summarize, the AI command has two settings:

• AL 0 means that automatic leading is OFF and the LS
command is honored.
• AL 1 means that automatic leading is ON and the ^
vertical spacing values in the Font Table of the Printer ^
File are honored. All LS commands are ignored.

A ction S electin g A u tom atic L eading.

If you are using a laser printer and mixing point sizes
within a document, you probably want to use automatic
leading. That way, you don’t have to worry about
adjusting your line spacing to accommodate larger and
smaller point sizes. To turn automatic leading on:

1. Move the cursor to the top of your document.

2. To turn AL on:

Type: [F5]al 1 @
Result: All text that follows the AL command
automatically uses the leading values defined in the Font
Table of the Printer File.

NOTE Default Setting. You can turn automatic leading on and

off using the DEFAULT command in the STARTUP.INT
file, in the Printer File, or on the Command line. The
XyWrite default is 0 (ofD.

4-146
LÜH. IW B M H a y n ^ :

BQEL n L -h ^Extra Lead

n is the number pfjines to insert after the current line.
(This number can be expressed in decimals as small
as hundredths.) In this context, a line is 1/6 inch.
EL is an embedded command. ......

P urpose EL inserts the specified amount of vertical space only

once, at the end of the current line. You must issue this
command again for each line that needs extra lead.

A ctio n In sertin g E xtra Lead in a F ile.

V er u c a l
To insert extra lead in a file:

1. Move the cursor to the line after which you want extra

Sp a c i n g
leading.
2. Type: [re]el 1.25(^1
Result: When you print the file, an extra 1-1/4 lines of
space will appear once, after the line where you inserted
the EL command.

NOTE Vertical M easurem ent Unit. This description uses lines

as the vertical measurement unit. When used in this
context, it means 1/6 of an inch, not one line of text. To
avoid confusion, we have italicized the word when it is
referring to the unit of measure.

4-147
I
lí^ r^ ru rT i;* H R .

E3JLL p,l Line ¿eading -

?*y " ü .fi^M-rf-.,'^<^ * ‘?g~ " " ¿ m tS '.1*-'- •_.'r- -y ^ y ^ r‘?! ;T^ ~ £ * ^ ¡ ¡ZLse;:*15a« •■/ ^ ~ ""“ var:...:........................ —* —- - —rrr

p is the amount of extra space between paragraphs

/ is the amount of extra space between lines of text
Both values are expressed in lines. The numbers can be
S» expressed in hundredths ( Olí of a line. In this ..„¿f:
context, a ine is 1
1 LL is an embedded command.
I*sw?» «JfewAtSUna*-.»-/’ 'ta» rrw ~ .,ar-i« i . JiSaBt^osr'SSiSS':-•- W h '

PURPOSE LL allows you to automatically insert extra space between

paragraphs. It also allows you to modify the leading
values for a document without changing and reloading
the Printer File. Note that the values you specify are
added to whatever leading value is in effect.

ACTION In sertin g E xtra V ertical S pace.

To automatically insert an extra line between paragraphs
and an extra 1/4 line between lines of text:

1. Move the cursor to the point where you want the

extra vertical spacing to begin (normally between
paragraphs).

2. Enter the LL command with values for extra spaces

between paragraphs and between lines:
Type: [F5]ll 1 . . 2 5 0

Result: When you TYPE the document, the interparagraph

spacing (spacing between paragraphs) will be increased
by 1 line and the interline spacing (spacing between
lines) will be increased by 1/4 line. This spacing remains
in effect for the rest of the file or until you issue a
different LL command.

NOTE Vertical M easurement Unit. This description uses lines

as the vertical measurement unit. When used in this
context, a line means 1/6 of an inch, not one line of text.
To avoid confusion, we have italicized the word when it
is referring to the unit of measure.

4-148
IK S -

M
IBUIlS n Line Spacing
P »
n is the number of lines advanced by the printer (This
number can be expressed in decimals as small as
hundredths.) Ip this context, a line is 1/6". §
LS is an embedded command.
ife S S Ia
P urpose LS (Line Spacing) sets the number of lines advanced by a
printer at the end of every line.

The LS command enables you to write a document

single-spaced, but then very easily print it out double­

V ertical S p a c i n g
spaced, triple-spaced, etc.

• LS .25 is quarter-line spacing

• LS .5 is half-line spacing
• LS 1 is single spacing (the default)
• LS 1.5 space-and-a-half spacing
• LS 2 is double spacing

A ctio n S ettin g th e L ine S p acin g.

To set the number of lines of spacing output by the
printer at the end of every line:

1. Move the cursor to the top of your document (or to

the point you want to change the line spacing).
2. Enter the LS command along with the line-spacing
value you want:

Type: [F5]ls 2 0
Result: This embedded command tells the printer to
double-space this document. Go ahead and use TYPE to
print the document.

Note #1 Vertical M easurem ent Unit. This description uses lines

as the vertical measurement unit. When used in this
context, a line actually means 1/6 of an inch, not one line
of text. To avoid confusion, we have italicized the word
when it is referring to the unit of measure.

4-149
NOTE #2 Default Line Spacing Setting. The default is LS 1 unless
you use the DEFAULT command to change it. You can
set up the DEFAULT command in the STARTUP.INT file,
in the Printer File, or on the Command Line.

NOTE #3 On-Screen Line Spacing. The LS command normally

does not affect the spacing you see on the screen as you
type. (The exception is column tables, which always
show true line spacing.) If you want the display to reflect
the current line spacing, enter the setting LF-1 in the
Printer File. To restore the on-screen display to single
spacing, enter LF=0. You can also use the DEFAULT
command to set on-screen line spacing.

NOTE #4 A utom atic Leading. When Automatic Leading is in

effect (AL 1), XyWrite ignores LS commands and uses the
line spacing information from the VL setting in the Font
Table of the Printer File.

4-150
 Special Features

I ntro O nce you've learned the basics, it’s time to go on to the

extended capabilities of XyWrite. W e include step-by-
step procedures for each o f the following topics.
Com mands are listed following each procedure.

C o ntents Page S ection

5-2 O verview
5-5 C olum ns
5-17 Fill-In Form s
5-25 Mail M erge
5-43 Table o f C ontents & In d ex
5-67 U ser P rogram m ing
5-83 U ser P rogram m ing, A dvanced

5-1
O verview Block Diagram

5-2
Block Diagram O verview

Table of Contents User User

& Index Programming Programming - Adv.

5-3
5-4
 C o lu m n s

Intro The C olum ns feature o f XyWrite provides tw o basically

different kinds of colum n features: C olum n Tables and
N ew sletter Style Colum ns. In both cases, text w ith in a
co lum n word-wraps w ithin its ow n colum n. These
tw o m ethods are designed for different purposes:
C olu m n Tables. Think of this as a spreadsheet for text.
You can create up to sixteen colum ns on-screen, w ith as
many tex t entries in a colum n as you want. (A text entry
can be any length.) You can add or delete text in any
“cell” w ithout disturbing any o f the other cells. This
w orks great for handling blocks of text, such as in lists,
calendars, appointm ent books, and even screenplays (each
stage character gets his/her ow n colum n).
N ew spaper-Style C olu m n s. In this case the text wraps
fro m the bottom o f one colum n to the top o f the n e x t —
hence the term “snaking.” You create your file as a single
colum n and print it in up to six columns. This is useful for
printing long lists, reports or new sletters.

Contents Page Section Command

5-6 C olu m n Tables

5-8 Colum n Table Commands CT, CO, EC
5-11 Editing Column Tables Shift s
Shift s
Shift Ins |
S h ift! Del |
Shift | m
5-13 Snaking C olum ns SN

5-5
Column Tables

P urpose Suppose w e w ant to set u p a schedule of events in w hich

w e have the days stretched across the top and activities
listed dow n the page. See the accom panying illustration.

Notice this table is m ade u p o f a num ber of text blocks,

or "cells." This is very m uch like a spreadsheet for text.
You can enter as m uch or as little text in each cell as you
w ant w ithout disturbing the other cells. The text within a
cell is considered an "entry."

M aking a T ext Table. The way to m ake such a table is

described in the next few pages. To summarize:

• Create th e C olu m n Structure. Use the CT (Column

Table) com m and to define the colum n widths. You
can also define a format style for each column.

• Enter th e Text. Then you enter the text into the

table. Certain keys allow you to add rows to the table
and to m ove about, from cell to cell.

NOTE P la n n in g Y our Table. Before you start, plan the

num ber of colum ns that you need. If you know how
many rows will be in the table, then add them, also,
before starting the text entry (using IShiftIfins]). Details on
this follow in the description of Editing Column Tables.

5-6
(amt'd) Column Tables

COLUMN TABLE

Co lu m n s
ROW COLUMN
OF TEXT OF TEXT
Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Friday

9:00 AM Bus //I from Breakfast Breakfast Breakfast

Atlanta

10:00 AM Bus //2 from Paint the ! Hike to Clean up

Charlotte barn and I top of Mt. the camp
mow the ■Monadnauk
grass

11:00 AM Assemble Chop

campers for firewood
orientation

12:00 AM Lunch Lunch Lunch on Lunch Lunch

top
2:00 PM Swimming Swimming Find lost Pottery Swimming
hikers workshop
Make ash
trays
4:00 PM Counselors Tennis Swimming Tennis Load
Practice campers on
CPR the buses
and move
'em out

5-7
Column Table Commands CT, CO, EC

F o rm at S3 CT o ff set,width 1 ,width2, . . . (O ption 1)

S3 CT o ffset,w id th l/style 1 ,w idth2/style2, . . . (O ption 2 )
o ffset shifts the horizontal position of the table from the
left margin.
w id th l is the w idth of the first colum n of text,
w id th 2 is the w idth of the second colum n of text,
and so on up to 16 columns.
/sty le i is the format style for the first colum n,
/style2 is th e form at style for the second colum n,
and so on up to 16 columns.
CT is an em bedded com mand.

P u r p o se The CT (C olum n T able) com m and sets up the basic

structure for the colum n table. You define the colum n
w idths and, optionally, the styles for the columns.
The maximum num ber of colum ns you can specify is 16.
N otice for the value o ffset that the left m ost position (n o
offset) is 0 (zero). The am ount of space betw een colum ns
of text is 1 by default. You can increase this space w ith
format com m ands — see “Creating a Column Tabic w ith
Styles” w hich follows.

A c t io n C r e a tin g a C o lu m n T a b le .
(Option Î ) To insert a colum n table into a docum ent, enter CT along
with an offset for positioning the table horizontally, plus
the w idth for each column. All num bers are m easured
along the ruler. For example:

Type: [F5lct 0 , 2 0 , 1 0 , 1 0 0

Result: This sets up a three-colum n table; the first colum n

runs from 0 to 18, the second from 20 to 28 and the last
from 30 to 38. Between the colum ns are gutters one-
space w ide at positions 19 and 29. (Notice that this
com m and em beds fo u r triangles into the text — CT, C 02,
C 0 3 and EC. See Note #2.) To add rows of cells to the
table, as in the previous illustration, press 1Shift| fins].

5-8
(cont’d) Column Table Commands

NOTE #1 T yp in g in Text. You do not need to set u p the num ber

o f lines of text in each cell row beforehand. Simply enter
text w h en you’re ready; XyWrite automatically pushes
dow n the low er boundary of the w hole row to fit it.

ACTION S e ttin g t h e F o r m a t f o r S in g le C e lls.

As in the previous procedure, the CT com m and
establishes the overall colum n widths. In addition, if you
w ish you can set up an entire text format within an
individual cell as you w ould with any docum ent — using
the LM (Left Margin), RM (Right Margin) or other format
com m ands within the cell boundaries. Because each cell
is independent of the others, other cells are unaffected.
Let’s see an example.

O nce you have created a colum n table, to change the

format within a single cell:

1. Move the cursor to the cell you w ant to change. To

get there, use IShift 10 or I Shift 10 to m ove left or right.

2. Position the cursor within the cell at the point w here

you w ant to change the format. Enter the format
com m and you want. For instance, in the previous
exam ple, the text w idth was 19- To m ake the text
narrower, you can change the right margin within the
cell:

Type: [F5]rm 1 5 0

Result: This changes the format within a single cell. To

modify an entire column, follow the next procedure.

5-9
Column Table Commands (c o n t’d )

ACTI0 N Creating a Colum n Table w ith Styles.

(Option 2) To create a colum n table with styles:

1. Use SS to define the style you w ant within a colum n.

W hen using colum ns, RM 10 m eans set the right
m argin ten spaces from the left edge of the cell. For
exam ple, create a style called BODY:
Type: [re]ss body.lm=2,rm=10CT
2. Create the colum n table, assigning the style to the
colum n(s) you want:
Type: OUct 0,20,10,10/bodyS
Result: The style BODY is assigned to the third colum n of
text.

NOTE #2 T h e CO an d EC C om m an ds. Entering the CT com m and

autom atically enters other com m ands w hich define the
bounds of the colum ns. In the exam ple, w hen you
entered the CT com m and you also em bed the com m ands
C 02, C 0 3 and EC. If you count the cells going from left
to right, row by row:
CT stands on the line preceding the table.
C 0 2 separates the first and second cells of each row.
C 0 3 separates the second and third cells of each row.
and so on...
C O l separates the last cell in a row from the first cell
in the next row.
EC indicates the end of the very last cell.
C O l is present only if there is m ore than o n e row of
cells.
NOTE #3 E n terin g th e CO o r EC C om m an ds. While you can
enter the CO an d EC com m ands from the com m and line,
you should not. The CT com m and does so for you
automatically. You should instead use IShift Iffnsl to add new
colum ns.
NOTE #4 In sertin g C olu m n T ables W ith in T ab les. XyWrite does
not allow nesting of one colum n table w ithin another.

5-10
 Editing Column Tables

FORMAT IShift <•- Move Cursor O ne Column to the Left

Shift - H Move Cursor O ne Column to the Right
Shift Homel Move to Top of the Current Cell
Shift End Move to Bottom o f the Current Cell
Shift Dei D elete a Row of Cells
Shift Ins Insert a New Row of Cells
IShiftl IF11 Define the Current Cell
These are all im m ediate commands.

P urpose You use these keystrokes to m ove around and edit within
colum n tables. Refer to the previous illustration "Column
Tables". Think of the colum n table as a grid of cells.
The table is very similar to a spreadsheet, except the cells
have variable length.
The text in any cell can m n as long as you w ant — the
cell will automatically grow in length to accom m odate the
text. (O ther cells in the same row of cells will grow
along with the longest cell.)

A c tio n A d d in g a R o w o f C e lls t o a C o lu m n T a b le.

To add a new row of cells to an existing colum n table:
1. Move the cursor to the row o f cells above w here you
w ant to insert the new row.
2. Press: Shift Ins
Result: A new row of em pty text cells is inserted below
the current row. The cursor m oves to the first position of
the em pty cell below. W ithout m oving the cursor, you
can begin typing text into that cell.

Note C han gin g th e W idth o f a C olum n. To change the

w idth of a colum n in an existing colum n table, m ove the
cursor to the em bedded CT com m and. Press [CtH] [F9] for
Expanded Display and change the appropriate colum n
width num ber. W hen you return to Normal Display, the
colum n w idth is changed and the row d epth altered to fit
the text in the row.
Changing colum n size is easy; adding new colum ns is
not. If y o u ’re unsure how many colum ns y ou’ll need, it’s
best to over-estimate; em pty colum ns will be ignored
during printing.
5-11
Editing Column Tables (cont’d)

T ip B uild in g a C olu m n Table. W hen building a table, it is

useful to add all the rows you anticipate needing before
you begin your text entry.

A ctio n M o v in g /C o p y in g T e x t f r o m O n e C e ll t o A n o t h e r .
To m ove or copy text from one cell to another:

1. Move to the cell you w ant to m ove or copy.

2. Press: Shift F1

3. Move to the target cell.

4. Press [F7J to copy or [F8J to move the text.

NOTE #1 D efin in g T ext W ithin C ells. You can use [fT] (define a
block of text) or (f4] (define by line) or [Att] [r] (define by
w ord), but defining by sentence and paragraph is
restricted.

NOTE #2 U sin g C olu m n F u n ction s O utside a Table. If you use

the colum n functions outside the colum n table, they have
no effect. These functions can be used only w hen the
cursor is betw een the pair of com m ands CT (Column
Table) and EC (End Column).

NOTE #3 S im p le C olu m n s w ith H an gin g In d en t. If you have a

one-line header or num ber to the left of a paragraph
(such as the style o f this note), it may be easier to use the
IP (Indent Paragraph) com m and rather than the CT
com m and. For example:

1. Move to w here you w ant to begin.

2. Type: [F5]ip 0 ,1 6 0 1

3. Type: [F5]tS 1 6 0

Result: You can start each paragraph w ith a heading (of

u p to 15 characters) follow ed by a Tab — the paragraphs
hang at colum n 16.

5-12
SN Snaking Columns

fo r m a t SJJ SN cl,c2,c3,c4,c5,c6 Snaking

c l is the starting position of 1st colum n of text,
c2 is th e starting position of 2nd colum n of text,
and so on, up to c6.
, (co m m a) separates the values.
This is an em bedded form at command.

EXAMPLE SSsn 5,40

P u r p o se The SN (Snaking) com m and sets up single-column text to

print in m ultiple colum ns (u p to 6 ) on a single page. The
unique property h ere is the tex t wraps from the bottom of
each colum n to the top of the next.
See the accompanying illustration. For example, suppose
you have a telephone list of 300 people that w ould take 6
pages to prin t out as one long, narrow list. You can use the
SN com m and to print this list as 6 colum ns on one page.
O r maybe you w ant to print a new sletter w ith tw o or
m ore colum ns side-by-side. the SN com m and enables you
to do that, too.
W hen you specify m ore than one colum n, you will see
only one long colum n on the screen, but the docum ent
prints as m ultiple columns.

A c t io n S n a k in g C o lu m n s .
To print tex t with snaking columns: ( 1 ) Move to the top of
the text (for Steps 1 and 2).
1. Set the right margin w ith RM. This sets the w idth of the
te xt w ithin the borders of the columns. For example:
Type: [re]rin 1 6 0

5-13
Snaking Columns (cont’d)

2. Set u p the colum ns using the snaking com m and SN.

To create colum ns of text starting at positions 10, 30,
and 50:

Type: [re]sn 1 0 ,3 0 ,5 0 1 ^ 1

3. Print the text (with TYPE) or send it to a file (with

TYPEF) to see the m ultiple columns:

Type: [F 5 ]ty p e 0

Result: The printout has three columns, with a 4-space

gutter betw een columns (since the colum ns are 20 w ide
and the text is 16 wide).

NOTE #1 S pacing B etw een C olu m n s. If the spacing betw een

colum ns is too tight, you can either (1) m ake the text
narrow er by moving the margins in with LM or RM
(w hich probably m akes the text longer), or (2) m ake the
colum ns w ider by changing the starting positions of your
colum ns within the SN com m and.

NOTE #2 C olu m n Breaks. W hen you w ant to break a colum n, use

the PG (Page Break) com m and. This causes the text
w hich follows to start at the top of the next column (not
the next page). If you are in the last colum n, the text
starts on the next page.

NOTE #3 C on trollin g C olu m n Length. XyWrite uses the PL (Page

Length) values for controlling the text length within the
columns. Each colum n is treated as a separate page. In
addition, the W idow and O rphan settings are also
observed w hen determ ining the text length.

NOTE #4 F ootn otes. You can add footnotes to your text. They
print out at the foot of the colum n they are referenced
within. Footnotes are counted in the Page Length for the
colum n unless the BF (Bottom Footnote) w as previously
set to 1.

NOTE #5 Full-Page R equirem ent. You cannot start or stop

snaking colum ns in mid-page. In other words, you cannot
include straight text on a page that includes snaking
columns.

514
(cont’d) Snaking Columns

SNAKING COLUMNS OF TEXT - PRINTOUT

Columns
Example: SN 10,30,50

10 30 50
' I 1
I I I
7
I
I
1
1
1
1

All advercts- n o ted , brought

n Act a s la work,
log a g e n c i e s and S i g n i'm Li c a n t such dsufi peri­
pu b l i c i h
re la 1 1 ons changes^ fi u Lh i s odical iWue, ant­
11 rras m i s t often area. hn order hology, encyc­
c u r a m i s s i in o u t s i d e for the d agency, l o p e d i a , i n which
cuallvi pe r s o n s as the c mmission- a number o f c o n c r -
I o us 1st in ing p a ■t y , to ibut ions , co n st-
special >rojects. re t a in he full ituttng separate
The C o p y r i g h t bundle t rights and Independent
Ac t o f 1976 s u b - e id c o ra p a s s e d by works in them ­
s t a n t i a l ,y c h a n g e d copyrigh i t mu s t s e l v e s , a re as -
the rule » concern- 1i rs L b » d e t e r - sembled into a
l n g who o wn s t h e mined ha t the collective whole.
copyrigh in such wor k t h a w i l l be A " c o r a p i 1a t i o n " i s
comaii a s i o n e d p e r f o r m e 1 by L fie d e f i n e d a s a wo r k
w o rk s The comm i s . s i lied p a r t y f o r m e d by t h e c o l ­
present article fits l ilt o o n e o f l e c t i o n and ussern-
w ill 8 t forth the t < 1 lowing b llng o t p re-
S o m e b a s i c categori s : existing materials
d e f i n i t Lons and or of data that
i m p o ■ L h n t 1) a cn r r i but ion are selected, co­
gui d e - 1 i n rs i n a p - to a ollective o r d i n a t e d , or a r ­
proachln [ ty p ic a l work ranged in such a
C 0 a m i s s i o n 2) a par o f a mo- way th a t the
s i t u a c i o is. tion i c t u r e or r e s u l t i n g wor k as
Firs of a l l , o t he audio- a whole consti­
one si 0 u 1d be visua wo r k t u t e s an o r i g i n a l
a w a r e tl at. i n t h e *) a tra slat(on work of author­
e m p l o y e r ■ e mp l o y e e 4) a sup lemeutary ship. A "supple­
s i t ua c to i, it is wo r k m e n t a r y work" i s a
we 11 - e s a b L i s h e d 5) a com ilation wo r k p r e p a r e d f o r
th at the copyright 6) an in t ruct ion- publication as a
i n any v or k p e c - d l Le t secondary adjunct
toraed by the /) a ces t o a wor k by a n ­
employei , w i t h i n 8) answ r aater- other author for
t h e s c o, e o f his ia Is or a test t h e p u r p o s e of i n ­
e m p 1oyn e n t , be- 9> an at as troducing , c oc­
longs c o the cluding , i l l u s t r -
employer Thcs categor- ating, explaining,
I n t le c ommi s - ies are e t out in r e v i s i n g , comment ­
sioned ituation , Sect ton 01 o f t h e ing upon, or as­
however, di f lere nt Copyrigh Ac t of s i s t i n g In t h e use
r u l e s ai p l y . The 1976. o f t h e work, suc h
e n a c t m eti C o f the A "< ollective as f ore w o rds .
ne w Copy i g h t A c t , work" i defiued a f ce r w o r d s , p i c -
it sh by t h e :opyrUht torial ill ustr-

K y

5-15
5-16
 Fill-In Forms

_ I ntro XyWrite provides you w ith the ability to fill in pre-printed

forms — or create your ow n forms to fill in. Typical
forms are questionnaires, surveys, tax forms, credit
applications, and invoices — any sheet that needs to be
filled in with information.

This section begins with a general procedure for filling in

pre-printed forms and then describes the com m ands.

F ill -In F o r m s
C o ntents Page S ection C om m an d

5-18 Fill-In Form s P rocedure

5-18 Creating the Form File
5-21 Filling In the Form

C om m ands
5-23 New Form NEF
5-24 Call Form CAF

5-17
Fill-In Forms Procedure

P urpose The best place to start is by looking at the illustration on

the next page. A typical scenario is this:

F illing in a P r e p r in te d Form . You might start w ith a

pre-printed form like the one show n. You w ish to feed
this into your printer and fill in the blanks using XyWrite.
This procedure is easy:

• Create th e Form File. You create a Form File to

match your pre-printed form.

• Fill In th e Form File. To fill in the pre-printed form,

you type into the blanks o f the Form File you created.
You then print onto your pre-printed form.

A ctio n C r e a tin g t h e F o r m f ile .

To create a Form File, do the following:

1. Print th e Grid. (O ptional) Print the file GRID.FRM

onto an extra copy of your pre-printed form (See Note
*2 — GRID.FRM is provided on your original XyWrite
disk.) Do this as follows:

Insert an extra copy of your pre-printed form into

your printer. Note the position o f the form as you insert
it, so that later you can insert other pages the same
way.

Type: [£5]type grid.frm

Result: A grid pattern of num bers overwrites the p re­

printed form, giving you coordinates for Step 3. (If
the pre-printed form has non-standard vertical
spacing, you can insert printer control codes directly
into GRID.FRM to m ake the pages coincide.)

5-18
(cont'd) Fill-In Forms Procedure

FILLING IN A PRE PRINTED FORM

PRE-PRINTED FORM MASTER FILE

F ill - I n F o rm s
NAME-
STREET.
C U T __
STATE. ZIP_

FILLED-IN FORM WORKING FILE

N A M E - -B .e t 5 Y R o s 5

STREET ^ ^ Flag St.

r i T y Ph i 1a d e 1ph l a
STATE P ß Z IP ! 9 1 2 3

5-19
Fill-In Forms Procedure (cont’d)

Start a N ew File. O pen a new file. Let’s call it

MASTER:

Type: [F5]new m a s te rfu l

D up licate th e Pre-Printed Form . Now duplicate the

pre-printed form by typing it into your com puter as
follows. Using the page you printed in Step 1 as a
guide, enter the text and fill-in areas at the lines and
colum ns indicated:

• Enter the fixed text in Reverse Mode. For

exam ple, to enter the w ord NAME:

Press: [CtrT|4

Type: Name

• Enter the blank fill-in areas in Normal Mode. For

example:

Press: [Ctrl] 1

Press: ISpace Bar

Press the Space Bar as m any times as you n eed to

establish the length of the fill-in area. Do not use
the Tab key (it will not w ork properly with NEF or
CAF).

Repeat the previous tw o items until you have entered all

the text and fill-in areas. W hen you have finished the
Form File, store it:

Type: [F 5 ]s to re 0

Result: You are now done creating a blank fill-in form.

This is our master template.

5-20
(c o n td ) Fill-In Forms Procedure

ACTION F illin g i n th e F o r m
To fill in a pre p rin ted form using th e Form File you
p ro d u ced earlier (in “ C reating th e Form F ile” ):
1. C reate th e W ork in g Form . Make a w orking copy
of the Form File. Let’s call this co p y WORKFORM.
Type: (re] net work form.master@

F ill - I n F o r m s
Result: You have created a new form w ith spaces
w aiting for you to fill in. N otice that th e cu rso r is
confined to m ove only in the fill-in areas.
2. Fill In th e B lanks. Fill in th e blanks of this
w orking copy by typing into them . For instance:
Type: Betsy Ross
Result: This Form File looks like:

N otice th e w ords “ NAME” , “ ADDRESS” , “ STATE” ,

and “ ZIP” are fixed text; you cannot alter them .
You move the cursor from one field to the next
w ith the @ (Enter) key.
3. P rin t th e F orm s. Finally, insert the pre-p rin ted
form into your prin ter. Be sure to position the
p ap er the same as you positio n ed th e page you
p rin ted the grid o nto (in “ C reating the Form
File” ). Print the inform ation from th e w orking
form:
Type: [re] type 0
The fixed text w ill not print; only th e inform ation
en tered in th e blanks (d u rin g Step 2) is p rin ted .

5-21
Fill-In Forms Procedure (cont d)

NOTE #1 Edit a Form File. If you sh o u ld ever need to call u p a

Form File to change only the tex t in the fill-in areas, use
the CAF com m and. For exam ple, if the form is nam ed
WORKFORM.
Type: [re]caf workform£j]

NOTE #2 u s in g th e File GRID.FRM. To locate the fill-in areas of

your p re p rin ted form, w e provide a file called
GRID.FRM. You p rin t the follow ing grid o nto an extra
copy of your p re p rin ted form:
Line 1 78901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Line 3 78901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

NOTE #3 C arriage R eturn. If you en ter th e carriage return 0

in Norm al Mode, th e length o f th e blank area w ill be
flexible, adjusting to the length of the text being
en tered — even if it is several lines. If you en ter the
carriage retu rn in Reverse Mode, it fix e s th e length of
the blank area.

NOTE #4 C reate Y our O w n F orm s. In the earlier p ro ced u re,

the fixed text did not print. You can cause the fixed
text to be p rin ted by using [Ctrl] 2 (Boldface) o r [Ctril 3
(U nderline) for fixed text instead o f [Ctri]4 (R everse).
W hen you p rin t the Form File, the fixed text w ill print
o u t in the C haracter Mode you choose — eith er bold or
underline.

NOTE #5 P rin ter File R eq u irem en t. All XyWrite Printer Files

com e p rep ared for prin tin g on pre-printed form s —
they are set up to n o t p rin t any text displayed in the
Reverse Mode. (Each character displayed in Reverse
Mode is p rin ted as a space.) Your Printer File is
originally set u p w ith the follow ing statem ent:
MD RV* <-
As usual, if you rem ove or re insert this statem ent, the
change d o esn ’t take effect until you re load the p rin ter
file w ith LDPRN.

5-22
NEF New Form

fo rm a t S3 NEF d .w o r k fo r m , d: m a ste rfo rm

w o rk fo rm is th e nam e you specify for th e new form.
m a ste rfo rm is th e m aster Form File that you w ant to
copy from.
NEF is an im m ediate com m and.

F i ix - I n F o rm s
P urpo se NEF (N ew Form) creates a w orking copy of th e m aster
Form File. This copy is a new , blank form, ready for you
to fill in.
NEF functions the same as NEW, ex cep t NEF prevents
you from altering any text w hich is not in Normal m ode
in clu d in g Reverse, U nderline, or Bold — this is fixed text.

A c t io n S ta r tin g a N e w F ill-In F o r m f r o m a M a s te r
To start a new fill-in form (say, INVOICE 1) from a
m aster (called MASTER):
Type: [rejnef invoiced master @
Result: This creates a new file called INVOICE 1
and co p ies the contents o f MASTER into it. XyWrite
w ill not create a new file if one w ith th e same nam e
already exists on the specified drive.

5-23
Call a Form CAF

F O R M A T G Q c A F d :w o rkfo rn
tv o rk fo rm is th e nam e o f a form
CAF is an im m ediate com m and

PURPOSE CAF (Call Form) calls a Form File from th e disk to the
display for changing o r adding to the inform ation in the
fill-in areas.
Any fixed te x t (Reverse, U nderline, or Bold) cannot
be altered. (To m odify fixed text, use the CAUL
com m and instead.)
If you prefer, you can use EDF (Edit Form) instead of
CAF; EDF is just an o th er nam e for CAF.

ACTION C a llin g a W o r k in g F o r m
Call the Form File you w ant to fill in. For exam ple, if its
nam e is TAXFORM:
Type: [F5]caf ta xfo rm H
Result: This file is ready for you to revise in the fill-in
areas. (N otice the cu rso r is confined to the fill-in
areas.)

NOTE A n y File is a W ork in g Form . T echnically, a n y file

can be called u p as a w orking form w ith CAF. W hen it
is, the cursor m oves only in areas that are displayed in
Normal m ode — not into areas that are Reverse,
U nderline or Bold.This points o u t that w hat confines
th e cursor is the m a n n e r in w h ich you call the file
(CALL or CAF), rath er than anything special about the
file itself.

5-24
 Mail M erge

In tr o This section fully describes th e Mail Merge features of

XyWrite. We begin this adventure w ith an overview and
then a co m p lete exam ple. You can m odel your ow n
m ail m erge application after this exam ple, and should
have to read little else of this section.

Contents Pas e S ectio n C om m an d

5-26 Mail M erge P ro ced u re
5-26 Purpose
5-28 Part I. Create th e Main File
5-29 Part II. C reate the Data File
5-32 Part III. Print the Finished Versions

M ail M erge
5-34 Mail M erge C om m an d s
5-34 Put Field PF
5-37 Field Identification FI
5-39 Print to P rinter TYPE +
5-39 Print File to Screen TYPES +
5-39 Print File to Disk TYPEF +
5-40 Mail M erge S ep arators
5-40 Record Separator RS
5-40 Field Separator FS
5-40 C om m ent Separator CO

5-25
Mail Merge Procedure

PURPOSE What Is Mail Merge? Mail Merge enables you to create

multiple versions of a document more easily than you
could create them manually, one-by-one. You could, for
instance, create a dozen individual letters from a general
form letter (Main File) and a dozen addresses (Data File).
To print the dozen letters, you issue a single command
(TYPE+), which merges the addresses and form letter as it
prints them.

W liy Use Mail Merge? Mail Merge removes the tedium

of typing many versions of a document. Mail Merge is
useful when creating many nearly identical documents
which are personalized at critical points such as name,
address and salutation. These can include letters,
contracts, notices, and statements.

Mail Merge requires you to learn only two new

commands: Put Field (PF) and Field Identification (FI).
The following instructions should allow you to use Mail
Merge when you want to, not just when you need to.

The procedure for Mail Merge has three parts, as

illustrated in the accompanying figure.

• Part I. Create the Main File — this is the form letter

— it contains the text which is common to all finished
versions, along with fields that indicate where records
data should be inserted.

• Part II. Create the Data File — it contains the

records. This information is inserted into the fields of
the Main File to make each version individualized.

• Part III. Merge and Print the Finished Versions —

This is where you combine and print the file created
in the two previous steps. You use only the simple
command:

TYPE datafile+mainfile

5-26
 (cont'd) Mail Merge Procedure

MAIL MERGE
Part II. Create the Data File Part I. Create the Main File
(File name: DATA) (File name: LETTFFt)

} C lie n t Data

B etsy Ross Dear

two
bolts ot red cloth
$17.7b
We would lik e to inforw you th a t your
P e te r C o t t o n t a i l
+ check for has been received,
one d oze n
carrots
and we have s hi d uou the requested
$1.75

Mias M u lle t
one pint X
c u rd s and whey >
$.83

M
!

Parti I. Merge and Print the Finished Versions

TYPE DATA + LETTER

Version 1
Version 2
o
o Version 3
o
o
o
OOOOOCOOOOOOOOOÜOUOOOOO

o Dear B e ts y Ross:
o We would l i k e t o i n f o rm
o
o you t h a t y o u r c h e c k f o r Dear P e t e r C o t t o n t a i l :
o $ 1 7 . 7 6 h a s b een r e c e i v e d ,
o and we h a v e s h i p p e d you We would Like t o Info rm
o t h e r e q u e s t e d two b o l t s you t h a t y o u r c h e c k f o r Dear Miss M u f f e t :
Ü o f red c l o t h . $ 1 . 7 5 h a s b een r e c e i v e d ,
o and we h ave s h i p p e d you We would l i k e t o In fo rm
o t h e r e q u e s t e d one dozen you t h a t y o u r c h e c k f o r
o c a rro ts. $.85 has been r e c e iv e d ,
Ü and we h av e s h i p p e d you
o t h e r e q u e s t e d one p i n t
o c u r d s and whey.
o
o
o
o

You generate the finished versions with the TYPE t command. This com m and inserts the data from
each record (in the Data File) into the fields in the Main File.

5-27
Mail Merge Procedure (cont'd)

ACTION C r e a tin g M a il M e r g e D o c u m e n t s
This p ro ced u re has th ree separate parts to it, w h ich w e
list here as one seq u en ce.

PART I l . C reate th e Main File. To begin, open a file and

give it a nam e (w e ’ll use the nam e LETTER):
Type: [Fsjnew le t t e r ®
W rite the tex t you w ant, as in the illustration below .
Use PF (Put Field) to place fields w h erev er you
w ant data to be inserted. To insert th e field
“ c lie n t” , for instance:
Type: (F5]pf c lie n t ®
You may use a field in m ore than one place w ith in
the letter.

MAIN FILE
(File name: LETTER)
Field Identification
((Flclient, quantity, item, amount})

fields

Dear APF:client

life would Tike

L to inform jou th a t fcour check for
has been recel iued, and Ve have shipped
you the requested AP F : q u a n t i t y C P F : i t em

5-28
(cont'd) Mail Merge Procedure

2. A dd th e F ield Id en tific a tio n . This com m and

links th e field n a m e s (created in the previous step)
to th e o rder of fields in th e Data File.
Move the cursor to the to p of your letter, anyw here
ahead of the first field.
Enter the FI com m and and th e field nam es in the
ord er that they w ill appear in th e Data File (rath er
than th eir o rd er in th e le tte r). This may take som e
forethought — you w o n ’t be creating the Data File
u n til Step 5 below .
Type: [fs]fi client,quantity,item ,am ount0
Result: This FI com m and is em bedded in the

M ail M erge
le tte r as a triangle.
3- S tore th e Main File. You have now co m p leted the
Main File, so le t’s store it.
Type: [F5]Store 0

PART II 4. C reate th e D ata File. D ecide on a nam e for

yourD ata File. W e’ll use the nam e DATA, since it
w ill contain o u r c lie n t’s data. (This data w ill
be inserted later into the fields o f the Main File w e
just finished w riting.)
Type: |F5]new d a ta ®
5. T yp e in th e D ata. O u r exam ple starts w ith the
com m ent “ C lient Data” (a sem i-colon at the start of
a line makes it a co m m en t). H ere is one record:
Type: ¡C lient D a ta 0
;0
;0
Betsy Rossf^J]
tw o 0
bolts of red c lo t h 0
$ 1 7 ,7 6 0

5-29
Mail Merge Procedure (co n t’d)

W hen en terin g the data, use these rules:

• Type each fie ld o f data on a separate line;
follow each line of data im m ediately w ith a
carriage return, w ith o u t extra spaces.
• End the last field in a record w ith tw o carriage
returns — this puts a blank line betw een
records. (W hen printing, each record results in
an o th er version of the letter.)
• Identify each com m ent line w ith a leading
sem icolon (;). Any such line is ignored later by
the program .
• End the the last line o f data w ith exactly a
single carriage retu rn (n o m ore, no less) after
th e last entry. (D on’t end w ith tw o carriage
returns, or it assum es an o th er record is to
follow . D on’t om it the single carriage retu rn , or
the last field is ignored.)
6. S tore th e D ata File. You have now co m p leted the
Data File, so le t’s store it.
Type: (r] store 0

5-30
(cont'd) Mail Merge Procedure

DATA FILE

; Client Data com m ent

*
9

;
Betsy Ross field 1
two field 2 record 1
bolts of red cloth field 3
$17.76 field 4

M ail M erge
Peter Cottontail field 1
one dozen field 2 record 2
carrots field 3
$1.75 field 4

Miss Muffet field 1

one pint field 2 record 3
curds and whey field 3
$.85 field 4

5-31
Mail Merge Procedure (corn'd)

PART III 7. P r e v ie w th e F in ish ed v e r sio n s. If you w ish, you

may display th e th ree finished versions o f the letter
on the screen, before p rin tin g them on pap er. Use
the com m and:
Type: [F5]types d ata + le tte r@
w here DATA and LETTER are the nam es o f the Data
File and Main File created in Parts II and I,
respectively.
8. P rin t th e F in ish ed V ersio n s. If the displayed
versions look fine, th en p rin t them w ith th e
com m and:
Type: [F5]type d a ta + le tte r0
A different version of LETTER is p rin ted for each
record it finds in the Data File. The follow ing is the
first o f the th ree finished versions.

FINISHED V E R S I O N

O 1 To
O Dear Betsy Ross: I o
O
o We would like to inform you that your ] 0O
o check for $17.76 has been received, O
and we have shipped you the requested
o two bolts of red cloth. i °
o I O

5-32
(contri) Mail Merge Procedure

NOTE #1 Im porting Data. The Data File could just as well

originate from some other mail list manager or data base
program, such as dBase III or R-Basc, as long as it’s an
ASCII file. If it’s not already in the format of one field to
a line, you can either: (1) modify the Mail Merge
Separators to accept the data, or (2) do a global search-
and-replace on the data file to make it conform to the
Mail Merge format.
NOTE #2 C hanging th e Separators. If you have a special
application, you can change the characters which
separate fields, records and comments. You w ould use
FS (Field Separator), RS (Record Separator), and CO

M ail Merge
(Comment Separator) in your Printer File. These are
described later in this section.

5-33
Put Field PF

FORMAT BOP*7 f i eld Put Field

fie ld is a nam e or n um ber (a nam e is g enerally preferred
over a n u m b er).
PF is an em bedded com m and.

P u rpo se The PF (Put Field) com m and places a field w ithin the
text o f the Main File. Refer to th e illustrations earlier in
this section for exam ples. You en ter th e PF com m and
into th e Main File, specifying eith er a n u m b er o r a
nam e:
03pf c lie n t Creates a field nam ed “ c lie n t” in the
Main File.
0 3 pf 1 Creates a field in the Main File. This
field receives its data from the first field
in each record. Thus, the n u m b er refers
to the position of the field in each
record.

ACTION I n s e r t i n g F ie ld s i n t o t h e M a in F ile
To insert a field into the Main File:
1 As you type the Main File, w hen you reach the point
in the text w here you w ant to place a field, en ter
the PF com m and. Select a general nam e w hich
identifies the field, such as “ c lie n t” , “ item ” o r
“ q u an tity ” ; for exam ple:
Type: [F5jpf c l i e n t ^
Result: This com m and is em b ed d ed in the file as
A.PF: C lie n t. On p rin to u t, the effect o f the PF
com m and is as follow s (using the ex am p le given in
th e previous Mail Merge P rocedure): The field
nam ed “ c lie n t” is replaced in successive
do cu m en ts by: Betsy Ross, Peter C ottontail, and
Miss Muffet.
2. W hen using a field nam e, be sure to in clu d e that
nam e in a Field Identification com m and at the
b eg inning of the Main File.

5-34
(cont'd) Put Field

NOTE #1 F ield N am e. Field nam es are generally preferred over

field num bers because they can make the Main File far
easier to read. You can use field nam es that describe
w hat the field is. See the illustration belo w for an
exam ple. W hen a field nam e is used, th e FI com m and
m ust also be used to link those nam es to th e fields in
th e data records.

NOTE #2 F ield N um ber. Use the field n u m b er w hen it is easier

to refer to a field by its n u m b ered p lace in th e record
(than to assign it a nam e). How ever, field num bers
generally make a d o cum ent harder for others to read
than a nam e w ould. The illustration belo w makes a

M ail M erge
com parison betw een field nam es and field num bers.

FIELD N A M E S

Dear i322EBB:
We would l i ke to infor« you that your check for
4Q 2BSEB ^as teen received, and we have shipped
you the requested i fPF: q u a n t i t y

FIELD N U M B E R S

Dear

We would like to infor« you that your check for

ig fly has been received, and we have shipped
you the requested AgQ

5-35
Put Field (c o n t’d )

The fields obtain their num bers from the order in w hich
they ap p ear in the Data File. Thus, a record to fit the
previous illustration (Field Numbers) w ould have its fields
listed in the following order:

client
quantity
item
am ount

Using field num bers is a shortcut, since no Field

Identification (FI) com m and is needed. The Field
Identification com m and is n eed ed only w hen using field
names.

The previous exam ple using field num bers is given

simply to illustrate the equivalence o f field num bers and
field names. A m ore practical exam ple of field num bers
w ould be one w here you w ere using only a few fields
from a record of enorm ous length. It might be easy to
refer to an item in the record as field num ber 45. (The
alternative w ould be to give field 45 a nam e with the
Field Identification com m and; how ever, the FI com m and
w ould require 44 com m as ahead of the specified field
nam e.)

5-36
FI Field Identification

Format fie ld 1 fie ld 2 , .. Field Identification

fie ld 1 is th e nam e you specify (w ith th e PF com m and)
for th e first field in each record,
fie ld 2 is th e nam e you specify (w ith th e PF com m and)
--'V
for th e second field in each record, and so on.
FI is an em b ed d ed com m and.

P urpo se FI (Field Identification) assigns descriptive nam es to

fields for use in th e Main File. It links the o rd er of fields
in each record to the nam es used in Put Field
com m ands in the Main File. FI is req u ired if you use

M ail M erge
field nam es, b u t not if you use field num bers.

A c t io n E n t e r in g t h e F ie ld I d e n t i f ic a t i o n
Insert th e FI com m and into the Main File as follows:
1. Position the cu rso r at the beginning of the Main
File, ahead o f any Put Field com m and.
2. Enter FI along w ith all fields used in th e Main File,
b u t ordered as they ap p ear in the Data File. Using
th e exam ple given in the earlier Mail Merge
Procedure:
Type: |re]fi c lie n t . q u a n tity , item , amount@
Result: This com m and is em bedded in the text,
displayed as a triangle. The above statem ent w ould
be th e p ro p e r Field Identification statem ent for the
follow ing record:

Betsy Ross (clie n t)

two (q u an tity )
bolts of red cloth (item )
$17.76 (am ount)
N otice that the field nam es are listed in the ord er
that the fields ap p ear in the record, rather than the
o rd er they ap p ear in the Main File. These four
nam es are the nam es w h ich you have used in the
Main File — nam es w h ich identify the fields.

5-37
Field Identification (cont'd)

NOTE #1 a N am e. All fields in a record n eed not be nam ed

in th e FI com m and. You can skip a nam e by leaving its
position blank b u t keeping th e com m as. If, in th e
previous exam ple, your letter m ade use of th e first and
th ird fields b u t n o t the second and fourth, you co uld
specify:
021 f i c lie n t,.ite m

NOTE #2 F ield N um b ers. A Field Identification is not req u ired

in a Main File if you refer to th e fields by n u m b er rather
than by nam e. Refer to the Put Field com m and for
fu rth er details.

5-38
 TYPE + Printing Mail Merge Documents

FORMAT S3 TYPE datafile+ m ainfile,, P To th e p rin ter

S3 TYPES clatafile+ mainfile To the screen
S3TYPEF datafile-\-mainfile,targetfile To a file
datafile is th e Data File (co n tain in g th e reco rd s).
m ainfile is th e Main File (form le tte r).
,,P (o p tio n al) causes the p rin te r to sto p after each page;
resum e w ith ¡±\.
These are im m ediate com m ands.

P urpo se TYPE + m erges data from records into a Main File and
o u tp u ts the results to a printer. The records arc listed in

M ail M erge
a Data File; one docum ent is p rin ted for each record.
See th e previous Mail Merge P rocedure for illustrations.
These three com m ands operate like th e norm al TYPE,
TYPES and TYPEF com m ands you are likely already
fam iliar w ith.
If the Data File is currently displayed, you can om it the
datafile nam e and type:
TYPE + mainfile
Similarly, if the Main File is cu rren tly displayed, you
can om it the m ainfile name and type:
TYPE datafile +
If a block o f tex t is defined, you can use that as the Data
File.

A c t io n P r in t in g M ail M e r g e D o c u m e n t s
W hen you are ready to print the Mail Merge versions, do
th e follow ing:
Enter TYPE using the format given above. For
exam ple, w ith a Data File nam ed DATA and a Main
File nam ed LETTER:
Type: [F5]type d a ta + le tte r0
Result: This statem ent m erges th e records from DATA
into the LETTER as it prints. O nce p rin tin g begins, you
are free to co n tin u e editing o th er files w h ile p rinting
co n tin u es in the background.

5-39
Mail Merge Separators FS, RS, CO

FORMAT FS< s e p a ra to r Field Separator

RS < se p a ra to r Record Separator
CO < sep a ra to r C om m ent Separator
se p a ra to r is th e n ew string o f characters.
FS, RS and CO are P rinter File settings.

P u r po se FS, RS and CO re define the characters w h ich separate

fields, records and com m ents in a Data File. You en ter
these definitions into the P rinter File. All characters
betw een the less-than sign ( < ) and th e carriage return
becom e defined as the new separator.
A typical use is as follows: You w ant to allow your Data
File to use a field nam ed “ address” w h ich inserts three
lines of data (street, city, state). The default Field
Separator (carriage retu rn ) w ould not allow this — it
prevents a field from being m ore than one line. You
co uld re define the field separator to be a slash ( / ) —
that w ould free u p carriage returns to be used w ithin
the field.
FS (Field Separator) re-defines the separator betw een
fie ld s in the Data File. The default is a carriage re tu rn /
line feed — each field on its ow n line.
RS (R ecord Separator) re-defines th e separator betw een
records in th e Data File. The default is tw o carriage
re tu rn /lin e feed com binations — records are separated
by a blank line.
CO (C om m ent Separator) re-defines the ch aracter used
to designate com m ent lines in the Data File. The default
is a sem i-colon (;).

5-40
(cont’d) Mail Merge Separators

ACTION C h a n g in g t h e M a il M e rg e S e p a r a to r s . You can enter all

three separators using this sam e procedure.

1. Call your Printer File; for exam ple, 3EPSONFX.PRN:

Type: [F5]calI 3epsonfx.prnfcj]

2. Enter on its ow n line FS<, RS< or CO< follow ed by

the new ch a ra cte rs) you w ant to define. For example,
to m ake the Field Separator a slash GO:

Type: fs < /0

M ail
3. Type: [FslstoreCT

Merge
4. Type: [fs]Idprn 3 e p s o n fx .p rn 0

Result: Step 4 loads the new separator into memory, in

order for it to take effect. See Note #2.

NOTE #1 Printer File. You enter FS, RS, and CO into the Printer
File. Each of these m ust appear on its ow n line in the
Printer File. After you change a value, you m ust reload
the table using the LDPRN com m and (Step 4 above).

If you use different Mail Merge separators for different

Data Files, you might create a "Printer File" w hich
contains nothing but the three field separators. Keep it
with its Data File, and load it only w hen n eed ed (using
LDPRN). You might call it SEPARATR.PRN (w ithout the
"O", to k eep it eight letters).

The FS, RS, and CO com m ands may not be included in

the Printer Files o n the original XyWrite disk. These
com m ands do not need to be explicitly entered into the
Printer Table until you w ant to change them. (The
default definitions are internal to XyWrite.)

5-41
Mail Merge Separators (cont’d)

NOTE #2 E x a m p le R ecord s. A record w h ich uses the default

field separator looks like:
Betsy Ross
$ 17.76
tw o
bolts of red clo th
If you changed th e field separator to a slash ( / ) , the
reco rd w o u ld now ap p ear like:
Betsy Ross/$ 17 .7 6 /tw o /b o lts of red clo th

NOTE #3 C o m m en t Line. A com m ent takes u p an en tire line;

that is, you cannot p u t a com m ent on the same line as a
field, nor can you insert a com m ent into a field or
record. In o th er w ords, a com m ent is recognized only
before th e first field or after any field or record has been
form atted. A com m ent line begins w ith th e sem icolon
(;) unless you use CO to change it.

NOTE #4 C arriage R eturn / Line Feed. To use a carriage retu rn

or line feed as part of the definition, you m ust en ter
them as follows:
• Carriage Return: [Ait] [Shift! 13
This code appears as a J 3
• Line Feed: [a| [Shift] 10
The code appears as a E

NOTE #5 T yp ical U ses. The Mail Merge Separator com m ands

may be useful w hen you transport a data file from
another program to be used as a Data File for Mail
Merge. For exam ple, if th e Data File you transport uses
different field separators, sim ply redefine FS in your
Printer File. This way you can change Mail Merge to
accom m odate the Data File rath er than vice versa.
You may also use these com m ands to allow a field to be
m ore than one line; that is, change th e Field Separator
(FS) to allow a field to contain a carriage return.

5-42
 Table o f Contents and Index

INTRO With long docum ents such as detailed reports and books,
at times you will w ant to include a Table of Contents or
Index. In this section w e discuss how to generate them.
This discussion begins with basic procedures and ends
with a reference of all the com mands.

CONTENTS Page D escrip tio n C om m an d

Table o f C ontents & In d ex P rocedure

5-44 Generating a Table of Contents or Index
5-46 Terminology
5-46 Part I: Mark the Text
5-48 Part II: Specify the Format
5-50 Part III: Extract the Table of Contents or Index

C om m an ds

Table of Co n t . & I n d e x
5-52 Text Marker XI thru X9
5-53 Suppress Page Num ber EX
5-54 Index Label IL
5-56 No Index NI
5-57 Table of Contents Com mand T1 thru T9
5-58 Index Command 11 thru 19
5-60 Set Record SR
5-61 Leadering LD
5-62 Index Break IB
5-64 Table of Contents Extraction TX1 thru TX9
5-66 Index Extraction 1X1 thru TX9

5-43
Table of Contents &Index Procedure (cont’d)

P urpose The following procedures will enable you to generate a

Table of Contents or Index in a step-by-step fashion. The
procedure is in three parts and begins after a general
overview and introduction of our terminology.

We use the term Table of Contents to m ean any list that is

sorted by page number. We use Index to m ean any list
sorted alphabetically. XyWrite will produce a Table of
Contents or Index for you from the text that you m ark in
your docum ent. There are three basic parts to generating
an Index or Table of Contents. Refer to the following
illustration.

• Part I. Mark th e T ext — Mark the w ords or phrases

you w ant included in the Index or Table of Contents.
Use one of the text markers (XI through X9).

• Part II. S p ecify th e Form at — Specify the format

you w ant using an Index com m and (II through 19) or
a Table of Contents com m and (T1 through T9).

• Part III. Extract th e Table o f C onten ts o r In d ex —

Extract the m arked text and either save or print it:

a. Save the m arked text to a separate file using IX

(Index Extraction) or TX (Table of Contents
Extraction). From this you can print just the Index
or Table of Contents.

b. Print the file with the Index or Table o f Contents

included at the end of the printout. (Use TYPE.)

Let’s exam ine each of these steps in m ore detail.

5-44
(cont’d) Table of Contents & Index Procedure

Table Of C o n t. & In d e x

5-45
Table of Contents &Index Procedure (cont’d)

T erm in ology. We use several terms with m eanings

specific to this section:

• Source File — This is the main docum ent — the

docum ent from w hich you are extracting a Table of
Contents or Index.

• Target File — This is the file to w hich you save the

Index (using IX) or Table of Contents (using TX).

• Marker — Any one of the text m arkers XI through X9-

You mark text in the source docum ent for inclusion
into a Table of Contents or Index.

• Marked Text — The text w hich you m ark for inclusion

in a Table of Contents or Index. You choose one of
the markers (say, X3) and then mark each entry with
it.

• Extract — To copy the m arked text from a source file

into a target file. The text is sorted either
alphabetically (using IX) or by page num ber (using
TX).

ACTION G e n e r a tin g a T a b le o f C o n t e n t s o r I n d e x .
This procedure is com posed of three parts. For m ore
details on any com m and, refer to the latter part of this
section.
PART I Mark th e T ext
To mark w ords or phrases for entry into your Table of
Contents or Index:
1. Call your docum ent to the display (the source
docum ent, that is). Let’s call it CHAPTER.
Type: [rejcall chapter 0

5-46
(cont’d) Table of Contents &Index Procedure

2. You can m ark text in three different ways:

a. S in gle W ord. For each w ord you w ant included
in the Table of Contents or Index:
Move the cursor to the point immediately following
the word.
Type: [F5lx3fcj]
Press: [F3l
Result: The X3 triangle is inserted in the text,
marking the w ord ahead of it. There m ust be no
space (or tab) betw een the X3 m arker and the
word.
(Note: Go to Expanded Display and m ake sure
there are no m ode com m ands — such as
« M D N M » — betw een the text and the X3 marker.

T akle
If there are, m ove the X3 m arker next to the text.
b. Entire lin e . You can m ark any phrase ending with

of
a carriage return — such as a title on its ow n line.

C o n t . & In d e x
The w hole phrase, from m arker to carriage return
(up to 200 characters including em bedded
com m ands), is picked up. The cursor m ust either
be at the start of a line or have a space (or tab)
ahead o f it:

Move the cursor ahead o f a phrase ending with a

carriage return.
Type: [F51X3CT
Press: [f||
c. A ny Phrase. You can also enter a phrase that
d o esn ’t ap p ear explicitly in the text (or is in the
middle of a line). This is especially useful for
alternate entries in an index, w here "red wagon"
appears in the text, but you also w ant to include
"wagon, red." You m ust type in the "wagon, red"
yourself, as follows:
Type: [F5]x3 w a g o n , r e d i a l
3. Repeat step 2 until you mark all text you w ant
included in the Table o f Contents or Index.

5-47
Table of Contents &Index Procedure (cont’d)

PART II s p e c ify th e Format«

At the end of the source docum ent you m ust provide a
format such as the one in the following illustration.

1. Move the cursor to the end of your source docum ent.

Type: [CtiïlfËnd
We m ove the cursor to the end because only the
m arked text above this point will be included in the
Table of Contents or Index.

2. Make sure the cursor is at the beginning of the line.

Enter a com m and T1 through T9 for a Table of
Contents or II through 19 for an Index. In our
exam ple, the text w as m arked with X3 and w e w ant a
Table of Contents, so w e will use T3.
Type: [F5lt3Pl

3. Enter the tw o com m ands SR IX (to place m arked text)

and SR PN (to place page num bers) in the order you
will w ant them positioned on a line in the Table of
Contents. Also include the leadering (LD) betw een
them, if you wish, and any margin (LM, RM) or other
format com mand.
In our exam ple w e w ant the m arked text placed at the
left, a leader com posed of periods, and the page
num ber o n the right. (Be sure to include a space
betw een the LD com m and and the period.)
Press: [F5]sr i X 0
Type: [F5]Id . 0
Type: [re]sr p n 0

A nother SR com m and, SR CH, gives you the option to

set the chapter num ber and page num ber together,
such as 2-35. See the Set Record com m and later in
this section.

4. Press: [ r a ] 0
5. Type: [ F 5 ] s to r e 0

5-48
(cont d) Table of Contents &Index Procedure

EXAMPLES OF SPECIFYING FORMATS (T# and I#)

These first two examples show how you might list a Table of Contents (using
T3). Notice in the second figure that the spaces around the LD command
creates spaces at either end of the leader.

«T3 «SRIX»«LD. » « S R P N » »
M arked Text Leadering Page No

P e n g u i n ........ ..................... .5
B a b o o n ............................... 18
Zebra, ...... ............... 25
A a r d v a r k ............................. 32
G o r i l l a .............................. 47

Table Of C o n t. & In d e x
«T3 «SRPN» « L D.» «SRIX» »
Page No. Leadering M arked Text

5 ...................................... Penguin
18 ...................................... Baboon
25 ....................... Zebra
32 .................................... Aardvark
47 ..................................... Gorilla

Here is an example of the same marked text listed as an Index (alphabetically,

using 13).

« 1 3 « SR IX » « L D . » « S R P N » »
M arked le x t ^ Leadering Page No.

Aardvark ................................. 32
Baboon ...................................... 18
Gorilla .................................... * 47
Penguin ...................................... 5
Zebra ................... 25

5-49
Table of Contents &Index Procedure (cont’d)

PART III Extract th e Table o f C on ten ts o r In d ex

Let’s review w hat w e have done so far to m ake a Table of
Contents or Index. In Part I w e used the X3 m arker to
mark the w ords and phrases that w e w anted included.
Then in Part II w e provided a format for the Table of
Contents, using the T3 com m and (for an Index w e w ould
have used the 13 com m and).
Now that everything is set up, w e have a choice of tw o
ways to output the Table of Contents or Index.

a. Extract an d Save to a Separate File

If you wish to revise your Table of Contents or Index
before printing it, you may w ant to save it in a
separate file.
Enter the appropriate com m and TX1 to TX9 (Extract
Table of Contents) or 1X1 or 1X9 (Extract Index) — in
our exam ple w e will use TX3, w hich extracts only the
text m arked by X3. To extract text from CHAPTER
and save it to a file w e call CONTENTS:
Type: [re]tx3 c h a p te r,c o n te n ts ^
Result: XyWrite extracts the m arked text and page
num bers according to the format w e specified in Part
II. It saves this text to the file nam ed CONTENTS. If
you w ere to omit a nam e for the target file, XyWrite
w ould place the Table of Contents into a file called
TABLE3 (corresponding to m arker X3). To view the
Table of Contents, type CALL CONTENTS.

b. Print th e Source File an d Table o f C ontents

To print the entire docum ent including its Table of
Contents, simply print the source docum ent (here,
nam ed CHAPTER). (Unlike Step a above, this
procedure does not save the Table of Contents or
Index to a file.)
Type: [F5]type c h a p te r ^

To suppress the Table of Contents or Index w hile printing

the source docum ent, enter the NI (No Index) com m and
at the top of your source docum ent.

5-50
(cont’d) Table of Contents &Index Procedure

NOTE #1 In d ex Entry W ithout Page N um ber. You can create an

index entry that has no page num ber by using the EX
(End X-Marker) command. This is a convenient w ay to
refer your reader to another entry in the index. For
exam ple, you might have an entry like "Dog...See
Animals" in the index. You might also use the EX
com m and w hen you w ant to have an index entry that is
only a header under w hich you list subentries (see Note
#2). For details on how to use the EX com m and, refer to
"Suppress Page Numbers" later in this section.

NOTE #2 Subentry U nder A noth er Entry. You can place one

entry under another by using an IL (Index Label)
com m and. For exam ple, you can place "Dog" u n d er
"Animals." You can even have sub-subentries like "Collie"
under "Dog." For details on this procedure, refer to
"Index Label."

Table of Co n t . & I n d ex
NOTE #3 A utom atic Separators. The IB (Index Break) com m and
automatically places letters in your index to separate
w ords starting with one letter of the alphabet from w ords
starting w ith the next. The IB com m and also lets you
control the format of these letter headings or insert other
separators. Refer to "Index Break" later in this section for
m ore information.

NOTE #4 C on cise Sorting. After sorting your index, XyWrite

removes duplicate entries (with sam e w ord or phrase and
page num bering) and com bines multiple page num bers
o n one line, separated by a com ma and space. For
exam ple, if the entry "Computer" is indexed on pages 7,
16 and twice on 24, its listing will read:

Computer 7, 16, 24

NOTE #3 C ustom ized Sorting. If you wish to have your index

sorted in a different order than that provided by XyWrite
default, you can create your ow n sorting table. Refer to
Chapter 6 for details.

5 51
Text Marker X I thru X9
o

format EElx# Text Marker

# is any digit between 1 and 9.

This is an embedded command.

P urpose Use Text Marker commands XI through X9 to mark text

for a Table of Contents or Index. There are nine markers
to allow you to create up to nine sets of marked text.
You can mark one set of text using XI, a second set with
X2, and so on. You might use XI for a Table of
Contents, X2 for an Index, and X3 for a List of Figures.

You have the option of sorting the marked text in

alphabetical order as an Index or in page order as a Table
of Contents.

You can mark any amount of text as a single entry in a

Table of Contents or Index. You do this by typing in the
text along with the X command. If you enter the X
command with no text, it marks the single word to its
immediate left or up to a carriage return to its immediate
right.

A ction M arking T ext

To mark text, follow the procedure given earlier in "Part
I: Mark the Text."

N o te #1 Two Lists From One Marker. You can generate a Table

of Contents and an Index from the same set of marked
text. That is, from X3 you could use both 13 and T3.

NOTE #2 Temporary Files. When you TYPE, TYPEF or TYPES a

file, separate temporary files are created to accumulate
the text for building an Index or Table of Contents.

5-52
EX Suppress Page Number

FORMAT GJ|e x

EX is an em bedded com m and.

P urpose The EX (End X-Marker) com m and allows you to create an

index entry that has no page num ber. You can use such
entries as titles under w hich you list other entries (see
"Index Label") or as cross-references to other entries.

A ctio n C re a te C r o s s -R e fe r e n c e
W hen you w ant to refer your reader to a different entry in
your index:

1. Enter a Text Marker com m and followed by the index

entry and the cross-reference information:

Table
Type: [F5]x2 0

of C o n t. & In d e x
Type: F olios, See Page Numbers

2. Enter the EX com m and to suppress the page num ber.

Type: [F5lexCT

3. Close the window .

Type: F3

Result: W hen you print your index, the entry "Folios,

See Page Numbers" will ap p ear w ithout a page
number.

5-53
Index Label IL

FORMAT BOIL Index Label

IL is an embedded command.

P u r p o se The IL (Index Label) com m and allows you to have an

index entry ap p ear as a subentry under another entry.
The text that appears within the IL com m and is not
printed; it is used only for sorting.

Include the IL com m and as part of the X com m and w hen

you are m arking text.

ACTION c r e a t in g S u b e n tr ie s .
To create an index that contains the entry "Animals" with
a subentry of "cat" and a sub-subentry of "Siamese":

1. Move the cursor to the start of the docum ent and

enter the m arker for the major entry "Animals."
Type: fF5lx2M
Type: Animals

2. To suppress the page num ber for this entry, enter the
EX (End X-Marker) com m and before you close the
w indow.
Type: [E H e x S
Press: [F3]

Result: W hen you process the index, the entry

"Animals" will ap p ear w ithout page numbers.

3. Move the cursor to the point in the text that contains

the first subentry and enter the m arker for it.
Type: fF5lx2CT
4. Enter the Index Level com m and along with the text of
the entry under w hich you w ant this subentry to
appear:

Type: [F5]il Animals!^]

5-54
(cont’d) Index Label

5. Type a tab and then the text of the subentry:

Type: [Tab] Cat

6. Close the screen by pressing (F3 .

7. Move the cursor to the point in the text that contains

the next subentry or sub-subentry. Let’s assum e that
this time w e w ant to mark the sub-subentry "Siamese."

Type:

T ype: m i Animals [Tab] Cat M

T ype: [Tab] [Tab] Siamese CT

Press: F3

Table
8. Repeat this procedure until all entries and subentries

of C ont. & In d e x
have been marked.

Result: W hen your index is processed, the following

entries will appear:

Animals
Cat, 7, 11, 15
Siamese, 11

5-55
No Index NI

Form at ffilNI No Index

N1 is an em b ed d ed com m and.

P u rpo se The com m and NI (No Index) prevents the p rin tin g of
an Index or Table of C ontents w hen you use TYPE or
TYPEF. It has no effect on Index Extraction (IX) or
'Fable of C ontents Extraction (TX) to a separate file.
You use this com m and w hen you w ant to p rin t your
do cu m en t w ith o u t the Table of C ontents or Index also
being p rin ted . The NI com m and overrides any Table of
C ontents com m and (T1 - T 9) or Index Com m and (II -
19).

A c t io n U s in g t h e NI C o m m a n d
To suppress a Table of C ontents or Index w hen prin tin g
th e source d o cu m en t (using TYPE or TYPEF), en ter the
NI com m and as follow s. At the to p o f your source
docum ent:
Type: (F^ni^j]

NOTE E m b ed ded C om m an d . NI is an em bedded com m and.

It is em b ed d ed in text, visible as a triangle in Normal
Display. In Expanded Display it is show n ex p an d ed as
«NI».

5-56
T1 thru T9 Table of Contents Command

FORMAT BUT# Table o f Contents Com m and

# is any digit betw een 1 and 9.

T1 through T9 are em bedded com m ands.

P urpose Each Table of Contents com m and T1 through T9 is an

essential part of generating a Table of Contents. The T1
com m and produces the Table of Contents for text m arked
by X I , T 2 for text m arked X 2 , and so on up to T9-
Let’s use T3 here as an example. W hen you enter a T3
com m and in your docum ent, the Table of Contents is
printed along with the docum ent w hen you use TYPE (or
TYPEF). You use the T3 com m and to do the following:
• To specify the format. You type in the format of your
Table of Contents as part of the T3 com m and. For

T able of C o n t . & I n d e x
example, you can define your format as being m arked
text on left, leadering consisting of periods, and page
num ber on the right. This w ould require using SR IX,
LD and SR PN, as follows:
«T3« SRIX» « LD.» « SRPN» »
• To place the Table of Contents into your docum ent.
W hen you print your docum ent (using TYPE or
TYPEF):
a. The m arked text is accum ulated from the start of
the docum ent dow n to the location of T3 (and no
further). Thus, the position of the T3 com m and in
your docum ent is im portant — normally you place
it at the end of your docum ent.
b. This accum ulated text is kept in its page-order
sequence (proper for a Table of Contents).
c. O n printout, the 'Table of Contents is printed at the
point that the T3 com m and is located in the
docum ent. (Unlike 1X3, no separate file is
created.)

A ctio n F o r m a ttin g a T a b le o f C o n t e n t s
To format a 'Table of Contents using T1 through T9,
follow the procedure given earlier in this section under
"Part II: Specify the Format."

5-57
Index Command I l thru 19

FORMAT H i* Index Com m and

• is any digit betw een 1 an d 9-

II through 19 are em bedded com m ands.

PURPOSE Each Index com m and I I through 19 is an essential part of

generating an Index. The II com m and produces the
Index for text m arked by XI, 12 for text m arked X2, and
so on.

Let’s use 13 here as an exam ple. W hen you enter an 13

com m and in your docum ent and print it using TYPE, the
Index is printed along with the docum ent.

The Index com m ands II through 19 parallel the Table of

Contents com m ands T1 through T9 except that the
m arked text is sorted alphabetically rather than by page
num ber. You use the 13 com m and to do the following:

• To specify the format. You type in the format of your

Index as part o f the 13 com m and. You do this the
sam e as you do for the Table of Contents. For
exam ple, you might specify m arked text on the left,
followed by a comma, a spaceband, and the page
number:

<<I3«SRIX>>, «SRPN»»

• To place the Index into your docum ent. W hen you

print your docum ent (using TYPE or TYPEF):

a. The m arked text is accum ulated from the start of

the docum ent dow n to the location of 13 (and no
further). Thus, the position of the 13 com m and in
your docum ent is im portant — normally you place
it at the end of your docum ent.
b. This accum ulated text is sorted alphabetically
(p ro p er for an Index).
c. O n printout, the Index is printed at the point that
the 13 com m and is located in the docum ent.
(Unlike 1X3, no separate file is created.)

5-58
(c o n t’d) Index Command

A ction F o r m a ttin g a n I n d e x .
To format an Index using II through 19, follow the
procedure given earlier in this section under "Part II:
Specify the Format."

NOTE C hanging th e Sorting Order. If you wish to have your

index sorted in a different order than that provided by
XyWrite default, you can create your ow n sorting table.
Refer to Chapter 6 for details.

Table Of C o n t. & In d e x

5-59
Set Record SR

F ormat H SR IX Place Marked Text

H S R PN Place Page Number
H SR CH« Place Chapter Number
n is the separator between chapter and page values.
These are embedded commands.

P urpose The SR (Set Record) commands allow you to position the

page number (using SR PN or SR CH) and the marked
text (using SR IX) in a Table of Contents or Index. You
enter these three commands as part of the commands T1
to T9 and II to 19.

A ction U sin g th e SR CH C o m m a n d
We illustrate use of SR IX and SR PN in the procedure
"Specify the Format" earlier in this section. Let’s now take
a look at the SR CH command, which produces page
references in chapter number-page number format.
1. Be sure that you have used Counter 0 (CO) as the
counter for chapter numbers.
2. Mark the words and phrases that you want included in
your Table of Contents or Index.
3. Move the cursor to the end of the document and enter
the appropriate Index or Table of Contents command.
We’ll use 13 as an example:
Type: fF5li3CT
4. Enter the command to place the marked text on the
left, followed by a spaceband to separate the entry
and the page references, and then the command to
place the page references in chapter-page format.
Type: [F5]sr ixCT
Type: I Space Bari

Type: [F5]sr c h - 0 (Note the hyphen)

Type: [F3]
Result: Your index entries will appear in the following
format: "museums 3-5."
N ote Chapter-Page Separator. You can define any character
as the chapter-page separator by entering it immediately
after the SR CH command.

5-60
 Leadering

FORMAT EIlLD n Leadering

n is any character you specify.

LD is an embedded command.

P urpose The LD (Leadering) command provides a quick means of

inserting a row of characters on a line. Typically you
would use LD in a Table of Contents or Index to generate
a row of periods or dashes between the name on the left
and the page number on the right.

The LD command does two things:

• It pushes all text which follows it (on that line) flush

against the right margin.

Table of Cont . & Index

• It repeats the character given with the LD command
(n) across the line.

A ction In se r tin g a L eader

The procedure for inserting a leader is given earlier in
"Part II: Specify the Format."

NOTE Spaces as a Leader. If you enter LD with no character, it

will produce text flush left and flush right on the same
line with spaces as the leadering character.

5-61
Index Break IB

FORMAT E3IB n Index Break

n (optional) defines the separator.

IB is an em bedded com m and.

P urpose The IB com m and inserts a separator betw een w ords

starting with one letter of the alphabet and w ords starting
with the next. This separator can be one or m ore blank
lines or a heading that you specify with the IB com m and
(n).
The IB com m and also lets you control the format of the
separator. You can specify the am ount of space above
and below a heading, its m ode (bold, underline, etc.),
and how it is placed o n the line (e.g., flush left,
centered, flush right). These formatting instructions affect
only the separators, or headings, not the text of the
index.
A special variation of the IB com m and automatically
places capital letters into your index. To use this
function, you simply define the separator to be a pound
sign (#); XyWrite interprets the # to m ean "insert capital
letters as index separators." If there are no entries for a
particular letter, XyWrite skips the heading for that letter.
See the description below for details on how to use this
variation of the com mand.

actio n S p e c ify in g L e tter s a s S e p a r a to r s.

If you w ant your index to contain capital letters as
separators and to have them be bold, centered and
separated from the entries above and below by one blank
line:

1. Go to the top line of the text file.

2. Type: [F5]ib@
3. Enter the formatting commands.
Press:
Type: [FslfcCT
Type: [F5]md boC T

5-62
(cont’d) Index Break

4. Enter the pound sign (#) to activate the letter

separators. Follow it with two carriagereturns.
Type: # 0 0
Press: [F3]
Result: When you process your index, it will contain bold,
centered capital letters as headings. They will be
separated from the index entries by one carriage return.

Table of Cont . & I ndex

5-63
Table of Contents Extraction TX1 thru TX9

FORMAT E3TX# sourcefile,targetfile Table of Contents Extraction

# is any digit betw een 1 and 9 -

sourcefile is the file containing m arked items.
targetfile is w here the Table of Contents is saved.
TX1 through TX9 are im m ediate com m ands.

P urpose Each Table of Contents Extraction com m and TX1 through

TX9 allows you to extract a Table of Contents from your
docum ent and save it to a file separate from the original
file. It extracts text from the sourcefile and saves it to a
targetfile. W hen you use the com m and TX2, for
instance, the source file accum ulates text m arked with
m arker X2 and formats the text as specified by the T2
com m and.
If you omit the sourcefile, XyWrite will extract a Table of
Contents from the docum ent currently displayed. If you
omit the targetfile, XyWrite will save the Table of
Contents to a file it nam es TABLE1 (for X I) or TABLE2
(for X2), and so on.

A c tio n E x tr a c tin g T a b le s o f C o n te n ts
To extract a Table of Contents from a source file, follow
the procedure described earlier in this section under
"Extract the Table of Contents or Index."

N o te #1 In d ex o f a List o f F ilen am es. To create a single Table

of Contents across several files, place a com m and T1
through T9 at the end of the last file, and use:
GUTX# @parentfile,targetfile
Refer to TYPE @ for m ore information.

NOTE #2 NI C om m and. The com m and NI (No Index) does not

inhibit execution of this com m and.

N o te #3 R eq uirem en t. Each TX com m and extracts text

according to the format established by the corresponding
Table of Contents com m and. For instance, if T1 is not
present in your source docum ent (or if it is at the top),
TX1 will extract nothing.

5-64
(cont’d) Table of Contents Extraction

NOTE #4 U n n u m b ered T ext. There may he times w hen you w ant

to produce docum ents that contain no chapter or section
num bers in the text, but do contain the num bers in the
Table of Contents.

W hen you are preparing such docum ents, use the LVO
through LV9 com m ands instead o f the CO through C9
com m ands. The LV com m ands w ork like the C
com m ands except that the LV com m ands do not output
num bers w hen you print.

W hen you have com pleted your docum ent and are ready
to create the Table of Contents, use the TX com m and to
save the Table of Contents to a separate file. TX converts
the LV com m ands to C com m ands. You can then enter
the appropriate DC com m ands to define the counter
values so the printed Table of Contents will contain

T able of C o n t . & I n d ex
section num bers. For more information on the C and DC
com m ands, refer to "Numbering" in Chapter 4.

5-65
Index Extraction EX1 thru 1X9

format GSJEX# sourcefile,targetfile Index Extraction

# is any digit betw een 1 and 9 .

sourcefile is the file containing m arked items.
targetfile is w here the Index is saved.
1X1 through 1X9 are imm ediate com m ands.

P urpose Each Index com m and LX1 through 1X9 allows you to
extract an Index from your docum ent and save it to a file
separate from the original file. It extracts text from the
sourcefile and saves it to a targetfile. W hen you use the
com m and 1X2, for instance, the source file accum ulates
text m arked with m arker X2 and formats it according to
the 12 com m and. The target file is created especially to
hold this Index.

If you omit the sourcefile, XyWrite will extract an Index

from the docum ent currently displayed. If you omit the
targetfile, XyWrite will save the Index to a file it nam es
INDEX1 (for X I) or INDEX2 (for X2), and so on.

A ctio n E x tr a c tin g A n I n d e x .
To extract an Index from a source file, follow the
procedure described earlier in this section u n d er "Extract
the Table of Contents or Index."

N o te #1 In d ex o f a List o f F ilen am es. To create a single Index

across several files, place a com m and II through 19 at the
en d of the last file, and use:

EHDC# @parentfile,targetfile

Refer to TYPE @ for m ore information.

N o te n NI C om m and. The com m and NI (No Index) does not

inhibit execution of this com m and.

N o te #3 R eq uirem en t. Each IX com m and extracts text according

to the format established by the corresponding Index
com m and. For instance, if II is not present in your
source docum ent (or if it is at the top), 1X1 will extract
nothing.

5-66
 U ser Program m ing

I ntro Above and beyond all of the functions described earlier

in this manual, XyWrite provides the pow er of User
Programming. This feature allows you to com bine any
com m ands, in any order, in a program for automatic
execution.

This section starts with a description of the general

procedures and then covers the com m ands NEP, CAP, P,
RUN, and LDPM.

C o ntents Page D escrip tio n C om m and

5-68 P rogram m in g P roced u res

5-70 Creating and Running a Program File
5-72 Writing the Program
5-74 Programming Examples

C om m ands
5-75 Creating a New Program File NEP
5-76 Calling a Program File CAP
5-77 Pausing During Execution P
5-79 Running a Program File RUN
5-80 Loading a Program LDPM

U ser
P ro g ra m m in g

5-67
Programming Procedures

PURPOSE W hat is program m ing? Programm ing is a powerful

technique w hich enables you to record any sequence of
keystrokes for later execution. You can write your ow n
program s to perform com plicated operations, load them
to Save/Gets, and then run them with as few as two
keystrokes, e.g., ® X . You can perform any operation
w hich can be planned out in advance. What m akes
program m ing so powerful is: A ny k ey stro k es y o u ca n
ty p e m an u ally fro m th e k eyb oard w ith in X yW rite,
y o u ca n a lso record in a p rogram file a n d ru n
au tom atically. There are basically two parts to
programming:

1. You record a sequence of keystrokes in a program file.

2. You then run this file. This automatically executes the

stored keystrokes one after another, as if you had
typed them from the keyboard.

You can record and execute virtually any com bination of

com m ands in this manual. O nce you grasp the concept,
you can be quite innovative devising your ow n programs.

P ractical U ses o f P rogram m in g. Here are a few

exam ples of simple programs. In each exam ple, the
program is assigned to a Save/Get key.

S aving a F ile. You can write a program w hich performs

the SAVE com m and. If you assign the program to
Save/Get key S, you can then save a file simply by
pressing [Alt]S. This program file w ould contain the
keystrokes:

[F5]save[f9]

5-68
(cont’d) Programming Procedures

D isp la y in g a Partial D irecto ry — Display in the

directory only the files w hich start with a particular
letter — for instance, the letter "D":

[F5]dir d*.*[F9

You might assign it to [a|D . Similar program s could

display files containing other characters.

• C allin g a F ile b y P o in tin g — Call a directory, move

the cursor to the filename you want, and then run this
program with one keystroke to call the file:

[re]c a ll [re]

This program might be assigned to [AttlC.

• M aking a W ord B old — Place the cursor o n the first

letter of the w ord and strike [aH]B to m ake it bold. The
program is:

HI] [Ell (£5]search /H/fral f^1![fTIIctril2 [F3l iFsl [fToI

You enter the character B by pressing [Ait] IShift IS. (The

0 key show n is the Cursor Left key.)

• Run A n oth er Program — Suspend XyWrite and

start another program. For exam ple, you could start
W ordProof (which is abbreviated WP) and assign the
program to [AitlW:

[re]do b:wp[fH

You can find the program files for these applications in

the section called "Programming Examples."

5-69
Programming Procedures (con t’d)

A c t io n C r e a tin g a n d R u n n in g a P r o g r a m F ile
This p ro ced u re is divided into six parts. As an exam ple,
w e w ill w rite a program to save a file w ith the
keystrokes [m | S.
1. C reate th e P rogram F ile.
C reate a n ew program file using NEP along w ith a
filename — for exam ple, SAVEFILE:
Type: [F5]nep s a v e file @
Result: A n ew (em pty) file is created w ith the
nam e SAVEFILE (this nam e appears at the top o f the
sc re e n ).
2. W rite th e P rogram . For m ore details, see
“W riting A Program ” w hich follow s.
Type: |Scroll Lock| [F5] S3Ve |F9] |Scroll Lock
Result: The display sh o u ld show: BC save XC
A n a ly sis:
The first IScroll Lock| turns on the record m ode (th e “ S”
appears at th e to p right of th e s c re e n ).
[F5| displays as BC (begin co m m an d ).
SAVE is the com m and.
H] displays as XC (e x e c u te ).
The last IScroll Lockl turns off the reco rd m ode (th e “ S”
d isa p p ea rs).

5-70
(cont’d) Programming Procedures

3. Store th e P rogram

Type: [F5]Store S3

Result: The program file is stored on the disk and

disappears from the screen.

4. R un th e P rogram . Let’s test our program on the text

file HELP1.

Type: [F5]call h e lp l 0

Result: The file is displayed on the screen. (We will

test the program by saving this file.)

Type: [Fsjrun s a v e file C T

Result: The file is saved to disk by the program and

the prom pt line says DONE.

5. Load th e P rogram o n to a S ave/G et K ey. (Optional)

Type: [F5]ldpm s a v e file .s S 3

£
Result: The program is saved to key [Ajt]S. The prom pt I
line says DONE. jS

6 . R un th e P rogram from a Save/G et K ey. (Optional)

Type: |?5]call h e lp l @

Press: [AitlS

Result: The HELP1 file is saved to disk, and the

prom pt line says DONE, exactly the sam e as in step 4.
This show s you can run a program w ith only two
keystrokes.

5-71
Writing the Program

NOTE #1 R ecord M ode. Use the [Scroll Lock! key to record com m ands
in a program file. IScroll LockI switches the record m ode on
and off. An "S" appears at the top right o f the screen
w hen the record m ode is on:

Scroll Lock I on — Record m ode on

Records all keystrokes as key codes in the program (for
later execution). For exam ple, [F5] is recorded as BC
(begin com m and).

IScroll Lock I o ff — Record m ode o ff

Keystrokes function normally and are not recorded in the
program. For exam ple, [F5] m oves the cursor to the
com m and line, and clears the com m and line.

NOTE #2 A d d ition al Save/G et K eys. In Step 5 of the previous

procedure you are not limited to the 26 letter keys A-Z
and 10 num bers keys 0-9. You can also use any keys to
w hich you assign Function Calls &A to &Z and &0 to &9
in the Keyboard File. These additional Save/Get keys are
reserved for programming.

ACTION W r itin g a P r o g r a m .
The procedure for writing a program is as follows.

1. C reate o r C all a F ile. Use NEP or CAP to o p en the

program file.

2. B egin th e R ecord M ode. Turn on the record mode.

Press 1Scroll Lock I so that the S is displayed at the top
right of the screen.

3. R ecord th e K eystrok es. Type the exact keystrokes

for the procedure you want. This procedure
constitutes the program.

The key codes that are displayed represent the

keystrokes; for exam ple, BC m eans Blank the
Com m and Line, and corresponds to function key [r].
The com plete list of key codes is located in Chapter 6
under "Function Calls."

5-72
(cont’d) Writing the Program

4. C orrectin g M istakes. If you m ake a mistake, press

1Scroll Lock I to turn the record m ode off. Then correct the
mistake. The entire keyboard functions now w ork
normally — you may use the Backspace key or m ove
the cursor around.

After correcting the mistake, press [Scroll LockI again to

continue recording keystrokes.

To Im p rove R eadability. For com m ands executed

from the com m and line, your program will be m ore
readable if you use a carriage return 0 as a
replacem ent for [F 9 |. To do this, follow the com m and
with |Scroll Lock I f c j ] I Scroll Lock| rather than [F9]. The file
STARTUP.INT is written this way; look at it to see how
m uch easier it is to read such a program file.

F in ish th e R ecord M ode. W hen do n e typing the

program:

Turn off the record m ode by pressing I Scroll Lock I so that

the S is no longer displayed.

5. Store th e Program . W hen the program is as you

U ser P ro g r a m m in g
w ant it:

Turn record m ode off as show n in the previous step.

Store the program on disk by typing:

[F5]store0
P rogram F ile. A program file is a file in w hich you store
com m ands (and text) for later execution. Each keystroke
you type is stored as an individual key code. All key
codes are listed under Function Calls in the Keyboard File
section of Chapter 6 .
Program files require that you use NEP or CAP to create
or edit them (rather than NEW or CALL).
You can identify a program file by the presence o f key
codes (as show n in the following exam ple).
The program files for the program s listed earlier under
"Practical Uses" are show n on the following page.

5-73
Programming Examples

S aving a F ile. You type [A0S to save the current file

(rather than [F5lSAVEr«Jl):
Keystrokes: [F5lsavefF9l
As displayed: BC save XC
1. Create the Program File (filename: SAVEFILE)

2. Load the program onto Save/Get key: LDPM

SAVEFILE,S

3. Run the program: To save the file, place the cursor

anyw here within the docum ent you w ant to save, then
press [AitlS.

D isp la y in g a P artial D irectory. You press [MID to

display only the files in the directory w hich start with the
letter "D" (those of current interest).
Keystrokes: [F5]dir d*.*[F9l
As displayed: BC d ir d*.*XC
1. Create the Program File (filename: PARTIAL)

2. Load program onto Save/Get key: LDPM PARTIAL,D

3. Run the program: To display the partial directory,

m ove cursor onto the com m and line with the current
w indow empty, then press [AitlP.

C allin g a F ile b y P oin tin g. You call a directory, move

the cursor to the filename you want, and then press [AltlC
to call the file.
Keystrokes: [EHcall [El]
As displayed: BC c a llX C
1. Create the Program File (filename: CALLFILE)

2. Load program onto Save/Get key: LDPM CALLFILE,C

3- Run the program: To call a file, first list the directory,

m ove the cursor to the file you want, then press [AltlC.

5-74
NEP Creating a New Program File

FORMAT S3 NEP newfile N ew Program File

newfile is the nam e of the new program file.
NEP is an im m ediate com m and.

P urpose NEP (New Program file) creates a new program file with
the nam e you specify. To see how NEP fits into the
overall program m ing procedures, refer to "Programming
Procedures" earlier in this section.

A ctio n C r e a tin g a N e w P r o g r a m F ile .

To create a new (em pty) program file:

1. Decide on a nam e for your new program file — for

exam ple, BRANDNEW.PM. You may choose any
filename extension you want, but w e recom m end you
use .PM to distinguish it as a program file.

2. Type: [F5]nep brandnew.pm 0

Result: This com m and creates a new program file nam ed

BRANDNEW.PM. (The file will not be created if one with
the sam e nam e already exists.)

N o te #1 Saving th e F ile. NEP creates a new program file the

same as NEW creates a new text file. Both create a
file in memory; you m ust SAVE or STORE the docum ent
before it is safely stored on disk.

NOTE #2 O p tion . You can create a new program file and copy an
existing file into it. For example:

[F5]nep b ra n d n e w .p m ,o ld file .p m S

Refer to the NEW com m and in the Filing chapter for

details.

5-75
Calling a Program File CAP

FORMAT EHCAP programfile

programfile is the nam e o f the program file you w ant to

display.
CAP is an im m ediate com m and.

P urpose CAP (Call Program File) loads a copy of the specified

program file from the disk to the display for you to view
and revise.

A ctio n C alling a P rogram F ile.

To call an existing program file to the display:

1. Start with the display cleared of any docum ent. If you

need to clear the display, use STORE or ABORT.

2. Enter CAP along with the filename you w ant to call.

Let’s say the nam e of the program file you w ant to call
is EXERCISE.PM:

Type: [fUcap e xercise.pm 0

Result: This exam ple calls the program file nam ed

EXERCISE. PM to the display.

N o te CALL v s. CAP. CAP loads a program file to m em ory from

the disk the sam e way that CALL loads an ordinary file.

To see how CAP fits into the overall program m ing

procedure, refer to the earlier section "Programming
Examples."

5-76
 Pausing During Execution

FORMAT B3P comment Pause

comment (optional) is any message you write, and is

displayed on the command line during the pause.
P is an immediate command

P urpose When entered in a program file, P (pause) causes the

program execution to pause for about one second ( 6/10
second on the IBM PC/AT personal computer). For
longer pauses, execute the pause multiple times with [F9

You may find the pause useful for slowing down the
program sequence, or for viewing intermediate results
before they flash by. In addition, you may add your own
message after the P, to be viewed on the command line.

A ction P a u sin g D u rin g E x ecu tio m .

As an exercise, let’s add a pause and a comment to the
beginning of the XyWrite startup file STARTUP.INT
(which is a program file).

1. Use CAP to call the program file.

Type: [F5]cap startup.int 0

2. Add the Pause Command at the first line.

Press: Scroll Lock

Type: HDp Startup File OHOH[F|]

Press: Scroll Lock

Result: The first line of the display should show:

BCp Startup FileXCXCXC

Type: [F5]store 0

5-77
Pausing During Execution (cont’d)

3. Store the program.

Type: [R estore

4. Run the program. To observe the pause:

Type: [Rjrun s t a r t u p . in t S

Result: Notice that the sequence pauses at the beginning

and show s "p Startup File" on the com m and line.

A n aly sis. The keystrokes in Step 2 do the following:

The first IScroll Lock1 turns on the record m ode (the "S"
appears at the top right of the display).

[F5l displays as BC (begin com m and).

"p" is the Pause com m and. "Startup File" is the com m ent
to ap p ear on the com m and line.

displays as XC. The three [F9] com m ands cause a

three-second pause.

The last IScroll LockI turns off the record m ode (the "S"
disappears).

5-78
RUN Running a Program File

Format EHRUN programfileji

programfile (optional) is the nam e o f the program file

y ou w ant to rum
ft (optional) is any num ber you specify (u p to 28 digits)»
to b e passed into the program . This num ber is
assigned to the com m and AS (Argument Insert). (See
A dvanced User Programming.)

P urpose RUN causes the specified program file to execute. This

m eans the com m ands (and text) stored in the program
file are executed automatically, as if typed from the
keyboard. To see how RUN fits into the overall
program m ing procedure, refer to the earlier section
"Programming Procedures."

A ction R u n n in g a P rogram F ile

To run a program file — for exam ple, EXERCISE.PM:

Type: [F5]run exercise.pm 0

Result: This com m and runs the program file nam ed

EXERCISE.PM — the keystrokes stored in that file are
automatically executed.

To stop the program (if necessary):

P ress: Ctrl Break

Also See R elated C om m ands. You can also run a program file
with an [Att] key. This requires first using LDPM (load
program ) to load the program file onto a Save/Get key.
See LDPM.

N ote Shortcut. XyWrite rem em bers the nam e of the last file
run. Thus, if you enter the RUN com m and w ithout a
programfile, XyWrite re-runs the most recently run file.

5-79
Loading a Program LDPM

FORMAT EH LDPM programfile,# (Option 1)

E l LDPM programfile (Option 2)

programfile is the existing program file you w ant to load.

# (optional) is the single letter (A-Z) o r num ber (0-9) or
the tw o characters (&A-&Z or &0-&9) w here you w ant
to save the program file. You then run the file using
®#.
LDPM is an im m ediate com m and.

P urpose LDPM (Load Program) loads a program file either onto

the specified Save/Get Key (Option 1) ox into m em ory
(Option 2). O ption 1 allows you to run the program file
with an [A0 key (rather than with the RUN com m and).
O ption 2 allows you to RUN a program directly from
m em ory rather than from disk.

To see how LDPM fits into the overall program m ing

procedure, refer to the earlier section "Programming
Procedures."

A ctio n L o a d in g a P r o g r a m o n t o a S a v e /G e t K ey .
(Option 1) To load a program onto a Save/Get Key:

1. Load th e p rogram . To load the program file

EXERCISE.PM onto the [AitlX key:
Type: [F5]ldpm e xe rcise .p m ,x@
Result. The program file is copied to the Save/Get
key (in memory). You can now run the program file
EXERCISE.PM by pressing [AitlX.

2. V erify. (O ptional) To verify that the file has indeed

been loaded onto that key:
Press: Ctrl F2 X

After viewing the text, press ISpace Bari to return to the

docum ent.

5-80
(corn’d) Loading a Program

3. Store th e S ave/G et k ey. (O ptional) If you w ish to

keep this program file loaded on the Save/Get key for
use at future editing sessions (after you QUIT), use
STSGT (Store Save/Get Keys). Refer to STSGT in
Chapter 3-

NOTE #1 A d d ition al Save/G et K eys. You can load program s

onto any of up to 72 keys. This includes the 36 standard
Save/Get keys [Ait]A through [Ait]Z (Function Calls @A-@Z)
and [DO through [Ait]9 (Function Calls @0-@9). It also
includes up to 36 keys assigned to Function Calls &A
through &Z and &0 through &9.

A ctio n L o a d in g a P r o g r a m in to M e m o r y .
(Option 2) To load a program directly into m em ory (rather than onto
a Save/Get Key), use LDPM w ith only the filename of the
program . For example:

Type: [F5]ldpm e xercise .p m [^j]

Result: The program file EXERCISE.PM is now stored in

memory. W hen you use the RUN com m and, XyWrite
checks to see if the program you specify is stored in

U ser P r o g r a m m in g
m em ory before going to the disk.

N o te #2 R em ovin g a P rogram . To delete a program that is

stored on a Save/Get key, use the REMOVE com m and as
described in Chapter 3. To delete a program that is stored
in memory, type REMOVE filename.

5-81
5-82
 Advanced User Program m ing

I ntro User Programming, as explained in the previous section,

allows you to record any sequence of keystrokes and
create a program for later execution. Advanced User
Programming is an extension of User Programming and
provides a set of com m ands that you can use to add
m ore pow er and functionality to your programs.

Refer to A ppendix D for m ore program m ing examples.

C o ntents paKe S ection

5-83 A dvanced U ser P rogram m in g

5-84 P roced u res fo r Adv. U ser P rogram m in g
5-86 Writing an Advanced User Program
5-86 Running an Advanced User Program
5-87 Example of an Advanced User Program
5-88 Revising Programs
5-90 Using Expanded Display for Editing
5-90 H ow to Type Nested Commands
5-91 C om m ands a n d O perators
5-92 Com mands W hich Return Values
5-93 Save/Get Com mands
5-96 Flow Control Com mands
5-97 Relational O perators
5-97 Logical O perators
5-97 Arithmetic O perators
5-97 String O perators
5-98 P rogram m in g E xam p les
5-98 W ord Count
5-98 Select a Printer

NOTE This section contains advanced programming material and is

not recommended fo r beginners. You need some program­
ming background and need to be familiar with the features
explained in the previous section, "User Programming" to get
the fu ll benefits o f the advanced programming features.

5-83
Advanced User Programming

P u rp o se Advanced User Programming extends the pow er and

functionality o f XyWrite. You can create new functions
based on com binations of existing functions to bring
convenience and speed to your daily work.

Here are elementary, but useful, applications for

advanced programming. These exam ples are described
in detail later in this section.

• C haracter C ount. Indicates the num ber of characters

to the end of a file.
• A p p roxim ate W ord C ount. Performs a character
count as above, then divides by 7 (arbitrary) to
estim ate the w ord count.
• S elect a P rin ter F ile. Pauses during the
STARTUP.INT routine to ask w hich Printer File you
w ant to load.

You can also create procedures that accept keyboard

input, such as an order entry system. In addition,
advanced user program s can help you to accomplish
com plex editing tasks w hich conditionally require a
change to be made. For exam ple, you can create a
program that rem oves list entries that are dated previous
to a certain date.

5-84
(cont’d) Advanced User Programming

Features. Using the Advanced User Programming

com m ands, you can do the following:

• Save values to 1000 Save/Get keys (000-999) during

program execution
• Branch on a condition (IF Statement)
• Stop and accept keyboard input anytime during
program execution (RC - Read Character)
• Pass in a value from outside the program (AS -
Argument Insert)
• Determ ine the current cursor position (CP - Cursor
Position)
• Read the current column position of the cursor (CL -
Current Location)
• Jum p to a label (GL - Go to Label)
• Save strings (SV), subroutines (SU), or expressions
(SX) in a Save/Get
• Insert the contents of a Save/Get key at the cursor
position (PV - Put Value)
• Make use of the current filename, path, page num ber,
line num ber, and other XyWrite settings (VA - Value
of Variable)
• Exit a subroutine (EX) or exit th e program (EX1) User P r o g ra m , A dv .

5-85
Procedures for Adv. User Programming

A ctio n W r itin g a n A d v a n c e d U s e r P r o g r a m .
The procedure for writing an advanced user program is
as follows:

1. Create a program file using NEP (rather than

NEW). We use the extension .PM merely as a
rem inder that this file is a program.

Type: [F5]nep exercise .pm0

2. Turn on record mode: press [Scroll LockI. An Q displays at
the top right co m er of the screen.

3. Record the keystrokes that represent the actions you

w ant to occur w hen the program begins execution.
Function calls o n the screen represent the keystrokes.

4. W hen you reach a point in the program w here you

w ant to insert an embedded com m and, turn off record
m ode by pressing IScroll Lock I. The H no longer appears
in the com er.

Type in the desired em bedded com m ands (refer to the

section "Commands and Operators" later in this
section). Each time, press HD to m ove to the
Com mand Line, enter the com m and and press [F9]. If
the com m and requires an argum ent, a text w indow
opens to allow you to enter it.

5. Com plete the program by repeating Steps 2 through 4.

6 . Be sure you are out of record m ode (so the Q no

longer appears) and store the program using STORE.

A ctio n R u n n in g a n A d v a n c e d U s e r P r o g r a m .
You run advanced user program s with the RUN
com m and. For exam ple, to run EXERCISE.PM:

Type: [F5]run exercise.pm 0

Refer to the earlier section called "User Programming" for
information on how to run program s from Save/Get keys.

5-86
(cowd) Procedures for Adv. User Programming

A ctio n E x a m p le o f a n A d v a n c e d U s e r P r o g r a m .
We call this program Character Count. It counts the
num ber of characters in a file and displays the result.

1. Create a program file:

Type: [F5]nep C0Unt[F9]

2. Press Scroll Lock to turn record m ode on.

3. Begin entering the program. Press [Ctri] [End]. A bold

BF appears on the screen (for Bottom of File).

4. Press [Scroll Lock] to turn record m ode off.

5. Type: [F5]sx[F9] A text entry screen opens.

6 . In the screen, enter Save/Get 01 and then the cursor

position com mand:
Type: 01 ,[F5lcp[F9l

7. Press [F3] to close the window . The SX com m and

displays in expanded m ode as:
«SX01,«CP»»

8 . Press [Scroll LockI to turn record m ode on again.

9. Press [F5]. BC appears in the program file. This will

cause the cursor to m ove to the Com m and Line.
User P ro g ra m . Adv .

10. Press |Scroll Lock! to turn record m ode off again.

11. Type [F5)pv 01 [F9]. This will put the value on the
Com m and Line w hen the program runs. The program
file looks like:
BFABCA

5-87
Procedures for Adv. User Programming (cont’d)

12. Press [Restore [f|] to store the program file.

This program moves the cursor to the end of the file,

counts the number of characters in the file, and prints the
number on the Command Line.

To execute the program, call up any file:

Type: [F5]run c o u n t y

ACTION R ev isin g P ro gra m s.

To revise an advanced user program, you need to
"expand" the commands using the Expanded Display:

1. Call up the program file you want to revise using CAP.

For Example, to revise the file EXERCISE.PM:
Type: [F5]cap exercise.pm C T

2. Press: [ctrO[F9] (for Expanded Display)

Result: The triangles no longer appear — the
commands are shown expanded within double angle
brackets.

3. Insert and delete any commands you want removed

from the program including the surrounding double
angle brackets.

4. Press: [Mltfl] (for Normal Display)

Result: The commands which are represented as

triangles will be expanded on the screen.

5-88
(cont’d) Procedures for Adv. User Programming

ACTION U s in g E x p a n d e d D is p la y f o r E d itin g .
You can use the Expanded Display for typing or
modifying com mands. For exam ple, d o the following
three steps to enter the command:
«SX01,«RC»»
1. Press: (MltEO (to switch to Expanded Display)
2. Move the cursor w here you w ant to insert the
com m and, then type:
Press Ctrl 3
Type SX01,
Press [Çtiï 3
Type RC
Press M U
Press Ctrl 3

3. Return to Normal Display:

Press: jCtri] [F9]

ACTION H o w t o T y p e N e s te d C o m m a n d s.
The SX com m and and IF statem ents both allow you to
type a com m and within another com m and. These are
called nested com mands. Here are tw o examples:
«SX01 ,«RC»»
« IF« IS01 »==« IS02» »
User P r o g r a m , A dv.

W hen nesting within an SX com m and or IF statem ent, do

the following:

1. Enter SX or IF:
Type: [F5]SXS
2. Type the rest of the com m and, finishing with [F3] (as
instructed on the display). For example:
Type: O1,[F5]rc0
Press: GU
Result: This com m and w ould appear in the
Expanded Display as:
«SX01 ,«RC»»

5-89
Procedures for Adv. User Programming (cont’d)

N o te #1 R u n n in g a P rogram from STARTUP.INT. If you place

a program into STARTUP.INT to be run on startup (with
RUN filename), be sure to end that program with «EX»,
rather than editing it w ith « E X 1 » or omitting EX
altogether. This will ensure that execution returns to the
startup file and continues w ith the next statem ent. After
all, STARTUP.INT is a program and your program is a
subroutine. (If you omit the « E X » , execution will stop
inside your subroutine and not return to the main
STARTUP.INT program .)

NOTE #2 A ccessin g F u n ction C alls. You can use FUNC to insert

function calls into your program even if they are not
assigned to keys. For example: [F5]func n m 0 (No
Markers), w hich hides all em bedded triangles and
paragraph-end arrows.

NOTE #3 Im p rov in g R eadability. To m ake your program s easier

to read, type tw o carriage returns after each GL statem ent
(as w e did in Example #2 w hich follows). This will not
affect operation of the program, since the GL com m and
skips all statem ents and goes directly to the specified
label.

5-90
 Commands and Operators

PURPOSE C o m m a n d s a n d O p e r a to r s.
This section lists the com m ands available to you in
Advanced User Programming. The com m ands in
Advanced User Programming are embedded com m ands —
they appear as triangles in Normal Display. They are
divided into the following categories:

Com mands W hich Return Values

Save/Get Com mands
Flow Control Com mands
Relational O perators
Logical O perators
Arithmetic O perators
String O perators

Save/G ets. There are three kinds of Save/Gets:

• O rdinary Save/G ets - A-Z, 0-9
These are the Save/Gets that you normally access with
the [m ] keys. They are "permanent" in that their
contents remains intact w hen the program stops
running. These Save/Gets are described in the
"Save/Get Keys" section of Chapter 3.
• T em p orary Save/G ets - 000-999
These one-thousand Save/Gets are saved only while
the program is running. O nce the program stops,
their contents vanishes. Note that Save/Gets 000-999
are separate and distinct from Save/Gets 0-9- You can
abbreviate Save/Gets 000-009 with 00-09-
User P r o g ra m . Ad v .

• A d d ition al P rogram S ave/G ets - &A-&Z, &0-&9

These can be used only with LDPM and RUN. For
example: LDPM filename,&A. See the LDPM
com m and in "User Programming" earlier in this
chapter for m ore details. Like ordinary Save/Gets,
these are "permanent."

5-91
Commands and Operators (cont’d)

C o m m a n d s W h ic h R e tu r n V a lu e s
The following com m ands insert values into your program from XyWrite,
from the user, or from another program. You can use any o f these
com m ands as values in expressions.

AS A rgum ent In sert. Takes the string passed in from the

RUN filename,string com m and, saves it to Save/Get 00,
and then puts the string into the text (or expression) by
perfonning the PV00 function. For exam ple, if you start
the program with RUN EXERCISE, 1234, then AS will be
assigned the string 1234 (not the num ber) within the
program. If you load the program to a key with LDPM
and then run that program from a Save/Get key, AS is
assigned the string on the Com mand Line. Since AS
returns a string rather than a num ber, to use AS within
SX, use IS00 instead: «SX01 ,«IS00»>>. Note: Save/Get
00 and Save/Get 000 are the same.
Example #1: The new variable is «AS»
Example # 2: « IF« AS»==« PV01» »

CL C olu m n L ocation o f C ursor. Takes on the value of the

current colum n position of the cursor. The colum ns on the
display are num bered starting from the left at colum n 0 .
Example: «SX01,«C L»»

CP C haracter P o sitio n . Takes on the value of the current

character position in num ber of characters from the
beginning of the file. Example: «SX01,«CP»»
O nce you have saved the cursor position and m oved the
cursor, you can use the JMP com m and to return to that
previous position. (The JMP com m and is described in
Chapter 3 under "Go to Page and Line Number.")

ER Error. Takes on a logical value of either TRUE or FALSE.

Is TRUE if there w as an error in the previous com m and;
otherw ise, it has the value FALSE. Frequently used with
the SEARCH com m and — ER is TRUE if the search
returns NOT FOUND. Example: «IF«ER»==TRUE»»

RC R ead C haracter. Stops the program and waits for the

user to press a key. W hen a key is pressed, RC takes on
the value of that key and the program continues with the
next step. Use RC in an expression; typically you w ould
assign RC to a Save/Get. Example: «SX01,«RC»»

5-92
(cont’d) Commands and Operators

VA nm V alue o f V ariable. O btains the current value (or string)

of the variable you request (nm). For exam ple, VA LM
obtains the current value of the Left Margin. There are
over 18 different variables you can request. Unlike the
other com m ands in this section (except IS), you can use
this com m and either in a program or directly in text.
Refer to Chapter 6 under "Default Settings" for details on
the VA com m and. Example: «VALM»

S a v e /G e t C o m m a n d s
In the following com m ands, * is a Save/Get: either an ordinary
Save/Get (A— 2, 0— 9) or a tem porary Save/Get (000— 999). Save/Gets
&A-&Z and &0-&9 do not w ork with these com m ands. Also refer to the
figure "Save/Get Commands" w hich follows.

GT # Get Save/G et. Inserts the text or invokes the program

assigned to the specified Save/Get (#).
GT # is equivalent to the @A to @Z and @0 to @9
function calls used by perm anent Save/Gets, w hich are
normally assigned to \M keys. GT inserts text all at once,
while PV inserts the text one character at a time. (See
keyboard function calls in Chapter 6 .)
Example: «G T 98»

IS # In sert Save/G et. In Advanced User Programming, you

can use IS within an IF statem ent to com pare the string
contents of one Save/Get to another. (W hen used
outside of IF, IS operates as just another regular
U ser

formatting com m and. IS is further described under

Save/Get Keys in Chapter 3.)
P r o gram . Adv .

Example: « IF« IS01» ==« IS99» »

PV# Put V ariable. Inserts the characters one at a time from

the specified Save/Get to the current location. May be
used in tw o ways:
• W hen used outside of an expression, PV inserts the
text or runs the program assigned to the Save/Get —
either on the Com mand Line or in text.
Example: «SX 01,«V A $fi»» «P V 01»
• W hen used inside an expression, PV com bines with
the expression to give a num eric result.
Example: « IF« PV800» < « PV801» »

5-93
Commands and Operators (cont’d)

SU #,string Save S u b rou tin e. Saves the string as a program to the

specified Save/Get (#). (This is similar to SV, except the
string is m arked as a program .) You can run this
subroutine within another program using GT #. The
following exam ple saves to Save/Get 98 a subroutine that
executes the SAVE com m and.
Example: «SU98,BC saveXC »

SV #,stringexp
Save String. Saves the string expression {stringexp) to
the specified Save/Get (#). SV can be used only for
saving literals. You can com pare this string with
contents of any other Save/Get. The following exam ple
puts the string YES into Save/Get 99.
Example: «SV99.YES»

SX #,numericexp
Save E x p ressio n . Saves the result of the indicated
num eric expression to the specified Save/Get (#).
Examples: <<SX01,25», <<SXA,«IS99»»

NOTE #4 A rgum ents to C om m ands. Arguments (values) to

em bedded com m ands can include Save/Gets, logical
expressions, num eric expressions, or additional
em bedded commands.

NOTE #5 F urther R eading. For general background inform ation

on program m ing term inology and syntax, see Chapter 3
of the IBM "BASIC H andbook."

5-94
(cont’d) Commands and Operators

SAVE/GET COMMANDS

NUMERIC EXPRESSIONS

STRING EXPRESSIONS

User P r o g r a m , A dv.

5-95
Commands and Operators (cont’d)

F lo w C o n tro l C om m an d s
The following commands control the flow of the program.

EX Exit and C ontinue. EX and EX1 are two different ways

to exit a program. EX is a subroutine return. When
used at the main level of a program, the EX command
stops the program. When used in a subroutine, EX exits
from that subroutine and continues execution at the point
the subroutine returns to. (A subroutine is any program
within a program — enter a subroutine with RUN or a
Save/Get and end it with EX.) Example: «E X »

EX1 Exit and Stop. EX1 stops the program altogether.

Unlike EX, it stops regardless of whether execution is in
the main program or in a subroutine. Example: « EX1»

GL label Go to Label. Causes a jump to the label specified by the

LB command. The label can be any length string.
Example: «GLSTART»

IF expression truebranch El falsebranch

IF C ondition. This command evaluates a boolean
expression and determines whether the expression is
TRUE or FALSE. If TRUE, execution continues with the
next statement. If FALSE, execution jumps to the El
command (End ID and continues from there.
Examples:
Comparing Values:
« IF« PV01» ==« PV02» » « GLA» « E l» « GLB»
Comparing Strings:
« IF« IS01 » = = « IS99» «GLA» « El» «GLB»

LB label LabeL Marks a spot in the program that you can jump to
with the GL command. The label can be inserted at any
point in a program, and can be any length string. May
also be used simply as a comment in a program. (When
writing a comment that contains spaces, though, the
comment must be typed in the Expanded Display.)
Example: «LBSTART»

5-96
(cont’d) Commands and Operators

R ela tio n a l O p era to rs

These operators let you compare two numeric expressions (with PV) or
two string expressions (with IS).

< Less Than

> Greater Than
<■ Less Than or Equal (same as -<)
>- Greater Than or Equal (same as ■>)
<> Not Equal
Equal

Example: « IF{«PV01 » < « PV02»)»

L og ical O p erators
Logical operators perform logical (or boolean) operations on numeric or
string expressions. You use logical operators within IF statements.

I Or
& And
@XOR Exclusive Or
@NOT Not
®UPR Convert letters to uppercase. (Parentheses are required.)
@CNV Takes a key read by RC and converts it to a function call.
@SIZ Returns a value equal to the number of characters in a
string.
Example: « IF((<<IS99»==«IS01» ) ! ( « IS99»==<<IS02»))»

A rith m etic O p erators

User P rogram . Adv .

Use these operators to perform arithmetic on numeric values.

+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
Example: « SX99,« PV01» *10+« PV02» »

S trin g O p era to rs
A string operator operates on two string expressions.

+ Concatenation
e String exists within a string (ASCII character 238)
Example: « SX99,« IS01» + « IS02» »
« IF(<< IS01» e « IS99» ==0)»
5-97
Examples of Adv. User Programming

E x a m p le s o f A d v a n c e d U se r P r o g r a m m in g
Advanced Programming, like any program m ing language,
has virtually unlim ited uses. The way you use it d epends
on your particular needs. We show ed the Character
Count exam ple earlier. Following are tw o m ore
exam ples of advanced programming. A ppendix D has
still m ore examples.

• W ord Count — determ ines the num ber of w ords in a

docum ent.
• Select a Printer File — lets you choose w hich Printer
File you w ant to load.

EXAMPLE #1 W ord C ount. You can modify the Character Count

program show n earlier in this section to approxim ate the
num ber of w ords in your docum ent. You do this by first
counting the num ber of characters and then dividing the
result by seven. You w ould modify Step 6 as follows:
«SX01 ,«C P »/7»

EXAMPLE #2 S elect a P rin ter. You can write program s that will pause
in the middle of execution, ask a question a n d wait for
you to respond. Thus you can stop and m ake choices.
For exam ple, you can modify your STARTUP.INT file to
choose w hich Printer File to load. The following
program dem onstrates the RC (Read Character) com m and
and the IF statement. RC causes the program to pause,
allowing you to select a printer by pressing a letter (D or
L).

« LBA» « SV01 ,D» « SV02.L» BC Dot matrix (D) or Letter quality (L)?« GLB»
« LBB» « SX99,« RC» « SX99,@UPR(<< IS99» )» « IF(<< IS99» — « IS01 » ) » « GLDOTMATRIX»
« E l» « IF(<< IS99» ==« IS02») » « GLLETTER»
« E l» BC p Press 'D’ or L'XC « GLA»
« LBDOTMATRIX» BC Idprn 3epsonfx.prnXC « EX»
« LBLETTER» BC Idprn 3diablo.prnXC « EX»

5-98
(cont’d) Examples of Adv. User Programming

NOTE #6 Testing for a Carriage Return. To test for a carriage

return requires two steps: ( 1) save a carriage return to a
Save/Get and (2) make an IF statement. We will save the
carriage return to Save/Get 91 and then in the IF
statement, we will compare it to Save/Get 00. Type this
in with Scroll Lock turned off.
Type: [F 5lsv0
Type: 9 1 ,0
Result: The carriage return is saved to Save/Get 91- In
Expanded Display, the Save/Get you just typed in looks
rather odd, but nonetheless is correct:
«SV91 ,< r
»
Then type in the following IF statement:
« IF« IS00» g « IS91» ==0»
If the contents of Save/Get 00 is a carriage return, this
statement will be true.

User P rogram
Adv .

5-99
5-100
 Using Redlining

INTRO Sometimes you want to keep track of the changes that

you are making to a document. For example, if you are
editing someone else’s work, you may want the author to
review your changes before finalizing them. Or you might
be preparing a contract that you want to return for review
with all changes marked.

XyWrite’s R e d lin in g lets you do this. It helps you keep a

record of all additions and deletions. When you are ready
to finalize the changes, you can use Put Edit to
incorporate them. Conversely, you can use C lear Edit to
remove them and restore the document to its original
condition. With both commands, there is a V erify option
to selectively review and incorporate the changes.

A Hidden Notes feature lets you make comments that are

ignored by XyWrite. This makes it easier to pass along
instructions that will not be printed.

CONTENTS Page S ection C om m and

U sin g R ed lin in g
5-102 Turning Redlining On and Off RED
5-107 Putting the Edits Into a Document PE, PEV
5-109 Clearing the Edits from a Document CE, CEV
5-111 Hidden Notes LB

ORIGINAL NEW
ORIGINAL
VERSION VERSION
& CHANGES
REDLINING PUT
ON EDITS

CLEAR EDITS

5-101
Turning Redlining On and Off

FOKMAT EHRED ON Turns Redlining on.

EHRED OFF Turns Redlining off.

This is an immediate com mand.

PURPOSE The RED com m and lets you turn Redlining on and off
w ithin a window. W hen you turn Redlining on and then
edit a docum ent, you have a record of all of the changes
you make. XyWrite uses character m odes to keep track of
all additions and deletions m ade to a file while you are in
Redlining.

With Redlining ON, XyWrite automatically displays all the

additions you make in a bold character m ode and all
deletions in a reverse mode. This lets you tell at a glance
w here changes have been made. It does not mean,
however, that Redlining limits your use o f character
modes.

Each of die normally available eight character display

m odes (normal, bold, reverse, superscript, etc.) has both
a corresponding Insert m ode and Delete mode.

To insert text, simply press [Ctd] and the appropriate

num ber key as you normally would. With Redlining on,
XyWrite will enter this new text with an Insert character
m ode that corresponds to your selected mode. Later,
w hen you use the Put Edit com m and to incorporate this
new text, XyWrite converts it to the appropriate character
mode.

Similarly, XyWrite uses special Delete m odes to keep

track of deleted text. Although all deleted text appears on
the screen as reverse, its original m ode is preserved in die
background. Thus, if you use the Clear Edit com m and to
restore deleted text, it is restored to its original mode.
W hen you use the Put Edit com m and, the text is rem oved
from the file.

See Note *6 for more information about Redlining

character modes.

5-102
(cont’d) Turning Redlining On and Off

ACTION K e e p in g T ra ck o f E d its in a F ile .

To keep an on-screen record of the changes you m ake to
a file:

1. Turn Redlining on.

Type: [F5]red onCT

Result: Redlining is now active. The letter “R” appears

in reverse m ode at the top right corner of the screen.
Turning Redlining on also automatically puts you in
Insert mode.

2. Call the file you w ant to edit. W e’ll use

CHAPTER.DOC.

Type: [FUcall c h a p te r .d o c £ 3

3. Make w hatever additions and deletions you w ish to

the text.

Result: Text that you add appears in bold. Text that

you delete appears in reverse.

4. W hen you are finished editing CHAPTER.DOC, store

it.

Type: [F5] s t o r e d

Result: The edited file is stored to disk. You can call it

back to the screen at any time to review or
incorporate the edits you made. The letter “R” still
appears in the u p p er right corner of the screen,
indicating that Redlining is still active.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each file you w ant to edit

using Redlining.

5-103
Turning Redlining On and Off (cont’d)

6 . W hen you are finished w ith the editing session, turn

Redlining off.

Type: [F5]red offCT

Result: The letter “R” disappears from the top right

corner of the screen. You can resum e norm al editing;
no further record will be made of your changes.

7. If you later w ant to rem ove the editing tracks, see

“Putting the Edits into a D ocum ent” or “Clearing the
Edits from a D ocum ent.”

NOTE #1 C orrectin g M istakes. If you make a mistake w hen you

are deleting original text, you can undo it with a second
deletion. For exam ple, if you are deleting by character
w ith the Delete key and you go one character too far,
you can back u p by simply using the Backspace key.

Similarly, if you delete a w ord with [A|]-[Dei] b u t then change

your mind, just m ove the cursor to that w ord again and
press [Aitl-fDeil. The w ord changes from reverse m ode to its
original mode.

D eleting text you have just inserted is immediate. No

record is m ade of these changes. For exam ple, if you add
the sentence “It was a very dark and stormy
night,” you can delete the w ord “very.” In this case, the
w ord disappears; it is not displayed in reverse character
m ode since you had just inserted it.

NOTE #2 W in dow Status. W hen you turn Redlining on and off,

you are changing the status of the active w indow , not of
the docum ent you have on display. You m ust turn
Redlining on and off in each w indow you w ant to use.

N o te #3 N orm al D isp lay. Redlining w orks only in Normal

Display. If you try to switch to Expanded Display,
XyWrite displays the message “Function not allow ed in
Redlining m ode.”

note #4 N o O verstrike. Redlining w orks only in Insert mode.

W hen you invoke Redlining, text entry will be in Insert
mode, even if you are in one of the Overstrike modes.

5-104
(cont’d) Turning Redlining On and Off

N o te #5 A ssig n in g a T oggle K ey. If you will be using Redlining

frequently, you can assign a Redlining O n/O ff toggle to a
key in your keyboard file. (See “K eyboard File” in
Chapter 6 .) The function call for this toggle is RO
(Redline O n /O f0-

note #6 C haracter M odes. XyWrite em beds special codes into

the file so that it can automatically convert the Insert and
Delete m odes into the m odes that you specified (or
restore them to their original state). The following conver­
sion table is used:
Standard In sert D elete
M odes M odes M odes D escrip tio n
MD NM MD IN MD DN Normal
MD BO MD IB MD DB Bold
MD UL MD IU MD DU Underline
MD RV MD IR MD DR Reverse
MD BU MD IL MD DL Bold U nderline
MD BR MD IV MD DV Bold Reverse
MD SU MD IS MD DS Superscript
MD SD MD ID MD DD Subscript

N o te #7 C han gin g D isp la y M odes. You can change the w ay the

various character m odes appear on the screen by
modifying the printer file. For exam ple, if you have a
color monitor, you might w ant new “norm al” text to
appear in bright white characters on a blue background.
Call u p your printer file and enter the following defini­
tion:
MD IN=31

note #8 P rin tin g a D ocu m en t. You can use the TYPE com m and
to print a copy of your docum ent w ith the Redlining
markers in place. XyWrite III Plus printer files define
INSERT and DELETE print attributes that enable you to
identify text you inserted or deleted w ith Redlining on.
R e d lin in g

W hen your docum ent is printed, the Insert m odes (IN, IB,
IU, etc.) assume the print characteristics of the
corresponding standard m ode with the additional effect
defined by the INSERT attribute. For exam ple, the INSERT'
attribute is normally defined to set off inserted text in
square brackets, so text in Insert Bold m ode (MD IB)
w ould print out as {, followed by bold text, en d ed by I.

5-105
Turning Redlining On and Off (cont’d)

Similarly, the Delete m odes (DN, DB, DU, etc.) assume

the print characteristics of the standard m odes with the
additional effect defined by the DELETE attribute. For
exam ple, the DELETE attribute is typically defined to
strike over deleted text w ith a backslash (\), so Delete
Bold m ode (MD DB) w ould print text in bold m ode with
a backslash through each character.

If you want, you can change the way inserted or deleted

text prints out by modifying your printer file. For
exam ple, you might w ant to take advantage of a color
printer and set u p your printer file to print inserted text in
blue and deleted text in red. You can make this change
by (1) adding m ode definitions in the Printer Tables (e.g.,
MD IN+PICA+BLUE) or (2) changing the definition of the
INSERT or DELETE attributes. W hen you add a m ode
definition in a Printer Table, it only affects text that is
printed w hen that Printer Table is active. If you change
the definition of the INSERT or DELETE attribute, you
change the printed appearance of all inserted or deleted
text. (See "Printer Files” in Chapter 6 for m ore inform a­
tion on modifying the Printer File.)

K eep in mind that due to the extra text that will be on

edited pages, the page breaks may be different w h en the
edits are finalized with the Put Edit com m and.

NOTE #9 U sin g [cjrOO. W hen Redlining is on, [ctrijO performs the same
function as fCtrTi 1. That is, it activates normal m ode rather
than the adaptive mode.

5-106
Putting the Edits into a Document

Format ESlPE P u t Edits (O p tio n 1)

EiPEV Put Edits w ith Verify (O p tio n 2)

T hese are im m ediate com m ands.

P u r po se The Put Edit com m ands (PE an d PEV) in co rp o rate the

changes m ade w ith Redlining O n. The conversion begins
w ith the file on screen from the p o in t o f the cursor to the
e n d o f the file.

Redlining u ses special character m odes to m ark additions

an d deletions in a file. T he Put Edit com m ands search for
these character m odes an d m ake the indicated changes.
They convert inserted text to the ap p ro p riate character
m odes (see N ote #6 u n d e r “T urning Redlining O n an d
O ff ’) an d erase text that is m arked for deletion. (See also
the com p an io n co m m and CE in “Clearing the Edits from a
D ocum ent," the follow ing section.)

You have tw o choices for incorporating the changes:

• Putting in all the edits at once (O p tio n 1)

• Putting in the edits selectively (O p tio n 2)

You can use these choices eith er o n a d efined b lo ck of

text or o n an entire file.

A c t io n P u ttin g in A ll t h e E d its.
(Option 1) S uppose you have review ed the edits m ade to a file an d
k n o w that you w an t to incorporate all o f th em into y o u r
original docum ent.

I. Move the cursor to the b eg in n in g of the file.

Press: Ctrl - Home

2. Enter the Put Edit com m and.

Type: HHpeGd]

Result: All the editing tracks in the file are rem oved.

5-107
(cont’d) Putting the Edits into a Document

A c tio n P u ttin g in t h e E d its S e le c tiv e ly .

(Option 2) To search a file for editing tracks and have XyWrite stop
at each one to verify that you w ant it incorporated into
your original text:

1. Move the cursor to the point in text w here you w ant

to begin putting in the edits.

2. Enter the Put Edit, Verify com m and.

Type: [F5]pev[5]

The cursor moves to the first change in the file. This

could be added text (displayed in bold m ode) or
deleted text (displayed in reverse m ode).

3. Verify w hether or not XyWrite should incorporate the

change. Type A, Q, S, N, Y, or U:

A Do not incorporate the change. A bandon the

process and return to the starting point.

Q Quit. Do not incorporate the change. A bandon the

process and stop at the current point.

S Stop. Incorporate this change and then abandon

the process. Return to the starting point.

N No, do not incorporate this change but continue to

the next change.

Y Yes, incorporate this change and continue to the

next change.

U Undo this change and continue to the next change.

4. Repeat Step 3 until you have review ed all the changes.

N ote R en am in g Y our F ile. After you have revised your file,

you may w ant to store the file with a new filename. This
can help you to keep track of the various versions that
are generated with each new generation o f edits.

5-108
Clearing the Edits from a Document

FORMAT E3CE Clear Edits (O ption 1)

BUCEV Clear Edits w ith Verify (O ption 2)

These are imm ediate commands.

P urpose The Clear Edit com mands (CE and CEV) remove the
changes m ade to a docum ent during Redlining. Like the
Put Edit commands, the Clear Edit com m ands search for
the Redlining character modes, but, instead of making the
indicated changes, they restore the text to its original
state.

The conversion begins with the file on the screen from

the point of the cursor to the en d of the file. You can use
either com m and on a defined block of text or on an
entire file.

You have tw o choices for clearing the edits:

• Clearing all the edits at once (O ption 1)

• Clearing the edits selectively (O ption 2)

A c tio n C le a r in g A ll t h e E d its.
(Option 1) Suppose you have reviewed the edits m ade to a file and
know that you w ant to discard all of them and restore
your docum ent to its original condition.

1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file.

Press: Ctrl - Homo

2. Enter the Clear Edit command.

Type: [Fslcef^l

Result: All the editing tracks in the file are removed. Text
that was in reverse is restored to its original mode, and
text that was in bold is deleted.

5-109
(contd) Clearing the Edits from a Document

A c t io n C le a r in g t h e E d its S e le c t iv e ly .
(Option 2) To search a file for editing tracks an d to have XyWrite
sto p at each o n e to verify that you w an t to rem ove the
change:

1. M ove the cursor to the p o in t in text w h ere y o u w an t

to beg in th e cleanup.

2. Enter the C lear Edit, Verify com m and.

Type: [FslcevCT

Result: T he cursor m oves to the first change in the file.

This could b e ad d e d text (displayed in b o ld m o d e) or
d eleted text (displayed in reverse m ode).

3. Verify w h eth e r or not XyWrite sh o u ld rem ove the

change. T ype A, Q, S, N, o r Y.

A D o n o t rem ove the change. A b an d o n the process

an d retu rn to the starting point.

Q Q uit. D o n o t rem ove the change. A b an d o n the

process an d sto p at the current point.

S Stop. Rem ove this ch an g e an d th e n a b a n d o n the

process.

N No, d o n o t rem ove this ch an g e b u t co n tin u e to the

n ex t change.

Y Yes, rem ove this change and co n tin u e to the n ex t

change.

4. R epeat Step 3 until you have rev iew ed all the changes.

NOTE #1 R e c o v e r in g fr o m a M istak e. R em em ber these

com m ands are rem oving previous edits. Care sh o u ld b e
tak en to insure that you d o n ’t inadvertently lose any o f
y o u r w ork. If you do, d o n ’t forget that y ou can ABO RT
the file an d recall it to b eg in again.
 Hidden Notes

Format IS3LB Label

This is an em bedded command.

P urpose The LB (Label) com m and lets you m ake notes in your
docum ent that are ignored w hen you output the file to
the printer. You can write as many notes or com m ents as
you w ant - information about reference sources, ideas
you w ant to expand on later, questions that need further
research, etc. And while all of this information is
conveniently stored for you, it does not clutter u p your
printed copy.

To enter labels, you use a procedure similar to the one

used to enter footnotes or running headers. W hen you
execute the LB com m and, an editing w indow opens so
you can enter the text of your note. W hen you close the
window, an em bedded triangle appears, follow ed by a
superior “n ” and the first four characters of the Label field
in reverse mode. The reverse m ode text after the
em bedded triangle lets you easily distinguish your notes
from the formatting com m ands represented by other
em bedded triangles.

You can reopen the w indow at any time so you can read
or edit the text of a note.

A c tio n E n te r in g a C o m m e n t.
To enter a note for yourself as a later reminder:
1. Position the cursor in the file w here you w ant the
note.
2. Enter the Label command.
Type: [FsllbCT
3. Type the text of your note.
Re d l in in g

4. Close the note window .

Press: [F3]
Result: An em bedded triangle appears on the screen,
followed by a superior “n ” and the first four letters of
your note in reverse mode.

5-111
Hidden Notes (cont’d)

ACTION R e v ie w in g a N o te .
To review the contents of a note:

1. Position the cursor on the em bedded triangle for the

note you w ant to review.

2. Press: Ctrl F3

Result: The text of the note appears in a w indow on

the screen.

3. W hen you have finished reviewing the note, close the

w indow.

Press: F3

4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each note that you w ant to

review.

NOTE #1 Size Lim it. There is no practical limit to the size of the
notes that you can leave. However, keep in m ind that
you may slow dow n normal editing if you insert m any
long notes (several KB each).

NOTE #2 R ight M argins. The labels do not affect the line breaks.
Since the labels do not take u p any space o n output,
XyWrite does not break the line until the printing text
reaches the right margin. This can m ean that, as you add
label notes to a line, text may apparently be pushed past
the right margin. This will not b e the case w h en it is
printed.

TIP S ev eral O rig in s. If several people are m aking com m ents

about the text, it’s a good idea to have each review er start
the label text with their initials. That way, the various
notes from each person are easily recognized.

5-112
 Memory Usage

INTRO Information gets loaded into m emory in different ways.

Every time you start XyWrite from DOS, the program is
loaded into memory. Then, w hen XyWrite runs the
program STARTUP.INT, the files that you have selected to
be part of your standard system configuration are loaded
into memory. W hen you display a file on screen, it is
loaded in m em ory too. W hen you use the XyWrite
Spelling Checker, the program SPELL.OVR and the
dictionary DICT.SPL are loaded into memory.

D epending on the options you select for your system

configuration (H elp files, printer files, etc.) and the size of
the docum ents you are w orking with, XyWrite III Plus
can occupy from 140K to 640K of memory. Because there
are times w hen you d o n ’t need all of the XyWrite func­
tionality that is in memory, the program lets you release
some of the m em ory it is using and later lets you reload
the m emory you released w ithout rebooting the system.

Several sections of XyWrite code can be released. Each

section is associated with a major XyWrite feature. You
can selectively release the sections that you are not
currently using and still maintain the functionality you
need. XyWrite automatically reloads the released sections
of code as you give com m ands that use them.

The m ost com m on application of releasing a section of

XyWrite code is to unload the Spelling Checker program
and its dictionaries, since they occupy large pieces of
memory. Later, w hen you give a com m and that requires
the Spelling Checker, it reloads automatically. (If you
want, you can reload it by com m and.) This section
describes the ways of loading and unloading parts of the
XyWrite III Plus program.

CONTENTS FaSc D escrip tio n C om m and

M em ory U sage
5-114 Memory Usage Menu M
5-117 Saving Sections of Code SAVEC
M emory

5-118 Releasing Memory UNLOAD

5-119 Loading Customization Files LOAD
U sage

5-113
Memory Usage Menu

FORMAT H M Display Memory Usage Menu

This is an imm ediate com m and.

PURPOSE The program m ing information or code n eed ed to support

several major features of XyWrite III Plus has b een sep a­
rated from the main part of XyWrite. [Ctrl] M displays a
m enu that lists each feature and tells you how m uch
m em ory each one of these is using, both for its code and
for its associated files. It also tells you how m uch m emory
is still available.

With the m emory usage m enu on the screen, you can

review and change the status of each of these features.
Using this menu, you can:

• Release the m em ory used by the code associated

with a feature. To do this, select the UNLOAD
PROGRAM option and press the feature num ber.

• Release the m emory used by the data associated

with a feature (for exam ple, a printer file). To do
this, select the UNLOAD FILE option and press the
feature number.

• Release the m em ory associated with DICT.SPL.

Because this spelling dictionary is so large,
releasing it frees u p a significant piece of memory.
It is treated as a special case here because it is the
part that is most com monly released. To release
DICT.SPL w ithout releasing the tem porary
dictionary or any personal dictionaries you have
loaded into memory, select the UNLOAD FILE
option and press - (hyphen).

5-114
(co n t’d) Memoiy Usage Menu

O nce you have released a file or code from m em ory, it

m ust be relo ad ed before you can use the associated
feature again. XyWrite autom atically reloads the code
w h en you ex ecu te the function associated w ith it. For
exam ple, if you u n lo a d the Spelling C hecker an d later
issue the SPELL com m and, XyWrite loads SPELL.OVR and
DICT.SPL. H ow ever, if you have released a data file from
m em ory, such as a p erso n al spelling dictionary, y ou m ust
specifically relo ad it.

As a rem inder, the m em ory u sag e m enu contains a line

that says LOAD FILE. W hen you select that o p tio n an d
press 0 , th e m en u clears from the screen an d the LOAD
com m and ap p ears in the co m m and line. Enter th e nam e
of the file you w an t to load an d press 0 (for m ore
inform ation, see “Loading C ustom ization Files”).

ACTION U n lo a d in g a F ile fr o m M e m o r y .
Suppose that y o u are form atting a very long d o cu m en t
an d that you have already run Spelling C hecker on it.
S uppose also that you w o n ’t n e e d to run Spelling
C hecker for a w hile, b u t that you could u se som e extra
m em ory so you can load all o f yo u r docum ent.

1. D isplay the m em ory usage m enu.

Press: [Ctd] [¥]

2. Use the cursor keys to select the UNLOAD FILE

option.

Result: T he UNLOAD FILE line is highlighted.

3 . Press: -

Result: T he 140K o f m em ory u se d by the m ain

spelling dictionary (DICT.SPL) is released. W hen you
use one of the spelling functions, XyWrite autom ati­
cally reloads th e dictionary.
M emory
U sage

5-115
Memory Usage Menu (cont’d)

4. If you need more memory, select another feature that

you aren’t using at the m om ent and release it. O ther­
wise:

Press: Esc

NOTE #1 U n lo ad in g th e T em p orary D ictio n a ry . W hen a

tem porary dictionary is unloaded, its contents are deleted
from memory. (See “Storing the Tem porary Dictionary” in
Chapter 3.)

ACTION L o a d in g a F ile I n to M e m o r y .
Let’s say you w ant to reload your personal dictionary
PERS.SPL.

1. Display the m emory usage menu.

Press: Ctrl M

2. Use the cursor keys to select the LOAD PROGRAM

option.

3. Press: 0

Result: The m enu clears from the screen and the

LOAD com m and appears in the com m and line.

4. Type: p e r s . s p l 0

Result: PERS.SPL is loaded into memory.

NOTE #2 L ocation o f th e R eleased In fo rm a tio n . If you are using

a floppy disk system, you may w ant to have the released
code stored in a tem porary file so you d o n ’t have to keep
your program disk available. (For m ore information, refer
to h e following section “Saving Sections of C ode.”)

5-116
 Saving Sections of Code

FORMAT EulSAVEC n,n...

n,n... are the num bers associated with a XyWrite feature.
This is an imm ediate com mand.

P urpose If you have a floppy disk system or if you run the

XyWrite editor from a floppy disk, you may w ant to
reload released code w ithout using your program disk.
The SAVEC (Save Code) com m and lets you save parts of
XyWrite code to files on your current disk (see Note).
You can then release those sections of code from
memory. If you later execute a function that requires the
released code, XyWrite calls the information from the file
created by SAVEC, rather than from EDITOR.KXE on your
program disk.
The SAVEC com m and uses the num ber associated with
each releasable section of code. The num bers and their
associated features are listed in the m em ory usage menu.
To display the menu, press [Ctrl] [m].
W hen the code is saved to disk, it is saved in file(s)
nam ed EDITOR.OVn, w here n is the num ber of the
feature you are saving. For instance, if you specify SAVEC
1, XyWrite creates the file EDITOR.OV1 on disk. The
com m and SAVEC 0 com m and creates the files
EDITOR.OV 1 through EDITOR.OV7.

A ctio n U s in g t h e SAVEC C o m m a n d .
l e t ’s save all of the releasable code to files on disk.
Type: [F5]savec 0 0
Result: The files EDITOR.OV1 through EDITOR.OV7 are
saved on disk. You can now use the m emory m enu or
UNLOAD com m and to release one or more sections of
code. If XyWrite needs to reload the code to perform an
function, it retrieves the code from the appropriate
EDITOR.OVn file.

NOTE L ocation o f Saved C ode F ile. W hen XyWrite creates an

EDITOR.OVn file, it saves it on the drive you specify with
the DEFAULT DR setting. If you aren’t sure w hat drive
Memory

you specified, display the w indow menu. If an

EDITOR.OV/i file exists, the letter of the drive w here it is
saved appears under “Disk.”
U sage

5-117
Releasing Memory

Format HUNLOAD n,nF,M...

n is a num ber (0-7) of a XyWrite feature.

F releases the file for specified feature.
## can b e DICT.SPL or the two-letter custom ization label
(SP, PR, etc.)

This is an im m ediate com m and.

P urpo se The UNLOAD com m and releases code or files that have
b een loaded into memory. You can perform the sam e
functions using the m em ory usage m enu, but this
com m and is useful w h en writing a program using
XyWrite’s program m ing language.

The LOAD com m and uses the num ber associated with
each releasable section of code. The num bers and their
associated features are listed in the m em ory usage menu.
(To display the m enu, press (ctrf] [m|.) It also accepts the
custom ization file labels (see “Loading Customization
Files for a list of customization file labels).

A c tio n U s in g t h e UN LO A D C o m m a n d .
Let’s look at som e exam ples of the UNLOAD com m and.

Type: [F5]unIoad 3 , d i c t . s p I 0

Result: DICT.SPL and XyWrite’s Spelling Checker (feature

# 3) are no longer in memory.

Type: [fijunLoad 3 f 0 or
Type: [F5]unload s p 0

Result: These are equivalent com mands. Both unload the

personal dictionaries from memory.

Type: [F5]unload O ,O F 0

Result: The “0” refers to all features and the “OF” refers to
all files (including DICT.SPL). This com m and releases the
maxim um am ount of memory.

5-118
 Loading Customization Files

FORMAT EZJLOADfile l file2file3-f-file4... (O ption 1)

EHLOAD +filel +file2+file3... (O ption 2)

file l,file 2 ,file 3 , and so on are nam es of XyWrite

custom ization files.

This is an im m ediate com m and.

PURPOSE LOAD lets you load all of your custom ization files w ith a
single com m and. Each custom ization file must start with a
special 4-character label that tells the LOAD com m and
w hat type of file it is. The file types and the label associ­
ated with each are listed below.

• Printer file ;PR;

• Substitution file ;SU;
• Help file ;HL-
• H yphenation dictionary ;HY;
• Personal spelling dictionary ;SP;
• Sort file ;SO;
• K eyboard file ;KB;

You m ust type the labels exactly as show n: semicolon,

capitalized 2-letter identifier, semicolon. Put the label on
the first line of the custom ization file, and end it with a
carriage return.

O nce your custom ization files are identified, you can use
the LOAD com m and to:

• Initially load into m em ory one or m ore customization

files. You can specify m ore than one spelling
dictionary and m ore than one printer file w ithin the
same com m and by inserting a plus sign immediately
before the filename of the additional files (O ption 1).

• A ppend the inform ation in a customization file to

w hat is already loaded into memory. This option
allows you to load a personal dictionary or printer file
into m em ory w ithout deleting the personal
dictionaries or printer files that you loaded previously
Memory

(O ption 2).
U sage

5-119
Loading Customization Files (cont’d)

A c tio n L o a d in g C u s to m iz a tio n F ile s .

( Option 1) To load the printer files and hyphenation dictionary into
m em ory with one LOAD command:

1. Be sure the files you w ant to load start w ith the

proper identifiers.

2. Issue the LOAD command.

Type: [F5]load 3 e p s o n f x .p r n + b - w .p r n ,d ic tio n ^

Result: The printer files 3EPSONFX.PRN and B-W.PRN,

and the hyphenation dictionary DICTION are all
loaded into memory.

A c tio n A p p e n d in g P r in te r F ile s o r S p e llin g D ic tio n a r ie s .

(Option 2) Suppose you are w orking on a docum ent that uses a lot
of business terms. You loaded PERS.SPL w hen you started
your system, but now you w ant the Spelling Checker to
reference the business dictionary BUS.SPL as well.

Type: [Fsjload + b u s . s p l 0

Result: The w ords in BUS.SPL are loaded into memory,

ap p en d ed to the words in PERS.SPL. Of you omit the “+,”
the com m and w ould clear the tem porary and personal
dictionaries already in memory.)

NOTE L oading DICT.SPL. Because this dictionary is loaded

automatically w henever you use the SPELL com m and, it is
unlikely you w ould w ant to load it with the LOAD
com m and. However, the LOAD com m and does recognize
DICT.SPL; it is a special customization file that does not
require an identifying label.

5-120
 Custom izing

In t r o O n e thing that sets XyWrite apart from o th er w ord

processors is th e ability to tailor th e p ro g ram to suit your
o w n needs. This section describes h o w you can custom ­
ize th e h elp screens, the keyboard, an d y o u r printer.
You can also m odify h o w XyWrite h y p h en ates w ords and
sorts indexes. And y ou can program XyWrite to perform
any n u m b er o f tasks as p art o f yo u r start-up routine.

C ontents P age S e c tio n C om m an d

6-2 O v erv iew

6-3 D efa u lt S ettin g s
6-18 D efault C om m and DEFAULT
6-21 Restoring D efaults DM
6-22 Value o f V ariable VA
6-23 H elp F ile
6-24 D isplaying H elp Alt F10
6-26 Loading a H elp File LDHELP
6-28 Modifying H elp Files
6-37 A u tom atic H y p h e n a tio n
6-39 Loading the H yp h en atio n D ictionary LDDICT
6-43 Show H yphenation SHOHYP
6-45 K eyb oard F ile
6-48 H ow to Modify Y our K eyboard File
6-52 Re-Assigning a Key
6-53 Exam ples
6-56 Load K eyboard File LDKBD
6-57 Function Calls
6-69 P rin ter F ile
6-75 Basics of th e Printer File
6-82 Printer Settings
6-100 D isplay Settings
6-110 System Settings
6-111 Special Printer Files
6-112 Load Printer File LDPRN
6-115 Character Substitution File LDSUB
6-121 M icrojustification Settings
6-131 S ort F ile
6-134 Load Sort File LDSORT
6-135 Startup F ile STARTUP.INT

6-1
Overview Block Diagram

6-2
 Default Settings

I ntro W hen XyWrite first starts up, it provides you with its ow n

D efau lt
set of defaults (listed later under "Restoring Defaults").
The DEFAULT com m and allows you to set your ow n
defaults, so that XyWrite will start u p custom ized to your

S e t t in g s
needs.

C ontents Page S ection C om m and

6-4 Purpose
6-6 Default and VA Settings
6-8 Default Settings
6-18 Default Command DEFAULT, DF
6-21 Restoring Defaults DM
6-22 Value of Variable VA

6-3
Default Settings

P u r p o se Default settings let you change the value of XyWrite

settings. These settings are listed in the following table
"Default and VA Settings." You use the DEFAULT
com m and to enter these settings. For exam ple, to change
the default right margin to 50:

[Hjdefault rm=5£j]

The DEFAULT com m and is described at the en d o f this

section.

Along with Default com m ands, the VA (Value of Variable)

com m ands are listed in the table. A VA com m and inserts
the current XyWrite setting into the text. The VA
com m and is described at the en d o f this section.

Default settings are divided into three categories:

• Form at S ettin gs — To set the initial format
conditions at the start of every file. For exam ple, you
might use it to set the right margin at 70 and tabs
every 5 spaces.
• P rin ter an d D isp la y S ettin gs — To set u p for your
particular printer and display monitor.
• S ystem S ettin gs — To set controls specific to your
system, such as enabling backup of files and setting
the default drive for TMP files.
DEFAULT sets these conditions for all files, w ithout
requiring their entry into each file you create.

6-4
(cont’d) Default Settings

NOTE #1 R esettin g th e D efau lts. After changing the default

D efau lt
settings, if you wish, you can return to the original
settings built into XyWrite with the DM (Default Margins)
com m and.

S e t t in g s
N o t e #2 P riority o f D efault S ettin gs. A com m and em bedded in
text takes priority over the sam e com m and entered with
DEFAULT anyw here else — in the STARTUP.INT file, on
the Com mand Line, or in the Printer File. For example,
RM 80 em bedded into the docum ent takes precedence
over a default setting of DEFAULT RM-70 entered in the
STARTUP.INT file, Printer File or on the Com mand Line.
N o t e #3 D efault C om m and in P rin ter F ile. W hen inserting the
DEFAULT com m and into the printer file, abbreviate the
w ord default with df. For example:
default rm=65 (O n Com mand Line)
df rm=65 (In Printer File)

6-5
Default Settings (cont’d)

DEFAULT and VA SETTINGS

Default Description VA Value Returned
(Example) (Example)

Format Settings (Chapter 4)

default ap Auto-Pause (NA)
default fc Flush Center vafc fl
default fd=66 Form Depth va fd 66
default fl Flush Left va fl fl
default fr Flush Right va fr fl
default hy=1 Hyphenation va hy 1
default ip=5,15 Indent Paragraph va ip 5,15
default lm=5 Left Margin va Im 5
default ls=2 Line Space va Is 2
default md=bo Character Modes va md 15
default np No Pause (NA)
default of=5,0 Offset va of 5,0
' i, ^ — default pl=54 Page Length va pi 54
default pt=1 Print Type va pt 1
; default rm=65 Right Margin va rm 65
default rt=1 Relative Tabs va rt 1
default sp=5 Set Page Number (NA)
default tp=6 Top Margin va tp 6
default ts=5,10,15 Tab Set va ts 5,10,15
(NA) Bottom Margin va bt 2

Printer and Display Settings (Chapter 6, Printer File section)

*
default al=1 Automatic Leading va al 1
default bs=1 Backspace va bs 1
* default bw=1 Black & White Display va bw 1
* default bxr 15 Window Border Colors va bx 15,1,2,3,4,5,6,9,10
* default cr=112,7 Cursor Type va er 112,7
* default dd=119 Display of Defined Blocks va dd 119
default dt=1 Display Type va dt 1
* default du=12 Display Units va du 12
default eg=1 EGA Control va eg 1
— - default e)=1 Eject Last Page va ej 1
—^ default ff=0 Form Feed va ff 1
* default hn=31 Header Normal Mode va hn 31
* default hr=100 Header Reverse Mode va hr 100
* default hv=6,3,2 Hyphenation Variables va hv 6,3,2

6-6
(cont’d) Default Settings

D efault
* default Jl=1 Justify Underline Chars. va jl 1
* default jt=1 Justification Type va jt 1

S e t t in g s
* default mu=12 Margin Unit va mu 12
* default ms=6 Microspace Factor va ms 6
* default pd=l Pad Spaces va pd 1
default sls43 Screen Length va si 43
* default sq=1 Sequential Page No. va sq 1
default tb=0 Tab Character va tb 0
default ul=2 Underline Setting va ul 2
default vu=3 Vertical Unit va vu 3
* default wo=1 Word Overstrike va wo 1
default ws=1 Whole-Space Just. va ws 1
* default xc=3 Space Constant va xc 3
* default xt=2 Space Factor va xf 2
(NA) Ruler Markers va ri ►«CÔLt «Il
(NA) Window Border Characters va wb r h = il jjii

System Settings (Chapter 6, this section)

default bk=0 Backup Files va bk 1
default dl=1024,7,1 Directory Settings va di 1024,7,1
✓ * default dr=b Default Drive for TMP va dr B
/ — default ep=l Erase Prompt va ep 1
default er=1 Error Help va er 1
default fu=4,6 Footnote Unit va fu 4,6
default kc=8400 Key Click va kc 8400
* default km=1 Keyboard Mode va km 1
default lf=1 Line Spacing On-Screen va If 1
default nc=1 Normal Carriage Return va ne 1
default nw=1 New Window va nw 1
default tf=1 Ignore Top Margin va tf 1
(NA) Filename va $fi CHAPTER.DOC
(NA) Drive, Path and Filename va $fp B:\CLIENTS\DOE
(NA) Memory Available (x 1K) va $me 411
(NA) Current Drive and Path va $pa B:\CLIENTS
(NA) Page No. at Cursor va $pg 12
(NA) Window Number va $wn 3
(NA) Window Status va$ws 1

NA = Not applicable or not implemented

* = All of the settings in this list can be entered into the Printer File with the DF command.
However, the settings marked with an asterisk (*) can also be entered into the Printer
File alone, without the DF.

6-7
Default Settings (cont’d)

D efault The default settings are described in various places in this

S ettings manual.

F orm at S ettin gs.

For further descriptions of the Format Settings, see
Chapter 4. Each com m and is described individually.
P rin ter an d D isp la y S ettin gs.
The Printer and Display default settings are described in
various places in this chapter:

• BW, BX, DD, DT, EG, FIN, HR, PD, RL, SL and
WO are described later in this chapter under "Printer
File."
• DU, MU, MS, JL and JT are described in the
"Microjustification" section later in this chapter.

• XC and XF are the same as the SC and SF settings

described later in the "Microjustification" section.
• BS, CR, EJ, FF, HV, SQ, TB, UL, WB, WD, WS and VU
are described in this section.
S ystem S ettin gs.
The System Settings are described in the section that
follows.

D efa u lt bk B ackup o f F iles - Lets you turn on o r off the backup of

files. (The initial default is 1.)
default bk=0 Don’t keep backup copies. (This saves
room on your disk.)
default bk=1 Keep backup copies. With this setting,
w henever you call u p a file to edit, XyWrite keeps the
original version of the file you called u p — it does this at
the first SAVE or STORE com m and, by changing its three-
letter extension to .BAK.
BK w orks as follows: Let’s say version A of the
docum ent CFLAPTER is on your disk.
1. You CALL CHAPTER, and then edit it to version B.
2. The first time that you SAVE (or STORE) version B,
XyWrite renam es version A (which is still o n disk) to
CHAPTER.BAK. It then saves Version B under the
nam e CHAPTER.
6-8
(cont’d) Default Settings

3. Any subsequent SAVE or STORE com m and updates

D efault
CHAPTER, but does not alter CHAPTER.BAK (until
you CALL CHAPTER again).
The purpose of the backup feature is to allow you to

S e t t in g s
easily return to the version of your docum ent as it was
w hen you m ost recently loaded it with CALL. As you do
interm ediate saves, the backup copy does not change.
To update the backup file throughout an editing session,
STORE the docum ent rather than SAVE it.
You can override the default BK com m and for any s p e ­
cific file by entering the BK em bedded com m and at the
start of that file. For example: [F5]bk 10

DEFAULT BS B ackspace C on trol - Enables y o u r printer to print a

backspace, w hether or not your printer can recognize a
backspace character. (The initial default is 1.)
default bs=1 Use this setting if you are using a printer
w hich can perform a backspace — in other words, if the
printer responds to the backspace character (D) ASCII
Value 8 by backspacing one character.
default bs=0 Use this setting if the printer cannot
perform a backspace (that is, if it ignores the backspace
character). Then, w hen XyWrite encounters a backspace
character, it performs the backspace function by printing
that line in tw o passes.

DEFAULT C R C ursor T ype - Lets you change the cursor to be n on­

blinking, or to change the color. This CR setting used to
be called CT. (The initial default is 0,0.)
default cr=n,h Format for the CR setting. The first value n
(norm al) is the num ber of the display m ode for the cursor
normally, w hen you are editing text. The second value h
(help) is the num ber of the display m ode for the cursor
w hen viewing help frames.
default cr=112,7 Example of the CR setting. By referring
to the display table later in this chapter (in "Printer File"),
you can tell that 112 is non-blinking black letters o n a
w hite background, w hile 7 is non-blinking w hite letters
on a black background.

6-9
Default Settings (cont’d)

D efault di D irectory Settings - Lets you modify the way a long

directory (DIRL) is displayed. (The initial default is 0,6,0.)
DI is further described under the DIRL command in
Chapter 2.

D efault dr D efault D rive for TMP Files. - Sets the default drive
where you want temporary files to saved. (There is no
initial default setting for DR.)
default dr=d General format of the DR setting, where d
is the drive letter where you want to save the .TMP files.
default dr=c Example of the DR setting — causes all of
the .TMP files to be saved to drive C.

D efault EJ Eject Last Page - Lets you eject the very last page of a
document. (The initial default is 0.)
default ej=1 This setting causes the very last page of a
document to automatically eject from the printer. If Form
Feed is off (default ff=0), it sends blank lines to eject the
last page. If Form Feed is on (default ff=1), it sends a
form feed character ( 9 ) to eject the last page.
default ej=0This setting prevents the last page of a
document from being ejected from the printer.

D efault EP Erase Prom pt - Lets you enable the prompt "Do you
wish to erase?" whenever you execute the ERASE or DEL
commands, to reduce the risk of inadvertently deleting
files. (The initial default is 0.)
EP is further described under the ERASE command in
Chapter 2.

6-10
(cont’d) Default Settings

DEFAULT ER D isp la y Error H elp Fram e - Enables an error screen to

D efault
appear (from the help file) w henever an error occurs.
default er=1 The error/help frames are displayed
w henever an error occurs. You can tailor the frames to

S e t t in g s
say anything you want. This feature is useful w hen a
user is training, because you can display information
about how to continue. However, it can slow perfor­
m ance considerably. Refer to Help Files later in this
chapter for details on how to construct help frames.
default er=0 The error/help frames are disabled.

DEFAULT FF Form F eed C haracter - Lets you insert a form feed char­
acter at the end of each page. (The initial default is 0.)
default ff=0 Causes XyWrite to send enough Carriage
Return / Line Feed Characters at the end of each page to
advance the paper to the top of the next page. (In the
absence of any explicit setting, XyWrite defaults to FF=0.)
The FD (Form D epth) setting determ ines the total num ber
of lines XyWrite will send to the printer for each page.
default ff=1 Causes XyWrite to send a carriage return -
line feed com bination ( f B), and a form feed character (9 ),
ASCII 12, at the end of each page, to advance the paper
to the top of the next page. Exception: w h en you turn
off Eject Last Page (with Default default ej=0), there is no
Form Feed character sent at the end of the last page.
Default FF=1 is supported on m ost printers.
You can substitute any string for the Form Feed character
by specifying PG<string in your Printer File. See the
Printer File for further details.
W hen w ould you use FF=1? W hen you w ant to send a
form feed character (or any other string) at the end of the
text on each page, rather than rely on FD (Form D epth)
to insert the proper num ber of blank lines. Ideally, FF=0
and FF=1 w ould have the sam e effect, if FD w ere set
properly. However, several Carriage Return / Line Feeds
might not be equivalent to a Form Feed due to round-off
errors or p aper creep from friction feed (or to a w rong
value for FD). If you notice the top-of-form creeping
slightly, page after page, use FF=1. This allows the
printer to keep track of the top of form. FF=1 also can
shorten printing time.

6-11
Default Settings (cont’d)

DEFAULT FU Footnote Unit - Default FU takes two values, the first for
footnotes and the second for reference commands. FU
lets you account for the extra width of several footnote
symbols or a large value in the reference command. This
occurs for footnote symbols when restarting the sequence
of footnotes on every page. See one of the notes under
the SF (Set Footnote Number) command of Chapter 4 for
more details. (The initial default is 3,5.)

DEFAULT HV H yphenation Value - Lets you select the size of words

to be hyphenated and the fewest number of characters
allowed before and after a hyphen. For details, refer to
the HV setting in the Display Settings section of "Printer
File." HV used to be called HY. (The initial default is
5,2,2.)
Notice there is a related setting default hy=n that simply
turns hyphenation on or off.

D efault KC K e y c l i c k . This setting controls an audible click

generated by XyWrite at every press of a key. (The initial
default is 0, which turns the key click off.)
default kc=« Format for the KC setting, where n sets the
duration and tone of the key click as follows:
n = 256 x Duration + Tone
where Duration is 0 (short) to 64 (long duration) and
Tone is 0 (high tone) to 255 (low tone). (The key click is
produced from the speaker inside the computer.) You
can lengthen the duration of the click, but keep the same
tone by increasing the Duration number. You can lower
the tone by increasing the Tone number.
default kc=8400 Example with the KC value set to 8400.
More examples:
High Medium Low
Tone Tone Tone
Short Duration 256 383 511
8192 8319 8447
Long Duration 16384 16511 16639

6-12
(cont’d) Default Settings

After you change the key click value, to m ake it take

D efault
effect, clear all files and close all w indows. Then execute
the ABORT com m and.
If you put KC in your STARTUP.INT file, place it before

S e t t in g s
any WINDOW command.

D efa u lt KM K eyboard M ode - Lets XyWrite run with memory-

resident programs. (The initial default is 1.)
KM is further described in A ppendix F, "Memory-Resident
Programs."

D efa u lt LF O n-Screen L ine Spacing. Lets you show the line

spacing on-screen as it will be printed. (The initial
default is 0.)
default lf=1 Text is show n with the sam e line spacing
on-screen as will print. For exam ple, text w hich will
print double-spaced is show n double-spaced on-screen.
default lf=0 All text is show n single-spaced on-screen
(except for Column Tables, w hich are show n with line
spacing as they will be printed).

D efa u lt nc N orm al C arriage R eturn. Lets you choose w hether to

send the carriage return to the printer in normal m ode or
in the current m ode. (The initial default is 1.)
default nc=1XyWrite puts out carriage returns in normal
m ode (MD NM).
default nc=0 XyWrite puts out carriage returns in the
m ode that is in effect at the end of the line.

6-13
Default Settings (cont’d)

DEFAULT NW N ew W in dow - Enables XyWrite to o p en a new

w indow w hen needed. (The initial default is 0.)
default nw=1 Enables automatic new w indow s. XyWrite
open s a new w indow every time you execute NEW or
CALL with a file on-screen. Allows you to display a
directory, call a file, look it over, abort it, and then be
returned to the directory w here you can call u p another
file. It does this by automatically opening a new w indow
w hen necessary and keeping the directory in an old
window .
default nw=2 Same as NW=1 except XyWrite does not
automatically close the current w indow w hen you
execute ABORT.
default nw=0 Disables automatic w indows. You must
o p en and close w indow s manually.
NW is described further in a note titled "Automatic New
Window" under the CALL com m and in Chapter 2.

DEFAULT SQ S eq u en tial Page N um bering. SQ changes the w ay the

TYPE,a-b com m and counts pages as it prepares to send
them to the printer. (The initial default is 0.)

default sq=1 Sets the TYPE com m and to refer to the

pages sequentially, starting at the beginning of the file.
This setting disregards the printed page num bers (which
can be changed with SP, Set Page Number). Thus,
type chapter,5 w ould print the fifth page in the file
counting from the start of the file, regardless of its printed
page num ber.
default sq=0 This is the way XyWrite is normally set up.
This setting enables the TYPE com m and to honor the
printed page num ber. Thus, type chapter,5 w ould print
the page w hich has page num ber 5 printed on it. This is
the num ber the Page-Line indicator shows. See the SP
(Set Page Num ber) com m and in the H eader & Footer
section of Chapter 4 for m ore details.

6-14
(cont’d) Default Settings

D e f a u lt TB Tab Character C ontrol - Lets you print each tab either

D efault
as a tab character or as spaces. (The initial default is 0.)
default tb=0 Causes XyWrite to convert every tab to
equivalent spaces on output to the printer.

S e t t in g s
default tb=1 Causes XyWrite to send tabs in the file to
the printer as the tab character (0 ), ASCII Value 9. This
setting is valuable for printing to disk (TYPEF) when you
want to retain tab characters. Use this setting when you
want to produce a file (with TYPEF) that keeps its tabs
(rather than converts them to spaces).

D efault TF Ignore Top Margin - Lets XyWrite ignore the top margin
(TP) embedded command. (The initial default is 0.)
default tf=1 Causes XyWrite to ignore the top margin
(TP) command. You would use this if the top margin has
been set by hand and the file contains a TP command
that you want to override.
default tf=0 - Causes XyWrite to honor the top margin
(TP) command. See the "Page Length" section of Chapter
4 for details on the TP command.

D efault UL U nderline Setting - Specifies how tabs and spaces are

underlined within text that is underlined with MD UL.

For details, see the note "Controlling Underlining" in the

Character Mode section of Chapter 4.

D efault vu Vertical Unit - Specifies number of basic units in a

vertical unit. Similar to DU. For details, refer to the
description of the VU setting in the Printer File section
later in this chapter. (The initial default is 1,1,100.)

D efault wb W indow Border Characters - Defines the characters

that are used for the borders of the windows. Use the
less-than sign (<) when specifying the characters. (The
initial default is shown below as an example.)
default wb<ul,ur,hz,ll,lr,vt Format of WB setting, where
ul is the character in the upper left corner, ur is upper
right comer, hz is horizontal sides, 11 is lower left corner,
Ir is lower right corner, and vt is vertical sides.
default wb< if =h=ilJH Example of WB setting.

6-15
Default Settings (cont’d)

D efault ws W hole-Space Justification - Lets you choose between

whole-space and micro-space justification. (The initial
default is 0.)
default ws=1 - When you specify justification (with JU),
this setting causes XyWrite to justify text by adding whole
spaces between words (rather than using partial spaces)
and no space within words. Whole-space justification is
much faster than microjustification on some printers, and
is preferred in those cases.
default ws=0 - When you specify justification (with JU),
this setting causes XyWrite to jusify text using partial
spaces — what we call "microjustification".

VA VA Settings. VA settings indicate the status of XyWrite.

S ettings The value is inserted at the current cursor location.

va $FI Current Filenam e - Displays the name of the current

file.

VA $PA Current Drive and Path - Displays the current drive

letter and path.

VA $PG Current Page - Displays the page number where the

cursor is currently located.

VA $ME M emory Available - Shows the amount of memory

(RAM) currently available, in kilobytes, after XyWrite is
loaded. Thus, 312 means 312K of memory is available for
more files or other programs.

VA $W N W indow Num ber - Displays the number of the window

number that is currently active (0-9).

VA $WS W indow Status - Displays the status of the window

where the cursor is currently located:

0 No file open, window is empty

1 File is open
2 Directory is displayed

6-16
 Default Settings

DEFAULT CK sp e llin g C hecker. The DEFAULT CK (Checker)

D efault
setting allows you to select certain options for Spelling
Checker operation.

S;
default ck=0 This is the default. It causes the Spelling
Checker to check w ords that contain num bers and
letters (e.g., 12th) and to ignore the autom atic replace­
m ent feature with the SPELL and CORRECT
commands.

default ck=1 This setting causes the Spelling Checker

to ignore all w ords that start with a num ber.

default ck=2 This setting causes the Spelling Checker

to use the automatic replacem ent feature w ith the
SPELL and CORRECT commands.

default ck=3 This setting is a com bination of the last

tw o settings. It causes the Spelling Checker to ignore
all w ords that contain num bers and to use the auto­
matic replacem ent feature with the SPELL and
CORRECT commands.

DEFAULT HS H eader Size. The DEFAULT HS (H eader Size) setting

allows you to set the size of the com m and field. This
is useful if you are using a memory-resident program
that puts information onto the com m and line. W hen
you define the size of the com m and field, XyWrite
ignores data that is beyond the point you specify. That
means you can use the com m and field to do searches,
compile indexes, and run program s w ithout having
XyWrite pick u p data from the m em ory-resident
program as part of its com m and string.

default hs=n Format of the HS setting, w here n is the

num ber of characters in the field. The default setting is
79, w hich means the entire com m and line is used.

default hs=45 Example of HS setting.

If - 40 / iZ'O 0 2-"

6-17A
Default Settings (c o n t’d)

D efau lt S T S h o w T ab s. T he DEFAULT ST (Show Tabs) setting

allow s y ou to select th e w ay tabs are displayed in
e x p a n d e d m ode.

default st=0 This is the default. It causes tabs to b e

d isp lay ed in e x p a n d e d m o d e as spaces.

default st=1 This setting causes the tab character to

b e displayed in e x p a n d e d m ode.

D efau lt W O W ord O v erstrik e E d itin g . T he DEFAULT W O (W ord

O verstrike) setting allow s three overstrike typing
m o d es for text entry.

default wo=0 This is th e default. It causes text e n te re d

at the cursor to overw rite text characters a n d w o rd
sep arato rs except carriage retu rn an d tab characters.

default wo=1 This setting causes text e n tered at th e

cursor to overw rite all text an d w o rd separators except
the space, tab, an d carriage retu rn characters.

default wo=2 This setting causes text e n te re d at the

cursor to overw rite text characters b u t n o t w o rd s e p a ­
rators.

A u d ib l e A u d ib le S ig n a ls. XyWrite u ses several au d ib le signals

S ig nals to notify you th at a certain action has h a p p e n e d . Y ou
can define the to n e an d d u ratio n o f each o f the
follow ing signals b y en terin g the setting:

DEFAULT # # = to n e,d u ratio n

w h ere # # is o n e o f the follow ing four settings, a n d

tone an d duration are n u m b ers from 0 to 65534.

D efa u lt O B O v erstrik e B eep . T he OB (O verstrike B eep) setting

allow s y o u to define the to n e an d duration of the
b e e p you h ea r w h e n e v e r y o u overstrike a character.
T h e initial setting is 0,0 w h ich turns the overstrike
b e e p off.

6-17B
(cont’d) Default Settings

D efault EB Error Beep. The EB (Error Beep) setting allows you

D efault
to define the tone and duration of the beep you hear
whenever XyWrite detects an error. The initial setting
is 1536,12288.

S etting
D efault CB C orrection Beep. The CB (Correction Beep) setting
allows you to define the tone and duration of the
beep you hear whenever Spelling Checker automati­
cally corrects a misspelling for you. The initial setting
is 512,4096.

D efault kc Key Click. The KC (Key Click) setting controls an

audible click generated by XyWrite every time you
press a key. The initial setting is 0,0 which turns the
key click off.

VA
S ettings
VA $WC Word Count. Displays the total number of words
counted by the WC, WCB or SPELL command
(whichever was most recently executed).

VA $BD Bad W ords. Displays the number of questionable

words found by the SPELL command when it was last
executed.

6-17C
6-17D
(cont’d) Default Settings

VA $FS F ile Status - Displays the status of the files currently

D efault
open:

0 No files are open

S e t t in g s
Non-zero At least one file is open

VA $DT D isp la y M ode - Indicates the current display mode.

Similar to the setting va dt.

0 Expanded Display
1 Normal Display, no page-line num bers, n o markers
2 Normal Display, w /page-line num bers & markers
3 Normal display, w /page-line num bers, no m arkers
4 Normal display, no page-line num bers, no m arkers
5 Value of VA $DT w hen the file is typed to screen
(TYPES)
8 Value of VA $DT w hen the file is printed to printer
(TYPE)

6-17
Default Command DEFAULT

FORMAT EDDEFAULT (on Command Line or

in STARTUP.INT File)
DF nm=#, n m - # (in Printer File)
nm is the two-letter name of the command
= (equal sign) separates the name from the value
• is the value of the command
, (comma) separates commands
DEFAULT is an immediate command.

PURPOSE The DEFAULT command lets you change the value of

certain XyWrite settings.

For example, if you don’t want backup files to be saved

(because you need more room on your disk), you can
turn off the backup of files with the command DEFAULT
BK=0.
When you change the DEFAULT settings, the change
affects all files — not only newly created files, but also
already existing files.

You can execute the DEFAULT command from the

Command Line; or you can store it in any of several files:
• Your Printer File (e.g., 3EPSONFX.PRN), where it can
be kept with all the other printer commands.
• The STARTUP.INT file.
• Another file you create just for defaults (you might call
it DEFAULT.PRN).

In which file do you put the default settings? To give a

general recommendation: If the default setting is
associated with your printer, then put the default in your
Printer File. Otherwise, put it elsewhere:
• Put the Printer & Display Settings into your Printer
File.
• Put the Format Settings and System Settings into
STARTUP.INT or DEFAULT.PRN.

6-18
(cont’d) Default Command

A ction E n terin g D efa u lts in to th e P rin ter F ile.

D efault
(Option I) To enter defaults into the printer file, do the following:
1. C all th e P rin ter F ile. Call to the display the printer

S e t t in g s
file you use. For example:
Type: \fb\ca 3epsonfx.prn0
2. F ind th e D efault C om m and. Search through the
Printer File for the DF command:
Type: [F5]se /df/CT
If the default com m and is not present, then add it in
the next step.
3. E nter th e D efau lt S ettin gs. Type into the default
statem ent the settings you want. For exam ple, to set
the tabs at 5, 10, 15, right margin at 70, and backup of
files turned on, type the following statement. (Type
this on its ow n line, with one space after the DF and
no other spaces.)
df ts=5,10,15,rm=70,bk=1
4. Store an d Load th e P rin ter F ile. To m ake the
Default com m and take effect:
Type: [F5lstorei^1
Type: (fUldprn 3epsonfx.prn0

Result: All new docum ents now begin w ith these

format conditions. Likewise, all existing docum ents
will take on these settings unless they have explicit
format settings (TS or RM) in them to override the
defaults. (For exam ple, you could override the default
right margin within the docum ent by entering the
em bedded com m and RM 80.)
5. V erify th e D efault C om m and. To dem onstrate that
the margin and tab settings you m ade in Step 3 are
now indeed active, open a new file:
Type: [F5]new t e s t s
Result: By looking at the ruler, you should see that the
new file has tabs at 5, 10, and 15, and a right margin at
70 (and backup of files turned on, w hich is not evident
until you save a file).

6-19
Default Command (cont’d)

A ctio n E n terin g D efa u lts in to STARTUP.INT.

(Option 2) For this procedure, refer to the section o n the
STARTUP.INT file later in this chapter. To enter the same
settings as in the previous procedure (O ption 1), you
w ould enter the line:
BC default ts=5J10,15,rm=70>bk=1<-
This statem ent begins w ith BC (Blank the Command Line)
like other com m ands in the startup file do.

A ctio n E n terin g D efa u lts fr o m th e C om m an d Line.

(Option 3) This m ethod of entering default settings from the
Com mand Line is appropriate w hen you w ant to change
a default temporarily, only for the current editing session.
To set the tabs at 5, 10 and 15, right margin at 70, and
backup of files turned on:
Type: [rejdefault ts=5,10,15,rm=70,bk=1 @
Result: These changes take effect im m ediately —
w henever you create a new docum ent or call an existing
one, until you quit XyWrite or change the defaults.

A l so S ee R esettin g th e D efau lts. After changing the default

settings, if you wish, you can return to the original
settings built into XyWrite with the DM (Default Margins)
com mand.

NOTE #1 P riority o f D efau lt S ettin gs. Com m ands em bedded in

text take priority over all other settings — over those
entered in the STARTUP.INT file, o n the Com mand Line,
o r in the Printer File. In other w ords, RM 80 em bedded
into the docum ent takes precedence over a default setting
o f RM=70 in the STARTUP.INT file, Printer File or on the
Com mand Line.
NOTE #2 U se o f Equal Sign. Notice the use of the equal sign (=)
— for exam ple, DEFAULT LM=5. This is in contrast to
the em bedded format com m ands w hich do not use an
equal sign: LM 5.

6-20
DM Restoring Defaults

FORMAT GUDM Restore Defaults

D efault
DM is an immediate com mand.

S e t t in g s
P u r p o se After changing the default settings, you can return to the
XyWrite built-in settings with the DM (Default Margins)
com m and. This com m and sets the following initial
conditions:

Form at Settings
AL=0 Automatic Leading
BF=0 Bottom Footnotes
TS=8,16,24,... Tab Set
FL Flush Left
HY=1 H yphenation
IP=0,0 Indent Paragraph
LM=0 Left Margin
LS=1 Line Space
NJ No Justification
OF=0,0 Offset
OP=2 O rphan
PL=55,0,0 Page Length
RM=78 Right Margin
SF=1 Set Footnote No.
TP=0 Top Margin
W D=|2 W idow

P rin ter an d D isp lay S ettin gs

EJ=0 Eject Page
FF=0 Form Feed
TB=0 Tab Character

S ystem Settings
BK=1 Backup Files

ACTION R esto rin g th e D efau lts

As with the DEFAULT com m and, you can enter DM at the
Com m and Line, in the Printer File, o r in the STARTUP.INT
file. In all three cases, you enter it as DM. The change
affects all existing and newly created files, and does not
supercede com m ands em bedded in the file.

6-21
Value of Variable VA

fo rm a t U V A nm Value of Variable
nm is a variable (see the table earlier in this section)
VA is an em bedded com m and.

P urpose VA obtains the current value (or string) of the variable

you request (nm) and inserts it into the text. For
exam ple, VA LM obtains the current Left Margin setting.

The list of variables you can use w ith VA is given at the

beginning of this section in the table "Default and VA
Settings."

You can also use the VA com m and in User Programs (see
Advanced User Programming, Chapter 5.)

A ction O b tain in g a V alue.

To get the current value of a XyWrite setting, say tabs
(TS), enter the VA com m and for that setting (VA TS):

1. Move the cursor to the point in text w here you w ant

to find the current tab settings.

2. Enter the VA com m and on the Com mand Line. For

exam ple, to find out the tab settings:

Type: [F5]va t S 0

Result: The display will show the tabs settings at that

location in the text. For example:

a 8 ,16,24,32,40,48,56

6-22
 Help Files

I ntro You might not expect Help Files to be included in a

chapter on customizing. XyWrite allows you to create
your ow n help files from scratch, o r modify the ones w e
have provided.

C o ntents Page S ectio n C om m and

6-24 Displaying Help [Art] [re]

6-26 Loading a Help File LDHELP
6-28 Modifying Help Files
6-30 Help Frames

6-23
Displaying Help ma

F orm at Alt F9 Display Help

This is an immediate command.

PURPOSE The purpose of a Help File, of course, is to provide help.

Help Files remind you of the XyWrite commands, and
put useful information at your finger tips. You can modify
the Help Files, if you wish — see "Modifying Help Files"
later in this section.

ACTION A ccessing th e H elp File.

To use the Help File:

1. Press: Alt F9

Result: This displays the first level of help. You may

get either a single row of topics (on the ruler line) or
a full screen. (If you get an error message instead of a
help screen, see Note #1.)

2. Use the cursor keys to select a topic, then press

or strike the first letter of a menu word.

3- At any point within Help you can press either: [Esc] to

go back to the previous level of help or [Ait] [Fli] to
return to your work.

Stepping backwards through help screens is described in

Note #2.

NOTE #1 Error M essage. If you get an error message when you

press (MKML either (1) the Help File has not been loaded
into memory, or (2) the correct path name was left off the
LDHELP command. To remedy this, perform the
procedure "Loading the Help File" which follows.
Entering the path name along with LDHELP allows the
Help file to be accessed from any directory.

NOTE #2 Returning to the Last H elp Screen. If you exited the

Help File from several levels deep with [Art] [F 9 ] , you can
return directly to that point by using [M] 1Shift I[F 9 ].

6-24
(comd) Displaying Help

NOTE #3 E xitin g w ith I s a . A t any level of Help, pressing [Esc]

m oves you back to the previous level of Help. W hen
you are at the very first level of the Help, pressing [Esc
exits Help.

NOTE #4 HELP C om m and. You can enter the w ord HELP or just
a question mark (?) on the Command Line and XyWrite
displays the screen that appears w hen the program is first
entered. This screen shows the serial num ber, version
num ber and XyQuest address and phone num ber for
assistance. It also reminds you to press [M] [F9] to access
the Help screens.

6-25
Loading a Help File LDHELP

FORMAT E3LDHELP d .filename

d: is the drive w here the help file is located.

filename is LONG.HLP, SHORT. HLP, or a custom nam e
LDHELP is an imm ediate com m and.

P u r p o se The LDHELP (Load Help) com m and loads a Help index

into memory, giving you access to the entire H elp File.
Normally you include LDHELP in your STARTUP.INT file.

You m ust use LDHELP before you can access help with
[Äiti [F9l. Notice that to save memory, only a small part of
the Help File loads into m em ory — not the entire Help
File. W hen you press [Äitj[F9l, XyWrite accesses the disk
for the help information. Thus, you m ust keep the Help
File o n the disk, though you can keep it on any drive
(and in any directory) as long as you specify both the
drive and directory w hen you issue LDHELP.

XyWrite com es with tw o Help Files:

LONG.HLP
SHORT.HLP

LONG.HLP is a rather extensive on-line reference about

most of the features of XyWrite. It is intended to help
those w ho are just learning XyWrite.

SHORT.HLP is an abbreviated version of LONG.HLP. It is

designed as an everyday help for those w ho know
XyWrite and d o n ’t need the larger help file on their
w orking disk.

6-26
(c o n t’d ) Loading a Help File

A ction L oadin g a H elp F ile.

To load a Help File:
1. Enter LDHELP along with the file you w ant to access
— LONG.HLP or SHORT.HLP. Be sure to include the
drive and path name for the file — this allows the Help
File to be accessed even if you change directories or
drives. For exam ple, if LONG.HLP is located in the

H elp F il e
directory XYW off the root directory on drive C:
2. Type: [F5]ldhelp c :\x y w \lo n g .h lp 0

N o t e #1 L oading H elp o n Startup. To automatically load the

Help File u p o n entering XyWrite, include the LDHELP
com m and (with drive and path nam e) in the
STARTUP.INT file. (See STARTUP.INT later in this chapter
for the procedure.)

N o t e #2 PATH C om m and in DOS. If you specify the path to the

Help File in the DOS PATH com m and, you need not
specify the path in Step 2 above.

6-27
Modifying Help Files

INTRO M od ifyin g H elp F iles. You can modify the LONG.HLP

and SHORT.HLP files, or construct your own. These files
are constructed of help frames — each frame can be up
to a screenful of text. The best w ay to learn how to
modify a Help File is to call up that file and study it. The
rules that control the frames are:

1. Each frame starts with a line of text enclosed in

double curly braces. This line defines two things:
(1) the first character defines the type of help frame
and (2) the following w ords are keywords.
For example:

[{#keywordl,keyword!, . . . }} Format
{{6m argins,top margin,bottom margin}} Example

This exam ple defines a Type 6 frame, with three

keywords: "margins," "top margin" and "bottom
margin." You can access this help frame by any of the
keyw ords — they are all synonyms. In this exam ple,
you could call this help frame by the nam e "margins,"
"top margin," or "bottom margin." Separate the
keyw ords with commas.

2. The frame can be any of 12 types — Type 0 to Type

9, Type A or Type B. Some types display help only
on the Ruler Line, w hile others display full-screen.
For details, refer to "Types of H elp Frames" which
follows.

3. The keywords link frames together. They allow you to

move directly from one help frame (say, frame X) to
another (say, frame Y). You set this up by including a
keyw ord of frame Y in b o ld som ew here in the text of
frame X. W hen you press [Att] [F9] to view help frame
X, you can m ove the cursor onto the bold keyword,
and press 0 (Enter) to view help frame Y.

4. If there is m ore than one bold reference in a frame,

you can use the cursor keys to move from one to
another. As each reference is selected, it appears
highlighted.

6-28
(cont’d) Modifying Help Files

N o te #1 W ildcard K eywords. You can use the asterisk (*) as a

wildcard in a keyword. It means that any characters can
occupy the remaining positions. For example:
{{2char*}}
This frame would be found by any of the following:
character
characters
character string

NOTE #2 Keyword Length. There is no limit to the length of a

keyword. Shorter keywords are preferable, but not
required.

NOTE #3 Special K eywords. The dollar sign ($) indicates

keywords that control when a specific help frame can
appear. They are defined as follows:
$N Call this frame when no file is open on the screen
$F Call this frame when a file is open on the screen
$D Call this frame when a directory is on the screen
$B Call this frame when a block is defined in the
current file
$ * Call this frame for any of the above
$0 Call this frame directly from a key (see Note #4)
— similarly for $1 through $9 and $A through $Z
Call up the LONG.HLP or SHORT.HLP file and find these
special keywords to see how to use them.

NOTE #4 D irect A ccess to a H elp Frame from a Key. You can

access frames with keywords $0 through $9 and $A
through $Z directly from the keyboard by assigning the
corresponding Function Calls in the Keyboard File. (See
the Keyboard File later in this chapter.)

N o te #5 Ordering th e Frames. The frames do not have to be

listed in any particular order within the Help File.
However, if there are two frames with the same keyword,
the first occurrence is selected.

NOTE #6 M issing K eywords and R eferences. You can have

keywords that are not referenced and you can have
references for which there is no keyword. In either case,
when the user selects a keyword for which no frame is
defined, a wildcard frame is called, such as {{8**}}.
6-29
Modifying Help Files (con t’d)

H elp T yp es o f H elp F ram es. Following are descriptions of

F rames the twelve types of frames available in a help file. For
exam ples of the different types of frames, call u p a Help
File and study its frames.

All twelve types of frames start with: [{#,keyword)). The

com m a is optional. The keyword gives the help frame a
nam e so that it can be accessed by that nam e. You can
include several keywords so that the frame can be
accessed by different nam es. (For example, you might
nam e the SAVE m enu both SA and SAVE.)

T ype o R uler L ine H elp M enu.

F ram e A Type 0 help frame displays a m enu of keyw ords o n the
Ruler Line (the line below the Prom pt Line). The user
selects a m enu item with the cursor, then presses 0
(Enter) to o p en u p that help frame.

Constructing the Frame: A Type 0 help frame can be any

num ber of lines. The first line contains the num ber 0 and
keyw ords enclosed in curly braces. Each subsequent line
contains a keyw ord that is displayed o n the Ruler Line
w hen this help frame is used, follow ed by a com m a and
and text (usually a description o f the keyw ord) w hich
appears on the Prom pt line w henever the keyw ord is
selected.

T y pe i G eneral O ne-L ine H elp.

F ram e A Type 1 help frame can be used in three ways: to enter
a com m and o n the Com m and line; to insert text in a file;
to execute programs.

Constructing the Frame: A Type 1 help frame is three

lines. The first line contains the num ber 1 and keyw ords
enclosed in curly braces. The second line contains the
m essage that appears o n the Ruler line. This m essage
can include underlined (MDUL) areas w here the user
enters text. The third line can be defined in three ways,
as follows. In each variation, you can incorporate the text
from the underlined areas on line tw o by using variable
%1 to denote the first underlined area, %2 to denote the
second underlined area, and so on. You can define the
third line as:

6-30
(cont’d) Modifying Help Files

{{1 .OFFSET}}
Offset for odd pages for even pages__
OF %1 ,%2
• Text that is entered directly into the displayed file at
the current cursor location. To construct this type of
frame, you m ust start line 3 with an ASCII 1 (©). For
example:
{{1 AUTHOR}}
Enter the name of the author_____
©Written by: %1

• A program that is executed from the cursor location of

the displayed file. To construct this type of frame,
you m ust start line 3 with an ASCII 2 (B). For example:
{{1 STYLE}}
Enter the name of your style _______
BBC US %1 XC

Type 2 O n e -lin e H elp Bar fo r ASCII C haracters.

F ra m e A Type 2 help frame displays a string of characters on the
Ruler Line and the ASCII value of the selected character
on the Prom pt Line. Selecting a character with the cursor
puts the ASCII num ber for that character on the Prompt
Line. Pressing 0 (Enter) inserts this character into the
text w herever the cursor w as w hen the help w as selected.
Constructing the Frame: A Type 2 help frame is tw o lines.
The first line contains the num ber 2 and keyw ords
enclosed in curly braces. The second line consists of a
string of characters w ith no spaces betw een them. Each
character is interpreted as a m enu item on the Ruler Line.

Type 3 O ne-L ine H elp Bar fo r K eyw ords.

F ra m e A Type 3 help frame displays one line of text on the
Ruler Line. This text can have an underlined area
w here the user can type. Pressing £ 3 calls the help frame
that m atches the string of text entered.
Constructing the Frame: A Type 3 help frame is two lines.
The first line contains the num ber 3 and keyw ords
enclosed in curly braces. The second line is the text you
w ant displayed on the Ruler Line. An underlined area on
this line perm its text entry.

6-31
Modifying Help Files (cont’d)

T ype 4 H elp for Key A ssignm ents.

FRAME A Type 4 help frame displays a message on the Ruler
Line. When the user presses a letter key, the character is
displayed on the Prompt Line. If the user presses a key
that has function calls assigned to it, those Function Calls
are displayed (such as CR for Cursor Right). If there is a
match between the Function Call and any Type 8
keyword, then that frame is displayed for a minimum of
two seconds. To exit this frame, press [Esc].

Constructing the Frame: A Type 4 help frame is two lines.

The first line contains the number 4 and keywords
enclosed in curly braces. The second line of the frame is
the message to be displayed on the Ruler Line. When
you want to call a full-screen frame from a Type 4 frame,
call a Type 8 frame (rather than a Type 6 frame).

T ype 5 General Full-Screen H elp.

F ram e A Type 5 help frame can be used to enter text into the
displayed file or to execute a program. It can contain
underlined areas for the user to enter text. When the
frame is displayed, the user can move from one underline
to the next with the cursor keys.

Constructing the Frame: A Type 5 help frame can be any

number of lines. The first line contains the number 5 and
keywords enclosed in curly braces. The next lines
contain the text, with underlined fill-in areas that you
want to display on the screen. At the end of the text to
be displayed, insert an ASCII 1 (d ) character or an ASCII 2
(0 ) character on a line by itself. An ASCII 1 character tells
XyWrite that the lines that follow are to be inserted as
text into a displayed file. An ASCII 2 character tells
XyWrite that the lines that follow are programs to be
executed. Use %1, %2, %3, and so on, to represent the
values from the first underline area, second underline
area, third underline area, and so on.

T ype 6 G eneral Full-Screen H elp.

F rame A Type 6 help frame displays general help not specific to
any particular command or Function Call. The user uses
the cursor keys to select any word or phrase in bold (the
word under the cursor appears in reverse mode) and
presses 0 to select further help. Call a Type 6 frame
from a Type 0 frame.
6-32
(cont’d) Modifying Help Files

Constructing the Frame: A Type 6 help frame can be any

num ber of lines. The first line contains the num ber 6 and
keyw ords enclosed in curly braces. All following lines
display on the screen. In the text, make keywords bold.

Type 7 O ne-Line H elp U sin g a D irectory.

F ra m e A Type 7 frame allows you to execute com m ands with a
directory on-screen. You might use com m ands such as
CALL, ERASE, LDHELP and CHDIR — these are all
com m ands that you can execute w hile pointing to a
filename with the cursor.

Constructing the Frame: A Type 7 can be any num ber of

lines. The first line contains the num ber 7 and keyw ords
enclosed in curly braces. Each subsequent line starts with
the w ord you w ant to appear on the Ruler line, followed
by a comma, the com m and you w ant to execute, and
then a space. After the space, you can include a
description of the com m and. All th e text following the
comma will appear on the Prompt line.

If the first character after the com m a is a hyphen (-),

Xywrite will call up the help frame with that nam e to
select more commands. For example:

{{7Directory}}
C a ll,C a ll a f i l e for e d itin g
Help,LDHELP (Load the Help F ile )
More,-More commands

{{7-More}}
Printer,LDPRN (Load Printer F ile )

T y pe 8 F ull-Screen H elp fo r F u n ction C alls.

F ram e A Type 8 help frame displays full-screen help particular to
Function Calls (as opposed to com m ands). Otherwise, it
is constructed and operates the sam e as a Type 6 frame.
Call a Type 8 frame from a Type 4 or Type 6 frame.

Constructing the Frame: A Type 8 help frame can be any

num ber of lines. The first line contains the num ber 8 and
keyw ords enclosed in curly braces. All following lines
display on the screen. In the text, m ake keyw ords bold.

6-33
Modifying Help Files (cont’d)

Type 9 H elp fo r Error M essages.

FRAME A Type 9 help frame calls up a full-screen help frame for
the last error num ber that the user received. For
exam ple, you might have the keyw ord "Error" in bold in
a general help screen (Type 0 or 6), and use the same
w ord "Error" as the keyw ord in your Type 9 frame. Then,
w hen the user selects the w ord "Error" from the general
help screen, the help frame corresponding to the last
error num ber displays. (Strictly speaking, there is no
Type 9 frame that displays — it is a dum m y frame that
simply holds a nam e for error m essage frames.)

Constructing the Frame: A Type 9 help frame is only one

line, w hich contains the num ber 9 and keyw ords
enclosed in curly braces. (If you set one of the keyw ords
to $E, you can access this feature with one keystroke.)
The message you w ant to appear associated with an error
should be entered as a Type 6 frame, with internal
XyWrite error num bers as keyw ords — for exam ple, the
Type 6 m essage frame for errors 12, 17 and 133 w ould be
defined by {{612,17,13311. Error num bers must be entered
w ithout leading zeros. You can look in the LONG.HLP
file for the current error assignments. All error num bers
are not included, as they are subject to change.

T y pe a K eycod e H elp fo r K ey a ssig n m en ts.

FRAME This frame is similar to a Type 4 frame. W hen you access
a Type A frame, a m essage appears on the Ruler Line.
Then w hen the user presses a key, XyWrite calls u p a
help frame with that keycode as its name. For example,
if you press the FI key (which is key #59), the help
frame nam ed "#59" is called up. The user presses 0 to
exit from this type of help frame.

Constructing the Frame: A Type A help frame is tw o lines.

The first line contains the letter A and keyw ords enclosed
in curly braces. The second line contains the m essage to
be displayed on the Ruler Line.

6-34
(corn’d) Modifying Help Files

T ype B Executing Com m ands by Number.

F rame When you call a Type B frame, a list of numbered items
(a "menu") is displayed. The user then presses a number
(1 through 9) and the command associated with that
number is executed.

Constructing the Frame: A Type B help frame can be up

to 19 lines long. The first line contains the letter B and

H elp Files
keywords enclosed in curly braces. What follows is up to
nine text lines (numbered), which are displayed on the
screen. The text lines are followed by the same number
of command lines. Each command line must start with an
ASCII 1 ((§) (XyWrite enters the line as text in the
displayed file) or an ASCII 2 (0 ) (XyWrite executes the
line as a program).

NOTE #7 A ccessing a H elp Frame from the Com m and Line.

You can assign the function call HL (Help) to a key (via
the Keyboard File) to pick up the first word on the
Command Line and call up the help frame with that
name.

N o te #8 D isplaying H elp A utom atically on Errors. By

specifying ER=1 in the Printer File, a full-screen help
frame is displayed whenever an error occurs (a different
frame appears for each error). Because this feature can
slow performance, it should only be set when a new user
is being trained. (You can also set ER with the DEFAULT
command.)

N o te #9 C hecking H elp Fields. You can include the HF embed­

ded command in Type 5 help frames to compare the
original values in an underlined area (a help field) with
the current values. If the values have not changed, the
line that follows is ignored. The format of the command
is:
G^HF nl,n2,n3
where nl,n 2 , and n3 are the help field numbers. You
must end this line with an El (End If) command.

6-35
6-36
 Automatic Hyphenation

I ntro Automatic hyphenation is really very easy to implement.

In Chapter 4 w e described how to use the HY com mand.
In this section w e describe the LDDICT com m and and the
hyphen exception dictionary DICTION.

C ontents Page S ection C om m and

6-38 Purpose
6-39 Loading the H yphen Dictionary LDDICT
6-40 Adding a Non-Breaking W ord to DICTION

Airro
6-41 Adding a Breaking W ord to DICTION
6-43 Showing H yphenation Points SHOHYP

H y p h e n a t io n

6-37
Automatic Hyphenation (cont’d)

P u r p o se XyWrite has an autom atic hyphen capability that breaks

w ords according to an internally defined set of rules.
Since English has exceptions to hyphenation rules, an
exception dictionary, DICTION, is provided to let you
customize the automatic hyphenation process.

You add w ords to DICTION and force them to break

w herever you like — or keep them from breaking at all.
Since it is an exception dictionary, it does not need to
have all of the w ords of the English language in it.

To switch on automatic hyphenation, you need to use

the LDDICT com m and. This com m and loads the hyphen
dictionary into memory. The HY em bedded com m and
then enables you to switch hyphenation off (and on) for
any docum ents or parts of docum ents. (HY is described
in the Alignment section o f Chapter 4.) You can also
modify the rules w hich specify how w ords are broken
with the HY printer setting found in the Printer File
(which is distinct from the HY format com m and).

6-38
LDDICT Loading the Hyphen Dictionary

FORMAT E3 LDDICT filename

filename is the nam e of a hyphen exception dictionary

LDDICT is an im m ediate com m and.

P urpose The LDDICT (Load Dictionary) com m and loads the

hyphen exception w ord dictionary. This turns on the
automatic hyphenation (since the default of the HY
com m and is HY ON).

Automatic hyphenation w orks as follows: At the end of

A uto
each line, XyWrite tests the last w ord as you type it in, to
determ ine if the w ord should be hyphenated. It first

H y p h e n a t io n
looks in the hyphen exception dictionary to see if the
w ord is present — if not, it uses its internal rules to break
the word.

The file that you load with LDDICT contains the

exceptions to the hyphenation rules. This is a standard text
file that you can edit. In this file you can control how you
w ant w ords to break or not break. Refer to the "Rules for
the Dictionary" listed later.

A ction L oading th e H y p h en D ictio n a ry .

To load the hyphen dictionary:

Enter the LDDICT com m and along with the filename

of the hyphen exception dictionary — let’s use
DICTION:

T ype: [F5]lddict d ictio n 5 3

Result: Automatic hyphenation is now turned on. The

file DICTION is loaded into memory. If you normally use
automatic hyphenation, you should include this com m and
in your STARTUP.INT file.

6-39
Loading the Hyphen Dictionary (cont'd)

N o t e #1 R ules fo r th e D iction a ry . W hen adding a w ord to

DICTION, use the following rules:

1. If you w ant to prevent the w ord from breaking, type

the w ord with no hyphens.

2. Include hyphens w here you w ant the w ord to break.

3. If your w ord is 7 characters or longer, you might w ant

to include an asterisk (*) at (or near) the end of the
word. (See Note #2.)

4. You d o n ’t have to include every form of a long w ord

you w ant checked. O ne form, with the asterisk in the
right place, might suffice for forms that end differently.
(See Note #3).

A ctio n A d d in g a N on -B reak in g W ord to DICTION.

The standard hyphen dictionary file that com es with
XyWrite is called DICTION. To add a w ord to this file:
1. Type: (F5]cal 1 d ic t io n ^
2. Let’s add the w ord "XyQuest" so that it does not
break. Since this w ould fall near the end of the file,
m ove to the end:
P re s s : Ctrl End

3. Enter the w ord "XyQuest" with no hyphen: (Notice

the w ord does not n eed to be capitalized.)
wor-ship
wor-thy
xyquest
xy-write
yard-age
4. Type: [ ? 5 ] s to r e 0
5. Type: [R jlddict d ic tio n ^ jj

Result: The w ord "XyQuest" has been added to your

hyphen dictionary and will no longer hyphenate at the
end of a line.

6-40
(comd) Loading the Hyphen Dictionary

ACTION A d d in g a B reak in g W ord to DICTION.

The w ord "parapsychology" breaks badly by the internal
rules (parap-sychology). To add this w ord to the
dictionary, w e call the file DICTION as before and move
the cursor to just after the w ord "palate":
1. Enter the w ord, including hyphens and an asterisk
(see Note #2):
Type: para-psy-chol-ogy*
Any hyphenation points after the 7th letter of a w ord
are overlooked unless you put in an asterisk.

Auro
2. Type: (F 5 ]s to re 0
3. Type: (F5]lddict d ic t io n ^

H y p h e n a t io n
NOTE #2 T he A sterisk. W hen an asterisk (*) is not present in a
w ord, LDDICT loads only the first 7 characters of that
w ord into its hyphen dictionary in m em ory — only these
characters are com pared to the text. To load m ore than
7, insert an asterisk after all the letters you w ant included.
Only the letters ahead of the asterisk are loaded into
memory.
NOTE #3 Saving D iction ary S pace. T h e d ic tio n a r y m e m o r y
buffer is 64K; to save space, you can place the asterisk so
one root w ord represents several forms. This is because
the part of a w ord after the first 7 letters (or after the
asterisk) is handled by the sam e internal rules that
hyphenate most words.
Take, for exam ple, the root w ord "approximate." The
dictionary contains "ap-prox-i-m*ate". H ere’s how other
forms will be broken:
approximately is treated as ap-prox-i-mate-ly
approximation is treated as ap-prox-i-ma-tion
approximating is treated as ap-prox-i-mat-ing
Before you enter a w ord and place the asterisk in it, jot
dow n all the alternate forms you w ant covered. Then put
the asterisk w here it correctly handles all or m ost of
them. Save and load the dictionary and try each form. If
one d o esn ’t break correctly, switch back to the dictionary
and experim ent with the placem ent of the asterisk, or list
the errant form separately.

6-41
Loading the Hyphen Dictionary (cont’d)

NOTE #4 Ordering the W ords. You don’t need to order the words
alphabetically in the dictionary . However, we
recommend that you insert the words alphabetically, to
help you locate words easier.

NOTE Loading D ictionary on Startup. To automatically load

the dictionary on entering XyWrite, enter the LDDICT
command into the STARTUP.INT file. (See STARTUP.INT
later in this chapter for this procedure.)

N o t e #6 Turning O ff H yphenation. You can turn off

hyphenation three ways:

1. Give the LDDICT command with no filename. This

clears the dictionary from memory and turns
hyphenation off.
2. Use the HY OFF embedded format command within a
document to turn it off (and HY ON to turn it on).
3. On the Command Line, type DEFAULT HY=0. (This is
an immediate command.)

A lso SEE Related Comm and. Refer to the Printer File for the HV
setting. This setting controls three hyphenation settings:

• The shortest word allowed to break.

• The fewest letters allowed before the hyphen.
• The fewest letters allowed after the hyphen.

6-42
SHOHYP Show Hyphenation

F orm a t BlSHOHYP filename Show Hyphenation

filename is the name of the file you want to check
SHOHYP is an immediate command.

P urpose The SHOHYP (Show Hyphenation) command enables

you to see all of the hyphenation points in a list of words.
It does this by creating a new file (HY.TMP) which lists
the words with all hyphens showing.
You would use SHOHYP, for instance, if you were a
lawyer and wanted to check the hyphenation on a set of

A ito
words peculiar to your profession. You would type up a
list of these words, store the file, and execute SHOHYP

H y ph en a tio n
on that file. You would then look over the hyphenated
words—if any were exceptions to the rules and did not
break properly, you could single them out and add them
to the DICTION file along with the proper hyphenation.

The file you check should not contain embedded

commands—thus, SHOHYP is not a command you would
run on just any file. (See the note below.)

A ction V iew in g Y ou r F ile’s H y p h e n a tio n P o in ts.

To view all of the hyphenation points in a list of words:
1. Create a file with the list of words whose hyphenation
you want to check. Be sure there are no embedded
commands in the file.
2. Store (or save) this file.
3. Type SHOHYP along with the name of this new file:
Type: [F5]shohyp l i s t S
Result: XyWrite creates a file HY.TMP containing the
words as they are hyphenated by XyWrite. Short words
are omitted. Call up HY.TMP and view this file. If any
words are improperly hyphenated, correct them and add
them to the hyphenation exception file DICTION.

N o te O m itting Embedded Com m ands. You should omit any

embedded commands from the file you are checking —
they are likely to cause problems. This includes character
modes (such as <<MDBO>>) and format commands
(« R M 5 0 » ).

6-43
6-44
 Keyboard File

,- I ntro The keyboard is your connection to XyWrite — you can

modify the keyboard functions to your liking. You can
re-arrange keys, and you can reduce the most
com plicated function to a single keystroke. You can
make the keyboard help you rather than fight you.

This section also covers the Function Calls, w hich form

the foundation of XyWrite. O nce you becom e familiar
with the Keyboard File, you may find yourself inventing
new com binations of functions to best serve your
purpose.

Page S ection C om m and

6-46 Purpose
6-48 How to Modify Your Keyboard File
6-52 Re-Assigning a Key
6-53 Examples

K eyboard
6-53 Com m and Keys
6-54 O vercom ing the IBM Left Shift Key
6-56 Load Keyboard File LDKBD
6-57 Function Calls

F iu e

6-45
Keyboard File (c o n t’tl)

PURPOSE Did y ° u ever wish y ° ° could change the meaning of the

keys on the keyboard? in this section you will learn how
to change a key or even the whole keyboard to suit your
own needs.
H ere are som e sim ple ways you can change the
Keyboard File:
• Add c o n v e n ie n c e . For exam ple, m ove the
troublesom e left shift key (on the standard IBM
keyboard) to a m ore convenient key. You m ight
sw ap it w ith the backslash key.
• C reate sh o r tc u ts. For exam ple, assign the key
com bination Jcw]S to be a sh o rtcu t for [Fs]store 0 , to
store a file.
• A ssig n n e w fu n c tio n s to k ey s. You can alter the
Keyboard File to do things you co u ld otherw ise not
do. You can assign any o f the Function Calls you
prefer to a key. For exam ple, you can change the
cursor u p and dow n keys to Linear Up (LU) and
Down (LD). Linear Up and Down allow the cursor
to move directly u p or dow n w ith o u t ever
sw itching colum ns.
You generally assign basic functions to the Keyboard
File. From these you can co n stru ct m ore elaborate
ro u tin es in Program Files.
Before you learn key assignm ent, you sh o u ld know how
XyWritc takes keyboard in p u t and puts the desired
character on the screen. This is done w ith key codes in
a keyboard file called IBM.KBD contained on the
original XyWritc disk.
The figure on the facing page show s how each key is
num bered. For exam ple, w hen you strike key num ber
30, the Keyboard File translates code 30 to mean the
letter ‘A’.
You use the LDKBD (Load Keyboard) com m and to load
a new keyboard m eaning into XyWrite. It is a feature of
XyWrite that you can load a Keyboard File any tim e that
XyWritc is running. This com m and is described near
the end o f this section.

6-46
 (c o n t'd ) Keyboard File

KEYBOARD DIAGRAM

STANDARD IBM KEYBOARD

K eybo ar d
IBM PC/AT KEYBOARD

F ile
F1 F2
59

F3
61

F5
63

F7

65

F9 F10
6/

6-47
Keyboard File (cont'd)

H ow to M odify Y our K eyboard File. This section

describes how a Keyboard File is constructed. The
IBM.KBD file is organized into five part:
1. Comments Example: ;END OF TABLE
2. N um ber of Keys Example: KEYS=84
3. Shifting Keys Example: CTRL=29
4. Tables Example: TABLE=CTRL
5. Key definitions Example: 30=a
Each of these parts requires som e explanation:
1. C om m en ts. Every line that begins with a semicolon
is a com m ent — it has no effect on key assignments.
2. N um ber o f K eys. The first definition in the Keyboard
File is the KEYS statement. There are 83 keys o n a
standard IBM keyboard. However, to accom m odate
the IBM PC/AT keyboard, w hich has 84 keys, w e use
the statement:
KEYS=84
3. S hifting K eys. The IBM.KBD file com es with five
shifting keys w hich define four shifting states. (Keys
42 and 54 are both assigned the sam e state: SHIFT.)
Each shifting key shifts the keyboard to a new set of
key definitions. The shifting states are defined by:
CTRL=29
ALT=56
SHIFT=42,54,N
CAPS=58,T:C
For exam ple, w hen you press [Ait] and the letter A, you get
a Save/Get, defined in the Alt table as @A.
XyWrite can have u p to a total of six shifting states
(using any nam es you w ant — no num bers allowed).
That is, if you keep these four states, you can define
two m ore (or you could delete these four and define
six new ones). You can use these keys alone
(TABLE=CTRL) or in com bination (TABLE=CTRL+ALT)
to create up to 20 tables. For exam ple, you could
define the Escape key \Esc\ to be a shifting key, to
change the keyboard to G reek letters.
The order of these definitions defines their priority. In
the above exam ple, if you press both the CTRL and
CAPS LOCK keys, the CTRL table prevails.

6-48
(cont'd) Keyboard File

KEYBOARD FILE - IBM.KBD

jj^STANNDPA
STA ARD IBM KFY80ARD TABLE

\*
TABLE-4 (4) Tables
1*44
2-14
3=24 (5) Key Definitions
>
TA B LE -C TR L4
1*»4 5
2=m l 4 T5
3*0124 £
* .
TABl F * C T R L + A L T , S H I F T * A L T , CTRL- »-ALT+SH1 F T , C T R L ♦ S H I F T 4
1-44
2*14
3-24
Ktjr.t...................... ............................................
TA B L E -S H IF T 4
1 —« 4
2 = *4
3-5)4
.Î-.VA4...............
W..............
TA B LE -C A PS 4
1-4 4
2-14
3*24

W .................................
T A B L E -S H IF T ♦CAPS4
1 —« 4
2*>4
3*5)4
.........................
TA B L E - A L T 4
1=4 ♦
2 = 31 4
3-324 ...........
■trc-vi*<.................... *
B 3*R H 4
0 L -4
Î4
; END OF KEYBOARD T A 0 lf<

Lines beginning w ith sem i-colons (;) are com m ents. , , _

6-49
Keyboard File (c o n t'd )

O p tio n s fo r s h iftin g k e y d e fin itio n s.

,N N um eric Lock
,T :n Toggle
,S :n Single-Shot
n is any le tte r you specify. It is displayed in the u p p er
right-hand co rn er of the screen. It indicates that the
Toggle Key is on, or that th e Single-Shot key is arm ed.
N (N um eric Lock) indicates that w hen you press that
key, the sense o f the N um eric Lock key changes. In the
exam ple S H IF T = 42,54,N statem ent, if N um eric Lock is
on, pressing eith er Shift key changes the n u m b er pad
back to a cursor pad.
T (Toggle) defines a key as a toggle shifting key — that
is, it sw itches o n the first tim e you press it and o f f the
n ex t tim e. You can define u p to four toggle keys —
CAPS LOCK and th ree others (N um Lock, Scroll Lock
and A utom atic U ppercase do not co u n t — they are not
toggle sh iftin g keys). You can display any le tte r in the
header w hen a toggle key is on. For exam ple,
CAPS= 58,T:C causes the letter ‘C ’ to appear w hen you
press the ¡CapsLockl key. The C ’ disappears w h en you
press the Caps Lock key again.
S (Single-Shot) specifies that the shifting key does not
have to be held dow n w hen pressing the next key. For
exam ple, if you define CTRL=29,S:A you could
ex ecu te [Ctri]Z by pressing the [Ctrl] key, releasing it, then
pressing the letter Z. The letter ‘A’ w o u ld ap p ear in the
header w h en you press [Ctrl], and w o u ld turn off w hen
you press the Z. Single-Shot shifting is especially useful
for p eo p le w ith a typing handicap.
(co n fd ) Keyboard File

4. T ables. The Keyboard File 1BM.KBD is m ade up of

seven tables. (You can create u p to 20 tables.) Fach
table is like having an en tire new keyboard. The
seven tables arc:
TABLE=
TABLE=CTRL
TABLE=CTRl+ALT,SHIFT+ALT,CTRL+SHIFT.CTRL+ALT+SHIFT
TABLE=SHIFT
TABLE=CAPS
TABLE=SHIFT+CAPS
TABLE=ALT
Each table begins w ith a TABLE = statem ent.
Follow ing the TABLE = CTRL statem ent, for
exam ple, you w ill find th e table w h ich ap p lies
w hen th e CTRL key is pressed.

5. K ey D efin itio n s. Follow ing th e TABLE =

statem ent you w ill find the key definitions.

K eybo ard
Format: # = / / / 2 / 3 , ...
* is the keycode — a n um ber from 1 to 83

F ile
f l J 2 xf3,.-- are Function Calls or characters
Examples:
30=a The letter ‘a ’ is assigned to key
nu m b er 30.
72=CU The function CU (C ursor IJp) is
assigned to key 72.
80=MU, LD The tw o functions MIJ, LD
(Move Up, Linear Down) are
assigned to kev 80.
31=BC,S ,a ,V ,e ,XC The com m and SAVE is ex ecu ted
by the series of keystrokes BC
(Blank Com m and Line),
spelling SAVE, and XC
(E xecute)
N otice in this last exam ple that w hen you en ter
text, each character is separated by a com m a.

6-51
Keyboard File (cont’d)

A c t io n R e -A ssig n in g a K ey
To demonstrate how to re-assign a key, we will show
how to change the ¡Ctrl]-Up Arrow key combination to
move the cursor up five lines at a time.
1. Call the Keyboard File to the screen:
Type: [re]ca ibm.kbdp]
2. Use the SEARCH command to find the table for the
[Ctri] key.
Type: [F 5 ]s e /TABLE=CTRL/[f9]
You may have to continue the search with JF9] two
or three times until you find a list of keycodes that
begins with this statement.
3. Referring to the illustration, you can see Cursor Up
is 72.
Type: [F5]se /7 2 /p ]
Result: The cursor stops on the line reading:
72=CU«e
CU is a fu n c tio n call — it means Cursor Up. (Each
time it is executed, it moves the cursor up one
row.)
4. Change this line to read:
72=CU,CU.CU,CU,CU<-
5. Store the Keyboard File.
Type: [re] s t o r e Q

6. Load the altered Keyboard File into memory.

Type: [rejldkbd i b m . k b d ®

Now, while holding down [Ctri], hit the Up-Arrow key.

The cursor moves up five lines. With a similar
procedure, it is easy to create a [ctiil-Down Arrow
function w hich will move the cursor down five lines.

6-52
(cont’d) Keyboard File

Ex a m p l e Command Keys. There are many commands you use

in XyWritc. You store or save files and probably call the
same file many times during a session. Let’s see how
you can create a command key so you can save a file by
pressing ICtrflS.
1 . Type: Jre]ca ibm.kbd0

2. Note that the code for S is 31. Search for the CTRL
table.
Type: (F5]se /table= ctrl/[F 9] [re][re]
Result: The cursor should now be positioned at
the top of the CTRL table.
3. Find code 31:
Type: [F5]se / 3 1 / y
4. Change the line to read:
31=BC,s,a,v,e,XC<

K eyboard
5. T yp e : [re ] s to re @

6. Type: [rejldkbd i b m . k b d H

F ile
Analysis. Before trying out this new command (in Step
4), let’s see just what it does step-by-step:
BC clears the Command Line (the same as key [re]).
The four letters SAVE are typed on the Command
Line.
XC executes the SAVE command (the same as key
EH)-
To try out this new command, call any file to the
screen. Then press |Ctrl]S — this should save the file to
disk.

6-53
Keyboard File (cont’d)

EXAMPLE O vercom in g th e IBM Left Shift Key. The IBM PC

keyboard presents an interesting challenge for new users
w ho are used to an ordinary typewriter. Since the left
Shift key is not next to the 2 key, you probably found
yourself hitting the backslash key w henever you w anted
to use the Left Shift. W ouldn’t it be easier if the
backslash key could be sw itched with the left Shift key?

ACTION M o v in g t h e T r o u b le s o m e L eft S h ift K e y .

H ere’s how you can reverse the codes for these two keys
so you can use the backslash key (43) as the left Shift key
(42). Let’s sw ap keys by changing every occurrence of 42
to 43 and every occurrence of 43 to 42.

1- Type: [£5]ca ib m .k b d f^ l

2. Type: [F5]se / 4 2 = / 0

Result: The cursor should stop at a "42=" with a "43="

nearby.

3. Change "42" to "43".

4. Change the nearby "43" to "42".

3. To find the next occurrence of code 42:

Press: [F9

6. Repeat Steps 3, 4 and 5 until you receive the NOT

FOUND prom pt on the PRMPT line.

7. Change the nam e of the SHIFT function — for

example:

Type: [F5]ch /SH IFT/X SH IFT/0

8. Type: [ F 5 ls to re d

9. Type: [F5]ldkbd i b m . k b d 0

Tiy out the new Keyboard File and see if the changes
work. Press the old left Shift key — this should now
m ake a backslash (\). Try the old backslash key as a
shift key by typing a capital ‘A.’
6-54
(c o n td ) Keyboard File

N o te #1 E xecu tin g F u n ctio n Calls as C om m ands. The FUNC

com m and allows you to execute any of the tw o-letter
Function Calls directly from the Com mand Line. The
Function Call is executed as though it w ere assigned to a
key and you pressed that key. This is a great way to
execute seldom -used functions that are not assigned to
keys.
To execute a Function Call from the Command Line, enter
FUNC follow ed by the Function Call you w ant to execute.
For instance, to execute the function NM (N o Marker):
Type: {F5]func n m g
In this case, the form at triangles and carriage-return
arrow s normally displayed on-screen are hidden from your
view (although they remain em bedded in the file).

N o te #2 Ctrl! vs. [Art] Key. The [Ajt] key is used for Save/G et keys A-
Z and 0-9. T herefore, w hen using the Keyboard File to

K eybo ard
assign new functions to keys A-Z or 0-9, you m ight use
the (Ctrt] key instead, and leave the [Alt] key free for Save/
Gets.

F ile
N o te # 3 K eep O ld L ines as C om m en ts. W hen you m odify a
line in th e Keyboard File, it’s often a good idea to keep
the o ld line by m aking it a com m ent. This way you can
rem em ber w hat the key used to do in case you w ant to
revert it to its previous function. Put a sem i-colon (;) in
front of the old line. Some p eo p le use three sem i-colons
to em phasize that it was intentionally rem oved. For
exam ple, if you w ere to change key 72 from CU to HI:
;;;72=CU
72=LU

n o t e #4 M ultiple Character Assignm ent. W henever you use

m ore than one character in a key assignment, you must
start the assignm ent with a function call. If no other
function call is appropriate, use CS (Clear Scroll Lock).
For exam ple, the assignment 74=J,o,h,n w ould not work,
w hereas 74=CS,J,o,h,n w ould work. (If a key assignment
does not begin w ith a function call, only the first
character is read.)

6-55
Load Keyboard File LDKBD

FORMAT S3 LDKBD file n a m e Load K eyboard File

file n a m e is th e K eyboard File to be loaded.
LDKBD is an im m ediate com m and.

P urpo se The LDKBD (Load Keyboard File) com m and loads the
Keyboard File you specify into m em ory for use. A
Keyboard File does not take effect u n til it is loaded w ith
LDKBD.

A c t io n L o a d in g a K ey b o a rd F ile
To load a keyboard file into memory:
Enter the LDKBD com m and along w ith the nam e of
the Keyboard File you w ant to load. For exam ple:
Type: [F5]ldkbd ibml.kbd[*3
Result: Keyboard File IBM1 KBD is now in effect.

N o te #1 R eq u irem en t. It is not m a n d a to r y that you load a

Keyboard File. XyWrite com es w ith its ow n keyboard
file built-in. You only have to load a Keyboard File if
you w ish to m o d ify th e keyboard from its standard
settings.

N o te # 2 Startup. In o rd er to use a Keyboard File you have

altered, you m ust load it each tim e you run XyWrite.
You can have your Keyboard File autom atically loaded
at startup by adding the LDKBD com m and to your
STARTUP.INT file.

6-56
 Function Calls

P u r po se Function Calls are tw o-letter instructions that rep resen t

basic Keyboard actions. Function Calls are assigned to
keys in the Keyboard File. For exam ple, 77 = CR means
that C ursor Right is assigned to th e cu rso r right-arrow
key (key # 7 7 ). Similarly, DL means define a line of text,
CP m eans copy the defined block of text, and M2 means
set bold mode.
T here are tw o ways you can ex ecu te these Function
Calls: (1 ) in the Keyboard File, and (2 ) w ith the FUNC
com m and on the Com m and Line. These are both
d escribed in the previous section "Keyboard File."
Function Calls also appear in Program Files -- for
exam ple BC appears in th e STARTUP. 1NT file.
To ex ecu te several Function Calls in seq u en ce w ith one
keystroke, assign them to a key, separating them w ith
com m as. For exam ple, 77 = CR,CD w o u ld move the
cursor right and then dow n.

K
eybo ard
NOTE U ser P ro g ra m m in g . All of these Function Calls can be
used in program s ex cep t TS (Toggle Scroll Lock). TS

F il e
cannot be en tered into a program file, since you use it
to begin and end the recording o f a program . The
Function Calls are arranged in the follow ing categories:
ASCII C haracters
C haracter Modes
C olum ns
C om m and Line
Copying and Moving Text
C ounters/N um beri ng
C ursor M ovement in T ext Area
Defining a Block o f Text
D eleting Text
F oreign/O verstrike Characters
H elp
Math
N orm al/E xpanded Display and PG-LN
Save/G ets
Search
System
Toggle Keys
W indows

6-57
Function Calls (cont’d)

FUNCTION CALLS — Listed by Type

The keys listed in the right-hand column are those provided in the original IBM.KBD file.
You can change these assignments.

FUNCTION CALL KEY

ASCII CHARACTERS
RO ASCII 0 - Enter the single dig t ASCII 0 Alt Shift 0
R1 ASCI11 - Enter the single dig t ASCI11 Alt Shift 1
R2 ASCII 2 - Enter the single dig t ASCI I 2 Alt Shift 2
R3 ASCII 3 - Enter the single dig t ASCII 3 Alt Shift 3
R4 ASCII 4 - Enter the single dig t ASCII 4 Alt Shift 4
R5 ASCII 5 - Enter the single dig t ASCII 5 Alt Shift 5
R6 ASCII 6 - Enter the single dig t ASCII 6 Alt Shift 6
R7 ASCII 7 - Enter the single dig t ASCII 7 Alt Shift 7
R8 ASCII 8 - Enter the single dig t ASCII 8 Alt Shift 8
R9 ASCII 9 - Enter the single dig t ASCII 9 Alt Shift 9

CHARACTER MODES
MO Mode 0, Reset - Text which you type is entered in I Ctrl 10
the mode that exists at the cursor location
M1 Select Normal Mode - Text which you type is ÍCtril 1
entered in the normal mode (not highlighted)
M2 Select Bold Mode - Text which you type is entered ÍCtrp2
in bold
M3 Select Underline Mode - Text which you type is ICtrl 13
entered in underline
M4 Select Reverse Mode - Text which you type is entered |Ctril4
in reverse mode
M5 Select Bold Underline Mode - Text which you Ctrl 5
type is entered in bold underline
M6 Select Bold Reverse Mode - Text which you type is Ctrl 6
entered in bold reverse
M7 Select Superscript Mode - Text which you type is fCtrf] 7
entered in superscript
M8 Select Subscript Mode - Text which you type is 1Ctril 8
entered in subscript

6-58
(cont’d) Function Calls

COLUMNS
TL Table Column Left - Move the cursor one column to Shift *-|
the left in the column table.
TR Table Column Right - Move the cursor one column to Shift ■+■
the right in the column table.
TE Table Entry - Create a new row of entries in the Shift Ins
column table.
HC Home Column - Move the cursor to the top of the Shift Home
current entry in the column table.
EE Erase Entry - Delete a row of entries in the Shift Del
column table.
EC End Column - Move the cursor to the bottom of Shift End
the current entry in the column table.
ED Entire Row Define - Define the current row of (none)
cells in the column table.
MC Mark Cell - Define the cell where the cursor is located Shift F1
in the column table.

K eyboard
COMMAND LINE

F ile
BC Blank the Command Line - Clear the Command Line [F5
and move the cursor next to the start of the
Command Line.
CC Change Cursor - Move cursor between the Command [H O
Line and text.
XC Execute - Execute the command which is currently [F9
on the Command Line.
CH Clear Header - Erase the text on the CM line (none)
without moving the cursor
GH Go to Header - Move cursor from the text to the
previous cursor position on the Command Line (none)
without clearing the Command Line.
GT Go to Text Area - Move cursor from the Command Line (none)
to the previous cursor position in the text area.

COPYING AND MOVING TEXT

CP Copy Defined Block of Text - Copy the currently [£7
defined block of text to the cursor position
MV Move Defined Block of Text - Move the currently [f8
defined block of text to the cursor position

6-59
Function Calls (cont’d)

COUNTERS/NUMBERING
CO COUNTER 0 - Insert the format command CO in the text. (n o n e )
to
C9 COUNTER 9 - Insert the format command 09 in the text. (n o n e )

CURSOR MOVEMENT IN TEXT AREA

CR Cursor Right - Move right one character; wrap to next line 0
CL Cursor Left - Move left one space; wrap to previous line 0
CU Cursor Up - Move cursor up one line 0
CD Cursor Down - Move cursor down one line 0
LR Cursor Linear Right - Move cursor right one character; (n o n e )
allowable to move past the carriage return
LL Cursor Linear Left - Move cursor left one character; (n o n e )
do not wrap to previous line
LU Cursor Linear Up - Move cursor directly up one line (n o n e )
LD Cursor Linear Down - Move cursor directly down one (n o n e )
line
PW Previous Word - Move cursor to previous word 1 0
NW Next Word - Move cursor to start of next word ® 0
PT Previous Tab - Move cursor to previous tab position 1Shift IfT a b l
NT Next Tab - Move cursor to the next tab without moving Ctrl Tab
the text
EL Express Left - Move cursor to far left of line [M 1 0
and then to left end of previous lines
ER Express Right - Move cursor to far right of line and then Ctrl 0
alternately to start and end of subsequent lines
LB Line Begin - Move cursor to far left of line and no further (n o n e )
LE Line End - Move cursor to far right of line and no further (n o n e )
PL Previous Line - Move cursor to start of previous line (n o n e )
NL Next Line - Move cursor to start of next line (n o n e )
PS Previous Sentence - Move to start of previous sentence (n o n e )
NS Next Sentence - Move cursor to start of next sentence (n o n e )
PP Previous Paragraph - Move to start of previous paragraph (n o n e )
NP Next Paragraph - Move cursor to start of next paragraph (n o n e )
HM Home - Move cursor to the top of the screen iHom e
BS Bottom of Screen - Move cursor to bottom of screen End
MD Move Down - Scroll text and cursor down one line. Ctrl 2

6-60
(corn’d) Function Calls

MU Move Up - Scroll text and cursor up one line. 130

PD Page Down (Next Screen) - Scroll down one screen iPgDnl
PU Page Up (Previous Screen) - Scroll up one screen PgUp
PF Previous Formatted Page - Move cursor to first line Alt PgUp
of previous printed page
NF Next Formatted Page - Move cursor to first line Alt PgDn
of next printed page
TF Top of File - Move cursor to top of the file [Ctrl] |Home|
BF Bottom of File - Move cursor to the bottom of the file [Ctrl End

DEFINING A BLOCK OF TEXT

DF Define Block - Begin or end defining a block of any size [EH
DW Define Word - Define the word the cursor is on EDGES
DL Define Line - Define the line of text the cursor is on EH
DS Define Sentence - Define the sentence the cursor is on Ctrl F4
DP Define Paragraph - Define paragraph the cursor is on 1
ÍShiftl F4|
DC Define Column - Begin defining a column of text ED EH

K eyboard
XD Cancel Define - Release the defined block of text ED
YD Cancel Define (Variation) - Similar to XD — releases (none)
defined text but don’t close a footnote screen

F il e
or other such screen. (Used in programming).

DELETING TEXT
RD Rubout Defined Block - Erase defined block of text Alt F6
BD Backspace Delete - Delete the previous character Backspace
RC Rubout Character - Erase character at point of cursor Del
RW Rubout Word - Erase the word the cursor is on ÍAit iDeil
RE Rubout to End of Line - Erase text from cursor end Ctr Del
of line
RL Rubout Line - Erase the line the cursor is on [HEH
RS Rubout Sentence - Erase the sentence the cursor (n o n e)
is located in
RP Rubout Paragraph - Erase the paragraph the cursor (none)
is located in
UD Undelete - Restore the last text deleted Alt F3
UP Unpad Spaces - Delete spaces between the cursor and (none)
and the first character to its left.

6-61
Function Calls (cont’d)

FOREIGN/OVERSTRIKE CHARACTERS
S1 Acute Accent (n o n e )
S2 Grave Accent (n o n e )
S3 Umlaut (n o n e )
S4 Circumflex (n o n e )
S5 O Accent (n o n e )
S6 Tilde (n o n e )
S7 Underline (n o n e )

HELP
SH Show Help - Display help screen Aft F9
OP Old Prompt - Switch from your document to the Aft Shift F9
previously accessed help frame
DR Display Ruler - Display menu for setting tabs and margins [Aft] [Tab
PM Prompt - Display the help frames of the help file one at a time {n o n e )
HL Help - Displays help frame related to first word (n o n e )
on Command Line.
NR Next Ruler - Toggles the third line in the header between (n o n e )
the tab ruler and a solid line.
$0 Call Help $0 - Call the help frame with keyword $ 0 (n o n e )
to
$9 Call Help $9 - Call the help frame with keyword $ 9 (n o n e )
$A Call Help $A - Call the help frame with keyword $ A (n o n e )
to
$Z Call Help $Z — Call the help frame with keyword $Z (n o n e )

MATH
DT Display Total - Dump accumulated sum into the {m \ 0
text at the cursor position
SM Sum - Add the number the cursor is on to the [a0 0
total; if block is defined, sum all numbers in block
SU Subtract Value - Subtract the number the cursor [Aft] 0]
is located on from the total

6-62
(cont’d) Function Calls

NORMAL/EXPANDED DISPLAY and PG-LN

SP Show Page-Line No. - Turn on page and line number Shift F9
indicator (P-L) at top of display and switch to
Normal Display.
TP Toggle Page Normal/Expanded - Toggle between (n o n e )
Normal and Expanded Display; keep Page-Line
indicator on when returning to Normal.
CM Change Mode Normal/Expanded - Switch between Ctrl F1Û
Normal and Expanded Display, and turn Page-Line No.
indicator off when returning to normal.
XP Expanded Mode - Switch text to Expanded Display. (n o n e )
WG Normal Mode - Switch text in Normal Display without (n o n e )
Page-Line indicators.
LS Line Spacing - Toggle display between single line (n o n e )
spacing and true line spacing.
NM No Markers - Hide the format Triangles, carriage (n o n e )
return arrows and Page-Line numbers. NM also
switches the display to Normal if it was in Expanded.

K eyboard
SAVE/GETS
AD Append Define to Save/Get - Adds the currently Shift F2

F il e
defined block of text to the end of the text in
the specified Save/Get
SD Save/Get Directory - Display directory of Save/Gets i i
SK Show Save/Get Key - Show contents of the Save/Get iCtril [ F 2 l #
given by next letter or number typed
SV Save Define - Save the defined block of text to HD#
the Save/Get identified by the next key struck
@A Save/Get Key A - Place contents of Save/Get A at HA
to the cursor location (or run program on Save/Get A)
<g>Z Save/Get Key Z - Place contents of Save/Get Z at HZ
the cursor location (or run program on Save/Get Z)
@0 Save/Get Key 0 - Place contents of Save/Get 0 at Ho
to the cursor location (or run program on Save/Get 0)
@9 Save/Get Key 9 - Place contents of Save/Get 9 at H9
the cursor location (or run program on Save/Get 9)
&A Save/Get &A - Run program assigned with LDPM filename, &A (n o n e )
to
&Z Save/Get &Z - Run program assigned with LDPM filename,&Z (n o n e )
&0 Save/Get &0 - Run program assigned with LDPM filename,&0 (n o n e )
to
&9 Save/Get &0 - Run program assigned with LDPM filename,&9 (n o n e )

663
Function Calls (cont’d)

SEARCH
FD Find Difference -Compare the two files in the current (none)
and previous windows — stop where files do not match (none)
FM Find Match - Compare two files in the current and
previous windows — stop where files match.
WA Wild Alphanumeric - Interpreted as any Ait Shift A
alphabetic or numeric character in a search
WL Wild Letter - Interpreted as any letter A-Z in a search Alt Shift L
WN Wild Number - Interpreted as any number 0 thru 9 Art Shift N
in a search
WS Wild Separator - Interpreted as any word separator Alt Shift S
in a search
WW Wild String - Interpreted as any string from 1 to 80 Alt Shift W
characters in a search
WX Wild Any Character - Interpreted as any character Alt Shift X
in a search.

SYSTEM
BK Break - Stops any command currently in progress Ctrl Break
(such as delete or search); stops any user program
which is running
CO Comma - Inserts a comma into the text. CO is used (n o n e )
in a keyboard file in place of the punctuation mark
(,) for commands that contain a comma (such as IP 0,5).
CO is needed since the comma mark (,) is used as a separator.
Example: l,P,0,CO,5.
DX Display Off - Freeze the display (complement of DO) (n o n e )
DO Display On - Turn on the display (complement of DX) (n o n e )
FF Force Fill - Force the display to refresh. (n o n e )
EX Exit - Quit XyWrite, return to DOS (after prompting Ctrl Alt Del
for verification)
PR Print Screen - Print the contents of the full screen Shift PrtSc
(all 25 lines, including header)
RV Review - Preview the document which is currently (n o n e )
displayed (same as TYPES)
EN Edit Next File - Opens the next file that matches a IC tr ilN
global filename specification
EF Edit Footer, Header or Footnote - Opens up a Ctrl F3
footer, header or footnote so that you can edit it
without switching to Expanded Display.

6-64
(cont’d) Function Calls

TOGGLE KEYS
Insert Mode
Cl Clear Insert Mode - Switch to Overstrike mode (from Insert) (n o n e )
SI Set Insert Mode - Switch to Insert mode (from Overstrike) (n o n e )
Tl Toggle Insert Mode - Switch between Insert and Overstrike Ins

Numeric Lock
CN Clear Numeric Lock - Turn off the Numeric Lock (n o n e )
SN Set Numeric Lock - Select the Numeric Lock state (n o n e )
TN Toggle Numeric Lock - Change the state of the Num Lock
Numeric Lock (TN was formerly NK)

Scroll Lock
CS Clear Scroll Lock - Turn off Scroll Lock (n o n e )

K eyboard
SS Set Scroll Lock - Turn on Scroll Lock (n o n e )
TS Toggle Scroll Lock - Change the state of the Scroll Lock Scroll Lock I

WINDOWS

F il e
AS Alternate Screen - Move cursor between the two Alt F10
windows last displayed
NX Next Window - Move the cursor successively Shift F10
through all open windows (in numerical order)
SW Show Window Menu - Display the window menu CtiTI fFiO
#1 Window No. 1 - Move the cursor to window no. 1 (n o n e )
to
#9 Window No. 9 - Move the cursor to window no. 9 (n o n e )

6-65
Function Calls (cont’d)

FUNCTION CALLS — Listed Alphabetically

AD Append Define to Save/Get.................. 6-63 M7 Mode 7. Superscript Mode.................... 6-58
AS Alternate Screen..................................... 6-65 M8 Mode 8, Subscript Mode........................6-58
BC Begin Command..................................... 6-59 MD Move Down............................................ 6-60
BD Backspace Delete...................................6-61 MU Move Up..................................................6-61
BF Bottom File..............................................6-61 MV Move....................................................... 6-59
BK Break..................................................... 6-56 NF Next Formatted Page............................. 6-61
BS Bottom of Screen................................... 6-60 NK Num Lock Toggle................................... 6-65
CC Change Cursor Header/Text..................6-59 NL Next Line................................................. 6-60
CO Com m a.................................................. 6-64 NM No Markers..............................................6-63
CO Counter Commands CO to C 9.............. 6-60 NP Next Paragraph...................................... 6-62
CD Cursor Down..........................................6-60 NR Next Ruler...............................................6-60
CH Clear Header..........................................6-59 NS Next Sentence........................................ 6-60
Cl Clear Insert.............................................6-65 NT Next T a b ................................................. 6-60
CL Cursor L e ft.............................................6-60 NW Next W ord............................................... 6-60
CM Change Mode Normal/Expanded 6-63 PD Page Down..............................................6-61
CN Clear Num Lock......................................6-65 PF Previous Formatted Page.....................6-61
CP Copy Defined Block............................... 6-59 PL Previous L in e ..........................................6-60
CR Cursor Right...........................................6-60 PM Prompt.....................................................6-62
CS Clear Scroll Lock................................... 6-65 PP Previous Paragraph................................6-60
CU Cursor Up............................................... 6-60 PR Print Screen............................................6-64
DC Define Column........................................6-61 PS Previous Sentence................................. 6-60
DF Define Block...........................................6-61 PT Previous T ab...........................................6-60
DL Define Line............................................. 6-61 PU Page U p.................................................. 6-61
DO Display On.............................................. 6-64 PW Previous Word........................................ 6-60
DP Define Paragraph.................................. 6-61 RC Rubout Character................................... 6-61
DR Display Ruler.......................................... 6-62 R0 ASCII 0.................................................. 6-58
DS Define Sentence.....................................6-61 R1 ASCII 1.................................................... 6-58
DT Display T otal..........................................6-62 R2 ASCII 2.................................................... 6-58
DW Define W ord...........................................6-61 R3 ASCII 3.................................................... 6-58
DX Display Off..............................................6-64 R4 ASCII 4 .................................................... 6-58
EC End Column...........................................6-59 R5 ASCII 5 .................................................... 6-58
ED Entire Row Define.................................. 6-59 R6 ASCII 6.................................................... 6-58
EE Erase Entry............................................6-59 R7 ASCII 7 .................................................... 6-58
EF Edit Footer, Header or Footnote 6-64 R8 ASCII 8.................................................... 6-58
EL Express Left...........................................6-60 R9 ASCII 9.................................................... 6-58
EN Edit Next File..........................................6-64 RD Rubout Defined Block............................ 6-61
ER Express Right.........................................6-60 RE Rubout to End of Line............................ 6-61
EX Exit.......................................................... 6-64 RL Rubout Line.............................................6-61
FD Find Difference.......................................6-64 RP Rubout Paragraph.................................. 6-61
FF Force F ill................................................ 6-64 RS Rubout Sentence.................................... 6-61
FM Find M atch............................................. 6-64 RV Review.....................................................6-64
GH Go to Header..........................................6-59 RW Rubout W ord...........................................6-61
GT Go to Text Area..................................... 6-59 51 Acute Accent .................................... 6-62
HC Home Column........................................6-59 52 Grave Accent ..................................... 6-62
HL H elp........................................................ 6-62 53 U m laut.....................................................6-62
HM Hom e...................................................... 6-60 54 Circumflex ............................................ 6-62
LB Line Begin.............................................. 6-60 55 O Accent................................................. 6-62
LD Linear Down........................................... 6-60 56 Tilde.........................................................6-62
LE Line End..................................................6-60 57 Underline ............................................... 6-62
LL Linear Left.............................................. 6-60 SD Save/Get Directory................................. 6-63
LR Linear Right............................................ 6-60 SH Show Help............................................... 6-62
LS Line Spacing.......................................... 6-63 SI Set Insert..................................................6-65
LU Linear U p ................................................6-60 SK Show Save/Get K e y ............................... 6-63
M0 Mode 0, Surrounding Mode....................6-58 SM S u m ......................................................... 6-62
M1 Mode 1, Normal M ode........................... 6-58 SN Set Numeric Lock....................................6-65
M2 Mode 2, Bold M ode............................... 6-58 SP Show Page-Line No.................................6-64
M3 Mode 3, Underline Mode........................ 6-58 SS Set Scroll Lock...................................... 6-65
M4 Mode 4, Reverse M ode......................... 6-58 SU Subract Value.......................................... 6-62
M5 Mode 5, Bold Underline Mode............... 6-58 SV Save Define............................................. 6-63
M6 Mode 6, Bold Reverse Mode..................6-58 SW Show Window Menu............................... 6-65

6-66
(cont’d) Function calls

TE Table Entry..............................................6-59 WN Wild Num ber..........................................6-64

TL Table Column Left..................................6-59 WS Wild Separator....................................... 6-64
TR Table Colum n Right............................... 6-59 WW Wild Multiple...........................................6-64
MC Mark Column.......................................... 6-59 WX Wild String.............................................. 6-64
TE Table Entry............................................. 6-59 XC Execute...................................................6-59
TF Top of File...............................................6-61 XD Cancel Define......................................... 6 -6 1
Tl Toggle Insert.......................................... 6-65 YD Cancel Define, variation........................ 6-61
TN Toggle Numeric Lock............................. 6-65 @A Save/Get Key @A to (5>Z...................... 6-63
TP Toggle Page Normal/Expanded 6-63 @0 Save/Get Key @0 to @ 9 .......................6-63
TS Toggle Scroll Lock.................................. 6-65 &A Save/Get Key (&A to &Z)...................... 6-63
UD Undelete.................................................. 6-61 &0 Save/Get Key (& 0 to & 9)........................6-63
UP Unpad Spaces........................................ 6-61 #1 Window No. 1 (#1 to # 9 )........................6-65
WA Wild Alpha............................................... 6-64 $1 Help Frame ($1 to $9)............................6-65
WG Normal Mode...........................................6-63 $A Call Help ($A to $Z)............................... 6-62
WL Wild Letter............................................... 6-64 $0 Call Help ($0 to $9)................................ 6-62

NOTE #1 ®0 - @9» @A - @Z The @ ("at" sign) follow ed by a letter

or a num ber is used to get text from the Save/Get key
letter or num ber. For instance @A requests the text saved
as ‘A’ to be inserted at the position of the cursor.

K eyboard
NOTE #2 MO - M8 The letter M follow ed by a num ber betw een 0
and 8 selects the character m ode of text typed in at the

Fil e
keyboard. If there is a block defined, the character m ode
of the defined block is changed to the selected mode.

NOTE #3 RO - R9 The letter R follow ed by a single digit (0 to 9)

forms one digit of an ASCII character. TTie ASCII
characters over 128 m ust be entered this way.

The first time RO to R9 is encountered, the num ber

following the R is accum ulated as a digit of the decimal
num ber. Subsequent keys add further digits to the code
num ber being accum ulated. (If a key is struck that is not
one of these calls, the code is cleared.) If the state of the
keyboard changes (such as a shift key being released)
then the accum ulated code is given to the program as
com plete.

As an exam ple (in the IBM.KBD) w hen [Aft] [ShiftI is held

dow n, num bers are assigned the R values. If you hold
dow n the [Art] and [Shift] keys and strike the num bers 2,2,4,
you get the G reek letter alpha (a ) entered in the text
w hen you release the [Art] and [ShiftI keys.

6-67
Function Calls (cont’d)

NOTE #4 S I - S7 The letter S follow ed by a num ber betw een 1

and 7 is used for entering foreign accented characters.
W hen you m ake this call, the indicated accent m ark
appears o n the screen. If the letter that is next struck is
in the IBM extended character set, the accent m ark is
replaced by that letter with the accent applied.

The only characters that can be considered for

replacem ent w ith this schem e are the letters a, A, e, E, i,
o, O, u, U, y, n, and N.

These functions approxim ate the use of dead keys on

international keyboards. Further effects can be achieved
for characters not available in the standard IBM set by the
use of the Character Substitution File. You can set u p this
file to suppress escapem ent (forw ard m ovem ent o f the
printer) after the printing o f a special character such as a
tilde o r an accent mark.

NOTE #5 WA, WL, WN, WS, WX, WW These function calls are
used to indicate the w ildcard entries that are part o f the
Search string. A com plete description is available in the
section on the Search com m and.

6-68
 Function Calls

SPELLING CHECKER/THESAURUS

Q1-Q8 Spelling Checker menu functions. A ssigned to IfTI-[F6I. [EscI,

an d

AC Auto-Check/Correct. Turn A uto-C heck/C orrect o n an d off.

A ssigned to [cm] 0 - Show s “c ” in header.

AR Auto-Replacement. T urn A uto-R eplacem ent o n an d off.

A ssigned to S S . Show s “r” in head er.

FS Fix Spelling. Return cursor to last m isspelled w o rd an d

display spelling m enu. A ssigned to [CM]

SO Spell One Word. C heck the spelling o f a single w ord.

A ssigned to fctrilfsl.

SY Synonyms. D isplay a list o f synonym s. A ssigned to

Keyboard File
n a n i.

IR Insert Replacement. D isplay spelling m en u w ith o u t

checking for errors an d w ith o u t loading the spelling
dictionary. This function allow s y ou to u se the spelling
m e n u to en ter corrections to th e tem p o rary or p erso nal
dictionary. N ot assigned.

REDLINING

RO Redlining On. T urn redlining o n a n d off. N ot assigned.

TOGGLE KEYS

Tl Toggle Insert. Toggle b e tw e e n Insert m o d e a n d the active

overstrike m ode, as d efin ed by the DEFAULT W O setting.
A ssigned to Qns

TW Toggle Word Overstrike. T oggle b e tw e e n W ord O verstrike

m o d e a n d Insert m ode. W ord O verstrike goes into Insert
m o d e at the e n d o f a w ord. W hen W ord O verstrike is
active, a low ercase “o ” ap p e ars in reverse m o d e in the
u p p e r right co rn er of the head er. A ssigned to [Aitl Rnsl.

6-68A
Function Calls (cont’d)

TO Toggle Overstrike. Toggle between Overstrike mode and

Insert mode. Overstrike mode causes text entered at the
cursor to overwrite text characters and word separators.
When Overstrike mode is active, an uppercase “O ”
appears in reverse mode in the upper right corner of the
header. Not assigned.

Mi Momentary Insert. Switch from Overstrike to Insert for a

single insert. You must enter this function call at the exact
location that you want to make the insert. Cursor move­
ment cancels it. Assigned to [Ctrilflnsl.

MEMORY USAGE

ME Memory Menu. Display the memory usage menu.

Assigned to [Ctrl] [m] .

6-68B
 Printer File

In tro For the most part, printer m anufacturers have adopted

different control codes. As a result, software manufactur­
ers have had to develop ways of handling printer
information. XyWrite provides Printer Files w hich contain
the codes to control printout — and also control display
settings and XyWrite defaults.
For information on how to install one or m ore printers,
refer to Load Printer File (LDPRN) at the en d of this
section.

C ontents D escrip tio n C om m and

6-75 B asics o f th e P rinter File
6-75 Purpose
6-76 Making Changes in the Printer File
6-77 How Do Printer Files Work?
6-78 Terminology
6-80 H ow to Construct a Printer File
6-81 Printer File Example
6-82 P rinter Settings
6-82 Typeface Settings
6-82 PT Tables (Print Type) PT
6-84 Character Mode Assignments MD nm
6-85 Font Tables FO

P rinter
6-86 Use Width Table UW
6-87 Use Substitution Table US
6-87 Font Value FO F il e
6-88 Attribute Tables AT
6-89 String O perators <># % *
6-91 Width Tables WD
6-92 Vertical Spacing Tables VS
6-92 Display Units Value DU
6-93 Vertical Units VU
6-95 Substitution Tables su
6-96 Term inator Strings
6-96 Line-End String LE
6-96 Paragraph End String PE
6-97 File Begin String FB
6-97 File End String FE
6-97 Page Break String PG
6-98 Printer Control Tables
6-98 Printer Control Tables PC
6-99 Counter String Tables CS

669
Printer File (cont’d)

Page D escrip tio n C om m and

6-100 D isp la y Settings

6-100 O verview of Display Settings
6-100 Creating a Separate Display File
6-100 Text Settings
6-100 Built-In Display Settings
6-102 Display Character Modes MD nm
6-103 Highlight Defined Blocks DD
6-103 H yphenation Control HV
6-104 W ord Overstrike Editing WO
6-104 N orm al/Expanded Display Type DT
6-105 Screen Settings
6-105 Ruler Markers RL
6-105 Line End Character LC
6-106 H eader Modes HR, HN
6-106 W indow Border Colors BX
6-106 Screen Length SL
6-107 EGA Support EG
6-107 Pad Spaces PD
6-107 Speed vs. Flicker BW
6-108 Display Tables
6-108 Color Table
6-109 M onochrom e Table
6-110 S ystem Settings
6-110 Network Drive ND
6-111 Special P rinter Files
6-111 STRIP.PRN
6-112 Load P rinter File LDPRN
6-115 C haracter S ubstitution File
6-116 Load Substitution File LDSUB
6-121 M icrojustification Settings
6-122 Margin Units MU
6-122 Display Units DU
6-122 Microspace Units MS
6-122 Printer Escapem ents (Character Pitch) CP
6-122 Space Constant SC
6-122 Space Factor SF
6-122 Justify Underline JL
6-122 Justify Type JT

6-70
(cont’d) Printer File

PRINTER PRINTER DISPLAY DEFAULT MAIL MERGE

SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SEPARATORS

PT Table Terminators Character Modes DF nm=# Separators

PT LE MD nm= FS
PE Highlighting
RS
Character Modes FB CO
FE DD
MD nm+
PG Hyphenation

Font Table HV
Printer Control
FO Word Overstrike
Table
UW
PC WO
US
VL CS Display Type

DT
Attribute Table Justification
Ruler Markers
AT MU
DU RL
Width Table MS Line-End Char.
CP
WD LC
MM
SC Header Modes
Vert. Space Table
SF HN
VS JL HR
JT
Vertical Unit Window Borders

VU BX
Screen Length
Substitution Table
SL
SU
EGA Setting

End Table EG
ET Pad Spaces

PD
Speed vs. Flicker

BW
Network Drive

ND

6-71
Printer File (cont d)

PRINTER FILE SUMMARY

Display Printer
Settings Settings
Display Modes Primer Modes Use Substitutior
Formal: mode -n — Table
Entérina an
Example: MD NM=7 — Attribute Format: U S : name —
Example: U S : FOREIGN
Ruler Markings Format. AT <string ■
Format: RL <abcdefgbi — Example A T<^U — Substitution
Table
Example RL<^^CQlt Exiting an
Attribute Format S U : nam e —
Header Mode Example: S U : FOREIGN
Format: AT>string •
Formal: HN=n —
Example: AT>^0 — Width Table
Example: H N -2 3 -
Overstrike Format W D : name —
Formal: HR=n — Character Example: W D : PICA -
Example: HR=112 —
Formal: A T # s trin g • Attribute
Line Character Example: AT#D — Table
Formal LC =n — Non Printing Format AT : nam e —
Example: LC= *“ Mode Example AT: U NDERLINE
Format: AT* — End Table
Example: AT* •—
Format: ET —
Line-Ending Example ET —
Character
Print l^pc:
Format: i£< string *
Example: LE< — Format: PT=n —
Example: PT=1 -
Paragraph
Ending
Character
Format: PE < S irin g •
Example: PEC J’ S -
File Begin
Character
Formal: F B < sfrin g ■
Example F B C /S -
File End
Character
Formal: F E < s/rin g •
Example: F E < jI2 -

Page End
Character
Format: P G < sfri«g •
Example: PG<MP -
Font Table
Format FO: nam e —
Example: FO: PICA -

Use Width
Tibie
Formal: UW: name
Example: U W : PICA -

6-72
(cont’d) Printer File

PRINTER FILE SUMMARY (cont’d)

Default Justification Mail Merge
Settings Settings Separators
Default M argin Units Field
S eparator
Form at DF n m - n — Form at: M U=n -
Exam ple: DF T P =6 - E xam ple M11=12 Form at ?S<separator •
E xam ple FS</ ~
Paddi ng D isplay Units
R ecord
Form at P D -n — Form at: D li= rt *
S eparator
Exam ple: PD=1 - E xam ple DU = 12
Form at separator ~-
W ord M icrospace F.xample: RS<" —
O v erstrik e Units
C om m ent
Form at: WO = « — Form at M S=n
S eparator
E xam ple W 0=1 - E xam ple M S=6-
Form at C 0 <separator ■
H y phenation C h a ra c te r Exam ple: C 0<: -
Pitch
Form at HY=«/, n2, »3-
E xam ple H Y = 6, 2, 3 • Form at: CP: —
Exam ple: CP: -
Display type
M icrospace
Form at: DT=n - M ode
E xam ple 0T=2 — Form at MM=n —
E xam ple M M =27 —

Space
C onstant
Form at SC=n ■
E xam ple SC=3 -

Space Factor
Form at SF=n
E xam ple S F =2 •

Justify
U nderline
Form at JL=«
E xam ple J L =1 ■

Justification
Type
Form al JT=n
E xam ple JT=0 •

6-73
6-74
 Basics of the Printer File

PURPOSE A Printer File is a file w hich contains the settings for a

particular printer. It also contains various other settings
(listed below). Initially, all you n eed d o is look to see
w hich file applies to your printer, and then load that file
with LDPRN (Load Printer File). LDPRN is described at
the end of this section.

XyWrite com es with Printer Files for over 70 specific

printers. To see these filenames, list the directory o f your
original XyWrite W ord Processor diskette:
Type: [re] d i r * . p r n 0

(The printer files are also listed at the end of the

Installation Guide.)

To find out w hich model a particular Printer File

supports, call u p that file — the m odel num bers are listed
at the top of each Printer File.

The Printer File contains the codes for controlling not

only the printer, but also the display and several other
XyWrite settings:

• Printer Settings
• Display Settings
• Default Settings (see Default Settings, earlier in this
chapter)
• Justification Settings (see Microjustification, later in this
chapter).
• Mail Merge Separators (see Mail Merge, Chapter 5)

Only the first tw o topics are described in detail

here; the others are covered elsew here in this manual,
under their respective headings. Refer to the section
on Character Modes in Chapter 4 for further description
o f m ode com m ands (MD NM, MD BO, etc).

6-75
Basics of the Printer File (cont’d)

ACTION M aking C h an ges in th e P rin ter File.

To m ake changes to the Printer File, do the following;

1. Call the Printer File. Call to the display the printer file
you use. For exam ple,
Type: [Ffjca 3 e p s o n f x . p r n 0
(If you doubt w hich Printer File to use, call the file
STARTUP.INT, and look for the filename having the
extension .PRN).

2. F ind th e C om m and. Search through the Printer File

to see if the com m and you w ant to enter is already
present.

3. Enter th e Setting. Type the settings you want. For

exam ple, to set XyWrite to display bold characters as
red on a black background on your color monitor,
look up the num ber in the color table — it’s 4. Then
enter the setting on its ow n line.
Type: md b o = 4 M

4. Store an d Load th e P rin ter F ile. To cause the

setting you entered in the previous step to take effect:
Type: fF5lstoref«J]
Type: [F5]ldprn 3 e p s o n f x .p r n 0
Result: The setting now is in effect. The MD BO
com m and will cause the characters to display as RED.

NOTE #1 Initial C onfiguration. W hen you start u p the original

XyWrite disk, it runs through a configuration routine
w hich asks you to pick a Printer File. It then inserts the
LDPRN com m and into the STARTUP.INT file for you.

6-76
(cont’d) Basics of the Printer File

H ow D o P rinter Files Work?

W hen you write a docum ent, you can indicate in text
w here you w ant attributes such as boldface, underlining
and italics. The Printer File specifies exactly how these
(and other) attributes are both displayed and printed.
You can also change fonts anyw here within your text,
using the PT (Print Type) format com m and — for
exam ple, to change from Pica to Elite.

If you w ant text to be printed b o ld (extra dark), you

insert « MDBO» (Mode Bold) into the text (perhaps by
pressing fcwl2). That com m and does two things — it
affects the display and the printer. You can control both
of these devices independently.

First, «MDBO» changes the look of the text o n screen as

you write; it might be extra bright on your m ono chrom e
monitor, or a specific color on a color display. For
exam ple, the following statem ent sets the color of the
display text:
MD B0=116

If you insert this line into a Printer File and load the file,
areas m arked for bold print will be red on a w hite

P rinter
background on your color screen.

Second, w hen you print a docum ent using TYPE, XyWrite F ile
inserts the printer codes assigned to MD BO into the text
going to the printer. These codes are specified by
another line in the Printer File; for example:

MD BO+ELITE+EMPHASIZED+DOUBLE

Let’s say you have loaded the Epson FX Printer File, and
you send a file containing bold text to your printer. The
two characters ►G (Escape and G) are inserted into the
text in place of the em bedded com m and MD BO. This
causes doublestrike to begin. In place of the next MD NM
(Mode Normal), XyWrite inserts ►H to cause the
doublestrike to stop.

6-77
Basics of the Printer File (cont’d)

TERMINOLOGY

XyWrite Printer Files define fonts and attributes for printers in three
general categories: dot matrix, daisy-wheel, and laser print technology.
font — Any printer typeface, such as Pica, Elite, Courier or Helvetica,
attribute — Any printer effect that modifies an existing font, such as
underline, superscript or subscript.
These terms have a slightly different meaning for each type of printer:

1. Daisy-Whee! Printer
Courier PT1
Prestige Elite PT 2
E ssay PS PT3
Font — Any print wheel: Courier, Pica, Elite, Light Italic,
Boldface, Proportional.
Attribute — Doublestrike, shadow strike, underline,
overstrike, superscript, subscript.

2. Dot Matrix Printer

P ic a PT1
E lite PT 2
P r o p o r tio n a l PT 3
Font - Pica, Elite, Proportional, Pica/Compressed,
Elite/Expanded, etc.
Attribute - Doublestrike, shadow strike, underline, overscore,
bold, superscript, subscript, overstrike, double underline, etc.

3. Laser Printer
C o u rie r PT 1
Times-Roman pt 2
H elvetica pt 3
Font - Typeface including size. Examples: Courier Bold
10-point, Helvetica Bold Oblique 12-point, Times-Roman
Italic 8-point.
Attribute - Underline, superscript, subscript

You define a character mode by combining one font and one or more
attributes. You will find fonts and attributes for your printer listed at the top
of its Printer File.

6-78
(cont’d) Basics of the Printer File

TERMINOLOGY (cont'd)

Point Size. The height of a character (see the figure). You can
gauge the point size of a character approximately by measuring from
the top of an uppercase letter to the bottom of a "y" or "g" and adding
for white space above and below it.

8 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
10 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU
12 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ
14 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
18 ABCDEFGHIJKL
24 ABCDEFGHI
30 ABCDEFG
42 ABCDE
48 ABCD
60 ABC
Leading, (pronounced led-ing) The vertical spacing of lines of type,
measured from baseline to baseline.

The rain in Spain

l e a d in g _ f a n s mainly on the plain

6-79
Basics of the Printer File (cont’d)

How to Construct the Printer File.

The Printer Files provided on your XyWrite disk are
already properly set up to work. However, if you want
to modify your Printer File, it would be good to
understand how it has been constructed. Look at the
EPSON FX-80 Printer File example; it has seven basic
parts, as follows. All tables start with a name (AT, FO,
WD, SU) and end with an ET (End Table) command.
Lines starting with a semicolon (;) are comment lines.
1. PT Tables (Print Type) — In this example three sets of
Character Modes are defined as Print Types, for easy
switching between three families of fonts
2. Character Modes — Each mode (MD nm) with its
font and assigned attributes
3. Attribute Tables — Control codes for specific
attributes
4. Font Tables — Definitions and control codes for
specific fonts
3. Width Tables — Width settings for fonts (note Pica
and Elite each have one width for all characters;
Proportional has characters of various widths)
6. Substitution Table — Control codes for specialized
characters
7. Microjustification Settings — (covered in the next
section of this chapter)
8. Vertical Spacing Settings — (covered in this
section and the end of Chapter 4)
9. Terminator Characters — Characters to end a line,
paragraph, page and file
10. D isplay Settings
a. Screen - Headers, ruler, carriage return symbol,
borders
b. Text — Normal or expanded display, display
modes, highlighting

The last three types of settings are not shown in the

Epson example because the Epson printer uses the built-
in default values.

6-80
(cont’d) Basics of the Printer File

PRINTER FILE
LPSUN EX- 8 0 . FX-100

E p i = i ii s PICA (10 flilrl,»|

PTrl« UW:ELITE«
MD NM+PICA« US:FOREIGN<
MD BO+PICA+EMPHASIZED« DOUBLE« ET«
MD BLH-PICA+EMPHASIZED+DUUBLE+UNDERLINE« ;«
MD LL+PICA+LNDERLINE« FO:COMPRESSED/P1CA«
(D - MD RV+PICA«
MD BR+PICA+ITALIC«
FO<*+
F0>î*W «
MD SU+PICA+SUPERSCRIPT« UW :COMPKESSED/PICA«
MD SD+PICA+SUBSCRIPT« US:FOREIGN«
ET*«-
PT=2«
MD NM+ELITE«
MD BO+ELITE+ENPHASIZED+DOUBLE«
MD BLH-ELITE+EHPHASIZED+DOUBLE+UNDERLINE« WIDTH TABLES FOLLOW
MD UL+ELITE+UNDERLINE« «
MD RV+ELITE« WD:PICA«
MD BR+ELITE+ITALIC« SU=12«-
MD SU+F.I.ITE+SUPERSCRIPT« (D - ET«
MD SD+ELITE+SUBSCRIPT« A
■.m M sm sm m a* WD:ELITF.<
PT=3« SW-tO«
MD NM+PROPORTI0NAL« ET«
MD BO+PROPORTIONAL+ENPHASIZEIH-DOUBLE« ;«
MD BIH-PHOPORTIONAL+EMPHASIZED+DOUBLE+UNDERLI NE< WD:PROPORTIONAL«
MD UL+PROPOETIONALHfilPERLINE« SW=12«
MD RV+PROPORT10NAL« !« 'v:=s«
MD BR+PRUPORTIONAL+ITALIC«
MD SU+PROPORTIONAL+SUPERSCRIPT« ,=7 «
MD SD+PROPORTIONAL+SUBSCRIPT« " ii[]ir= 8 f
;« JO-94
;« /<>XZ\fkxz§cblO«
;« JcghnpqrtnùÇ0=ll«
:^HüîlidftÉ»nmmimiiüB«aillllilM« ET*«-
;«
AT U N D E R L I N E «

P rinter F il e
ATO-e*- SUBSTITUTION TARIF
AT)M- «
ET« SU:FOREIGN«
«• V^lÇvMR «
AT:EMPHASIZED« £:»RM»K «
AT<ME+
AT>MF« Ö=*tfSv>R «
ET« et«
A 4
AT: M I R L E « MICROJUSTIFICATION SETTINGS
a t <k ;« «
AT)** SC-3«
ET «- SF-l«
JT-O«
.11-1«
;+ <
HINT DEFINITIONS FOLLOW CW=12«
;+ DU=124
F0:PICA« MS-6«
UW:PICA« ♦
© - US :FOREIGN« CP:5«
ET« ►I© «
;« ► Æ «
FU:ELITE« ►K*
UW:ELITE« ►K4
►»
ET«
;«
END OF PRINTER FILE

Lines beginning with semi-colons (;) are comments.

6-81
Printer Settings

Typeface Settings
The Typeface Settings section includes all of the assignments that affect
the characteristics of printed type (size, weight, slant, etc.). These are:
PT Tables (PT), Font Tables (FO), Attribute Tables (AT), Printer Control
Strings (< ,> ,# ,% ,* ), Character Modes (MD/im), Width Tables (WD),
Vertical Spacing Tables (VS) and Substitution Tables (SU).

NOTE C om m en t Lines. Any line starting with a sem icolon (;)

is a comment. The entire line is allocated as a com m ent
— you cannot place a com m ent to the right o f a printer
setting. The line is ignored w hen the Printer File is
loaded into memory. For example:
;This is a comment line.<-
You can place com m ents throughout the Printer File as
you wish except you cannot put com m ents in tables that
have a specified num ber of lines (for exam ple, SU:, CP:,
VS:).

PT=/I PT T ables. You can easily change fonts at any point

within your docum ent. In the m iddle of a 10-pitch
docum ent you could print a 12-pitch phrase. To set this
up, you use PT (Print Type) tables.
In the Epson Printer File illustration, there are three sets
of definitions: PT=1 for Pica (10 pitch), PT=2 for Elite (12
pitch) and PT=3 for Proportional. (The term 10 pitch
m eans 10 characters per inch; 12 pitch m eans 12
characters per inch.)

Each PT=/t statem ent has a font num ber n w hich identifies
the font. You use this num ber in the corresponding PT
format com m and. O nce you define the PT tables, you
can switch from one font to another by entering the PT
format com m and directly into the text: for exam ple,
[F5]PT 3 0 for the table PT=3-
For further illustration, refer to the section in Chapter 4,
"Character Modes and Print Type."
In general, w e have set up the Printer Files for various
printers in the following way:
PT1 is 10 pitch
PT2 is 12 pitch
PT3 is proportional

6-82
(cont’d) Printer Settings

The default for PT is 1 (10 pitch). You can change the

default to PT2 for instance, in any of three ways:

default pt=2 (in the STARTUP.INT file)

default pt=2 (on the Com m and Line)
df pt=2 (in the Printer File)

If you have a question about w hich PT values are defined

for your particular printer, call your Printer File to the
screen and take a look at the PT tables. Following is an
exam ple of the PT (Print Type) printer setting:
PT=1 <r
MD NM+PICA^
MD BO+PICA+EMPHASIZED+DOUBLE<-
MD BU+PICA+EMPHASIZED+DOUBLE+UNDERLINE<-
MD UL+PICA+UNDERLINE<-
;<■
PT=2<-
MD NM+ELITE«-
MD BO+ELITE+EMPHASIZED+DOUBLE<-
MD BU+ELITE+EMPHASIZED+DOUBLE+UNDERLINE<-
MD UL+ELITE+UNDERLINE<-

PT-3<-
MD NM+PROPORTIONAL«-
MD BO+PROPORTIONAL+EMPHASIZED+DOUBLE<-
MD BU+PROPORTIONAL+EMPHASIZED+DOUBLE+UNDERLINE<-

P rinter
MD UL+PROPORTIONAL+UNDERLINE<-
;<■
F il e
These character m ode assignm ents are further described
next.

NOTE C hainin g P rinter Sets. You can chain printer sets in the
Printer File. You w ould do this if your file had many PT
com m ands in it, for a laser printer, yet you w anted to
print that file out on a dot matrix printer, w hich does not
have as many fonts available. The format for chaining
printers sets is:

Format: PJ=a,b,c,...
Example: PT=1,2 ,3

6-83
Printer Settings (cont’d)

MD n m C haracter M ode A ssig n m en ts. O nce the Attribute and

Font tables have b een defined, you can assign them to
character m odes. The assigm ent requires the plus sign (+)
operator:
Format: mode+font+attribute+attribute+...
Example: MD BO+PROPORTIONAL+BOLD+UNDERLINE<-
This assigns the font PROPORTIONAL and attributes
BOLD and UNDERLINE to the character m ode MD BO.
The mode can be any of the following.
MD NM MD FL MD 0
MD BO MD FU MD 1
MD UL MD FR MD 2
MD RV MD SO up to
MD BU MD FN MD 2 5 5
MD BR
MD SU
MD SD

You are allow ed to use only o n e font in a m ode

definition. However, you can use several attributes. If
you w ant to change the standard assignments, check to
see if your printer supports the com bination you want.
(For instance, the Epson printer does not support the
EMPHASIZED attribute in com bination with
COMPRESSED font.)

6-84
(cont’d) Printer Settings

FO : F ont Tables. Each Font Table contains the printer codes

to access a particular character set. It can also contain
the value of vertical leading (VL) associated with that
character set and references to b oth a Substitution Table
and a Width Table. (See "Terminology" earlier for
exam ples of fonts.)

The following exam ple of a font table is from the

CORONA.PRN file:

F 0:B K M A N 1 2^
VL=6C R
FO<@FONT BKMAN12<-
UW:BKMAN12<-
US:SUB<e
ET<-

The first line defines the nam e of the Font Table,

BKMAN12 (Bookm an 12 point typeface). You can nam e
the Font Table anything you want, but if you change it,
be sure to m ake the same change in the PT table.

The next line (VL=) defines the vertical spacing, or

leading value, associated with this font. V I is m ost useful
for printers that support a range of point sizes, because it
allows you to change from one type size to another
within your docum ent and have the leading change
automatically. The VL setting is optional and is included
only for laser printer files. It is in effect only if you turn
o n Automatic Leading (see Chapter 4).

O nce you have printed several files in different fonts, you

may decide you prefer to have your text set m ore tightly
or loosely than the standard values defined in your
printer file. You can change the VL values in the Printer
File — for one font or for all of them — but first you
should understand how they w ere originally calculated.
To determ ine the standard leading value associated with
each font, set up the following ratio:

Point size = x_____________

72 Minimum Vertical Unit

w here "point size" refers to the size of the font being

defined; "72" is the num ber of points in an inch; and
6-85
Printer Settings (cont’d)

"minimum vertical unit" is the num ber of the smallest

vertical m ovem ent the printer can make in one inch. (O n
som e printers, a point is defined as 1/60 inch. Refer to
the docum entation supplied w ith you printer.) Let’s
calculate the leading for a 12-point font on a printer that
m oves in increm ents of 1/300 inch.

12 _ x
72 ~ 300

x - 50

In this exam ple, the value of VL is 50. If the result of

your calculation is a fraction, round it to the nearest
w hole num ber. You may adjust the VL value until the
vertical spacing is the w ay you w ant it.

A second argum ent in the VL setting affects the baseline

calculation for a line of type. If the second argum ent is 0
or is omitted, XyWrite outputs 2/3 of the first argum ent
before the line of text and 1/3 after the line. If the second
argum ent has a non-zero value, that value defines the
am ount of leading that takes place before the line of text.
The difference betw een the first and second argum ents
determ ines the am ount of leading after each line of text.
(See "Automatic Leading" in Chapter 4 for m ore details.)

The third line (FO<) contains the control code that the
printer needs to enter the BKMAN12 font. Some tables
also contain a line of code that begins with FO>; this line
of code tells the printer to leave the current font. For
m ore information on control strings, see String O perators
w hich follows.

UW: UWj (Use Width Table) indicates that the w idth table
nam ed BKMAN12 is used to specify the width of the
characters in this font. You may som etim es see a UW:
statem ent that contains a num ber followed by an asterisk
and then the nam e of a width table. For example:

UW:2*pica

This Use Width Table statem ent contains a scaling factor.

W hen a scaling factor is supplied, XyWrite uses it to
multiply all of the
6-86
(cont’d) Printer Settings

widths in the specified table to produce a new set of

w idths for the fonts being defined. In the exam ple
show n above, the widths in the table PICA w ould be
multiplied by 2. Scaling factors reduce the num ber of
w idth tables that need to be created and stored in the
Printer File.

US; US: (Use Substitution Table) indicates that the

Substitution Table called SUB is used with this font.

The ET ends the table.

FO F ont Value. The FO setting controls several aspects of

how your text looks — from underlining to
microjustification. Enter the FO setting in the Font Table
of the Printer File. The format is:
fO=v
w here v (value) is a decimal num ber. The values that can
be used are m ade up of com binations from the table
below.

Example: If you w ant to use com binations 1 and 4, then

the entry w ould be fo=5.

P rinter F il e
VALUE USAGE

1 Do not output the exit string for the font when microjustifying.
This allows underline mode on certain printers to be
microjustified. (Assumes that there is an MM mode in the
printer table.)
2 Do not output exit string for the font when microjustifying, and
do not output the entry string when returning from
microjustifying. This is used for superscript or subscripts on
printers that roll the carriage up or down.
4 Print discretionary or inserted hyphens in the current mode.
8 Allow microjustification of this font (overrides the JL setting).
16 Don’t allow microjustification of this font (overrides the JL
setting).
32 This is a foreign language font (which is basicallyvused with
special software that recognizes character sets in extra
memory such as on an EGA card.)
6-87
Printer Settings (cont’d)

AT: Attribute Tables. An Attribute Table contains the control

codes for each attribute. Typical attributes are:
Underline
Bold
D ouble
Superscript
Subscript
Italic
Forms
Emphasized

For exam ple, to define doublestrike for the Epson FX

printer, the Attribute Table w ould look like:
AT:DOUBLE^
AT<OG*
A T>^H ^
EJ<-

The AT: line specifies the nam e of the attribute — in this

case DOUBLE.

The AT< line specifies codes that turn on this attribute.

In this case, w hen you print a file, the two characters
Escape and G (►G) are inserted into the text to start
doublestrike. For m ore information on control strings,
see String O perators w hich follows.

The AT> line specifies codes that turn off this attribute.
Escape H O H ) is inserted into the text to end
doublestrike.

The ET ends the table.

If you look at a Printer File, you will see that there are
already a num ber o f these attributes defined, including
the m ost com m on printer effects (bold, underline, etc.).

AT= A ttribute Value. This setting, w hich you enter in the

Attribute Table as AT=v, w orks exactly like the Font Value
setting described earlier.

6-88
(cont’d) Printer Settings

< String O perators. In both the Font Tables and the

> Attribute Tables you can specify the printer codes that
# are sent to the printer. For example:
%
AT<>U or FO<^p1

Each statem ent includes a nam e (AT or FO), an operator

(< ) and a string (►U or ►p1).

The string is the series of printer control codes, and can

be any num ber of characters. The operator tells XyWrite
to insert the string into the text in a specific manner:

< insert string upon entering the character m ode

> insert string upon leaving the character m ode
# insert string after each character in the m ode
% insert string before each character in the m ode
* insert string in place o f each character in the m ode

The pou n d (#) and percent (%) symbols are used along
with the backspace character (D) mainly for overstrike.

Entering a Mode
Format: AT<strin g s
Exam ple: AT< ►U<-
The tw o characters Escape (►) and U are inserted into
the text string at the start of the attribute.

Leaving a Mode
Format: AT >string<-
Exam ple: AT > ►D<-
The two characters Escape (►) and D are inserted into
the text at the end of the attribute.

Overstrike Character
Format: AT#Dstring <-
Example: AT#D-^-
The string "backspace, hyphen" is sent after each
character. Thus,every character is overstruck with a
hyphen. A special case of this follows.

6-89
Printer Settings (cont’d)

Double-Strike Character
Format: AT#D
The string "backspace, space" is an special case — it
causes the printer to m ove back and print the sam e
character again. (Notice that it does not m ove back
and print a space.)

Pre-Strike Character
Format: AJ%string<-
Example: AT%-D<-
The string "hyphen, backspace" is sent ahead of each
character. Thus, the hyphen is printed, then
overstruck by the next character.

Non-Printing Character
Format: AT *string
Example #1: AT * <-
Every character is rem oved and replaced w ith a single
space. Thus, this is the non-printing m ode, useful
w hen spaces and all characters are the same size.
(W hen using proportionally-spaced characters, each
space is narrow er than the characters they replace.
This can present unexpected results.)
Example #2\ AT*<-
F.very character is rem oved altogether (and replaced
with nothing). This is also a non-printing m ode —
the displayed characters do not take up any room on
the printout.

6-90
(cont’d) Printer Settings

WD: W idth T ables. A Width Table defines the widths of

characters. The table begins w ith WD (Width Define)
and SW (Standard Width) and ends with ET (End Table).
SW and the other lines specify the width of characters —
the characters are listed on the left of the equal sign (=),
and the width is given o n the right. The width is given in
Basic Units (also called Width Units) — the smallest
incremental width of w hich your printer is capable.

To keep the list orderly, after SW w e list the characters in

order of size, narrowest first. For example:
WD:HELVETICA^
SW=20<-
!.:= 10<-
1= 15^
ij=16<-
bpqv=26^
WXM=3(K
ET<-

SW (Standard Width) specifies the width of all characters

not otherw ise specified in the table. You normally assign
SW to the width that applies to the most num ber of
characters. This prevents you from having to specifically

P rinter F il e
list those characters in the Width Table.

6-91
Printer Settings (cont’d)

DU» The value for display units (DU) can be specified in each
w idth table. The following exam ple dem onstrates this.

WD:PICA^
SW=12^
DU=12<e
ijlt=9<-
abcdef=15^
ghknopqrsuvxyz=18<-
mw=21 <r

The DU=12 statem ent will cause the m arkers on the ruler
line to be adjusted for this w idth table. The num bers on
the ruler will reflect the current DU setting. Normally, in
10-pitch (MU=12, DU»12), the num bers are 10 dots apart.
If you switch to 12 pitch (DU=10), the num bers are 12
dots apart.

You can still enter the DU value in the Printer File outside
of the w idth table. W hen you d o this, the DU value
affects all w idth tables.

VS: V ertical S p acin g T able. The Vertical Spacing Table,

w hich is optional, allows you to specify the printer codes
for incremental vertical spacing. VS: is the vertical
equivalent of CP: (see “Microjustification” later in this
chapter). This table starts with VS:n, w here n is the
num ber of lines of code that follow. The next lines are
the code directing the printer to m ove one vertical unit,
tw o vertical units, and so on. For example:
VS:3^
@lh 1;<-
@lh 2;<r
@lh 3;<-
ET<-

The VS table has an effect on the LE and PE com m ands.

See the note "Vertical Spacing" after the descriptions of LE
and PE w hich follow.

6-92
(cont’d) Printer Settings

vu= V ertical U nit S ettin g. The VU (Vertical Unit) setting in

the Printer File allows you to w ork in the vertical unit of
your choice (lines, points, etc.). The unit you choose
m ust be a multiple of the minimum vertical movement.
For exam ple, you cannot w ork in points of 1/72 inch if
the printer m oves in increm ents of 1/300 inch. XyWrite
Printer Files are set u p to w ork in lines (1/6 inch).

The VU setting defines three values:

• The input unit multiplier (jc)
• The screen display divider (y)
• The multiplier for internal storage (z)

Format: VU=x,y,z

Example: VU=3,1 ,1 0

Insert this value after any default (DF) com m ands in the
Printer File.

The first value, the input unit multiplier (x), defines the
num ber of m inimum vertical m ovem ents the printer must
m ake to equal one of the vertical units you have decided
to w ork in. For example, assum e you are using a laser
printer that has a minimum vertical m ovem ent of 1/216
inch and you w ant to m ake your vertical m easurem ents
in points (1/72 inch). The input unit multiplier x is 3,
because the printer must m ove 1/216 of an inch three
times before it has m ade a vertical m ovem ent equal to
one point (1/216 x 3 = 1/72).

6-93
Printer Settings (cont’d)

W henever you issue a Vertical Spacing com m and (see

C hapter 4), XyWrite multiplies the value in that com m and
by the “input unit multiplier.” For exam ple, if VU=50 and
you issue a Line Spacing com m and of LS 2, XyWrite
sends instructions to the printer that it m ust m ove an
am ount equivalent to 100 minimum vertical m ovem ents
(50 x 2).

The second value, the screen display divider (y), converts

the output units into screen lines. It affects the w ay files
are displayed on the screen w hen you are w orking with
colum n tables, w hen you are show ing true line spacing
on the screen (LF=1), or w hen you type to screen with
TYPES.

The third value, the internal storage multiplier (z), modifies

the internal system multiplier so that you can use points
(rather than lines). This is necessary w hen the page
length (PL com m and) is greater than 650 points.

This value converts the num ber you specify in the

Vertical Spacing com m ands (see Chapter 4) into XyWrite
storage units. If you are w orking in lines, the internal
storage multiplier z is 100, so you could specify
hundredths of lines (e.g., 1.25 lines). If you are w orking
in points, the minimum conversion factor is 10, w hich
m eans you can only specify u p to tenths of a point.

6-94
(cont’d) Printer Settings

SU: S u b stitu tion T ables. A Substitution Table specifies how

displayed characters are to be printed. It allows you to
construct foreign language characters, graphic symbols
and math signs, for instance. This table begins w ith SU
(Substitution) and ends with ET (End Table). Make the
character assignm ents as follows: on the left of the equal
sign put the display character; on the right side put the
string of printer characters and codes. In the following
exam ple, a zero in the text prints with a line through it.
See the Character Substitution File later in this chapter for
m ore details o n the assignm ent statements.
SU.'ZERO«-
0 =0D /^
ET^

N ote C om m on N am es. Width Tables, Substitution Tables and

Font Tables can all use the same names. The only
constraint is that Attribute Tables and Font Tables should
not have the sam e names.

6-95
Printer Settings (cont’d)

Terminator Strings
You can add the following assignm ents in your Printer File to define
printer codes at specific points in the docum ent. (Place each statem ent
on its ow n line.)

Soft return LE<string<-

Paragraph End (H ard Return) P E < i/n > 2g<-
Beginning of File FB<string <r
End of File FE < strin g ^
B etw een each page PG <string<-

LE Line-End String. LE enables you to specify the characters

inserted at the end of each soft-return line (that is, each
w ord-w rapped line). These characters are inserted into
the text as it is sent to the printer. (Hard-Retum lines are
handled under PE.)
Format: LE <string<r Line End
Default: LE< J3S<-

This string contains a single space, a carriage return ( j 3)

and a line feed (S). This is for a printer w hich needs a
carriage return and line feed at the end of every line.
You enter the carriage return character with [Äiti IShift 113,
and the line feed character with [ M ] I Shift 11 0
Example # 1: LE<

This string contains a single space. This exam ple inserts

'only a space at the end of each line — no carriage return
or line feed. If you print to a file (TYPEF) with this
setting, the lines within each paragraph rem ain
w ordw rapped (for further editing).
Example #2: LE<<-

This string contains no characters at all. You could use

this to send to the printer thousands of uninterrupted
characters, as if they w ere all one line. For example,
y ou’d use it w hen sending a long string of graphics data
to a dot matrix printer in graphics m ode — w ith no line-
end characters inserted.

PE Paragraph End String. PE enables you to specify the

characters inserted in place of each hard return. Like all
term inator characters these characters are inserted into
the text as it is sent to the printer with TYPE (or TYPEF).

6-96
(cont’d) Printer Settings

Format: PE <string<- Paragraph End

Default: PE<
Example: PE< <-
The default is single space, carriage return ( / ) , and line
feed (3). Use the LC setting instead to change the
displayed character w hich represents PE. (See “Line
Character” in Display Settings.)
FB F ile B egin String. FB allows you to send characters to
the printer at the start o f a file.
Format: FB <sfringe File Begin
Default: FB<<r
Example: FB<>G-*-
This exam ple sends an Escape-G at the start o f each file.
O n an IBM ProPrinter, this causes the characters to print
second strike.

FE F ile End String. FE allows you to send characters to the

printer at the end of a file.
Format: FE <string<- FileEnd
Default: FE< <-
Example: FE<9<-
This exam ple specifies that a form feed character he sent

P rinter F ile
to the printer at the end of each file. This w ould eject the
last page in most printers.
PG Page B reak String. The PG (Page Break) setting lets
you send a character string to the printer betw een pages.
Format: PG <string<r Page Break
Default: P G < /1B9<-
The default sends carriage return, line feed, and form
feed to the printer at the end of each page. If you use the
PG setting, it is im portant to include the carriage return
and line feed characters if you w ant the first line of the
next page to print correctly. PG does not normally send
the string after the last page of a file. To do that, you
must specify DEFAULT FF=1 and DEFAULT EJ=1.

NOTE V ertical S pacing. W hen used in conjunction with the

Vertical Spacing table (VS:), LE and PE contain only the
codes for a carriage return. FE contains the code to reset
vertical spacing to 6 lines per inch.

6-97
Printer Settings (cont’d)

Printer Control Tables

PC: P rin ter C on trol T able. The PC table allows you to send
control strings to the printer. You w ould use this table to
control the printer at specific points within your
docum ent. For exam ple, if your printer has tw o paper
trays, you can change trays w hen you begin a new page.
You could use letterhead paper for the cover page of a
letter and plain p aper for subsequent pages. You invoke
the codes in your text file with the PC format com m and.
See the PC com m and in the "Printer Control" section of
Chapter 4 for an example.

You can have only one PC table in a Printer File. The

table can contain any num ber of lines. Each string must
be on its ow n line, and can be any num ber of characters.
You must specify the num ber of lines of control strings
(n) at the top of the table (PC:«).

Do not use the PC table to change characteristics of fonts

(size, weight, spacing, positioning), because that
information will not be integrated into XyWrite’s internal
calculations for horizontal and vertical spacing (for exam ple,
line breaks, justification and page breaks).

To give an example:

PC:3
►&1
►&2
*&e

The first line (PC:3) starts the table. The num ber 3
indicates that three lines of control codes follow.

The three lines of codes perform three different functions.

In this case, the first code (►&!) instructs the printer to
switch to p aper tray #1. The second code sw itches to
tray #2, and the third code sw itches to manual feed, for
feeding envelopes. These codes are not universal — they
are different for different printers.

6-98
(cont'd) Printer Settings

CS: Counter String Table. The CS table lets you specify a

list of strings that will be used for counting pages,
chapters, footnotes, or other counters (sections,
paragraphs, outlines, lists). You invoke this table with
the SF *n (Set Footnote Number), SP * (Set Page
Number) or counter com m and DC 1=* (Define Counter).

You can have only one CS table in a Printer File. This

table can have any num ber of lines. Each string must be
on its ow n line, and can be any num ber of characters.
You m ust specify the num ber of counter string lines (w) at
the top of the table (CS:/i).

W hen you use this table for counting, the list of strings
will eventually be exhausted. After this point, the first
string will be used twice, then the second, and so on.

To give an example:

CS:4
!
@
★
$

P rinter
The first line (CS:4) starts the table. The num ber 4
indicates that four counter strings follow.
F ile

Let’s show w hat happens w hen you invoke this table

with SP *. W hen you use PN (Page Num ber) in a
running header or footer, the first page num ber is printed
with "!" in place of the page num ber, the second page is
printed with and so on.

If the CS table is om itted from the Printer File, the default

sequence will be *, **, ***, and so on. Thus, the default
CS table is:

C$:1
*

6-99
Display Settings

INTRO Overview o f D isplay Settings. All of the Printer File

settings described u p to this point control only the
printer. The rem aining settings in this section control
only the display, not the printer. They can be included in
the Printer File anyway (even though they do not affect
the printer) or separated out into their ow n file (also to
be loaded with LDPRN).

Display settings fall into tw o categories: Text Settings and

Screen Settings. Text Settings affect the text: its style,
color and hyphenation. Screen Settings do not affect the
text; they affect the environm ent surrounding the text —
the ruler markers, paragraph-ending arrows, header
colors (at the com m and line and prom pt line), the
w indow border colors and screen length.

Creating a Separate D isplay File. If you want, you can

leave all of the display settings out of your normal Printer
File and instead put them in a separate file. You might
do this if you switch betw een m onochrom e and color
displays. You could have one display file for a
m onochrom e m onitor, another for a color monitor. Like
the standard Printer Files, a display file is loaded with the
LDPRN (Load Printer) com m and. You might call this file
DISPLAY.PRN. Then you w ould add the line LDPRN
DISPLAY.PRN to your STARTUP.INT file.

Text Settings
The text settings are those settings that affect the characteristics of the
text itself on-screen — for example, underlining, color and hyphenation.

Built-In D isplay Settings. All of the display settings

have default values built into XyWrite. For instance, the
default normal m ode (MD NM) is dim w hite characters on
a black background. The statem ent for this w ould be:
MD NM=7<-

Notice that you will not find this statem ent anyw here in
the Printer File — it is built into XyWrite. You need to
include a setting in the Printer File only if you w ant to
change it from the default (for instance, if you had a color
m onitor and w anted the normal m ode to be a color).

6-100
(contd) Display Settings

DISPLAY SETTINGS
;4-
; DISPLAY SETTINGS4-
;<-
; 4r
; C h a ra c te r Modes4-
MD NM=1124-
MD BO-1164-
MD UL=96<-
MD RVz?<
MD BU=100f
MD BR=4<-
MD SU=104-
MD SD-64

; H eader Co lo r 4-
HN=314-

; H eader R everse C o lo rs ( f o r CM, PRMPT, PG-LN)<

HR=1Q0<-

; Window B order Colors4-

BXn96,112,112,112,112,112,112,112,112,1124-
;4-
; D efined B lock C o n trast4 -
DD-724-

; C u rso r C o n tr a s t4
CR-1194-
;«■
; Line-End C h a r a c te r : ( C h a ra c te r d is p la y e d f o r C a rria g e R eturn)4-
LC=1l4
;f
; F o o tn o te Number D isp lay Mode4
; The v a lu e ch o sen sh o u ld be u sed only by FN<
;FN~1144-
; 4-
P r in t e r
File

6-101
Display Settings (cont’d)

MD nm D isp la y C haracter M odes. In the previous section w e

saw how you use a m ode com m and along with the plus
sign (+) to specify how character m odes are printed, such
as MD BO+PROPORTIONAL+BOLD. Use a m ode
com m and along with the equal sign (=) to specify how
character m odes are displayed. Use the Color Table
(show n later in this section) for the num ber of the mode.
Use the following format in the Printer File, on a line by
itself.

Format: mode=n<-
Example: MD B0=7<-

This exam ple reads: Bold m ode text is displayed as

bright w hite characters on black background (num ber 15
from the Color Table). You could specify another num ber
to instead display underline, bold, reverse, flashing, or
colors (with a color monitor).

XyWrite com es with the following m odes built-in (for a

color monitor).

MD NM=7 w hite (dim) on black

MD B0=15 bright w hite on black
MD UL=1 blue on black
MD BU=9 black on white
MD BR=120 light blue on black
MD RV=112 gray on white
MD SU=122 light green on white
MD SD=121 light blue on w hite

MD FL=135 w hite (dim) blinking on black

MD FU=129 blue blinking on black
MD FR=240 black blinking on white
MD S0=143 bright w hite blinking o n black
MD FN=122 light green on w hite

6-102
(cont’d) Display Settings

DD H ig h lig h tin g o f D efin ed B lock s.

The DD (Display of Defined Block) setting allows you to
change the highlighting of defined blocks. This setting is
useful for low-contrast screens such as those found
in lap portables.

Format: DD=«<- Display of

Example: DD=119<- Defined Block

The num ber that is given with this setting is com bined
with the color o f the text that is defined. The num ber
119 seem s to be as useful as any.

HV H y p h en a tio n C ontrol. The HV (H yphenation Value)

setting in the Printer File gives you control over som e of
the hyphenation rules.

Format: HV=n1 ,n2,n3<- H yphenation

Example: HV=6,2,3<-

The result is that only w ords of 6 characters or greater

will be hyphenated. At least 2 characters will appear
before the hyphen, and in a w ord that is hyphenated, at
least 3 characters will appear after the hyphen. The
default is HV=5,2,2.

NOTE The HV setting used to be HY, w hich caused confusion

with the HY (hyphenation on/off) command. If you have
an HY setting in your printer file, it will be recognized by
XyWrite III Version 3.1 as H yphenation Values. If you
have a default HY setting to control the way w ords are
hyphenated, however, it m ust be changed to HV, since
default HY controls which hyphenation style (if any) is on
w hen XyWrite starts.

6-103
Display Settings (cont’d)

WO W ord O verstrik e E diting. The WO (W ord Overstrike)

setting allows a special overstrike typing m ode for text
entry. This m ode causes text entered at the cursor to
overwrite text characters but not w ord separators. W hen a
separator is encountered, subsequent text is entered in
Insert mode.

This overstrike m ode replaces the normal overstrike

m ode of XyWrite and is accessed by striking the [Ins] key
in the usual fashion.

For instance, if you w ere to place the cursor on the “e ” of

the w ord “sacred”, and enter the characters “ifice”, the
w ord “sacred” w ould be changed to “sacrifice”. Any
following text w ould be m oved to fit the extra characters.

The setting is entered by typing W O =l on a line by itself

in the Printer File. The default is WO=0.

DT N orm al/E xp an d ed D isp la y T ype. The DT setting

specifies how docum ents are displayed w hen first called
to the screen.

There are four choices and they are given with the
following settings. The markers referred to are the line-
en d symbol (<-) and em bedded com m and triangles (A ).

DT=0 The file displays in Expanded Display.

DT=1 The file displays in Normal Display with
Page/Line off, markers visible.
DT=2 The file displays in Normal Display with
Page/Line turned on, m arkers visible.
DT=3 The file displays in Normal Display with
m arkers hidden.

If no DT is explicitly called out, XyWrite defaults to

DT-1.

6-104
(cont’d) Display Settings

Screen Settings
Screen Settings do not affect the text; they affect the environm ent
surrounding the text — the ruler markers, paragraph-ending arrows,
header colors (at the com m and line and prom pt line), the w indow
border colors and screen length.

RL R uler M arkers. The RL (Ruler) com m and allows you to

change the characters show n on the third line of the
display - the ruler. The format is:

Format: RL< abcdefghi <- Ruler m arkers

Default: R L < l—i i IIII <-
Example: RL<^-^CD P-i0LR <-

a is the Tab m arker for Flush Left Tabs (TS 10)

b is the Tab m arker for Flush Right Tabs (TS 10R)
c is the Tab m arker for Flush Center Tabs (TS 10C)
d is the Tab m arker for Decimal Tabs (TS 10D)
e is the m arker for the first Indent Paragraph value
/ is the m arker for the second Indent Paragraph value
g is the m arker for the position of the cursor colum n
h is the left margin m arker (LM 0)
i is the right margin m arker (RM 78)

You can substitute any ASCII characters for a ruler

marker. If you choose to use a ruler symbol other than
the original XyWrite setting, be sure to follow this exact
order to replace the correct one.

LC Line End C haracter. LC (Line End Character) specifies

the character to be displayed as a carriage return (hard
return). The default setting is a left arrow (<-), ASCII 27.
If you w ant to turn off the arrows on the display, change
the LC character to a space.

Format: LC=c<- Line Character

Example: LC=<-

c is any character.

6-105
Display Settings (cont'd)

HR H eader R everse M ode. HR (H eader Reverse) specifies

the display m ode for ESI, Iflii’Jai. E d >Hi- the part of
the header w hich defaults to reverse display mode.

Format: HR=n<r H eader Reverse

Example: HR=100<-
7
HN H eader N orm al M ode. HN (H eader Normal) specifies
the display m ode for all of the XyWrite header except the
parts specified above in H eader Reverse Mode — that is,
the parts w hich default to normal mode.

Format: HN=«<- H eader Normal

Example: HN=31 <-

BX W in dow B order C olors. The BX (Box Colors) setting

allows you to define the colors of the borders to the
w indows.

Format: BX=active,wl ,w2,...,w9<-

Example: BX=15 ,1 ,2 ,3 ,4 ,5 ,6 ,9 ,1 0 ,1 1<-

This w ould set the border of the active w indow (active)

to bright white, w indow 1 (vv7) to blue (1), w indow 2
(w2) to green (2), w indow 3 (wJ) to Cyan (3) and so on.
(Refer to the Color Table for the color com bination of
your choice.)

The default for all borders is Reverse.

SL S creen L ength. The SL setting allows you to use a

display terminal that has m ore than the standard 25 lines.

Format: SL=/t<- Screen Length

Example: SL=44<

This w ould set the screen length to 44 lines, w hich w ould

give 3 lines of header and 41 lines of text.

The XyWrite default is 25. The SL setting should not be

used with any of the standard 25-line displays — you will
get unhappy results if you do. If you are using an EGA
adapter, refer to the EG com m and described next.

6-106
(cont'd) Display Settings

EG EGA Support. If you have an IBM Enhanced Graphics

Adapter (EGA), you can use the EG setting rather than SL
to change the number of screen lines:

EG=0 25 screen lines

EG=1 43 screen lines

PD Pad Spaces. When you move the cursor off to the right
of a line of text and you begin to enter new text, PD (Pad
Spaces) determines whether spaces are added to fill the
gap to the left of the cursor. PD has an effect only if you
use the linear cursor keys. To illustrate, imagine the
following: You move the cursor to the right (enabled by
Linear Right in the keyboard file), past the end of a line
of text (past the line-end arrow). You then begin typing.
If PD=1, the text is inserted exactly where the cursor is
located, and the gap between the line-end arrow and the
new text is filled in with spaces. If PD=0, the cursor
jumps left to the line-end arrow and the text is inserted
adjacent to the existing text. In summary:

PD=0 Spaces are not inserted

PD=1 Spaces are inserted to fill gap

P rinter
BW Speed vs. Flicker. BW (Black and White) lets you
choose between a fast screen and a clean screen. BW=1
causes XyWrite to update the display faster (and is F ile
intended for Black & White screens). You notice the
improved speed when scrolling text, switching between
windows, and running programs. The cost is a noticeable
flicker each time the screen is updated.

BW=0 Clean screen, no flicker (but slower)

BW=1 Fast screen (with flicker)

The built-in default is BW=0. You would use BW=0

when you have a Color Graphics Adapter. Try BW=1 and
see if the speed is worth the tradeoff.

6-107
Display Settings (cont’d)

D isplay Tables
C olor T able. To select a color (for a color monitor),
pick one color for the Characters and another color for
the Background. Add the tw o num bers together. Use
this num ber with the MD com m and. For exam ple, for
bright w hite characters (15) on a blue background (16),
use MD 31.

C haracters (Foreground)
0 Black Characters
1 Blue Characters
2 G reen Characters
3 Cyan Characters
4 Red Characters
5 Magenta Characters
6 Brown Characters
7 White (Dim) Characters
8 Gray Characters
9 Light Blue Characters
10 Light G reen Characters
11 Light Cyan Characters
12 Light Red Characters
13 Light Magenta Characters
14 Yellow Characters
15 Bright White Characters

B ackground
0 Black Background
16 Blue Background
32 G reen Background
48 Cyan Background
64 Red Background
80 Magenta Background
96 Brown Background
112 W hite (Dim) Background
128 Blinking Characters, Black Background
144 Blinking Characters, Blue Background
160 Blinking Characters, G reen Background
176 Blinking Characters, Cyan Background
192 Blinking Characters, Red Background
208 Blinking Characters, Magenta Background
224 Blinking Characters, Brown Background
240 Blinking Characters, White (Dim) Background

6-108
(cont’d) Display Settings

M onochrom e Table. On a monochrome monitor, the

following table is in effect. Add 128 to a number to make
it blink. “White on Black” means White Characters on a
Black Background.

0 Black on Black (invisible)

1 White on Black, underlined
2-7 White on Black, not underlined
8 Black on Black (invisible)
9 Bright White on Black, underlined
10-15 Bright White on Black, not underlined
112 Black on White
120 Black on White
128 Black on Black (invisible)
129 Flashing White on Black, underlined
131-135 Flashing White on Black, not underlined
136 Black on Black (invisible)
137 Flashing Bright White on Black, underlined
138-143 Flashing Bright White on Black, not underlined
240 Flashing Black on White
248 Flashing Black on White

The only values that don’t display are: 0, 8, 128, and 136.

6-109
System Settings

ND Network D rives. When you are working on a network,

several users have access to the same files. This could
create problems if more than one person decides to edit
the same file at the same time. To avoid this situation,
XyWrite provides a way for you to lock out other users
when you have a file open for editing. You do this by
including the ND (Network Drive) setting in the Printer
File. The ND setting defines all the drives in a network
(up to a maximum of five) in the following format:

Format: ND=dl :td2:,d3:,d4:,d5

Example: ND=C:

Once you have loaded the Printer File containing this

setting, XyWrite prevents anyone in the network from
accessing a file while it is open on someone else’s screen.

NOTE #\ Changing D isks. If the ND setting is in effect, and if

your network drive has a removable disk, do not
rem ove the disk from th e netw ork drive w h ile a file
is o p en from that drive. Doing so could result in a loss
of data.

NOTE #2 Backup. If the ND setting is in effect, the BK (Backup)

setting is ignored and XyWrite will not make automatic
backup copies of files. You can, however, specify a save
drive (see "Setting the Default Drive" in Chapter 2 and
Note #3 below).

NOTE #3 D efining M ultiple Save D rives. If you decide to define

several save drives, be sure that only one of them is a
network drive and that the network drive is the first one
specified.

6-110
 Special Printer Files

Special Printer Files

You can construct printer files to perform special tasks (for example, the
file STRIP.PRN which we include).

The main use for STRIP.PRN is to produce a file stripped

of all embedded XyWrite commands. You might do this
to convert a file for use by another word processor,
where you don’t want the XyWrite double-angle brackets:
« and » . Note that using this file also strips out the
character modes (Bold, Underline, Reverse).

To use this file, go to the Command line and type:

|?5]ldprn strip .p rn @

Call the file you want to the display and type:

[£5]typef o ld file .n e w file C T

where oldfile is the original file and newfile is the file

stripped of XyWrite embedded commands. The newfile is
the file you can send to another word processor.

STRIP.PRN does the following:

• Inserts any running headers, running footers,

footnotes, the soft date, soft time and soft page
numbers into the text as fixed text. Tabs are left intact.
• Converts word-wrapped line endings to hard returns.
(To make them remain word-wrapped, set LE<)
• Strips out Indent Paragraph (IP) commands. (You will
have to reinsert this if you want it included.)
• Removes all character display modes (bold, underline,
reverse, superscript and subscript).

When through using STRIP.PRN, be sure to load your

normal printer file.

6-111
Load Printer File LDPRN

FORMAT BJILDPRN filenam e.pm Load Printer File

filename.prn is the Printer File to b e loaded.
LP is an abbreviation for LDPRN.
This is an im m ediate com m and.

P u r p o se The LDPRN (Load Printer File) com m and loads the

Printer File you specify into memory. This sets up
XyWrite to w ork with your particular printer. (Also see
Note #1 if you have a serial printer).

W hen you first installed XyWrite according to the

Installation Guide, the procedure copied LDPRN filename
into your startup file (STARTUP.INT). This sets up
XyWrite for your printer each time you start XyWrite. If
you w ant to change your default printer, you must
modify this statem ent (Step 3 below).

ACTION Load P rin ter F ile.

To set u p XyWrite for a particular printer, load the
corresponding Printer File into m em ory as follows:

1. Look through the .PRN files in the original XyWrite

diskette to find the one for your printer. Let’s say it’s
an Epson FX.

2. Enter LDPRN along with the nam e of the Printer File:

Type: [F5]ldprn e p so n .p rn M ^

Result: This loads your Printer File into memory,

setting up XyWrite to print to that printer. See Note
#1 if you have a serial printer.

3- To "permanently" set up XyWrite for your particular

printer, m ake sure the statem ent in Step 2 above is
entered into your STARTUP.INT file. See the Startup
File section later in this chapter for instructions.

6-112
(cont’d) Load Printer File

NOTE #1 In sta llin g a S erial P rinter. W hen installing a printer

that runs off your serial port (COM1 or COM2), you must
redirect the line printer port (LPT1) to the serial port. To
do this, do the following prior to starting XyWrite:

1. Copy MODE.COM from your DOS disk to your

XyWrite W orking Disk.
2. Type the following two statem ent prior to starting
XyWrite with EDITOR. Refer to your printer manual
for the proper settings to include — here w e’ve used
9600,n,8,l. The second statem ent re-directs LPT1: to
COM1:.
Type: A>mode lpt1 :=9600,n,8,10
Type: A>mode Ip t1 := co m 1 :0
If you have a two-floppy system, you might add these
tw o statem ents to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
3. Start XyWrite:
Type: A > e d ito r0
At this point you are in XyWrite, w here you can call,
edit and store files.
4. After you quit XyWrite, to return LPT1 and COM1 to
their original states:
Type: A>mode lp t1 :@
N o t e #2 A u tom atically S ettin g Up Serial P rin ter. If you have a
serial printer, you might create a DOS batch file to do
Steps 2 through 4 automatically. (This is more
appropriate for a hard disk system than a two-floppy
system.) This batch file sets up LPT1, starts XyWrite, and
then resets LPT1 w hen you quit. If you nam e it XY.BAT,
you w ould start XyWrite by typing XY at the DOS
prom pt. XY.BAT is as follows:
mode 9600,n,8,1
mode lpt1 :=com1 :
editor
mode lpt1:

6-113
Load Printer File (cont’d)

NOTE #3 S w itch in g B etw een P rin ters. XyWrite supplies Printer

Files for m any different printers. If you use m ore than
o ne printer, you need to run the procedure "Load Printer
File" for the printer you want. A nother way, for the more
hearty XyWrite users, is to create a XyWrite program that
you run — it might ask "Dot Matrix (D) or Letter Quality
(L)?" You w ould respond with the appropriate letter — D
or L. Refer to the exam ple "Select a Printer" at the end of
Advanced User Programming in Chapter 5 for the
program.

NOTE #4 T he PRN E x ten sio n . We recom m end you use the PRN
extension to Printer Files (such as EPSON.PRN) for easy
identification in the directory. However, XyWrite does
not require you to use this extension.

6-114
 Character Substitution File

Intro You can construct a Character Substitution table as either

( 1 ) part of a Printer File (using SU) or ( 2 ) alone as a
separate file. In this section w e describe how to do the
latter. The principles are the same — except in this case
you use LDSUB rather than LDPRN.
A C haracter Substitution File allow s you to determ ine
how each displayed character is p rin ted . This is useful
for b u ild in g foreign language characters, graphics
sym bols and math signs, for instance. It can w ork just as
w ell for a dot m atrix p rin te r as it can for a daisyw heel or
laser printer.
The C haracter Substitution File does for your p rin ter
w hat th e Keyboard File does for your keyboard —
custom ize it to your liking. To use a Substitution File is
qu ite sim ple, and requires learning only one new
com m and: LDSUB.

6-115
Load Character Substitution File LDSUB

FORMAT E l LDSUB f i lename

filename is the nam e o f substiti

LDSUB is an im m ediate com m
LDSUB w as nam ed LO in earlier versions of XyWrite

The LDSUB (Load Character Substitution File) com m and

loads the specified Character Substitution File into
m em ory for use. This allows you to change any character
into a string of characters w hen you output to a printer.
This m eans that you can change a foreign language
character or a graphics symbol to the string of codes
necessary to get it to print properly on your printer. You
can also use this com m and to reassign the printw heel
characters for a daisy-wheel printer.

A ctio n S u b stitu tin g C h aracters fo r P rin to u t

The rules for building this text file are straightforward.
The format is a simple assignment:

n=string

• n is any of 256 ASCII characters (see Appendix).

• string is the sequence of ASCII characters you w ant

printed in place of n.

This format is used in Step 2 below. You can list as

m any of these assignm ents as you wish.

1. Create a new file (in w hich to store the substitutions).

Let’s call it CHARI.SUB:

Type: [F5lnew c h a r l .s u b C T

6-116
(c o n t'd ) Load Character Substitution File

2. As an exam ple, let’s tell XyWrite to p rin t the

num b er zero w ith a slash through it (0 ). In o th er
words, substitute for the zero the th ree characters
zero, backspace and slash.
Type: O =O Q /0

To type the backspace character (Q), you press

@ | | 8.
3. T yp e: [re]store g

4. Load the character su b stitu tio n file into m em ory.

Type: [re]ldsub charl.sub0

Result: Now w henever you p rin t a d ocum ent, all zeros

w ill appear as (0 ). C haracter su b stitu tio n occurs for the
com m ands TYPE and TYPEF.

NOTE # 1 M aking C om m en ts in th e F ile. Any line beginning

w ith a sem i-colon that does not have an equal sign as
the second character is ignored by the program . You
can use this to make com m ents in this text file.

NOTE #2 G rap h ics M ode E xam p le. Let’s show how you o u tp u t
a q u estio n m ark (?) com posed as a bit pattern by going

P rinter
into the graphics m ode of a dot m atrix p rin ter. (Shown
here is the control code seq u en ce to en ter graphics
m ode for 8 characters, follow ed by the eight characters
that are o u tp u t as a bit pattern for the q u estio n m ark.) F il e

In the character substitution file, type:

?= ► S0008 0 V Q Y $ * <■

You can b u ild your table to create your ow n special

characters. You should refer to the ASCII table in the
ap p en d ix for inform ation on en terin g any of the foreign
o r special symbols.

6-117
Load Character Substitution File (corn'd)

NOTE #3 C haracter S u b stitu tio n F ile. A sample file is show n on

the facing page. The four lines do the following:
1. The character w h ich is displayed as a sm iling face
(© ) p rin ts as a plu s sign overstriking a zero (© ).
2. The displayed character A prints as an arrow ( ^ ) ,
w h ich is m ade from a < (less-than) sign
overstriking a hyphen (-).
3. The display ch aracter prints (on a Q um e
LetterPro 20P only) as a d o u b le opcn-parenthesis
((, w h ich is m ade from one parenthesis, a
backspace (fl), 3 /1 2 0 " forw ard spacing (► H @ @ C
— p ec u lia r to this m odel p rin te r), and a second
parenthesis.
4. The display character $ prints as a d o u b le closed
parenthesis )).

6 118
(co n t'd) C haracter Substitution File

CHARACTER SUBSTITUTION FILE

©= 0D +^
^ = < D — f

J3= (
$= )DM@(g>CR
6-120
 Microjustification

In tro XyWrite supports the highest quality printing your printer

can produce — microjustification. Printer Files supplied
with XyWrite are already set up for microjustification.
This section is for those w ho, for one reason or another,
w ant to modify the default settings.

This section contains an in-depth discussion of how

microjustification works and how to modify the settings.
As such, it is relatively advanced. You can a find m ore
elem entary discussion related to Microjustification in the
"Alignment" section of Chapter 4.

P rinter
F il e

6-121
Microjustification

FORMAT MU=« Margin Units

DU=« Display Units
MS=w Microspace Units
CP:« Printer Escapements
sc=« Space Constant
SF=n Space Factor
JL=n Justify Underline
JT=« Justification Type
You enter these settings in the Printer File.

P urpose W hen you print a docum ent, the XyWrite default is to

print the text flush left, with a ragged right edge. This is
unjustified text. By em bedding a JU format com m and in
your docum ent, the text w hich follows will be printed
justified — that is with text flush against both margins.
(Refer to the JU com m and in Chapter 4, under
Alignment.) XyWrite justifies text by adding spaces
betw een characters to stretch lines to the same length.

XyWrite offers two ways to justify text:

W hole-Space J u stifica tio n w orks by adding w hole

spaces betw een the words.

M icroju stification , however, adds space in fractional

pieces betw een w ords and characters, rather than w hole
spaces only betw een words. We call these p artial
sp a ces. The advantage is that the text has a sm oother,
m ore refined appearance than with W hole Space
Justification.

We have set up each printer for the highest quality

printing — microjustification — if the printer supports it.
However, microjustification can slow dow n som e dot
matrix printers significantly. If this is a' problem you can
set the Printer File to w hole-space justification. (See
Note #5).

6 122
(cont’d) Microjustification

M IC R O JU STIFIC ATIO N SETTIN G S

The following settings control microjustification and relate format

commands and screen display to proportional type. You enter them into the
Printer File. These settings take effect only after you load the Printer File
with the LDPRN command.

MU Margin Units — The MU setting specifies the number of Basic

Units in a Margin Unit. Margin Units are the units used in
margin commands LM, RM, TS and IP. Thus, LM 10 means
set the margin to 10 Margin Units. (MU was formerly called
CW — these two commands are equivalent.)

DU Display Units — The DU setting specifies the number of

Basic Units in a Display Unit. Display Units are used in
determining the tabs and margins on-screen. DU is usually set
the same as MU (Margin Units), though it can be different.

MS Microspace Units — The MS setting specifies the number of

printer escapement units in a Margin Unit. This setting may be
different than MU for printers with character spacing different
from print-head escapement, such as the HP LaserJet.

CP Character Pitch — The CP setting specifies the number of

lines of printer codes that are to follow. The lines that follow
CP specify the printer codes to create increments of printer
escapements.

SC Space Constant — The SC setting specifies the number of

partial spaces inserted between words before inserting space
between characters within a word.

SF Space Factor — The SF setting specifies the ratio of partial

spaces added between words to those added between
characters within a word after the SC spaces have been
allocated. A larger number means more spaces will be added
between words before they are added between characters.

JL Justify Underline — The JL setting enables (JL=1) or inhibits

(JL=0) justification of text printed in the underline mode (MD
UL). See Note #7. (JL was formerly called JU.)

JT Justification Type is a setting reserved for future use. All

printers currently require JT=0.

6-123
Microjustification (cont’d)

ACTION S ettin g th e P rin ter F ile fo r M icro ju stificatio n .

XyWrite Printer Files com e set up for microjustification (in
the printer’s default pitch). Follow this procedure if for
som e reason you n eed to modify your microjustification
settings. (See Note #1.)

1. C all y o u r P rin ter F ile. We will use an Epson printer

for our exam ple throughout this procedure.

Type: [F5jcall 3epsonfx.prn5j]

2. M argin U nits. Search for the MU setting:

Type: [F5]se /m u /0

Result: This moves the cursor to MU (Margin Units),

the first justification setting in the file. (If MU is not
present, look for CW. MU was formerly called CW.)

Derive the value for Margin Units from your printer

manual. MU is described in Note #2. The Epson prints
at 120 dots p er inch. Thus, all characters are som e
multiple of 1/120th inch in width. A Basic Unit is
1/120th of an inch. The widest character in the
Proportional Space Width Table is 12 Basic Units,
w hich is 12/120ths of an inch. If w e set MU to 12,
then LM10 will correspond to 1.0 inch, w hich is
convenient.
Type: MU=12<-
This tells XyWrite that, for instance, w hen w e ask for a
Left Margin of 8 w e w ant the left margin to be m oved
8 characters each with a w idth of 12 Basic Units.

3. D isp la y U nits. Set the value for DU to be the sam e as

MU (Margin Units).
Type: DU=12^
Result: Margins ap p ear o n the screen similar to how
they will appear on the printed page. You might set
DU to a value greater than MU if your printer is set up
for letters of smaller point size than normal and you
w ant the tabs closer together.

6-124
(c o n t’d) Microjustification

4. M icrospace U nits. Looking in the Epson manual, the

escapem ent (horizontal m otion) is given in l/6 0 th s of
an inch. At 10*pitch, each Margin unit is .1“, w hich is 6
p rin ter escapem ent units. So w e give the MS a value of
6. (The Epson p rin ter escapem ent is l/6 0 th , n o t 1/120th,
of an in ch .)
Type: MS=6^
5. C haracter P itch . Type a value for CP equal to the
num ber of lines you will enter in Step 6. Be sure to use
a co lo n , not an equal sign.
Type: CP: 5"*"
6. C odes for Partial Spaces. Referring to the p rin ter
manual if necessary, type in the codes that direct the
p rin ter to m ove one partial space (1/6), tw o partial
spaces (2 /6 ) and so on, all the way up to 5/6. Place
these lines imm ediately following the CP com mand,
one code p er line. You m ust type as many lines as the
value given w ith the CP com m and (in this case, 5).
The set of Epson com m ands looks like this:

►K© 0
►KB 0

P k inter F il e
►K¥ 0
►K¥ 0
►K* 0

7. Space C onstant. Set the num ber of partial spaces you

w ant added betw een the w ords before spaces are
added betw een the characters. Let’s say w e w ant 3:
Type: SC=3^
8. Space Factor. Set the ratio of partial spaces added
betw een w ords to partial spaces added betw een
characters w ithin words. For example:
Type: SF=2^

6-125
Microjustification (cont’d)

9. J u stified U n d erlin e. Set JL to enable (JL=1) or disable

(JL=0) justification of the underline m ode (MDUL):

Type: JL=1<

10. Type: [F 5 ]s t0 re S

11. Type: [F5]Idprn 3epsonfx.prn0

Next, in order to print a justified docum ent, you must

insert the JU com m and into the docum ent — this turns
justification on for that text. Refer to the JU com m and in
the Formatting chapter for this procedure. Finally, print
out the docum ent using TYPE.

W idth T able — For printers with varying character-

w idths (proportional type), the w idth for each character is
specified in a Width Table in the Printer File. (Width
Tables are discussed in the Printer File section of this
Chapter.)

B asic U n its — The Width Table m entioned above uses

Basic Units to specify characters. Thus, the line A=5
m eans the letter "A" is five Basic Units in width.

M argin U nits (MU) — The format com m ands that you

use to specify margins and tabs use values w e call Margin
Units (for exam ple, LM5, RM70). A Margin Unit is
defined to be som e num ber o f Basic Units with the MU
setting.

D isp la y U n its (DU) — The display of text on the screen

som etim es requires an adjustm ent to account for
differences in the size of the characters that print and the
size of the characters that are displayed.

XyWrite lets you get an indication of how the text might

print o u t — by adjusting the tabs and margins on the
ruler in the display. A Display Unit is defined by the DU
com m and to be som e num ber of Basic Units.

6-126
(cont'd) Microjustification

P rinter F il e

6-127
Microjustification (co n td )

P rin ter E sca p em en t U n its — A p rin te r escap em en t u n it

is th e sm allest in c re m en t o f p rin te r escapem ent. You can
derive its value from your p rin te r manual. (P rin te r
escap em en t is th e sm allest horizontal distance the p rin te r
can m ove to p o sitio n a ch aracter.)
Some p rin ters have ch aracters that have w id th s in
in crem en ts that are different from the in crem en ts of
p rin te r escap em en t (w h e re it places th e ch aracters). The
m ost notable exam ples of this are th e laser p rin ters that
have p rin te r escap em en t in l/7 2 0 th of an inch and
ch aracter w id th s in l/3 0 0 th s of an inch. (HP-Laser is one.)
M icrosp ace U n its (MS) — This setting specifies th e
n u m b er of p rin te r escap em en t units in one M argin Unit.

N O TE #1 P r in te r F ile s. XyW rite in c lu d e s P rin ter Files for m any

p o p u la r p rin ters. All p rin te rs cap ab le o f m icro ju stifica­
tio n co m e set u p for it in th e p r in te r ’s d efau lt p itc h
(u su ally 10 or 12 ch aracters p e r in c h ).
H ow ever, y o u ’ll n e e d to install th e p ro p e r co m m an d s if
1) you are crea tin g y o u r o w n P rin ter File w ith m icro ju s­
tification, o r 2) y o u w an t to m icrojustify te x t in yo u r
p r in te r ’s n o n -d efau lt p itch es.

N O TE # 2 S ettin g M argin U n its. D eterm ine th e n u m b er of units, or

w idth, that you w an t to define th e n um bers you give w ith
the m argin com m ands.

6-128
(cont’d) Microjustification

NOTE #3 H ow P artial Spaces are A llocated. Before XyWrite

prints a line, it calculates the num ber of spaces by which
the line w ould fall short of the right margin, and then
distributes those spaces betw een characters according to
the values given for the Space Constant and the Space
Factor. With SC-5 and SF=2, the first 5 partial spaces are
added betw een words. After those spaces have been
allocated, spaces are added in the ratio of 2 betw een
w ords for every 1 betw een adjacent characters.

NOTE #4 C on strain ts. Hardware may limit the use of

microjustification. In particular:

• You can use microjustification only if your printer

supports it. A printer m ust be able to move in
increm ents of less than one space. Virtually all
current-m odel printers can do this.
• Display m onitors cannot m ove text in increm ents
smaller than one space, so microjustified text will look
ragged-right on screen.
• Some dot matrix printers must go into graphics m ode
each time a partial space is added. This process may
be too slow for your needs; if so, switch to whole-
space justification according to Note #5.

NOTE #5 S electin g W h ole Space J u stifica tio n . To disable

microjustification and select w hole-space justification, call
up your Printer File and insert the statem ent DF WS = 1
on a line by itself. To switch back to microjustification,
use DF WS = 0 instead.

NOTE #6 S w itch in g F on ts. You can set u p your Printer File to

easily switch fonts — for instance, to switch from 10 -
pitch to 12-pitch. This requires you set up the PT setting
in your Printer File and use the PT com m and in your text.
Refer to the Printer File section in this chapter.

6-129
Microjustification (c o n t’d)

N o t e #7 J u stify U n d er lin e. If you use JL=1, d ep e n d in g o n the

length o f yo u r p rin ter’s underline, th ere m ay b e gaps
b e tw e e n adjacent underlines. This is d u e to the partial
spaces ad d e d b etw e en characters. If th ere are gaps, you
sh o u ld set JL=0 in y o u r Printer File.

N o t e #8 T ry H y p h e n a tio n . M icrojustification is an aesthetic

feature - it m akes y o u r p rin ted copy look better. But
occasionally w h e n a long w o rd w rap s to th e next line,
the line can look very stretched w h en printed. You can
turn o n autom atic h y p h en atio n (see LDDICT) o r a d d soft
h y p h en s to the big w o rd s to b reak them up.

note #9 H elp . If a file for y o u r p rin ter is n o t p rovided o n the

m aster diskette, look at the u ser m anual for y o u r printer
an d tak e o n e o f the existing files as a gu id e to insert the
co d es for the display m odes. If you c a n ’t figure it out
sen d us a copy o f th e m anual for y o u r printer an d a
diskette an d w e ’ll sen d you an in p u t file for th e Load
Printer com m and.

NOTE #10 You can express Form at C om m ands in tenths of units.

For exam ple, LM = 1 0 .5 m eans set a Left Margin at 10.5
M argin Units.

6-130
 Sort File

I ntro Every time you create an index, the entries you identify in
your file are arranged in a predefined way. XyWrite gives
you the ability to modify the order in w hich your index
entries are arranged.

C ontents Page S ectio n C om m and

6-124 Sort File

6-126 Load Sort File LDSORT

6-131
Sort File (cont’d)

PUKPOSE XyWrite has an internal set of sorting rules that

automatically arranges index entries in alphabetical order
and makes other prioritizing decisions. For example, in
multi-word entries, XyWrite alphabetizes the first word
only, unless more than one entry has the same first word.
The result is a list of entries that looks like this:

w ild alphanumeric, 6-56

w ild le tte r, 6-57
w ild number, 6-50
w ild card , 6-55

You can change any of the default sorting rules by

creating a new Sort File listing the ASCII characters in the
order you want them sorted. (ASCII characters include
letters, numerals and other symbols. The complete list is
in Appendix A.)
ACTION C reatin g th e S ort F ile
The Sort File contains a list of characters in the order in
which you want them sorted. The first line of the file
contains the character or characters that you want to have
sorted first in your list (e.g., aA). The second line contains
those characters that you want have sorted second, and
so on.

Any characters that you omit from the Sort File are
ignored when you create an index.

Let’s create a sort file that builds alphabetical indexes, but

ignores spaces between words in multi-word entries. It
would sort the example above like this:

w ild alphanumeric, 6-56

w ild ca rd , 6-55
w ild le tte r, 6-57
w ild number, 6-50

1. Create a new file in which to store the sorting

information.
Type: [F5]nospace.srt0

6-132
(cont’d) Sort File

2. Enter the first line, w hich contains the characters to be

sorted first. In this exam ple, w e leave the space out
of the file altogether (normally, it w ould be the first
character in the file).

Type: aA

3. Continue entering all ASCII characters that you w ant

to have included in your index. Be sure to enter them
in the correct order; those characters at the top of the
Sort File will be sorted first in the index.

Type: bB
cC
dD

zZ

4. Omit any ASCII characters that you do not w ant the

sort program to use. In this exam ple, omit the
blank space from the list.

5. Store the sort file.

Type: [FSjstOreCT
6 . W hen you are ready to have an index sorted in the
order of your sort file, load the sort file with LDSORT:

Type: [F5] ldsort nospace.srtCT

S ort
F ile

The LDSORT com m and is described in m ore detail next.

6-133
Load Sort File LDSORT

Form at BlLDSORT filename

filename is the nam e o f a Sort File.

LDSORT is an im m ediate com m and.

P urpose The LDSORT (Load Sort File) com m and loads a Sort File
into memory. This Sort File is a text file that defines the
order in w hich you w ant index entries arranged.

A ctio n L oading a S ort F ile.

To load a Sort File into memory, enter the LDSORT
com m and along with the nam e of the Sort File you w ant
to load. For exam ple, if you have created a file called
NOSPACE. SRT:
T y p e : [F5]ld s o r t n o s p a c e .s r t C T
Result: The Sort File NOSPACE.SRT is now in effect.
W hen you create an index, the blank spaces betw een
w ords will be ignored so the entries look like this:

w ild alphanumeric, 6-56

w ildcard, 6-55
w ild le tte r, 6-57
w ild number, 6-50

N ote Startup. In order to use a Sort File you have created,

you m ust load it each time you run XyWrite. You can
have your Sort File automatically loaded at startup by
adding the LDSORT com m and to your STARTUP.INT file.

6-134
 Startup File

INTRO The STARTUP.INT is one of the files w e provide to

enable you to customize XyWrite to your needs. This file
tailors the initial conditions, such as loading a Printer File
for your printer and loading your ow n Keyboard File.

It d o esn ’t take m uch time to learn about the

STARTUP.INT file, since there are no new com m ands to
learn. Incidentally, if you are familiar with DOS, you’ll
notice the parallel betw een STARTUP.INT, w hich
initializes XyWrite, and AUTOEXEC.BAT, w hich initializes
DOS.

S tartup
F qje

6-135
Startup File STARTUP. INT

P u r p o se STARTUP.INT is the initial startup file for XyWrite. It

contains com m ands that are automatically executed every
time XyWrite is started up. These com m ands set up
XyWrite to be custom-tailored for you. They can load
your Printer File, set the default page length, and set the
default drive, for example. A sam ple STARTUP.INT file is
show n on the opposite page.

STARTUP.INT is actually a program file (see "User

Programming"). XyWrite com es prepared with a simple
STARTUP.INT file; you are w elcom e to modify it to
include any com m ands you like.

ACTION R u n n in g t h e STARTUP.INT F ile

The STARTUP.INT file is run tw o different ways:
automatically and manually.

• A utom atically. Each time you start XyWrite,

STARTUP.INT runs automatically:
1. Start at the DOS prom pt (A> or B>):
2. Type: e d ito ria l
Result: XyWrite is loaded, the familiar XyWrite screen
appears and STARTUP.INT runs automatically. Each
com m and is executed in sequence, appearing briefly
o n the Com mand Line. U pon com pletion, the
XyWrite serial num ber screen is displayed. Press any
key to m ake it vanish (w e suggest you press [F5] since
the keystroke is accepted).

• M anually. You can run STARTUP.INT any time you

w ant w hile in XyWrite. You w ould do this to
re-initialize XyWrite, as follows:
1. STORE any docum ents you are w orking on before
you run STARTUP.INT (This is only a precaution
— if your startup file contains the ABORT
com m and, it will clear any docum ent from the
display.)
2. Type: [f5]run startup.int|?9]
Result: Each com m and in the file is executed, one
after another.

6-136
(cont’d) Startup File

A Sam ple STARTIJP.INT F ile.

BC default bk=1 <- ( 1)

BC default pl=54,60,50^ ( 2)
BC Idhelp long.hlp<- (3)
BC Idpm epson.prn^ (4)
BC aborts (5)
BC Idkbd ibml ,kbd<- (6)
BC Idsgt altkeys.sgt<- (7)
BC Idsub char.sub^ (8 )
BC b:<- (9)
BC ( 10 )

The ten lines do the following things:

Line 1. Sets XyWrite to keep a previous version of each

file as a backup copy.
Line 2. Sets the PL com m and (Page Length) to nom inal
54 lines, maximum 60 lines, and minimum 50
lines.
Line 3. Loads all Help files into memory, for quick
access.
Line 4. Loads the Printer File into memory — setting
XyWrite up, in this case, for an Epson printer.
Line 5. ABORT, w hich clears the display, putting into
effect any new display settings that w ere loaded
as part of the Printer File in step 4.
Line 6. Loads the keyboard file nam ed IBM1.KBD into
memory, putting that keyboard into effect.
Line 7. Loads the Save/Gets from the file
ALTKEYS.SGT, (a set that you use regularly).
Line 8 . Loads the Character Substitution FileCHAR.SUB
Line 9. Sets drive B as the default drive.
Line 10. Clears the com m and line. Notice there is no
carriage return following the BC, as
indicated by the absence of the left arrow (<-).
Startup
F ile

6-137
Startup File (cont’d)

ACTION M od ifyin g th e STARTUP.INT F ile

The following procedure show s you the sim plest way to
modify the STARTUP.INT file. For a m ore formal
approach, refer to "User Programming".

Let’s modify the STARTUP.INT file show n below so that

XyWrite will start u p with the directory displayed. To do
this, you add one com m and (DIR) to the en d of the
STARTUP.INT file.

The letters BC w hich begin each line are described in the

note below titled "Analysis." To create a new line
beginning with BC, as a shortcut w e will simply copy
another line in Step 2 (rather than go into User
Programming).

1. Call the existing STARTUP.INT file to the display:

Type: [re] c a ll startup. i n t 0

2. Each line must begin with the special letters BC. To

do this:
Move the cursor to the left end of the ABORT line.
Press: [m] (to define the ABORT line)
Press: [F7j (to copy the ABORT line)
Press: [F3j (to release the defined line)
Result: The ABORT line now appears twice.

Move the cursor up one line and to the right one

character. It should now be on the letter A of ABORT.
We w ant to keep BC, delete ABORT, and type in DIR
w here ABORT was:
Press: [Ml ® (To delete the w ord ABORT)
Type: d ir
Result: The DIR line is now finished.

6-138
(cont’d) Startup File

4. Now store the file:

Type: [F5]store@

5. And finally, test the file:

T y p e : [?5]run startup.int[^j]

Result: The com m ands in the STARTUP.INT file should

ap p ear one at a time on the Com m and Line, each
executing in turn. The last com m and, DIR, should
display the directory.

NOTE #1 A n alysis. Each line in a STARTUP.INT file represents a

series of keystrokes.

• BC (Blank the Command Line) represents the key: [F5]

• The return arrow (<-) represents the key: 0

For exam ple, here is one line and the keystrokes it

represents:

BC ld p m 3epsonfx.prn<-
(F5]ldprn 3 e p s o n fx .p rn 0

NOTE #2 O rder o f C om m ands. The order of com m ands in

STARTUP.INT can be very important w hen setting
defaults. The rule is: The last setting takes precedence.
For exam ple, in Case 1 below, if 3EPSONFX.PRN sets the
offset to OF 8 (with the statem ent DF OF 8 ), then the
offset w ould be overridden by the next statem ent,
DEFAULT OF=12.

Case 1:
BC ldprn 3epsonfx.prn^
BC d e fa u lt o f= 1 2 ^

Similarly, in Case 2, DEFAULT OF=12 is overridden by the

default setting in 3EPSONFX.PRN.

Case 2:
BC d e fa u lt of=12<^
BC ldprn 3epsonfx.prn<-

6-139
Startup File (cont’d)

Examples A d d ition al C om m ands. Spark your imagination. In

addition to the com m ands show n o n the previous page,
your STARTUP.INT file might include com m ands to:

B C dir<- Displays the directory.

B C callCC<- Displays the directory and
types CALL o n the Com mand
Line. You can then simply
m ove the cursor onto the
filename you w ant and press
to call that file.
B C b:,a:<- Assigns a default drive (driveB)
plus a save drive (drive A).
B C Idpm sample.pm.s«- Loads a program file
(SAMPLE.PM) to a Save/Get
key (S).
B C default tp=6^ Sets a default top margin of 6
lines for all docum ents.
B C window 1,1,1,80,22<- These tw o lines open
B C window 2,40,1,80,22*- w indow s 1 and 2 and set their
sizes.
B C run c h o ic e r Runs a user program nam ed
CHOICE. This might be a
program that lets you choose
w hich printer you w ant to use
— and loads the corresponding
printer file.

Two caveats about including RUN in a STARTUP file:

1. Be sure to end the program (CHOICE) with « E X » .
This ensures that program execution will return to
thenext statem ent in STARTUP.INT.
2. If the program CHOICE contains a Read Character
statem ent « R C » , you m ust position RUN CHOICE so
that it runs w ith no window open. That is, RUN
CHOICE must be located ahead of any WINDOW
statem ent (or DIR or CALL).

6-140
 Appendixes

I ntro This section contains useful reference information.

CONTENTS Pa«e D escrip tio n

A-l A ppendix A - ASCII Characters

B-l A ppendix B - M em ory
C-l A ppendix C - M essages
D -l A ppendix D - P rogram m in g E xam p les
E-l A ppendix E - Super K eyboard
F-l A ppendix F - M em ory-R esident Program s
G -l A ppendix G - P ro cessin g Files fo r E lectronic
Mail

A ppendix-i
ASCII Characters Appendix A

P urpo se The chart on the following two pages shows all 256
ASCII characters. This is the com plete set of characters

A scii T
that can be displayed on an IBM PC (in text m ode). You
can enter foreign characters, graphic symbols and math

able
symbols by the following method.

A c t io n T y p in g A n ASCII C h a r a cter
To type an ASCII character into text:
Press and hold:
Type the ASCII number at the numeric keypad.
For example, to enter ASCII 174:
Press: 174
Result: When you release (Alt] iShiftl, the A S C II code
appears on the screen.

N o t e #1 Three-Byte Characters. The codes 0, 8 , 9, 10, 13, 26,

2 7 ,3 2 , 174, 175, and 255 are entered into the text file
as a special three-byte sequence (but are displayed as
single characters). All others arc entered as a single
byte. However, all codes entered using [M] [Shift] are
output as a single byte by the TYPE command.

N o te #2 Escape Character. You can enter the Escape character

into text two ways: by pressing Esc , or by pressing [A lt
Shift 27. The Escape character is sent to the printer as
ASCII 27, the left arrow ■*- . However, the Escape
character is displayed as the left-pointing triangle, ASCII
17 ( < ), to differentiate it from the arrow displayed at the
end of each line. The Escape character is often used in
sending control codes to the printer.

A-1
ASCII C haracters

«1 ftlANK
0 ")VU> 16 ► 32 48 0 64 @ 80 I 96 112 P
E E

1 (Zl 17 < 33 1• 49 1 65 8, 97 a 113

A 0

11
2 S 18 I 34 50 2 66
82 0
98 b 114
H □

CO
CD
3 V 19 •II• 35 # 51 3 67 99 c 115
§ 0 0

4 ♦ 20 TT 36 $ 52 4 68 D 84 100 d 116 t
0

5 21 § 37 % 53 5 69 E 85 101 e 117 U
0

6 ♦ 22 - 38 & 54 6 70 F 86 102 f 118 V

0
I: t
7 !# 23 I 39 55 7 71 G 87 103 g 119 w
*

Î 40 ( X
00
00

8 □ 24 56 104 h 120
s 72 0 3

9 n 25 1 41 ) 57 I 89 105 i 121 y
h 73 0

10 s 26 42 * 58
□ 74
J 90 z 106 j 122 2

11 CT 27 < - 43 4 " 59 K 91 [ 107 123

{
□ 75 i .

0 t
00

12 28 i 44 60 92 124
o

9 J L I
a 76 0

13
f 29 45 --- 61 —
77 M 93
0 109 0
125
I

14 ß 30 ▲ 46 • 62 > 110 n 126 'Xj

N
78 “ 0

15 $ 31 T 47 / 63 9 95 111 o 127 Û
79 0

The following eight characters are interpreted by printers to mean:

0 = NULL, 07 = BEER 08 = BACKSPACE, 09 = TAB, 10 = LINE FEED,
12 = FORM FEED, 13 = CARRIAGE RETURN, 27 = ESCAPE

A-2
 ASCII C haracters

f : *• L
128 Ç 144 É 160 a 176 192 208 J L 224 oc 240 =

Ascii
» • /•
æ i
u 3 ß 241 ±

T a b le
129 145 161 177 & 193 209 225

130 e
A
146 Æ 162 o 178
1 194 T 210 i r ' 226 r 242 >

A
IL 243 <
131 a 147 0 163 u 179 1 195 T , 211 227 7T

132
•
a
*
148
•
0
•
164
"V
n 180 i 196 ----- 212 L 228 z 244 r
\ N
133 a 149 O 165 Ñ 181 197 4- 213 r 229 a 245 j

T
JL

o
134 a 150
A
U 166 a 182 198 214 rr 230 y 246 -=r

N
-— '■ 135 Ç 151 U 167 o 183
~n
199
Ih 215 i 231 T 247 -

200 X 216
A •• o
136 e 152 168 184 232 $ 248
y 0 =1
s
J ñ 217 _i
•
137 «»
e 153 o
••
169
0 185 - il
il
201 233 e 249

138
e 154
ü
170
□ I 186 202
3
218
r 234 n 250 •

139 ••
i 155 c 171
0 187
ïl
203 ~ i r 219 235 251

n
140 A
1
156 X 172 Va 188 204
¡0 220 Q 236 oo 252

141 V
157 ¥ 173 i 189 J 205 = 221 237 4> 253 T -
1
1
. 142
Ä
158 R 174 « 190 =j 206 _ll_
i r
222
a 238
E 254 I

143
o

A
159 f 175 » 191 n 207
± 223
H 239 n 255 n
MemoryJ Appendix B

XyWrite has a special capacity to handle large files

com fortably, u p to the lim its im posed by the size of
your m em ory. XyWrite w ill make the m ost o f your
m em ory — it w ill use u p to 640K — th e lim it im posed
by DOS. More memory' results in faster perform ance,
especially w h en editing large files.
Y our co m p u ter holds inform ation in tw o ways: in
m e m o r y and on d isk.
• M em ory is also called RAM, w hich stands for
Random Access Memory. This is the part of the
co m p u ter w here inform ation (such as th e XyWrite
program and the text file y o u ’re cu rren tly w orking
on) is kept w h ile it’s being used. The display
term inal is your w indow into m emory; you cannot
view text on the screen unless it resides in m em ory.
(To view text that is stored on disk, you m ust first
lo a d (copy) it into m em ory.) Any inform ation kept
in m em ory is erased w hen the co m p u ter is tu rn ed
off.
• D isk s in clu d e both floppy disks and hard (fixed)
disks. This is w here inform ation is stored on a
p erm an en t basis. You load inform ation from disks
into m em ory for use. W hen done w orking w ith the
inform ation, you store or save it back to the disk
from memory.
L oad in g to M em ory. W hen you first tu rn on your
co m p u ter, the m em ory is blank and all of the program s
are on disk. You need to load XyWrite from the disk
into the m em ory in order to use it.

MEMORY

SAVE ^
y
MEMORY
0
LOAD 1

B -l
Memory

The XyWrite III program can occupy anyw here from

approxim ately 140K to almost 300K of memory,
depending on w hich files are loaded: printer file, help
file, Save/Get file, hyphenation dictionary file, and
keyboard file. Data files can take up the remaining
memory. (IK - one kilobyte = 1024 characters).
W hen you call a text file, you are copying the file from
the disk into memory. The changes you m ake w hile
w orking in the file exist only in memory, and are not
recorded on the disk until you save the file.
The XyWrite com m ands w hich load from disk into
m em ory are:
CALL filename Loads the specified file into m em ory
and display
DIR Loads the disk directory into
m em ory and display
CAP filename Loads the specified program file
into m em ory and display
CAJF filename Loads the specified form docum ent
into m em ory and display
LDSGT filename Loads the specified Save/Get Key
file into memory only
LDPRN filename Loads the specified printer file into
m em ory only
LDSUB filename Loads the specified character
substitution file into m em ory only
LDKBD filename Loads the specified keyboard file
into m em ory only
LDPM filename,If Loads the specified program file
into memory, attached to the
specified Save/Get key
LDHELP filename Loads the index of the specified
Help File into memory.
MERGE filename Loads the specified file into m em ory
and display (at the cursor location)
(c o n t’d) Memory

C learing fro m M em ory. The XyWrite com m ands w hich

clear data from m em ory are:

ABORT Erases the current file from the

display and memory, and does not
disturb the disk files.

CLRSGT Erases the current Save/Get keys

M em ory
from memory.

REMOVE Clears a single Save/Get or User

Program from memory.

Saving to D isk. W hen you turn off the com puter, any
information left in m em ory is w iped out, so it’s im portant
to store your docum ents onto disk before quitting.
Examples of saving to disk are the commands:

SAVE filename Saves the current file to the

specified file on disk.

STORE filename Saves the current file to the

specified file on disk and clears the
display.

STSGT filename Saves the current Save/Get Keys to

disk.

SAVEDEF filename Saves the defined block of text to

disk.

D eletin g fro m D isk.T he XyWrite com m and you use to

delete files from the disk is ERASE.

ERASE filename Erases the specified file from disk.

(DEL is identical to ERASE)

ERNV filename Erases the specified file w ithout

stopping to verify.

B-3
Memory (cont'd)

R elated C om m ands. Keeping in m ind the distinction

betw een m em ory and disk allows you to understand
com m ands b etter and use them m ore confidently. You can
know w here inform ation is at any point in time. For
instance:

• NEW creates a new file in memory, but does n o t

create a new file on disk. The file is not created on disk
until you SAVE or STORE it.
• STORE perform s exactly the same function as SAVE
follow ed by ABORT. STORE saves the current
docum ent and clears the display.
• W indows are all allocated in memory. W hen a new
w indow is opened, part of m em ory is allocated to that
w indow.
• If a file is too large to fit into m em ory w hen using
CALL (o r w hen typing in new text), XyWrite
automatically creates tw o files to contain the
overflow — one for the overflow at the top of the file,
the o th er for the bottom overflow. (See “Overflow” on
the next page.)
R eco m m en d a tio n . To make the best use of your
co m p u ter’s memory:
Keep files to a size w here they fit entirely into available
memory. If your file gets so large that it starts scrolling the
excess to disk (into the tem porary overflow files), try
breaking the file into smaller files.
Prim ary F ile B uffers. Each file that you open has its own
buffer called a Primary File Buffer. The buffer for each file
starts small and grows in size as the file grow s — the buffer
can grow as large as 64K. The file can continue to grow in
size p a s t the 64K, to the limit of available m em ory (at
w hich point it begins overflowing to disk). Thus:
XyWrite w ill u se all available m em o ry b efore
creating tem porary overflow file s o n disk.
You can open as many as nine files — each will be in its
ow n buffer, and each buffer can grow to 64K (assum ing
you have that m uch m em ory ). Save/Gets are allocated to
their ow n buffer, w hich can be as large as 50K.
(cont'd) MemoryJ

As w e just stated, the Primary File Buffer does n o t impose

a limit on the size of files you can load into memory.
For example, if your system has 256K of RAM, and you
load 40K for DOS and 120K for XyWrite, you can load one
file as large as 96K (2 5 6 K — 40K — 1 2 0 K) before
overflow occurs. The absolute limit to the size of a file, if
you include overflow files, is determ ined by the am ount of
storage on your disk.

Mem ory
O v erflo w . If a file is too large to fit in available memory,
the overflow at either end is stored onto disk in tem porary
overflow files. While the files appear to be given random
nam es (such as CKDBRBHD.TMP and DMFAABDA.TMP)
their nam es are in fact derived from the date and time so
as to be unique. The nam es have the extension TMP
(tem porary). These files are created automatically
w henever they’re needed. W hen you store the file, the
parts are recom bined and the file is saved as a whole.
C o n s tra in t Im p o s e d b y P rim a ry F ile B u ffer.
The Primary File Buffer imposes a lim itation on defined
blocks of text. (This lim itation is seldom -encountered in
practice.) This constraint is best dem onstrated by an
example.
If you define a paragraph at the beginning of a 70K
docum ent and then attem pt to m ove it to the bottom of
the file, you will get the message CAN’T SCROLL DEFINE
OR DISPIAY. This message means XyWrite cannot scroll
the defined block or the display. It indicates that the
Primary File Buffer cannot contain all the text from the
defined text to the bottom of the docum ent. The solution
is for you to store the paragraph in a Save/Get, release the
defined te xt, and then move to the bottom of the file and
insert the Save/Get into the text.

B-5
Memory (con t’d)

The two constraints imposed by the Primary File Buffer

are:

1. Moving or Copying a D efined Block o f Text. If

you want to define a block of text and move or copy
it a long distance within the file, the size of the
Primary File Buffer limits how far you can move it —
you cannot move it farther than 64K.

2. D efining a Large Block o f Text. You cannot define

a block of text larger than the Primary File Buffer itself
(64K).

B-6
 Messages Appendix C

This appendix describes the error messages and system prom pts for XyWrite
III. These messages appear on the prompt line (the second line) of the
display.
A B O R T , S T O R E O R O P E N A W IN DOW There is already a file open on
the screen. ______
Action: STore or ABort the document on the screen, or press [Ctrl] |F10| to
display the W indow Menu and open a new window.
A L PH A N U M E R IC KEY R E Q U IR E D W hen Saving a defined block, you
m ust strike a letter or num ber key im m ediately after striking [F2j.
A ction: Stan over by striking [F2] follow ed by the appropriate letter or num ber.
A L PH A N U M E R IC RE Q U IR E D W hen you use the Insert Save/Get com m and
you must supply a letter or num ber for the desired Save/Get.
A ction: Supply the letter or num ber for the desired Save/Get.

M essag es
ALREADY T Y PIN G The TYPE com m and is already outputting to the printer.
A ction: Wait until the p rinter is finished and retry the com m and.
ARG RE Q U IR E D W hen using the Insert Save/Get com m and, you must
provide the letter or num ber of the Save/Get you wish to insert.
A ction: Press [ROj to return to the com m and line, and enter the IS com m and
again--this tim e w ith the corresponding num ber or letter.
BAD C O N FIG LINE XyWrite is unable to interpret one or m ore of the
p rin ter configuration lines w hen executing an LDPRN comm and.
A ction: If you w atch the loading of the table, there is a beep for each line in
error. Call the file to the screen and check that all com m ent lines are preceded
by a sem i-colon and that all of the named m odes (e.g., MD NM, MD BO) are
valid.
BAD LINE There is som ething w rong with one of the lines in the Character
Substitution file.
A ction: Check the file to see that all com m ent lines start w ith a sem i-colon.
BAD D E S T FILE No Destination file has been nam ed for the com m and.
A ction: Refer to the reference manual page that describes the proper entry of
the desired com m and.
BAD PA TH XyWrite is unable to follow the given DOS 2.0 path.
A ction: Check to see that all of the directory names are correct and linked in
the indicated order.

C l
 Messages (cont’d)

BAD S T R IN G W hen entering a Change or Search com m and you have not
entered a string, or the string does not have the correct separators.
A ction: Refer to the descriptions of these com m ands in this manual.
BAD T A B S CM D XyWrite expects the tab colum n values to be given in
ascending order.
A ction: Delete the TS com m and from the text and re-enter.
B R EA K The Ctrl-Break key com bination has been struck w hile executing a
CH, CV, or SK comm and. The current com m and is aborted.
A ction: If you w ish to continue w ith the CH, CV or SE, press [F9]. If you are
finished, no action is required.
B U F F E R FULL You have exceeded the text buffer capacity of your system.
A ction: Save the file. If you have a second screen active, reset the first screen
(RS), and save the second file as w ell. If you have exceptionally large Save/Gets,
save them to the disk and execute a CLRSGT. Now you can try reopening the
files that you have just stored. It may be advisable to w ork in one screen only if
your files are long.
C A N ’T FO RM A T W HILE PR IN TIN G Same as ALREADY TYPING.
A ction: Wait until the printing is com plete and retry the comm and.
C A N ’T G E T M EM ORY There is not enough m em ory to com plete the
function you have requested.
A ction: See “ O ut of Memory” message.
C A N ’T N E S T X, R F, RH, FN C M D S The Index Marker (X *), Running
Header (RH), Running Footer (RF), and Footnote (FN) com m ands cannot be
given one inside of the other.
A ction: Rearrange the order of the com m ands so they are not nested.
C A N ’T O P E N INDEX FILE XyWrite is unable to open a file to create an
index.
A ction: Check the directory to be sure there is enough space on the diskette.
Make sure the diskette is not w rite protected.
C A N ’T R E A S S IG N M EM ORY XyWrite cannot make enough room to go to
DOS or load the indicated program.
A ction: Try storing any open files and retry the com m and.
C A N ’T REVIEW WHILE P R IN T IN G Just as in TYPEF and TYPE, you cannot
TYPES w hile printing.
A ction: Wait for the p rinter to finish and proceed w ith TYPES.
C A N ’T RUN COM M AND The DO com m and cannot run the indicated
program .
A ction: C heck to see that the nam ed program is on the diskette and in the
current directory. (It may also be that there is not enough room in m em ory to
run the program .)

C-2
 (coin'd) Messages

C A N 'T S C R O L L D E FIN E O R D IS P L A Y XyWrite does not allow a block

that is actively defined to be buffered to the diskette in either of the two
temporary files that XyWrite creates.
Action: Press [F3] to release the defined block. Or press [F2]X to save it to a
Save/Get key for later use, and then release the define.
C A N ’T S C R O L L OUT O F R EG IO N W hen entering text after the |F3|
TERMINATES TEXT INPUT prom pt, you cannot move your cursor outside of the
input w indow until you are done.
A ction: If you want to scroll out of the cursor area, first press [F3J to close the
w indow .
C A N ’T S C R O L L A disk error is reported from DOS.
A ction: Either save the file to another drive or abort the file.
C A N ’T C R E A T E T E M P FILE W hen you’re doing background printing and a
file exceeds the capacity of the buffer memory, XyWrite autom atically creates
,TMP files on the default drive. This message means the default disk is write-
protected or full.
A ction: Check to sec if the disk is w rite-protected. If the diskette is full, you can
recover by placing a blank form atted diskette in the default drive.
C H A N G E A B O R T E D XyW rite’s reply w hen you enter A in response to the
TYPE A, N, S, OR Y prom pt displayed in the CV comm and.
COM M A ND IN P U T E R R O R The com m and that has been entered cannot be
acted upon by XyWrite.
A ction: Press [F3] (reset defined block); this may fix it. Refer to the page
describing the com m and to verify that it contains all of the required
inform ation. Go to Expanded Mode [Ctrl] [F9] to see if any em bedded characters
are present, causing the error message.
COM M A ND.CO M NO T FO U N D In trying to load DOS, COMMAND.COM
was not found on the specified drive.
A ction: Insert a diskette w ith DOS on it and retry, or specify other drive.
COM M AND T O O LONG FO R IN S E R T Embedded insen com m ands are
lim ited to a m axim um length of 78 characters.
A ction: Shorten the com m and so that it doesn’t exceed the 78-character limit.
C O U L D N ’T RELO AD MEM There isn’t enough available m em ory to reload
the indicated subroutine.
A ction: See “ O ut of Memory.”

C-3
 Messages (cont'd)

COULDN’T SAVE OVERLAY When using RLSMEM, this message indicates

that the overlay can’t be saved to the designated disk.
Action: Make sure that you’re addressing the right drive. Check to see that the
proper diskette is in the drive and that it isn’t write-protected or full. See that
the drive door is closed. Retry the command.
DEFAULT FOR WHAT? The DEFAULT command docs not recognize the
desired default or default code.
Action: Make sure there is a comma but no spaces between commands. Refer to
the pages on the Default command.
DISK ERROR A disk drive fault has been detected. This message will appear
when the door to the drive is open, when there is no diskette in the drive, or
when the diskette in the drive is write-protected or full.
Action: Correct the condition and retry.
DO YOU WISH TO QUIT (YIN) This Prompt is given in response to
Ctrl Alt Del
Action: Press Y if you wish to quit, N otherwise.
DONE XyWrite response indicating that the command has been completed.
ERROR CLOSING INDEX FILE XyWrite was unable to close the index file.
Action: Insert another diskette and retry the TYPE or TYPEF or IX commands.
ERROR HANDLING INSERTS XyWrite could not 1) find a Save/Get in
response to an Insert Save/Get format command, or 2) find a Data File in
response to a Put Field command.
Action: 1) Make sure you have loaded the correct set of Save/Get keys, and are
requesting the right key. 2) Make sure there is data in the Data File and that you
have properly entered the Field Identification command in your Main File.
ERROR LOADING HELP FILE The Help files may not be in
the current directory of the default disk, or there may not be enough memory to
load them.
Action: Change the default drive, or move the Help files to the default drive. If
there is insufficient memory, make more room by clearing Save/Gets (CLRSGT)
or storing a file (and closing a window if more than one is open).
ERROR LOADING OVERLAY An error has occurred while reading an
overlay into memory.
Action: Try reading the overlay from another drive. If this fails, it may mean that
either your drive or your diskette is failing. Try to recover what you can from the
diskette and reformat.

C-4
 (cont'd) Messages

E R R O R LOADING S G T S There isn’t enough room for the Save/Get file

you’ve requested, or a reading error has occurred w hile loading them .
A ction: Check the directory to make sure that you have the correct diskette in
the nam ed drive. Try loading the Save/Gets from another drive. You may need to
create m ore m em ory by storing one of the screens before attem pting to load the
file again.
E R R O R ON O U T P U T XyWrite has encountered an error in trying to open a
new file on the o u tp u t diskette.
A ction: Insert another diskette in the non-default drive and attem pt to store
before trying again.
E R R O R READING COM M A ND.CO M An error was encountered in reading
COMMAND.COM.
A ction: Insert a different diskette w ith COMMAND.COM on it and retry. If the
problem persists, save any open files and quit.
E R R O R READING INDEX FILE An error occurred w hile reading the
tem porary index file.
A ction: See Error Reading COMMAND.COM above.
E R R O R S O R T IN G INDEX FILE A disk error occurred w hile the index was
being sorted.
A ction: Use another diskette and retry the comm and.
E R R O R W RITING FO RM A T FILE An error occurred w hile w riting a format
file to the diskette.
A ction: Direct the o utput to another drive or place another diskette in the
nam ed drive.
E R R O R W RITING INDEX FILE XyWrite is unable to o u tp u t the index file
to the diskette.
A ction: See Error Writing.
E R R O R W RITING An error has occurred w hile w riting the file to the
diskette.
A ction: Make sure the disk in the specified drive has enough room for the entire
file and that it isn’t w rite protected before trying SAVE again. Or insert a fresh
disk into the non-default drive and try again (d o n ’t change the disk in the
default drive, in case it has a BOTTOM.TMP or TOP.TMP file on it). O ther
possible problem s include a bad spot on the disk, or a bad drive.
E X T R A S T A R T COM M AND An em bedded com m and has an extra start
character. They should always com e in pairs— start character («) and end
character (»).
A ction: Find the unpaired start comm and. Either delete it or insert an end
character at the appropriate place.
FILE ALREADY E X IS T S You are attem pting to give a NEW file the same
name as an existing file.
Action: Rename the new file.

C-5
 Messages (cont ' d)

FILE E X IS T S , O V ER W R ITE IT ? You arc attem pting to store a docum ent

under a filename that already exists on the directory of the indicated drive.
A ction: If you wish to replace the contents of the existing file w ith your current
docum ent, type Y. (Note: the data that was previously in the file will be lost.) If
you d o n ’t w ant to overw rite the existing file, type N, then give the file another
name.
FILE N O T FO U N D The nam ed file is not found on the diskette.
A ction: Check the directory (DIR) for the correct filename to verify that you
have the correct diskette in the named drive.
ILLEGAL COM M A ND XyWrite does not recognize the com m and entered.
A ction: Refer to the page in this m anual for the correct form of the comm and.
ILLEGAL IN F O R M S MODE You are not allow ed to use Define functions
(Save/Get, etc) w hile in forms m ode. This protects you from accidentally
altering the tem plate.
A ction: Leave Forms m ode before attem pting the define function.
ILLEGAL MARGIN The value given w ith the Margin com m and exceeds the
lim its allow ed.
A ction: Retry the com m and, observing the 255-character limit.
INDEX ITEM T O O LARGE O ne or m ore of the item s marked for indexing is
too large.
A ction: The buffer for holding the index item s can handle about 400
characters. Trim some of the text off the offending references and retry.
IN S E R T D IS K E T T E FO R DRIVE B: AND S T R IK E ANY K EY W HEN
READY This is a DOS prom pt that may appear if you attem pt to address drive B:
on a one-drive system. XyWrite has no control over w here this message may
appear.
A ction: This message affects only the display, not the data in your file. A Store
or Abort com m and returns the screen to normal.
IN S U F . M EM O RY FO R S O R T IN G XyWrite does not have enough memory
to sort the index.
A ction: Either shorten the index, or increase the memory by clearing the Save/
Gets and closing the w indow you’re not using.
INVALID FO RM A TTING COM M AND The form atting com m and is not
recognized by XyWrite. The com m and in question is shown expanded w ith the
double angle brackets in the text.
A ction: You can delete the com m and or strike [Ctrl] [F10J to go to expanded mode
and correct it. If it occurs on o u tp u t using TYPE or TYPEF, call the file to the
screen and proceed as above.
LABEL N O T FO UND The Go To Label (GL) com m and does not have a
m atching label (LB) comm and.
A ction: Make sure the label name exactly m atches the name used in the GL
statem ent (in clu d in g sp aces).

C-6
 (cont'd) Messages

IN S E R T D IS K E T T E F O R DRIVE B: A N D S T R IK E A N Y K E Y W H EN
REA D Y This is a DOS prom pt that may appear if you attempt to address
drive B: on a one-drive system. XyWrite has no control over where this
message may appear.
Action: This message affects only the display, not the data in your file. A Store
or Abort command returns the screen to normal.
LEGAL ONLY WITH D O S 2 . 0 You cannot give DOS 2.0 com m ands to DOS
1.1
M ISM A TC H ED O P E R A N D S This usually appears w hen you attem pt to
equate literals, booleans and num eric values in an XPL em bedded comm and.
A ction: Correct the keystroke program.
M IS S IN G S E P A R A T O R The SEARCH (or CHANGE) command requires a
separator character at each end of the search string.
Action: Insert a slash (/) at each end of the search string (unless the string

M essages
contains a slash — then use any character not contained in the string).
M ORE T HAN 1 UNARY O P You cannot use the uppercase function and
XOR functions in the same operation.
A ction: Rewrite the program so that unary operations are run in succession.
N EED 1 O R 2 N U M B E R S The Indent Paragraph (IP) com m and requires
only tw o num ber values.
A ction: Retry the com m and w ith two num bers.
NEED FILE NAME & S G T ID When loading a program (LDPM) on a Save/
Get key, you must provide both the name of the Save/Get file and the key ID.
A ction: Check the order in w hich you have entered the needed information.
Refer to the page on LDPM in this manual.
NEED NAME TO SA V E DEFINED BLOCK You need to give a filename
w ith the SAVFDEF com m and when saving a defined block from the screen.
Action: Provide the name of the file to w hich you w ant the block saved.
N EED N U M BER O R MODE ABR. A m ode (MD) com m and has been given
w ith a tw o-letter name that is not recognized by XyWritc.
A ction: Look in this manual under Character Modes to find the correct name for
the com m and you want.
NO COM M AND Either (1) no com m and has been entered on the Command
Line, or (2) the first position is blank.
A ction: Provide the comm and. If this message appears after you have entered a
comm and, rem ove any w ord spaces before the com m and and continue.
NO DEFIN E BLOCK You cannot copy, move or delete if no block has been
defined.
A ction: Define the block and try again.
NO END IF W hen program m ing, you must provide an “ end i f ’ statem ent for
every “ if” statem ent.
A ction: Look for stray “ i f ’ statements, and com plete them w ith “ end ifs.”

C-7
Messages (comd)

NO EQUAL SIGN A numerical expression must have an equal sign for proper
calculation.
Action: Type an equal sign ( —) after the expression and try again.
NO FILE OPEN You are trying to execute a command that requires a file be
open on the screen.
Action: Enter the desired filename with the command, or open the desired file
to the screen.
NO FILE TO RUN There is no file specified on the command line.
Action: Press [HO] to move the cursor to the command line, and enter the name
of the file you want to run.
NO INDEX FILE XyWrite was unable to open an index file.
Action: Retry with another diskette.
NO LEADER CHAR. — USING SPACE The Leader command was given
with filler character specified. The command assumes you want a blank space
for the filler character.
Action: If you want to use a filler character instead of blank spaces, delete the
embedded triangle in the text and begin again.
NO MEMORY FOR NEW SCREEN There is not enough memory to create
another screen.
Action: This generally means the file you have opened is too large. First Store
the file. Then you can split the screen and re-open the file.
NO MEMORY FOR NUMBERS There is not enough memory to calculate
the expression given on the Command Line.
Action: Store or Abort the open file(s) and retry.
NO PATH SP E C There is no path specified with the CHDIR, MKD1R or the
RMDIR commands.
Action: Provide a proper path and retry the command.
NO SAVE GET There is nothing assigned to the indicated Save/Get.
Action: Use [Alt] [F2] to review of the contents of the Save/Gets and verify where
the desired information is located.
NO SAVE GETS TO SAVE This appears in response to the STSGT (Store
Save/Get) command. There is currently nothing assigned to any of the Save/Get
keys.
Action: Load or create the Save/Gets you want stored, and try again.
NO SPACE FOR INSERT XyWrite cannot add a specified Insert Save/Get to
the text during printing because the insert is too large for the available buffer.
Action: Try storing all files and then try printing from disk (TYPE filen a m e )
from the insert point to the end of the file.
NO SPLIT SCREEN The current screen is the only one open.
NO SUCH FIELD When using Mail Merge, you have requested a field number
that does not exist in the list file.
Action: Check the list file to make sure that you have the correct field number.

C-8
 ( c on t ' d) Messages

NO S U C H FILE The nam ed file is not found by XyWrite.

A ction: Check to see that the name is correct and that the file is in the directory
of the diskette you have referenced.
N O T EN OU GH M EM O RY FO R D O S There is not enough memory to load
DOS.
A ction: To get to DOS you must QUIT. You may w ant to get m ore memory if
this is a frequent problem .
NO T FO U N D The Search comm and has reached the end of the file and has not
found the indicated string.
A c t i o n : Press [Ctrl] IHome] and re-execute the com m and, as you may have started
past the point of the string in the file.
N U M B E R S ONLY You must give num ber values for this com m and. You can ’t
use letters here.
Action: Retry the com m and using numbers.

M essag es
O N E N U M BER R E Q U IR E D A single digit num eric value is required for this
comm and.
A ction: Retry the com m and using only one num ber.
ONLY 1 0 S H IF T K E Y S ALLOWED Only 10 shift keys can be used in the
Keyboard File.
A ction: Limit the num ber of shift keys you use. See the Keyboard File section in
this manual.
ONLY 2 0 S T A T E S ALLOWED Only 20 keyboard states can be used in the
Keyboard File.
A ction: Limit the num ber of keyboard states you use. See the Keyboard File
section in this manual.
P O IN T T O N U M BER The cursor must be on a num ber w hen using the cursor
arithm etic capability [Alt] + and [Ait] —.
P R IN T E R A CTIVE, QUIT A N YW A Y? W hen you quit XyWrite, any file that
is currently being printed will be aborted as well.
A ction: Press Y if you want to q u it anyway, N if you’d rather wait and try again
after the file has finished printing.
P R IN T E R E R R O R XyWrite cannot output to the p rinter for any of several
reasons.
A ction: Check p rinter connections to the com puter and electrical outlets Make
sure the p rinter is turned on, on-line (not on pause), has sufficient ribbon, and
the paper is feeding correctly. Correct any problem s and try again.

C-9
 Messages (c o n rd )

R E A D E R R O R A disk e rro r w as e n co u n terd in reading th e nam ed diskette.

A ction : This generally m eans a pro b lem w ith th e diskette o r drive. W hen you
begin to e x p erien c e this e rro r w ith any freq u en cy y o u r drive m ay be failing. The
short term rem edy is to read from an o th er drive if available. If th is fails as w ell,
reco v er w hat you can from th e diskette and re form at it if possible.
R E S T O R E D E F IN E You cannot change strings or define fu rth er blocks until
you have released th e cu rren tly defined block.
A ction : Press [F3] and try again.
R E S U L T T O O L A R G E The calculated resu lt o f th e arith m etic expression
ex ceed s th e 32 d igit lim it.
A ction : Look for ways to c alcu late a sm aller result.
S P E C I F Y M O D E The Mode (MD) com m and has b e en given w ith no m ode
specification.
A ction : Supply a tw o -letter abbreviation o r a decim al n u m b er w ith th e m ode
com m and. Refer to th e C haracter Display M odes d escrip tio n in th e reference
section.
S P E C I F Y P R O G R A M N A M E You need to specify a program nam e w ith the
DO com m and.
A ction : C heck to see th at th e nam e you give is on th e diskette.
S P L I T T O O BIG T he value given for sp littin g the screen h o rizontally o r
vertically ex ceed s th e lim its o f th e screen.
A ction : Values for a horizontal sp lit m ust be 21 or less; for a vertical sp lit, 78 or
less. Refer to th e W indow s sectio n for specific inform ation.
T E R M IN A T E B A T C H ? (Y /N ) This response is given if you press [Ctrl] |Break
w hile e x ec u tin g a RUN file. This allow s you to term in ate a RUN file before
co m p letio n .
A ction : Press Y if you w ant to e n d th e RUN file, and N if you w an t it to
co n tin u e.
T E R M IN A T E T E X T IN P U T You can ’t use th e GO com m and w h ile entering
footnotes (FN ), R unning H eaders, or an index.
A ction : Press [F3] to leave th e tex t in p u t w indow , th e n try GO again.
T E X T S A V E D After closing a header, footer, index m arker, o r footnote,
XyWrite resp o n ds w ith this m essage. You also get this response after saving a
defined b lo ck w ith th e [F2] key.
T E X T W IN D O W W IT H IN D E F IN E You c a n ’t o p e n a w in d o w and in p u t text
for an index, footnote, ru n n in g header, etc. w h ile inside of a defined block.
A ction : Press [Aft] [F3] to release th e define and try to o p en th e w in d o w again. O r
m ove th e cu rso r to beyond th e end of the block define area and in p u t th e text
there.

C 10
 ( c o n t ’d) Messages

T O O MANY C H A R A C T E R S You are typing too fast for XyWrite to keep up.
Normally the input of text presents no problem , but if you type ahead w hile
executing longer comm ands, you can get ahead of XyWrite.
A ction: Stop entering characters and w ait until XyWrite has caught up.
O therw ise, your keystrokes are being wasted.
T O O MANY LEV EL S OF IN S E R T S XyWrite cannot handle m ore than ten
levels of nested Insert defined blocks. In practice, this should not happen often.
T O O MANY P R O G R A M C A L L S The Program calls are nested too deeply.
T O O MANY V A LU ES You have exceeded the 21-tab maxim um w hile using
the Tab Set comm and.
A ction: Retry the com m and w ith few er tab settings.
T Y P E “ + ” T O C O N TIN U E P R IN T The p rinter pauses after each page—
press “ + ” to continue printing.

M essages
T Y P E A f N, S , O R Y The Change Verify com m and offers you the follow ing
options. A (Abort com m and), N (No change but continue the search), S(change
this last one and Stop), and Y (Yes, make the change and continue searching).
A ction: Type the letter for the option you want.
T Y P E ANY C H A R T O C O N T P R IN T This prom pt appears w hen you are
printing a docum ent on single sheets of paper, using a Pause com m and or the P
option w ith the TYPE comm and.
A ction: Put a fresh sheet of paper in the printer and press any letter key to
continue.
T Y P E Y OR N XyWrite is expecting Y for yes or N for no in response to a
prom pt.
A ction: Give one or the other and continue.
U N E X P E C T E D E R R O R If you get here, w e both may be in trouble.
A ction: Im m ediately save your file to m inim ize the risk of losing your work.
QUIT XyWrite and reload. If you can reproduce the circum stances that caused
this error, please report them to us.
U N IM PL E M E N T ED COM M AND XyWrite recognizes the comm and, but it
has not been im plem ented in XyWrite. This means that the feature is not
available in this version, but may be scheduled for future release in another
version.
W ORD T O O BIG You have entered a Search or Change com m and string that
does not have the p roper separators. Q uite often this message is follow ed by
BAD STRING as a further indication.
A ction: Refer to the Editing chapter to find the correct format for the com m and
you want.

C -ll
 Messages ( cont ' d)

6 S T A T E D E FIN IT IO N S ALLOW ED Only six state definitions are allow ed

in the Keyboard File.
A ction: Limit your state definitions to six (see the section in this m anual on
Keyboard File.)
4 T O G G LE D E FIN IT IO N S ALLOW ED O nly four state definitions are
allow ed in the Keyboard File.
A ction: Limit your toggle definitions to four.

C 12
Programming Examples Appendix D

Intro The p u rp o se of this section is to h elp you get fam iliar

w ith User Programm ing. T here are tw o different kinds
o f com m ands used here:
• Function Calls — These are tw o-letter m nem onics
(fo r exam ple, BC, XC, CC, CS, GT, SS) w h ich
represent keystrokes. Refer to Function Calls at the
end of the Keyboard File section for a co m p lete
list o f these Function Calls.
• Em bedded Program Com m ands — These are
com m ands w h ich ap p ear in the program listings
su rro u n d ed by double-angle brackets. For exam ple:
«LB-À», «GL-A», «PVU». Refer to A dvanced User
Program m ing for a descrip tio n of these com m ands.
Program #1

P ur po se This program allows you to insert the current date from a

Save/Get into your docum ent as a hard date. It’s useful
for tim e-stamping a file. (This program perform s the
same function as the TODAY com m and.)

A c t io n C reating th e H ard D ate P rogram .

To create the hard date program:

1. Create a program file called HARDDATE.PM:

Type: [Tslnep harddate.pm C T

2. Press: Scroll Lock (to turn on Scroll Lock)

3. Type: [F5]new temp[F9]

fFSlda Mmmm d, vvvy[F9l
[F5l types [F9l
IE
[MIS
m
E d
[F5| abort [F9l
[F5lrmvscr[F9]
[Fsl abort [F9|

4. Press: Scroll Lock (to turn o ff Scroll Lock)

5. Type: [F5l store fcj]

6 . Type: F5]run harddate.pm

Result: Steps 1-5 create the program. Step 6 runs the

program , w hich stores the current date in Save/Get key
D. Press [Art] D to insert the date into your text. To cause
the program to run every time you start XyWrite, add the
following com m and to your STARTUP.INT file:

BC run harddate.pm

A n a ly sis. Each tim e you start XyWrite this program

opens a new file called TEMP (tem porary) for the sole
purpose of loading the cu rren t date to Save/Get D.
O nce this is done, the program aborts TEMP.
Thereafter, you can insert the cu rren t date into your
d o c u m e n t b y p re s sin g [Art]O.
EZ-Macro Program #2

P u rp ose A macro is a program you write that contains a sequence

of keystrokes to do a specific task. EZ-Macro is an aid for
creating and using macros. It allows you to create
macros on-the-fly — it opens a second window , enters the
NEP com m and for you, and turns on Scroll Lock. The
setup procedure is simple, and the operation even
simpler: All you use is [Alt] M and IScroll Lock I .
This section includes the following:
Setting u p EZ-Macro
Using EZ-Macro
Program Listing
R equirem ents. As written here, EZ-Macro has the
following requirements:

• It makes use of two of your Save/Gets: [Ajt]M to hold

the program and [Art] U to hold an indicator (0 or 1).
(You can move these to different Save/Get keys if you

P rogram
w ant.)
• Running EZ-Macro requires that at least one w indow
be open. (If all nine w indow s are open, it does not

E xam ples
work properly.)

ACTION Settin g u p EZ-Macro

Before you begin using EZ-Macro, you set up your disk
as follows. Step 2 assigns EZ-Macro to a key so that you
can use it quickly, any time you want.
1. Create the files MACRO-M.PM and MACRO-U.PM,
recording the keystrokes show n in the Program
Listing. Store these files on your XyWrite disk (if you
use subdirectories, store them in the same
subdirectory that contains STARTUP.INT).
2. Add to your STARTUP.INT file the two lines:
BCIdpm macro-m.pm.m
BCIdpm macro-u.pm,u
Result: Now every time STARTUP.INT is run, these files
are loaded into Save/Get keys M and U.
Then go to the com m and line and type RUN
STARTUP.INT to load these files into memory.

D-3
Program # 2 (cont'd)

A c t io n U sin g EZ-Macro
To w rite a m acro:
1. W hen you are typing along in a d o cu m en t and you
decid e y o u ’d like to create a m acro:
Type: [aFJM
2. Then type the keystrokes you w ant to record.

Result: The program w ill accep t a ll keystrokes —

text, cursor m ovem ents, function keys, Save/Gets,
and the running o f o th e r m acros or program s.
3- T urn Scroll Lock OFF to make corrections, and then
back on to co n tin u e recording.
4. To save the m acro you just created:
Press: [ScrollLock) to tu rn Scroll Lock off.
Type: [Ait[M

If you forget to tu rn Scroll Lock OFF, you w ill get

an @M in the text (th e sym bol for ¡Ajt]M). To fix
this, tu rn Scroll Lock OFF, backspace to erase the
@M, and t r y a g a i n .
At this p o in t your m acro is stored in a file called EZ-
Macro. The com m and RUN EZ-MACRO appears on the
com m and line. To ru n the m acro:
1. Move the cursor to w h ere you w ant to start your
macro.
2 . Press: F9

To save the m acro, see Notes # 1 and *2.

N o t e #1 S a v in g Y o u r M a cro t o a K ey. Each tim e you start a

new m acro, the previous m acro is erased. If you w ish to
save yo u r m acro, you can do so anytim e p rio r to starting
th e next m acro. This allow s you to b u ild a library of
macros.
To save the m acro to Save/G et key X:
Type: HJl dp m e z - m a c r o , x 0

D-4
(cont'd) Program # 2

NOTE #1 S a v in g Y o u r M a cro to a File. A nother way to keep

your m acro is to save it to a file. You then run the m acro
by typing RUN follow ed by the filenam e on the
com m and line (th e same way w e used EZ-M acro).

To renam e the file, call it to the display and save it

u n d er the new nam e (for exam ple, AMUCK):

Type: p]call e z - m a c r o 0
Type: |f§]store a m u c k @
To run the macro:

T ype: [fs]run a muck 0

Sometimes this m ethod is m ore convenient than saving

the m acro to a Save/G et key for eith er of tw o reasons:
1) If y o u ’ve filled u p your set o f Save/G et keys, or 2)
Y ou’d rath er assign it to a filenam e that y o u ’re m ore

P rogram
likely to rem em ber. After all, w h at good is a m acro if
you ca n ’t find it w hen you need it?

E xamples

D-5
P ro g ra m #1 (c o n t’d)

P r o g r a m L istin g . This is th e program file for EZ-MACRO.

The file is show n as you w o u ld actually view it in
E xpanded Display (w ith RM 78).

M ACRO-M.PM T his is th e m ain program file for EZ- MACRO.

< LB-EZ-MACRO Program ><IF(<PVU>— D X G L - F I N I S H X E I X G L - S T A R T »

< L B - S T A R T > S W n S W t L D L D L D L D L D L D L D L D L D L D L D L D L D LD L D L D L D L D LD XC
CS BC ES 1XC BC D E L E Z - M A C R O X C BC ES OXC BC N E P E Z - M A C R O X C BC T Y P E Y O U R MACRO.
( S c r o l l L o c k O F F for c o r r e c t i o n s ) END: S c r o l l L o c k OFF, A L T - M C C SS < S X U , I X E X >

< L B - F I N I S H > C S BC S T O R E X C BC R M V S C R X C BC R U N E Z - M A C R O M o v e the c u r s o r w h e r e

you w a n t . T h e n P R E S S F9 to R U N m a c r o . CC < S X U , 0 >

M ACRO-U.PM T his file c o n tain s o nly th e sin g le c h a ra c te r zero —

th e p ro g ram ch an g es it to a o n e fo r th e d u ra tio n th a t th e m acro is in
process, an d th e n h ack to zero.

D-6
(cont'd) Program # 2

A nalysis. E Z-M acro w o rk s as follow s:

« LB-EZ-MACRO Program » Tliis label is an
id en tifier — it a p p ea rs in th e Save/G et d ire c to ry (w h e n
y o u p re ss |_AltJ |_F2j ). T h e re is a re a so n fo r all o f th e sp a ce s
fo llo w in g th e w o rd “P ro g ram ” — so th a t y o u w ill see
th e title “EZ-MACRO P ro g ram ” in th e Save/G et d ire c to ry
w ith o u t any te x t follow ing it to c lu tte r th e Savc/G ct
d ire c to ry . T h e su b s e q u e n t IF sta te m e n t te st th e p a ra ­
m e te r! J. T h e S av c/G ctU c h an g e ssta te e a c h tim e y o u p re ss [Alt
M — U is initially 0 (z e ro ). W h en you p re ss |_AltJ M to
sta rt a m acro , th e p ro g ram c h an g es U to 1. W h en you
p re s s j_AltJ xM to c lo se a m acro, th e p ro g ra m re tu rn s U to
0. T h e v alue o f U d e te rm in e s w h ic h b ra n c h th e p ro g ram
takes — LB-START o r I.B-FINISH.
« LB-S PART » T his ro u tin e o p e n s th e n e x t available
w in d o w , m o v es its to p b o rd e r d o w n 19 lines, disab les th e
e rr o r b e e p (ES 1), d e le te s any p re v io u sly -c re a te d file EZ-

P rogram
MACRO, tu rn s back on th e e rr o r b e e p (ES 0 ), c re a te s a
n e w file called EZ-MACRO, p u ts u p a m essage tellin g th e
u se r to b eg in ty p in g th e m acro, a n d se ts Save/G et U equal

E xamples
to 1. T h e rea so n w e disable th e e rr o r b e e p is b e c a u se this
p re v e n ts th e DEL EZ-MACRO sta te m e n t from b e e p in g if
th e EZ-MACRO file w e ’re d e le tin g d o e s n ’t exist. (If you tty
to d e le te a file w h ic h d o e s n ’t ex ist, y o u g e t a b e e p .)
« LB-FINISH » T his sto re s th e EZ-MACRO file you just
c re a te d , clo ses th e w in d o w , p u ts u p th e c o m m a n d RUN
EZ-MACRO, m o v es th e c u rso r in to th e te x t area, an d sets
th e value o f Save/G et U to 0. T h en to ru n th e p ro g ram , you
ju st p re ss |_F9

D-7
Super Keyboard Appendix E

P urpo se T his a p p e n d ix d e sc rib e s a k e y b o a rd file called SUPER.KBD,

w h ic h is in c lu d e d o n y o u r original X yW rite disk. This
p a rtic u la r k e y b o a rd p u ts m any c o n v e n ie n t fu n c tio n s at
y o u r finger tips — fu n ctio n s th a t are n o t p ro v id e d in th e
k e y b o ard file IBM.KBD. T h ese fu n c tio n s w e re d e riv e d
from a stu d y o f th e m o re fre q u e n t k e y stro k e a c tio n s o f a
cro ss-sec tio n o f w o rd p ro c e ssin g users.
W e e n c o u ra g e y o u to lo ad SUPER.KBD (in p lac e o f
IBM .KBD) an d try it out. M odify th is file o r th e sta n d ard
IBM.KBD file to suit y o u r n e e d s — it is p re s e n te d h e re as
o n ly o n e o f m any p o ssib ilities fo r assigning keys. W e are
su re th a t y o u can im p ro v e u p o n SUPER.KBD for y o u r
p a rtic u la r use.
For in stru c tio n s o n c h an g in g K ey b o ard Files, see K eyboard
File in C h a p te r 6.

A c t io n L o a d in g t h e S u p e r K e y b o a r d
T o load th is k eyboard:
Type: [Fsjldkbd super. k b d @

Result: T h e k e y b o ard is lo ad e d in p lac e o f th e p re v io u s

keyboard.

Super K e y b o a r d
NOTE # 1 Linear Cursor. T h e c u rs o r assig n m en ts have b e e n
c h a n g e d to Linear C u rso r m o tio n . T his m ean s th a t w h e n
u sin g th e fo u r c u rs o r keys, th e c u rs o r is free to m ove
b e y o n d th e rig h t m argin, and to m o v e u p an d d o w n
w ith o u t e v e r sw itc h in g colum ns. If you e n te r te x t to th e
rig h t o f a c arriag e re tu rn sym bol (<—), X yW rite fills in th e
area to th e left o f th e c u rs o r w ith spaces.

NOTE # 2 C hange D efau lt D rives. Ctrl A ch an g e s th e default d riv e

to A: an d | Ctrl | B c h an g es th e d e fa u lt d riv e to B:.

E -l
Super Keyboard (cont'd)

n o te n D isp lay th e C urrent D irectory. I Ctrl | D displays th e

c u rre n t d ire c to ry o f th e d efau lt drive.

N o te #4 Call a File. W ith a d ire c to ry d isplayed, w h e n y o u p lac e

th e c u rs o r on th e nam e o f th e file y o u w a n t to call, p re ss Ctrl C
T his calls th e file.

N o te #5 In term ed iate Save. Ctrl S Saves th e activ e file to th e disk

a n d re tu rn s y o u to y o u r ed iting. (As a p re c a u tio n , it is a
g o o d p ra c tic e to save y o u r w o rk freq u e n tly , at least
e v ery te n m in u tes. T h e n if a p o w e r failure w e re to o c c u r,
y o u w o u ld lose only th e c h an g es y o u m ad e sin c e y o u last
sav ed th e file.)

N o te # 6 Edit N ext File. You c an e d it a n u m b e r o f files in o rd e r.

Y ou d o th is as follow s:
1. Call a g ro u p o f files by u sin g th e w ild c a rd s (* o r ?) as
p a rt o f th e filenam e (e.g., CA *.PRN). T h e first file th at
m a tc h e s is disp lay ed o n th e sc ree n .
2. A fter v ie w ing o r m aking ch an g e s to this file,
p re ss Ctrl N. T his displays a p ro m p t th a t asks
w h e th e r you w a n t to save any ch an g e s o r go to th e
n e x t file th a t m a tc h e s th e file specification.
Y ou c an c o n tin u e in th is m a n n e r u n til all o f th e files h av e
b e e n called up.

N o te #7 Form at C om m ands in th e Text. T h e fo llo w in g keys

in se rt fo rm at c o m m a n d s d ire c tly in to th e tex t.
Ctrl H Flush Left
Ctrl J Flush C e n te r
Ctril K Flush Right
Ctrl P Page B reak

E-2
(co nt'd ) Super Keyboard

NOTE # 8 Start a F ootn o te or In d ex Entry, [ctrl I F sta rts a

F o o tn o te an d I Ctrl | X starts an In d e x en try . A fter e n te rin g
th e te x t, p re ss [ [ 3 J to clo se th e definition.

N o te #9 Caps Lock is a Shifting Key. T h e use of has

[C aps Lock]
b e e n r e d e fined to b e a shifting key. You u se it by h o ld in g
d o w n th e I Caps Lock 1key and p re ssin g a n o th e r key. W e have
assigned tw o c o n v e n ie n t fu n c tio n s to this key: o u tlin e
n u m b e rin g a n d m o v in g d ire c tly to w in d o w s.

N o te #10 A utom atic N u m b erin g an d O u tlin es. T h e re a re tw o

keys th at in se rt th e form ats fo r th e a u to m a tic n u m b e rin g
c o u n te rs.
Ctrl L (Legal N u m b e rin g ) in se rts at th e b e g in n in g o f a
d o c u m e n t th e definition for legal p a ra g rap h n u m b erin g :
1 . 1 . 1 . I . 1.1.1

Ctrl O ( O u tlin e ) in serts at th e b e g in n in g o f a d o c u m e n t

th e d efin itio n fo r w ritin g an o u tlin e : I A 1 a ( 1 ) ( a )
Caps Lock # w h e re # is 1 - 9 at th e to p o f th e k e y b o a rd
se le c ts th e level o f th e o u tlin e o r th e p aragra p h n u m b e rin g
yo u w an t. For e x am p le , p ressin g fC aps Lock] 2 gives e ith e r
o u tlin e level 2 o r p ara g rap h level 2 (d e p e n d in g o n w h ic h

Super K e y b o a r d
you have d efin ed ).
If y o u are using legal n u m b e rin g m o st o f th e tim e, you m ay
w a n t re m o v e th e a u to m a tic in se rtio n o f T abs
w ith I Caps Lock 1 # . T o do this, call SUPER.KBD and look
th ro u g h th e file u n til you se e TABLE = CAPS. O n th e lines
th at sta rt 3 = , 4 = th ro u g h 1 0 = re m o v e th e Tab
c h a ra c te rs an d th e a sso ciated com m as. Store th e file an d
relo a d th e k e y b o a rd file

N o te #11 E xpress W indow s. Caps Lock in c o m b in a tio n w ith th e

n u m e ric k e y p ad n u m b e rs 1-9, g o es d ire ctly to th e
in d ic a te d w in d o w n u m b er. For in sta n c e 1 Caps Lock I 3 m o v es
d ire c tly to w in d o w 3-

E-3
Super Keyboard (cont’d)

NOTE #12 C losin g W indow s. I Ctrl IR p e rfo rm s a R em ove S creen

(R S) c o m m an d . In th e w in d o w m en u , th e w in d o w is
in d ic a te d N O T IN USE. It is g o o d p ra c tic e to c lo se u n u se d
w in d o w s, as th e y take u p a b o u t 8K o f m e m o ry e v en
th o u g h th e y hav e n o files o p e n in th em . M aking th e m N O T
IN USE re le a se s th a t m e m o ry to th e o th e r files y o u m ay
hav e o p e n .

E-4
Memory Resident Programs Appendix F

P u rpo se M em ory-resident program s are program s that are

available for im m ediate use — you load them into
m em ory and th en access them directly from XyWrite
(w ith o u t going through D O S). Exam ples are Sidekick,
Ready, ProKey and Lightning.
M em ory-resident program s m ust be loaded before the
program you in ten d to run them from , su ch as XyWrite
III.
A few (very few ) o f these program s can ru n w ith
XyWrite III w ith o u t special accom m odations. (Sidekick
Version 1.5 or greater is such a program .)
However, o th er program s n eed special consideration by
XyWrite. T here are tw o options available to allow these
program s to w ork w ith XyWrite; if your program is not
listed here, try O ption 1 first:
• O p tio n 1- Use w ith Lightning, Ready, and
H om ebase, and o th er program s.
• O p tio n 2 - A n y m em ory resid en t program can be
ru n using this option. H ow ever, in doing so, you
give u p som e o f the XyWrite fun ctio n s (such as [Art] 0
to m ove by w o rd ).

No te M em ory R eq u irem en ts. K eep in m ind that XyWrite

to g eth er w ith DOS req u ires 2 5 6 KB of m em ory.
W hatever program you intend to use w ith XyWrite w ill
increase this m inim um m em ory req u irem en t. Refer to
the user m anual o f the program you in ten d to run to
identify how m uch additional m em ory it needs.

F -l
M emory Resident Program s (contd)

O p t io n i S e ttin g U p X yW rite w ith XYKBD.COM.

Many program s can run w ith XyWrite using O ption I .
Exam ples are: LIGHTNING by Borland International,
READY by Living V ideotext, Inc., and HOMEBASE by
Amber System Inc.
O th er program s may w ork w ith this option, even
though n o t called o u t above. If a program does not
w ork w ith O p tio n 1, it sh o u ld w ork w ith O ption 2.

A c t io n R u n n in g w it h O p tio n 1.
To run LIGHTNING w ith XyWrite, for exam ple:
1. W hile in DOS before ru n n in g LIGHTNING, insert
th e XyWrite Program Disk and type th e follow ing:
A >xykbd0
This runs a sm all keyboard h andler called
XYKBD.COM.
2. Then run LIGHTNING:
A > light 0
3. N ow load XyWrite:
A > e d ito r@
You are ready to go.

N o te #1 S ta r tu p . Add th e line XYKBD to yourAUTOEXEC.BAT

file to autom atically load XYKBD.COM w h en ev er you
startu p your m achine.

F-2
(cont'd) M emory Resident Program s

OPTION 2 s e t t in g U p X yW rite w ith KM = 2.

Any program th at poses special problem s if ru n w ith
O p tio n 1 can b e handled by th e follow ing p ro ced u re.
Exam ples are SUPERKEY by Borland International,
PROKEY by RoseSoft Inc., and MULTILINK by The
Software Link, Inc.
In selecting O ption 2 you can ru n these program s w ith
XyWrite at a cost o f som e functionality in keyboard use.
This m eans th at n o t all o f the fun ctio n s that you find on
th e norm al XyWrite III keyboard can be m ade available
if you choose this option. A list o f these changes is
in clu d ed in th e file DOS.KBD.
The good new s is that any m em ory resident program s
can be run in this m anner. All keyboard in p u t takes
p lace th ro u g h th e DOS BIOS keyboard softw are.

ACTION R u n n in g w ith O p tio n 2.

To run SuperKey w ith XyWrite, do th e follow ing:
1. Before starting XyWrite, run SuperKey:
A>KEY@
th en start XyWrite:
A > e d ito r0
2. Call the configuration file for yo u r printer: (Epson
p rin te r in this exam ple)
0 3 ca 3EPS0NFX.PRN
3. Add this line to th e b eginning of th e file:
KM = 2
4. Store th e file then load it:
ffiUdprn 3 E P S O N F X . P R N 0
5. Load th e DOS keyboard table from th e Program
Disk (th at com pensates for som e o f the dim inished
fu n ctionality im posed by DOS):
Haidkbd DOS.KBD0
You are ready to go.

F-3
Memory Resident Program s (com-d)

NOTE #2 D iffe r e n c e s w ith O p tio n 2 . Read th e com m ents at

th e beginning of the DOS.KBD file by calling it to the
screen. You w ill find notes th ere o u tlin in g the
differences w ith this keyboard table and th e standard
XyWrite keyboard table IBM.KBD.
A tip to learning this new keyboard: Load the
LONG.HLP file and use the BY_KEY selection. Then
sam ple th e various keys that are different in DOS.KBD.

NOTE #2B R etu rn in g to N orm al X yW rite K ey b o a rd M ode. If

you w ant to retu rn XyWrite to its norm al keyboard
functionality, change th e KM = 2 to KM = I in the
p rin ter file. Then load IBM.KBD to restore all of the key
com binations.

NOTE #2C Startup. To have O p tio n 2 load autom atically, add the
LDKBD DOS.KBD com m and to your STARTUP.INT file.

F-4
Processing Files for Electronic Mail A p p en d ix G

P urpo se E lectronic m ail is a service th at allo w s y o u to se n d a n d

receiv e m essa g es to a n d from o th e r c o m p u te rs o v e r
n o rm al te le p h o n e lines. B ecau se X yW rite’s files a re sto re d
as ASCII text, XyW rite m ak e s a n e x ce llen t e d ito r for y o u r
electro n ic m ail.

T o p re p a re XyW rite files fo r u se a s electro n ic m ail, y o u

d o n ’t n e e d to lea rn a n y n e w c o m m an d s. Ail y o u h a v e to
d o is lo ad a special p rin te r file c a lle d MAIL.PRN, create
y o u r m essag e, a n d th e n "print" th e m essa g e to a file
(u sin g TYPEF).

A c t io n P r o c e ssin g a File fo r T ra n sm issio n .

T o p re p a re a file to s e n d to a n o th e r c o m p u te r via
e lectro n ic mail:

1. M ake su re y o u h a v e a c o p y o f th e sp ecial P rin ter File

MAIL.PRN o n y o u r w o rk in g X yW rite d isk e tte (o r in
y o u r XyW rite su b d ire cto ry if y o u h a v e a h a rd drive).
T his P rin ter File is p ro v id e d o n y o u r original XyW rite
disk.

2. Load MAIL.PRN into memory:

T ype: [F5]lclprn m a i l . p r n 0

Result: MAIL.PRN is n o w in effect. T his P rin ter File

c o n ta in s th e in stru ctio n s to au to m atically c o n v e rt all
XyW rite line e n d in g s to h a rd carriag e retu rn s, as
re q u ire d b y electro n ic m ail services.

3- O p e n a n e w d o c u m e n t in w h ic h to w rite y o u r
m essage. Let’s call this d o c u m e n t MEMO.

T ype: [£5]new m e m o @
E lectronic
M a il

G1
Processing Files for Electronic Mail (c o n t’d )

4. Enter the following format com m ands into the top of

your docum ent.

Type: [re]pt 1 0
Type: [F5]Im 0 0
Type: |?5]rm 6 5 0

Result: These com m ands override the defaults you

have in effect and establish the correct m argins and
printer table for electronic files.

5. Write your message. You m ay use m ost of XyWrite’s

normal editing procedures but d o n ’t use any of the
m ode com m ands except Mode Normal («MDNM»).

6 . Store your docum ent.

7. Use the TYPEF com m and to create an output file that

is correctly formatted for electronic mail:

T ype: [re]typef m e m o . m a i l 0

Result: You original message remains intact in the file

MEMO and can be used as backup for your records.
The file MAIL is ready to be transmitted.

Note R eload P rinter File. Be sure to reload your normal

Printer File w hen you have finished processing your
messages for electronic mail. You can refer to
STARTUP.INT if you aren ’t sure of the nam e of the Printer
File you regularly use.

G-2
 Index Update

Enclosed is an u p d ated index for the XyWrite III Plus Reference Guide.
This index integrates the change pages that w ere part of the XyWrite III
Plus upgrade. We apologize for any inconvenience we caused you by
delaying shipm ent of this index, and hope these correction pages will
increase your enjoym ent of XyWrite III Plus.
 Index

Primary page references are in boldface. alignment, 4-11-4-22

center, 4-12
decimal point, 4-128, 6-10
left, 4-12
A right, 4-12
tabs, 4-128
alphabetizing. See Sort
A: default drive, 2-5-2-6 alphanumeric character, wildcard,
A in header, meaning of, 3-8 3-54
AB (Abort) command, 2-7 Alt, 3-9
abandon w indow menu, 3-70 Alt #. See Save/Get keys
abort Alt--*-, 3-34
displayed file. See Abort Alt *, 3-34
comm and Alt-- 3-34
printing. See KILTYP command Alt- , 3-34
program, 5-79 Alt-(alphanumeric key) function.
Abort command, 2-7 See Save/Get keys
absolute change. See CVA, CHA, and Alt-Bksp (delete word to left), 3-30
CIA Alt-Del (delete by word), 3-30
absolute search. See SEARCHA Alt-Fl (define by column), 3-16, 3-23,
accents, 6-62, 6-68 3-25
accumulating sums, 3-35 Alt-F2 (Save/Get directory), 3-16,
AC (Auto-Check) function call, 3-99, 3-44
6-68A Alt-F3 (undelete), 3-16, 3-30
active window, 3-68 Alt-F4 (define word), 3-16, 3-23
acute accent (SI), 6-62, 6-68 Alt-F5 (delete line), 3-16, 3-30
AD (Append to Save/Get), 6-63 Alt-F6 (delete block), 3-17, 3-29, 3-30
add files. See Append command Alt-F9 (help screen), 3-17, 6-24
addition, 3-34 Alt-FlO (switch windows), 3-17, 3-73
in text, 3-34 Alt-Left Arrow (word left), 3-13
on com m and line, 3-34 Alt-Right Arrow (word right), 3-13
address files. See Data files Alt-Shift-number (ASCII), A-2
add to save/gets (AD), 3-16, 3-46, Alt-Shifl-# (wildcard). See Search
6-63 Alt-Tab (ruler menu), 4-118-4-119
add words to personal dictionary, alternate drive, storing on, 2-48
3-82, 3-85 Alternate key. See Alt
add words to temporary dictionary, Alternate Screen (AS), 6-65
3-82 alternate spelling, 3-80, 3-86
add words to hyphen dictionary, any character, wildcard for, 3-54
6-40-6-41 directory search, 2-21
advanced user programming, file search, 2-38
5 83 5-100
- - text search, 3-56
AL (Automatic Leading) command, AP (Autopause) command, 4-133,
4-145-4-146 6-6
Append command, 2-9
append to Save/Get key, 3-16, 3-46,
6-65

In d e x -1
 Index

append two files, See Append automatic

command backup, 2-5—2-6, 6-7, 6-8
append customization files, 5-120 hyphenation, 4-17-4-18
AR (Auto-Replace) function call, 3- new window, 2-13, 3-17
101, 6-68A numbering, 4-74-4-82
Argument Insert (AS), 5-92 replacement, setting up, 3-86
arithmetic Automatic Leading (AL) command,
in header, 3-34 4-145-4-146
in text, 3-34-3-35 Automatic Uppercase (AU)
arithmetic operators for program ­ command, 4-30
ming, 5-83 Autopause (AP) command, 4-133,
arithmetic results, inserting in text, 6-6
3-35 Auto-Replace, 3-100
arrow keys. See cursor keys available memory, 5-114
AS (Alternate Screen), 6-65
AS (Argument Insert) command, 5-92
ASCII
character set, A-2-A-3
characters, typing, A -l B
files, 1-6
files, calling, 2-13
function calls, 6-58, 6-67 B: disk drive, 2-5
assigning background color, 6-108
filenames, See New, Rename backspace default setting, 6-7, 6-8
keyboard characters, 6-46-6-68 Backspace Delete (BD), 6 -6l
assistance backspace key (rubout), 3-30
on-line, 1-7 backup
telephone, 1-7 drives, 2-5-2-6
asterisk (♦) files, 6-7, 6-8
as wild card, 2-11, 2-21, 2-38 backward search. See SEB
in help frames, 6-29 .BAK files, 6-7, 6-8
in hyphen dictionary, 6-41 baseline, 4-145
in math, 3-34-3-35 basic unit, 6-127
in programming, 5-97 batch file, startup, 6-136
in width tables, 6-86 batch printing, 2-68-2-71
AT (Attribute) Tables, 6-88 how to slop, 2-71
AT (Attribute) Value, 6-88 BB (Breakable Block) command,
Attribute Tables (AT:), 6-88 4-108-4-109
attributes, redlining, 5-105 BC (Blank the Command line), 5-72,
Attribute Value (AT=), 6-88 6-59,
AU (Automatic Uppercase) BD (Backspace Delete), 6-61
command, 4-30 beep, 3-31, 6-17B—6-17C
audible signals, 3-101, 6-17B—6-17C Begin Column Define, 3-16
Auto-Check/Correct, 3-97 to 3-99 Begin/End Block Define, 3-16
begin new page. See Page Break
beginning of file, cursor to, 3-12
BF (Bottom File), 6 -6 l
BF (Bottom Footnote) command,
4-61

In d e x -2
 Index

BK (Backup) setting, 6-7, 6-8 bring file to display. See Call

BK (Break), 6-56 BS (Backspace) setting, 6-6, 6-9
Black & White (BW), 6-107 BS (Bottom of Screen), 6-60
blank form, 5-20 BT (Bottom Margin) command,
Blank the Command Line (BC), 5-72, 4-105
6-59 BU (bold underline) mode, 4-24
blinking-square cursor, 3-6 buffer, primary file, B-4-B-5
blinking-underline cursor, 3-6 BUSINESS.SPL, 3-79
block BW (Black & White), 6-107
append, 2-9 BX (Border Colors), 6-6, 6-106
change character display of, 4-25
change case of, 4-29
combining, 3-42
copy, 3-27
define, 3-22 c
delete, 3-23, 3-29
move, 3-28
non-breakable, 4-108 C & D drives, 2-5
print, 2-54 c in header, meaning of, 3-98
recall, 3-30 C in header, meaning of, 3-8
save on disk, 2-45 CO to C9 (Counters), 4-74-4-82,
save to Save/Get, 3*42 4 -8 5 ^ -8 6
spell check, 3-90—3-91 CA (Call) command, 2-10-2-13
BO (bold) mode, 4-24 CAF (Call Form) command, 5-22,
boilerplate, inserting, 2-40, 3*38 5-24
bold (BO) mode, 4-24 calculations, 3-34-3-36
bold reverse (BR) mode, 4-24 Call command, 2-10-2-13
bold underline (BU) mode, 4-24 Call a Form (CAF), 5-24
border colors (BX), 6-6, 6-106 calling
borders, window docum ent, 2-10
defining, 3-74 form, 5-24
moving, 3-71 other ASCII files, 2-13
removing, 3-72 previous document, 2-11
Bottom File (BF), 6-61 program, 5-76
Bottom Footnote (BF) command, with global filenames, 2-11
4-61 calling it quits, 2-73
Bottom Margin (BT) command, cancel
4-105 defined block, 3-25
bottom of file, move cursor to, 3-12 edits, See Abort
Bottom of Screen (BS), 6-60 hyphenation, 4-18
BR (bold reverse) mode, 4-24 program, 5-79
break. See Qrl-Break printing. See KILTYP
Break (BR), 6-56 change, 3-63
breakable block (BB), 4-108-4-109 search, 3-57
breaking hard hyphen, 4-20 Cancel Define (XD, YD), 6-6l
breaking CAP (Call Program) command, 5-76
long words, 4-19-4-20 capitalization. See AU, CC, and UC
pages, 2-67

In d e x -3
 Index

capitalization, effect on Spelling change

Checker, 3-80, 3-83, 3-87 case, 4-28-4-29
Caps Lock key, 3-19 character modes, 4-25
carriage return, 3-10 defaulLs, 6-18-6-20
in Mail Merge separators, 5-42 directories, 2-14, 2-50, 2-51
testing for, 5-99 directory display, 2-19-2-25
case commands, 4-28-4-29 fonts (PT), 4-31, 6-82
case-sensitive search. See Search, footnote number, 4-57-4-60
Absolute header fields, 2-16
CB (Correction Beep) default, 3-101, keyboard file, 6-45-6-68
6-17C page length settings, 4-102-4-103
CC (Change Case) command, page number, 4-69-4-71
4-28-4-29 Printer File, 6-69-6-130
CC (Change Cursor), 6-59 Ruler Line, 3-17
CD. See CHDIR tab settings, 4-127
CD (Cursor Down), 6-60 text. See Change
CE (Clear Edits) command, 5-109 window size, 3-69
CEV (Clear Edits, Verify) command, chapter numbers, 4-76, 4-77
5-109 referring to, 4-89
cells for colum ns , 5-6 character count, 5-87
formatting, 5-9-5-10 character, deleting by, 3-30
centering character modes, 4-23-4-27, 6-58,
tabs, 4-128 6-67, 6-82-6-84
text, 4-12 changing, 4-25
CIIA (Change Absolute) command, entering, 4-26
3 60-3-63 printing, 4-27, 6-84
chaining printer sets, 6-83 character pitch, 6-125
chain printing (TYPE @), 2-68-2-71 Character Position (CP), 5-92
counters in, 4-77 characters, ASCII, A-l-A-3
footnote num bers in, 4-60 characters per inch, 6-82
how to stop, 2-71 character substitution file,
page num bers in, 4-71 6-115-6-119
Change Case (CC) command, CH (Change) command, 3-60-3-63
4-28-4-29 CH (Clear Header), 6-59
Change (CH) command, 3-60-3-63 CHDIR (Change Directory)
Absolute (CHA), 3-60-3-63 comm and, 2-14-2-15, 2-50
Invisible (Cl), 3-60-3-63 check spelling, 3-77— 102
Invisible Absolute (CIA), CHKDSK (Check Disk) command,
3-60-3-63 2-29, 2-30
& Verify (CV), 3-60-3-63 Cl (Change Invisible) command, 3-60
& Verify Absolute (CVA), Cl (Clear Insert Mode), 6-65
3-60-3-63 CIA (Change Invisible Absolute)
See also Search command, 3-60
Change Cursor (CC), 6-59 circumflex (S4), 6-62, 6-67
Change Mode Normal/Expanded CK default setting, 6-17A
(CM), 6-63 clear arithmetic accumulator, 3-36
clear com m and line, 3-10

In d ex -4
 Index

Clear Edits (CE) command, columns (cont'd)

5-109—5-110 planning, 5-6
Clear Edits, Verify (CEV) command, new spaper style, 5-5
5-109—5-110 setting up, 5-8
Clear Header (CH), 6-59 snaking, 5-13
Clear Insert Mode (Cl), 6-65 with hanging indents, 5-12
clear memory, B-3 with styles, 5-10
Clear Numeric Lock (CN), 6-65 COM1, COM2. See 'ITPEF
clear printer queue, 2-39 combining defined text , 3-25
Clear Save/Get Keys (CLRSGT), 3-49 combining files, See Append
clear screen. See Abort, Store comma in commands, 1-3, 2-44, 2-56
Clear Scroll Lock (CS), 6-65 COMMAND.COM, 2-27, 2-28, 2-29,
Clear Sum (CLRSUM), 3-36 2-30
clear text area. See Abort, Store command field, setting size of, 6-17A
CL (Cursor Left), 6-60 comm and keys, 6-53
CL (Column Location of Cursor), Command line
5-92 arithmetic, 3*34
clock. See Time, Now definition of, 3-6-3-7
close a file. See Store function calls, 6-59
close a window, 3-75 keys, 3-10
CLRSGT (Clear Save/Get Keys), 3-49 commands
CLRSUM, 3-36 disk, 2-2
CM (Change Normal/Expanded), display, 2-2
6-63 em bedded, 2-2, 4-6-4-8
CM command, 2-16 executing, 1-3, 2-1, 3-10
CM field, in header, 3-7 filing, 2-2
changing, 2-16, 3-7 format of, 1-3
CN (Clear Numeric Lock), 6-65 immediate, 2-2
CO# (Column No.) command, 5-10 printer, 2-2
CO (Comma), 6-64 system, 2-2
CO (Comment Separator), 5-40 Comment Separator (CO), 5-30, 5-40
code, releasing memory used by, comments
5-114 in character substition file, 6-48
code, saving, 5-117 in keyboard file, 6-55
color monitors, 4-27 in printer file, 6-82
colors, window border, 6-106 comparing two files, 3-65-3-66
color table, 6-108 CompuServe. See Electronic Mail
Column Location of Cursor (CL), CON, printing to, 2-61
5-92 console keyboard, printing to, 2-6l
columns, 5-5- 5-15 contents, creating table of, 5 4 4 5-51
- -

adding, 5-11 contents of diskette. See DIR

copying, 5-12 Control (Ctrl) key. See Ctrl
creating, 5-8 conventions
defining, 3-25, 3-26, 5-11 filename, 2-43
deleting, 5-11 reference manual, 1-4-1-5
editing, 5-11-5-12 copies, multiple printout, 2-54
formatting, 5-9 Copy command, 2-7
moving, 5-12

In d ex -5
 Index

copy create (coni'd)

block of text, 3-17, 3-27, 6-59 form letters. See Mail Merge
current file, 2-17 forms. See NEF
entire document, 2-17, 2-42 indexes, 5-43-5-66
file into file, 2-40 Mail Merge documents, 5-28-5-29
from directory, 2-18 programs. See NEP
text betw een windows, 3-28 Save/Gets, 3-42
text from file to file, 3-38 sort file, 6-132
to different location, 2-18 tables of contents, 5-43-5-66
to different name, 2-18 cross references. See Reference and
Correct command, 3-93—3-96 EX comm and
correcting text entry errors. See CS (Clear Scroll Lock), 6-65
Delete CS: (Counter String), 4-59, 4-70, 4-84
correction beep, 3-97, 3-99, 6-17C CT (Column Table) command, 5-8
correction file, spelling, 3-94 Ctrl key assigned, 6-55
count characters, 5-87 Ctrl-0 thru 8 (Character Modes),
counter 4-24-4-27, 6-58
defining, See Define Counter Ctrl-A, 3-97
command Ctrl-Alt-Del (quit), 2-73-2-74
for chapters, 4-17 Ctrl-Rreak
function calls (Cl to C9), 6-60 stop Change, 3-63
in chained files, 4-77 stop Delete, 3-29
initial values for letters in, 4-81 stop program, 5-79
in running header or footer, 4-66 stop Search, 3-57
punctuation in, 4-81 stop TYPES, 2-65
referring to, 4 -90 Ctrl-Del (delete to end of line), 3-30
using current count twice, 4-85 Ctrl-End (move to end of file), 3-12
Counter comm ands (Cl to C9), Ctrl-F, 3-97
4-74-4-82, 4-85-4-86 Ctrl-F2# (display Save/Get keys),
Counter String (CS:), 4-59, 4-70, 4-84, 3-45
6-99 Ctrl-F3 (open notes), 3-16, 4-45, 4-66
count words, 3-107 Ctrl-F4 (define by sentence), 3-23
CP (Character Pitch), 6-122 Ctrl-F9 (switch expanded/norm al
CP (Character Position), 5-92 display), 4-8
CP (Copy Defined Block), 6-59 Ctrl-FlO (window menu), 3-70
CR (Cursor Right), 6-60 Ctrl-Home (to top of file), 3-12
CR (Cursor) setting, 3-8, 6-9 Ctrl-Left Arrow (express left), 3-13
create Ctrl-M (memory menu), 5-114
column table, 5-8 Ctrl-# (character modes), 4-24-4-27
document, 2-41-2-43 Ctrl-Pg Dn (page down), 3-12
file, 2-41-2-43 Ctrl-Pg Up (page up), 3-12
forms, 5-18-5-20 Ctrl-Right Arrow (express right), 3-13
keyboard file, 6-45-6-68 Ctrl-R (turn auto-replace), 3-100
key sequences, 6-53 Ctrl-S (spell one word), 3-89
documents. See New Ctrl-T (thesaurus), 3-103
endnotes, 4-42, 4-53, 4-54 Ctrl-Tab (tab w /o moving text),
footnotes, 4-42-4-62 4-130
CU (Cursor Up), 6-60
current directory, changing, 2-14

In d ex -6
 Index

cursor, 3-6 DD (Display of Defined Block),

definition of, 3-6 6-103
non-blinking, 3-8 dead keys (S1-S7), 6-62, 6-68
keys, 3-12-3-13 decimal tab, 4-128
movement, 3-12-3-13 Default command, 6-18-6-20
cursor arithmetic, 3*34 default
Cursor Down (CD), 6-60 drive, 2-6
Cursor Left (CL), 6-60 restoring, 6-21
Cursor Right (CR), 6-60 settings, 6-3-6-22
Cursor Up (CU), 6-60 Define Block (DF), 6 -6l
customization files, 5-119—5-120 Define Column (D O , 6-61
customizing Define Counter (DC), 4-74-4-82,
defaults, 6-3-6-22 4-83-4-84
help files, 6-23-6-35 defined blocks
hyphen dictionary, 6-37-6-43 append, 2-9
keyboard file, 6-45-6-68 change case of, 4-29
printer file, 6-69-6-130 change character display of, 4-25
sort file, 6-131-6-134 combining, 3-42
startup hie, 6-135-6-140 copy, 3-27
cut and paste, 3-38 define, 3-22
CV (Change Verify) command, 3-60 delete, 3-23, 3-29
CVA (Change Verify Absolute) move, 3-28
comm and, 3-60 print, 2-54
CW (character width). See Margin recall, 3-30
Units save on disk, 2-45, 2-46
size limitation, 3-26, 3-28, B-5
save to Save/Get, 3-42
spell check, 3-90—3-91
defined text indicator, 2-16
define footnote symbols, 4-59
D define keys, 3-23
Define Line (DL), 6-61
Define Paragraph (DP), 6-61
DA (Date) command, 4-36-4-39 Define Sentence (DS), 6 -6 l
daisy-wheel printer, 6-78 define text
DA setting, 4-37 by block, 3-23, 3-24
Data file by column, 3-23, 3-25
definition, 5-26 by line, 3-16, 3-23
how to create, 5-29-5-30 by paragraph, 3-16, 3-23
how to merge with Main file, 5-32 by sentence, 3-l6, 3-23
Date (DA) command, 4-32-4-39 by word, 3-16, 3-23
date, format of, 4-37^4-39 Define Word (DW), 6 -6l
date, inserting in text DEL command, 2-35
current. See Date command Delete
perm anent. See Today command character, 3-30
DC (Define Column), 6 -6 l character to left, 3-30
DC (Define Counter) command, defined block, 3-17
4-74-4-82, 4-83-4-84 document. See Erase

In d e x -7
 Index

Delete (conl'd) directory (cont'd)

file. See Erase printing, 2-20
format commands, 4-7 saving, 2-20
from disk, B-3 setting (DI), 2-23, 6-10
hard hyphen, 4-21 sorting, 2-24—2-25
line, 3*16 removing (RMDIR), 2-14
paragraph, 3-30 with global filenames, 2-21
save/get, 3-49 with text (DIRL), 2-22-2-23
sentence, 3-30 DIRECTORY.TMP, 2-20
soft hyphen, 4-21 DIRL (Long Directory) command,
spaces to left, 3-30 2-22
text, 3-29 discretionary hyphen. See Manual
text with Change, 3-63 Hyphenation
to end of line, 3-30 DI (Long Directory Modifier) setting,
word, 3-30 2-23, 6-10
word to left, 3-30 disk commands, 2-2
delete attributes, 5-105—5-106 disk, deleting files from, 2-34-2-36
delete keys, 3-30 disk drive, default, 2-5-2-6
deleted text, undeleting of, 3-16, 3-30 disk files, directory of. See Directory
DEL key, 3-30 Disk Operating System (DOS),
depth, form (FD), 4-104 2-28-2-31
DF (Default) command, 6-10 display
DF (Define Block), 6-6l current path, 2-16
DF (Dump Footnote) command, 4-53 current window num ber, 2-16
DII (Discretionary Hyphen), 6-10 default drive, 2-16
diagnosing printer file, 2-57 defined text indicator, 2-16
dictionaries, spelling, 3-79 directory. See DIR
adding words to, 3-82, 3-85 file. See Call
creating, 3-85 help, 6-24
loading, 3-88 memory usage menu, 5-114
dictionary, hyphenation preview file. See TYPES
adding words to, 6-40-6-42 Save/Get directory, 3-44
creating your own, 4-17, 6-39 Save/Get key, 3-45
loading, 4-17, 6-39 spelling menu, 3-81, 3-101
DICTION (hyphenation dictionary), subdirectories, 2-50
4-17, 6-39 synonyms, 3-103 to 3-106
DICT.SPL (spelling dictionary), 3-79 tabs, 6-17B
difference, find. See Compare w indow m enu, 3-70
DIR (Directory) command, 2-19 display commands, 2-2
direction keys. See cursor keys display modes, norm al/expanded,
directory 4-8-4-9
changing (CIIDIR), 2-14-2-15, Display Off (DX), 6-64
2-50 Display On (DO), 6-64
displaying (DIR), 2-19-2-21 Display Ruler (DR), 6-62
long (DIRL), 2-22 Display Total (DT), 6-62
new (MKDIR), 2-14-2-15 Display Type (DT), 6-104
of loaded Save/Gets, 3-44 Display Units (DU), 6-122
packed, 2-23 dividing the screen, 3-70
partial, 2-19

In d e x -8
 Index

division, 3-34 E
in text, 3-35
on the Command line, 3-34 ER (Error Beep) setting, 6-17C
DL (Define Line), 6 -6 l EC (End Column), 5-10, 6-59
DM (Restore Defaults), 6-21 ED (Edit) command. See Call
documents ED (Entire Row Define), 6-59
calling to display. See Call edit
combining. See Append, Merge column tables, 5-11-5-12
creating. See New text, 3-21-3-31
deleting. See Erase footers, 4-66
finding. See Find footnotes, 4-45
naming, 2-43 forms, 5-52
printing. See Type headers, 4-66
renaming. See Rename help files, 6-28
saving. See Save hidden notes, 5-111
storing. See Store indexes, 5-66
DO command, 2-26-2-27 programs, 5-70
requirements for, 2-26 Save/Get keys, 3-41, 3-46
DO (Display On), 6-64 spelling correction file, 3-94
DOS tables of contents, 5-64
entering, See DOS and QUIT Edit com m and (F.D), 2-13
commands, edit file from disk (Call), 2-10-2-13
requirement, 1-6, 2-26 Edit Footer, Header, Footnote (EF),
returning from. See Exit 6-64
DOS command, 2-28-2-31 editing commands, 3-1
DOS devices, printing to, 2-6l editing command summary, 3-2
DOS.KBD, F-3 editing tracks, 5-109—5-110
DOS prompt, 1-4, 2-28, 2-33, 2-37, Edit Next File (EN), 6-64
2-73 Editor command, 2-32-2-33
dot matrix printer, 6-78 EDITOR.EXE program , 1-6,
double angle brackets, 4-6
2-32-2-33
double spacing, 4-149 renaming, 2-33
down arrow, 3-12 EDITOR.OVn, 5-117
DP (Decimal Point), 6-10 Edit Trace. See Redlining
DP (Define Paragraph), 6 -6l EDT. See CAF
DR (Display Ruler), 6-62 EE (Erase Entry), 6-59
DR (Drive) selling, 6-10 EF (Edit Footer, Header, Footnote),
drive, default, 2-5 6-64
Drive (DR) setting, 6-10 EG (EGA Support), 6-107
DS (Define Sentence), 6-61 ejecting last page, 4-106, 4-107, 6-10
DSORT (Directory Sort), 2-24-2-25 EJ (Eject), 6-10
DT (Display Total), 6-62 FX (Express Left), 6-80
DT (Display Type), 6-104 EL (Extra Leading), 4-147
DU (Display Units), 6-122 Eli (Error Help), 6-10, 6-35
Dump Footnotes (DF), 4-55 El (End ID, 5-96
duplicate filename, 2-18
DW (Define Word), 6 -6 l
DX (Display Off), 6-64

In d e x -9
 Index

em bedded escape character, A -l

commands, 2-2, 4-6-4-9 ET (End Table), 6-80
program commands, 5-92-5-5-96 even page headers and footers,
triangles, 4-7 4-64-4-66
EN (Edit Next File), 6-64 even pages, printing, 2-56
end block define, 3-24 EX (End X-Marker), 5-53
End Column, 5-10 F.X (Exit), 6-64
End Column (EC), move cursor to, EX (Exit)-programming, 5-96
6-59 EX1 (ExiO-programming, 5*96
End key, 3-13 Execute (XC), 6-59
endnotes, 4-42, 4-53, 4-54 executing commands, 1-3, 2-2, 3-10
creating, 4-46, 4-53, 4-54 Exit (EX), 6-64
definition of, 4-40 Exit comm and, 2-37
printing, 4-47, 4-53 exit to DOS
end of file, move cursor to, 3-12 DOS command, 2-28
end of line, deleting to, 3-30 QUIT comm and, 2-73
end unbreakable block (BB), exit from DOS, 2-37
4-108-4-109 exit from XyWrite, 2-73
End X-Marker (EX), 5-53 Exist command, 2-43
enhanced graphics adapter (EGA), expanded display, 4-8-4-9
6-107 expanding tabs on output (TB), 6-15
enter expressions, evaluating math
commands, 1-3 in text, 3-34
defaults into Printer File, 6-19 on Command line, 3-35
DOS from XyWrite, 2-28-2-31 Express Left (EL), 3-12, 6-60
field identification, 5-37 Express Right (ER), 3-12, 6-60
footnotes (FN), 4-48-4-49 Extract
numbers, 3-19 Index, 5-66
text in a new mode, 4-26 Table of Contents, 5-64
text from disk (ME), 2-40 Extra Leading (EL), 4-147
XyWrite (Editor), 2-32-2-33 EZ-Macro, D-4
entering a mode, 6-89
Enter key, 3-10
Entire Row Define (ED), 6-59
EP (Erase Prompt), 2-35, 2-36, 6-11
equations, 3-34-3-36 F
erase a file, 2-34-2-35
Erase command, 2-34
Erase, No Verify (ERNV) command, FI key, 3-16, 3-23, 3-24-3-25
2-36 F2 + letter/num ber, 3-16, 3-42
Erase Entry (EE), 6-59 F3 key, 3-16, 3-23
Erase Prompt (EP), 2-35, 2-36 F4 key, 3-16, 3-23
ER (Error), programming, 5-92 F5 key, 3-10, 3-16
ER (Express Right), 6-60 F6 key, 3-17
ERNV (Erase, No Verify) command, F7 key, 3-17, 3-27, 3-28
2-36 F8 key, 3-17, 3-28
Error (ER), 5-92 F9 key, 3-10, 3-17
Error Beep (EB) setting, 6-17C F10 key, 3-11, 3-17
error messages, C -l-C -12

I n d e x - 10
 Index

FB (File Begin) command, 6-97 file sets, 2-68, 2-69

FC (Flush Center) command, 4-12 fill-in forms, 5-17-5-24
FD (Find Difference), 6-64 calling a form, 5-24
See also Compare carriage return in, 5-22
FD (Form Depth) command, 4-104 creating, 5-18, 5-22
features of XyWrite, 1-1 editing, 5-22
FE (File End) command, 6-97 filling in, 5-21
FF (Force Fill), 6-64 GRID.FRM, 5-22
FF (Form Feed) setting, 6-11 Printer File requirement, 5-22
Field Identification (FI), 5-37 Final Page (FP) command, 4-67
field nam e—Mail Merge, 5-35 in chained files, 2-71
field names in header, 3-6-3-8 find
changing, 2-16 and replace. See Change
field num ber—Mail Merge, 5-35 file. See Find
field numbers— Field ID, 5-37-5-38 string. See Search
Field Separator (FS), 5-40 Find command, 2-38
FI (Field Identification) command, Find Difference (FD), 3-65-3-66, 6-64
5-37 Find Match (FM), 3-65-3-66, 6-64
File Begin (FB), 6-97 fixed date, 4-36-4-39
File Check command, 3-90—3*92 fixed time, 4-40
File Correct command, 3-93—3-96 fixed field forms. See Fill-In Forms
File End (FE), 6-97 Fix Spelling (FS) function call, 6-68A
file, deleting from disk, 2-34-2-36 flashing character modes, 4-24
filing commands, 2-3-2-74 FL (Flush Left) command, 4-12
filename, changing. See Rename flow control command, 5-96
filename Flush Center (FC) command, 4-12
conventions, 2-43 flush left and right, 4-13
duplication, 2-8 Flush Left (FL) command, 4-12
listing. See DIR Flush Right (FR) command, 4-12
reserved, 2-43 flush tabs, 4-128
filename extension FM (Find Match), 6-64
conventions, 2-43 FM (Footnote Format), 4-61-4-62
file storage (Store), 2-48-2-49 FN (Footnote) command, 4-48-4-49
files, types of FO (Format) command. See TYPEF
accessory, 1-6 FO: (Font Table), 6-85-6-87
Data. See Mail Merge FO= (Font Value), 6-87
essential, 1-6 folio. See Page Number
Main. See Mail Merge fonts
parent, 2-68 changing, 4-24-26
files definition of, 6-78
calling to display. See Call names, 6-78
combining. See Append, Merge setting, 4-32
creating. See New font tables, 6-85-6-87
deleting. See Erase footers, 4-64-4-71
finding. See Find footnote commands
naming, 2-43 Dum p Footnotes (DF), 4-53
printing. See Type Footnote (FN), 4-48
renaming. See Rename Footnote Format (FM), 4-59-4-62
saving. See Saye
storing. See Store
I n d e x -11
 Index

footnote commands (cont'd) four-function calculator, 3-34

Footnote Separator (FS), 4-50 FP (Final Page) comm and, 4-67
Footnote W rap Separator (FW), FR (Flush Right) command, 4-12
4-51 FS (Field Separator), 5-40
No Footnotes (NF), 4-54 FS (Fix Spelling) function call, 6-68A
Set Footnote Number (SF), FS (Footnote Separator) command,
4-55-4-58 4-50
footnote numbers FT (Footnote Transition) setting, 4-60
in chained files, 4-60 FU setting, 4-58, 4-86, 4-92, 6-12
referring to, 4-91 FUNC command, 6-55
footnote procedures, 4-42-4-62 function calls, 6-57-6-68
footnotes function key help, 1-7
check spelling of, 3-84 function keys, 3-15-3-17
creating, 4-44-4-62 function symbols. See Math
editing, 4-45 FW (Footnote Wrap Separator)
formatting, 4-59-4-62 comm and, 4-51
numbering, 4-55-4-58
placem ent of, 4-61
printing, 4-46 G
reviewing, 4-45
style of, 4-59-4-62 generating a table of contents or
footnote sets, 4-42 index, 5-43-5-66
footnotes, unnum bered, 4-56 get file from disk (CALL), 2-10-2-13
footnote symbols, defining, 4-57 get Save/Get, 5-93
Footnote Transition (FT), 4-60 get text from Save/Get key, 3-43
forced page break. See Page Break GFI (Go to Header), 6-59
comm and GL (Go to Label) command, 5*96
Force Fill (FF), 6-64 global filenames, 2-11, 2-21, 2-38,
foreign characters, 6-68 3-58
Format command. See TYPEF glossary function. See Save/Gets
format commands, 4-1-4-150 GO command, 3-64
format, footnote, 4-61-4-62 go to
format, index, 5-58-5-59 CM line, 3-10, 3-11
format style, 4-138-4-139 DOS. See DOS and QUIT
format, table of contents, 5-57 comm ands
formatted input mode, 4-8 expanded display, 4-8
formatting for printing, 2-57-2-63 header (GH), 6-59
Form Depth (FD) command, 4-104, label (GL), 5-96
Form Feed, 6-11, 6-21 page and line, 3-64
form letters. See Mail Merge page review. See TYPES
forms text area (GT), 6-59
calling, 5-24 to p of next page, 3-12
creating, 5-18, 5-23 XyWrite from DOS. See Exit
editing, 5-22 graph, including, 4-134B
filling in, 5-21 graphics adapter, 6-107
using, 5-21 grave accent (S2), 6-62, 6-68
pre-printed, 5-20 GT (Get Save/Get), 5-93
printing, 5-21 GT (Go to Text Area), 6-59

In d e x -1 2
 Index

H HN (Header Normal), 6-106

HR (Header Reverse), 6-106
HS (Header Size), 6-17A
halting a change, 3-63 HY file label, 5-119
halting printing. See KILTYP HY (Hyphenation) command, 4-18
handicapped aids—singleshot hyphen
(keyboard file), 6-50 breaking hard, 4-20
hanging indents, 4-123-4-125 deleting, 4-21
hanging lines at page breaks, inserting, 4-20
4-110-4-113 non-breaking hard, 4-20
hard output of, 4-26, 6-15
break. See Page Break soft, 4-20
copy. See Type types of, 4-20
date, D2. See also Today, hyphenation, 4-19
hyphen, 4-19-4-20 automatic, 4-17
return, 310, 414 canceling, 4-18
time. See Now dictionary for, 4-17, 4-18,
HC (Home Column), 6-59 6-37-6-43
header, 3-6 manual, 4-19
header calculations, 3-34 param eters for, 4-18, 6-12, 6-103
header modes (HR, HN), 6-106 switching on/off, 4-18
Header Size (HS) setting, 6-17A values, 6-12, 6-103
headers, running, 4-64—4-66 HY.TMP, 6-43
help, HV (Hyphenation Value), 6-12, 6-103
after error, 6-35
on-screen, 1-7, 6-24
telephone, 1-7
exiting, 6-25
help fields, checking, 6-35 I
help files, 6-23-6-35
LONG.IILP, 6-26
SIIORT.HLP, 6-26 I in screen header, meaning of, 3-8
help frames, 6-30-6-35 II to 19 (Index) command, 5-58-5-59
editing, 6-28 IB (Index Break) command, 5-62
types, 6-30 IBM keyboard file, 6-45-6-55
HF (Help Field), 6-35 identifying fields, mail merge, 5-37
hidden notes, 5-111 IF statement, 5*96
highlight. See Character Modes Ignore Top Margin (TF), 6-15
HL file label, 5-119 ignore spelling checker, 3-81, 3-87
HM (Home), 6-60 IL (Index Label) command, 5-54
Homebase, F-l-F-2 immediate commands, 2-2
Home Column (HC), 6-59 Include (IN) command, 4-134B
Home (HM), 6-60 indent first line, 4-123-4-125
Home key, 1-5 indent, hanging, 4 -1 2 3 ^ -1 2 5
horizontal scrolling, 3-7 indent paragraph, 4-123-4-125
horizontal split screen, 3-70 Indent Paragraph (IP) command,
how to. See Help 4-123-4-125

I n d e x -13
 Index

Index Break (IB) command, 5-62 IR (Insert Replacement) function call,

indexes, 5-43-5-66 3-101, 6-68A
creating, 5-46-5-51 IS (Insert Save/Get) command
cross references in, 5-53 in text, 3-50
extracting, 5-50 programming, 5-93
formatting, 5-48 1X1 to 1X9 Ondex Extraction)
multi-level, 5-54 comm and, 5-66
with separators, 5-62
with subentries, 5-62
Index Label (IL) command, 5-54
indicators, ruler, 4-116
IN (Include) command, 4-134B J
initial program defaults, 6-21
insert
boilerplate, 2-40, 3-38 JL (Justify Underlined Text) setting,
file at cursor (merge), 2-40 6-122
format commands in text, 4-7 JMP (Jump) comm and, 3-64, 5-92
hard date. See Today JT (justification type) command,
hard time. See Now 6-122
hyphens, 4-20 JU (Justify) comm and, 4-13
Mail Merge fields, 5-34 justification
mode, 3-18-3-19 micro-, 6-121-6-130
non-breaking space, 4 -l6 viewing on-screen, 2-57
page break. See Page Break whole-space, 4-13
page number. See SP justified printing. See Justification
running header or footer, Justify Underlined Text (JL), 6-122,
4-64-4-69 Justify Off (NJ) command, 4-13
Save/Gets, 3-43, 5-93 Justify On (JU) command, 4-13
soft date. See Date
soft time. See Time
sum, 3-34
word in dictionary, 6-37
insert attributes, 5-105 K
Insert Replacement function call,
3-101, 6-68A KB file label, 5-119
Insert Save/Get (IS) comm and KC (Key Click), 6-17C
in text, 3-50 keyboard file, changing, 6-45-6-68,
in programming, 5-93 keyboard layout, 1-5, 3*9
Ins (Insert) key, 3-19 Keyboard Mode (KM), 6-13, F-3
installing XyWrite, 1-2 key click (KC), 6-17C
intermediate save. See Save key, Execute, 1-3, 3-10
interrupt printing comm and, 2-39, key, Home, 1-5
2-55 key, Ins, 3-19
invisible, change, 3-60-3-63 key position codes, 6-47
IP (Indent Paragraph) command,
4-123-4-125

In d e x -14
 Index

keys leading. See Vertical Spacing

com m and line, 3-10 Leading, Automatic (AL), 4-145
cursor, 3-12-3-14 Leading, Extra (EL), 4-147
define, 3-23 Leading, Line (LL), 4-148
delete, 3-30 leave XyWrite (Quit), 2-73
function, 3-15-3-17 leaving a mode, 6-89
Save/Get, 3-37-3-51 left arrow, cursor, 3-12
toggle, 3-18-3-20 left arrow key, cursor, 3-12
keywords, 6-29 left justify (FL), 4-12
kill printing, 2-39 left margin indicator, 4-116
KILTYP command, 2-39 Left Margin (LM) command, 4-120
KM (Keyboard Mode), 6-13, F-3, left shift key, moving, 6-54
LEGAL.SPL, 3-79
LE (Line End), 6-60
LE (Line Ending Printer Character),
6-96
L letter, form. See Mail Merge
letter wildcard, searches, 3-56
LF (Line Feed), A-2
Label (LB) command, 4-88, 5-96, LF (Line Spacing), 4-150, 6-13, 6-63
5-111 Lightning, F-l-F -2
laser printers, 6-78 Linear Cursor functions, 6-68
layout, keyboard, 1-5, 3-9 Linear Down (LD), 6-60
layout, page. See Formatting Linear Left (LL), 6-60
LB (Label) command, 4-88, 5-96, Linear Right (LR), 6-60
5-111— 5-112 Linear Up (LU), 6-60
LB (Line Begin), 6-60 Line Begin (LB), 6-60
LC (Lowercase) command, 4-28-4-29 line, deleting, 3-30
LC (Line End Character), 6-105 line, defining (F4), 3-23
LD (Leadering) command, 5-61 Line End Character (LC), 6-105
LD (Linear Down), 6-60 Line End (LE), 6-96
LDDICT command, 6-39 line feed, A-2
LDHELP command, 6-26 line num ber indicator, 3-8
LDKBD command, 6-56 Line Leading (LL) command, 4-148
LDPM (Load Program) command, Line Spacing (LS), 6-63
5-80 Line Spacing (LS) command, 4-149
LDPRN (Load Printer File) command, on-screen, 4-150
6-112 list, numbering a, 4-74
LDSGT (Load Save/Get) command, list of files. See DIR
3-48 LL (Linear Left), 6-60
LDSORT (Load Sort Table) command, LL (Line Leading) command, 4-148
6-134 LM (Left Margin) command, 4-102
LDSUB (Load Character Substitution Load command, 3-88, 5-119
File), 6-116 Load Help Files (LDIIELP), 6-26
leader characters, 5-61 Load Hyphen Dictionary (LDDICT),
Leadering (LD) command, 5-61 6-39

In d ex -1 5
 Index

Load Keyboard File (LDKBD), 6-56 match, find. See Search, Compare
load memory, 5-119, B-l margin offsets, 4-121
Load Printer File (LDPRN), 2-53, margins, left and right, 4-120
6-112 margins, top and bottom, 4-105
Load Program (LDPM), 5-80 Margin Units (MU), 6-122
Load Save/Get Keys (LDSGT), 3-48 Mark Cell (MC), 6-59
Load Sort Table (LDSORT), 6-134 markers, ruler, 4-116
load spelling dictionaries, 3-88, 5-119 marking index points in text,
logical operators, 5-97 5-46-5-47, 5-52
long directory, 2-22 math, 3-33-3-36
LONG.HLP, 6-26 MCI mail. See Electronic Mail
looking for text strings. See Search MC (Mark Cell), 6-59
Lowercase (LC) command, 4-28 MD (Mode) commands, 4-24-4-27,
LP (Load Printer File) command, 5-105
6-112 MD BO (Bold)
LPT1, printing to, 2-61 MD BR (Bold Reverse)
LPT2, printing to, 2 -6 l MD BU (Bold Underline)
LR (Linear Right), 6-60 MD DB (Delete Bold)
LS (Line Spacing), 6-63 MD DD (Delete Subscript)
LS (Line Space) comm and, 2-58, MD DL (Delete Bold Underline)
4-149 MD DN (Delete Normal)
LU (Linear Up), 6-60 MD DR (Delete Reverse)
LVO thru LV9 commands, 5-65 MD DS (Delete Superscript)
MD DU (Delete Underline)
MD DV (Delete Bold Reverse)
MD FL (Flashing)
MD FN (Footnote)
M MD FR (Flashing Reverse)
MD FU (Flashing Underline)
MD IB (Insert Bold)
MO to M8 (Mode 0 to 8), 6-58, 6-67 MD ID (Insert Subscript)
macro, defined, D-3 MD IL (Insert Bold Underline)
mail, electronic, G -l-G -2 MD IN (Insert Normal)
Mail Merge MD IR (Insert Reverse)
creating documents, 5-28 MD IS (Insert Superscript)
definition, 5-26 MD IU (Insert Underline)
fields, 5-34-5-38 MD IV (Insert Bold Reverse)
importing data, 5-33 MD NM (Normal)
procedure, 5-25-5-42 MD RV (Reverse)
separators (FS,RS,CO), 5-40-5-41 MD SD (Subscript)
MAIL.PRN, G -l MD SO (Standout)
main spelling dictionary, 3-79, 3-81 MD SU (Superscript)
making a new directory, 2-14, 2-15 MD UL (Underline)
manual hyphenation, 4-18 MD (Move Down), 6-60
manual set, 1-2 ME (Memory Menu) function call,
6-68B
ME (Merge) comm and, 2-40

I n d e x - 16
 Index

memory, 5-113— 5-120, B-l-B-6 moving the cursor

clearing, 5-115—5-116, 5-118, B-3 by character, 3-12
loading, 5-119, B-l-B-2 from Command Line to text, 3-11
Memory Menu (ME) function call, by line, 3-14
6-68B by printed page, 3-14
memory usage menu, 5-114— 5-116 by screen, 3-14
memory-resident programs, F -l-F -4 to page and line number, 3-64
menu window to window, 3-14
memory usage, 5-114— 5-116 moving left shift key, 6-54
spelling, 3-79—3-80 moving text, 3-27
tab, 4-118 between windows, 3-27
thesaurus, 3-104 past the cursor, 3-12
window, 3-70 MS (Microspace Units), 6-122
Merge (ME) command, 2-40 multi-level indexes, 5-54
merging documents, 2-40 Multilink, F-3
messages, error, C-l-C -12 multiple copies, printing, 2-54
message to operator (PR), multiplication, 3-34
4-132-4-133 in the comm and line, 3-34
microjustification, 6-121-6-130 in the text, 3-35
Microspace Units (MS), 6-122 MU (Margin Units), 6-122
MI (Momentary Insert), 6-68B MU (Move Up), 6-61
minimum system requirements, 1-6 MV (Move Defined Block) , 6-59
misspellings, correcting, 3-78—3-101
MKDIR, 2-14
Mode (MD) commands. See Character
Modes
Mode 0 to Mode 8 (MO to M8), 6-58, N
6-67
modes, redlining, 5-105
modify disk file, 2-10 N in header, meaning of, 3-8
modifying naming fields (FI)-Mail Merge, 5-29,
defaults, 6-3-6-22 5-37
help files, 6-23-6-35 naming files, 2-43
hyphen dictionary, 6-37-6-43 NB (Non-Breakable Blocks)
keyboard file, 6-45-6-68 command, 4-108-4-109
printer file, 6-69-6-130 NC (Normal Carriage Return), 6-13
sort file, 6-131-6-134 ND (Network Drives), 6-110
startup file, 6-135-6-140 NEF (New Form) command, 5-23
Momentary Insert (MI), 6-68B NE (No Errors from Printer), 6-13
month insertion, 4-36-4-39 NEP (New Program) command, 5-70,
mouse. See Linear Cursor functions 5-75
move between files. See W indows nested commands (programming),
move defined block, 3-17 5-89
Move Down (MD), 6-60 Network Drives (ND), 6-110
Move (MV), 6-59 New command, 2-41-2-43
Move Up (MU), 6-61 new filename, assigning, 2-44, 2-48
moving a block of text, 3-28 New Form (NEF) command, 5-23

I n d e x - 17
 Index

new page, 4-106—4-107 NP (Next Paragraph), 6-62

new screen, 2-13, 3-71 NR (Next Ruler), 6-62
new spaper columns, 5-5, 5-13 NS (Next Sentence), 6-60
New W indow (NW), 6-14 NS (Next Style), 4-138-4-139
Next Formatted Page (NF), 6-61 NT (Next Tab), 6-60
next line, move cursor to, 3-13 numbers, footnote, 4-55-4-58
Next Line (NL), 6-60 superscript, 4-60—4 -6 l
next page, 4-106-4-107 number-specified characters, A -l
Next Ruler (NR), 6-62 num ber, wildcard searches for, 3-56
Next Paragraph (NP), 6-62 Numeric Key Toggle (NK), 6-65
Next Sentence (NS), 6-60 numbering
Next Style (NS) command, automatic, 4-74-4-92
4-138-4-139 chapter, 4-76
Next Tab (NT), 6-60 footnote, 4-55-4-58
Next W indow (NX), 6-65 list, 4-74
next word, move cursor to, 3-13 outline, 4-75
Next Word (NW), 6-60 paragraphs, 4-75
NF (Next Formatted Page), 6-61 pages, 4-67
NF (No Footnotes) command, 4-54 strings, 4-70
NI (No Index) command, 5-56 Num Lock key, 3-18, 3-19
NI (Not IBM Sensitive), 6-65 NW (New Window), 6-14
NJ (No Justify) command, 4-13 NW (Next Word), 6-60
NL (Next Line), 6-60 NX (Next Window), 6-65
NM header field, 2-l6, 3-7
changing, 2-16, 3-7
NM (No Markers), 6-63
NM (Normal) character mode, 4-24
No Footnotes (NF), 4-54 o
No Index (NI), 5-56
No Justification (NJ), 4-13
No Markers (NM), 6-63 O-Accent (S5), 6-62, 6-68
Non-Breakable Block (NB, BB) OB (Overstrike Beep) setting, 6-17B
commands, 4-108-4-109
non-breaking hard hyphen, 4-20 odd page headers and footers,
non-breaking space, 4-16 4-64-4-66
NO (No Operation), 6-55, 6-65 odd pages, printing, 2-52, 2-53, 2-56
non-printing characters, 6-90 Offset (OF) command, 4-121-4-122
No Operation (NO), 6-55, 6-65 OF (Offset) command, 4-121-4-122
No Pause (NP) command, 4-133 Old Prompt (OP), 6-62
normal character mode, return to, oops! See Abort, Delete, Undelete
4-24 open file on disk (New), 2-41-2-43
Normal Carriage Return (NC), 6-13 open another window, 3-70
normal display, 4-8 operators, programming, 5-97
notation, reference manual, 1-4 OP (Old Prompt), 6-62
notes, hidden, 5-111— 5*112 OP (O rphan) command,
Not IBM Sensitive (NI), 6-65 4-110-4-113
Now command, 4-40 Orphan (OP) command,
4-110-4-113

I n d e x -18
 Index

outline numbering, 4-75, 4-82, E-3 page width, 4-115-4-130

output file to disk (Store), 2-48-2-49 pagination. See Page Break, Page
output form feeds, 6-11 Length
output list of files (TYPE @), PA (Printer Pause) command, 4-132
2-68-2-71 paper length, 4-104
output ready file, 4-134B paragraph
output reminders (PR), 4-132 indenting, 4-123
output to printer (TYPE), 2-51-2-56 num bering, 4-75
overflow, B-5 terminator, 6-96
Overstrike Beep (OB), 6-17B paragraph block define, 3-23
overstrike character, 6-89 paragraph ending (PE), 6-96
Overstrike key, 3-18-3-19 parent file, 2-68- 2-69
overstrike mode, 3-18-3-19, 6-17B, partial space justification, 6-122
6-68 B partitioning the screen. See Windows
path, 1-4, 2-4
pause betw een pages in printing
TYPE ,,P, 2-52, 2-56
AP, NP (AutoPause, No Pause),
P 4-133
Pause (PA) command, 2-55, 4-132
pause while printing (PA), 2-55,
P (pause in program execution), 5-77 4-116, 4-133
packed directories, 2-23 PC (Printer Control) command, 4-134
page boundaries, setting (PL), PC: (Printer Control) tables, 6-98
4-94—4-101 PD (Page Down), 6-61
Page Break (PG) command, PE (Paragraph End), 6-96
4-106-4-107 personal dictionaries, 3-79
page breaks, 2-67, 4-106-4-107 creating, 3-85
Page Down (PD), 6 -6 l editing, 3-85
Page Down (PgDn) key, 3-12 adding words to, 3-82, 3-85—3-87
page format, 4-1-4-150 PERS.SPL, 3-79
page length procedures, 4-93-4-113 PE (Put Edits) command,
comm and summary, 4-98 5-107—5-108
page/line indicator, 3-8 PEV (Put Edits, Verify) command,
Page Number (PN, FP) command, 5-107—5-108
4-67 PF (Previous Formatted Page), 6 -6l
page numbers, 2-67, 4-67, 4-68 PF (Put Field) command, 5-34-5-36
changing, 4-69-4-71 PgDn (Page Down) key, 3-12
in chained files, 4-17 PgUp (Page Up) key, 3-12
referring to, 4-88-4-89 PG (Page Break) command, 4-106
setting style of, 4-69 PG (Page-End Character), 6-97
suppressing, in index, 5-53 PI (Printer Insert) command, 4-134A
viewing, 4-68 pitch, changing printer, See Printer
page preview (before printing), Type
2-64-2-67 placing sum in text, 3-34
page range (for printout), 2-52, 2-56 P-L field in header, 3-7, 4-8
Page Up (PU), 6-61 PL (Page Length) command,
Page Up key (PgUp), 3-12 4-102-4-103

In d e x -1 9
 Index

PL (Previous Line), 6-60 printing one or more documents. See

PN (Page Number) command, 4-67 TYPE
point size, 6-79 canceling. See KILTYP
position codes, keyboard, 6-47 double-sided, 2-56
position text double-spaced, 4-139
on left margin (FI.), 4-12 group of files (TYPE @),
on right margin (FR), 4-12 2-68-2-71
PP (Previous Paragraph), 6-60 justified, 4-13
PR file label, 5-119 Mail Merge documents, 5-32
pre-printed forms, 5-18 multiple copies, 2-54
pre-strike character, 6-90 pause during, 2-55, 4-116, 4-133
preview queuing, 2-60
displayed document, 2-64 to a file (TYPEF), 2-57-2-63
footnotes, 4-45 to DOS devices, 2-61
Previous Formatted Page (PF), 6 -6l to the screen (TYPES), 2-64-2-67
Previous Line (PL), 6-60 triple-spacing, 4-149
previous page, 3-12 printouts. See TYPE
Previous Paragragh (PP), 6-60 Print Screen (PR), 6-64
Previous Sentence (PS), 6-60 PRINT.TMP, 2-53
Previous Style (PS) command, Print Type (PT) command, 4-31
4-138-4-139 PRMPT field, in header, 3-7
Previous Tab (PT), 6-60 changing, 2-16
Previous Word (PW), 6-60 .PRN file, 6-114
print command. See TYPE program
Printer Control (PC) command, 4-134 calling, 5-76
Printer Control (PC:) tables, 6-98 creating, 5-70-5-72
Printer File, 6-69-6-130 loading, 5-80-5-81
changing, 6-76 running, 5-79, 5-84, 5-86
comments, 6-76 stopping, 5-79
diagnosing, 2-57 programming in XyWrite, 5-67-5-100
example, 6-81 advanced, 5-83-5-100
loading (LDPRN), 6-85 examples, 5-74, 5-87, 5-98,
Printer Insert (PI) command, 4-134A D-l-D -5
printer margin offset, 4-121 procedures, 5-68-5-71
Printer Pause (PA) command, 4-132 programs, running under XyWrite.
printer queue, 2-39 See DO
clearing, 2-39 Prokey, F-3
printer sets, chaining, 6-83 Prompt (PR) command, 4-132
printers, those supported. Consult Prompt line, 3-7
XyWrite diskette prom pt line messages, C -l-C -12
printers, types of, 6-78 prom pts during printing, 2-55, 4-116
printer typefaces, setting, 4-31, 6-82 PR (Print Screen), 6-64
printing footnotes, 4-46 PS (Previous Sentence), 6-60
printing part of a document PS (Previous Style) command,
defined block of text, 2-54 4-138-4-139
endnotes, 4-47 PT (Previous Tab), 6-60
even pages only, 2-56 PT (Print Type) command, 4-31, 6-82
odd pages only, 2-56
specific pages, 2-52, 2-56

In d ex -2 0
 Index

PU (Page Up), 6-61 reassigning keys, 6-52

Put Edit (PE) command, 5-107—5- recall previous document, 2-11
108 REC command, 4-87-4-92
Put Edit, Verify (PEV) command, 5- record keystrokes for playback, 5-72
1 0 7 -5 -1 0 8 Record Separator (RS), 5-40
Put Field (PF), 5-34-5-36 recovering deleted blocks, 3-30
Put Variable (PV), 5-93 Redlining, 5-101—5-110
putting a program in Save/Get, 5-71, RED (Redlining) command, 5-102
5-80 reenter XyWrite. See Exit
putting fields in form letters, REF comm and, 4-87—4-92
5-34—5-36 reference commands, 4-87-4-92
PV (Put Variable), 5-93 in chained files, 2-71
PW (Previous Word), 6-60 reference manual notation, 1-4-1-5
refer to
chapter num ber, 4-90
counters, 4-88
footnote numbers, 4-91
Q page num bers, 4-88
relational operators, 5-83
Q1—Q8, 3-84, 6-68A Relative Tabs (RT) command,
queue switch. See Change Directory 4-126-4-127
question mark (wild card), 2-11, release defined text, 3-16, 3-2 3, 3-25
2-21, 2-38 release code, 5-113— 5-115, 5-118
questionable word, release memory, 5 - 113 — 5 - 115 ,
queuing files for printing, 2-54 5-118
quick save, 2-40 remove
quick TYPES, 2-65 directory (RMDIR), 2-14, 2-15
Quick Start Tutorial, 1-2 Save/Get, 3-49
Quit command, 2-73-2-74 screen, 3-75
QUIT1.TMP, 2-74 text. See Abort, Delete
quitting XyWrite (Quit), 2-73-2-74 window borders, 3-72
Remove command, 3-49
Remove Screen (RS) command, 3-75
Rename command, 2-44
renaming a document, 2-44
R REN command, 2-44
repeat action, cursor, 3-12
R in header, 5-103 REP command, 4-87-4-92
R0 thru R9—ASCII characters, 6-58, replacement of words, automatic,
6-67 3-86, 3-97—3-101
ragged center, 4-12 requirements, XyWrite, 1-6
ragged left, 4-12 RE (Rubout to End of line), 6 -6 l
ragged right, 4-12 reserved filenames, 2-43
RAM disks, 2-6, B-l reserved Save/Gets, 3-38, 3-49
RC (Read Character), 5-92 reset m ode command, 4-24
RC (Rubout Character), 6-6l reset sum (CLRSUM), 3-36
RD (Rubout Defined block), 6-61 resetting the tabs CTR), 4-126
Ready, F -l-F -2

I n d e x -21
 Index

restore block define, 3-23 Rubout Defined Block (RD), 6 -6l

Restore Defaults (DM), 6-21 Rubout to End of line (RE), 6 -6 l
restore deleted text, 3-30 rubout key, 3-30
restoring to full screen, 3-72 Rubout Line (RL), 6 -6l
retrieve file from disk, 2-10-2-13 Rubout Paragraph (RP), 6 -6 l
return [Enter] key, 3-10 Rubout Sentence (RS), 6-61
return from DOS, 2-37 Rubout Word (RW), 6-61
return key in header, 3-10 ruler, 3-8, 4-116-4-117
return to DOS, 2-28-2-31, 2-73-2-74 ruler markers, 4-116, 6-105
return to normal typing (from ruler menu, 4-118-4-119
record), 5-70 ruler settings, 4-118-4-119
reverse (RV) character mode, 4-24 Run command, 5-79
reverse ‘A’ on PRMPT line, 3-8, 3-19 running DOS under XyWrite, 2-26,
reverse ‘C’ on PRMPT line, 3-8, 3-19 2-28-2-31
reverse ‘I’ on PRMPT line, 3-8, 3-19 Running Footer (RF) command,
reverse 'N’ on PRMPT line, 3-8, 3-19 4-64-4-66
reverse ‘S’ on PRMPT line, 3-8, 3-20 Running Header (RH) command,
reviewing files before printing, 4-64-4-66
2-64-2-67 running headers and footers
Review (RV) command. See TYPES editing, 4-66
REVIEW.TMP, 2-64 inserting, 4-64
revising Table of Contents/Index, one-line, 4-66
3-48 running outside programs under
RF, RFE, RFO (Running Footer) XyWrite, 2-26-2-27
commands, 4-64-^i-66 running programs, 5-71, 5-79
RH, RHE, RHO (Running Header) running XyWrite. See Editor
commands, 4-64-4-66 RV (Review), 6-64
right arrow, 3-12 RV (Review) command. See TYPES
right justify, 4-12 RV (Reverse) character mode, 4-24
Right Margin (RM) command, 4-120 RW (Rubout Word), 6-61
right margin, alignment on, 4-12
right, move cursor, 3-12
RL (Rubout Line), 6 -6 l
RL (Ruler Markers), 6 -6 l
RM (Right Margin) command, 4-120 s
RMDIR, 2-14, 2-15
RMVSCR (Remove Screen) command,
3-75 S in header, m eaning of, 3-8
RO (Redlining) function call, 5-105, SI to S7, 6-62
6-68A SAD command. See SAVEDEF
RP (Rubout Paragraph), 6-61 SA (Save) command, 2-45-2-47
RS (Record Separator), 5-40 Save
RS (Remove Screen) command, 3-75 defined block, 2-45-2-46
RS (Rubout Sentence), 6 -6 l defined text, 3-16, 3-42
RT (Relative Tabs) command, document, 2-5-2-6, 2-11,
4-126-4-127 2-45-2-47
Rubout Character (RC), 6-61 -drive, 2-5-2-6
file, 2-5-2-6, 2-11, 2-45-2-47

In d e x -2 2
 Index

SAVE%, 2-47 Search command, 3-52-3-57,

SAVEC (Save Code) command, 5-117 3-58-3-59
Save comm and, 2-45-2-47 Search Absolute, 3-52-3-57,
SAVEDEF, 2-45-2-46 3-58-3-59
save-drives, 2-5 Search Backward, 3-52-3-57
Save/Get Search Backward Absolute,
adding to, 3-46 3-52-3-57
commands, programming, Search
5-93-5-95 across multiple files, 3-58
directory, 3-16, 3-44 and replace. See Change
disk use of, 3-40 effect of display m odes on, 3-55
editing, 3-41, 3-46 for absolute match, 3-52
getting text from, 3-43 for difference. See Compare
inserting, 3-50 for file. See Find
keys, 3-37 for slash, 3-55, 3-59
procedure, 3-38 for text, 3-52
programming, 5-71, 5-72, 5-81, for em bedded text, 3-55
5-91 5-93 for a word, 3-57
storing, 3-47 stop, 3-59
tem porary use of, 3-40 through files, 3-58- 3-59
typing, 3-41 with wildcards, 3-56
Save Expressiqp (SX), 5-94 SEB command, 3-52-3-57
Save/Get Directory (SD), 6-63 SEBA command, 3-52-3-57
Save/Gets (@A to @2, &A to &Z), section numbering, 4-75
6-63 select window, 3-17
Save/Gets (@0 to @9, &0 to &9), 6-63 sentence define (Ctrl-F4), 3-23
Save Subroutine (SU), 5-94 separators for search, 3-54
Saving separators in index, 5-62
block of text, 2-46 separators, Mail Merge, 5-40
files (Save), 2-45-2-47 separators, word, 3-56
under different name, 2-46 Sequential Pages (SQ), 2-54, 6-14
last version of text, 2-45-2-47 serial number, 1-7
preview file, 2-67 serial printer, installing, 6-113
style (SS), 4-136 Set Footnote Number (SF), 4-55-4-58
to two drives, 2-5- 2-6 Set Insert Mode (SI), 6-65
Save String (SV), 5-94 set left margin, 4-120
scaling factor in width tables, 6-86 Set Numeric Lock (SN), 6-65
screen, 3-6. Also see Display Set Page Number (SP) command,
Screen Length (SL), 6-106 2-54, 4-69
scrolling text, 3-12 Set Record (SR) command, 5-60
Scroll Lock key, 3-19 set right margin, 4-120
SC (Space Constant), 6-122 Set Scroll Lock, 6-65
SC (Superscript) setting, 4-60—4-61 sets, file, 2-68, 2-69
SD (Save/Get Directory), 6-63 sets, footnote, 4-42
SD (Subscript) character mode, 4-24 setting
SE command, 3-52-3-57, 3-58-3-59 default drive, 2-5- 2-6
SEA command, 3-52-3*57, 3-58-3-59 footnote numbers, 4-55—4-58
format defaults, 6-18

I n d e x -23
 Index

setting (cont’d) SO file label, 5-119

for printing, 6-112 soft
index format (11-19), 5-58 date, 4-36
lines per page (PL), 4-102 hyphen, 4-19, 4-20
line spacing (LS), 4-149 return, 4-14
margins, 4-105, 4-120 time, 4-40
page length, 4-93-4-113 SO (Spell One W ord) function call, 3-
page width, 4-115-4-130 89, 6-68A
paragraph indent, 4-123 Sort command, 3-109
printer defaults, 6-4, 6-6, 6-8 sort file for indexes, 6-132
save-drive, 2-5- 2-6 sorting the directory, 2-24-2-25
tab stops, 4i-126-130 sorting the index, 5-51
table of contents format (T1-T9), Source, The. See Electronic Mail
5-57 space betw een footnotes. See FT
text alignment, 4-12 space betw een lines. See Vertical
orphan control, 4-110-4-113 Spacing
widow control, 4-110-4-113 space betw een words. See Micro­
SF (Set Footnote Number) command, justification
4-55— 4-58 Space Constant (SC), 6-122
SF (Space Factor), 6-122 space control, justification, 6-122
Shift-F2-# (append to Save/Get), Space Factor (SF), 6-122
3-46 space, non-breaking, 4-16
Shift-F4 (define by paragraph), 3-23 Spell command, 3-81, 3-90—3-92
Shift-F9 (turn on page/line no.), 3-8 SPELL.ERR, 3-92
Shift key, 3-20 Spelling Checker, 3-77—3-102
Shift-Tab (move back by tab), 4-120 Spell One Word (SO) function call,
SHOHYP, 6-37 3-89, 6-68A
shorthand, 3-77 Spell One Word function call, 3-89,
SHORT.HLP, 6-26 6-68A
Show Hyphenation (SHOHYP), 6-37 SPELL.OVR, 3-83, 3-88
Show Page-Line No. (SP), 6-64 SPELL.TMP, 3-92—3-95
Show Save/Get Key (SK), 6-63 SP file label, 5-119
Show Tabs (ST), 6-17B splitting the screen, 3-70
Show W indow Menu (SW), 6-65 SP (Set Page Number) command,
SH (Show Help), 6-62 4-69-4-71
SI (Set Insert Mode), 6-65 SP (Show Page-Line No.), 6-64
size limitation of defined text, 3-26, SQ (Sequential Pages), 2-54, 6-14
3-28, 3-31, B-5 SR (Set Record) command, 5-60
size of command field, 6-17A SS (Save Style), 4-136
size, window, 3-69-3-74 SS (Set Scroll Lock), 6-65
SK (Show Save/Get Key), 6-63 standard spelling dictionary, 3-78
SK (Sort Key), 6-14, 6-134 starting a new page on printout,
SL (Screen Length), 6-106 4-107
SM (Sum), 6-62 starting XyWrite, 2-32
snaking columns, 5-13 start of file, move cursor to, 3-12
SN (Set Numeric Lock), 6-65 start unbreakable block (BB), 4-108
SN (Snaking) comm and, 5-13 startup file, 6-136-140

I n d e x -24
 Index

STARTUP.INT, 6-136-140 SU (Save Subroutine), 5-84

stopping suspending XyWrite. See DOS
Change command, 3-63 command
comm and in progress SU (Substitution Table), 6-95
(Ctrl-Break), 3-63 SU (Subtract Value), 6-62
in DOS, 2-30 SU (Superscript) mode, 4-24
printer (KILTYP), 2-39 SV (Save String), 5-94
spelling checker, 3-81 SV (Save Defined Block), 6-63
XyWrite (Quit), 2-73-2-74 SW (Show Window Menu), 6-65
Store command, 2-48-2-49 switching windows, 3-17, 3-73
Store Save/Get keys to disk, 3-47 switching a toggle key, 3-18
ST (Store) command, 2-48-2-49 SX (Save Expression), 5-94
strikeover mode, 3-19 SY (Synonyms) function call, 3-106,
string operators 6-68A
in printer files, 6-89 synonyms, 3-103—3-106
in programming, 5-97 Synonyms (SY), 3-106, 6-68A
string search, 3-52 system commands, 2-2
string wildcard, 3-56 system messages, C-l-C-12
STRIP.PRN, 2-57, 6-111
STSGT (Store Save/Get Keys), 3-41,
3-47
ST (Show Tabs) setting, 6-17A
STSPELL command, 3-102 T
styles, 4-135-4-139
defining, 4-136
using, 4-138 T1 to T9 (Table of Contents)
subdirectories, viewing, 2-50 command, 5-57
subentries in indexes, 5-54 tabbing, 4-126-4-130
Subscript (SD) Mode, 4-24 Tab Character Control (TB), 6-15
Substitution Table (SU), 6-95 Table Column Left (TL), 6-59
Subtract Value (SU), 6-62 Table Column Right (TR), 6-59
subtraction, 3-34 Table Entry (TE), 6-59
in text, 3-34 Table of Contents & Index,
on Command Line, 3-34 5-43-5-66
SU file label, 5-119 creating, 5-46-5-51
Sum (SM), 6-62 extracting, 5-64
Superkey, F-3 formatting, 5-48
super keyboard, E-l from unnum bered text, 5-65
superscript footnote numbers, 4-62 tables, reference
suppress color, 6-108-6-109
footnotes, 4-54 character display modes, 4-24
index, 5-56 cursor keys, 3-13
page num bers in index, 5-53 function calls, 6-66
printing, 6-90 function keys, 3-16-3-17
section numbers in text, 5-65 page length commands, 4-98
table of contents, 5-56 table, keyboard, 6-45-6-68
TABLE 1 to TABLE9, 5-64

In d ex -2 5
 Index

Tab Reset (TR) command, 4-126, Today comm and, 4-36-4-39

4-128 toggle
tabs Command line/text, 3-17
changing tab setting, 4-127 Expanded/Normal Display, 3-17,
kinds of, 4-126-4-127 4-8
tab character, 4-130 Toggle Insert (TI) mode, 6-65
displaying, 6-17B toggle keys, 3-18-3-20
tab columns, 4-126 Caps Lock, 3-19
Tab key, 4-130 Insert/Overstrike, 3-19
tab m enu, 4-118 Numeric Lock, 3-19
tab ruler, 3-8, 4-119 Scroll Lock, 3-19
tab stops, 4-126-4-127 Shift Key, 3-20
Tab Set (TS) command, 4-126-4t-127 Toggle Normal/Expanded (TP), 6-63
tabular (column) defines, 3-25 Toggle Numeric Lock (TN), 6-65
TB (Tab Character) default setting, Toggle Overstrike (TO), 6-68B
6-15 Toggie Scroll Lock (TS), 6-65
Telenet. See Electronic Mail Toggle Word Overstrike (TW), 6-68A
TE (Table Entry), 6-59 tone of signals, 6-17B
temporary dictionary, 3-79 Top Margin (TP) command, 4-105
adding words to, 3-82 top of file, move cursor to, 3-12
temporary files, 6-10, B-5 Top of File (TF), 6 -6 l
temporary save to a Save/Get key, top of next page (PG) command,
3-42 4-106
terminate program (Quit), 2-73-2-74 TO (Toggle Overstrike), 6-68R
terminator strings, 6-96-6-97 TP (Toggle Normal/Expanded), 6-63
text area, 3-8 TP (Top Margin) command, 4-105
text, deletion of, 3-29 track edits. See Redlining
text entry in prevailing m ode (Ctrl-0), Tree command, 2-15
4-25 TR (Table Column Right), 6-59
text entry modes TR (Tab Reset) command, 4-128
character modes, 4-24 triangle, 4-6
toggle keys, 3-18 triple space printing, 4-149
text marker, 3-49 TS (Tab Set) comm and, 4-126-4-127
text markers (XI thru X9), 5-52 TS (Toggle Scroll Lock), 6-65
text strings, how to find (SEARCH), turn on page numbers, 3-17
3-52 tutorials, 1-3
text tables, 5-6 two screens, using, 3-68
TF (Ignore Top Margin), 6-15 TW G oggle Word Overstrike), 6-68A
'IF (Top of File), 6-61 TX1 to TX9 (Table of Contents
thesaurus, 3-103—3-106 Extraction) command, 5-64
tilde (S6), 6-62, 6-68 TYPE command, 2-51-2-56
time insertion, 4-40 TYPE @ (Chain Print, Printer),
TI (Toggle Insert Mode), 6-68A 2-68-2-71
TL (Table Column Left), 6-59 TYPE + (Mail Merge, Printer), 5-39
TM (Time) command, 4-40 TYPE %, 3-41
TMP files, B-5
TN (Toggle Numeric Lock), 6-65

In d e x -26
 Index

TYPEF command, 2-57-2-63 Use Width Table (UW), 6-86

TYPEF @ (Chain Print, File), 2-68 scaling factor in, 6-86
TYPEF + (Mail Merge, File), 5-39 user programming, 5-67-5-81
TYPES command, 2-64-2-67 user programming, advanced,
TYPES @ (Chain Print, Screen), 2-60 5-83-5-99
TYPES + (Mail Merge, Screen), 5-39 US (Use Substitution Table), 6-87
typewriter keys, 3-9 US (Use Style), 4-138
typing a file to printer, 2-51-2-56 UW (Use Width Table), 6-86

u V

UC (Uppercase) command, 4-28 VA (value of variable), 5-93, 6-6-6-7,

UD (Undelete), 6-61 6-16—6-17, 6-22
UL (Underline) command, 4-26, 6-15 verify, then change, 3-60
umlaut (S3), 6-62, 6-68 verily spelling, 3-78—3-102
unbreakable block, 4-108 version no. of XyWrite, 1-7
Undelete, 3-16, 3-30 Vertical Leading (VL) setting, 4-143,
size limitation, 3-31 6-85
Undelete (UD), 6-6l vertical scrolling, 3-12
Underline (S7), 6-62 vertical spacing, 4-141-4^150
underline, blinking, 4-24 Vertical Spacing (VS) table, 4-142,
underline character mode (MD UL), 6-92
4-24 vertical split screen, 3-68
underline cursor (overstrike mode), Vertical Unit (VU), 4-142-4-143, 6-15,
3-6, 3-19 6-93
underline justification, 6-122 VL, 4-143, 6-85
underline, printing in, 4-26 VS, 4-142, 6-92
undo. See Undelete VU, 4-143, 6-93
unique filenames, 2-43
unjustified printing (NJ), 4-13
unload
file from memory, 5-115, 5-118
Spelling Checker, 5-113 w
temporary dictionary, 5-116
Unload command, 5-118
unnumbered footnotes, 4-58 WA (Wild Alphanumeric), 6-64
Unpad Spaces (UP), 6-6l Wait command, 2-72
up arrow, 1-5 WB (Window Border Characters),
up, move cursor, 3-13 6-15
Uppercase (UC) command, 4-28 WD (Widow) command,
uppercase, automatic, 4-30 4-110-4-113
UP (Unpad Spaces), 6-61 WD (Width Table), 6-91
Use Style (US), 4-138 WC (Word Count) command,
3-107—3-108

I n d e x 27
 Index

WCB (Word Count Back) command, write to disk, continue (Save), 2-45
3-107—3-108 writing a file to the printer (TYPE),
WG (Normal Mode), 6-63 2-51
what’s on a disk? See DIR WS (Whole Space Justification), 6-l6
Whole-Space Justification (WS), 6-16 WS (Wild Separator), 6-64
Width Table (WD), 6-91 WW (Wild String), 6-64
Widow (WD) command, WX (Wild Any Character), 6-64
4-110-4-113
Wild Alphanumeric (WA), 6-64
Wild Any Character (WX), 6-64
wildcard characters (directories),
2-21 X
wildcard characters (find), 2-38
wildcard characters (help), 6-29
wildcard characters (searches), 3-56 XI to X9 (Text Marker) command,
Wild Letter (WL), 6-64 5-52
Wild Number (WN), 6-64 XC (Execute), 6-59
Wild Separator (WS), 6-64 XD (Cancel Define), 6-61
Wild String (WW), 6-64 XP (Expanded Mode), 6-63
window 1 to 9 (# 1 to #9), 6-65 XYKBD.COM, F-2
Window Border Characters (WB), XyWrite
6-15 documentation, 1-2-1-3
Window command, 3-74 entering, 2-32—2-33
windows, 3-67-3-76 exiting, 2-73
active, 3-68, 3-75 features, 1-1
automatic new, 3-75 requirements, 1-6
changing size, 3-71
closing, 3-75
displaying menu, 3-68
moving to another, 3-72, 3-73
opening another, 3-70 Y
removing, 3-75
switching between, 3-73
window menu, 3-70 YD (Cancel C>efine, variation), 6-6l
window numbers, 3-68 year insertion, 3-36- 3-39
WL (Wild Letter), 6-64
WN (Wild Number), 6-64
word by word, move cursor, 3-13
word count, 3-107—3-108
word define, 3-23 2
word, deleting by, 3-30
Word Overstrike (WO), 6-17B, 6-104
WORD.OVR, 3-103 zip left cursor, 3-13
word separators, 3-31 zip right cursor, 3-13
WO (Word Overstrike), 6-104 zip to beginning of file, 3-13
write file to disk (Store), 2-48 zip to end of file, 3-13

In d e x -2 8
 Index

S p ecial C haracters

*. See asterisk #1 to #9 (Window #1 to #9), 6-57

!, 5-97 &0 to &9, 5-71, 5-72, 5-81, 5-91
/, 3-34-3-35, 5-97 @0 to @9, 6-55
%, 3-41 $0 to $9 (H elp Frames), 6-29, 6-62
+, 3-34, 5-97
3-34, 5-97 $BD, 6-17C
as comm ent symbol, 6-82 $DT, 6-17
<, 5-97, 6-89 $FI, 6-16
>, 5-97, 6-89 $FP, 6-16
o , 5-97 $FS, 6-17
<=, 5-97 $LN, 6-17
>-, 5-97 $ME, 6-16
3-34, 6-40, 6-44, 6-79 $PA, 6-16
—, 5-97 $PG, 6-16
?, $££ question mark $WC, 6-17C
@, (batch printing), 2-68 $WN, 6-16
&A to &Z, 5-71, 5-72, 5-81, 5-91 $ws, 6-16
@A to @Z (Save/Get A to Z), 6-55
$A to $Z, 6-29
@CNV, 5-97
©NOT, 5-97
@SIZ, 5-97
@UPR, 5-97
@XOR, 5-97

In d e x -29